A new history of China containing a description of the most considerable particulars of that vast empire / written by Gabriel Magaillans, of the Society of Jesus ... ; done out of French.
         Doze excelências da China. English
         Magalhães, Gabriel de, 1609-1677.
      
       
         
           1688
        
      
       Approx. 580 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 172 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2004-03 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A51176
         Wing M247
         ESTC R12530
         12254622
         ocm 12254622
         57312
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A51176)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 57312)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 154:12)
      
       
         
           
             A new history of China containing a description of the most considerable particulars of that vast empire / written by Gabriel Magaillans, of the Society of Jesus ... ; done out of French.
             Doze excelências da China. English
             Magalhães, Gabriel de, 1609-1677.
          
           [24], 352 p., 1 folded leaf of plates : ill.
           
             Printed for Thomas Newborough ...,
             London :
             1688.
          
           
             Translation of: Doze excelências da China.
             Reproduction of original in British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           China -- Description and travel.
        
      
    
     
        2003-09 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2003-09 Apex CoVantage
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2003-10 Rina Kor
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2003-10 Rina Kor
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2003-12 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           A
           NEW
           HISTORY
           OF
           CHINA
           ,
           Containing
           a
           DESCRIPTION
           OF
           THE
           Most
           Considerable
           Particulars
           OF
           THAT
           
             Uast
             Empire
          
           .
        
         
           Written
           by
           
             Gabriel
             Magaillans
          
           ,
           of
           the
           Society
           of
           Iesus
           ,
           Missionary
           Apostolick
           .
        
         
           Done
           out
           of
           French.
           
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           for
           
             Thomas
             Newborough
          
           ,
           at
           the
           
             Golden
             Ball
          
           ,
           in
           
             S.
             Paul's
             Church-Yard
          
           ,
           1688.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           THE
           PREFACE
           .
        
         
           FOR
           these
           Hundred
           Years
           last
           past
           ,
           there
           have
           been
           Printed
           such
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Relations
           of
           China
           ,
           that
           they
           who
           have
           read
           them
           ,
           will
           perhaps
           believe
           too
           readily
           that
           they
           can
           receive
           no
           New
           Information
           from
           this
           .
           However
           ,
           my
           Confidence
           is
           such
           ,
           that
           if
           they
           will
           but
           take
           the
           Pains
           to
           read
           it
           ,
           they
           will
           hardly
           find
           therein
           any
           thing
           which
           they
           have
           read
           before
           in
           others
           .
        
         
           China
           is
           a
           Country
           so
           Vast
           ,
           so
           Rich
           ,
           so
           Fertile
           ,
           and
           so
           Temperate
           ;
           the
           Multitude
           of
           the
           People
           so
           infinite
           ,
           their
           Industry
           in
           Manufacture
           ,
           and
           their
           Policy
           in
           Government
           so
           extraordinary
           ,
           that
           it
           may
           be
           truly
           said
           ,
           that
           ever
           since
           the
           undertaking
           of
           Long
           Voyages
           ,
           there
           was
           never
           any
           Discovery
           made
           ,
           that
           might
           stand
           in
           Competition
           with
           this
           Kingdom
           .
           These
           are
           things
           known
           to
           all
           the
           World
           ;
           and
           so
           there
           needs
           not
           much
           more
           to
           be
           said
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           Learned
           apprehensive
           ,
           that
           the
           Subject
           is
           large
           enough
           to
           fill
           many
           more
           Volumes
           then
           yet
           are
           extant
           ,
           
           and
           to
           employ
           the
           most
           able
           and
           judicious
           Writers
           .
        
         
           To
           this
           it
           might
           be
           added
           ,
           That
           among
           all
           the
           great
           numbers
           of
           Relations
           that
           have
           been
           Printed
           upon
           this
           Subject
           ,
           there
           are
           few
           that
           merit
           Public
           Reputation
           ,
           or
           that
           have
           been
           written
           with
           a
           design
           to
           inform
           us
           of
           the
           most
           considerable
           Particulars
           of
           that
           Vast
           Empire
           .
           The
           Relation
           of
           
             Ferdinand
             Mendez
             Pinto
          
           ,
           in
           all
           other
           places
           ,
           where
           he
           does
           not
           speak
           of
           the
           Portugal
           Affairs
           ,
           is
           stuft
           with
           Fables
           and
           
           Chimera's
           ,
           which
           he
           has
           invented
           with
           a
           most
           wonderful
           fertility
           of
           Imagination
           :
           And
           which
           he
           has
           season'd
           with
           so
           many
           Circumstances
           and
           studied
           Discourses
           to
           persuade
           and
           prepare
           the
           belief
           of
           his
           Reader
           ,
           that
           there
           are
           several
           Persons
           who
           take
           them
           for
           real
           Truths
           .
           But
           those
           are
           Errors
           now
           not
           at
           all
           to
           be
           regarded
           ,
           seeing
           that
           the
           most
           part
           of
           the
           Nations
           of
           Europe
           have
           given
           us
           very
           exact
           and
           sincere
           Descriptions
           of
           China
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           Countries
           of
           which
           that
           Author
           speaks
           .
        
         
           For
           Example
           :
           He
           says
           that
           the
           City
           of
           
             Nan
             Kim
          
           ,
           which
           is
           known
           to
           be
           seated
           in
           a
           smooth
           and
           level
           Plain
           ,
           is
           situated
           upon
           a
           Mountain
           :
           That
           the
           River
           of
           Kiam
           ,
           which
           runs
           through
           it
           ,
           and
           is
           call'd
           Barampina
           ,
           comes
           from
           
             Pe
             kim
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Greater
           Tartary
           :
           That
           China
           contains
           Thirty
           two
           Kingdoms
           :
           That
           the
           City
           of
           
             Pe
             kim
          
           is
           Thirty
           large
           
           Leagues
           in
           compass
           ,
           whereas
           it
           is
           not
           above
           Four
           in
           circuit
           ,
           or
           Five
           at
           most
           ,
           taking
           in
           the
           New
           City
           :
           That
           it
           has
           Three
           hundred
           and
           Sixty
           Gates
           :
           An
           Hundred
           and
           Twenty
           Canals
           ,
           of
           Three
           Fathom
           deep
           ,
           and
           Twelve
           broad
           ;
           and
           Eighteen
           hundred
           Bridges
           of
           Free-stone
           ;
           whereas
           there
           are
           only
           Nine
           Gates
           ,
           and
           one
           small
           River
           that
           belongs
           to
           it
           :
           That
           in
           one
           single
           Prison
           ,
           of
           two
           Leagues
           square
           ,
           there
           are
           kept
           Three
           hundred
           Thousand
           Prisoners
           ,
           appointed
           still
           for
           the
           Repair
           of
           the
           Great
           Wall
           :
           That
           there
           are
           other
           Buildings
           also
           to
           be
           seen
           ,
           as
           wonderful
           or
           as
           extravagant
           ;
           and
           one
           among
           the
           rest
           of
           a
           League
           in
           circuit
           ,
           built
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           the
           pretended
           River
           of
           Barampina
           ,
           &c.
           
           That
           the
           King
           of
           Tartary
           came
           and
           sat
           down
           before
           Pekim
           ,
           with
           Twelve
           hundred
           Thousand
           Foot
           ,
           Six
           hundred
           Thousand
           Horse
           ,
           Seventeen
           thousand
           Ships
           ,
           and
           Fourscore
           Thousand
           Rhinoceroces
           that
           carry'd
           the
           Baggage
           belonging
           to
           the
           Army
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           same
           King
           lost
           in
           six
           Months
           and
           a
           half
           ,
           above
           Seven
           hundred
           and
           fifty
           Thousand
           Men.
           I
           could
           give
           an
           account
           of
           several
           other
           of
           his
           Fables
           ,
           particularly
           of
           what
           he
           tells
           us
           of
           Two
           pretended
           Emperors
           ,
           both
           of
           equal
           Puissance
           ,
           Siammon
           and
           Calaminban
           ;
           the
           first
           of
           which
           had
           in
           his
           Empire
           Seven
           hundred
           Provinces
           ,
           Fifty
           thousand
           Elephants
           ,
           and
           Eighteen
           hundred
           and
           fifty
           Thousand
           
           Soldiers
           in
           continual
           Pay
           ;
           and
           many
           other
           things
           ,
           which
           none
           but
           this
           Author
           ever
           heard
           of
           .
           But
           I
           shall
           forbear
           to
           make
           any
           longer
           stop
           upon
           these
           Fables
           and
           Stories
           ,
           which
           there
           is
           no
           Man
           but
           will
           be
           asham'd
           to
           believe
           ,
           more
           especially
           since
           there
           is
           not
           the
           least
           shadow
           of
           Truth
           in
           any
           thing
           that
           he
           says
           of
           the
           Island
           of
           Calempluy
           ,
           or
           in
           what
           he
           reports
           concerning
           the
           Language
           ,
           Names
           ,
           Manners
           and
           Government
           of
           the
           Chineses
           .
        
         
           The
           Relation
           of
           
             F.
             Gonzalez
             de
             Mendoza
          
           is
           true
           and
           sincere
           ,
           as
           to
           what
           he
           recounts
           of
           the
           the
           Travels
           of
           
             Martin
             de
             Harrada
          
           ,
           and
           
             Ierome
             Marin
          
           into
           China
           .
           But
           both
           those
           two
           Fathers
           ,
           and
           the
           Author
           himself
           ,
           listen'd
           with
           too
           much
           credulity
           to
           the
           vaunting
           Relations
           which
           the
           Chineses
           made
           of
           the
           Grandeur
           of
           their
           Empire
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           seen
           by
           that
           which
           follows
           .
           For
           he
           allows
           China
           to
           be
           Eighteen
           hundred
           Leagues
           in
           length
           ,
           tho'
           all
           the
           World
           knows
           that
           it
           lies
           within
           Twenty
           two
           or
           Twenty
           three
           Degeees
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           not
           above
           Four
           hundred
           and
           fifty
           Leagues
           in
           length
           .
           He
           Alters
           and
           changes
           the
           Names
           of
           the
           Provinces
           in
           such
           a
           manner
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           almost
           impossible
           to
           know
           them
           again
           .
           He
           makes
           the
           City
           of
           
             Pe
             Kim
          
           as
           big
           as
           
             Ferdinand
             Mendez
             Pinto
          
           does
           ,
           assuring
           us
           in
           two
           Places
           of
           his
           Relation
           ,
           that
           a
           Man
           mounted
           upon
           a
           good
           Horse
           ,
           and
           riding
           from
           Morning
           till
           Night
           ,
           will
           have
           
           much
           adoe
           to
           cross
           the
           City
           within
           the
           Walls
           ;
           for
           the
           Suburbs
           are
           not
           included
           in
           this
           Journey
           ,
           which
           take
           up
           altogether
           as
           much
           Ground
           :
           To
           which
           he
           adds
           ,
           That
           the
           Chineses
           also
           report
           it
           to
           be
           larger
           .
           He
           says
           moreover
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           single
           Province
           of
           Paguia
           ,
           which
           must
           certainly
           be
           Pekim
           ,
           there
           are
           Two
           Millions
           ,
           Five
           hundred
           and
           fifty
           Thousand
           Soldiers
           ;
           and
           within
           the
           whole
           Kingdom
           Five
           Millions
           ,
           Eight
           hundred
           forty
           six
           Thousand
           five
           Hundred
           Foot
           ,
           and
           Nine
           Hundred
           Forty
           eight
           Thousand
           Three
           Hundred
           and
           Fifty
           Horse
           .
        
         
           
             Pedro
             Cubero
             Sebastian
          
           ,
           in
           his
           Voyage
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           Printed
           at
           Naples
           in
           1682.
           says
           almost
           the
           same
           things
           .
           But
           that
           is
           nothing
           to
           be
           wonder'd
           at
           ;
           for
           that
           besides
           that
           he
           often
           mistakes
           in
           speaking
           of
           the
           most
           Known
           Countries
           of
           Europe
           ,
           it
           is
           apparent
           that
           he
           has
           copy'd
           what
           he
           speaks
           of
           China
           from
           the
           Authors
           before
           mention'd
           .
        
         
           I
           could
           cite
           several
           other
           Relations
           of
           China
           ,
           the
           Authors
           of
           which
           appear
           to
           have
           been
           very
           much
           mis-inform'd
           in
           several
           things
           .
           But
           besides
           that
           such
           a
           Rehersal
           would
           be
           both
           troublesom
           and
           unprofitable
           ,
           we
           have
           several
           others
           that
           make
           us
           amends
           for
           the
           Imperfections
           of
           the
           other
           .
           Among
           the
           rest
           ,
           the
           Relations
           which
           seem
           to
           me
           most
           worthy
           of
           Credit
           and
           Esteem
           ,
           are
           those
           of
           Father
           Trigaut
           ,
           the
           Annual
           Letters
           of
           China
           ;
           the
           Relations
           of
           Father
           Semedo
           ,
           Father
           Martini
           ,
           
           and
           the
           Modern
           Ones
           of
           Father
           
             Adam
             Schall
          
           ,
           Father
           Greslon
           ,
           Father
           Rougemont
           ,
           Father
           Couplet
           ,
           R.
           P.
           of
           Orleance
           ,
           and
           some
           others
           .
        
         
           The
           Relation
           of
           Father
           Trigau●…
           ,
           was
           the
           first
           that
           ever
           gave
           us
           any
           exact
           Information
           of
           China
           .
           But
           in
           regard
           his
           Principal
           design
           was
           to
           give
           an
           account
           of
           the
           Origiginal
           of
           the
           Missions
           of
           the
           Society
           of
           Jesus
           ,
           in
           that
           vast
           Country
           ,
           and
           of
           their
           Settlement
           by
           Father
           
             Matthew
             Ricci
          
           ;
           '
           he
           never
           speaks
           but
           occasionally
           of
           the
           Affairs
           of
           China
           .
           Father
           Semedo
           indeed
           applies
           himself
           wholly
           to
           the
           Description
           of
           the
           Country
           ,
           in
           the
           First
           Part
           of
           his
           Relation
           ,
           wherein
           he
           has
           been
           very
           fortunate
           .
           Father
           Couplet
           in
           his
           Chronology
           ,
           and
           Father
           Martini
           in
           his
           First
           Decad
           of
           the
           History
           of
           China
           ,
           and
           his
           Relation
           of
           the
           Tartar
           War
           ,
           has
           publisht
           almost
           a
           compleat
           Succession
           of
           the
           History
           of
           that
           Kingdom
           .
           The
           same
           Father
           Martini
           in
           his
           Atlas
           ,
           has
           made
           a
           Geographical
           Description
           of
           it
           ,
           so
           compleat
           and
           full
           ,
           that
           there
           hardly
           remains
           any
           thing
           more
           for
           us
           to
           desire
           .
           And
           lastly
           ,
           the
           Annual
           Letters
           and
           other
           Pieces
           which
           I
           have
           cited
           ,
           giving
           an
           Account
           of
           the
           various
           Successes
           of
           the
           Missions
           which
           they
           undertook
           ,
           inform
           us
           of
           several
           Notable
           and
           Curious
           Particulars
           .
           But
           tho'
           these
           Authors
           are
           every
           one
           worthy
           to
           be
           esteem'd
           and
           valu'd
           :
           Certain
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           we
           wanted
           still
           a
           very
           great
           number
           of
           Considerable
           
           Particulars
           ,
           whither
           it
           were
           ,
           that
           the
           Subject
           was
           too
           Copious
           to
           be
           exhausted
           ,
           or
           that
           those
           other
           designs
           which
           they
           proposed
           to
           themselves
           ,
           diverted
           their
           particular
           Industries
           .
           However
           it
           were
           ,
           it
           is
           apparent
           ,
           that
           Father
           ,
           Magaillans
           had
           it
           in
           his
           thoughts
           to
           have
           supply'd
           all
           the
           Defects
           which
           he
           found
           in
           those
           other
           Pieces
           ,
           and
           whatever
           was
           wanting
           that
           might
           give
           us
           a
           perfect
           knowledge
           of
           China
           .
           For
           they
           who
           read
           this
           Relation
           ,
           will
           find
           that
           the
           Matters
           therein
           contain'd
           ,
           have
           either
           been
           wholly
           omitted
           by
           all
           other
           Authors
           ,
           or
           else
           but
           very
           slightly
           touch'd
           ;
           and
           therefore
           in
           regard
           they
           are
           things
           of
           great
           Curiosity
           ,
           I
           make
           no
           question
           but
           this
           Translation
           will
           be
           grateful
           to
           the
           more
           exact
           Part
           of
           the
           Learned
           World.
           
        
         
           In
           a
           word
           ,
           it
           seems
           to
           me
           to
           have
           all
           those
           Advantages
           that
           suffice
           to
           recommend
           it
           to
           the
           Reader
           .
           The
           Matter
           is
           of
           great
           consequence
           ,
           and
           becoming
           the
           Curiosity
           of
           all
           those
           that
           desire
           to
           know
           remote
           Countries
           ,
           since
           it
           has
           describ'd
           with
           an
           extraordinary
           Exactness
           ,
           and
           Part
           by
           Part
           ,
           what
           is
           most
           Considerable
           in
           that
           same
           Famous
           Empire
           of
           China
           .
           There
           you
           shall
           find
           it
           determin'd
           by
           evident
           Proofs
           ,
           that
           the
           Countries
           of
           Catay
           and
           Mangi
           are
           comprehended
           in
           that
           Spacious
           Kingdom
           .
           It
           discourses
           at
           large
           of
           the
           Chinese
           Language
           ;
           of
           the
           Letters
           and
           
           their
           Composition
           ,
           of
           the
           Words
           which
           they
           comprehend
           ,
           of
           the
           Excellency
           of
           the
           Language
           ,
           and
           how
           easie
           a
           thing
           it
           is
           to
           attain
           it
           ;
           which
           gives
           us
           a
           far
           different
           Idea
           of
           it
           ,
           from
           whatever
           we
           have
           had
           till
           now
           .
           Of
           the
           Chinese
           Books
           ,
           and
           their
           Antiquity
           ;
           and
           the
           great
           number
           of
           them
           upon
           all
           sorts
           of
           Subjects
           .
           Of
           the
           Antiquity
           of
           their
           Kingdom
           and
           their
           Kings
           .
           Of
           the
           Certain
           and
           Successive
           Continuance
           of
           the
           Chinese
           Chronology
           from
           the
           next
           Ages
           to
           the
           Deluge
           .
           It
           shews
           us
           the
           Industry
           of
           the
           Chineses
           in
           many
           things
           ,
           their
           wonderful
           Form
           of
           Government
           ,
           and
           all
           their
           different
           Tribunals
           ,
           with
           a
           world
           of
           other
           Circumstances
           .
           There
           you
           find
           an
           exact
           Acount
           of
           all
           their
           Public
           Works
           ,
           and
           a
           particular
           Description
           of
           some
           Magnificent
           Bridges
           ,
           the
           Great
           Canal
           ,
           the
           City
           of
           
             Pe
             Kim
          
           ,
           their
           most
           Sumptuous
           Houses
           ,
           their
           Principal
           Temples
           ,
           and
           the
           Vast
           and
           Spacious
           Palace
           of
           the
           Emperor
           ,
           which
           comprehends
           within
           it
           several
           others
           ,
           sufficient
           to
           make
           us
           admire
           their
           Architecture
           ,
           and
           the
           Form
           and
           Contrivance
           of
           their
           Buildings
           .
           Lastly
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           Description
           of
           a
           certain
           sort
           of
           Wax
           ,
           which
           is
           not
           any
           where
           else
           to
           be
           found
           ;
           of
           the
           Riches
           of
           China
           ,
           of
           the
           Emperor's
           Revenues
           ,
           of
           some
           Remarkable
           Ceremonies
           ;
           and
           of
           so
           many
           other
           Particulars
           ,
           which
           it
           would
           be
           here
           too
           tedious
           a
           trouble
           to
           repeat
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Author
           was
           well
           inform'd
           of
           all
           those
           things
           ,
           of
           which
           he
           gives
           us
           an
           Account
           .
           He
           had
           travell'd
           over
           all
           the
           Chiefest
           Parts
           of
           China
           ,
           from
           the
           Year
           1640.
           to
           1648.
           at
           what
           time
           he
           was
           carry'd
           to
           
             Pe
             Kim
          
           ,
           where
           he
           stay'd
           Nine
           and
           Twenty
           Years
           at
           the
           Court
           ;
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           till
           his
           Death
           ,
           which
           happen'd
           in
           the
           Year
           1677.
           without
           stirring
           from
           thence
           ,
           unless
           it
           were
           once
           that
           he
           was
           sent
           to
           Macao
           by
           the
           Command
           of
           the
           Emperor
           .
           So
           long
           and
           constant
           a
           Residence
           ,
           the
           Knowledge
           of
           the
           Language
           and
           Books
           ,
           his
           Conversation
           with
           Persons
           the
           most
           Considerable
           in
           the
           Kingdom
           ,
           the
           Liberty
           which
           he
           had
           to
           enter
           into
           the
           Palace
           ;
           the
           Choice
           which
           he
           made
           of
           the
           Matters
           and
           Particulars
           of
           which
           he
           gives
           an
           Account
           ,
           will
           easily
           confirm
           us
           that
           he
           had
           a
           perfect
           Knowledge
           of
           the
           things
           of
           which
           he
           gives
           us
           the
           Relation
           .
           So
           that
           altho'
           the
           Description
           which
           he
           gives
           us
           of
           the
           Emperor's
           Palace
           ,
           does
           not
           agree
           with
           that
           which
           we
           find
           in
           the
           Dutch
           Embassie
           to
           China
           ,
           yet
           there
           is
           all
           the
           Reason
           of
           the
           World
           to
           prefer
           the
           Testimony
           of
           this
           Author
           ,
           before
           that
           Relation
           .
        
         
           The
           Sincerity
           also
           and
           Reality
           of
           Father
           Magaillans
           farther
           appear
           by
           this
           ,
           that
           he
           makes
           no
           scruple
           to
           Correct
           Father
           Martini
           ,
           where
           he
           knows
           him
           to
           be
           in
           an
           Error
           .
           Tho
           in
           other
           places
           he
           confirms
           by
           his
           Testimony
           the
           Esteem
           which
           all
           Europe
           had
           for
           
           the
           Works
           of
           that
           Father
           ;
           and
           for
           that
           he
           speaks
           with
           Moderation
           of
           many
           other
           things
           where
           the
           Authors
           have
           strech'd
           too
           far
           in
           their
           Relations
           .
        
         
           Having
           thus
           far
           given
           an
           Account
           of
           the
           Worth
           and
           Merit
           of
           this
           Relation
           ,
           it
           will
           not
           be
           improper
           to
           tell
           the
           Reader
           how
           it
           fell
           into
           my
           Hands
           .
           It
           is
           now
           about
           Three
           Years
           since
           ,
           that
           F.
           Couplet
           coming
           to
           Rome
           in
           the
           Quality
           of
           Procurator
           for
           the
           Missions
           of
           China
           ,
           had
           several
           Occasions
           to
           wait
           upon
           Cardinal
           
             d'
             Estrees
          
           ,
           where
           I
           had
           the
           Honour
           to
           be
           at
           that
           time
           .
           His
           Eminency
           ask'd
           him
           several
           curious
           Questions
           concerning
           China
           ,
           but
           chiefly
           concerning
           
             Pe
             Kim
          
           ,
           the
           Emperors
           Court
           ,
           and
           the
           Government
           and
           Policy
           of
           that
           Great
           Kingdom
           .
           To
           which
           the
           Father
           gave
           His
           Eminency
           all
           the
           Satisfaction
           he
           could
           desire
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           he
           knew
           .
           But
           in
           regard
           he
           had
           never
           been
           but
           once
           at
           
             Pe
             Kim
          
           ,
           when
           he
           was
           carry'd
           Prisoner
           thither
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           late
           Persecution
           ,
           he
           answer'd
           the
           Cardinal
           with
           his
           usual
           sincerity
           ,
           That
           he
           was
           not
           so
           well
           inform'd
           as
           to
           those
           other
           particular
           Questions
           which
           His
           Eminency
           put
           to
           him
           ;
           but
           that
           he
           had
           brought
           out
           of
           China
           a
           Portuguese
           Manuscript
           ,
           written
           by
           F.
           
             Gabriel
             de
             Magaillans
          
           ,
           where
           he
           would
           find
           the
           Plenary
           Satisfaction
           of
           all
           that
           he
           desir'd
           to
           know
           ;
           and
           at
           the
           same
           time
           presented
           the
           Manuscript
           to
           His
           Eminency
           ,
           who
           having
           
           read
           it
           over
           with
           great
           delight
           ,
           gave
           it
           into
           my
           Hands
           upon
           a
           proffer
           which
           I
           made
           him
           to
           Translate
           it
           .
        
         
           However
           ,
           I
           found
           it
           a
           more
           Difficult
           Task
           then
           I
           imagin'd
           ;
           for
           tho
           Father
           de
           Magaillan's
           had
           deliver'd
           it
           fairly
           written
           ,
           yet
           by
           an
           Unfortunate
           Accident
           ,
           it
           hapn'd
           to
           be
           half
           Burnt
           ;
           so
           that
           I
           was
           forc'd
           to
           have
           recourse
           to
           the
           Confus'd
           Original
           ,
           which
           had
           been
           luckily
           preserv'd
           ,
           which
           being
           the
           greatest
           part
           writt'n
           in
           loose
           Papers
           ,
           it
           requir'd
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           time
           to
           place
           them
           in
           order
           ,
           and
           find
           out
           the
           connections
           .
        
         
           The
           Author
           had
           entitl'd
           his
           Work
           ,
           
             The
             Twelve
             Excellencies
             of
          
           China
           :
           But
           this
           Title
           seem'd
           to
           me
           to
           be
           too
           much
           affected
           ,
           and
           not
           answerable
           to
           the
           Subject
           ;
           for
           it
           was
           not
           limited
           to
           twelve
           Excellencies
           of
           China
           ,
           in
           regard
           it
           contain'd
           a
           far
           greater
           Number
           ,
           as
           they
           that
           read
           the
           whole
           will
           easily
           find
           .
           Besides
           that
           ,
           the
           Division
           which
           he
           had
           made
           was
           not
           proportionable
           to
           the
           Matter
           ,
           there
           being
           some
           of
           those
           Excellencies
           which
           did
           not
           take
           up
           a
           Page
           or
           two
           ,
           and
           others
           that
           filled
           up
           above
           thirty
           or
           forty
           :
           So
           that
           I
           thought
           it
           more
           proper
           to
           divide
           the
           Relation
           into
           one
           and
           twenty
           Chapters
           ,
           and
           to
           give
           them
           Titles
           answerable
           to
           the
           Matters
           therein
           contain'd
           .
           In
           other
           things
           I
           have
           not
           swerv'd
           at
           all
           from
           the
           Method
           and
           Sense
           
           of
           my
           Author
           ;
           neither
           have
           I
           made
           the
           least
           Alteration
           ;
           only
           that
           I
           might
           conform
           to
           the
           Style
           and
           Genius
           of
           our
           Language
           ,
           I
           have
           not
           ty'd
           my self
           so
           Strictly
           and
           Literally
           to
           his
           Expressions
           :
           and
           by
           what
           I
           have
           said
           ,
           you
           may
           be
           confident
           that
           this
           Relation
           has
           never
           appear'd
           in
           any
           other
           Language
           ,
           nor
           was
           ever
           Printed
           before
           ,
           and
           by
           consequence
           that
           it
           is
           altogether
           New.
           
        
         
           I
           also
           observ'd
           in
           Reading
           ▪
           That
           there
           were
           several
           things
           which
           did
           not
           seem
           to
           me
           to
           be
           sufficiently
           explain'd
           ,
           for
           the
           understanding
           of
           such
           as
           have
           not
           a
           perfect
           Knowledge
           of
           China
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           Description
           of
           
             Pe
             kim
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Emperors
           Palace
           might
           seem
           obscure
           to
           many
           People
           ;
           I
           have
           therefore
           endeavour'd
           to
           remedy
           the
           first
           of
           these
           two
           Inconveniences
           by
           Notes
           in
           Italick
           ,
           which
           I
           have
           plac'd
           at
           the
           end
           of
           the
           Chapters
           ,
           because
           I
           would
           not
           crowd
           the
           Margins
           nor
           interrupt
           the
           Text
           ,
           but
           preserve
           the
           Original
           in
           its
           Purity
           and
           Credit
           ,
           and
           leave
           the
           Reader
           at
           liberty
           to
           make
           use
           of
           them
           or
           let
           them
           alone
           .
           For
           remedy
           of
           the
           Second
           Inconvenience
           ,
           I
           have
           made
           a
           Draught
           of
           the
           City
           of
           
             Pe
             kim
          
           and
           the
           Palace
           ,
           collecting
           together
           with
           great
           Care
           what
           the
           Author
           had
           spoken
           dispersedly
           in
           several
           parts
           of
           his
           Relation
           .
           Mounsieur
           Peyronett
           an
           Ingenier
           of
           good
           repute
           ,
           drew
           out
           the
           Draught
           at
           my
           Request
           fair
           upon
           Paper
           ,
           to
           which
           I
           
           added
           the
           Explanations
           of
           every
           thing
           ,
           with
           Letters
           which
           relate
           to
           others
           that
           are
           Engrav'd
           upon
           the
           Plane
           .
        
         
           And
           further
           ,
           to
           satisfie
           entirely
           the
           Curiosity
           of
           the
           Reader
           ,
           and
           to
           give
           more
           Reputation
           to
           the
           Book
           ,
           I
           have
           added
           the
           Life
           of
           Father
           Magaillans
           ,
           who
           was
           the
           Author
           ,
           which
           I
           was
           the
           rather
           inclin'd
           to
           do
           ,
           because
           it
           seems
           to
           me
           to
           be
           but
           very
           short
           and
           modestly
           written
           .
           It
           was
           writ
           by
           Father
           
             Lewis
             Buglio
          
           a
           Cicilian
           ,
           and
           Father
           
           Magaillan's
           inseparable
           Companion
           ,
           from
           the
           Year
           1640
           ,
           to
           the
           Year
           1677
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           for
           near
           the
           space
           of
           thirty
           seven
           Years
           together
           .
           Father
           Buglio
           dy'd
           in
           the
           Year
           1682
           ,
           in
           great
           Reputation
           for
           his
           Vertue
           and
           Learning
           ;
           so
           that
           the
           Care
           which
           he
           has
           tak'n
           to
           Write
           the
           Life
           of
           our
           Author
           ,
           is
           a
           double
           Approbation
           of
           his
           Work.
           
        
         
           I
           must
           here
           take
           notice
           by
           the
           way
           ,
           that
           I
           have
           not
           observ'd
           the
           Portuguese
           Orthography
           ,
           in
           spelling
           the
           Name
           of
           our
           Author
           ;
           for
           the
           Portugueses
           write
           it
           after
           this
           manner
           ,
           Magalhanes
           :
           But
           in
           regard
           few
           People
           in
           France
           can
           so
           pronounce
           it
           ,
           I
           alter'd
           it
           into
           Magaillans
           ,
           which
           the
           French
           pronounce
           not
           much
           different
           from
           the
           Portuguese
           pronunciation
           of
           Magalhanes
           .
           This
           Father
           was
           of
           the
           same
           Family
           of
           the
           famous
           
             Ferdinand
             de
             Magaillans
          
           ,
           who
           was
           called
           by
           the
           Corruption
           of
           Languages
           Magellan
           ,
           and
           was
           the
           
           first
           that
           discover'd
           the
           
             Magellanick
             Straits
          
           ,
           in
           the
           extreme
           parts
           of
           the
           
             Southern
             America
          
           .
           I
           have
           also
           made
           use
           of
           the
           Word
           Mandarin
           or
           Mandarim
           ,
           which
           the
           Portuguese
           make
           use
           of
           to
           signifie
           the
           Officers
           and
           Magistrates
           of
           the
           Kingdoms
           of
           
             Siam
             ,
             Cochinchina
             ,
             Tum
             kim
          
           and
           China
           ;
           as
           well
           for
           that
           all
           the
           other
           Relations
           make
           use
           of
           the
           Word
           ,
           as
           also
           for
           that
           it
           is
           a
           Word
           well
           known
           in
           France
           ,
           ever
           since
           the
           coming
           thither
           of
           the
           Mandarins
           of
           Siam
           :
           The
           Word
           is
           deriv'd
           from
           Mandar
           ,
           to
           command
           ,
           and
           comprehends
           all
           sorts
           of
           Officers
           and
           Magistrates
           .
        
         
           This
           remark
           obliges
           me
           to
           add
           another
           upon
           the
           Pronunciation
           of
           the
           Chinese
           Words
           and
           Letters
           ,
           for
           the
           better
           understanding
           how
           to
           pronounce
           them
           ,
           in
           imitation
           of
           the
           Chineses
           .
           Their
           Words
           are
           all
           Monosyllables
           ,
           or
           else
           of
           one
           Syllable
           ,
           without
           exception
           ,
           and
           so
           they
           are
           to
           be
           pronounced
           all
           at
           once
           ,
           and
           without
           any
           distinction
           of
           Syllables
           ,
           of
           what
           number
           of
           Consonants
           and
           Vowels
           soever
           they
           are
           compos'd
           .
           For
           Examples
           ,
           Kiam
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           name
           of
           the
           greatest
           River
           in
           China
           ,
           must
           be
           pronounc'd
           all
           at
           a
           time
           ,
           and
           not
           as
           if
           it
           were
           two
           Syllables
           Ki-am
           .
           In
           like
           manner
           the
           Words
           
             Liuen
             ,
             Hiuen
          
           ,
           do
           not
           make
           two
           Syllables
           ,
           Li-ven
           ,
           nor
           three
           Li-u-en
           ,
           but
           only
           one
           Syllable
           ,
           which
           is
           to
           be
           expressed
           by
           pronouncing
           them
           all
           as
           one
           Syllable
           ,
           yet
           so
           as
           to
           express
           
           the
           Sounds
           of
           all
           the
           Letters
           .
           Not
           but
           that
           the
           Chineses
           have
           Words
           compos'd
           of
           several
           Syllables
           :
           but
           these
           Syllables
           are
           always
           separated
           ,
           and
           from
           different
           Words
           ,
           as
           
             Tai
             yuen
          
           ,
           the
           Names
           of
           the
           capital
           City
           of
           
             Xan
             si
             :
             Cham
             hien
             chum
             ,
          
           the
           name
           of
           a
           Tyrant
           mention'd
           in
           the
           Relation
           .
           Thus
           we
           write
           in
           
             France
             ,
             St.
             Malo
             ,
             Havre
             de
             Grace
             ,
          
           by
           separate
           Words
           ,
           and
           not
           in
           one
           Word
           ,
           as
           
             Villeneuf
             ,
             Montroyal
          
           :
           Nevertheless
           there
           is
           this
           Difference
           ,
           that
           
             St.
             Malo
          
           is
           form'd
           of
           two
           Words
           and
           three
           Syllables
           ,
           and
           
             Havre
             de
             grace
          
           of
           three
           Words
           and
           five
           Syllables
           ,
           whereas
           the
           Chinese
           Names
           have
           never
           more
           Syllables
           than
           Words
           ;
           thus
           
             Tai
             yuen
          
           is
           composed
           of
           two
           Words
           and
           two
           Sillables
           ,
           and
           
             Cham
             hien
             chum
          
           of
           three
           Words
           and
           three
           Syllables
           only
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           their
           Letters
           ,
           though
           there
           are
           as
           many
           Chinese
           Letters
           as
           there
           are
           Chinese
           Words
           ,
           yet
           they
           may
           be
           express'd
           by
           means
           of
           our
           European
           Letters
           ,
           adding
           necessary
           Accents
           to
           distinguish
           them
           in
           speaking
           ,
           as
           is
           explain'd
           in
           this
           Relation
           ;
           which
           being
           premis'd
           ,
           you
           shall
           see
           after
           what
           manner
           the
           Chineses
           pronounce
           .
        
         
           A
           ,
           They
           have
           a
           sound
           in
           their
           Language
           which
           answers
           to
           our
           A
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           Word
           
             Nan
             kim
          
           .
        
         
           B
           ,
           They
           have
           no
           Sound
           that
           answers
           B
           ;
           but
           in
           the
           room
           of
           it
           they
           make
           use
           of
           P
           ,
           
           thus
           instead
           of
           Cambalu
           ,
           they
           say
           ,
           
             Ham
             pa
             lu
          
           .
        
         
           C
           ,
           Before
           
             A
             ,
             O
          
           or
           U
           ,
           must
           be
           pronounced
           as
           our
           
             Ca
             ,
             Co
             ,
             Cu
          
           ;
           but
           before
           E
           and
           I
           ,
           it
           must
           be
           pronounced
           
             Tze
             ,
             Tzi
          
           ,
           and
           not
           
             Ce
             ,
             Ci.
          
           
        
         
           Ch
           ,
           Must
           be
           pronounced
           as
           
             Tcha
             ,
             Tche
             ,
             Tchi
             ,
             Tcho
             ,
             Tchu
             .
          
        
         
           D
           ,
           is
           not
           pronounc'd
           in
           the
           Chinese
           Language
           ,
           but
           only
           T
           ,
           which
           is
           nearest
           to
           it
           .
        
         
           E
           and
           F
           ,
           are
           pronounc'd
           as
           in
           France
           .
        
         
           G
           ,
           before
           
             A
             ,
             O
             ,
             U
          
           ,
           must
           be
           pronounc'd
           
             Nga
             ,
             Ngo
             ,
             Ngu
          
           ,
           as
           if
           there
           were
           an
           N
           before
           the
           G.
           But
           before
           E
           and
           I
           ,
           as
           we
           pronounce
           
             Ge
             ,
             Gi
             ,
             H
          
           must
           be
           pronounc'd
           with
           a
           strong
           Aspiration
           of
           the
           Throat
           ,
           like
           the
           Welch
           Ll.
           
        
         
           
             I
             ,
             K
          
           and
           L
           ,
           as
           we
           do
           .
        
         
           M
           ,
           at
           the
           end
           of
           a
           Word
           ,
           must
           be
           pronounced
           open
           and
           softly
           ,
           without
           making
           any
           Stop
           by
           closing
           the
           Lips
           ,
           otherwise
           they
           pronounce
           it
           as
           we
           do
           .
        
         
           N
           ,
           at
           the
           End
           of
           a
           Word
           ,
           is
           to
           be
           pronounc'd
           hard
           ,
           putting
           a
           stress
           upon
           it
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           Latin
           Word
           Lumen
           ;
           otherwise
           as
           we
           do
           .
        
         
           P
           ,
           as
           in
           France
           .
        
         
           Q
           ,
           in
           the
           same
           Manner
           ,
           unless
           when
           
             a
             U
          
           follows
           ,
           and
           then
           it
           is
           pronounc'd
           as
           in
           the
           Latin
           Word
           Quam
           .
        
         
         
           R
           ,
           is
           never
           pronounc'd
           by
           the
           Chineses
           .
        
         
           S
           ,
           As
           we
           do
           .
        
         
           T
           ,
           As
           we
           pronounce
           it
           in
           Totality
           and
           Totus
           .
        
         
           V
           Consonant
           as
           we
           do
           ;
           
             U
             Vowel
          
           ,
           as
           the
           Latin
           U
           ,
           or
           the
           French
           Ou
           ,
           except
           in
           these
           Words
           ,
           
             Chu
             ,
             Triu
             ,
             Xiu
             ,
             Yu
             ,
             Tiu
             ,
             Niu
             ,
             Siu
             ,
          
           &c.
           
        
         
           X
           ,
           Is
           pronounc'd
           as
           in
           Portuguese
           or
           Ch
           in
           French
           ,
           as
           for
           Example
           
             Xansi
             ,
             Xensi
          
           ,
           as
           if
           it
           were
           written
           Chansi
           or
           Chensi
           .
        
         
           I
           took
           those
           Observations
           upon
           the
           Pronunciation
           from
           Father
           Couplet
           ,
           from
           a
           Chinese
           that
           was
           brought
           out
           of
           China
           ,
           from
           my
           Author
           ,
           and
           out
           of
           Father
           Greslones
           Preface
           to
           his
           Relation
           .
        
      
       
         
         
         
           THE
           CONTENTS
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             OF
             the
             Names
             which
             the
             Chineses
             and
             Foreigners
             give
             to
             China
             ;
             and
             of
             the
             Countries
             of
             Catai
             and
             Mangi
             p.
             1
          
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Extent
             and
             Division
             of
             China
             ,
             of
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Cities
             and
             other
             wall'd
             Towns
             ;
             and
             some
             other
             particulars
             observed
             by
             the
             Chinese
             Authors
             p.
             31
          
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Antiquity
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             China
             ,
             and
             what
             a
             high
             Opinion
             the
             Chineses
             have
             of
             it
             p.
             59
          
           
             
             CHAP.
             IV.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Letters
             and
             Language
             of
             China
             p.
             68
          
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Wit
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             and
             their
             principal
             Books
             .
             p.
             87
          
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Civility
             and
             Politeness
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             and
             of
             some
             of
             their
             Feasts
             .
             p.
             101
          
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Publick
             Works
             and
             Buildings
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             and
             particularly
             of
             the
             
               Grand
               Canal
            
             p.
             113
          
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             great
             Industry
             of
             this
             Nation
             .
             p.
             121
          
           
             CHAP.
             IX
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Navigation
             of
             the
             Chineses
             p.
             128
          
           
             CHAP.
             X.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             great
             Plenty
             of
             all
             things
             in
             China
             p.
             133
          
           
             
             CHAP.
             XI
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Nobility
             of
             the
             Empire
             p.
             145
          
           
             CHAP.
             XII
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             wonderful
             Government
             of
             this
             Empire
             ;
             of
             the
             Distinctions
             between
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Council
             of
             State
             p.
             193
          
           
             CHAP.
             XIII
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             eleven
             Supreme
             Tribunals
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             six
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             for
             Letters
             ,
             and
             the
             five
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             for
             Military
             Affairs
             p.
             200
          
           
             CHAP.
             XIV
             .
          
           
             Of
             several
             other
             Tribunals
             of
             Pekim
             p.
             218
          
           
             CHAP.
             XV.
             
          
           
             Of
             several
             Tribunals
             and
             Mandarins
             of
             Provinces
             p.
             241
          
           
             CHAP.
             XVI
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Grandeur
             of
             the
             Emperour
             of
             China
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             Revenues
             p.
             250
          
           
             
             CHAP.
             XVII
             .
          
           
             A
             description
             of
             the
             City
             of
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             :
             Of
             the
             Walls
             that
             inclose
             the
             Emperours
             Palace
             :
             and
             the
             Form
             of
             the
             Principal
             Houses
             of
             China
             p.
             265
          
           
             CHAP.
             XVIII
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             twenty
             Apartments
             belonging
             to
             the
             Emperours
             Palace
             .
             p.
             281
          
           
             CHAP.
             XIX
             .
          
           
             A
             Description
             of
             twenty
             particular
             Palaces
             contained
             in
             the
             Inner
             Enclosure
             of
             the
             Emperours
             Palace
             p.
             303
          
           
             CHAP.
             XX.
             
          
           
             Of
             several
             other
             Palaces
             ,
             and
             some
             Temples
             erected
             within
             the
             same
             Enclosures
             p.
             314
          
           
             CHAP.
             XXI
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Emperours
             seven
             Temples
             in
             Pekim
             ,
             and
             how
             the
             King
             goes
             abroad
             upon
             the
             performance
             of
             Publick
             Ceremonies
             .
             p.
             319
          
        
      
       
         
           
             
             
               
               THE
               PLANE
               OF
               THE
               CITY
               OF
               PEKIM
               Y
               E
               METROPOLIS
               OF
               CHINA
            
             
             
             
               A
               Scale
               of
               10
               Chinese
               furlongs
               w
               ch
               .
               amount
               to
               2730
               Geometrical
               Paces
               one
               Chinese
               furlong
               making
               273
               Geometrical
               Paces
            
             
               
                 
                   An
                   EXPLANATION
                   of
                   the
                   Plane
                   of
                   the
                   City
                   of
                   PEKIM
                   .
                
                 
                   A
                
                 
                   The
                   Walls
                   of
                   the
                   ancient
                   City
                   of
                   Pekim
                   nere
                   4
                   leagues
                   in
                   Circuite
                
                 
                   B
                
                 
                   The
                   9
                   Gates
                   of
                   the
                   same
                   Wall
                
                 
                   C
                
                 
                   The
                   Streets
                   of
                   the
                   City
                
                 
                   D
                   1
                
                 
                   The
                   first
                   Enclosure
                   of
                   the
                   Palace
                   two
                   leagues
                   in
                   Circuite
                
                 
                   D
                   2
                
                 
                   The
                   second
                   Enclosure
                
                 
                   D
                   3
                
                 
                   The
                   third
                   Enclosure
                   where
                   the
                   Emperour
                   resides
                
                 
                   E
                
                 
                   The
                   south
                   and
                   principal
                   Gate
                   of
                   the
                   City
                
                 
                   F
                
                 
                   The
                   first
                   street
                   ●…
                   ch
                   .
                   you
                   pass
                   through
                   upon
                   you●…
                   entrance
                   into
                   the
                   City
                
                 
                   G
                
                 
                   A
                   Palace
                   encempassed
                   with
                   a
                   Marble
                   Balu●…
                   trade
                
                 
                   H
                
                 
                   The
                   second
                   street
                   ●…
                   ●h
                   .
                   two
                   Triumphal
                   Arches
                
                 
                   I
                
                 
                   The
                   〈◊〉
                   Apertim
                   ▪
                
                 
                   1
                
                 
                   The
                   street
                   of
                   perpetual
                   repose
                
                 
                   2
                
                 
                   2
                   
                   d.
                   〈◊〉
                   ●…
                   ch
                   is
                   the
                   first
                   within
                   the
                   outer
                   enclosure
                   of
                   the
                   Pallace
                
                 
                   3
                
                 
                   3
                   
                   d.
                   called
                   the
                   Portal
                   of
                   the
                   beginning
                
                 
                   4
                
                 
                   4.
                   is
                   The
                   second
                   Enclosure
                
                 
                   5
                
                 
                   5
                   Called
                   the
                   supream
                   Portal
                
                 
                   6
                
                 
                   6
                   Called
                   the
                   supream
                   Imperial
                   Hall
                
                 
                   7
                
                 
                   7
                   Called
                   the
                   Hall
                   thrice
                   exalted
                
                 
                   8
                
                 
                   8.
                   〈◊〉
                   the
                   Supream
                   Hall
                   in
                   the
                   middle
                
                 
                   9
                
                 
                   9
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   of
                   ●…overaigne
                   Concord
                   wher
                   the
                   Em●…
                   〈◊〉
                   in
                   Counc●…l
                   ●…
                   ●h
                   his
                   Colaos
                
                 
                   10
                
                 
                   10
                   The
                   〈◊〉
                   of
                   Heaven
                
                 
                   11
                
                 
                   11
                   〈◊〉
                   ▪
                   〈◊〉
                   of
                   Heaven
                   in
                   ●…
                   ●h
                   .
                   and
                   y
                   e
                   two
                   〈◊〉
                   the
                   Emperour
                   lodges
                   himself
                
                 
                   12
                
                 
                   12
                   The
                   Beautifull
                   House
                
                 
                   13
                
                 
                   13
                   The
                   House
                   which
                   receives
                   Heaven
                
                 
                   14
                
                 
                   14
                   〈◊〉
                   and
                   Gardens
                
                 
                   15
                
                 
                   15
                   The
                   〈◊〉
                   of
                   the
                   Inner
                   Enclosure
                
                 
                   16
                
                 
                   16
                   The
                   High
                   ●…aisd
                   Portal
                   on
                   the
                   south
                   side
                   with
                   a
                   place
                   to
                   manage
                   Horses
                
                 
                   17
                
                 
                   17
                   The
                   Park
                   and
                   artificial
                   Mountaines
                
                 
                   18
                
                 
                   18
                   Consisting
                   of
                   three
                   Houses
                
                 
                   19
                
                 
                   19
                   The
                   Portal
                   on
                   the
                   north
                   side
                
                 
                   20
                
                 
                   20
                   The
                   Enclosure
                   called
                   y
                   e
                   Portal
                   of
                   repose
                
                 
                   123
                   to
                   20
                
                 
                   Are
                   20
                   particular
                   places
                   belonging
                   to
                   the
                   Emperour
                   for
                   several
                   uses
                
                 
                   K
                
                 
                   The
                   first
                   Palace
                   betwen
                   the
                   two
                   Enclosures
                
                 
                   L
                
                 
                   The
                   second
                   Pallace
                
                 
                   M
                
                 
                   3
                   Palace
                   upon
                   the
                   Lake
                
                 
                   N
                
                 
                   4
                   Palace
                   upon
                   a
                   Mountain
                
                 
                   O
                
                 
                   5
                   Palace
                   nere
                   the
                   Lake
                
                 
                   P
                
                 
                   6
                   Palace
                   nere
                   the
                   Lake
                
                 
                   Q
                
                 
                   7
                   Palace
                
                 
                   R
                
                 
                   8
                   Palace
                   of
                   the
                   Fortress
                
                 
                   S
                
                 
                   1
                   Temple
                   of
                   the
                   4
                   within
                   y
                   e
                   Palace
                
                 
                   T
                
                 
                   2
                   Temple
                
                 
                   V
                
                 
                   3
                   Temple
                
                 
                   X
                
                 
                   4
                   Temple
                
                 
                   Y
                
                 
                   24
                   Places
                   for
                   the
                   Mandarins
                
                 
                   Z
                
                 
                   5
                   Temples
                   in
                   y
                   e
                   new
                   City
                   mark
                   1
                   2
                   3
                   4
                   5
                
                 
                   &
                
                 
                   1
                   Temple
                   in
                   the
                   Old
                   City
                
                 
                   &
                
                 
                   2
                   Temple
                   in
                   the
                   Old
                   City
                
                 
                   A
                   A
                
                 
                   The
                   6
                   Tribunals
                   markd
                   1
                   2
                   3
                   4
                   5
                   6
                   ●…
                   ●h
                   .
                   A
                   A
                
                 
                   B
                   B
                
                 
                   The
                   5
                   Tribunals
                   of
                   y
                   e
                   military
                   Mandarins
                
              
            
             map of Beijing (Peking)
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
           A
           
             New
             Relation
          
           OF
           CHINA
           :
        
         
           
             Containing
          
           
             A
             Description
             of
             the
             most
             considerable
             Particulars
             of
             that
             Great
             Empire
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               I.
            
             Of
             the
             Names
             which
             the
             Chineses
             and
             Foreigners
             give
             to
             China
             ;
             and
             of
             the
             Countries
             of
             Catai
             and
             Mangi
             .
          
           
             IT
             is
             a
             Custom
             usual
             in
             this
             Empire
             ,
             that
             when
             any
             new
             Family
             ascends
             the
             Imperial
             Throne
             ,
             the
             Sovereign
             gives
             a
             new
             Name
             to
             his
             Dominions
             .
             Thus
             under
             the
             Reign
             of
             the
             preceeding
             Family
             ,
             China
             was
             called
             
               Taè
               mim
               que
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             Kingdom
             of
             great
             Brightness
             .
             But
             the
             Tartars
             who
             govern
             it
             at
             present
             have
             called
             it
             
               Taà
               cim
               que
            
             ,
             or
             a
             Kingdom
             of
             great
             Purity
             :
             and
             this
             is
             the
             Appellation
             most
             
             common
             among
             the
             Chineses
             .
             However
             in
             regard
             th●…
             formerly
             there
             have
             been
             Kingdoms
             in
             it
             highly
             fam●…s
             either
             for
             their
             long
             Continuance
             ,
             or
             for
             the
             Vertues
             of
             their
             Princes
             ,
             or
             the
             number
             of
             Learned
             Men
             ,
             or
             for
             some
             other
             Advantages
             ,
             they
             have
             preserv'd
             and
             still
             make
             use
             in
             their
             Books
             of
             Names
             which
             were
             then
             in
             Practice
             ,
             〈◊〉
             as
             are
             those
             of
             
               Hia
               que
               ,
               Xam
               que
               ,
               Cheu
               que
               ,
               H●…n
               que
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             Which
             gives
             us
             to
             understand
             ,
             that
             although
             these
             Names
             signifie
             China
             ,
             yet
             they
             were
             rather
             intended
             to
             denote
             the
             Reigns
             of
             several
             Royal
             Families
             ,
             than
             to
             signifie
             the
             Kingdom
             it self
             .
          
           
             In
             their
             Books
             and
             Petitions
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             they
             generally
             make
             use
             of
             the
             Word
             
               Xam
               que
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             High
             and
             Sovereign
             Kingdom
             .
             The
             Learned
             Men
             in
             their
             Writings
             and
             their
             Books
             make
             choice
             of
             the
             Word
             
               Chum
               que
            
             ,
             which
             signifies
             the
             flower
             ▪
             of
             the
             Middle
             ,
             or
             Center
             .
             And
             indeed
             the
             most
             usual
             and
             common
             Name
             for
             all
             China
             is
             
               Chum
               que
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Center
             ;
             which
             name
             is
             given
             to
             it
             ,
             either
             because
             they
             believe
             that
             China
             lies
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             World
             ,
             or
             because
             the
             first
             King
             of
             China
             establish'd
             his
             Throne
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Honan
             ,
             which
             was
             then
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             the
             Center
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             or
             lastly
             because
             it
             is
             much
             more
             considerable
             than
             all
             the
             barbarous
             and
             poor
             Kingdoms
             that
             surround
             it
             .
             That
             same
             Hyperbolical
             Word
             also
             
               Tien
               Hia
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Kingdom
             that
             contains
             all
             that
             is
             under
             Heaven
             ,
             is
             very
             frequently
             made
             use
             of
             .
             So
             that
             when
             they
             say
             
               Tien
               Hia
               〈◊〉
               ●…im
            
             ,
             all
             that
             is
             under
             Heaven
             is
             in
             Peace
             ,
             it
             is
             the
             same
             thing
             as
             to
             say
             China
             is
             in
             Peace
             .
             China
             likewise
             has
             other
             Names
             ,
             which
             I
             forbear
             to
             mention
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             less
             in
             Practice
             .
          
           
           
             Foreigners
             call
             it
             
               Hara
               Kitai
               ,
               Catai
               ,
               Cataio
               ,
               Mangi
               ,
               Nica
               Corum
               ,
               Chin
               ,
               China
               ,
            
             and
             Kina
             .
             The
             Tartars
             that
             lie
             to
             the
             West
             call
             the
             
               Chineses
               ,
               Hara
               Kitai
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Black
             Barbarians
             ;
             which
             is
             the
             Name
             they
             give
             also
             to
             China
             it self
             .
             The
             Europeans
             instead
             of
             Hara
             ,
             say
             Cara
             ;
             for
             that
             in
             regard
             the
             Tartars
             pronounce
             Ha
             ,
             with
             a
             very
             strong
             Aspiration
             ,
             strangers
             believe
             they
             say
             Cara
             ,
             and
             not
             Hara
             .
             For
             that
             Reason
             it
             is
             that
             
               Marcus
               Paulus
            
             and
             other
             Authors
             call
             by
             the
             name
             of
             Can
             ,
             that
             Emperor
             ,
             who
             between
             the
             years
             1260
             ,
             and
             1275.
             conquer'd
             the
             Western
             Tartary
             ,
             and
             all
             China
             ,
             instead
             of
             calling
             him
             Han
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             King
             ,
             in
             the
             Language
             of
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             .
             The
             same
             word
             also
             is
             at
             present
             in
             use
             among
             the
             Eastern
             Tartars
             ,
             who
             are
             Masters
             of
             China
             ;
             and
             who
             were
             formerly
             so
             barbarous
             that
             they
             had
             not
             any
             
             King
             ,
             nor
             any
             word
             to
             signifie
             a
             King
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             relate
             in
             its
             due
             place
             .
          
           
             The
             Muscovites
             ,
             as
             I
             was
             inform'd
             by
             some
             residing
             in
             this
             Court
             ,
             in
             imitation
             of
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             
             call
             it
             Kitai
             .
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             Chahamalaha
             ,
             the
             Inhabitants
             of
             which
             are
             Mahumetans
             ,
             and
             which
             confines
             to
             the
             Province
             of
             Xansi
             ,
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Tumet
             or
             Tibet
             ,
             which
             environs
             a
             good
             part
             of
             the
             Provinces
             of
             Xensi
             and
             
               Xansi
               ▪
            
             and
             that
             of
             Usangue
             
             bordering
             upon
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Sù
               Chuen
            
             ,
             having
             corrupted
             the
             word
             Kita
             ,
             call
             it
             Kata●…
             ,
             and
             the
             Merchants
             that
             come
             from
             Indostan
             ,
             and
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             Indies
             call
             it
             Cataio
             .
             By
             which
             we
             clearly
             find
             that
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Cataio
             ,
             of
             which
             Father
             
             
               Anthony
               de
               Andrad●…
            
             speaks
             in
             his
             Relation
             of
             Tibet
             where
             he
             had
             been
             ,
             signifies
             no
             more
             than
             China
             ,
             and
             that
             
               Grand
               Catai
            
             ,
             is
             no
             other
             ,
             then
             Grand
             China
             ;
             to
             which
             alone
             may
             be
             attributed
             whatever
             has
             been
             said
             of
             China
             .
             So
             much
             the
             rather
             for
             that
             of
             all
             the
             Kingdoms
             seated
             between
             
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             the
             Eastern
             Extremities
             of
             Asia
             ,
             only
             those
             that
             lie
             upon
             the
             Sea
             are
             known
             ;
             the
             rest
             are
             small
             ,
             barbarous
             ,
             poor
             and
             untilled
             .
          
           
             The
             Eastern
             Tartars
             moreover
             in
             derision
             call'd
             
               China
               ,
               Nica
               Corum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Barbarians
             ,
             tho'
             at
             present
             ,
             now
             they
             are
             setled
             therein
             ,
             and
             are
             become
             Masters
             of
             it
             ,
             they
             call
             it
             
               Tulimpa
               Corum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Middle
             .
             The
             Kingdoms
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             as
             
               Canara
               ,
               Bengala
            
             ,
             and
             others
             call
             it
             Chin
             ,
             as
             I
             was
             inform'd
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Sù
               Chuen
            
             by
             two
             Iognes
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             one
             had
             been
             at
             Goa
             ,
             and
             had
             learnt
             some
             Portugal
             Words
             ;
             and
             ,
             as
             I
             understood
             at
             Pekim
             ,
             by
             some
             Merchants
             of
             the
             Country
             .
             This
             name
             of
             Chin
             seems
             to
             have
             been
             given
             to
             China
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Family
             of
             Chin
             ,
             who
             reign'd
             a
             Hundred
             sixty
             nine
             Years
             after
             Christ
             ;
             though
             I
             find
             more
             probability
             to
             believe
             that
             it
             comes
             from
             the
             Family
             of
             Cin
             ,
             who
             reign'd
             two
             Hundred
             forty
             six
             before
             Christ
             ,
             the
             chief
             of
             which
             Family
             was
             Master
             of
             all
             China
             ,
             and
             among
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Yûn
               nân
            
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             far
             distant
             from
             Bengala
             ,
             because
             the
             Chineses
             pronouncing
             strongly
             ,
             and
             whistling
             the
             Word
             Cin
             through
             the
             Teeth
             ,
             the
             Indians
             that
             cannot
             imitate
             them
             ,
             pronounce
             it
             Chin
             ,
             and
             the
             Portugals
             ,
             who
             took
             this
             word
             from
             the
             Indians
             ,
             not
             having
             any
             word
             in
             their
             Language
             that
             ends
             in
             N
             ,
             have
             added
             an
             A
             at
             the
             latter
             End.
             The
             Italians
             write
             China
             like
             the
             Portugheses
             ;
             but
             they
             pronounce
             it
             K●…na
             ;
             and
             so
             they
             ought
             to
             write
             it
             Cina
             ,
             to
             give
             it
             the
             same
             sound
             as
             the
             Germans
             who
             write
             schina
             .
          
           
             By
             what
             has
             been
             said
             we
             find
             apparently
             that
             
               Cataio
               ,
               Hara
               Kitai
            
             ,
             and
             China
             are
             all
             one
             and
             the
             same
             thing
             ,
             and
             not
             different
             Kingdoms
             ,
             as
             Cluverius
             would
             have
             them
             to
             be
             ;
             who
             in
             his
             fifth
             
             Book
             of
             his
             Introductions
             to
             Geography
             ,
             Chapter
             Fifth
             ,
             frames
             several
             Kingdoms
             as
             
               Catai
               ,
               Tangut
               ,
               Tainfu
            
             and
             others
             ,
             which
             he
             seems
             to
             have
             borrow'd
             from
             
               Marcus
               Paulus
            
             :
             whereas
             they
             are
             not
             the
             names
             of
             Kingdoms
             ,
             but
             only
             the
             corrupted
             names
             of
             certain
             Cities
             of
             China
             .
             And
             this
             is
             particularly
             manifest
             by
             the
             word
             Tainfu
             ,
             which
             is
             no
             other
             then
             
               Tai
               Yuenfu
            
             ,
             the
             Metropolis
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Xansi
             ,
             where
             the
             Tartars
             settled
             their
             Court
             before
             they
             Conquer'd
             the
             Province
             of
             Pekim
             .
             The
             Description
             also
             which
             Cluverius
             gives
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Tainfu
             ,
             agrees
             perfectly
             with
             that
             City
             and
             the
             Country
             that
             belongs
             to
             it
             For
             there
             are
             the
             best
             Grapes
             in
             China
             ;
             and
             good
             store
             of
             Iron
             near
             the
             City
             of
             
               Lû
               gân
            
             ,
             which
             furnishes
             Pekim
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             especially
             those
             that
             lie
             toward
             the
             North
             ,
             with
             Nails
             ,
             and
             all
             sorts
             of
             Iron
             Utensils
             and
             Instruments
             .
             
               Marcus
               Paulus
            
             speaks
             of
             another
             City
             of
             that
             Province
             which
             he
             calls
             Pianfu
             ,
             tho'
             the
             Chineses
             call
             it
             
               Pim
               yàm
               fù
               .
               Cluverius
            
             has
             also
             borrow'd
             from
             
               Marcus
               Paulus
            
             the
             corrupted
             word
             Cambalu
             ,
             the
             Capital
             City
             of
             Catai
             ;
             for
             neither
             the
             Western
             nor
             Eastern
             Tartars
             have
             any
             B.
             as
             we
             shall
             shew
             in
             due
             place
             in
             our
             Tartarian
             
             Alphabet
             ,
             so
             that
             
               Marcus
               Paulus
            
             instead
             of
             Cam
             should
             have
             written
             Han
             ,
             that
             is
             King
             ;
             and
             instead
             of
             
               Balu
               ,
               Palu
            
             ,
             which
             signifies
             Court
             ,
             and
             consequently
             instead
             of
             
               Cambalu
               ,
               Hanpalu
            
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             Tartarian
             Language
             signifies
             the
             Kings
             Court.
             And
             then
             he
             should
             have
             taken
             notice
             that
             there
             were
             two
             Hanpalu's
             ,
             or
             Kings
             Courts
             ;
             the
             ancient
             Court
             ,
             at
             present
             but
             a
             mean
             place
             ,
             distant
             about
             three
             Leagues
             from
             Pekim
             toward
             the
             East
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             
               Tum
               Cheum
            
             ,
             and
             the
             new
             Court
             which
             is
             Pekim
             ,
             which
             
               Marcus
               Paulus
            
             calls
             Taidu
             ,
             instead
             of
             
               Tai
               tu
            
             ,
             which
             signifies
             the
             great
             Court.
             
          
           
           
             Some
             Authors
             question
             whether
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Mangi
             ,
             of
             which
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             makes
             such
             frequent
             mention
             ,
             be
             not
             a
             different
             Kingdom
             from
             China
             ;
             but
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             to
             be
             made
             but
             that
             it
             is
             comprehended
             within
             it
             .
             For
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             divides
             China
             into
             two
             Kingdoms
             ,
             Catai
             and
             Mangi
             :
             Comprising
             under
             the
             Name
             of
             Catai
             all
             the
             Nor
             thern
             Provinces
             and
             under
             that
             of
             Mangi
             all
             the
             Southern
             .
             The
             word
             Mangi
             is
             deriv'd
             from
             
               Mânt
               Zù
            
             ,
             which
             signifies
             Barbarous
             :
             For
             that
             the
             Southern
             Chineses
             ,
             to
             mock
             the
             Northern
             ,
             
             call
             them
             
               Pe
               tai
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             Fools
             of
             the
             North
             :
             and
             the
             other
             to
             pay
             the
             Southern
             Chineses
             in
             the
             same
             Coin
             ,
             call
             them
             
               Nân
               Mân
            
             ,
             Barbarians
             of
             the
             South
             ,
             or
             else
             barely
             Mantzu
             ,
             Barbarians
             .
             The
             Tartarians
             likewise
             in
             contempt
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             call
             them
             also
             Mantzu
             or
             Barbarians
             .
             But
             in
             regard
             the
             Tartarians
             ,
             especially
             the
             Eastern
             ,
             cannot
             well
             pronounce
             the
             Syllable
             tzu
             ,
             they
             say
             
               gi
               ,
               Mangi
            
             ;
             which
             I
             have
             heard
             a
             Thousand
             and
             a
             Thousand
             times
             for
             three
             and
             twenty
             Years
             together
             that
             I
             liv'd
             among
             them
             .
             And
             so
             without
             question
             ,
             it
             was
             in
             the
             time
             of
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             ,
             who
             being
             a
             stranger
             could
             not
             understand
             the
             force
             of
             the
             Language
             ,
             but
             hearing
             the
             Tartars
             so
             often
             call
             the
             Southern
             
               Chineses
               ,
               Mangi
            
             ,
             believ'd
             it
             to
             be
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             or
             Nation
             ,
             and
             not
             a
             name
             of
             Reproach
             .
          
           
             However
             that
             there
             may
             be
             no
             farther
             doubt
             but
             that
             the
             Names
             of
             Catai
             and
             Mangi
             ,
             are
             quite
             different
             ,
             and
             do
             not
             both
             of
             them
             signifie
             China
             ,
             I
             shall
             here
             translate
             a
             piece
             of
             the
             forty
             fourth
             Chapter
             of
             the
             second
             Book
             of
             
               Marcus
               Paulus
            
             ,
             by
             which
             it
             will
             evidently
             appear
             ,
             that
             what
             I
             affirm
             is
             a
             constant
             and
             assured
             Truth
             .
             For
             having
             spoken
             in
             the
             former
             Chapter
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             which
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             vastness
             of
             
             its
             Stream
             ,
             the
             Chineses
             call
             
               ●…
               âm
               eu
               Kiam
            
             ,
             or
             
               the
               River
               Son
               of
               the
               Sea
               ▪
            
             he
             goes
             on
             in
             this
             manner
             .
          
           
             
               
               Caingui
               ●…s
               a
               small
               City
               upon
               the
               Banks
               of
               this
               River
               upon
               the
               South-side
               ,
               where
               they
               gather
               ever
               Year
               a
               great
               quantity
               of
               Rice
               ,
               the
               greatest
               part
               of
               which
               is
               carried
               to
               Cambalu
               to
               supply
               the
               Court
               of
               the
               great
               Cam.
               These
               Provisions
               are
               transported
               to
               Catai
               by
               Water
               ,
               over
               Rivers
               and
               Lakes
               ,
               and
               one
               large
               and
               deep
               Canal
               ,
               which
               the
               great
               Cam
               has
               caus'd
               to
               be
               made
               for
               the
               passage
               of
               Vessels
               from
               one
               River
               to
               another
               ,
               and
               to
               go
               from
               the
               Province
               of
               Mangi
               to
               Cambalu
               ,
               without
               going
               by
               Sea.
               This
               is
               a
               work
               of
               wonder
               for
               its
               Situation
               ,
               and
               its
               Length
               ,
               but
               more
               for
               the
               benefit
               which
               the
               Cities
               receive
               from
               it
               .
               The
               Great
               Cham
               also
               caus'd
               to
               be
               rais'd
               all
               along
               the
               Banks
               of
               the
               said
               Rivers
               and
               Canal
               very
               strong
               and
               spacious
               Damms
               for
               Travellers
               to
               walk
               upon
               .
            
             These
             are
             the
             words
             of
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             ,
             and
             we
             shall
             speak
             of
             this
             great
             Work
             in
             the
             seventh
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             But
             as
             for
             Caingui
             ,
             mention'd
             by
             that
             Author
             ,
             to
             speak
             properly
             ,
             it
             is
             neither
             a
             Town
             nor
             a
             City
             .
             The
             Chineses
             call
             it
             
               Chim
               Kiam
               ▪
               Keu
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             Mouth
             of
             the
             Son
             of
             the
             River
             ,
             in
             regard
             that
             an
             Arm
             of
             the
             River
             separates
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             and
             after
             it
             has
             run
             through
             part
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Nan
               Kim
            
             ,
             crosses
             the
             Country
             of
             
               Che
               Kiam
            
             as
             far
             as
             the
             Capital
             City
             of
             it
             call'd
             
               Ham
               Cheu
            
             .
             On
             both
             the
             sides
             of
             this
             Mouth
             ,
             there
             is
             one
             of
             those
             sort
             of
             places
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             
               Mâ
               teû
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             a
             Place
             frequented
             for
             the
             sake
             of
             Trade
             :
             Because
             the
             Barques
             there
             meet
             and
             come
             to
             an
             Anchor
             to
             ride
             secure
             in
             the
             Night
             time
             .
             Now
             this
             Place
             of
             which
             
               Marcus
               Paulus
            
             speaks
             ,
             might
             well
             be
             call'd
             a
             Town
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             extraordinary
             number
             of
             Vessels
             that
             resort
             thither
             ,
             
             tho
             it
             be
             neither
             wall'd
             ,
             nor
             have
             buildings
             enow
             to
             form
             a
             City
             .
          
           
             Now
             tho'
             this
             be
             perfectly
             known
             by
             all
             such
             as
             are
             employ'd
             as
             Missionaries
             into
             this
             Kingdom
             ,
             yet
             I
             cannot
             forbear
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             I
             may
             make
             this
             matter
             yet
             more
             evident
             ,
             to
             unfold
             some
             other
             passages
             of
             the
             same
             Author
             ,
             and
             to
             begin
             with
             the
             names
             of
             so
             many
             Cities
             ,
             of
             which
             he
             makes
             mention
             in
             his
             History
             .
             In
             the
             twenty
             seventh
             Chapter
             of
             his
             second
             Book
             he
             speaks
             of
             the
             City
             of
             Tainfu
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             
               Tai
               yuen
               fu
            
             ,
             and
             which
             as
             we
             have
             said
             ,
             is
             the
             Capitol
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Xansi
             .
             In
             the
             28th
             .
             Chapter
             he
             speaks
             of
             another
             City
             of
             the
             same
             Province
             ,
             call'd
             by
             the
             
               Chineses
               ,
               Pim
               yam
               fu
            
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             a
             City
             of
             the
             second
             Rank
             ,
             as
             being
             the
             most
             Rich
             and
             Potent
             in
             the
             whole
             Empire
             ,
             except
             that
             of
             Sucheu
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Nankin
             .
             In
             the
             56th
             .
             Chapter
             he
             speaks
             of
             the
             City
             of
             Coiganzù
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             
               Hoaì
               gâ●…
               fû
            
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             Town
             of
             great
             Trade
             ,
             and
             very
             Rich
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             great
             quantity
             of
             Salt
             which
             is
             there
             made
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Territory
             round
             about
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             thence
             transported
             into
             several
             parts
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             as
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             observes
             in
             the
             same
             Chapter
             .
             In
             the
             65th
             .
             Chapter
             he
             speaks
             of
             the
             City
             of
             
               Chian
               gian
               fu
            
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             
               Chim
               Kiam
               fu
            
             .
             In
             his
             seventieth
             Chapter
             he
             describes
             the
             City
             of
             T●…pinxu
             ,
             otherwise
             
               Tai
               〈◊〉
               fu
            
             ,
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Namkim
             .
             In
             the
             75th
             .
             he
             mentions
             the
             City
             of
             Fogiu
             ,
             otherwise
             
               Fo
               Cheu
            
             ,
             the
             Capital
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Fo
               Kien
            
             .
             In
             the
             76th
             .
             He
             has
             the
             City
             of
             Quelinfu
             ;
             which
             is
             called
             
               Kien
               nim
               fu
            
             .
             He
             also
             reports
             that
             about
             this
             City
             there
             are
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Lions
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             repeats
             several
             times
             in
             other
             places
             ;
             which
             gives
             us
             to
             understand
             that
             he
             was
             mis-inform'd
             in
             most
             things
             ,
             since
             it
             is
             certain
             that
             
             the
             Chineses
             never
             saw
             a
             Lyon
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             as
             in
             Picture
             ;
             and
             therefore
             they
             paint
             a
             Lyon
             quite
             another
             Creature
             than
             he
             is
             ▪
             For
             my
             part
             ,
             I
             am
             perswaded
             that
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             is
             mistaken
             ,
             in
             believing
             those
             great
             and
             furious
             Tygres
             which
             are
             so
             common
             in
             that
             Empire
             to
             be
             Lyons
             ▪
             And
             he
             confirms
             me
             in
             this
             Perswasion
             by
             saying
             in
             the
             14th
             Chapter
             of
             his
             second
             Book
             ,
             that
             the
             Great
             Han
             has
             Lyons
             train'd
             up
             to
             hunt
             the
             other
             wild
             Beasts
             ;
             and
             that
             they
             are
             mark'd
             with
             white
             ,
             black
             and
             red
             lists
             or
             streaks
             ,
             and
             are
             larger
             then
             the
             Lyons
             of
             Babylon
             .
             All
             which
             perfectly
             agrees
             with
             the
             descriptions
             of
             the
             Tygres
             or
             Leopards
             ,
             which
             several
             of
             the
             Princes
             of
             Asia
             make
             use
             of
             in
             their
             Ch●…ces
             ;
             but
             not
             at
             all
             with
             the
             descriptions
             of
             Lyons
             .
             The
             same
             Author
             makes
             mention
             of
             several
             other
             Cities
             ,
             the
             names
             of
             which
             are
             so
             changed
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             so
             far
             from
             being
             Chinesie
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             no
             resemblance
             to
             the
             Language
             .
             Nevertheless
             we
             clearly
             find
             that
             the
             Provinces
             and
             Cities
             which
             he
             places
             in
             Catai
             ,
             and
             Mangi
             belong
             all
             to
             China
             ,
             because
             they
             generally
             end
             with
             the
             Syllable
             fu
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             Chinesie
             Language
             signifies
             a
             City
             .
             For
             example
             the
             Metropolis
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Canton
             is
             
               Quam
               cheu
               fu
               .
               Quam
               cheu
            
             being
             the
             proper
             name
             that
             distinguishes
             it
             from
             the
             rest
             ,
             and
             fu
             signifies
             a
             City
             ,
             as
             Polis
             among
             the
             Greeks
             :
             and
             so
             Constantinopolis
             signifies
             the
             City
             of
             Constantine
             ,
             and
             Adrianopolis
             the
             City
             of
             Adrian
             .
          
           
             We
             draw
             the
             second
             Proof
             of
             the
             Description
             which
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             makes
             ,
             in
             the
             sixteenth
             and
             seven
             teenth
             Chapters
             of
             his
             second
             Book
             ,
             of
             the
             old
             and
             new
             City
             of
             Pekim
             ,
             and
             the
             King's
             Palace
             ,
             in
             regard
             that
             all
             that
             he
             speaks
             of
             it
             is
             conformable
             to
             what
             we
             see
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             and
             to
             what
             we
             shall
             describe
             in
             the
             Progress
             of
             this
             Relation
             ▪
          
           
           
             The
             third
             is
             drawn
             from
             the
             Wine
             which
             is
             
             drank
             in
             that
             Court
             ,
             and
             the
             Stone-Coal
             which
             they
             burn
             there
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             Muy
             .
             This
             Coal
             is
             brought
             from
             certain
             Mountains
             two
             Leagues
             distant
             from
             the
             City
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             a
             wonderful
             thing
             that
             the
             Mine
             has
             never
             fail'd
             ,
             notwithstanding
             that
             for
             above
             these
             four
             Thousand
             Years
             not
             only
             this
             City
             so
             large
             and
             Populous
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Province
             has
             consum'd
             such
             an
             incredible
             quantity
             ,
             there
             being
             not
             any
             one
             Family
             ,
             tho'
             never
             so
             poor
             ,
             which
             has
             not
             a
             Stove
             heated
             with
             this
             Coal
             that
             lasts
             and
             preserves
             a
             Heat
             much
             more
             Violent
             then
             Charcoal
             .
             These
             Stoves
             are
             made
             of
             Brick
             like
             a
             Bed
             or
             Couch
             three
             or
             four
             Hands
             Breadth
             high
             ,
             and
             broader
             or
             narrower
             according
             to
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Family
             .
             Here
             they
             lie
             and
             sleep
             upon
             Matts
             or
             Carpets
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             day
             time
             sit
             together
             either
             upon
             Carpets
             or
             Matts
             ,
             without
             which
             it
             would
             be
             impossible
             to
             endure
             the
             great
             Cold
             of
             the
             Climate
             .
             On
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Stove
             there
             is
             a
             little
             Oven
             wherein
             they
             put
             the
             Coal
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             Flame
             ,
             the
             Smoak
             and
             Heat
             spread
             themselves
             to
             all
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Stove
             ,
             through
             Pipes
             made
             on
             purpose
             ,
             and
             have
             a
             passage
             forth
             through
             a
             little
             opening
             ,
             and
             the
             Mouth
             of
             the
             Oven
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             they
             bake
             their
             Victuals
             ,
             heat
             their
             Wine
             ,
             and
             prepare
             their
             Cha
             or
             Thè
             ;
             for
             that
             they
             always
             drink
             their
             Drink
             hot
             .
             The
             Halls
             and
             Chambers
             of
             Wealthy
             Persons
             have
             every
             one
             their
             Stove
             ,
             not
             rais'd
             like
             those
             of
             the
             Poor
             ,
             but
             underneath
             ;
             so
             that
             the
             Floor
             serves
             for
             the
             Stove
             where
             they
             Eat
             ,
             Study
             ,
             Walk
             ,
             and
             Sleep
             :
             either
             upon
             Carpets
             ,
             Beds
             ,
             or
             Chairs
             .
             The
             Cooks
             of
             the
             Grandees
             and
             Mandarins
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             Tradesmen
             that
             deal
             in
             Fire
             ,
             as
             Smiths
             ,
             Bakers
             ,
             Dyers
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ,
             both
             Summer
             and
             Winter
             make
             use
             of
             this
             ,
             
             Coal
             :
             the
             Heat
             and
             Smoak
             of
             which
             are
             so
             violent
             ,
             that
             several
             Persons
             have
             been
             smother'd
             therewith
             ;
             and
             sometimes
             it
             happens
             that
             the
             Stove
             takes
             Fire
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             that
             are
             asleep
             upon
             it
             are
             burnt
             to
             Death
             .
             Therefore
             to
             avoid
             the
             pernicious
             Effects
             of
             this
             Smoak
             ,
             there
             needs
             no
             more
             then
             to
             set
             by
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Stove
             a
             large
             Vessel
             full
             of
             clear
             and
             fresh
             Water
             .
             For
             the
             smoak
             gathers
             to
             the
             Water
             and
             intermixes
             with
             it
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             that
             the
             next
             day
             the
             Water
             will
             smell
             as
             strong
             and
             loathsome
             as
             the
             smoak
             it self
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             Proof
             is
             that
             
               Marcus
               Paulus
            
             in
             the
             37th
             .
             Chapter
             of
             his
             second
             Book
             describes
             a
             famous
             Bridge
             ,
             seated
             two
             Leagues
             and
             a
             half
             from
             Pekim
             towards
             the
             West
             ,
             in
             these
             words
             .
             
               When
               you
               leave
               the
               City
               of
               Cambalu
               after
               you
               have
               travell'd
               ten
               Miles
               ,
               you
               meet
               with
               a
               River
               call'd
               
                 Puli
                 Sangan
              
               ,
               which
               empties
               it self
               into
               the
               Ocean
               ,
               and
               is
               Navigable
               for
               many
               Vessels
               that
               carry
               Merchants
               Goods
               .
               Upon
               this
               River
               there
               is
               a
               very
               fair
               Stone
               Bridge
               ,
               and
               perhaps
               there
               is
               not
               the
               like
               of
               it
               in
               the
               World.
               This
               Bridge
               is
               in
               Length
               three
               hundred
               Geometrical
               Paces
               ,
               and
               eight
               in
               Breadth
               ,
               so
               that
               ten
               Horsemen
               may
               conveniently
               ride
               a
               ▪
               Breast
               .
               There
               are
               four
               and
               twenty
               Arches
               ,
               and
               five
               and
               twenty
               Piles
               that
               support
               it
               ,
               and
               it
               is
               all
               made
               of
               Serpentine
               Stone
               wrought
               with
               wonderful
               Curiosity
               .
               The
               Securities
               to
               lean
               upon
               on
               both
               sides
               are
               made
               of
               Tables
               of
               Marble
               ,
               and
               Pillars
               rang'd
               with
               an
               extraordinary
               Symmetry
               .
               At
               the
               two
               Extreams
               it
               is
               broader
               then
               at
               the
               top
               of
               the
               Ascent
               ,
               but
               when
               you
               are
               up
               ,
               you
               find
               it
               as
               flat
               and
               level
               as
               if
               it
               had
               been
               laid
               with
               a
               Line
               .
               In
               that
               part
               there
               is
               a
               very
               large
               and
               high
               Column
               rear'd
               upon
               a
               Tortoise
               of
               Marble
               ,
               
               with
               a
               huge
               Lyon
               near
               the
               Base
               ,
               and
               another
               above
               .
               Over
               against
               this
               there
               is
               another
               very
               fair
               Column
               ,
               with
               a
               Lyon
               distant
               about
               one
               Pace
               and
               a
               half
               from
               the
               former
               .
               The
               Columns
               of
               support
               that
               serve
               for
               rails
               are
               a
               Foot
               and
               a
               half
               one
               from
               another
               ,
               and
               the
               spaces
               between
               are
               fill'd
               up
               with
               Tables
               of
               Marble
               ,
               adorn'd
               with
               several
               Sculptures
               ,
               to
               prevent
               People
               from
               falling
               into
               the
               River
               .
               In
               a
               word
               ,
               upon
               every
               Pillar
               there
               is
               a
               Lyon
               of
               Marble
               ,
               which
               is
               a
               very
               pleasant
               Sight
               to
               behold
               .
            
             These
             are
             the
             Words
             of
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             .
             It
             seems
             the
             Printer
             forgot
             some
             words
             toward
             the
             End
             ,
             which
             render
             the
             Author's
             Description
             obscure
             .
             However
             I
             have
             translated
             them
             as
             they
             ought
             to
             be
             ▪
             and
             according
             to
             the
             Structure
             of
             the
             Bridge
             .
          
           
             This
             Bridge
             is
             the
             most
             beautiful
             in
             China
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             not
             the
             biggest
             ;
             for
             there
             are
             those
             which
             are
             much
             longer
             .
             The
             Author
             says
             the
             River
             is
             call'd
             
               Puli
               Sangan
            
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             name
             given
             it
             by
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             ,
             who
             were
             then
             Masters
             of
             that
             Empire
             ,
             and
             of
             whom
             there
             are
             still
             at
             Pekim
             many
             intermix'd
             among
             the
             Eastern
             .
             It
             is
             call'd
             by
             the
             
               Chineses
               ,
               Hoen
               Ho
            
             ,
             or
             the
             muddy
             River
             ,
             by
             reason
             that
             the
             rapidness
             of
             its
             stream
             carries
             along
             with
             it
             a
             world
             of
             Earth
             that
             renders
             it
             all
             the
             Year
             long
             ,
             thick
             ,
             and
             muddy
             .
             He
             says
             that
             this
             Bridge
             has
             four
             and
             twenty
             Arches
             ,
             whereas
             it
             has
             but
             thirteen
             ,
             and
             that
             several
             Vessels
             Sail
             upon
             this
             River
             ,
             which
             is
             Impossible
             .
             For
             tho'
             it
             be
             very
             well
             fill'd
             with
             Water
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             Navigable
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             great
             Number
             of
             Falls
             ,
             Windings
             ,
             and
             Rocks
             of
             which
             it
             is
             full
             .
             But
             that
             which
             carried
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             into
             these
             Mistakes
             ,
             was
             this
             ,
             that
             about
             three
             Leagues
             farther
             toward
             the
             West
             ,
             there
             is
             another
             River
             and
             another
             Bridge
             of
             four
             and
             twenty
             Arches
             .
             Of
             
             which
             there
             are
             five
             in
             the
             middle
             vaulted
             ,
             the
             rest
             are
             flat
             and
             cover'd
             with
             long
             and
             very
             broad
             Tables
             of
             Marble
             ,
             very
             well
             wrought
             and
             cut
             in
             a
             streight
             Line
             .
             In
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Bridge
             the
             Columns
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             of
             which
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             speaks
             in
             his
             Description
             .
             The
             River
             is
             called
             
               Cieu
               li
               hô
            
             ,
             or
             the
             River
             of
             Glass
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             clear
             ,
             quiet
             ,
             and
             Navigable
             .
             And
             thus
             you
             see
             the
             Author
             mistakes
             one
             Bridge
             for
             the
             other
             :
             The
             first
             is
             the
             fairest
             in
             China
             ,
             and
             perhaps
             the
             fairest
             in
             the
             World
             for
             the
             excellency
             of
             the
             Workmanship
             ,
             and
             the
             Materials
             of
             which
             it
             is
             made
             .
             It
             is
             all
             of
             white
             Marble
             very
             fine
             and
             well
             wrought
             according
             to
             the
             perfect
             rules
             of
             Architecture
             .
             On
             the
             sides
             stand
             a
             Hundred
             and
             forty
             Pillars
             of
             Support
             ,
             allowing
             Seventy
             to
             each
             side
             .
             They
             are
             a
             Pace
             and
             a
             half
             distant
             one
             from
             another
             ,
             and
             the
             Spaces
             between
             fill'd
             up
             with
             square
             panes
             of
             Marble
             ,
             Carv'd
             with
             several
             sorts
             of
             Flowers
             ,
             Fruitages
             ,
             Birds
             ,
             and
             other
             Creatures
             ;
             a
             piece
             of
             Workmanship
             no
             less
             Magnificent
             ,
             then
             perfect
             and
             to
             be
             admir'd
             .
             At
             the
             entrance
             of
             the
             Bridge
             toward
             the
             East
             there
             are
             two
             fair
             Pedestals
             rais'd
             high
             ,
             and
             cover'd
             with
             Tables
             of
             Marble
             ,
             upon
             which
             are
             two
             Lyons
             of
             an
             extraordinary
             Size
             ,
             and
             carv'd
             as
             the
             Chineses
             represent
             them
             .
             Between
             the
             Legs
             ,
             upon
             the
             Backs
             ,
             Sides
             and
             Breasts
             of
             these
             Figures
             are
             cut
             in
             the
             same
             Marble
             ,
             several
             young
             Lyons
             in
             several
             Postures
             ,
             some
             slightly
             fastned
             to
             the
             Lyons
             ,
             some
             Rampant
             ,
             other
             Couchant
             ,
             some
             Descending
             ,
             some
             Ascending
             ,
             with
             a
             surprizing
             Beauty
             and
             Delicacy
             .
             At
             the
             other
             end
             ,
             toward
             the
             West
             ,
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             upon
             two
             Pedestals
             ,
             two
             Elephants
             ,
             both
             of
             the
             same
             Marble
             ,
             wrought
             with
             as
             much
             Art
             and
             Perfection
             as
             the
             Lyons
             .
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             forgot
             to
             make
             mention
             either
             of
             the
             one
             or
             the
             other
             ,
             unless
             
             perhaps
             they
             might
             be
             added
             afterwards
             .
             However
             the
             Chineses
             averr
             that
             this
             Bridge
             was
             built
             two
             Thousand
             Years
             ago
             without
             having
             sustain'd
             the
             least
             damage
             in
             all
             that
             time
             ,
             till
             our
             Days
             .
             But
             upon
             the
             Vigil
             of
             St.
             
             Laurence's
             Day
             in
             the
             Year
             1668.
             after
             an
             Extraordinary
             Drought
             which
             had
             lasted
             all
             that
             Year
             ,
             it
             began
             to
             Rain
             ,
             and
             the
             Rain
             continu'd
             Day
             and
             Night
             till
             the
             sixteenth
             of
             August
             ,
             with
             so
             much
             Violence
             ,
             as
             if
             whole
             Rivers
             had
             pour'd
             down
             from
             Heaven
             .
             The
             Seventeenth
             of
             August
             about
             eight
             of
             the
             Clock
             in
             the
             Morning
             ,
             of
             a
             sudden
             there
             came
             a
             Deluge
             that
             overflow'd
             the
             new
             City
             ,
             the
             Suburbs
             and
             the
             Planes
             adjoining
             .
             Presently
             they
             shut
             up
             the
             Gates
             of
             the
             old
             City
             ,
             and
             stopp'd
             up
             all
             the
             holes
             and
             clefts
             with
             Chalk
             and
             Bitumen
             mingled
             together
             ,
             to
             prevent
             the
             entrance
             of
             the
             Water
             .
             But
             the
             third
             part
             of
             the
             Houses
             of
             the
             new
             City
             were
             overturn'd
             ,
             and
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             poor
             Creatures
             ,
             especially
             Women
             and
             Children
             were
             either
             drown'd
             or
             buried
             in
             the
             Ruins
             .
             A
             great
             number
             of
             Villages
             and
             Houses
             of
             pleasure
             were
             carried
             away
             by
             the
             Impetuosity
             of
             the
             Inundation
             ;
             and
             the
             same
             thing
             happen'd
             to
             the
             Neighbouring
             Cities
             .
             All
             the
             People
             fled
             for
             Refuge
             to
             the
             high
             Places
             ;
             or
             clim'd
             up
             to
             the
             tops
             of
             the
             Trees
             ,
             where
             several
             confounded
             with
             their
             Fears
             ,
             or
             fainting
             for
             want
             of
             Food
             ,
             dropt
             down
             into
             the
             Water
             ,
             and
             miserably
             perish'd
             .
             In
             other
             Provinces
             their
             happen'd
             Accidents
             and
             Calamities
             yet
             more
             strange
             ,
             occasion'd
             by
             dreadful
             Earthquakes
             .
             So
             that
             it
             seem'd
             to
             be
             the
             Pleasure
             of
             God
             to
             punish
             those
             Insidels
             for
             the
             Persecution
             which
             they
             had
             rais'd
             against
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             ,
             and
             the
             Preachers
             of
             the
             Gospel
             .
             Never
             was
             ●…en
             the
             like
             Consternation
             in
             that
             Court
             ,
             where
             all
             Men
             were
             reduc'd
             to
             utmost
             despair
             ,
             
             not
             being
             able
             to
             divine
             the
             Cause
             of
             so
             extraordinary
             a
             Deluge
             .
             At
             last
             ,
             the
             King
             ,
             having
             sent
             out
             certain
             People
             upon
             Rafts
             of
             Timber
             ,
             for
             they
             have
             no
             Boats
             at
             Pekim
             ,
             to
             examine
             the
             Reason
             ,
             they
             found
             that
             the
             troubled
             River
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             have
             already
             made
             mention
             ,
             had
             broken
             down
             the
             Damms
             ,
             and
             made
             it self
             a
             new
             Channel
             cross
             the
             Fields
             and
             Suburbs
             of
             the
             City
             ▪
             which
             begat
             such
             an
             amazing
             Fear
             in
             the
             Minds
             of
             the
             People
             ,
             that
             the
             King
             and
             the
             Grandees
             were
             just
             upon
             the
             point
             of
             removing
             to
             some
             other
             place
             .
             The
             same
             Fury
             of
             the
             Inundation
             carried
             away
             several
             Rocks
             ,
             which
             knocking
             against
             the
             Piles
             of
             the
             famous
             Bridge
             ,
             shook
             it
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             ,
             that
             they
             broke
             down
             two
             of
             the
             Arches
             .
          
           
             The
             fifth
             Proof
             is
             ,
             that
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             in
             the
             thirty
             second
             Chapter
             of
             the
             same
             Book
             speaks
             of
             that
             great
             River
             ,
             which
             the
             Tartars
             call
             Caramoran
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Chineses
               ,
               Hoâm
               Hô
            
             ,
             or
             the
             yellow
             River
             ;
             in
             regard
             that
             the
             slimy
             Mud
             which
             it
             carries
             with
             it
             ,
             makes
             the
             Waters
             to
             look
             of
             that
             Colour
             .
             In
             the
             thirty
             sixth
             Chapter
             he
             makes
             mention
             of
             another
             River
             which
             he
             calls
             in
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             ,
             
               ô
               Kiam
            
             ,
             or
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             and
             which
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             said
             already
             ,
             call
             
               Yam
               cu
               Kiam
            
             ,
             or
             the
             River
             Son
             of
             the
             Sea.
             In
             the
             thirty
             sixth
             Chapter
             ,
             describing
             the
             City
             ,
             which
             he
             calls
             Kimsai
             ,
             and
             which
             erroneously
             he
             will
             have
             to
             signifie
             the
             City
             of
             Heaven
             ,
             tho'
             the
             word
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             shew
             hereafter
             ,
             signifies
             a
             Court
             ,
             he
             reports
             several
             Particulars
             concerning
             it
             ;
             for
             example
             ,
             that
             the
             City
             is
             seated
             between
             a
             Great
             Lake
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             River
             ;
             and
             that
             round
             about
             the
             Lake
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             several
             Palaces
             of
             the
             Grandees
             ,
             and
             divers
             Temples
             of
             the
             Bonzes
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             things
             which
             are
             very
             true
             ;
             only
             that
             he
             
             stretches
             too
             far
             where
             he
             says
             that
             the
             City
             is
             an
             hundred
             Miles
             in
             Circuit
             ,
             wherein
             he
             shews
             himself
             rather
             a
             Poet
             then
             an
             Historian
             .
             However
             it
             be
             ,
             the
             Description
             which
             he
             makes
             of
             the
             City
             and
             Palace
             of
             Cambalu
             sufficiently
             demonstrate
             that
             Catai
             is
             a
             part
             of
             China
             ;
             and
             that
             what
             he
             says
             of
             the
             City
             of
             Kimsai
             ,
             is
             enough
             to
             prove
             that
             Mangi
             is
             another
             part
             of
             the
             same
             Empire
             :
             for
             that
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             his
             Relation
             is
             entirely
             conformable
             to
             what
             we
             our selves
             have
             seen
             .
             Yet
             if
             
               M.
               Paulus
            
             had
             understood
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             ,
             as
             he
             says
             he
             understood
             that
             of
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             he
             had
             with
             more
             Exactness
             set
             down
             the
             Names
             of
             the
             Cities
             and
             Provinces
             ,
             and
             other
             particulars
             ,
             which
             he
             reports
             concerning
             that
             Empire
             .
             But
             it
             is
             no
             wonder
             he
             should
             so
             often
             corrupt
             the
             Names
             ,
             since
             we
             our selves
             ,
             who
             upon
             our
             first
             arrival
             appli'd
             our selves
             with
             all
             the
             industry
             imaginable
             to
             understand
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             and
             Language
             ,
             after
             the
             Study
             of
             several
             Years
             were
             frequently
             deceiv'd
             and
             quite
             mistook
             some
             part
             of
             the
             words
             .
             So
             that
             we
             must
             not
             be
             surpriz'd
             if
             a
             Knight
             ,
             who
             only
             minded
             his
             Military
             Designs
             ,
             and
             to
             court
             the
             Favour
             of
             the
             great
             Han
             ,
             and
             only
             convers'd
             with
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             who
             for
             want
             of
             Politeness
             are
             the
             greatest
             Corrupters
             of
             Words
             above
             other
             Nations
             ,
             should
             fall
             into
             the
             same
             Inconvènience
             .
             For
             he
             has
             corrupted
             Names
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             ,
             that
             they
             among
             us
             ,
             who
             have
             the
             greatest
             Knowledge
             of
             the
             Language
             and
             the
             Empire
             ,
             have
             much
             ado
             to
             pick
             out
             the
             meaning
             of
             many
             of
             his
             Mistakes
             .
             Nevertheless
             ,
             by
             a
             strict
             Examination
             of
             the
             Situation
             of
             the
             Places
             ,
             and
             other
             Circumstances
             of
             his
             Relations
             ,
             we
             at
             length
             find
             out
             what
             he
             intends
             .
          
           
             Father
             
               Martin
               Martini
            
             ,
             so
             famous
             for
             his
             Atlas
             of
             China
             ,
             as
             witty
             and
             ingenious
             as
             he
             was
             ,
             could
             
             not
             exempt
             himself
             from
             committing
             the
             like
             Errors
             .
             Insomuch
             ,
             that
             we
             who
             have
             resided
             in
             this
             Empire
             for
             so
             many
             years
             ,
             have
             found
             it
             very
             difficult
             to
             understand
             the
             Persons
             and
             the
             Places
             of
             which
             he
             speaks
             ;
             especially
             in
             the
             Names
             that
             ought
             to
             terminate
             in
             M
             ,
             and
             which
             he
             always
             ends
             in
             Ng.
             For
             example
             instead
             of
             saying
             ▪
             
               Pekim
               ,
               Nankim
               ,
               Chekîam
               ,
               Yûmlie
               ,
               Cûmchîm
               ,
            
             he
             always
             writes
             
               Peking
               ,
               Nanking
               ,
               Chekiang
               ,
               Yeunglie
               ,
               Cungching
               .
            
             Wherein
             he
             must
             of
             necessity
             be
             deceived
             ,
             because
             that
             manner
             of
             writing
             does
             no
             ways
             correspond
             with
             the
             Chinese
             Pronunciation
             ,
             which
             answers
             to
             that
             of
             our
             M.
             and
             not
             of
             
               Ng
               ▪
            
             Nor
             will
             it
             avail
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Germans
             pronounce
             I'm
             ,
             open
             with
             a
             soft
             production
             of
             the
             sound
             almost
             like
             Ng
             ,
             because
             they
             express
             it
             somewhat
             through
             the
             Nose
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             letter
             M
             ,
             whether
             pronunced
             open
             or
             close
             ,
             has
             always
             a
             much
             greater
             correspondence
             with
             the
             Chinese
             and
             Latin
             Pronunciation
             ,
             then
             the
             letters
             Ng.
             So
             much
             the
             more
             ,
             because
             the
             Germans
             pronounce
             I
             'm
             final
             open
             rather
             like
             In
             or
             En
             ,
             then
             Im
             or
             Em.
             So
             that
             indeed
             this
             Reason
             might
             have
             been
             in
             some
             measure
             pardonable
             ,
             had
             the
             Father
             written
             in
             High-Dutch
             ,
             or
             only
             to
             the
             Germans
             ;
             But
             having
             writ
             in
             Latin
             and
             for
             the
             benefit
             of
             all
             Europe
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             have
             conformed
             to
             the
             most
             exact
             and
             common
             Pronunciation
             .
          
           
             
               Philip
               Cluverius
            
             in
             his
             sixth
             Chapter
             of
             his
             sixth
             Book
             ,
             makes
             a
             doubt
             whether
             the
             City
             of
             
               Kimsai
               ▪
            
             of
             which
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             makes
             mention
             in
             his
             sixty
             eighth
             Chapter
             of
             his
             second
             Book
             ,
             w●…re
             the
             Court
             of
             the
             King
             of
             Tartary
             ,
             or
             the
             King
             of
             China
             .
             He
             also
             with
             good
             reason
             takes
             notice
             of
             the
             Hyperboles
             which
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             makes
             us
             in
             describing
             the
             said
             City
             of
             Kimsai
             .
             For
             the
             resolving
             of
             which
             Difficulties
             it
             will
             be
             necessary
             to
             observe
             ,
             
             that
             instead
             of
             Kimsai
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             have
             written
             Kimsu
             ,
             the
             Master
             Court.
             For
             that
             Kim
             signifies
             a
             Court
             ,
             and
             Su
             a
             Master
             :
             The
             Court
             being
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Model
             of
             the
             Rest
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             .
             Kimsai
             then
             ,
             or
             Kimsu
             was
             the
             Court
             of
             the
             Princes
             of
             the
             Family
             of
             Sum
             ,
             whom
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             despoil'd
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             time
             of
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             .
             A
             hundred
             years
             after
             that
             Nankim
             and
             Pekim
             were
             the
             Courts
             of
             the
             Princes
             of
             the
             Family
             of
             Mim
             ,
             which
             of
             later
             Years
             was
             destroyed
             by
             the
             Eastern
             Tartars
             .
             Which
             being
             granted
             ,
             I
             answer
             ,
             that
             
               Father
               Martin
            
             ,
             to
             whom
             I
             refer
             the
             Reader
             for
             fear
             of
             being
             tedious
             ,
             has
             very
             well
             unravell'd
             those
             Difficulties
             ,
             and
             corrected
             the
             Hyperboles
             of
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             ,
             who
             like
             a
             Young
             man
             as
             he
             was
             ,
             has
             enlarg'd
             many
             things
             much
             beyond
             the
             Truth
             .
             Nevertheless
             as
             to
             the
             number
             of
             twelve
             thousand
             Bridges
             ,
             which
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             tells
             us
             there
             are
             in
             Kimsai
             ,
             and
             which
             Father
             Martin
             grants
             for
             a
             Truth
             ,
             I
             cannot
             so
             easily
             give
             my
             consent
             .
             For
             besides
             that
             we
             have
             seen
             the
             contrary
             ,
             the
             Chineses
             themselves
             ,
             who
             stuff
             their
             Writings
             with
             so
             many
             impertinent
             particulars
             ,
             would
             never
             have
             omited
             a
             circumstance
             of
             that
             Importance
             .
             Also
             what
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             relates
             of
             the
             vastness
             of
             several
             Bridges
             under
             which
             Vessels
             may
             Sail
             without
             striking
             their
             Masts
             is
             no
             way
             probable
             ;
             since
             it
             is
             not
             to
             be
             believed
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             be
             all
             so
             ruin'd
             that
             there
             should
             be
             no
             traces
             of
             such
             Structures
             remaining
             .
             Thus
             much
             I
             know
             ,
             that
             a
             Famous
             Chinese
             Author
             who
             has
             written
             a
             Treatise
             of
             the
             Grandeur
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             and
             of
             whom
             I
             shall
             relate
             many
             things
             hereafter
             ,
             does
             not
             allow
             the
             City
             of
             
               Ham
               Cheu
            
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             same
             with
             Kimsai
             ,
             above
             five
             considerable
             Bridges
             .
             Nor
             would
             he
             have
             fail'd
             to
             have
             spoken
             of
             that
             extravagant
             height
             of
             the
             Bridges
             of
             his
             Country
             ,
             had
             there
             been
             any
             
             ground
             for
             his
             so
             doing
             .
             The
             rest
             that
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             relates
             concerning
             this
             City
             is
             true
             ,
             granting
             him
             only
             some
             Excursions
             and
             Enlargements
             according
             to
             his
             Custom
             .
             But
             to
             clear
             all
             disputes
             concerning
             this
             same
             City
             of
             Kimsai
             ,
             more
             especially
             because
             Father
             Martini
             speaking
             of
             this
             
               Ham
               Cheù
            
             in
             his
             Atlas
             ,
             Fol.
             109.
             varies
             in
             what
             he
             says
             of
             the
             Oriental
             and
             Western
             Tartars
             ,
             I
             shall
             here
             produce
             an
             extract
             which
             I
             took
             for
             this
             very
             purpose
             out
             of
             the
             Chronicles
             of
             China
             .
          
           
             To
             the
             end
             then
             that
             Family
             may
             be
             reckon'd
             into
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Imperial
             Families
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             of
             necessity
             that
             Family
             must
             either
             have
             subdu'd
             the
             whole
             or
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             it
             .
             For
             if
             it
             has
             conquered
             no
             more
             then
             only
             two
             or
             three
             Provinces
             ,
             that
             Family
             is
             only
             call'd
             Pam-Chao
             ,
             or
             a
             Collateral
             Kingdom
             ,
             nor
             is
             it
             to
             be
             admitted
             into
             the
             Direct
             Line
             of
             the
             Imperial
             Families
             .
             Those
             then
             that
             we
             are
             now
             to
             speak
             of
             are
             of
             that
             Number
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             year
             of
             JESUS
             CHRIST
             ,
             1200.
             
             A
             Captain
             of
             the
             Oriental
             Tar●…ars
             that
             some
             years
             since
             subdu'd
             this
             Empire
             made
             himself
             Master
             of
             the
             Provinces
             of
             
               Pekim
               Xansi
            
             ,
             and
             Xantum
             ,
             which
             the
             yellow
             River
             separates
             from
             the
             other
             Twelve
             .
             Thereupon
             he
             caused
             himself
             to
             be
             Crown'd
             King
             ,
             and
             Named
             his
             Family
             Tai-Leao
             .
             Some
             Years
             after
             another
             Captain
             of
             the
             Eastern
             Tartars
             made
             War
             upon
             him
             ,
             got
             possession
             of
             his
             Kingdom
             ,
             exterminated
             the
             Reigning
             Family
             ,
             and
             call'd
             his
             Own
             and
             his
             Kingdom
             Tai-Kinque
             ,
             or
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Gold
             ,
             which
             continued
             till
             the
             year
             1260.
             
             At
             what
             time
             the
             other
             twelve
             Provinces
             were
             subdued
             by
             an
             Emperor
             of
             the
             Family
             of
             Sûm
             .
             Upon
             this
             some
             of
             his
             chief
             Ministers
             advis'd
             him
             to
             send
             great
             Presents
             to
             the
             
               Grand
               Han
            
             ,
             who
             
             had
             a
             little
             before
             subdu'd
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             ,
             and
             to
             desire
             his
             Assistance
             for
             the
             Expulsion
             of
             the
             Tartars
             out
             of
             the
             three
             Provinces
             which
             they
             had
             Usurp'd
             .
             But
             others
             of
             his
             Councellors
             laid
             before
             him
             the
             ill
             consequence
             of
             provoking
             that
             terrible
             Nation
             of
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             ,
             or
             molesting
             the
             Eastern
             ,
             with
             whom
             they
             had
             for
             several
             years
             preserv'd
             an
             Amicable
             Correspondence
             ;
             withal
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             no
             good
             Policy
             to
             expel
             Tigres
             ,
             and
             bring
             more
             cruel
             Lions
             into
             their
             Room
             .
             Nevertheless
             the
             first
             Counsel
             ,
             tho
             the
             worst
             ,
             was
             follow'd
             :
             And
             the
             
               Grand
               Han
            
             was
             called
             in
             with
             his
             Tartars
             ,
             already
             the
             Vanquishers
             of
             so
             many
             Nations
             ,
             who
             in
             a
             short
             time
             exterminated
             the
             Family
             of
             
               Tai
               Kim
            
             and
             made
             themselves
             Masters
             of
             the
             three
             Provinces
             .
             But
             so
             soon
             as
             they
             had
             finish'd
             that
             Conquest
             ,
             perfidiously
             they
             turn'd
             their
             Arms
             against
             the
             King
             of
             China
             ,
             who
             kept
             his
             Court
             in
             a
             City
             belonging
             to
             the
             Provinces
             of
             Hônân
             ,
             bordering
             upon
             the
             yellow
             River
             .
             This
             Prince
             being
             terrifi'd
             by
             the
             Neighbourhood
             of
             those
             Barbarians
             fled
             in
             all
             hast
             to
             the
             City
             of
             
               Ham
               Cheû
            
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             the
             
               Che
               Kiam
            
             ,
             where
             he
             setled
             his
             Court.
             Of
             which
             the
             Han
             no
             sooner
             had
             intelligence
             ,
             but
             he
             cross'd
             the
             yellow
             River
             ,
             and
             after
             little
             or
             no
             resistance
             made
             himself
             Master
             of
             the
             Provinces
             of
             
               Ho
               Nam
               ,
               Nan
               Kim
            
             ,
             and
             
               Che
               Kiam
            
             ,
             and
             consequently
             of
             the
             Village
             of
             
               Ham
               Cheû
            
             ,
             which
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             calls
             Kimsai
             .
             Thereupon
             the
             King
             of
             China
             ,
             fled
             into
             the
             Province
             of
             Fo-Kien
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             into
             that
             of
             Quamtum
             ,
             where
             having
             Embark'd
             himself
             with
             a
             design
             to
             seek
             out
             Foreign
             shelter
             ,
             he
             suffer'd
             Shipwrack
             in
             the
             Golf
             of
             the
             Island
             of
             
               Haî
               Nân
            
             ,
             and
             there
             miserably
             perish'd
             ,
             so
             that
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             China
             submitted
             voluntarily
             to
             the
             
               Grand
               Har.
            
             
          
           
           
             This
             is
             what
             I
             have
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Histories
             of
             China
             ,
             by
             which
             it
             is
             clearly
             to
             be
             seen
             that
             
               Ham
               Cheû
            
             ,
             and
             Kimsai
             are
             one
             and
             the
             same
             City
             .
             And
             that
             the
             word
             
               Tai
               Kim
            
             does
             not
             signifie
             a
             Mountain
             ,
             there
             being
             no
             such
             thing
             in
             Tartary
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             imagin'd
             ,
             but
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Gold.
             Which
             is
             the
             Title
             that
             was
             formerly
             given
             to
             the
             Oriental
             Tartars
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               and
               Explanations
               of
               the
               first
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 P.
                 3.
                 
                 As
                 we
                 shall
                 relate
                 in
                 it's
                 due
                 place
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Author
                 ,
                 as
                 has
                 been
                 already
                 said
                 in
                 the
                 Preface
                 ,
                 not
                 being
                 able
                 to
                 finish
                 this
                 Work
                 ,
                 has
                 not
                 according
                 to
                 his
                 promise
                 made
                 out
                 the
                 Original
                 of
                 the
                 Eastern
                 Tartars
                 .
                 Nevertheless
                 several
                 Authors
                 have
                 made
                 some
                 mention
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 as
                 Father
                 Martini
                 in
                 his
                 History
                 of
                 the
                 War
                 of
                 the
                 Tartars
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 his
                 Preface
                 to
                 his
                 Atlas
                 of
                 China
                 :
                 The
                 Embassie
                 of
                 the
                 Hollanders
                 to
                 Pekim
                 .
                 Father
                 
                   Adam
                   Schall
                
                 in
                 his
                 Letters
                 printed
                 at
                 Vienna
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1665.
                 
                 And
                 Father
                 Couplet
                 in
                 his
                 Chronology
                 of
                 China
                 printed
                 this
                 year
                 .
                 By
                 which
                 Authors
                 and
                 particularly
                 by
                 the
                 two
                 latter
                 it
                 appears
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 not
                 above
                 a
                 little
                 while
                 since
                 the
                 Eastern
                 Tartars
                 ,
                 now
                 Masters
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 have
                 had
                 any
                 Kings
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 the
                 Original
                 of
                 those
                 ▪
                 Princes
                 is
                 so
                 obscure
                 ,
                 that
                 as
                 modern
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 altogether
                 intermixed
                 with
                 Fables
                 .
              
               
                 Father
                 Adam
                 reports
                 that
                 the
                 Eldest
                 of
                 the
                 Uncles
                 of
                 the
                 Emperor
                 Xunchi
                 ,
                 the
                 Father
                 of
                 him
                 that
                 now
                 reigns
                 ,
                 had
                 told
                 him
                 several
                 times
                 ,
                 that
                 
                 it
                 was
                 about
                 ten
                 Generations
                 since
                 that
                 three
                 Nymphs
                 or
                 Goddesses
                 called
                 
                   Augela
                   ,
                   Chaugula
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Foecula
                 descended
                 from
                 Heaven
                 to
                 bath
                 themselves
                 in
                 a
                 River
                 of
                 Tartary
                 .
                 That
                 Foecula
                 having
                 discover'd
                 under
                 her
                 Cloths
                 which
                 she
                 left
                 upon
                 the
                 shore
                 ,
                 a
                 sort
                 of
                 Nightshade
                 or
                 Herb
                 call'd
                 Alkakengi
                 with
                 red
                 Fruit
                 ,
                 devour'd
                 it
                 with
                 such
                 a
                 greedy
                 Appetite
                 ,
                 that
                 she
                 became
                 with
                 Child
                 .
                 That
                 her
                 two
                 Companions
                 returning
                 to
                 Heaven
                 she
                 remain'd
                 upon
                 Earth
                 till
                 she
                 was
                 brought
                 to
                 bed
                 of
                 a
                 Boy
                 ;
                 which
                 she
                 suckl'd
                 ,
                 and
                 afterwards
                 left
                 in
                 an
                 Island
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 ,
                 telling
                 him
                 that
                 she
                 was
                 returning
                 to
                 Heaven
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 a
                 Fisherman
                 would
                 come
                 and
                 take
                 care
                 of
                 his
                 Education
                 ,
                 which
                 happen'd
                 accordingly
                 .
                 That
                 this
                 Child
                 became
                 a
                 Man
                 of
                 an
                 extraordinary
                 Valour
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 his
                 Sons
                 and
                 Grand
                 Children
                 rul'd
                 this
                 Country
                 .
                 But
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 fifth
                 Generation
                 the
                 People
                 rebell'd
                 against
                 this
                 Family
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 defeated
                 and
                 exterminated
                 ,
                 all
                 but
                 one
                 who
                 betook
                 himself
                 to
                 flight
                 .
                 This
                 Prince
                 being
                 close
                 pursu'd
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 being
                 able
                 to
                 run
                 any
                 farther
                 ,
                 sate
                 himself
                 down
                 upon
                 the
                 ground
                 despairing
                 to
                 save
                 his
                 life
                 ;
                 At
                 what
                 time
                 a
                 Mag-pye
                 came
                 and
                 perch'd
                 upon
                 his
                 head
                 ,
                 and
                 deluded
                 his
                 Enemies
                 who
                 took
                 him
                 for
                 the
                 stump
                 of
                 a
                 Tree
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 for
                 a
                 Man.
                 And
                 thus
                 it
                 is
                 easie
                 to
                 see
                 ,
                 as
                 Father
                 Adam
                 observes
                 ,
                 that
                 thus
                 far
                 the
                 Relation
                 is
                 altogether
                 Fabulous
                 ,
                 and
                 clearly
                 demonstrates
                 that
                 the
                 Original
                 of
                 the
                 Emperor
                 of
                 China
                 is
                 very
                 obscure
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 nothing
                 of
                 Illustrious
                 or
                 Renowned
                 .
                 That
                 which
                 follows
                 is
                 certain
                 and
                 unquestionable
                 .
                 In
                 regard
                 the
                 Person
                 ,
                 such
                 as
                 he
                 was
                 ,
                 liv'd
                 at
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 this
                 Age
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 himself
                 sufficiently
                 known
                 by
                 the
                 bloody
                 War
                 which
                 he
                 made
                 upon
                 the
                 Chineses
                 in
                 revenge
                 of
                 the
                 Death
                 of
                 his
                 Father
                 ,
                 whom
                 the
                 
                   Chinese
                   Mandarins
                
                 had
                 caus'd
                 to
                 be
                 murdered
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 other
                 
                 outrages
                 committed
                 against
                 his
                 Nation
                 .
                 Father
                 Adam
                 says
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 Lord
                 of
                 the
                 Valley
                 of
                 Moncheu
                 ,
                 which
                 Father
                 Martini
                 takes
                 for
                 a
                 great
                 City
                 .
                 The
                 Emperor
                 Van-liè
                 gave
                 him
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 that
                 same
                 Valley
                 and
                 the
                 neighbouring
                 Countries
                 ,
                 upon
                 condition
                 he
                 should
                 defend
                 them
                 against
                 the
                 Incursions
                 of
                 the
                 Oriental
                 Tartars
                 who
                 were
                 divided
                 into
                 seven
                 small
                 Principalities
                 .
                 He
                 was
                 call'd
                 
                   Tiel
                   Mini
                
                 ,
                 and
                 died
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1628.
                 
                 His
                 Son
                 ,
                 a
                 Person
                 of
                 more
                 Wisdom
                 and
                 Moderation
                 continued
                 the
                 War
                 till
                 his
                 death
                 which
                 happen'd
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1634.
                 
                 Cumtè
                 ,
                 his
                 Son
                 ,
                 in
                 some
                 measure
                 ,
                 compleated
                 the
                 Conquest
                 of
                 the
                 Empire
                 of
                 China
                 ;
                 but
                 died
                 before
                 he
                 obtain'd
                 the
                 possession
                 of
                 it
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1644.
                 
                 His
                 Son
                 Xunchi
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 age
                 of
                 six
                 years
                 ,
                 was
                 acknowledg'd
                 Emperor
                 at
                 Pekim
                 ,
                 and
                 di'd
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1662.
                 
                 Leaving
                 for
                 his
                 Successor
                 his
                 Son
                 Camtri
                 the
                 Monarch
                 reigning
                 at
                 present
                 .
                 This
                 Catalogue
                 of
                 the
                 Tartarian
                 Princes
                 of
                 Father
                 
                 Adam's
                 confirm'd
                 by
                 Father
                 Couplet
                 in
                 his
                 Chronology
                 ,
                 by
                 Father
                 Rougemont
                 in
                 his
                 
                   Historia
                   Tartaro-Sinica
                
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Embassie
                 of
                 the
                 Hollanders
                 ,
                 gives
                 us
                 to
                 understand
                 that
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 had
                 good
                 reason
                 to
                 justifie
                 himself
                 for
                 saying
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Tartars
                 had
                 neither
                 any
                 King
                 ,
                 nor
                 any
                 word
                 to
                 signifie
                 a
                 King
                 ;
                 seeing
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 but
                 in
                 this
                 Age
                 that
                 their
                 Princes
                 have
                 deriv'd
                 their
                 Original
                 from
                 a
                 petty
                 Captain
                 of
                 a
                 Hord
                 ,
                 or
                 chief
                 leader
                 of
                 Banditi's
                 or
                 wandering
                 Tartars
                 .
              
               
                 Here
                 we
                 are
                 farther
                 to
                 observe
                 that
                 Tartary
                 which
                 comprehends
                 all
                 the
                 Nothern
                 Asia
                 is
                 divided
                 by
                 the
                 Chineses
                 into
                 Western
                 and
                 Eastern
                 .
                 The
                 Inhabitants
                 both
                 of
                 the
                 one
                 and
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 are
                 for
                 the
                 most
                 part
                 wanderers
                 with
                 their
                 Flocks
                 and
                 Herds
                 ,
                 and
                 live
                 in
                 Tents
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 Western
                 are
                 incomparably
                 more
                 potent
                 then
                 the
                 Eastern
                 ,
                 in
                 regard
                 they
                 possess
                 all
                 that
                 Country
                 
                 which
                 lies
                 between
                 the
                 extream
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Pekim
                 and
                 the
                 Countries
                 of
                 the
                 Mogul
                 ,
                 the
                 Persian
                 and
                 the
                 Muscovite
                 ;
                 All
                 which
                 they
                 possess'd
                 entirely
                 in
                 the
                 Reign
                 of
                 Saint
                 Lewis
                 .
                 The
                 Eastern
                 Tartary
                 reaches
                 from
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 Leaotûm
                 ,
                 beyond
                 Iapon
                 ,
                 and
                 comprehends
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Niuchè
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 North
                 of
                 Corea
                 ;
                 The
                 Province
                 of
                 Niulhan
                 to
                 the
                 North
                 of
                 Niuchè
                 ;
                 that
                 of
                 Yupi
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 of
                 Niuchè
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 Y●…co
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 North-East
                 of
                 Iapon
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 of
                 Yupi
                 .
                 But
                 these
                 Countries
                 are
                 poor
                 and
                 ill
                 peopled
                 ;
                 There
                 being
                 not
                 above
                 two
                 or
                 three
                 little
                 Cities
                 in
                 them
                 all
                 ;
                 the
                 rest
                 is
                 barren
                 uncultivated
                 ,
                 and
                 full
                 of
                 Woods
                 and
                 Mountains
                 .
                 
                 Nevertheless
                 these
                 Tartars
                 are
                 not
                 a
                 little
                 formidable
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 united
                 ,
                 as
                 being
                 harden'd
                 to
                 labour
                 in
                 a
                 rigorous
                 Climate
                 ,
                 and
                 almost
                 always
                 ahorleback
                 ,
                 and
                 employ'd
                 in
                 hunting
                 or
                 busied
                 in
                 War.
                 They
                 made
                 themselves
                 known
                 by
                 their
                 incursions
                 into
                 China
                 above
                 two
                 hundred
                 years
                 before
                 the
                 Birth
                 of
                 Christ
                 :
                 And
                 in
                 the
                 twelfth
                 Age
                 after
                 the
                 Incarnation
                 they
                 possess'd
                 themselves
                 of
                 the
                 Provinces
                 of
                 
                   Leaotum
                   ,
                   Pekim
                   ,
                   Xensi
                   ,
                   Xansi
                
                 and
                 Xantum
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 Ancestors
                 of
                 the
                 Tartarian
                 Prince
                 who
                 Reigns
                 in
                 China
                 ,
                 were
                 so
                 far
                 from
                 being
                 Masters
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Eastern
                 Tartary
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 not
                 Lords
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Niuchè
                 ,
                 where
                 ,
                 as
                 has
                 been
                 said
                 ,
                 there
                 were
                 seven
                 or
                 eight
                 destinct
                 Sovereigns
                 .
                 And
                 Father
                 Adam
                 observes
                 that
                 Tien●…um
                 Great
                 Grand
                 Father
                 to
                 the
                 Emperor
                 Reigning
                 at
                 Present
                 ,
                 when
                 he
                 enter'd
                 into
                 China
                 ,
                 had
                 not
                 above
                 eight
                 thousand
                 men
                 ,
                 which
                 were
                 soon
                 encreased
                 by
                 the
                 concourse
                 of
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Eastern
                 Tartars
                 ,
                 and
                 an
                 innumerable
                 Number
                 of
                 the
                 Western
                 Tartars
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 fame
                 of
                 his
                 Victories
                 and
                 the
                 noise
                 of
                 prodigious
                 Booty
                 drew
                 to
                 his
                 Assistance
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 P.
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Chahamalaha
                 ,
                 whose
                 Inhabitants
                 are
                 Mahometans
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 borders
                 upon
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Xensi
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 Name
                 of
                 Chahamalaha
                 ,
                 is
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 as
                 I
                 verily
                 believe
                 ,
                 in
                 any
                 Mapp
                 ,
                 nor
                 in
                 any
                 other
                 Relation
                 ;
                 But
                 I
                 am
                 perswaded
                 by
                 what
                 our
                 Author
                 say's
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 the
                 same
                 place
                 which
                 Father
                 Martini
                 calls
                 Samahania
                 ;
                 and
                 which
                 ,
                 as
                 he
                 does
                 ,
                 I
                 take
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 the
                 Usbegs
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 Mavralnara
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 Samarcand
                 is
                 the
                 chief
                 City
                 :
                 For
                 that
                 we
                 know
                 not
                 of
                 any
                 other
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Mahometans
                 to
                 the
                 West
                 of
                 Xensi
                 ,
                 where
                 there
                 are
                 several
                 considerable
                 Cities
                 ,
                 Palaces
                 and
                 Houses
                 artificially
                 built
                 ,
                 and
                 good
                 Architecture
                 ,
                 store
                 of
                 Gold
                 and
                 Silver-Plates
                 and
                 other
                 things
                 which
                 the
                 Chineses
                 allow
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 
                   Samahania
                   or
                   Samahan
                
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 report
                 of
                 Father
                 Martini
                 .
                 Nor
                 must
                 we
                 be
                 surpriz'd
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Chineses
                 assure
                 us
                 that
                 this
                 Kingdom
                 borders
                 upon
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Xensi
                 ;
                 for
                 that
                 they
                 never
                 travel
                 toward
                 the
                 West
                 ,
                 nor
                 have
                 any
                 other
                 knowledge
                 of
                 the
                 Countries
                 situated
                 Westward
                 ,
                 then
                 what
                 they
                 learn
                 from
                 the
                 Information
                 of
                 the
                 Caravans
                 that
                 come
                 once
                 in
                 two
                 or
                 three
                 years
                 to
                 trade
                 in
                 China
                 ,
                 under
                 pretence
                 of
                 an
                 Embassie
                 .
                 For
                 the
                 Merchants
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 that
                 Invention
                 ,
                 to
                 get
                 leave
                 to
                 enter
                 into
                 China
                 ,
                 which
                 would
                 be
                 otherwise
                 deny'd
                 them
                 .
                 They
                 rendevouze
                 in
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Cascar
                 ,
                 as
                 you
                 may
                 find
                 in
                 the
                 Travels
                 of
                 
                   Benedict
                   Goez
                
                 ,
                 inserted
                 into
                 the
                 Relation
                 of
                 Father
                 Trigaut
                 .
                 But
                 formerly
                 and
                 especially
                 in
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 Tamerlan
                 ,
                 who
                 made
                 Samarcand
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 chiefest
                 Cities
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 ,
                 they
                 went
                 for
                 the
                 most
                 part
                 from
                 that
                 City
                 .
                 And
                 it
                 is
                 very
                 probable
                 that
                 those
                 Merchants
                 to
                 give
                 themselves
                 the
                 greater
                 
                 reputation
                 ,
                 assum'd
                 to
                 themselves
                 to
                 be
                 all
                 of
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Samarcand
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 the
                 Chineses
                 ,
                 who
                 want
                 the
                 Letter
                 R
                 ,
                 and
                 easily
                 confound
                 C.
                 with
                 H
                 ,
                 wrote
                 Samahand
                 ,
                 instead
                 of
                 Samarcand
                 .
                 For
                 the
                 same
                 reason
                 also
                 the
                 Chineses
                 observing
                 the
                 Merchants
                 arrive
                 
                   à
                   Sucheu
                
                 the
                 last
                 City
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Xensi
                 ,
                 and
                 styling
                 themselves
                 all
                 Natives
                 of
                 Samahan
                 or
                 Samarcand
                 ,
                 might
                 readily
                 believe
                 that
                 Samahan
                 border'd
                 upon
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Xensi
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   P.
                   3.
                
                 
                 Usanguè
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 must
                 certainly
                 be
                 the
                 same
                 Country
                 which
                 Father
                 Martini
                 calls
                 Usucang
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 is
                 contained
                 within
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 which
                 the
                 Chineses
                 call
                 Sifan
                 ,
                 situated
                 to
                 the
                 West
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Suchuen
                 ,
                 The
                 Relation
                 of
                 Father
                 
                   Anthony
                   de
                   Andrada
                
                 calls
                 it
                 also
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 Ussanguè
                 ,
                 and
                 says
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 situated
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 of
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Tibet
                 ,
                 twenty
                 days
                 journey
                 from
                 China
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   P.
                   3.
                   
                   Father
                
                 Antony
                 de
                 Andrada
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 Father
                 
                   Anthony
                   de
                   Andrada
                
                 travelled
                 twice
                 into
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Tibet
                 .
                 The
                 Relation
                 of
                 his
                 Second
                 Travels
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1624.
                 with
                 Father
                 
                   Concalo
                   de
                   Sousa
                
                 which
                 was
                 Printed
                 at
                 Lisbon
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1628.
                 speaks
                 very
                 clearly
                 of
                 China
                 .
                 For
                 there
                 we
                 find
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 not
                 above
                 twenty
                 days
                 journey
                 from
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Ussanguè
                 or
                 Ussang
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 Ussang
                 is
                 not
                 above
                 forty
                 days
                 journey
                 from
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Caparange
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Tibet
                 keeps
                 his
                 Court
                 ,
                 and
                 where
                 those
                 Fathers
                 arriv'd
                 from
                 
                 Agra
                 in
                 less
                 then
                 two
                 months
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 ,
                 passing
                 through
                 Sirinagar
                 .
                 As
                 for
                 Catai
                 ,
                 in
                 regard
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 Tibet
                 are
                 very
                 ignorant
                 ,
                 they
                 spoke
                 of
                 it
                 very
                 confusedly
                 to
                 Father
                 Andrada
                 ;
                 to
                 whom
                 they
                 asserted
                 that
                 Catai
                 was
                 a
                 great
                 City
                 .
                 By
                 the
                 way
                 we
                 may
                 observe
                 ,
                 that
                 by
                 that
                 Relation
                 and
                 by
                 the
                 Atlas
                 of
                 Father
                 Martini
                 ,
                 who
                 in
                 his
                 History
                 of
                 the
                 War
                 of
                 the
                 Tartars
                 tells
                 us
                 also
                 that
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Suchuen
                 borders
                 upon
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Tibet
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Tibet
                 is
                 situated
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 of
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 the
                 Great
                 Mogul
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 to
                 the
                 North
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 most
                 part
                 of
                 our
                 Maps
                 place
                 it
                 .
                 So
                 much
                 the
                 rather
                 ,
                 for
                 that
                 Father
                 
                   Benedict
                   Goez
                
                 in
                 his
                 Travels
                 which
                 he
                 made
                 always
                 to
                 the
                 North
                 of
                 the
                 Empire
                 of
                 the
                 Great
                 Mogul
                 ;
                 from
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 the
                 Usbegs
                 travelling
                 continually
                 Eastward
                 as
                 far
                 as
                 China
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   P.
                   5.
                
                 
                 The
                 Tartarian
                 Alphabet
                 which
                 we
                 shall
                 give
                 you
                 in
                 due
                 place
                 .
              
               
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 ,
                 not
                 being
                 able
                 to
                 perfect
                 his
                 Work
                 ,
                 has
                 not
                 given
                 us
                 this
                 Tartarian
                 Alphabet
                 .
                 But
                 it
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 in
                 the
                 Grammar
                 made
                 by
                 Father
                 
                   Ferdinand
                   de
                   Verbiest
                
                 ,
                 which
                 will
                 suddenly
                 be
                 printed
                 at
                 Paris
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   P.
                   6.
                   
                   Mangi
                
                 ,
                 or
                 Mantzu
                 ,
                 Barbarians
                 .
              
               
                 Father
                 
                   Nicholas
                   Longobardo
                
                 in
                 his
                 Letter
                 written
                 from
                 China
                 1598.
                 and
                 printed
                 in
                 Latin
                 at
                 Mayence
                 in
                 1601.
                 tells
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Chineses
                 call'd
                 those
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 
                   Quamtum
                   Mangi
                
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 
                   Barbarians
                   .
                   Manginos
                
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 Barbarous
                 People
                 ,
                 which
                 confirms
                 the
                 opinion
                 of
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 
                   P.
                   10.
                
                 
                 Stone-Coal
                 ,
                 and
                 Stoves
                 of
                 China
                 .
              
               
                 Almost
                 all
                 Authors
                 that
                 speak
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 agree
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 Northern
                 Provinces
                 the
                 cold
                 is
                 much
                 more
                 intense
                 ,
                 then
                 it
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 ,
                 considering
                 the
                 climate
                 ,
                 and
                 situation
                 under
                 the
                 fortieth
                 or
                 forty
                 second
                 degree
                 .
                 They
                 also
                 speak
                 of
                 the
                 Stoves
                 which
                 are
                 very
                 Common
                 ,
                 and
                 built
                 all
                 alike
                 in
                 all
                 those
                 Northern
                 Provinces
                 .
                 See
                 the
                 Relation
                 of
                 Father
                 
                   Trigant
                   l.
                
                 4.
                 c
                 3.
                 
                 Father
                 Semedo
                 .
                 Part
                 1.
                 c.
                 3.
                 and
                 Father
                 
                 Martini's
                 Atlas
                 in
                 his
                 Description
                 of
                 the
                 Provinces
                 of
                 Xansi
                 ,
                 and
                 Pekim
                 ,
                 where
                 he
                 says
                 that
                 the
                 two
                 Mountains
                 out
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 dig
                 their
                 coal
                 ,
                 are
                 very
                 near
                 to
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Pimko
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 call'd
                 Kie
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   Siu
                   vu
                
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   P.
                   12.
                
                 
                 That
                 which
                 causes
                 M.
                 Polo
                 to
                 commit
                 these
                 Mistakes
                 ,
                 is
                 this
                 ,
                 that
                 three
                 leagues
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 Father
                 Martini
                 in
                 the
                 Description
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Pekim
                 confirms
                 this
                 conjecture
                 in
                 these
                 words
                 .
                 
                   The
                   River
                   
                     Lu
                     keu
                  
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   also
                   call'd
                   Sangean
                   ,
                   passes
                   to
                   the
                   South-West
                   of
                   the
                   Royal
                   City
                   .
                   You
                   cross
                   over
                   a
                   stately
                   Bridge
                   where
                   a
                   man
                   may
                   count
                   several
                   Arches
                   of
                   Stone
                   ,
                   't
                   is
                   plain
                   that
                   he
                   speaks
                   of
                   the
                   River
                   that
                   runs
                   to
                   the
                   West
                   of
                   Pekim
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   Bridge
                   built
                   over
                   it
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   this
                   is
                   that
                   of
                   which
                   
                     M.
                     Polo
                  
                   makes
                   mention
                   .
                
                 For
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 great
                 difference
                 between
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 Sangean
                 ,
                 which
                 Father
                 Martini
                 gives
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 of
                 Sangean
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Buli
                   Sangan
                
                 ,
                 as
                 M.
                 Polo
                 calls
                 it
                 .
                 Father
                 Greslon
                 in
                 his
                 History
                 of
                 
                   China
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 8.
                 speaks
                 of
                 an
                 Eastern
                 Bridge
                 ,
                 in
                 these
                 words
                 ;
                 In
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Pekim
                 ,
                 there
                 was
                 a
                 Bridge
                 of
                 an
                 admirable
                 Structure
                 ,
                 above
                 three
                 hundred
                 paces
                 in
                 length
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 two
                 Arches
                 are
                 broken
                 .
                 And
                 
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 tells
                 the
                 true
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 fall
                 of
                 those
                 two
                 Arches
                 the
                 ninth
                 of
                 August
                 1668.
                 
                 To
                 which
                 Father
                 Greslon
                 adds
                 ,
                 That
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Bridge
                 fell
                 the
                 26.
                 of
                 the
                 month
                 of
                 Aug.
                 the
                 same
                 year
                 .
                 He
                 says
                 moreover
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 call'd
                 Lo-Co-Kaio
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 had
                 been
                 built
                 a
                 thousand
                 years
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 not
                 above
                 six
                 Leagues
                 from
                 Pekim
                 .
                 The
                 Fathers
                 Rougemont
                 and
                 Intorcetta
                 in
                 their
                 Relations
                 confirm
                 the
                 fall
                 of
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Bridge
                 the
                 26
                 of
                 August
                 1668.
                 three
                 thousand
                 years
                 after
                 it
                 was
                 first
                 laid
                 :
                 And
                 the
                 first
                 of
                 those
                 Fathers
                 tells
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 same
                 Bridge
                 was
                 three
                 hundred
                 and
                 sixty
                 paces
                 in
                 length
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 P.
                 15.
                 
              
               
                 These
                 Reasons
                 of
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 are
                 so
                 much
                 the
                 stronger
                 ,
                 because
                 his
                 Opinion
                 is
                 conformable
                 to
                 the
                 practice
                 of
                 all
                 those
                 that
                 have
                 wrote
                 concerning
                 China
                 ,
                 both
                 before
                 and
                 after
                 him
                 ,
                 as
                 Father
                 Adam
                 ,
                 a
                 German
                 ;
                 Father
                 Greslon
                 ,
                 a
                 Frenchman
                 ;
                 Father
                 Semedo
                 ,
                 an
                 Italian
                 ;
                 Father
                 Rougemont
                 ,
                 a
                 
                   Flemming
                   ,
                   &c.
                
                 
                 And
                 for
                 that
                 Father
                 Martini
                 has
                 not
                 been
                 follow'd
                 by
                 any
                 but
                 by
                 the
                 Author
                 of
                 the
                 Embassie
                 ,
                 who
                 has
                 either
                 copy'd
                 or
                 borrowed
                 from
                 Father
                 Martini
                 ,
                 all
                 that
                 he
                 speaks
                 concerning
                 China
                 ,
                 except
                 the
                 Gests
                 of
                 the
                 Embassadors
                 from
                 Camtum
                 to
                 Pekim
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Negotiations
                 .
                 So
                 that
                 't
                 is
                 no
                 wonder
                 the
                 one
                 has
                 imitated
                 the
                 other
                 in
                 his
                 Orthography
                 .
                 Father
                 Greslon
                 also
                 in
                 the
                 Preface
                 to
                 his
                 Relation
                 ,
                 proves
                 against
                 Father
                 Martini
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Chinese
                 words
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 pronounced
                 as
                 our
                 Author
                 tells
                 us
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 P.
                 16.
                 
              
               
                 We
                 could
                 add
                 several
                 other
                 Reasons
                 to
                 prove
                 
                 that
                 Catai
                 is
                 no
                 other
                 then
                 China
                 deduc'd
                 from
                 the
                 Silk
                 ,
                 many
                 Fruits
                 ,
                 Plants
                 and
                 Animals
                 ,
                 which
                 according
                 to
                 
                   M.
                   Polo
                
                 breed
                 and
                 grow
                 in
                 China
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 in
                 any
                 part
                 of
                 Tartary
                 .
                 But
                 this
                 has
                 been
                 so
                 often
                 bandy'd
                 about
                 for
                 these
                 hundred
                 years
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 Authors
                 who
                 have
                 writ
                 upon
                 this
                 Subject
                 ,
                 have
                 prov'd
                 it
                 by
                 so
                 many
                 different
                 Arguments
                 ,
                 besides
                 what
                 our
                 Author
                 alledges
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 would
                 be
                 but
                 time
                 ill
                 spent
                 to
                 labour
                 any
                 more
                 about
                 it
                 .
                 Besides
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 person
                 now
                 that
                 questions
                 ,
                 or
                 can
                 doubt
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 unless
                 he
                 would
                 be
                 wilfully
                 blind
                 ;
                 I
                 shall
                 only
                 observe
                 that
                 the
                 reason
                 why
                 men
                 might
                 formerly
                 be
                 deluded
                 was
                 this
                 ;
                 because
                 that
                 when
                 the
                 Western
                 Tartars
                 undertook
                 the
                 Conquest
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 there
                 were
                 two
                 Emperors
                 :
                 The
                 one
                 was
                 the
                 Real
                 Chinese
                 Emperor
                 of
                 the
                 Family
                 Sum
                 ,
                 who
                 possess'd
                 the
                 twelve
                 Southern
                 Provinces
                 ;
                 the
                 other
                 was
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 the
                 Eastern
                 Tartars
                 of
                 the
                 Family
                 Tai-kin
                 ,
                 who
                 possessed
                 the
                 three
                 Northern
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 Leaotum
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Eastern
                 Tartary
                 .
                 These
                 two
                 Emperors
                 were
                 vanquish'd
                 one
                 after
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Kingdoms
                 subdu'd
                 between
                 the
                 years
                 1225.
                 and
                 1280.
                 
                 This
                 being
                 granted
                 ,
                 it
                 may
                 be
                 readily
                 apprehended
                 ,
                 how
                 easie
                 it
                 was
                 for
                 the
                 Oriental
                 Authors
                 ,
                 and
                 such
                 as
                 had
                 heard
                 talk
                 of
                 those
                 Conquests
                 ,
                 to
                 believe
                 that
                 the
                 real
                 Emperor
                 of
                 China
                 was
                 Master
                 of
                 all
                 China
                 ,
                 as
                 now
                 we
                 know
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 the
                 other
                 Emperor
                 of
                 the
                 Family
                 Tai-kin
                 ,
                 whose
                 Empire
                 was
                 more
                 Northerly
                 ,
                 liv'd
                 in
                 Tartary
                 to
                 the
                 North
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Wall
                 ;
                 where
                 for
                 that
                 reason
                 our
                 Ancient
                 Geographers
                 have
                 placed
                 Cambalu
                 ,
                 and
                 many
                 other
                 Cities
                 and
                 Countries
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               II.
            
             Of
             the
             Extent
             and
             Division
             of
             China
             :
             Of
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Cities
             and
             other
             wall'd
             Towns
             ;
             And
             some
             other
             particulars
             observed
             by
             the
             Chinese
             Authors
             .
          
           
             IT
             is
             now
             eighteen
             years
             since
             Father
             
               Francis
               Fierrado
            
             Vice-Provincial
             of
             China
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             Visitor
             of
             Iapan
             and
             China
             ,
             order'd
             me
             to
             write
             the
             History
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             and
             the
             Progress
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             there
             first
             begun
             to
             be
             preach'd
             now
             fourscore
             and
             thirteen
             years
             ago
             ;
             But
             the
             Employments
             of
             the
             Mission
             ,
             and
             the
             Persecutions
             we
             have
             undergone
             ,
             have
             hindr'd
             me
             from
             going
             on
             with
             it
             .
             The
             Fathers
             
               Nicholas
               Trigaut
            
             a
             Flemming
             ,
             
               Alvaro
               Semedo
            
             a
             
               Portuguese
               ,
               Martini
            
             Native
             of
             
               Trent
               ,
               Antony
               Govea
            
             ,
             and
             
               Ignatius
               de
               Costa
            
             in
             their
             yearly
             Relations
             have
             treated
             very
             largely
             upon
             this
             Subject
             .
             But
             the
             Beauty
             ,
             the
             Grandeur
             ,
             and
             the
             Antiquity
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             are
             such
             copious
             Subjects
             ,
             that
             though
             there
             has
             been
             much
             already
             written
             concerning
             them
             ,
             yet
             there
             remains
             much
             more
             to
             be
             said
             .
             Wherefore
             I
             thought
             it
             my
             duty
             to
             set
             down
             in
             this
             place
             the
             chiefest
             Observations
             which
             I
             have
             collected
             together
          
           
             China
             is
             seated
             almost
             at
             the
             utmost
             Extremities
             of
             Asia
             towards
             the
             East
             .
             It
             lies
             under
             twenty
             three
             degrees
             from
             North
             to
             South
             ,
             from
             the
             
             Fortress
             of
             
               Cai
               Pim
            
             ,
             placed
             upon
             the
             Frontiers
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Pekim
             in
             forty
             one
             degrees
             of
             Latitude
             to
             the
             Meridional
             point
             of
             the
             Island
             of
             
               Hai
               Nan
            
             in
             eighteen
             degrees
             of
             Elevation
             ,
             and
             A
             to
             the
             South
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Quamtum
             .
             So
             that
             the
             length
             of
             China
             from
             North
             to
             South
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Chinese
             Books
             ,
             is
             five
             thousand
             seven
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             Li
             ,
             or
             Furlongs
             .
             Which
             makes
          
           
             
               402½
               Spanish
               or
               Portugal
               Leagues
               at
               17½
               to
               a
               degree
               .
            
          
           
             
               575
               French
               Leagues
               at
               25.
               to
               a
               degree
               .
            
             
               ●…45
               German
               at
               15.
               to
               a
               degree
               .
            
             
               1380
               Italian
               Miles
               at
               60.
               to
               a
               degree
               .
            
             
               5750
               Li
               or
               Chinese
               Furlongs
               at
               250.
               to
               a
               degree
               .
            
          
           
             From
             the
             Point
             of
             
               Nîm
               Pô
            
             ,
             a
             Sea-port
             Town
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Che-kiam
             ,
             where
             the
             Portugals
             were
             formerly
             wont
             to
             trade
             ,
             and
             which
             
               Ferdinand
               Mendez
            
             calls
             
               Leam
               Po
            
             ,
             to
             the
             extremity
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Suchuen
             in
             a
             streight
             Line
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             it
             is
             accounted
          
           
             
               297
               Spanish
               and
               Portugal
               Leagues
               .
            
             
               426
               French
               Leagues
               .
            
             
               255
               German
               Miles
               .
            
             
               1020
               Italian
               Miles
               .
            
             
               4080
               Chinese
               Furlongs
               at
               240
               to
               a
               degree
               .
            
          
           
             But
             if
             you
             would
             have
             the
             length
             of
             China
             where
             it
             is
             longest
             ,
             you
             must
             take
             it
             from
             the
             last
             place
             to
             the
             North-west
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Leaotum
             call'd
             Caiyven
             ,
             to
             the
             last
             City
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Yunnan
             call'd
             
               Cin
               tien
               Kiun
               min
               Fu.
            
             Take
             it
             thus
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             longest
             length
             of
             this
             Empire
             will
             b●…
          
           
             
             
               525
               Spanish
               Leagues
               .
            
             
               750
               French
               Leagues
               .
            
             
               1800
               Italian
               Miles
               .
            
             
               8400
               Chinese
               Furlongs
               ,
               at
               four
               and
               a
               half
               to
               a
               Mile
               of
               Italy
               .
            
          
           
             The
             truest
             breadth
             of
             China
             ,
             to
             take
             it
             from
             
               Tam
               Chan
            
             ,
             the
             most
             Easterly
             place
             of
             the
             Country
             of
             
               Leao
               tum
            
             ,
             and
             which
             joins
             to
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Corea
             ,
             to
             the
             Place
             call'd
             
               Tum
               tim
            
             to
             the
             West
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Xensi
             is
          
           
             
               350
               Spanish
               Leagues
               .
            
             
               500
               French
               Leagues
               .
            
             
               300
               German
               Miles
               .
            
             
               1200
               Italian
               Miles
               .
            
             
               5400
               Chinese
               Furlongs
               .
            
          
           
             There
             are
             fifteen
             Provinces
             in
             this
             Empire
             ,
             which
             for
             their
             largeness
             ,
             their
             Riches
             and
             Fertility
             may
             well
             be
             call'd
             Kingdoms
             .
             Which
             the
             Chineses
             rank
             in
             this
             Order
             according
             to
             their
             Antiquity
             and
             Precedency
             .
             
               Pe
               kim
               ,
               Nan
               kim
            
             ,
             now
             call'd
             
               Kiām
               Nân
               ,
               Xansi
               ,
               Xantum
               ,
               Hô
               nân
               ,
               Xénsi
               ,
               Che
               Kiam
               ,
               Kiam
               si
               ,
               Hù
               quam
               ,
               Su
               chuen
               ,
               Fo
               Kien
               ,
               Quám
               tūm
               ,
               Quam
               si
               ,
               Yunnan
               ,
               Quei
               cheum
               .
            
             The
             Country
             of
             
               Leao
               tum
            
             might
             also
             well
             deserve
             the
             Name
             of
             a
             Province
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             extent
             ;
             but
             the
             Chineses
             include
             it
             within
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xan
               tum
            
             .
             The
             Provinces
             that
             lie
             upon
             the
             Sea
             are
             
               Pe
               kim
               ,
               Xan
               tum
               ,
               Nan
               kim
               ,
               Che
               Kiam
               ,
               Fo
               Kien
               ,
            
             and
             
               Quam
               tum
            
             .
             Those
             that
             border
             upon
             Foreign
             Kingdoms
             are
             
               Pekim
               ,
               Xansi
               ,
               Xensi
               ,
               Su
               chuen
               ,
               Yunnan
               ,
               Quamsi
               .
            
             The
             Midland
             Provinces
             are
             
               Honan
               ,
               Hu
               quam
               ,
               Kiamsi
               ,
               Quci
               cheu
               .
            
             By
             which
             it
             appears
             that
             Cluverius
             trusted
             too
             unwarily
             to
             false
             
             Relations
             ,
             when
             he
             reckons
             up
             Eighteen
             Provinces
             in
             China
             ,
             and
             among
             the
             rest
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Cochinchina
             .
             For
             tho'
             that
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             
               Tum
               Kim
            
             were
             formerly
             subject
             to
             China
             ,
             't
             was
             but
             for
             a
             very
             few
             Years
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             a
             long
             time
             ago
             since
             they
             threw
             off
             that
             subjection
             .
             There
             are
             several
             Islands
             also
             belonging
             to
             China
             ;
             as
             the
             Great
             and
             Little
             
               Lieu
               Kieu
               ;
               Tai
               Van
            
             ,
             which
             the
             Portugueses
             call
             Formosa
             ,
             where
             the
             Hollanders
             had
             a
             Fortress
             which
             was
             wrested
             out
             of
             their
             hands
             by
             a
             Chinese
             Pirate
             some
             Years
             since
             ,
             and
             where
             they
             lost
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Men
             ,
             and
             great
             Guns
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             quantity
             of
             Goods
             .
             
               Hai
               Nan
            
             and
             
               Hiam
               Xan
            
             ,
             where
             stands
             the
             City
             of
             Amagao
             ,
             or
             Macao
             ,
             upon
             the
             Southern
             Promontory
             of
             that
             Island
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             number
             of
             others
             ,
             some
             Inhabited
             ,
             others
             quite
             Desart
             .
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             Corea
             is
             not
             an
             Island
             adjoining
             to
             China
             ,
             as
             Cluverius
             believes
             ,
             but
             a
             great
             Promontory
             of
             the
             Firm
             Land
             ,
             extending
             it self
             from
             the
             North
             to
             the
             South
             .
             Neither
             is
             
               Xam
               Haì
            
             an
             Island
             ,
             as
             Martini
             writes
             in
             his
             Atlas
             ,
             and
             marks
             it
             in
             his
             Map
             ;
             but
             a
             Fortress
             so
             vast
             and
             so
             well
             fortisi'd
             by
             Art
             and
             Nature
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             compare
             with
             the
             best
             in
             Europe
             .
             It
             stands
             upon
             the
             firm
             Land
             near
             the
             Sea
             ,
             between
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             and
             the
             Country
             of
             
               Leao
               tum
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Places
             Wall'd
             in
             ,
             through
             the
             whole
             extent
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             amount
             to
             the
             number
             of
             Four
             Thousand
             Four
             Hundred
             and
             Two
             ;
             and
             are
             divided
             into
             Two
             Orders
             ,
             the
             Civil
             and
             Military
             .
             The
             Civil
             Order
             comprehends
             Two
             Thousand
             Forty
             Five
             Wall'd
             Towns
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             One
             Hundred
             Seventy
             Five
             Cities
             of
             the
             first
             Rank
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             Fu
             :
             Two
             Hundred
             Seventy
             Four
             of
             the
             Second
             Order
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Cheū
             ,
             One
             Thousand
             Two
             Hundred
             Eighty
             and
             
             Eight
             Cities
             which
             they
             call
             Hièn
             ,
             Two
             Hundred
             and
             Five
             Royal
             Hosteries
             ,
             or
             Places
             of
             Entertainment
             ,
             call'd
             Ye
             ;
             and
             an
             Hundred
             and
             Three
             Courts
             of
             Guard
             ,
             or
             Royal
             Hosteries
             of
             the
             Second
             Rank
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               Cham
               Chin.
            
             
          
           
             Among
             the
             Cities
             and
             Towns
             of
             this
             Empire
             I
             reckon
             several
             ,
             seated
             in
             the
             Provinces
             of
             
               Yun
               Nan
               ,
               Quei
               cheum
               ,
               Quam
               Si
               ,
            
             and
             
               Su
               chuen
            
             ,
             which
             however
             pay
             no
             Tribute
             to
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             nor
             yeild
             him
             any
             Obedience
             ,
             but
             are
             govern'd
             by
             particular
             and
             absolute
             Princes
             .
             These
             Towns
             are
             for
             the
             most
             part
             so
             environ'd
             with
             high
             Mountains
             and
             steep
             Rocks
             ,
             as
             if
             Nature
             had
             taken
             a
             particular
             Care
             of
             their
             Fortification
             .
             Within
             which
             Mountains
             lie
             Fields
             and
             Plains
             for
             several
             Days
             Journeys
             ;
             where
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             Cities
             both
             of
             the
             first
             and
             second
             Rank
             together
             with
             many
             Towns
             and
             Villages
             .
             The
             Chineses
             call
             these
             Lords
             
               Tù
               Sù
            
             ,
             or
             
               Tù
               Quon
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Country
             :
             For
             that
             as
             they
             believe
             there
             is
             no
             Emperour
             of
             the
             World
             but
             the
             Emperour
             of
             China
             ,
             so
             they
             are
             conceited
             that
             there
             are
             no
             other
             Princes
             or
             Lords
             but
             such
             as
             they
             to
             whom
             the
             Emperour
             gives
             that
             Title
             .
             Nor
             do
             they
             give
             the
             Title
             of
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Land
             or
             Country
             to
             those
             ,
             but
             to
             distinguish
             them
             from
             others
             by
             a
             kind
             of
             Contempt
             of
             Foreigners
             .
             The
             People
             that
             are
             subject
             to
             these
             Lords
             speak
             the
             same
             Language
             with
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             altho'
             besides
             that
             ,
             they
             have
             a
             particular
             Language
             also
             .
             Their
             Manners
             and
             Customs
             are
             somewhat
             different
             from
             those
             of
             the
             Chineses
             :
             nevertheless
             their
             Complexion
             and
             the
             Shape
             of
             their
             Bodies
             are
             altogether
             alike
             ;
             but
             as
             to
             their
             Courage
             ,
             you
             would
             think
             them
             to
             be
             quite
             another
             Nation
             .
             The
             Chineses
             stand
             in
             fear
             of
             them
             ;
             so
             that
             after
             several
             Tryals
             which
             they
             have
             made
             of
             their
             
             Prowess
             ,
             they
             have
             been
             forc'd
             to
             let
             them
             live
             at
             their
             own
             liberty
             ,
             and
             to
             consent
             to
             a
             free
             Traffick
             and
             Commerce
             with
             them
             .
             In
             the
             Relation
             which
             I
             have
             made
             of
             that
             Famous
             Tyrant
             
             
               Châm
               Hiém
               Chùm
            
             ,
             concerning
             which
             Father
             Martini
             wrote
             to
             me
             upon
             his
             return
             out
             of
             Europe
             ,
             that
             he
             had
             left
             a
             Copy
             of
             it
             in
             the
             Secretary's
             Office
             at
             Rome
             ,
             and
             another
             in
             the
             College
             of
             Conimbre
             ,
             where
             it
             was
             publickly
             read
             ,
             I
             give
             an
             account
             of
             what
             be●…ell
             one
             of
             these
             Sovereign
             Lords
             .
             I
             shall
             here
             repeat
             it
             in
             few
             words
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             the
             Puissance
             of
             this
             Empire
             may
             be
             the
             better
             understood
             ,
             where
             they
             make
             little
             account
             of
             the
             Forces
             of
             these
             Lords
             ,
             tho'
             they
             are
             very
             considerable
             ,
             and
             that
             their
             Dominions
             are
             seated
             in
             the
             heart
             of
             the
             Provinces
             of
             China
             .
          
           
             The
             Tyrant
             
               Cham
               Hien
               Chum
            
             not
             enduring
             there
             should
             be
             any
             one
             that
             refus'd
             to
             yield
             him
             Obedience
             in
             the
             Province
             where
             he
             had
             caus'd
             himself
             to
             be
             Crown'd
             ,
             and
             where
             he
             vaunted
             that
             he
             had
             laid
             the
             Foundations
             of
             his
             Empire
             ,
             sent
             a
             Command
             to
             one
             of
             these
             Lords
             whose
             Principality
             lay
             nearest
             to
             his
             Court
             ,
             to
             come
             and
             attend
             his
             Person
             ,
             acknowledge
             him
             his
             Sovereign
             ,
             and
             pay
             him
             that
             Tribute
             which
             was
             due
             to
             him
             .
             The
             Lord
             sent
             him
             back
             for
             Answer
             ,
             that
             neither
             he
             nor
             his
             Predecessors
             had
             ever
             paid
             any
             Tribute
             to
             the
             Emperour
             of
             China
             ;
             which
             Answer
             put
             the
             Tyrant
             into
             such
             a
             Chase
             ,
             that
             he
             immediately
             sent
             an
             Army
             to
             force
             him
             to
             Obedience
             .
             But
             his
             Army
             was
             in
             a
             short
             time
             deseated
             by
             the
             Prince
             .
             
               C
               ham
               Hien
               Chum
            
             thereupon
             rais'd
             another
             Army
             more
             numerous
             then
             the
             first
             ,
             and
             march'd
             himself
             in
             person
             to
             enter
             the
             Territories
             of
             the
             Prince
             ;
             who
             being
             a
             person
             of
             great
             Courage
             ,
             and
             favour'd
             by
             the
             Advantage
             of
             the
             Places
             ,
             gave
             the
             Tyrant
             Battel
             ,
             overthrew
             him
             and
             forc'd
             him
             to
             
             retire
             ,
             enrag'd
             at
             his
             ill
             Success
             ,
             yet
             more
             animated
             to
             Revenge
             then
             ever
             .
             For
             that
             reason
             he
             rais'd
             a
             Third
             Army
             ,
             and
             gave
             the
             Command
             of
             it
             to
             his
             first
             adopted
             Son
             call'd
             
               Sum
               Co
               vam
            
             ,
             of
             whom
             I
             have
             sometimes
             made
             mention
             in
             the
             Annual
             Letters
             of
             this
             Mission
             .
             He
             was
             a
             Person
             Learned
             ,
             Prudent
             ,
             Courageous
             ,
             and
             so
             affable
             and
             good
             natur'd
             ,
             that
             many
             times
             he
             effected
             those
             things
             by
             his
             Prudence
             and
             Sweetness
             ,
             which
             his
             Father
             could
             not
             bring
             to
             pass
             with
             all
             his
             Armed
             Force
             and
             Cruelty
             .
             And
             indeed
             he
             knew
             so
             well
             to
             manage
             the
             haughty
             Spirit
             of
             the
             stubborn
             Prince
             ,
             that
             he
             not
             only
             oblig'd
             the
             Prince
             to
             acknowledge
             his
             Father
             for
             his
             Sovereign
             ,
             but
             to
             assist
             him
             with
             Men
             and
             Money
             to
             compleat
             his
             Conquest
             of
             China
             .
             He
             carry'd
             him
             in
             his
             company
             to
             the
             Court
             with
             all
             his
             Army
             consisting
             of
             Forty
             Thousand
             Men
             ,
             all
             pick'd
             and
             chosen
             Young
             Men
             clad
             in
             the
             same
             Colour'd
             Habit
             ,
             and
             Arm'd
             with
             a
             sort
             of
             Cuirasses
             and
             Head-pieces
             of
             quilted
             Cotton
             .
             Upon
             his
             arrival
             the
             Prince
             Muster'd
             his
             Army
             in
             the
             place
             appointed
             for
             those
             kinds
             of
             Exercises
             in
             every
             City
             of
             China
             .
             The
             Tyrant
             on
             the
             other
             side
             receiv'd
             him
             with
             many
             Extraordinary
             Caresses
             and
             Marks
             of
             his
             Favour
             and
             hearty
             Affection
             ,
             and
             invited
             him
             publickly
             to
             a
             solemn
             Feast
             the
             next
             day
             ,
             where
             the
             Prince
             fail'd
             not
             to
             attend
             him
             .
             But
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Musick
             ,
             the
             Comedy
             and
             Jollity
             of
             the
             Banquet
             ,
             the
             Persidious
             and
             Cruel
             Tyrant
             order'd
             a
             most
             rank
             and
             nimble
             Poison
             to
             be
             presented
             him
             in
             a
             Glass
             of
             Wine
             ,
             which
             dispatch'd
             him
             in
             a
             few
             Moments
             .
             Which
             done
             ,
             he
             caus'd
             his
             whole
             Army
             ready
             drawn
             up
             for
             that
             purpose
             to
             surround
             and
             put
             to
             the
             Sword
             all
             the
             Forces
             of
             the
             unfortunate
             Prince
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             let
             a
             Man
             escape
             .
             Which
             was
             executed
             with
             so
             much
             the
             more
             ease
             ,
             because
             the
             
             poor
             People
             not
             mistrusting
             any
             such
             Treachery
             were
             surpriz'd
             without
             a
             Leader
             ,
             without
             Arms
             ,
             and
             all
             in
             disorder
             .
             And
             of
             this
             accident
             I
             my self
             was
             an
             Eye-witness
             ;
             which
             I
             therefore
             here
             relate
             to
             shew
             the
             Grandeur
             of
             this
             Empire
             .
          
           
             Nor
             ought
             any
             Man
             to
             scruple
             the
             belief
             of
             what
             I
             have
             here
             related
             concerning
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Cities
             and
             Towns
             far
             more
             numerous
             then
             what
             Father
             Martini
             sets
             down
             ,
             in
             regard
             I
             take
             in
             all
             those
             belonging
             to
             these
             Petty
             Sovereigns
             ,
             whose
             Principalities
             ,
             tho'
             they
             do
             not
             acknowledge
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             are
             nevertheless
             seated
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             his
             Empire
             ,
             in
             the
             Four
             Provinces
             which
             I
             have
             nam'd
             .
             I
             have
             also
             included
             the
             Cities
             and
             Towns
             of
             
               Leao
               tum
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Yun
               Nan
            
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             excessively
             addicted
             to
             their
             own
             Formalities
             ,
             never
             put
             into
             their
             Ordinary
             Catalogues
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             particular
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             said
             they
             make
             of
             the
             Raigns
             of
             certain
             Families
             .
          
           
             The
             Chineses
             have
             caus'd
             to
             be
             Printed
             a
             Publick
             ●…inerary
             which
             contains
             all
             the
             Roads
             and
             Passages
             as
             well
             by
             Water
             as
             by
             Land
             ,
             from
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             to
             the
             utmost
             parts
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             This
             Book
             the
             Mandarins
             buy
             ,
             when
             they
             go
             from
             Court
             to
             their
             several
             Governments
             and
             Employments
             at
             a
             distance
             ,
             as
             also
             all
             other
             Travellers
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             may
             be
             able
             to
             know
             the
             Roads
             ,
             the
             distance
             of
             one
             place
             from
             another
             ,
             and
             the
             Furlongs
             of
             every
             Journey
             .
             In
             this
             Book
             all
             the
             Royal
             High-ways
             in
             the
             Empire
             are
             divided
             into
             Eleven
             Hundred
             Forty
             Five
             Days
             Journeys
             ,
             every
             one
             of
             which
             have
             a
             certain
             place
             where
             the
             Mandarins
             are
             Lodged
             and
             Entertain'd
             at
             the
             King's
             Expences
             when
             they
             go
             to
             their
             several
             Employments
             .
             But
             when
             they
             deprive
             them
             of
             their
             Charges
             ,
             they
             lose
             also
             the
             Privilege
             of
             Royal
             Entertainment
             .
             
             These
             Eleven
             Hundred
             Forty
             Five
             Places
             are
             call'd
             Ye
             or
             Chin
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             Places
             of
             Entertainment
             and
             Attendance
             .
             And
             this
             Name
             is
             given
             to
             them
             not
             without
             reason
             .
             For
             there
             they
             wait
             for
             the
             coming
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             with
             as
             much
             care
             and
             circumspection
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             upon
             their
             Guard
             against
             an
             Armed
             Enemy
             .
             Of
             these
             Places
             there
             are
             Seven
             Hundred
             Thirty
             Five
             in
             the
             Cities
             of
             the
             first
             and
             second
             Order
             ,
             in
             the
             Frontier
             Town
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Castles
             in
             the
             heart
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             Two
             Hundred
             and
             Five
             in
             the
             Places
             call'd
             Ye
             ,
             and
             Three
             Hundred
             and
             Three
             in
             the
             Places
             call'd
             Chin.
             Both
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             were
             formerly
             built
             in
             those
             places
             where
             there
             were
             no
             Towns
             ,
             and
             may
             be
             call'd
             Towns
             of
             the
             second
             Rank
             ;
             because
             they
             are
             all
             Wall'd
             ,
             have
             Mandarins
             for
             their
             Governours
             ,
             and
             because
             there
             are
             some
             which
             are
             larger
             and
             better
             peopl'd
             then
             many
             Towns
             and
             Cities
             .
             There
             are
             a
             Hundred
             and
             Two
             which
             have
             no
             Walls
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             are
             very
             large
             and
             very
             Populous
             .
             The
             Day
             before
             the
             Mandarin
             sets
             forward
             ,
             a
             Courier
             is
             dispatch'd
             away
             before
             with
             a
             little
             kind
             of
             a
             Trencher
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             Pai
             ,
             upon
             which
             is
             written
             the
             Name
             and
             Employment
             of
             the
             Officer
             ,
             with
             his
             Name
             and
             Seal
             at
             the
             bottom
             .
             So
             soon
             as
             that
             is
             seen
             ,
             they
             cleanse
             and
             make
             ready
             the
             Palace
             where
             he
             is
             to
             Lodge
             .
             Which
             preparations
             are
             more
             or
             less
             sumptuous
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             dignity
             of
             the
             Mandarin
             ,
             of
             Dyet
             ,
             Porters
             ,
             Horses
             ,
             Chairs
             ,
             Litters
             ,
             or
             Barges
             ,
             if
             he
             be
             to
             go
             by
             Water
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             word
             of
             whatever
             it
             be
             that
             is
             needfull
             .
             In
             these
             Hosteries
             likewise
             are
             entertain'd
             proportionably
             all
             sorts
             of
             other
             Persons
             whether
             Chineses
             or
             Foreigners
             ,
             to
             whom
             the
             King
             is
             pleased
             to
             grant
             that
             favour
             ;
             the
             convenience
             of
             which
             I
             found
             my self
             ,
             when
             I
             was
             sent
             some
             years
             ago
             
             to
             Macao
             .
             In
             these
             places
             the
             King's
             Couriers
             take
             what
             they
             have
             occasion
             for
             ,
             either
             for
             speedy
             hast
             or
             refreshment
             .
             There
             they
             find
             Horses
             ready
             saddled
             ;
             but
             for
             fear
             they
             should
             not
             be
             always
             ready
             ,
             a
             furlong
             or
             two
             before
             the
             Courier
             arrives
             at
             the
             Hostery
             or
             Inn
             ,
             the
             Courier
             gives
             several
             loud
             Bangs
             upon
             a
             Basin
             call'd
             Lô
             ,
             which
             he
             carries
             behind
             his
             back
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             saddle
             a
             Horse
             for
             him
             with
             all
             the
             speed
             imaginable
             :
             So
             that
             he
             presently
             Mounts
             and
             leaves
             his
             other
             Horse
             behind
             him
             without
             any
             farther
             trouble
             .
          
           
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             China
             contains
             Eleven
             Millions
             ,
             Five
             Hundred
             and
             Two
             Thousand
             Eight
             Hundred
             Seventy
             Two
             Families
             ,
             not
             including
             the
             Women
             ,
             Children
             ,
             Poor
             People
             ,
             Mandarins
             employ'd
             ,
             Souldiers
             ,
             Batchelers
             of
             Art
             ,
             Licentiates
             ,
             Doctors
             ,
             Mandarins
             dispenc'd
             with
             from
             Service
             ,
             such
             as
             live
             upon
             the
             Rivers
             ,
             the
             Bonzes
             ,
             Funuchs
             ,
             nor
             any
             that
             are
             of
             the
             Royal
             Blood
             ;
             for
             they
             only
             reckon
             those
             that
             cultivate
             the
             Land
             and
             pay
             the
             King's
             Rents
             and
             Tributes
             .
             So
             that
             there
             is
             in
             the
             whole
             Empire
             of
             China
             Fifty
             Nine
             Millions
             ,
             Seven
             Hundred
             Fourscore
             and
             Eight
             Thousand
             Three
             Hundred
             Sixty
             Four
             Males
             .
             Thus
             much
             for
             the
             Civil
             Order
             of
             China
             .
          
           
             The
             Military
             Order
             contains
             Six
             Hundred
             Twenty
             Nine
             large
             Fortresses
             of
             the
             first
             degree
             ,
             and
             of
             great
             Importance
             ,
             either
             upon
             the
             Frontiers
             ,
             as
             the
             Keys
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             to
             keep
             out
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             or
             upon
             the
             Consines
             of
             the
             Provinces
             against
             Rebels
             and
             Robbers
             .
             The
             Chineses
             call
             them
             Quan
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             
               Xam
               hái
            
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             already
             ,
             is
             one
             of
             the
             Number
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             Five
             Hundred
             Sixty
             Seven
             Fortresses
             of
             the
             Second
             Rank
             ,
             which
             are
             call'd
             Guéi
             in
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             .
             And
             that
             same
             place
             call'd
             
               Tien
               ●…ìm
               g●…êi
            
             ,
             or
             Fortress
             of
             the
             Well
             of
             Heaven
             ,
             of
             
             which
             Father
             Martini
             speaks
             in
             his
             
               Atlas
               ,
               p.
            
             36.
             is
             of
             the
             same
             number
             .
             By
             which
             you
             may
             guess
             at
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Fortresses
             of
             the
             second
             Rank
             .
             They
             reckon
             Three
             Hundred
             and
             Eleven
             Fortresses
             of
             the
             Third
             Rank
             ,
             call'd
             Sò
             .
             Three
             Hundred
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Rank
             call'd
             Chin
             ,
             which
             retain
             the
             same
             Name
             and
             the
             same
             signification
             with
             those
             of
             the
             fifth
             Civil
             Order
             ;
             and
             a
             Hundred
             and
             Fifty
             of
             the
             Fifth
             Rank
             ,
             call'd
             Paò.
             
          
           
             There
             are
             a
             Hundred
             Fortresses
             of
             the
             Sixth
             Rank
             ,
             call'd
             Pù
             ;
             and
             lastly
             ,
             Three
             Hundred
             of
             the
             Seventh
             Order
             ,
             call'd
             Chái
             .
             These
             latter
             are
             of
             several
             sorts
             ;
             for
             some
             of
             them
             stand
             in
             the
             fields
             ,
             and
             serve
             for
             places
             of
             Refuge
             for
             the
             Country-men
             ,
             who
             retire
             thither
             with
             their
             Cattel
             and
             Goods
             ,
             when
             any
             Tartars
             ,
             Robbers
             or
             Rebels
             harrass
             the
             Country
             :
             as
             also
             when
             the
             Emperour's
             Armies
             are
             upon
             their
             March.
             Others
             are
             seated
             upon
             the
             Precipices
             of
             steep
             Mountains
             ,
             to
             which
             there
             is
             no
             other
             ascent
             but
             by
             steps
             cut
             out
             of
             the
             Rock
             ,
             or
             by
             the
             help
             of
             La●…ders
             made
             of
             Ropes
             or
             Wood
             ,
             which
             they
             remove
             as
             they
             please
             themselves
             :
             And
             these
             Fortresses
             generally
             have
             no
             Walls
             because
             they
             need
             none
             .
             Others
             are
             seated
             upon
             Mountains
             ,
             which
             are
             nevertheless
             approachable
             :
             and
             therefore
             on
             that
             side
             where
             they
             lie
             open
             they
             are
             guarded
             with
             a
             double
             or
             treble
             Wall
             :
             And
             both
             of
             these
             and
             of
             the
             other
             before
             recited
             I
             have
             seen
             several
             in
             the
             Provinces
             of
             Su-chuen
             and
             Xensi
             .
             By
             this
             account
             it
             appears
             ,
             that
             the
             fortifi'd
             Places
             amount
             to
             the
             number
             of
             Two
             Thousand
             Three
             Hundred
             Fifty
             Seven
             ,
             which
             being
             added
             to
             those
             of
             the
             Civil
             Order
             ,
             make
             up
             Four
             Thousand
             Four
             Hundred
             and
             Two.
             Besides
             which
             ,
             there
             are
             within
             and
             without
             the
             great
             Walls
             that
             environ
             China
             above
             Three
             Thousand
             Towers
             or
             Castles
             ,
             call'd
             Tai
             ,
             of
             
             which
             every
             one
             has
             its
             proper
             Name
             .
             In
             those
             Towers
             are
             kept
             Guards
             and
             Watches
             all
             the
             Year
             long
             ,
             which
             give
             the
             Alarm
             so
             soon
             as
             the
             Enemy
             appears
             ,
             in
             the
             Day
             time
             by
             Erecting
             a
             Banner
             upon
             one
             of
             the
             highest
             Towers
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Night
             by
             setting
             up
             a
             Lighted
             Flambeau
             .
             Should
             we
             reckon
             these
             Towers
             or
             Castles
             among
             the
             Fortifi'd
             Places
             of
             which
             these
             latter
             would
             make
             an
             Eighth
             Order
             ,
             there
             would
             be
             then
             in
             all
             Five
             Thousand
             Three
             Hundred
             Fifty
             Seven
             .
          
           
             About
             a
             hundred
             and
             Fifty
             Years
             ago
             a
             certain
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             Superior
             Tribunal
             of
             Arms
             ,
             compil'd
             two
             Volumes
             which
             he
             Dedicated
             to
             the
             Emperor
             ,
             and
             which
             he
             Entitul'd
             
               Kiu
               pien
               tu
               uxe
            
             ,
             the
             Practice
             of
             the
             Mapps
             of
             the
             Nine
             Frontiers
             .
             He
             meant
             by
             that
             the
             Nine
             Quarters
             into
             which
             he
             had
             divided
             the
             Great
             Walls
             that
             Environ
             a
             part
             of
             China
             for
             four
             hundred
             and
             five
             Portuguese
             Leagues
             together
             ,
             which
             make
             23
             Degrees
             and
             ten
             Minutes
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             from
             the
             City
             of
             
               Caī
               yêun
            
             ,
             seated
             at
             the
             Extremity
             of
             the
             Country
             call'd
             
               Leâo
               tūm
            
             to
             that
             of
             
               Cân
               so
            
             ,
             or
             
               Cān
               cheu
            
             ,
             seated
             upon
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Xensi
             .
             And
             this
             too
             must
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             Fortification
             running
             in
             a
             streight
             Line
             ;
             for
             should
             we
             take
             in
             all
             the
             Turnings
             and
             Windings
             of
             the
             Mountains
             and
             Walls
             ,
             the
             whole
             without
             question
             would
             amount
             to
             above
             five
             hundred
             Portugal
             Leagues
             .
             In
             those
             Books
             he
             represents
             in
             three
             Maps
             all
             the
             Passages
             of
             the
             Mountains
             that
             are
             accessible
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             hundred
             and
             twenty
             Nine
             other
             great
             Maps
             ,
             Thirteen
             Hundred
             twenty
             seven
             Fortresses
             great
             and
             small
             ,
             which
             he
             says
             are
             all
             necessary
             to
             prevent
             the
             inroads
             of
             Tartars
             .
             So
             that
             if
             the
             Chineses
             were
             not
             so
             Negligent
             ,
             so
             Cowardly
             ,
             so
             Covetous
             ,
             and
             persidious
             to
             their
             Prince
             as
             they
             
             are
             ,
             the
             Tartars
             could
             never
             have
             surmounted
             those
             Walls
             nor
             got
             footing
             within
             those
             Castles
             ,
             so
             well
             dispos'd
             in
             all
             Places
             requisite
             ,
             and
             so
             strongly
             Fortify'd
             as
             well
             by
             Nature
             as
             by
             Art.
             And
             indeed
             it
             is
             apparent
             as
             well
             by
             their
             own
             Histories
             ,
             as
             by
             what
             we
             have
             seen
             in
             our
             time
             ,
             that
             the
             Tartars
             could
             never
             enter
             into
             China
             ,
             but
             when
             either
             the
             Cowardice
             or
             the
             Treacherous
             Avarice
             of
             the
             Commanders
             open'd
             them
             a
             Passage
             .
             This
             the
             Tartars
             knew
             and
             therefore
             offer'd
             them
             a
             Moiety
             of
             their
             Plunder
             and
             Booty
             ,
             and
             were
             no
             less
             punctual
             in
             their
             performances
             then
             they
             had
             been
             liberal
             in
             their
             promises
             upon
             their
             Return
             into
             Tartary
             .
             For
             the
             continuance
             of
             which
             Trade
             they
             always
             left
             a
             Passage
             open
             for
             these
             Inroads
             ,
             which
             the
             Tartars
             fail'd
             not
             to
             make
             twice
             a
             Year
             ;
             nor
             could
             all
             the
             Rigorous
             punishments
             which
             the
             King
             inflicted
             upon
             several
             of
             those
             Traitors
             deterr
             the
             rest
             from
             their
             disloyal
             Traffick
             with
             his
             Enemies
             .
             Or
             if
             he
             at
             any
             time
             did
             restrain
             some
             within
             the
             bounds
             of
             Duty
             ,
             then
             the
             Tartars
             enlarged
             their
             Offers
             .
             But
             then
             such
             was
             the
             eager
             desire
             of
             those
             persidious
             Officers
             to
             heap
             up
             Wealth
             ,
             that
             at
             length
             they
             surrender'd
             into
             the
             hands
             of
             a
             small
             Number
             of
             half
             Barbarians
             the
             Richest
             and
             most
             Populous
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             World.
             
          
           
             In
             the
             same
             Book
             you
             see
             the
             number
             of
             Souldiers
             that
             keep
             Guard
             upon
             the
             Frontiers
             ,
             to
             the
             number
             of
             Nine
             hundred
             and
             two
             Thousand
             
             and
             fifty
             four
             .
             The
             Auxiliary
             Forces
             that
             lie
             ready
             to
             March
             to
             their
             Assistance
             ,
             when
             the
             Tartars
             are
             upon
             entring
             into
             China
             ,
             are
             innumerable
             ;
             there
             being
             Nine
             hundred
             fourscore
             and
             nine
             Thousand
             an
             hundred
             sixty
             seven
             Horses
             appointed
             for
             those
             Forces
             .
             The
             Emperors
             Expences
             for
             the
             Payment
             of
             the
             Officers
             and
             Souldiers
             
             amounts
             every
             year
             to
             five
             Millions
             ,
             thirty
             four
             Thousand
             seven
             hundred
             and
             fourteen
             Livers
             .
             Were
             these
             Books
             printed
             ,
             and
             their
             Maps
             Engraven
             with
             that
             skill
             and
             exactness
             as
             Maps
             are
             done
             in
             Europe
             they
             would
             be
             the
             Admiration
             of
             all
             curious
             Persons
             .
             It
             were
             to
             be
             wish'd
             that
             some
             one
             would
             take
             the
             pains
             to
             give
             us
             a
             lively
             Representation
             of
             the
             Walls
             ,
             Fortresses
             ,
             and
             other
             the
             most
             remarkable
             things
             in
             this
             Empire
             .
          
           
             Now
             by
             what
             we
             have
             said
             concerning
             the
             Number
             of
             Souldiers
             appointed
             to
             Guard
             the
             Walls
             and
             Frontiers
             against
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             an
             easie
             judgment
             may
             be
             made
             of
             the
             Number
             of
             those
             that
             are
             employed
             upon
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             in
             the
             Cities
             ,
             Towns
             and
             other
             wall'd
             Places
             of
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             is
             not
             any
             one
             that
             has
             not
             a
             Garrison
             .
             They
             amount
             to
             the
             Number
             of
             seven
             hundred
             sixty
             seven
             Thousand
             nine
             hundred
             and
             seventy
             Men
             ,
             which
             in
             time
             of
             Peace
             Guard
             and
             attend
             in
             the
             day
             time
             upon
             the
             
             Mandarin's
             ,
             Embassadors
             ,
             and
             other
             Persons
             whose
             Expences
             the
             King
             defrays
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Night
             time
             keep
             Guard
             about
             their
             Barques
             ,
             or
             their
             Lodgings
             .
             The
             Horses
             also
             which
             the
             King
             keeps
             as
             well
             for
             the
             Service
             of
             his
             Troops
             ,
             as
             for
             his
             Posts
             and
             Messengers
             amount
             to
             five
             hundred
             sixty
             four
             Thousand
             and
             nine
             hundred
             .
             But
             when
             there
             happens
             any
             Revolt
             ,
             or
             any
             War
             ,
             the
             Armies
             which
             rendevouze
             from
             all
             the
             Provinces
             are
             almost
             innumerable
             .
          
           
             And
             now
             because
             my
             time
             is
             short
             ,
             and
             my
             occasions
             oblige
             me
             to
             Brevity
             ,
             I
             shall
             here
             set
             down
             the
             Principal
             Wonders
             of
             this
             Empire
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             Author
             before
             mentioned
             gives
             a
             larger
             account
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             in
             the
             fifteen
             Provinces
             three
             hundred
             thirty
             and
             one
             Famous
             Bridges
             ,
             not
             much
             
             inferior
             to
             that
             of
             which
             we
             have
             already
             spoken
             ;
             and
             to
             those
             which
             are
             describ'd
             by
             Father
             Martini
             ,
             and
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             in
             their
             Descriptions
             of
             China
             .
             And
             therefore
             I
             shall
             say
             no
             more
             upon
             this
             Subject
             ,
             seeing
             that
             if
             I
             were
             to
             describe
             every
             Structure
             in
             particular
             that
             is
             considerable
             ,
             it
             would
             require
             the
             labour
             of
             several
             Volumes
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             also
             in
             China
             two
             thousand
             fourscore
             and
             nineteen
             Mountains
             ,
             Famous
             ●…her
             for
             being
             cut
             into
             the
             shape
             of
             Monstrous
             Idols
             ,
             (
             as
             is
             that
             which
             I
             have
             mentioned
             in
             the
             Relation
             of
             my
             Travels
             from
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Kiam
               nân
            
             or
             Nankim
             ,
             to
             that
             of
             
               Su
               Chuen
            
             ,
             and
             which
             I
             sent
             into
             Europe
             in
             the
             year
             1643.
             )
             Or
             for
             their
             Fountains
             ,
             their
             particular
             Plants
             ,
             and
             their
             Minerals
             of
             great
             Virtue
             ;
             or
             for
             their
             extraordinary
             strength
             ,
             and
             other
             Prerogatives
             which
             distinguish
             them
             from
             others
             .
          
           
             Their
             Famous
             Waters
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             their
             Lakes
             full
             of
             Fish
             ,
             their
             hot
             Fountains
             ,
             no
             less
             Medicinal
             than
             Wonderful
             ,
             the
             large
             Streams
             and
             Navigable
             Rivers
             are
             to
             the
             number
             of
             one
             Thousand
             four
             Hundred
             Seventy
             and
             Two.
             
          
           
             There
             are
             one
             Thousand
             Fourscore
             and
             Nineteen
             Peices
             of
             Antiquity
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             as
             Statues
             ,
             Famous
             Paintings
             and
             Vessels
             of
             high
             Price
             ,
             and
             greatly
             esteemed
             .
             One
             Thousand
             one
             Hundred
             Fifty
             Nine
             Towers
             ,
             Triumphal
             Arches
             ,
             and
             other
             such
             like
             Magnificent
             Pieces
             of
             Workmanship
             ,
             Erected
             in
             Honour
             of
             Renowned
             Princes
             ;
             Men
             famous
             for
             their
             Valour
             or
             their
             Learning
             ,
             or
             of
             Widows
             and
             Virgins
             renowned
             for
             their
             Chastity
             and
             Vertue
             .
             Two
             hundred
             seventy
             two
             Libraries
             embellish'd
             with
             sundry
             Ornaments
             ,
             stored
             with
             great
             numbers
             of
             Books
             ,
             and
             built
             at
             vast
             Expences
             .
          
           
           
             There
             are
             likewise
             to
             be
             seen
             seven
             Hundred
             and
             Nine
             Temples
             Erected
             by
             the
             Chineses
             at
             several
             times
             in
             memory
             of
             their
             Ancestors
             and
             considerable
             for
             their
             Largness
             and
             the
             Beauty
             of
             their
             Architecture
             .
             For
             it
             is
             the
             Custom
             of
             the
             Chineses
             to
             testifie
             an
             extraordinary
             Affection
             and
             Obedience
             to
             their
             Parents
             ,
             especially
             after
             their
             Death
             ;
             and
             therefore
             to
             make
             this
             manifest
             to
             the
             World
             ,
             they
             cause
             to
             be
             built
             at
             great
             Expences
             most
             stately
             Halls
             ,
             wherein
             ,
             instead
             of
             Images
             and
             Statues
             ,
             they
             set
             up
             in
             Cartredges
             the
             Names
             of
             their
             Ancestors
             and
             Parents
             .
             Also
             upon
             certain
             days
             of
             the
             Year
             appointed
             by
             the
             Family
             to
             which
             the
             Temple
             belongs
             ,
             they
             assemble
             all
             together
             in
             these
             Halls
             ,
             where
             they
             prostrate
             themselves
             upon
             the
             ground
             in
             token
             of
             Love
             and
             Veneration
             :
             Which
             done
             ,
             they
             offer
             Incense
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             make
             a
             spendid
             Feast
             at
             several
             Tables
             richly
             set
             Forth
             ,
             and
             adorn'd
             with
             an
             extraordinary
             Decency
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             Number
             of
             Dishes
             and
             Viands
             well
             dress'd
             .
          
           
             They
             reckon
             about
             four
             Hundred
             and
             Fourscore
             Temples
             of
             Idols
             very
             Famous
             and
             much
             frequented
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             Riches
             ,
             their
             Magnisicence
             and
             the
             Pretended
             Miracles
             and
             Fables
             which
             they
             report
             concerning
             their
             Idols
             .
             In
             these
             Temples
             ,
             and
             in
             others
             of
             which
             the
             Number
             through
             the
             whole
             Empire
             is
             incredible
             ,
             no
             less
             than
             three
             Hundred
             &
             Thousand
             Bonzes
             have
             their
             Habitations
             .
             I
             must
             confess
             I
             could
             not
             conceive
             there
             should
             be
             so
             great
             a
             Number
             ;
             and
             therefore
             I
             put
             the
             Question
             to
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             Tribune
             of
             Ceremonies
             who
             was
             one
             of
             my
             friends
             ,
             whether
             it
             were
             true
             or
             no
             ●…
             For
             that
             the
             Bonzes
             are
             under
             the
             Jurisdiction
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             and
             receive
             their
             Licences
             from
             it
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Tutie
             .
             This
             Mandarin
             upon
             a
             diligent
             search
             inform'd
             me
             ,
             that
             within
             the
             City
             and
             
             Court
             of
             Pekim
             only
             there
             were
             Six
             Thousand
             Six
             Hundred
             Sixty
             eight
             Bonzes
             unmarry'd
             ,
             call'd
             by
             them
             
               Ho
               xám
            
             ,
             and
             five
             Thousand
             and
             Twenty
             Two
             Marry'd
             ,
             and
             which
             like
             the
             former
             have
             also
             their
             Pass-ports
             and
             Licences
             ;
             by
             which
             said
             he
             ,
             you
             may
             judge
             of
             the
             number
             dispers'd
             over
             the
             whole
             Empire
             .
             Besides
             that
             you
             are
             farther
             to
             observe
             that
             within
             the
             Number
             of
             three
             Hundred
             and
             fifty
             Thousand
             mention'd
             by
             the
             Chinese
             Historian
             ,
             are
             only
             comprehended
             the
             Bonzes
             which
             have
             Licences
             :
             But
             in
             regard
             that
             among
             six
             or
             seven
             Bonzes
             not
             above
             one
             or
             two
             generally
             have
             Licences
             ,
             should
             they
             all
             be
             reckon'd
             into
             the
             Number
             ,
             they
             would
             certainly
             amount
             to
             above
             a
             Million
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             moreover
             six
             Hundred
             Fourscore
             and
             five
             Mausoleums
             ,
             Famous
             for
             their
             Architecture
             and
             their
             Riches
             .
             For
             in
             China
             all
             Persons
             are
             prohibited
             under
             great
             Penalties
             to
             bury
             their
             dead
             within
             the
             Walls
             of
             their
             Cities
             ,
             or
             of
             any
             other
             place
             whatever
             .
             So
             that
             after
             they
             have
             put
             the
             Corps
             in
             the
             Cossin
             ,
             all
             the
             Chincks
             and
             Jointures
             of
             which
             are
             stopp'd
             up
             with
             Bitumen
             to
             prevent
             the
             scent
             of
             the
             dead
             Body
             ,
             they
             leave
             them
             in
             the
             House
             where
             they
             died
             for
             some
             Months
             and
             many
             times
             for
             two
             or
             three
             years
             together
             ,
             the
             Magistrate
             in
             all
             that
             time
             having
             no
             power
             to
             to
             constrain
             them
             to
             an
             Enterrment
             .
             It
             is
             also
             lawful
             ,
             when
             a
             Person
             dies
             at
             a
             distance
             from
             his
             own
             House
             ,
             to
             transport
             his
             Body
             from
             one
             City
             or
             Province
             to
             another
             ;
             as
             it
             is
             usual
             for
             the
             Richer
             sort
             and
             the
             Mandarins
             to
             do
             ;
             provided
             nevertheless
             that
             they
             do
             not
             bring
             their
             dead
             Bodies
             through
             the
             Cities
             ,
             but
             round
             about
             by
             the
             Walls
             .
             These
             Coffins
             ,
             which
             are
             generally
             of
             some
             sort
             of
             precious
             Wood
             ,
             cost
             many
             times
             two
             hundred
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             above
             a
             thousand
             Crowns
             .
             
             And
             the
             Children
             of
             the
             Deceas'd
             are
             so
             obsequious
             as
             to
             cause
             these
             Cossins
             to
             be
             carry'd
             for
             several
             days
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             for
             a
             whole
             months
             Journey
             together
             ,
             at
             an
             extraordinary
             expence
             ,
             to
             lay
             them
             in
             the
             Sepulchres
             of
             their
             Ancestors
             .
             And
             indeed
             the
             Sepulchres
             of
             their
             Grandees
             are
             very
             magnificent
             Structures
             ,
             and
             certainly
             deserve
             ●…oth
             to
             be
             seen
             and
             Admir'd
             .
             For
             they
             are
             very
             fair
             and
             large
             Houses
             all
             vaulted
             ,
             erected
             upon
             a
             Mountain
             or
             plain
             ,
             wherein
             they
             also
             presently
             put
             the
             Coffin
             ,
             and
             cover
             it
             with
             as
             much
             Earth
             as
             will
             make
             a
             little
             Hillock
             which
             they
             adorn
             and
             plant
             in
             wonderful
             Order
             and
             Symmetry
             with
             Trees
             of
             several
             sorts
             .
             Before
             the
             Hillock
             they
             Erect
             a
             large
             Altar
             of
             white
             Polish'd
             Marble
             ,
             upon
             which
             they
             place
             a
             great
             Candlestick
             of
             Marble
             ,
             Steel
             or
             Tin
             ,
             and
             upon
             each
             side
             another
             Candlestick
             of
             the
             same
             materials
             .
             Then
             upon
             each
             side
             ,
             and
             in
             several
             files
             ,
             you
             shall
             see
             rang'd
             in
             very
             good
             order
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Figures
             of
             Mandarins
             ,
             Gentlemen
             ,
             Pages
             ,
             Eunuchs
             ,
             Lions
             ,
             Horses
             Saddel'd
             ,
             Camels
             ,
             Tortoises
             ,
             and
             other
             Creatures
             .
             Whose
             Actions
             and
             Movements
             are
             represented
             with
             that
             lively
             briskness
             ,
             that
             you
             would
             think
             them
             alive
             indeed
             ,
             the
             Chineses
             being
             very
             happy
             in
             their
             manner
             of
             expressing
             in
             dead
             Sculpture
             the
             most
             lively
             Passions
             of
             the
             Mind
             ,
             as
             Joy
             ,
             Fear
             ,
             Anger
             ,
             Melancholy
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             .
          
           
             They
             reckon
             Three
             Thousand
             Thirty
             Six
             Men
             famous
             and
             renowned
             for
             their
             Vertues
             ,
             their
             Knowledge
             ,
             and
             their
             Prowess
             ,
             their
             Loyalty
             toward
             their
             Princes
             ,
             their
             Obedience
             toward
             their
             Parents
             ,
             or
             for
             some
             good
             Work
             or
             Action
             performed
             for
             the
             benefit
             of
             their
             Country
             .
             They
             also
             reckon
             Two
             Hundred
             and
             Eight
             Virgins
             and
             Widows
             ,
             who
             for
             their
             Chastity
             ,
             their
             Courage
             ,
             and
             Heroick
             Actions
             ,
             are
             thought
             worthy
             of
             Eternal
             
             Memory
             ,
             and
             are
             Celebrated
             in
             their
             Stories
             and
             Poesies
             ,
             as
             being
             honour'd
             by
             the
             Chineses
             with
             Titles
             ,
             Inscriptions
             ,
             Temples
             ,
             and
             Triumphal
             Arches
             .
          
           
             Lastly
             ,
             There
             are
             in
             China
             Thirty
             Two
             Princes
             or
             Petty
             Kings
             Palaces
             ,
             much
             less
             then
             the
             Emperors
             ,
             but
             which
             resemble
             those
             in
             form
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             disposal
             and
             contrivance
             of
             the
             Halls
             ,
             Chambers
             ,
             Gardens
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             Parts
             according
             to
             the
             Model
             of
             that
             Palace
             where
             the
             Emperor
             keeps
             his
             Residence
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               Second
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 A.
                 P.
                 32.
                 
              
               
                 IN
                 the
                 Portuguese
                 Original
                 ,
                 just
                 against
                 this
                 part
                 ,
                 the
                 Author
                 has
                 set
                 down
                 these
                 words
                 in
                 the
                 Margin
                 .
                 
                   A
                   Ly
                   ,
                   contains
                   a
                   Hundred
                   and
                   Sixty
                   Paces
                   ;
                   a
                   Pace
                   ,
                   Six
                   Cubits
                   ;
                   a
                   Cubit
                   ,
                   the
                   length
                   of
                   this
                   Margin
                   .
                   A
                   Ly
                   ,
                
                 is
                 a
                 Chinese
                 Furlong
                 ;
                 a
                 Cubit
                 is
                 a
                 Chinese
                 Foot.
                 I
                 measur'd
                 likewise
                 exactly
                 the
                 length
                 of
                 the
                 Margin
                 in
                 the
                 Original
                 ,
                 which
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Author
                 says
                 ,
                 is
                 equal
                 to
                 a
                 Chinese
                 Cubit
                 ,
                 and
                 found
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 to
                 the
                 Foot
                 of
                 Paris
                 as
                 Seven
                 to
                 Eight
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Foot
                 of
                 Paris
                 exceeded
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Cubit
                 ,
                 a
                 Seventh
                 part
                 of
                 that
                 Cubit
                 .
                 But
                 in
                 regard
                 it
                 is
                 very
                 requisite
                 to
                 know
                 the
                 proportion
                 of
                 these
                 Measures
                 ,
                 we
                 are
                 to
                 understand
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 Geography
                 all
                 Itinerary
                 Measures
                 are
                 ●…o
                 be
                 reduc'd
                 to
                 one
                 degree
                 of
                 a
                 great
                 Circle
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 .
              
               
                 There
                 has
                 been
                 great
                 Labour
                 and
                 Industry
                 employ'd
                 in
                 all
                 Ages
                 ,
                 and
                 among
                 all
                 the
                 more
                 Eminent
                 Nations
                 
                 to
                 determine
                 the
                 Measure
                 of
                 one
                 of
                 these
                 degrees
                 ;
                 but
                 with
                 so
                 little
                 success
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 much
                 uncertainty
                 ,
                 that
                 you
                 shall
                 hardly
                 meet
                 with
                 two
                 Geographers
                 that
                 agree
                 in
                 this
                 particular
                 ,
                 as
                 may
                 be
                 seen
                 in
                 their
                 Works
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 especially
                 in
                 the
                 reformed
                 Geography
                 of
                 Father
                 Riccioli
                 ,
                 a
                 Iesuit
                 ,
                 who
                 has
                 made
                 a
                 large
                 Collection
                 of
                 those
                 varieties
                 of
                 Opinions
                 .
              
               
                 '
                 ●…would
                 be
                 to
                 no
                 purpose
                 to
                 dive
                 into
                 the
                 Causes
                 of
                 both
                 their
                 Errors
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 difficulty
                 to
                 determine
                 precisely
                 the
                 measure
                 of
                 a
                 degree
                 .
                 Let
                 it
                 suffice
                 therefore
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 that
                 at
                 length
                 the
                 Royal
                 Society
                 of
                 Sciences
                 at
                 Paris
                 ,
                 compos'd
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 Learned
                 Men
                 ,
                 and
                 most
                 Ingenious
                 Astronomers
                 and
                 Geometricians
                 of
                 Europe
                 ,
                 has
                 brought
                 this
                 difficult
                 undertaking
                 to
                 perfection
                 with
                 so
                 much
                 Caution
                 ,
                 Care
                 and
                 Exactness
                 ,
                 that
                 we
                 cannot
                 believe
                 that
                 future
                 Ages
                 will
                 be
                 able
                 to
                 add
                 any
                 thing
                 to
                 their
                 Inventions
                 .
                 Here
                 then
                 is
                 the
                 Proportion
                 or
                 Measure
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Circle
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Measures
                 of
                 several
                 Countries
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   Measure
                   of
                   the
                   Great
                   Circle
                   of
                   the
                   Earth
                   .
                
                 
                   Fathoms
                   of
                   Paris
                   —
                   57060
                
                 
                   Paces
                   of
                   Bolognia
                   in
                   Italy
                   —
                   58481
                
                 
                   Perches
                   of
                   Rhine
                   of
                   12
                   Foot
                   to
                   each
                   —
                   29556
                
                 
                   Parisian
                   Leagues
                   of
                   2000
                   Fathoms
                   —
                   28¼
                
                 
                   Middle
                   Leagues
                   of
                   France
                   of
                   about
                   2282
                   Fathoms
                   —
                   25
                
                 
                   Sea
                   Leagues
                   ,
                   or
                   an
                   Hour
                   's
                   running
                   —
                   20
                
                 
                   English
                   Miles
                   ,
                   5000
                   Foot
                   to
                   each
                   —
                   73
                   1
                   /
                   200
                
                 
                   Miles
                   of
                   Florence
                   of
                   3000
                   Fathom
                   —
                   63
                   1
                   /
                   10
                
              
               
                 
                   The
                   Circumference
                   of
                   the
                   Earth
                   .
                
                 
                   Fathoms
                   of
                   Paris
                   —
                   2054
                   1600
                
                 
                   Leagues
                   of
                   25
                   to
                   a
                   degree
                   —
                   9000
                
                 
                   
                   Sea
                   Leagues
                   —
                   7200
                
              
               
                 
                   The
                   Diameter
                   of
                   the
                   Earth
                   .
                
                 
                   Fathoms
                   of
                   Paris
                   —
                   6538594
                
                 
                   Leagues
                   25
                   to
                   a
                   Degree
                   —
                   2864●…
                
                 
                   Sea
                   Leagues
                   —
                   2291
                   59
                   /
                   71
                
                 
                   The
                   Measure
                   of
                   a
                   Degree
                   —
                   57660
                   Fathoms
                
                 
                   Of
                   a
                   Minute
                   —
                   951
                   Fathoms
                
                 
                   Of
                   a
                   Second
                   —
                   61
                   Fathoms
                
              
               
                 
                   Supposing
                   the
                   Foot
                   of
                   Paris
                   of
                   1440
                   parts
                   .
                
                 
                   The
                   Foot
                   of
                   the
                   Rhine
                   or
                   Leyden
                   has
                   —
                   1390
                
                 
                   The
                   Foot
                   of
                   London
                   —
                   1350
                
                 
                   The
                   Foot
                   of
                   Boloyne
                   —
                   1686
                
                 
                   The
                   Fathom
                   of
                   Florence
                   —
                   2●…80
                
                 
                   Value
                   of
                   a
                   Degree
                   —
                   57060
                   Fathoms
                
                 
                   Of
                   a
                   Minute
                   —
                   951
                
                 
                   Of
                   a
                   Second
                   —
                   16
                   Fathoms
                
              
               
                 By
                 these
                 Measures
                 't
                 is
                 apparent
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 to
                 no
                 purpose
                 to
                 say
                 that
                 a
                 Degree
                 contains
                 so
                 many
                 Foot
                 of
                 France
                 or
                 Spain
                 ,
                 or
                 so
                 many
                 Italian
                 or
                 German
                 Miles
                 ,
                 if
                 you
                 do
                 not
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 tell
                 the
                 Number
                 of
                 Fathoms
                 and
                 Feet
                 which
                 those
                 Miles
                 and
                 Leagues
                 contain
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Measure
                 and
                 Proportion
                 of
                 the
                 said
                 Fathoms
                 and
                 Feet
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 being
                 granted
                 ,
                 't
                 is
                 no
                 wonder
                 that
                 the
                 Itinerary
                 Measures
                 have
                 been
                 so
                 uncertain
                 in
                 Europe
                 till
                 now
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 should
                 be
                 much
                 mor●…
                 uncertain
                 in
                 China
                 ,
                 more
                 especially
                 considering
                 that
                 the
                 Chineses
                 are
                 very
                 Ignorant
                 in
                 Geometry
                 ,
                 and
                 very
                 little
                 skill'd
                 in
                 Astronomy
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 that
                 the
                 Missionaries
                 can
                 hardly
                 find
                 time
                 ,
                 and
                 requisite
                 Conveniences
                 to
                 measure
                 a
                 Degree
                 ,
                 and
                 examine
                 the
                 Proportions
                 between
                 the
                 Measures
                 of
                 China
                 and
                 those
                 of
                 Europe
                 .
                 However
                 they
                 have
                 already
                 rectifi'd
                 the
                 Map
                 of
                 this
                 great
                 Kingdom
                 very
                 much
                 ,
                 by
                 several
                 observations
                 ,
                 and
                 illustrated
                 many
                 things
                 .
                 But
                 still
                 they
                 are
                 frequently
                 oblig'd
                 to
                 have
                 recourse
                 to
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Authors
                 ,
                 ●…s
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 
                 acknowledges
                 in
                 this
                 place
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 Bigness
                 and
                 Proportion
                 of
                 the
                 Cubit
                 ,
                 and
                 Furlong
                 with
                 the
                 Measures
                 of
                 Europe
                 are
                 still
                 unknown
                 .
              
               
                 Father
                 Riccioli
                 upon
                 the
                 Authority
                 of
                 Father
                 Martini
                 believes
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Cubit
                 ,
                 to
                 be
                 equal
                 to
                 the
                 Ancient
                 Roman
                 Foot
                 of
                 Vilalpandus
                 ;
                 but
                 I
                 find
                 by
                 the
                 Measure
                 mark'd
                 down
                 by
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 les●…
                 by
                 about
                 a
                 Seventeenth
                 part
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Fathers
                 
                   Massei
                   ,
                   Trigaut
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Semedo
                 ,
                 will
                 have
                 the
                 Li
                 ,
                 or
                 Chinese
                 Furlong
                 ,
                 to
                 consist
                 of
                 Three
                 Hunderd
                 Chinese
                 Paces
                 of
                 Six
                 Cubits
                 each
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Fathers
                 Martini
                 and
                 Magaillans
                 ,
                 assert
                 it
                 to
                 contain
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Sixty
                 .
              
               
                 Father
                 Trigaut
                 and
                 Father
                 Semedo
                 allow
                 Five
                 Chinese
                 Furlongs
                 to
                 an
                 Italian
                 Mile
                 of
                 Sixty
                 to
                 a
                 Degree
                 .
                 Father
                 Martini
                 Four
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 Sixth
                 part
                 .
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 in
                 the
                 computations
                 which
                 he
                 makes
                 of
                 himself
                 allows
                 Four
                 Furlongs
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 to
                 every
                 Italian
                 Mile
                 .
              
               
                 Father
                 Trigaut
                 believes
                 that
                 there
                 ought
                 to
                 go
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 Chinese
                 Furlongs
                 to
                 One
                 Degree
                 .
                 Father
                 Semedo
                 Two
                 Hundred
                 Fifty
                 Five
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 Fathers
                 
                   Adam
                   ,
                   Martini
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Magaillans
                 ,
                 admit
                 no
                 more
                 than
                 Two
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Fifty
                 ;
                 which
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 judgment
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 last
                 ,
                 make
                 Fourscore
                 and
                 Ten
                 Thousand
                 Chinese
                 Paces
                 ,
                 or
                 Five
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Forty
                 Thousand
                 Chinese
                 Cubits
                 or
                 Feet
                 .
                 But
                 as
                 I
                 have
                 said
                 already
                 ,
                 both
                 the
                 Ancient
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 the
                 Modern
                 Geographers
                 ,
                 were
                 all
                 in
                 a
                 Mist
                 ,
                 before
                 the
                 Academy
                 of
                 Sciences
                 found
                 out
                 the
                 true
                 Measure
                 of
                 a
                 Degree
                 .
                 So
                 that
                 all
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 done
                 ,
                 till
                 the
                 Iesuits
                 which
                 the
                 King
                 has
                 sent
                 to
                 China
                 ,
                 send
                 us
                 the
                 exact
                 Itinerary
                 Measures
                 of
                 that
                 Country
                 ,
                 is
                 to
                 follow
                 the
                 Opinions
                 of
                 Martini
                 and
                 Magaillans
                 ,
                 conformable
                 to
                 the
                 Measure
                 of
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Cubit
                 ,
                 mark'd
                 down
                 by
                 the
                 latter
                 ,
                 and
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 largeness
                 of
                 a
                 Degree
                 measur'd
                 by
                 the
                 Gentlemen
                 of
                 the
                 Academy
                 of
                 Sciences
                 .
                 
                 We
                 know
                 well
                 that
                 there
                 are
                 in
                 China
                 Two
                 certain
                 Measures
                 ;
                 which
                 are
                 the
                 Chè
                 or
                 Chinese
                 Cubit
                 or
                 Foot
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Puù
                 or
                 Pace
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Fathom
                 .
                 The
                 Chè
                 is
                 to
                 the
                 Foot
                 of
                 Paris
                 as
                 Seven
                 to
                 Eight
                 And
                 so
                 a
                 Degree
                 containing
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 Forty
                 Two
                 Thousand
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Sixty
                 Foot
                 of
                 Paris
                 ,
                 will
                 be
                 equal
                 to
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 Fourscore
                 and
                 Eleven
                 Thousand
                 Two
                 Hundred
                 Sixty
                 Eight
                 Feet
                 ,
                 or
                 Chè
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 and
                 Four
                 Sevenths
                 .
                 Now
                 according
                 to
                 all
                 the
                 Authors
                 that
                 have
                 writ
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 the
                 Puù
                 or
                 Chinese
                 Pace
                 contains
                 Six
                 Che
                 or
                 Cubits
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 Puù
                 is
                 to
                 the
                 Fathom
                 of
                 Paris
                 as
                 Seven
                 to
                 Eight
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 Fifty
                 Seven
                 Thousand
                 and
                 Sixty
                 Fathoms
                 of
                 Paris
                 ,
                 contain'd
                 in
                 one
                 Degree
                 ,
                 amounts
                 to
                 Sixty
                 Five
                 Thousand
                 Two
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Eleven
                 Puù's
                 ,
                 Paces
                 or
                 Fathoms
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 and
                 3
                 /
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Fathers
                 ,
                 
                   Adam
                   ,
                   Martini
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Magaillans
                 ,
                 who
                 seem
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 most
                 exact
                 ,
                 allow
                 Two
                 Hunderd
                 and
                 Sixty
                 Furlongs
                 to
                 a
                 Degree
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 there
                 remains
                 no
                 more
                 to
                 be
                 known
                 ,
                 then
                 how
                 many
                 Puù's
                 or
                 Paces
                 every
                 Furlong
                 contains
                 .
                 Now
                 it
                 cannot
                 contain
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Sixty
                 ,
                 as
                 those
                 Fathers
                 say
                 ;
                 for
                 then
                 a
                 Degree
                 would
                 contain
                 Fourscore
                 and
                 Ten
                 Thousand
                 Paces
                 ,
                 or
                 Seventy
                 Eight
                 Thousand
                 Seven
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Fathoms
                 of
                 Paris
                 ;
                 and
                 by
                 consequence
                 would
                 be
                 too
                 large
                 by
                 a
                 Third
                 Part.
                 So
                 that
                 of
                 necessity
                 they
                 must
                 have
                 allow'd
                 too
                 many
                 Paces
                 to
                 a
                 Furlong
                 .
                 Which
                 makes
                 us
                 believe
                 that
                 those
                 Fathers
                 trusted
                 to
                 the
                 Calculations
                 of
                 the
                 Chineses
                 ,
                 or
                 that
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 had
                 recourse
                 to
                 Martini's
                 Atlas
                 :
                 or
                 that
                 it
                 might
                 be
                 an
                 Error
                 of
                 the
                 Press
                 ,
                 which
                 might
                 easily
                 mistake
                 3
                 for
                 2.
                 
                 Which
                 last
                 Opinion
                 is
                 so
                 much
                 the
                 more
                 probable
                 ,
                 for
                 that
                 if
                 instead
                 of
                 allowing
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Sixty
                 Puù's
                 or
                 Chinese
                 Fathoms
                 to
                 a
                 Furlong
                 ,
                 you
                 admit
                 no
                 more
                 then
                 Two
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Sixty
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 Multiply
                 them
                 by
                 Two
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Furlongs
                 ,
                 the
                 Product
                 will
                 be
                 Sixty
                 Five
                 Thousand
                 Puù's
                 or
                 
                 Chinese
                 Paces
                 .
                 Which
                 approaches
                 so
                 near
                 to
                 Sixty
                 Five
                 Thousand
                 Two
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Eleven
                 Puù's
                 or
                 Paces
                 ,
                 to
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 equall'd
                 the
                 Fifty
                 Seven
                 Thousand
                 and
                 Sixty
                 Fathoms
                 of
                 Paris
                 ,
                 which
                 compose
                 a
                 Degree
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Measure
                 of
                 the
                 Academy
                 of
                 Sciences
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 difference
                 hardly
                 amounts
                 to
                 a
                 Furlong
                 .
              
               
                 
                   These
                   things
                   being
                   granted
                   ,
                   it
                   follows
                   that
                   a
                   Degree
                   of
                   the
                   Great
                   Circle
                   of
                   the
                   Earth
                   amounts
                   to
                
                 
                   Feet
                   of
                   the
                   Guild-Hall
                   of
                   Paris
                   342360
                
                 
                   Geometrical
                   Paces
                   each
                   of
                   Five
                   Parisian
                   Feet
                   68462
                
                 
                   Fathoms
                   of
                   Paris
                   ,
                   Six
                   Foot
                   each
                   57060
                
                 
                   Chè
                   or
                   Chinese
                   Feet
                   or
                   Cubits
                   ,
                   which
                   are
                   to
                   the
                   Foot
                   of
                   Paris
                   as
                   Seven
                   to
                   Eight
                   391268
                
                 
                   Puù
                   or
                   Chinese
                   Paces
                   or
                   Fathoms
                   ,
                   each
                   of
                   Six
                   Chè
                   ,
                   or
                   Feet
                   ,
                   and
                   which
                   are
                   to
                   the
                   Geometrical
                   Paces
                   ,
                   as
                   10⅚
                   to
                   10
                   ,
                   or
                   42
                   to
                   40
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   the
                   Fathom
                   of
                   Paris
                   as
                   7
                   to
                   8.
                   65211●…
                
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   ,
                   of
                   Furlongs
                   at
                   260
                   Puù's
                   or
                   Paces
                   ,
                   and
                   which
                   amount
                   to
                   about
                   double
                   the
                   Furlongs
                   of
                   the
                   Greeks
                   and
                   Romans
                   250
                
                 
                   Miles
                   ,
                   60
                   to
                   the
                   Degree
                   ,
                   at
                   4
                   1
                   /
                   6
                   Furlongs
                   each
                   ,
                   and
                   1086●…
                   Puù's
                   or
                   Paces
                   ,
                   or
                   more
                   truly
                   1086
                   300
                   /
                   420
                   60
                
                 
                   Sea
                   Leagues
                   of
                   an
                   Hour
                   at
                   12
                   1
                   /
                   6
                   Furlongs
                   ,
                   or
                   at
                   〈◊〉
                   Puù
                   or
                   Paces
                   each
                   20
                
              
               
                 These
                 Computations
                 may
                 serve
                 to
                 rectifie
                 the
                 Measures
                 which
                 we
                 meet
                 with
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 in
                 this
                 Relation
                 as
                 in
                 others
                 ,
                 till
                 the
                 Iesuits
                 sent
                 by
                 the
                 King
                 to
                 China
                 ,
                 give
                 us
                 the
                 exact
                 measure
                 of
                 the
                 Cubit
                 or
                 Foot
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 Pace
                 or
                 Fathom
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Furlong
                 of
                 the
                 Chineses
                 ,
                 whence
                 it
                 will
                 be
                 easie
                 to
                 gather
                 the
                 measure
                 of
                 a
                 Degree
                 of
                 a
                 Great
                 Circle
                 in
                 China
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 
                   B.
                   p.
                
                 36.
                 
                 In
                 the
                 Relation
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 made
                 of
                 the
                 Exploits
                 of
                 that
                 famous
                 Tyrant
                 
                   Cham
                   Hien
                   Chum
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 From
                 this
                 Relation
                 it
                 is
                 that
                 Martini
                 has
                 taken
                 what
                 he
                 writes
                 of
                 
                   Cham
                   Hien
                   Chum
                
                 ,
                 in
                 his
                 History
                 of
                 the
                 War
                 of
                 the
                 Tartars
                 ,
                 as
                 he
                 acknowledges
                 himself
                 .
                 There
                 ,
                 he
                 confirms
                 what
                 our
                 Author
                 tells
                 us
                 of
                 some
                 Independent
                 Princes
                 in
                 certain
                 Provinces
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 by
                 another
                 example
                 of
                 a
                 Soveraign
                 Princess
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 
                   Su
                   chuen
                
                 ,
                 who
                 came
                 in
                 Man's
                 Apparel
                 to
                 the
                 Succor
                 of
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Emperor
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 stead
                 of
                 her
                 Son
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 an
                 Infant
                 .
                 He
                 relates
                 that
                 she
                 perform'd
                 with
                 her
                 own
                 hand
                 many
                 Valiant
                 Exploits
                 ;
                 as
                 well
                 against
                 the
                 Tartars
                 ,
                 as
                 against
                 the
                 Rebels
                 .
                 Father
                 Couplet
                 also
                 in
                 his
                 Chronology
                 makes
                 mention
                 of
                 this
                 Amazon
                 or
                 Independent
                 Princess
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 great
                 Encomiums
                 that
                 Magaillans
                 gives
                 in
                 this
                 place
                 to
                 
                   Sun
                   co
                   vam
                
                 ,
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 Adopted
                 Sons
                 of
                 the
                 Tirant
                 
                   Cham
                   hien
                   chum
                
                 may
                 perhaps
                 awaken
                 the
                 Curiosity
                 of
                 the
                 Reader
                 to
                 understand
                 what
                 became
                 of
                 him
                 at
                 length
                 .
                 To
                 which
                 purpose
                 I
                 have
                 here
                 set
                 down
                 what
                 I
                 met
                 with
                 in
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 Father
                 Rougemont
                 ,
                 who
                 alone
                 makes
                 mention
                 of
                 him
                 .
              
               
                 After
                 the
                 Cruel
                 Tirant
                 
                   Cham
                   hien
                   chum
                
                 ,
                 was
                 slain
                 and
                 his
                 Army
                 defeated
                 by
                 the
                 
                   Tartars
                   ,
                   Sun
                   co
                   vam
                
                 retir'd
                 with
                 a
                 small
                 Force
                 into
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Junnan
                 ,
                 which
                 he
                 valiantly
                 defended
                 for
                 some
                 Years
                 against
                 the
                 Tartars
                 .
                 For
                 he
                 defeated
                 them
                 in
                 several
                 Encounters
                 ,
                 and
                 won
                 so
                 high
                 a
                 Reputation
                 by
                 his
                 Valour
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 his
                 Glorious
                 Atcheivements
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 declar'd
                 Emperor
                 by
                 his
                 Army
                 in
                 the
                 Year
                 1650.
                 
                 But
                 at
                 that
                 time
                 there
                 was
                 an
                 other
                 Emperor
                 of
                 the
                 Royal
                 Race
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Yum
                   Liè
                
                 ,
                 Grandchild
                 to
                 the
                 Emperor
                 
                   Van
                   Liè
                
                 ,
                 who
                 Dy'd
                 in
                 the
                 Year
                 1620.
                 
                 This
                 Young
                 Prince
                 had
                 been
                 acknowledg'd
                 Emperor
                 in
                 the
                 
                 ▪
                 Provinces
                 of
                 
                   Quam
                   si
                
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   Quei
                   cheu
                
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 a
                 great
                 part
                 of
                 
                   Quam
                   tum
                
                 .
                 But
                 in
                 the
                 Year
                 1650
                 ,
                 the
                 Tartars
                 having
                 Reconquer'd
                 all
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 
                   Quam
                   tum
                
                 ,
                 fell
                 upon
                 that
                 of
                 
                   Quam
                   si
                
                 ,
                 and
                 constrain'd
                 
                   Yum
                   Liè
                
                 ,
                 to
                 flie
                 for
                 shelter
                 into
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 
                   Yun
                   nan
                
                 ,
                 where
                 
                   Sun
                   co
                   vam
                
                 was
                 sole
                 Lord
                 and
                 Master
                 .
                 The
                 Friends
                 and
                 Favourites
                 of
                 
                   Sun
                   co
                   van●…
                
                 advis'd
                 him
                 to
                 put
                 the
                 Fugitive
                 Emperor
                 to
                 Death
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 maintain
                 himself
                 in
                 the
                 Sovereign
                 Power
                 that
                 had
                 been
                 conferr'd
                 upon
                 him
                 .
                 But
                 he
                 absolutely
                 resus'd
                 so
                 unworthy
                 an
                 Action
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 then
                 that
                 ,
                 declar'd
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 resolv'd
                 to
                 acknowledge
                 
                   Yum
                   Liè
                
                 ,
                 whose
                 Birth
                 had
                 given
                 him
                 an
                 undoubted
                 Right
                 to
                 the
                 Crown
                 .
                 In
                 short
                 he
                 acknowledg'd
                 the
                 Fugitive
                 Emperor
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 his
                 Officers
                 and
                 Soldiers
                 follow'd
                 his
                 Example
                 .
                 His
                 Forces
                 were
                 very
                 numerous
                 and
                 well
                 disciplin'd
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 was
                 great
                 hopes
                 that
                 so
                 brave
                 a
                 Captain
                 would
                 have
                 resettl'd
                 the
                 Affairs
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 and
                 driven
                 out
                 the
                 Tartars
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 Vices
                 of
                 the
                 Emperor
                 ,
                 who
                 took
                 no
                 care
                 of
                 his
                 own
                 Affairs
                 ,
                 as
                 being
                 wholly
                 addicted
                 to
                 Wine
                 and
                 Women
                 ,
                 prevented
                 the
                 Success
                 .
                 For
                 this
                 bad
                 Management
                 of
                 himself
                 brought
                 
                   Yum
                   Liè
                
                 in●…o
                 Contempt
                 among
                 his
                 Subjects
                 ;
                 and
                 
                   Sun
                   co
                   vam
                
                 repenting
                 perhaps
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 resign'd
                 the
                 Empire
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 left
                 him
                 only
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 Emperor
                 ,
                 with
                 wha●…
                 was
                 requisite
                 for
                 his
                 own
                 and
                 the
                 subsistance
                 of
                 his
                 Family
                 .
                 However
                 this
                 harsh
                 Usage
                 of
                 the
                 Emperor
                 displeas'd
                 several
                 of
                 the
                 Commanders
                 of
                 the
                 Army
                 ,
                 and
                 among
                 the
                 rest
                 ,
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 chiefest
                 among
                 them
                 call'd
                 
                   Lì
                   ●…im
                   Qué
                
                 ;
                 before
                 the
                 best
                 Friend
                 that
                 
                   Sun
                   co
                   vam
                
                 had
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 Brother
                 by
                 Adoption
                 ,
                 as
                 being
                 both
                 Adopted
                 by
                 the
                 Tirant
                 
                   Cham
                   hien
                   chum
                
                 .
                 Thereupon
                 the
                 Quarrel
                 between
                 these
                 Two
                 Great
                 Persons
                 grew
                 to
                 that
                 height
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 broke
                 Friendship
                 ,
                 parted
                 their
                 Forces
                 and
                 fought
                 one
                 against
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 till
                 at
                 last
                 in
                 the
                 heat
                 of
                 the
                 Combat
                 
                   Sun
                   co
                
                 vam's
                 Soldiers
                 deserted
                 him
                 and
                 went
                 over
                 to
                 the
                 Enemy
                 ;
                 
                 so
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 much
                 ado
                 to
                 escape
                 by
                 flight
                 with
                 only
                 Three
                 Hundred
                 Men
                 that
                 continu'd
                 faithful
                 to
                 him
                 .
                 Upon
                 which
                 ,
                 despairing
                 ever
                 to
                 resettle
                 the
                 Affairs
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 he
                 surrender'd
                 himself
                 to
                 the
                 Tartars
                 ;
                 who
                 having
                 his
                 Vertues
                 in
                 high
                 Esteem
                 and
                 Veneration
                 ,
                 advanc'd
                 him
                 Laden
                 with
                 Honors
                 to
                 the
                 Dignity
                 of
                 a
                 Petty
                 King.
                 Some
                 time
                 after
                 ,
                 
                   Yum
                   Liè
                
                 ,
                 bereft
                 of
                 the
                 Assistance
                 of
                 so
                 great
                 a
                 Captain
                 ,
                 was
                 in
                 a
                 short
                 time
                 by
                 the
                 Tartars
                 depriv'd
                 both
                 of
                 his
                 Empire
                 and
                 his
                 Life
                 ,
                 the
                 Prowess
                 of
                 
                   Li
                   tim
                
                 not
                 being
                 sufficient
                 to
                 withstand
                 their
                 Power
                 .
                 Nevertheless
                 that
                 the
                 Eldest
                 Son
                 ,
                 the
                 Wife
                 and
                 Mother
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 Emperor
                 had
                 been
                 Baptiz'd
                 in
                 the
                 Year
                 1648.
                 by
                 Father
                 
                   Andrew
                   Kassler
                
                 a
                 Iesuit
                 ,
                 the
                 Son
                 being
                 nam'd
                 Constantine
                 .
                 Thus
                 much
                 I
                 took
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 Father
                 Rougemont
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   C.
                   P.
                
                 43.
                 
                 In
                 the
                 same
                 Book
                 you
                 may
                 see
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 Soldiers
                 that
                 keep
                 Guard
                 upon
                 the
                 Frontiers
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 There
                 is
                 some
                 difference
                 among
                 Authors
                 ,
                 concerning
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 Soldiers
                 in
                 China
                 ,
                 which
                 nevertheless
                 is
                 very
                 extraordinary
                 .
                 Father
                 Trigaut
                 asserts
                 that
                 there
                 are
                 above
                 a
                 Million
                 ;
                 Father
                 Martini
                 ,
                 near
                 a
                 Million
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 the
                 report
                 of
                 Father
                 Semedo
                 ,
                 Father
                 
                   John
                   Rodriquez
                
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 a
                 person
                 very
                 Curious
                 ,
                 and
                 one
                 that
                 had
                 Travel'd
                 much
                 in
                 China
                 ,
                 assur'd
                 him
                 ,
                 that
                 by
                 what
                 he
                 had
                 met
                 with
                 in
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Books
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 Soldiers
                 in
                 the
                 several
                 Provinces
                 of
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 amounted
                 to
                 Five
                 Hundred
                 Fourscore
                 and
                 Fourteen
                 ;
                 and
                 Six
                 Hundred
                 Fourscore
                 and
                 Two
                 Thousand
                 Eight
                 Hundred
                 Fourscore
                 and
                 Eight
                 to
                 Guard
                 the
                 great
                 Wall
                 against
                 the
                 Tartars
                 ;
                 not
                 including
                 the
                 Soldiers
                 which
                 belong
                 to
                 their
                 Fleets
                 .
                 But
                 we
                 ought
                 rather
                 to
                 give
                 Credit
                 to
                 ihe
                 Relation
                 of
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 ,
                 a
                 more
                 Modern
                 Writer
                 ,
                 and
                 who
                 
                 took
                 what
                 he
                 asserts
                 out
                 of
                 a
                 Book
                 presented
                 to
                 the
                 Emperor
                 himself
                 .
                 However
                 ,
                 we
                 are
                 to
                 consider
                 that
                 these
                 Soldiers
                 are
                 not
                 like
                 to
                 ours
                 in
                 Europe
                 ,
                 neither
                 for
                 Courage
                 nor
                 Discipline
                 ,
                 as
                 being
                 no
                 other
                 for
                 the
                 most
                 part
                 then
                 the
                 Country
                 Militia
                 .
                 For
                 Father
                 Semedo
                 ,
                 speaking
                 of
                 the
                 Soldiers
                 of
                 the
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 says
                 they
                 are
                 of
                 ●…ittle
                 worth
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 we
                 are
                 not
                 to
                 think
                 they
                 follow
                 no
                 other
                 Employment
                 then
                 that
                 of
                 being
                 Soldiers
                 .
                 ●…or
                 that
                 they
                 are
                 generally
                 Inhabitants
                 in
                 the
                 places
                 where
                 they
                 are
                 Enroll'd
                 ;
                 and
                 follow
                 their
                 Trades
                 ,
                 some
                 Shooe-makers
                 ,
                 others
                 Taylors
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 And
                 Father
                 Trigaut
                 in
                 his
                 Second
                 Chapter
                 tells
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 we
                 may
                 kn●…w
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 the
                 Soldiers
                 to
                 be
                 incredible
                 ,
                 we
                 ought
                 to
                 observe
                 that
                 almost
                 half
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 the
                 Three
                 Northern
                 Provinces
                 are
                 ●…oll'd
                 i●…●…he
                 Service
                 of
                 the
                 Emperor
                 .
                 〈◊〉
                 ▪
                 Magaillans
                 〈◊〉
                 firm●…
                 the
                 same
                 thing
                 ,
                 wher●…
                 〈◊〉
                 ●…ays
                 that
                 the
                 Ex●…e
                 of
                 the
                 Emperor
                 eve●…y
                 Year
                 for
                 Nine
                 Hundred
                 a●…
                 Two
                 Thousand
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Four
                 Soldiers
                 that
                 Guard
                 th●…
                 W●…
                 ▪
                 including
                 Officers
                 and
                 all
                 ,
                 amounts
                 but
                 to
                 〈◊〉
                 Millions
                 Thirty
                 Four
                 Thousand
                 Seven
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Fourteen
                 Livres
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 not
                 above
                 half
                 a
                 Pistol
                 a
                 Year
                 for
                 every
                 Man
                 ,
                 which
                 could
                 never
                 maintain
                 them
                 ,
                 did
                 they
                 not
                 follow
                 their
                 Trades
                 to
                 support
                 themselves
                 and
                 their
                 Families
                 .
                 And
                 for
                 that
                 very
                 reason
                 we
                 are
                 not
                 to
                 think
                 such
                 a
                 number
                 of
                 Soldiers
                 incredible
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Historian
                 Cited
                 by
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 ,
                 allows
                 as
                 well
                 for
                 the
                 defence
                 of
                 the
                 Frontiers
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 inner
                 parts
                 of
                 the
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 which
                 amounts
                 to
                 Sixteen
                 Hundred
                 Seventy
                 Thousand
                 and
                 Twenty
                 Four
                 :
                 More
                 especially
                 considering
                 the
                 vastness
                 of
                 the
                 Empire
                 numerously
                 Peopled
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 the
                 Soldiers
                 have
                 neither
                 Courage
                 nor
                 Discipline
                 .
                 And
                 therefore
                 Father
                 Martini
                 tells
                 us
                 that
                 the
                 Tartars
                 are
                 better
                 Soldiers
                 then
                 the
                 Chineses
                 ,
                 but
                 neither
                 of
                 them
                 comparable
                 to
                 the
                 Soldiers
                 in
                 Europe
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               III.
            
             Of
             the
             Antiquity
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             China
             ,
             and
             what
             a
             high
             Opinion
             the
             Chineses
             have
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             THis
             Kingdom
             is
             so
             Ancient
             that
             it
             has
             preserv'd
             its
             form
             of
             Government
             ,
             and
             has
             continu'd
             during
             the
             Reign
             of
             Twenty
             Two
             Families
             ,
             from
             whence
             have
             descended
             Two
             
             Hundred
             Thirty
             Six
             Kings
             for
             the
             space
             of
             Four
             Thousand
             and
             Twenty
             Five
             Years
             .
             For
             it
             is
             so
             many
             Years
             since
             it
             began
             according
             to
             the
             Opinion
             which
             the
             Chineses
             hold
             for
             certain
             and
             unquestionable
             .
             For
             should
             we
             rest
             satisfi'd
             with
             what
             they
             look
             upon
             to
             be
             very
             probable
             ,
             it
             would
             be
             Four
             Thousand
             Six
             Hundred
             and
             Twenty
             to
             this
             present
             Year
             1668
             ,
             since
             this
             Kingdom
             began
             .
             The
             Chineses
             however
             have
             Three
             Opinions
             concerning
             this
             matter
             .
             Some
             of
             their
             Books
             six
             the
             Original
             of
             their
             Kingdom
             some
             Hundreds
             of
             Thousands
             of
             Years
             before
             the
             Creation
             .
             But
             tho'
             the
             Vulgar
             sort
             believe
             this
             to
             be
             true
             ,
             yet
             the
             Wiser
             and
             more
             Learned
             sort
             ,
             hold
             those
             Books
             for
             merely
             Fabulous
             and
             Apocryphal
             ,
             more
             especially
             since
             Consucius
             has
             condemn'd
             that
             Error
             .
             The
             Second
             Opinion
             makes
             King
             Fohi
             to
             be
             the
             Founder
             of
             this
             Kingdom
             ,
             who
             was
             the
             first
             that
             Reign'd
             towards
             the
             Consines
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Xénsi
             the
             most
             Western
             part
             of
             China
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Honan
             ,
             seated
             almost
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             So
             that
             according
             to
             their
             Books
             it
             was
             Two
             Thousand
             Nine
             Hundred
             Fifty
             Two
             Years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             Christ
             ,
             that
             this
             Prince
             began
             to
             Reign
             ,
             about
             Two
             Hundred
             Years
             after
             the
             Universal
             Deluge
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Version
             of
             the
             Seventy
             Interpreters
             .
             All
             the
             Learned
             Men
             hold
             this
             Opinion
             to
             be
             probable
             ,
             and
             many
             among
             them
             take
             it
             to
             be
             unquestionable
             .
          
           
             The
             Third
             Opinion
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Foundations
             of
             this
             Kingdom
             were
             laid
             about
             Four
             Thousand
             and
             Twenty
             Five
             Years
             ago
             by
             a
             certain
             Prince
             whose
             Name
             was
             Yao
             .
             Which
             last
             Opinion
             ,
             being
             held
             among
             them
             as
             an
             Article
             of
             Faith
             ,
             should
             any
             Chinese
             refuse
             to
             believe
             ,
             he
             would
             be
             lookt
             upon
             as
             a
             Heretick
             ,
             and
             as
             such
             a
             one
             be
             severely
             punish'd
             .
             So
             that
             should
             the
             Preachers
             of
             the
             Gospel
             but
             once
             testifie
             either
             by
             Writing
             ,
             or
             by
             Word
             of
             Mouth
             ,
             that
             they
             make
             a
             doubt
             of
             it
             ,
             that
             alone
             would
             be
             sufficient
             to
             shut
             the
             Door
             upon
             our
             Sacred
             Religion
             ,
             and
             cause
             us
             all
             to
             be
             sentenc'd
             to
             Death
             .
             The
             very
             bare
             suspicion
             ,
             without
             any
             Foundation
             ,
             of
             a
             Man's
             Incredulity
             in
             that
             point
             ,
             being
             a
             sufficient
             ground
             for
             Banishment
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             it
             is
             that
             the
             Fathers
             of
             the
             Mission
             have
             obtain'd
             leave
             from
             the
             Holy
             See
             to
             stick
             to
             the
             Version
             of
             the
             Seventy
             ,
             approv'd
             by
             the
             Church
             in
             the
             Fifth
             General
             Council
             ;
             as
             well
             for
             that
             the
             Two
             latter
             Opinions
             are
             very
             probable
             ,
             as
             to
             avoid
             the
             foremention'd
             Inconveniences
             and
             many
             others
             which
             may
             be
             easily
             imagin'd
             .
             And
             indeed
             it
             must
             be
             acknowledg'd
             that
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             World
             that
             can
             boast
             a
             Train
             of
             Kings
             so
             Ancient
             and
             so
             well
             continu'd
             .
             Those
             of
             the
             Assyrians
             ,
             the
             Persians
             ,
             the
             Greeks
             ,
             and
             Romans
             ,
             have
             had
             their
             Periods
             ;
             whereas
             that
             
             of
             China
             continues
             still
             ,
             like
             a
             great
             River
             that
             never
             ceases
             rolling
             along
             the
             streams
             that
             fall
             from
             its
             first
             Fountain
             .
          
           
             This
             long
             continuance
             and
             other
             Excellencies
             of
             China
             of
             which
             we
             have
             already
             spoken
             ,
             and
             of
             which
             we
             are
             to
             speak
             in
             the
             Progress
             of
             this
             Relation
             ,
             infuse
             into
             the
             Chineses
             a
             Pride
             most
             Insupportable
             .
             They
             put
             the
             highest
             value
             imaginable
             upon
             their
             Empire
             and
             all
             that
             belongs
             to
             them
             ;
             but
             as
             for
             strangers
             ,
             they
             Scorn
             'em
             to
             the
             lowest
             pitch
             of
             Contempt
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             advantages
             of
             their
             Wit
             and
             Learning
             ,
             tho'
             they
             themselves
             have
             little
             or
             no
             Knowledg
             .
             Which
             is
             not
             so
             much
             to
             be
             wonder'd
             at
             ,
             since
             Pride
             proceeds
             from
             Blindness
             and
             Ignorance
             .
             In
             their
             Maps
             they
             allow
             a
             vast
             Extent
             to
             China
             ,
             but
             represent
             all
             other
             Kingdoms
             round
             about
             it
             ,
             without
             any
             Order
             ,
             Position
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             Mark
             of
             good
             Geography
             ;
             small
             ,
             contracted
             ,
             and
             with
             Titles
             Ridiculous
             and
             Contemptible
             .
             As
             for
             Example
             ;
             
               Siaò
               gîn
               que
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             the
             Inhabitants
             of
             which
             are
             all
             Dwarfs
             ,
             and
             so
             little
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             constrain'd
             to
             tie
             themselves
             several
             in
             a
             Bunch
             together
             for
             fear
             of
             being
             carry'd
             away
             by
             the
             E●…gles
             and
             Kites
             .
             
               Niù
               gîn
               que
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Kingdom
             where
             all
             the
             Inhabitants
             are
             Women
             ,
             who
             Conceive
             by
             looking
             upon
             their
             Shadow
             in
             a
             Well
             ,
             or
             in
             a
             River
             ,
             and
             bring
             forth
             none
             but
             Girls
             .
             
               Chuen
               sin
               que
            
             ,
             or
             a
             Kingdom
             where
             the
             Inhabitants
             have
             all
             a
             Hole
             in
             their
             Breasts
             ,
             into
             which
             they
             stick
             a
             piece
             of
             Wood
             ,
             and
             so
             carry
             one
             another
             from
             place
             to
             place
             .
             A
             Kingdom
             where
             the
             Inhabitants
             have
             Bodies
             like
             Men
             ,
             and
             Faces
             like
             Dogs
             .
             A
             Kingdom
             ,
             where
             he
             Inhabitants
             have
             such
             long
             Arms
             that
             they
             reach
             down
             to
             the
             ground
             :
             with
             many
             other
             such
             Descriptions
             of
             the
             same
             Nature
             .
             In
             short
             ,
             they
             represent
             the
             Neighbouring
             Kingdoms
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             
             those
             of
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             the
             Iapanners
             ,
             of
             the
             Peninsula
             of
             Corea
             ,
             and
             those
             other
             that
             border
             round
             about
             upon
             China
             ,
             under
             the
             Title
             of
             the
             Four
             Barbarous
             Nations
             .
             They
             say
             ,
             that
             besides
             China
             ,
             there
             are
             Seventy
             Two
             Kingdoms
             ,
             which
             they
             paint
             all
             very
             Diminutive
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             like
             so
             many
             Nutshells
             ,
             and
             their
             Inhabitants
             all
             Deformed
             and
             Monstrous
             with
             Gestures
             so
             ridiculous
             or
             terrible
             ,
             that
             they
             resemble
             rather
             Apes
             and
             Wild
             Beasts
             then
             Men.
             Of
             latter
             times
             having
             understood
             something
             of
             Europe
             ,
             they
             have
             added
             it
             to
             their
             Maps
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             the
             Island
             of
             Tenariff
             ,
             or
             some
             Desert
             Island
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             was
             ,
             that
             the
             Vice-Roy
             of
             
               Quam
               tum
            
             ,
             in
             the
             Year
             1668
             ,
             after
             he
             had
             spoken
             of
             the
             Embassie
             of
             the
             Portugueses
             in
             a
             Memorial
             which
             he
             sent
             to
             the
             Emperor
             ,
             added
             these
             words
             ;
             
               We
               find
               very
               plainly
               ,
               that
               Europe
               is
               no
               more
               then
               only
               Two
               little
               Islands
               in
               the
               middle
               of
               the
               Sea.
               
            
          
           
             They
             divide
             the
             Heaven
             into
             Eight
             and
             Twenty
             Constellations
             ,
             and
             China
             into
             so
             many
             Quarters
             ,
             to
             every
             one
             of
             which
             they
             allow
             one
             of
             these
             Constellations
             ,
             and
             call
             them
             by
             their
             Names
             ,
             not
             leaving
             so
             much
             as
             one
             for
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Kingdoms
             .
             They
             give
             to
             their
             own
             most
             Lo●…ty
             and
             Magnificent
             Titles
             ,
             but
             to
             Foreign
             Countrys
             most
             Barbarous
             ,
             Disagreeable
             and
             Scornful
             Names
             ;
             on
             purpose
             to
             Exalt
             their
             own
             Empire
             ,
             by
             Disgracing
             all
             other
             Kingdoms
             .
          
           
             At
             what
             time
             I
             resided
             with
             Father
             
               Lewis
               Buglio
            
             in
             the
             Capital
             City
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Su
               chuen
            
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             Persecution
             begun
             against
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             at
             the
             Instigation
             of
             several
             Thousands
             of
             Bonzes
             who
             assembled
             together
             from
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             Province
             ,
             and
             the
             same
             time
             accus'd
             us
             in
             all
             the
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Province
             ,
             more
             especially
             before
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Crimes
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             
             
               Gán
               chan
               su
            
             ,
             the
             President
             of
             which
             made
             answer
             to
             the
             Petition
             of
             the
             Bonzes
             in
             this
             manner
             ,
          
           
             
               If
               these
               Strangers
               remain
               in
               their
               Habitations
               without
               stirring
               forth
               ,
               or
               teaching
               new
               Inventions
               ,
               
                 Chum
                 que
                 chi
                 tá
                 vû
                 sò
                 pù
                 yûm
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               This
               Kingdom
               is
               so
               vast
               ,
               that
               it
               is
               able
               to
               contain
               both
               the
               Natives
               and
               the
               Foreigners
               ,
               there
               being
               room
               enough
               for
               as
               many
               more
               ;
               but
               if
               they
               Teach
               any
               new
               Doctrine
               different
               from
               the
               Sacred
               and
               True
               Doctrines
               which
               we
               profess
               in
               this
               Great
               Empire
               ,
               or
               if
               they
               go
               about
               to
               surprize
               and
               delude
               the
               People
               ,
               let
               them
               be
               Punish'd
               with
               every
               one
               Forty
               Lashes
               ,
               and
               Expell'd
               the
               Province
               .
            
          
           
             Father
             
               Nicholas
               Longobardo
            
             having
             discours'd
             for
             some
             time
             concerning
             the
             Law
             of
             God
             to
             some
             of
             the
             Eunuchs
             ,
             and
             with
             those
             solid
             Reasons
             and
             Arguments
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             apparent
             enough
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             inwardly
             convinc'd
             ,
             They
             gave
             no
             more
             then
             the
             following
             Reply
             ,
          
           
             
               
                 Chum
                 que
                 chi
                 vâi
                 hûan
                 yeù
                 tao
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               What
               is
               this
               that
               we
               see
               ,
               what
               is
               this
               this
               that
               we
               hear
               ?
               Is
               it
               possible
               that
               without
               the
               Limits
               of
               this
               Empire
               there
               should
               be
               any
               Rule
               ,
               or
               any
               Path
               whereby
               to
               arrive
               at
               true
               Vertue
               ?
               Is
               there
               any
               other
               Belief
               ,
               or
               any
               other
               Law
               ?
            
             And
             I
             have
             many
             times
             observ'd
             ,
             that
             when
             I
             have
             been
             discoursing
             with
             the
             Learned
             concerning
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             ,
             and
             the
             Sciences
             of
             Europe
             ,
             they
             ask'd
             me
             whether
             we
             had
             their
             Books
             ?
             To
             which
             when
             I
             answer'd
             No
             ,
             they
             reply'd
             altogether
             surpris'd
             ,
             wavering
             and
             scandaliz'd
             ,
             If
             in
             Europe
             you
             have
             not
             our
             Books
             and
             our
             Writings
             ,
             what
             Learning
             or
             what
             Sciences
             can
             you
             have
             ?
             However
             these
             Insidels
             deserve
             both
             to
             be
             pity'd
             and
             excus'd
             ,
             since
             it
             is
             impossible
             to
             imagine
             the
             high
             Idea
             which
             not
             only
             the
             great
             
             Lords
             and
             Learned
             Men
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             Vulgar
             People
             have
             conceiv'd
             of
             this
             Empire
             .
             And
             certainly
             ,
             besides
             that
             our
             Nature
             enclines
             us
             always
             to
             put
             a
             Value
             upon
             our selves
             and
             all
             that
             belongs
             to
             us
             ,
             the
             extraordinary
             Grandeur
             and
             Advantages
             of
             this
             Kingdom
             contribute
             very
             much
             to
             puff
             up
             the
             Minds
             of
             the
             Chineses
             with
             foolish
             Imaginations
             ,
             and
             unparallel'd
             Pride
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               Third
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 A.
                 P.
                 59.
                 
              
               
                 THE
                 Chronology
                 of
                 China
                 is
                 of
                 extraordinary
                 Importance
                 ,
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 its
                 Antiquity
                 :
                 and
                 I
                 believe
                 that
                 neither
                 the
                 Portugueses
                 nor
                 Castillians
                 have
                 in
                 all
                 their
                 Voyages
                 made
                 a
                 more
                 considerable
                 Discovery
                 .
                 The
                 Annals
                 of
                 the
                 Chaldeans
                 and
                 Egyptians
                 might
                 perhaps
                 have
                 stood
                 in
                 Competition
                 with
                 those
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 and
                 perhaps
                 those
                 of
                 the
                 Tyrians
                 also
                 ,
                 and
                 some
                 other
                 Oriental
                 Nations
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 Josephus
                 makes
                 mention
                 .
                 But
                 they
                 are
                 lost
                 a
                 long
                 time
                 ago
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 the
                 Histories
                 of
                 Berosus
                 the
                 Chaldean
                 ,
                 and
                 Manathon
                 the
                 Egyptian
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 we
                 have
                 no
                 more
                 then
                 only
                 some
                 few
                 fragments
                 of
                 little
                 or
                 no
                 use
                 .
                 The
                 Greeks
                 and
                 Romans
                 have
                 left
                 us
                 nothing
                 of
                 certainty
                 before
                 Herodotus
                 ,
                 for
                 that
                 reason
                 call'd
                 the
                 Father
                 of
                 Historians
                 .
                 Who
                 nevertheless
                 did
                 not
                 write
                 till
                 about
                 Four
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Years
                 before
                 Christ.
                 And
                 if
                 we
                 go
                 back
                 to
                 the
                 Original
                 of
                 the
                 Olympiads
                 ,
                 they
                 did
                 not
                 begin
                 till
                 about
                 Seven
                 Hundred
                 Seventy
                 Seven
                 Years
                 before
                 Christ.
                 But
                 the
                 Cycles
                 of
                 the
                 Chineses
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Cronologies
                 ,
                 begin
                 
                 Two
                 Thousand
                 Six
                 Hundred
                 Four
                 score
                 and
                 Seventeen
                 Years
                 before
                 Christ
                 ,
                 under
                 the
                 Reign
                 of
                 
                   Hoam
                   ti
                
                 :
                 And
                 two
                 Thousand
                 nine
                 Hundred
                 Fifty
                 two
                 Years
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 sentiments
                 of
                 those
                 that
                 stick
                 to
                 the
                 second
                 Opinion
                 ,
                 and
                 acknowledge
                 
                   Fo
                   hi
                
                 for
                 the
                 first
                 Emperor
                 of
                 China
                 .
                 And
                 tho'
                 we
                 should
                 rest
                 satisfi'd
                 with
                 the
                 third
                 Opinion
                 ,
                 which
                 makes
                 Yao
                 the
                 first
                 Emperor
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 their
                 Chronology
                 would
                 begin
                 two
                 Thousand
                 three
                 Hundred
                 Fifty
                 seven
                 Years
                 before
                 Christ
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 fifteen
                 Hundred
                 sixty
                 nine
                 years
                 before
                 the
                 first
                 Olympiad
                 .
                 And
                 indeed
                 I
                 know
                 no
                 reason
                 why
                 any
                 man
                 should
                 refuse
                 to
                 give
                 Credit
                 to
                 this
                 Chronology
                 ,
                 in
                 regard
                 it
                 is
                 well
                 pursu'd
                 and
                 well
                 circumstanc'd
                 :
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 less
                 fabulous
                 than
                 the
                 first
                 times
                 of
                 the
                 Greek
                 and
                 Roman
                 History
                 ;
                 and
                 for
                 that
                 there
                 are
                 set
                 down
                 therein
                 several
                 Eclipses
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Astronomical
                 Observations
                 which
                 perfectly
                 agree
                 with
                 the
                 Computations
                 of
                 our
                 most
                 learned
                 Astronomers
                 in
                 these
                 latter
                 Ages
                 ;
                 as
                 I
                 have
                 seen
                 in
                 some
                 Manuscripts
                 written
                 upon
                 this
                 Subject
                 .
                 To
                 which
                 we
                 may
                 add
                 that
                 almost
                 all
                 the
                 Parts
                 of
                 the
                 Chinese
                 History
                 have
                 been
                 written
                 by
                 Authors
                 that
                 liv'd
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 .
                 As
                 for
                 Example
                 ,
                 the
                 Acts
                 of
                 King
                 Yao
                 ,
                 are
                 written
                 by
                 the
                 Secretaries
                 of
                 Xun
                 ,
                 his
                 Successor
                 .
                 The
                 History
                 of
                 Xun
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 Successor
                 Yu
                 ,
                 was
                 compil'd
                 by
                 Authors
                 then
                 living
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 contain'd
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 that
                 of
                 King
                 Yao
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 two
                 first
                 Parts
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 Ancient
                 and
                 venerable
                 Book
                 among
                 the
                 Chineses
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Xu
                   Kin.
                
                 It
                 is
                 divided
                 into
                 six
                 Parts
                 ;
                 of
                 which
                 the
                 four
                 last
                 contain
                 one
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 the
                 Second
                 and
                 Third
                 Imperial
                 Family
                 .
                 Nor
                 is
                 there
                 any
                 doubt
                 to
                 be
                 made
                 either
                 of
                 the
                 Antiquity
                 or
                 truth
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 first
                 Parts
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 
                   Xu
                   kin
                
                 ,
                 seeing
                 that
                 Confucius
                 who
                 liv'd
                 Five
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Years
                 before
                 Christ
                 ,
                 so
                 often
                 makes
                 mention
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 collected
                 with
                 great
                 industry
                 several
                 authentick
                 Pieces
                 that
                 contain
                 several
                 particulars
                 of
                 the
                 Lives
                 and
                 Government
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 Kings
                 .
              
               
               
                 Another
                 Philosopher
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Lao
                   Kiun
                   ,
                   Confucius
                   '
                
                 s
                 Contemporary
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 another
                 Author
                 more
                 Ancient
                 then
                 He
                 by
                 two
                 Hundred
                 Years
                 ,
                 whose
                 name
                 was
                 
                   Tai
                   su
                   lum
                
                 ,
                 often
                 quote
                 these
                 Ancient
                 Histories
                 .
                 Confucius
                 also
                 wrote
                 himself
                 a
                 History
                 of
                 several
                 Wars
                 of
                 China
                 for
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 two
                 Hundred
                 Forty
                 and
                 one
                 Years
                 ;
                 which
                 he
                 begin
                 at
                 the
                 Forty
                 ninth
                 Year
                 of
                 the
                 Emperor
                 
                   Pim
                   ●…am
                
                 ,
                 the
                 Thirteenth
                 Prince
                 of
                 the
                 Third
                 Family
                 call'd
                 Che●…
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 722
                 Years
                 before
                 the
                 Birth
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 since
                 which
                 time
                 there
                 have
                 been
                 a
                 great
                 Number
                 of
                 Historians
                 in
                 every
                 Age
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Chineses
                 still
                 preserve
                 ,
                 and
                 out
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 have
                 compil'd
                 General
                 Histories
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 there
                 is
                 one
                 of
                 several
                 Chinese
                 Volumes
                 in
                 the
                 Kings
                 Library
                 .
              
               
                 To
                 this
                 we
                 may
                 add
                 that
                 the
                 certainty
                 of
                 this
                 Chronology
                 is
                 confirm'd
                 by
                 many
                 circumstances
                 conformable
                 to
                 the
                 Holy
                 Scripture
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 in
                 any
                 other
                 History
                 :
                 as
                 for
                 Example
                 ,
                 the
                 long
                 life
                 of
                 their
                 first
                 Kings
                 ,
                 like
                 to
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 Patriarchs
                 in
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 Abraham
                 .
                 Thus
                 they
                 tell
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 
                   Fo
                   hi
                
                 Reigned
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Fifty
                 Years
                 ;
                 
                   Xin
                   nun
                
                 ,
                 his
                 Successor
                 ,
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Forty
                 ,
                 
                   Hoam
                   ti
                
                 liv'd
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 eleven
                 Years
                 :
                 
                   Xao
                   hao
                
                 that
                 succeeded
                 him
                 a
                 Reigned
                 a
                 Hundred
                 ,
                 
                   Ti
                   co
                
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Five
                 ,
                 Yao
                 ,
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Eighteen
                 ,
                 Xun
                 his
                 successor
                 ,
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 Ten
                 Yu
                 ,
                 a
                 Hundred
                 Years
                 :
                 after
                 whom
                 there
                 was
                 nothing
                 extraordinary
                 in
                 the
                 Age
                 of
                 the
                 Emperors
                 .
                 We
                 find
                 also
                 that
                 Fo-hi
                 began
                 to
                 Reign
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Xensi
                 ,
                 the
                 most
                 Westerly
                 part
                 of
                 all
                 China
                 ,
                 which
                 shews
                 that
                 either
                 he
                 or
                 his
                 Father
                 came
                 from
                 the
                 West
                 where
                 Noah
                 and
                 his
                 Children
                 remained
                 after
                 the
                 Deluge
                 .
                 That
                 his
                 Kingdom
                 was
                 but
                 of
                 a
                 narrow
                 extent
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 his
                 Subjects
                 but
                 small
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 he
                 might
                 seem
                 to
                 be
                 rather
                 the
                 potent
                 Father
                 of
                 a
                 Family
                 like
                 Abraham
                 ,
                 then
                 a
                 King
                 or
                 an
                 Emperor
                 .
                 That
                 he
                 and
                 his
                 Subjects
                 liv'd
                 upon
                 Herbs
                 and
                 wild
                 Fruits
                 ,
                 drank
                 
                 the
                 Blood
                 of
                 Beasts
                 ,
                 and
                 cloathed
                 themselves
                 with
                 their
                 skins
                 .
                 That
                 his
                 Successor
                 
                   Xin
                   nun
                
                 avented
                 the
                 Art
                 of
                 Tillage
                 ,
                 and
                 many
                 other
                 such
                 like
                 Circumstances
                 .
                 The
                 greatest
                 part
                 of
                 these
                 Passages
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 in
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 China
                 by
                 Martini
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Chronology
                 and
                 Prefaces
                 of
                 
                   F.
                   Couplet
                
                 ,
                 Printed
                 at
                 Paris
                 with
                 tee
                 works
                 of
                 Confucius
                 ;
                 and
                 in
                 several
                 parts
                 of
                 our
                 Author
                 ,
                 chiefly
                 in
                 the
                 Fifth
                 and
                 Sixth
                 Chapters
                 .
              
               
                 It
                 may
                 be
                 objected
                 ,
                 that
                 this
                 Chronology
                 does
                 not
                 agree
                 with
                 the
                 Vulgar
                 Translation
                 of
                 the
                 Bible
                 .
                 But
                 besides
                 that
                 God
                 has
                 not
                 vouchsaf'd
                 us
                 the
                 Holy
                 Scripture
                 to
                 make
                 us
                 Learned
                 but
                 Vertuous
                 ;
                 and
                 so
                 there
                 may
                 have
                 happen'd
                 some
                 omission
                 ,
                 or
                 mistake
                 in
                 the
                 Dates
                 ;
                 it
                 may
                 be
                 answer'd
                 that
                 the
                 question
                 about
                 the
                 Continuance
                 of
                 the
                 World
                 after
                 the
                 Deludge
                 is
                 not
                 yet
                 decided
                 ;
                 that
                 their
                 Chronology
                 agrees
                 with
                 the
                 Translation
                 of
                 the
                 Septuagint
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 authentick
                 and
                 receiv'd
                 by
                 the
                 Church
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 the
                 Vulgar
                 .
                 But
                 this
                 is
                 not
                 a
                 place
                 to
                 enlarge
                 upon
                 this
                 Subject
                 ,
                 they
                 who
                 desire
                 to
                 know
                 more
                 may
                 consult
                 the
                 Book
                 which
                 Father
                 
                   Pezeron
                   ,
                   a
                   Barnardine
                
                 has
                 newly
                 Printed
                 upon
                 this
                 Subject
                 .
              
               
                 Nor
                 can
                 it
                 be
                 said
                 that
                 the
                 Fathers
                 have
                 by
                 agreement
                 juggl'd
                 up
                 this
                 Chronology
                 :
                 For
                 we
                 find
                 they
                 have
                 spoken
                 truth
                 in
                 the
                 Rest
                 of
                 their
                 Relations
                 ;
                 that
                 they
                 make
                 no
                 scruple
                 to
                 correct
                 one
                 another
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 mistaken
                 ,
                 as
                 you
                 may
                 see
                 by
                 our
                 Author
                 in
                 several
                 places
                 :
                 That
                 the
                 
                   Jacobins
                   ,
                   Augustinians
                
                 and
                 Franciscans
                 who
                 have
                 had
                 several
                 quarrels
                 with
                 the
                 Iesuites
                 in
                 reference
                 to
                 their
                 Mission
                 ,
                 agree
                 with
                 them
                 in
                 this
                 particular
                 ,
                 and
                 never
                 accuse
                 them
                 to
                 have
                 err'd
                 in
                 their
                 Chronology
                 .
                 And
                 lastly
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Hollanders
                 who
                 have
                 sent
                 several
                 Embassies
                 into
                 China
                 ,
                 and
                 who
                 have
                 several
                 Thousands
                 of
                 Chineses
                 at
                 Batavia
                 ,
                 never
                 reprov'd
                 the
                 Iesuits
                 for
                 any
                 mistake
                 upon
                 this
                 occasion
                 .
                 On
                 the
                 other
                 side
                 they
                 put
                 a
                 great
                 value
                 upon
                 Martini's
                 Works
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 printe
                 in
                 Holland
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 
                   China
                   illustrated
                
                 by
                 
                   F.
                   Kirker
                
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               IV.
            
             Of
             the
             Letters
             and
             Language
             of
             China
             .
          
           
             ALtho'
             the
             Egyptians
             vaunt
             themselves
             to
             have
             been
             the
             first
             that
             ever
             made
             use
             of
             Letters
             and
             Hieroglyphicks
             ;
             yet
             certain
             it
             is
             that
             the
             Chineses
             had
             the
             practice
             of
             Letters
             before
             them
             .
             All
             other
             Nations
             have
             had
             a
             way
             of
             Writing
             in
             common
             ,
             consisting
             of
             an
             Alphabet
             of
             about
             Four
             and
             Twenty
             Letters
             ,
             which
             have
             almost
             all
             the
             same
             sound
             ,
             tho'
             differing
             in
             shape
             .
             But
             the
             Chineses
             make
             use
             of
             Fifty
             Four
             Thousand
             Four
             Hundred
             and
             Nine
             Letters
             ,
             which
             express
             what
             they
             signifie
             with
             so
             much
             Grace
             ,
             Vivacity
             and
             Efficacy
             ,
             that
             you
             would
             think
             them
             not
             to
             be
             Characters
             ,
             but
             Voices
             and
             Languages
             that
             spoke
             ,
             or
             rather
             Figures
             and
             Images
             that
             represent
             and
             express
             to
             the
             Life
             what
             they
             signifie
             ;
             so
             wonderful
             is
             the
             contrivance
             of
             their
             Letters
             .
             For
             proof
             of
             which
             ,
             I
             shall
             here
             set
             down
             a
             Paragraph
             of
             a
             Treatise
             which
             I
             compos'd
             concerning
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             .
          
           
             The
             Chinese
             Letters
             are
             either
             Simple
             or
             Compounded
             .
             The
             Simple
             Letters
             are
             made
             of
             Lines
             ,
             Points
             and
             Folds
             ,
             as
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             sin
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             mô
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             tú
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             chú.
             The
             Compounded
             Letters
             are
             formed
             of
             several
             Simple
             Letters
             put
             together
             ,
             as
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             xú
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             chú.
             The
             Letter
             xú
             signifies
             
               sincere
               ,
               sincerity
            
             ,
             and
             is
             compos'd
             of
             the
             Letter
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             ,
             which
             signifies
             ,
             as
             ;
             and
             the
             Letter
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             sin
             ,
             which
             signifies
             
             a
             Heart
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             Countenance
             and
             Words
             of
             a
             sincere
             Man
             are
             like
             his
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             Letter
             chu
             signifies
             a
             Pillar
             or
             Column
             ,
             and
             is
             compos'd
             of
             the
             Letter
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             mò
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             Tree
             Wood
             ,
             or
             a
             piece
             of
             Timber
             ,
             and
             the
             Letter
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             chu
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             Lord
             or
             Master
             ;
             because
             the
             Pillars
             are
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Masters
             of
             the
             House
             ,
             and
             the
             Props
             that
             support
             it
             .
             And
             because
             a
             Forest
             contains
             several
             Trees
             ,
             the
             Letter
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             lin
             ,
             which
             expresses
             this
             word
             ,
             is
             compos'd
             of
             two
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             mo
             .
             When
             the
             Forest
             is
             very
             thick
             it
             is
             express'd
             by
             the
             Letter
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             sen
             ,
             form'd
             of
             three
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             mo
             .
             And
             thus
             by
             what
             we
             have
             said
             ,
             you
             may
             judge
             of
             several
             other
             Contrivances
             which
             are
             very
             numerous
             in
             the
             composition
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             ,
             which
             have
             so
             much
             Force
             and
             Efficacy
             to
             explain
             ,
             as
             also
             to
             perswade
             what
             they
             signifie
             ,
             that
             many
             times
             it
             happens
             that
             the
             change
             of
             one
             Letter
             in
             a
             Process
             is
             enough
             to
             cause
             the
             Party
             accus'd
             ,
             or
             the
             Accuser
             ,
             to
             lose
             his
             Estate
             or
             his
             Life
             .
          
           
             Nor
             will
             it
             be
             amiss
             in
             this
             place
             to
             examine
             whether
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             be
             not
             Hieroglyphicks
             ,
             or
             no
             ?
          
           
             In
             the
             first
             place
             I
             am
             apt
             to
             believe
             ,
             if
             we
             consider
             their
             first
             Original
             ,
             that
             without
             doubt
             they
             are
             Hieroglyphicks
             For
             that
             the
             Ancient
             Letters
             which
             the
             Chineses
             say
             were
             made
             use
             of
             in
             the
             first
             Ages
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             were
             the
             Images
             and
             Figures
             ,
             tho'
             imperfect
             ,
             of
             the
             things
             visible
             which
             they
             signifi'd
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             the
             Ancient
             Letter
             ,
             which
             signifi'd
             the
             Sun
             was
             this
             ▪
             ☉
             ge
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             is
             now
             in
             use
             is
             made
             thus
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ge
             .
             The
             Letter
             which
             signifi'd
             the
             Moon
             was
             made
             after
             this
             manner
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             yue
             ,
             but
             now
             thus
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             yue
             .
             The
             Letter
             which
             signifi'd
             the
             Ancient
             Foundation
             of
             any
             thing
             ,
             had
             this
             Figure
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             puèa
             ,
             but
             the
             Modern
             Letter
             is
             shap'd
             thus
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             puen
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             the
             
             rest
             .
             By
             which
             it
             may
             be
             seen
             that
             many
             of
             the
             Ancient
             Letters
             were
             Figures
             that
             represented
             the
             things
             which
             they
             signifi'd
             ;
             and
             by
             consequence
             that
             a
             part
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             are
             Hieroglyphicks
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             second
             place
             the
             same
             thing
             may
             be
             said
             of
             the
             Modern
             Letters
             consider'd
             in
             themselves
             .
             For
             that
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             them
             are
             compos'd
             of
             simple
             Letters
             ;
             of
             the
             signification
             of
             which
             they
             retain
             something
             always
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             all
             the
             Letters
             that
             any
             way
             relate
             to
             a
             Woman
             are
             compos'd
             of
             the
             Letter
             niù
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             Woman
             ,
             and
             of
             some
             other
             Letter
             .
             Thus
             the
             Letter
             ciù
             ,
             which
             signifies
             ,
             that
             a
             Man
             Marries
             ,
             or
             takes
             a
             Woman
             ,
             is
             compos'd
             of
             the
             Letter
             ciù
             to
             take
             ,
             and
             the
             Letter
             niù
             ,
             a
             Woman
             .
             The
             Letter
             Kiâ
             ,
             which
             signifies
             that
             a
             Woman
             Marries
             ,
             is
             compos'd
             of
             the
             Letter
             Kiâ
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             House
             or
             Family
             ,
             and
             the
             Letter
             niù
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             Woman
             .
             Which
             is
             the
             same
             thing
             as
             to
             say
             that
             a
             Woman
             is
             in
             her
             House
             or
             Family
             .
             For
             that
             the
             Chineses
             holds
             that
             a
             Marry'd
             Woman
             is
             in
             her
             Husband's
             House
             or
             Family
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             her
             Father's
             .
             By
             these
             Examples
             of
             the
             composition
             of
             their
             Letters
             a
             Man
             may
             see
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             Hieroglyphicks
             ,
             since
             they
             represent
             to
             the
             Imagination
             the
             thing
             which
             they
             signifie
             with
             so
             much
             grace
             ,
             and
             after
             so
             ingenious
             a
             manner
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             third
             place
             it
             is
             the
             nature
             of
             Hieroglyphicks
             not
             to
             be
             the
             natural
             figures
             of
             the
             things
             which
             they
             signifie
             ,
             but
             only
             to
             represent
             them
             ,
             either
             naturally
             ,
             or
             by
             the
             Institution
             of
             Men.
             Now
             all
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             are
             either
             natural
             figures
             ,
             as
             the
             Ancient
             representations
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             the
             Moon
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ;
             or
             else
             figures
             appointed
             to
             signifie
             something
             ,
             as
             are
             all
             those
             which
             are
             appointed
             to
             signifie
             something
             that
             has
             no
             figure
             ,
             
             as
             the
             Soul
             ,
             Beauty
             ,
             the
             Vertues
             ,
             the
             Vices
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Actions
             of
             Men
             and
             Beasts
             .
          
           
             Fourthly
             ,
             It
             cannot
             be
             said
             that
             our
             Letters
             are
             in
             like
             manner
             Hieroglyphicks
             :
             Because
             there
             is
             not
             one
             in
             particular
             that
             represents
             or
             signifies
             any
             thing
             but
             only
             when
             it
             is
             join'd
             to
             another
             .
             Whereas
             every
             Chinese
             Letter
             has
             its
             proper
             signification
             ,
             and
             still
             preserves
             it
             tho'
             join'd
             with
             others
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             in
             the
             Letter
             Lim
             which
             signifies
             a
             Bell
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             compounded
             of
             the
             Letter
             Kin
             which
             signifies
             Mettal
             ,
             and
             the
             Letter
             Lim
             which
             signifies
             to
             Command
             ;
             in
             regard
             there
             is
             no
             way
             more
             easie
             to
             command
             then
             by
             the
             sound
             of
             a
             Bell.
             By
             which
             it
             is
             evident
             that
             these
             two
             Letters
             in
             the
             composition
             preserve
             their
             particular
             signification
             .
          
           
             Fifthly
             ,
             In
             regard
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             are
             not
             simply
             Lines
             or
             Characters
             ,
             but
             figures
             appointed
             to
             represent
             or
             signifie
             something
             ,
             it
             follows
             of
             consequence
             that
             they
             are
             not
             simple
             Letters
             like
             ours
             ,
             but
             Hieroglyphicks
             .
             Where
             we
             are
             to
             take
             notice
             that
             these
             Hieroglyphick
             Letters
             which
             extreamly
             help
             the
             Memory
             to
             remember
             them
             ,
             and
             contribute
             much
             to
             know
             and
             distinguish
             what
             they
             signifie
             ,
             in
             regard
             that
             every
             Genus
             and
             every
             Species
             has
             a
             distinct
             Letter
             which
             is
             to
             be
             found
             in
             all
             those
             that
             signifie
             the
             things
             contain'd
             in
             the
             same
             Species
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             all
             those
             Letters
             that
             signifie
             those
             things
             which
             have
             any
             Relation
             to
             Fire
             ,
             infallibly
             contain
             in
             their
             composition
             the
             Letter
             Ho
             ,
             which
             signifies
             Fire
             .
             So
             the
             Letter
             cai
             ,
             which
             signifies
             Calamity
             ,
             is
             compos'd
             of
             the
             Letter
             miên
             a
             House
             ,
             and
             the
             Letter
             ho
             Fire
             ,
             for
             that
             no
             greater
             misfortune
             can
             befal
             a
             Man
             then
             to
             have
             his
             House
             burnt
             down
             .
             The
             Letter
             hoâm
             is
             compos'd
             of
             the
             Letter
             hoam
             which
             signifies
             a
             great
             King
             ,
             and
             the
             Letter
             ho
             or
             Fire
             ,
             because
             
             there
             is
             nothing
             in
             the
             World
             that
             has
             more
             Splendor
             and
             Lustre
             then
             a
             King.
             And
             so
             it
             is
             in
             other
             things
             that
             have
             any
             Relation
             or
             Resemblance
             to
             Fire
             .
             The
             Letter
             tem
             which
             signifies
             a
             Mountain
             of
             hard
             Rocks
             ,
             serves
             also
             for
             Stairs
             or
             Ladders
             .
             The
             same
             observation
             is
             also
             to
             be
             made
             in
             all
             Letters
             that
             belong
             to
             Mountains
             .
             And
             what
             we
             have
             said
             of
             these
             two
             Species
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             understood
             of
             all
             others
             .
             These
             Reasons
             and
             these
             Examples
             plainly
             demonstrate
             ,
             not
             only
             that
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             are
             Hieroglyphicks
             ,
             but
             the
             neatness
             and
             subtilty
             of
             the
             Wit
             of
             the
             Chineses
             .
          
           
             The
             Language
             and
             Letters
             of
             the
             Chineses
             have
             been
             invented
             with
             a
             wonderful
             deal
             of
             Contrivance
             ;
             in
             regard
             they
             are
             all
             Monosyllables
             ,
             as
             ,
             
               Pa
               ,
               Pe
               ,
               pi
               ,
               po
               ,
               pu
               .
               Pam
               ,
               pem
               ,
               pim
               ,
               pom
               ,
               pum
               .
               Ta
               ,
               te
               ,
               ti
               ,
               to
               ,
               tu
               .
               Tam
               ,
               tem
               ,
               tim
               ,
               tum
               :
            
             and
             so
             of
             the
             rest
             .
             There
             are
             also
             several
             other
             Monosyllables
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             Chineses
             make
             no
             use
             ,
             as
             
               Ba
               ,
               be
               ,
               bi
               ,
               bo
               ,
               bu
               .
               Ra
               ,
               re
               ,
               ri
               ,
               ro
               ,
               ru
               .
               Pom
               ,
               tom
               ,
               mom
               ,
               nom
               .
            
             So
             that
             the
             number
             of
             their
             words
             consider'd
             in
             themselves
             ,
             is
             not
             above
             three
             Hundred
             and
             twenty
             ;
             but
             if
             they
             are
             consider'd
             with
             their
             differences
             and
             distinctions
             ,
             there
             are
             are
             enow
             to
             form
             a
             perfect
             Language
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             the
             Syllable
             Po
             ,
             taken
             after
             eleven
             several
             manners
             ,
             makes
             eleven
             several
             Words
             ,
             and
             signifies
             eleven
             different
             things
             .
             And
             indeed
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             wonderful
             thing
             ,
             that
             every
             Monosyllable
             should
             be
             a
             Noun
             ,
             Pronoun
             ,
             Substantive
             ,
             Adjective
             ,
             Adverb
             and
             Participle
             ;
             that
             it
             should
             be
             a
             Verb
             ,
             and
             signifie
             the
             Present
             ,
             Imperative
             ,
             Subjunctive
             and
             Infinitive
             ;
             the
             Singular
             and
             Plural
             with
             their
             Persons
             .
             The
             Present
             ,
             Imperfect
             ,
             Perfect
             ,
             Aori●…s
             ,
             and
             Future
             Tenses
             .
             These
             varieties
             proceed
             from
             the
             manner
             of
             Pronunciation
             in
             varying
             the
             Voice
             ,
             the
             tone
             or
             accent
             ,
             which
             is
             either
             soft
             or
             strong
             ,
             Grave
             ,
             
             Acute
             ,
             or
             Circumflex
             ;
             as
             also
             in
             observing
             or
             not
             observing
             the
             Aspiration
             .
             The
             difference
             of
             Accents
             in
             Pronunciation
             is
             known
             by
             the
             diversity
             of
             the
             tones
             of
             the
             Voice
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             the
             simple
             Accent
             or
             Tone
             is
             when
             we
             pronounce
             with
             a
             smooth
             and
             equal
             Voice
             ;
             which
             we
             mark
             with
             this
             simple
             and
             equal
             Figure
             .
             —
             We
             express
             Aspiration
             with
             this
             Mark
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             Greeks
             also
             made
             use
             to
             signifie
             their
             Aspiration
             .
             All
             this
             is
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             following
             Example
             of
             eleven
             manners
             ,
             acording
             to
             which
             the
             Syllable
             Po
             may
             be
             varied
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             When
             this
             Syllable
             is
             pronounc'd
             with
             an
             accent
             smooth
             and
             equal
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             Glass
             .
             With
             a
             Grave
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             to
             boil
             ,
             with
             an
             Acute
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             to
             winnow
             Corn
             or
             Rice
             .
             With
             a
             Circumflex
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             sage
             or
             Prudent
             ,
             and
             liberal
             .
             With
             a
             close
             Circumflex
             pointed
             at
             top
             Pô
             signifies
             to
             prepare
             :
             When
             pronounc'd
             with
             a
             Circumflex
             charg'd
             and
             aspirated
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             an
             Old
             Woman
             :
             with
             an
             equal
             accent
             aspirated
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             to
             cleave
             or
             break
             :
             with
             an
             Accent
             level
             and
             aspirated
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             stooping
             :
             with
             an
             acute
             accent
             elevated
             and
             aspirated
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             never
             so
             little
             ,
             or
             almost
             ;
             with
             a
             Circumflex
             open
             and
             aspired
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             to
             Water
             :
             With
             a
             close
             Circumflex
             aspirated
             and
             a
             point
             above
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifies
             a
             Slave
             or
             Captive
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Treatise
             of
             the
             Letters
             and
             Language
             of
             China
             ;
             which
             I
             compos'd
             for
             those
             that
             come
             to
             Preach
             in
             this
             Empire
             ,
             I
             have
             explain'd
             at
             large
             these
             eleven
             manners
             of
             Pronunciation
             ,
             which
             are
             very
             intelligible
             by
             what
             goes
             before
             ,
             and
             what
             follows
             .
             However
             what
             I
             have
             here
             said
             is
             sufficient
             to
             shew
             the
             Contrivance
             of
             the
             Language
             ,
             which
             having
             no
             more
             than
             so
             small
             a
             number
             of
             Monosyllables
             ,
             is
             yet
             so
             copious
             and
             so
             expressive
             ;
             for
             it
             unites
             ,
             
             changes
             and
             intermixes
             them
             after
             so
             many
             various
             manners
             ,
             and
             those
             so
             eloquent
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             nothing
             can
             be
             more
             wonderful
             ;
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             following
             example
             .
             The
             Letter
             mō
             ,
             being
             alone
             ,
             signifies
             a
             Tree
             ,
             a
             piece
             of
             Wood
             ,
             or
             the
             proper
             name
             of
             a
             Family
             ,
             &c.
             
             But
             in
             Composition
             it
             comprehends
             a
             great
             number
             of
             other
             significations
             .
             
               Mō
               cūm
            
             ,
             is
             the
             name
             of
             several
             Saints
             ,
             which
             as
             the
             Chineses
             pretend
             ,
             never
             die
             ,
             but
             fly
             from
             one
             Wood
             or
             Mountain
             to
             another
             .
             
               Mō
               to
            
             signifies
             the
             Clapper
             of
             a
             Bell.
             And
             because
             it
             serves
             to
             make
             People
             hear
             ,
             the
             Chineses
             have
             very
             elegantly
             appli'd
             the
             name
             of
             
               Mō
               tō
            
             to
             Masters
             ,
             Doctors
             and
             Preachers
             of
             the
             Faith
             ,
             because
             that
             by
             their
             Voices
             ,
             their
             Writing
             and
             Examples
             they
             cause
             People
             to
             hear
             and
             learn
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             
               In
               omnem
               terram
               exivit
               sunus
               eorum
               .
            
             For
             this
             reason
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Chineses
             give
             the
             Title
             of
             
               Mo
               to
            
             ,
             by
             way
             of
             Excellency
             ,
             to
             
               Cum
               fu
               ci
               us
            
             ,
             for
             that
             he
             taught
             the
             natural
             Law
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             and
             is
             Master
             and
             Doctor
             of
             that
             Nation
             .
             
               Mō
               leáo
            
             signifies
             a
             quantity
             of
             Timber
             prepar'd
             for
             Building
             .
             
               Mō
               triām
            
             ,
             is
             the
             name
             of
             a
             certain
             Odour
             .
             
               Mo
               ngeu
            
             ,
             signifies
             by
             Chance
             :
             as
             also
             certain
             Figures
             or
             Puppets
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             carry
             when
             they
             accompany
             their
             Dead
             .
             
               Mo
               kin
            
             ,
             is
             the
             Name
             of
             a
             certain
             flower
             that
             blows
             and
             spreads
             in
             the
             Morning
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             Evening
             withers
             and
             falls
             .
             Which
             the
             Chineses
             aptly
             make
             use
             of
             in
             the
             Composition
             of
             their
             Letters
             ,
             to
             express
             the
             short
             endurance
             and
             inconstancy
             of
             worldly
             Felicity
             .
             
               Mo
               puen
            
             signifies
             a
             wooden
             Bowl
             .
             
               Mo
               tien
            
             a
             Scholar
             of
             the
             College
             Royal.
             Mo
             signifies
             a
             Tree
             ,
             and
             tien
             Heaven
             ,
             as
             much
             as
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             Scholar
             of
             the
             College
             Royal
             ,
             is
             like
             a
             Tree
             planted
             in
             Heaven
             .
             
               Mo
               qua
            
             signifies
             a
             Quince
             ;
             a
             sort
             of
             Fruit
             ,
             which
             only
             grows
             in
             the
             province
             
             of
             Xansi
             .
             The
             Chineses
             never
             eat
             it
             ,
             but
             make
             use
             of
             it
             in
             Physic
             only
             .
             
               Mo
               kie
            
             signifies
             wooden
             Shooes
             .
             
               Mo
               lân
            
             ,
             Bars
             or
             Grates
             .
             
               Mo
               cien
            
             a
             Wedge
             of
             Wood.
             
               Mo
               quai
            
             ,
             a
             Batoon
             or
             Cudgel
             .
             
               Mo
               no
            
             a
             Man
             of
             few
             words
             .
             
               Mo
               quem
            
             a
             Batoon
             ,
             or
             an
             impudent
             Person
             ,
             or
             a
             Porter
             .
             
               Mo
               hia
            
             ,
             a
             Chest
             or
             Coffer
             .
             
               Mo
               siam
            
             a
             Court
             Cupboard
             .
             
               Mo
               yu
            
             ,
             a
             wooden
             Instrument
             like
             a
             Fish
             ,
             which
             the
             Bonzes
             play
             upon
             when
             they
             say
             their
             Prayers
             ,
             or
             beg
             Alms.
             
               Mo
               ûl
            
             a
             Mushrom
             .
             
               Mo
               ciám
            
             or
             
               Mo
               cum
            
             ,
             a
             Carpenter
             .
             
               Mo
               nieu
            
             litterally
             signifies
             Cows
             of
             Wood
             ;
             and
             Metaphorically
             an
             invention
             for
             the
             carrying
             of
             great
             Burthens
             :
             alluding
             to
             a
             certain
             Person
             ,
             who
             as
             the
             Chineses
             say
             ,
             formerly
             made
             cows
             of
             Wood
             so
             artificially
             ,
             that
             they
             mov'd
             of
             themselves
             and
             carried
             great
             Burthens
             .
             
               Mo
               nu
            
             ,
             a
             sort
             of
             small
             Orainges
             .
             
               Mo
               nun
            
             the
             name
             of
             a
             precious
             Stone
             .
             
               Mo
               sim
            
             ,
             the
             Planet
             
               Iupiter
               .
               Mo
               kiun
            
             an
             enchasing
             ,
             also
             a
             hook
             .
             
               Mo
               mien
            
             Cotton
             .
             The
             Syllable
             mo
             may
             be
             thus
             joined
             after
             several
             manners
             ,
             which
             I
             omit
             for
             brevity
             sake
             .
             So
             that
             as
             we
             ,
             out
             of
             four
             and
             twenty
             Letters
             ,
             form
             all
             our
             words
             ,
             by
             placing
             them
             after
             several
             manners
             ,
             in
             like
             manner
             the
             Chineses
             form
             all
             their
             words
             and
             discourses
             by
             variously
             intermixing
             their
             Syllables
             one
             with
             another
             .
             And
             this
             they
             make
             it
             their
             business
             to
             do
             with
             so
             much
             Perspicuity
             ,
             Grace
             ,
             and
             Significancy
             that
             in
             some
             measure
             they
             equal
             the
             Greeks
             and
             Latins
             .
             At
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Treatise
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             and
             Language
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             already
             mention'd
             ,
             I
             have
             Collected
             Alphabetically
             all
             the
             Theological
             and
             Philosophical
             terms
             ,
             which
             our
             Fathers
             made
             use
             of
             in
             the
             Books
             which
             they
             compos'd
             for
             the
             Chineses
             .
             And
             I
             have
             observ'd
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             a
             great
             number
             of
             words
             that
             express
             their
             Signification
             much
             more
             happily
             and
             easily
             then
             ours
             :
             so
             curious
             and
             eloquent
             is
             that
             Language
             .
          
           
           
             It
             may
             be
             demanded
             of
             me
             perhaps
             how
             it
             can
             be
             that
             one
             and
             the
             same
             Word
             should
             have
             so
             many
             significations
             and
             how
             they
             who
             understand
             them
             can
             distinguish
             them
             ?
             To
             which
             I
             answer
             ,
             that
             the
             variety
             of
             Signification
             arises
             from
             the
             various
             couching
             of
             the
             Monosyllables
             together
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             shew'd
             in
             the
             Syllable
             Mō
             ,
             and
             the
             difference
             of
             the
             Accents
             and
             Tones
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             demonstrated
             in
             the
             Syllable
             Po.
             This
             distinction
             is
             so
             natural
             to
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             that
             without
             making
             the
             least
             reflection
             upon
             the
             tones
             or
             accents
             ,
             they
             readily
             understand
             all
             the
             different
             significations
             of
             the
             same
             Monosyllable
             .
             I
             say
             without
             the
             least
             hesitation
             or
             reflection
             .
             For
             that
             indeed
             the
             People
             know
             not
             what
             either
             tones
             or
             accents
             mean
             ,
             which
             are
             only
             understood
             by
             the
             Poets
             ,
             and
             our
             Fathers
             that
             travel
             into
             China
             ,
             who
             having
             acquir'd
             that
             Knowledge
             ,
             come
             to
             understand
             the
             Language
             with
             Ease
             ,
             which
             else
             they
             could
             never
             do
             without
             an
             extraordinary
             deal
             of
             Trouble
             .
             We
             are
             beholding
             for
             this
             curious
             and
             profitable
             observation
             of
             the
             tones
             to
             
               F.
               Lazaro
               Catanco
            
             .
             And
             I
             have
             endeavour'd
             to
             explain
             it
             by
             the
             Comparison
             of
             a
             Musician
             ,
             who
             by
             labour
             and
             skill
             has
             acquir'd
             a
             readiness
             to
             know
             and
             express
             the
             six
             tones
             ,
             
               ut
               ,
               re
               ,
               mi
               ,
               fa
               ,
               sol
               ,
               la
               ,
            
             which
             another
             Man
             born
             with
             necessary
             abilities
             ,
             naturally
             expresses
             and
             distingnishes
             without
             the
             help
             of
             Rules
             or
             Art.
             It
             does
             not
             follow
             nevertheless
             that
             the
             Chineses
             sing
             out
             their
             words
             when
             they
             speak
             ,
             as
             one
             of
             our
             Fathers
             of
             Macao
             imagin'd
             ;
             or
             that
             they
             carry
             a
             tablet
             about
             their
             Necks
             ,
             upon
             which
             they
             write
             down
             what
             they
             would
             say
             ,
             when
             we
             do
             not
             understand
             them
             ,
             as
             I
             was
             made
             believe
             when
             I
             first
             travell'd
             into
             the
             Empire
             .
             Or
             that
             the
             Chineses
             cannot
             whisper
             a
             Man
             in
             the
             Ear
             ,
             as
             once
             I
             thought
             ,
             imagining
             it
             was
             necessary
             for
             them
             to
             exalt
             their
             
             Voices
             to
             express
             their
             tones
             and
             accents
             .
             The
             contrary
             to
             which
             may
             be
             easily
             evinc'd
             by
             this
             Example
             .
             Should
             I
             say
             in
             Europe
             that
             there
             was
             a
             difference
             of
             tone
             in
             the
             Syllable
             to
             of
             the
             Latin
             words
             ,
             totus
             and
             totaliter
             ,
             perhaps
             I
             should
             hardly
             be
             believ'd
             :
             and
             yet
             there
             is
             nothing
             more
             certain
             .
             For
             in
             
               totus
               ,
               to
            
             is
             pronounc'd
             with
             a
             clear
             and
             strong
             Voice
             ,
             by
             opening
             the
             Lips
             ;
             but
             in
             totaliter
             ,
             the
             same
             Syllable
             is
             pronounc'd
             with
             a
             weaker
             sound
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             Lips
             more
             close
             .
             So
             likewise
             in
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             ,
             the
             Syllable
             to
             pronounc'd
             with
             an
             acute
             and
             elevated
             Accent
             has
             the
             same
             sound
             that
             to
             in
             totus
             ,
             and
             signifies
             slothful
             or
             to
             fall
             ;
             in
             regard
             a
             slothful
             Man
             seems
             as
             if
             he
             were
             tumbling
             every
             step
             he
             takes
             ;
             but
             to
             in
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             pronounc'd
             with
             a
             Circumflex
             mark'd
             with
             a
             Point
             ,
             has
             the
             same
             Sound
             with
             to
             in
             totaliter
             ;
             and
             signifies
             to
             study
             ,
             or
             a
             solitary
             Person
             ;
             because
             that
             a
             Man
             must
             be
             retired
             that
             will
             read
             or
             study
             to
             advantage
             .
             The
             Chinese
             Language
             has
             many
             other
             Qualities
             and
             Advantages
             that
             shew
             the
             Wit
             and
             Industry
             of
             those
             that
             invented
             it
             .
             But
             I
             pass
             them
             over
             in
             silence
             for
             brevities
             sake
             .
          
           
             However
             I
             cannot
             forbear
             to
             assert
             ,
             that
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             is
             more
             easie
             then
             the
             Greek
             ,
             the
             Latin
             ,
             or
             any
             of
             the
             other
             Languages
             of
             Europe
             At
             least
             it
             cannot
             be
             deny'd
             me
             but
             that
             it
             is
             much
             more
             easie
             then
             the
             Languages
             of
             those
             other
             Countries
             where
             our
             Society
             is
             employ'd
             in
             Missions
             :
             which
             is
             an
             Advantage
             not
             a
             little
             considerable
             .
             Nor
             is
             this
             a
             thing
             to
             be
             question'd
             ,
             in
             regard
             my
             Sentiments
             are
             conformable
             both
             to
             reason
             and
             Experience
             .
             for
             in
             the
             first
             place
             it
             is
             most
             certain
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             nothing
             which
             more
             condnces
             to
             the
             acquiring
             of
             a
             Language
             then
             the
             Memory
             ;
             and
             by
             consequence
             that
             Language
             must
             be
             the
             most
             
             easie
             which
             has
             fewest
             words
             :
             in
             regard
             a
             small
             number
             of
             words
             is
             more
             easily
             retain'd
             then
             a
             more
             Copious
             quantity
             .
             Now
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             is
             the
             most
             concise
             of
             all
             others
             ,
             as
             not
             being
             compos'd
             of
             above
             a
             hundred
             and
             twenty
             Monosyllables
             :
             whereas
             the
             Greek
             and
             Latin
             contain
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             words
             ,
             of
             Tenses
             ,
             Moods
             ,
             Numbers
             ,
             Persons
             ,
             &c.
             
             But
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             requires
             only
             a
             Memory
             to
             retain
             the
             Accents
             ,
             which
             are
             as
             it
             were
             the
             form
             that
             distinguishes
             the
             signification
             of
             Words
             ;
             and
             to
             learn
             how
             to
             pronounce
             the
             three
             Hundred
             Monosyllables
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Second
             place
             it
             is
             most
             certain
             ,
             that
             he
             who
             will
             Industriously
             ,
             and
             under
             a
             good
             method
             ,
             apply
             himself
             to
             study
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             ,
             may
             be
             able
             in
             a
             Years
             time
             to
             understand
             and
             speak
             it
             very
             well
             .
             And
             we
             find
             by
             experience
             that
             our
             Fathers
             that
             are
             at
             present
             employ'd
             in
             the
             Mission
             ,
             at
             the
             end
             of
             two
             Years
             became
             so
             perfect
             in
             the
             Language
             that
             they
             were
             able
             to
             Confess
             ,
             Catechize
             ,
             Preach
             and
             Compose
             ,
             with
             as
             much
             ease
             ,
             as
             in
             their
             own
             Native
             Tongue
             ,
             tho'
             there
             is
             not
             the
             least
             resemblance
             between
             their
             Language
             and
             ours
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Fathers
             are
             generally
             persons
             far
             advanc'd
             in
             Years
             .
             Which
             they
             could
             never
             attain
             to
             in
             Europe
             where
             the
             Languages
             generally
             have
             a
             dependance
             one
             upon
             another
             .
          
           
             That
             there
             is
             no
             question
             to
             be
             made
             of
             this
             apparent
             truth
             ,
             when
             we
             consider
             the
             great
             number
             of
             Books
             which
             the
             Fathers
             have
             made
             and
             translated
             ,
             and
             daily
             make
             and
             translate
             into
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             ,
             which
             are
             esteem'd
             and
             admir'd
             by
             the
             Chineses
             themselves
             .
             Such
             as
             are
             those
             Books
             which
             Father
             
               Matthew
               Riccio
            
             compos'd
             upon
             our
             Sacred
             Law
             ,
             and
             upon
             several
             other
             
             Subjects
             .
             Of
             whom
             the
             Chineses
             speak
             to
             this
             Day
             as
             of
             a
             Prodigy
             of
             Knowledg
             ,
             and
             all
             sorts
             of
             Knowledg
             :
             So
             that
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Person
             of
             Quality
             in
             the
             Empire
             that
             does
             not
             know
             and
             speak
             of
             him
             with
             Applause
             .
             The
             Learned
             quote
             him
             in
             their
             Writings
             as
             one
             of
             their
             most
             famous
             Doctors
             ;
             and
             the
             Handicraft-Workmen
             to
             put
             off
             their
             Wares
             ,
             and
             sell
             them
             at
             a
             higher
             Rate
             ,
             assure
             the
             Buyers
             that
             they
             were
             the
             Inventions
             of
             that
             Illustrious
             Person
             Father
             
               Matthew
               Riccio
            
             .
             In
             short
             ,
             they
             esteem'd
             and
             honour'd
             him
             to
             that
             degree
             ,
             that
             several
             believe
             ,
             that
             as
             
               Cum
               fu
               ci
               us
            
             was
             the
             Prince
             ,
             the
             Saint
             ,
             the
             Master
             ,
             and
             Doctor
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             so
             Father
             
               Matthew
               Riccio
            
             was
             the
             same
             among
             the
             Europeans
             :
             Which
             was
             the
             highest
             Praise
             those
             Idolizers
             of
             
               Cum
               fu
               ci
               us
            
             could
             give
             him
             .
             Father
             
               Diego
               Pantoja
            
             has
             also
             compos'd
             several
             Learned
             Treatises
             of
             the
             Seven
             Deadly
             Sins
             ,
             of
             the
             Seven
             Vertues
             which
             are
             their
             Contraries
             ;
             upon
             the
             
               Pater
               Noster
            
             ,
             upon
             the
             Ave-Marie
             ,
             and
             the
             Credo
             .
             The
             Fathers
             
               Alfonso
               Vanhone
            
             ,
             and
             
               Iulio
               Aleni
            
             ,
             wrote
             several
             Tomes
             upon
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             ,
             upon
             the
             Life
             of
             Christ
             ,
             of
             the
             Holy
             Virgin
             and
             the
             Saints
             ,
             and
             upon
             several
             other
             subjects
             .
             Father
             
               Manuel
               Dias
            
             the
             younger
             ,
             translated
             all
             the
             Gospels
             ,
             with
             the
             Commentaries
             and
             Explanations
             of
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             which
             makes
             a
             Work
             no
             less
             Large
             ,
             then
             Pious
             and
             Learned
             .
             Father
             
               Francis
               Furtado
            
             publish'd
             a
             Treatise
             of
             Rhetorick
             and
             Logick
             ,
             with
             certain
             other
             Books
             
               de
               Coelo
            
             and
             
               de
               Mundo
            
             ,
             as
             also
             of
             the
             Soul
             of
             Man.
             The
             Fathers
             
               Iohn
               Terencio
               ,
               Iohn
               Roo
            
             ,
             and
             
               Iohn
               Adam
            
             ,
             have
             written
             a
             great
             number
             of
             other
             Books
             upon
             our
             Holy
             Law
             ,
             and
             upon
             all
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Mathematicks
             .
             Father
             
               Lewis
               Buglio
            
             ,
             who
             was
             always
             my
             chiefest
             Consolation
             and
             inseparable
             Companion
             in
             all
             my
             Travels
             ,
             Afflictions
             and
             Imprisonments
             ,
             
             for
             Thirty
             Years
             together
             ,
             translated
             the
             first
             part
             of
             St.
             Thomas
             ,
             which
             the
             more
             Learned
             Chineses
             esteem
             and
             admire
             to
             that
             degree
             ,
             that
             I
             heard
             one
             of
             them
             who
             had
             read
             the
             Treatise
             of
             God
             ,
             declare
             his
             thoughts
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             
               Certainly
               this
               Book
               is
               a
               Mirror
               wherein
               to
               let
               us
               see
               our
               own
               Ignorance
               .
            
             The
             same
             Father
             Buglio
             wrote
             several
             other
             Pieces
             upon
             several
             other
             subjects
             ;
             among
             the
             rest
             ,
             that
             Eloquent
             and
             Learned
             Apology
             ,
             in
             answer
             to
             a
             Book
             which
             
               Yam
               quam
               siem
            
             ,
             that
             wicked
             Infidel
             ,
             publish'd
             both
             in
             this
             Court
             ,
             and
             over
             the
             whole
             Empire
             ,
             against
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             and
             the
             Preachers
             of
             it
             ;
             and
             which
             he
             Entitl'd
             
               Pu
               te
               y
               ,
               Because
               I
               could
               no
               longer
               .
            
             Whereupon
             the
             Father
             that
             he
             might
             conform
             himself
             to
             the
             Stile
             and
             Language
             of
             the
             Country
             ,
             Entitl'd
             his
             Answer
             ,
             
               I
               have
               Answer'd
               because
               I
               could
               no
               longer
               forbear
               .
            
             Both
             Titles
             are
             very
             significant
             in
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             :
             But
             the
             Fathers
             was
             more
             highly
             esteem'd
             because
             it
             carries
             two
             significations
             .
             The
             First
             ,
             
               I
               refute
               ,
               because
               I
               could
               no
               longer
               forbear
            
             ;
             the
             Second
             ,
             
               I
               have
               refuted
               a
               Book
               Entitl'd
               ,
               Because
               I
               could
               no
               longer
               forbear
               .
            
             And
             which
             was
             more
             to
             be
             wonder'd
             at
             ,
             the
             Father
             compos'd
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             these
             Books
             ,
             in
             the
             Boats
             ,
             upon
             the
             Roads
             and
             in
             the
             Inns
             ,
             under
             the
             Power
             of
             Rebels
             and
             Barbarians
             ;
             in
             Prison
             with
             Three
             Chains
             upon
             his
             Legs
             ,
             Three
             about
             his
             Neck
             ,
             and
             Six
             upon
             his
             Hands
             ;
             and
             in
             a
             word
             ,
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             continual
             Persecutions
             .
             I
             could
             say
             much
             more
             in
             praise
             of
             that
             person
             truly
             Pious
             ,
             and
             o●…
             great
             Reputation
             ▪
             did
             I
             not
             fear
             that
             the
             sh●…e
             which
             I
             had
             in
             his
             Sufferings
             ,
             and
             the
             strict
             Friendship
             that
             was
             between
             Us
             ,
             would
             render
             me
             suspected
             of
             too
             much
             partiality
             .
             Father
             Ferdinand
             Ver●…st
             ●…t
             the
             same
             time
             wrote
             a
             Learned
             Answer
             to
             〈◊〉
             or
             rather
             a
             Satyr
             full
             of
             Mistakes
             a●…d
             Dol●…●…norance
             ,
             
             which
             the
             same
             
               Yam
               quam
               siem
            
             wrote
             against
             the
             European
             Mathematicks
             .
             Father
             
               Anthony
               Gouvea
            
             compos'd
             a
             Catechism
             .
             Father
             
               Iohn
               Monteiro
            
             wrote
             two
             Books
             ,
             the
             one
             of
             the
             Law
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             of
             True
             Adoration
             .
             Father
             
               Francis
               Sambiesi
            
             wrote
             Four
             Treatises
             ,
             Of
             the
             Immortality
             of
             the
             Soul
             ;
             Of
             Morals
             ;
             Of
             Painting
             ,
             and
             Sounds
             ,
             all
             very
             short
             and
             highly
             esteem'd
             .
             I
             my self
             wrote
             a
             Treatise
             of
             the
             Resurrection
             of
             Christ
             ;
             and
             another
             of
             the
             Universal
             Resurrection
             .
             
               Nicholas
               Trigaut
               ,
               Lazaro
               Cataneo
               ,
               Gaspar
               Ferreira
               ,
            
             and
             
               Alvaro
               Semedo
            
             ,
             all
             Fathers
             of
             the
             Society
             have
             compos'd
             Dictionaries
             very
             large
             and
             very
             exact
             ,
             and
             
               Gaspar
               Ferreira
            
             has
             written
             above
             Twenty
             Treatises
             upon
             several
             Subjects
             .
             Father
             Soeiro
             made
             an
             Abridgment
             of
             the
             Christian
             Law
             ;
             and
             Father
             
               Nicholas
               Longobardo
            
             ,
             who
             Dy'd
             but
             a
             few
             Years
             ago
             in
             this
             Court
             ,
             Fourscore
             and
             Sixteen
             Years
             old
             ,
             has
             written
             several
             Godly
             Treatises
             ,
             besides
             a
             Treatise
             of
             Earth-Quakes
             ,
             highly
             esteem'd
             by
             the
             Learned
             of
             this
             Empire
             .
             In
             short
             there
             have
             been
             a
             great
             number
             of
             other
             Books
             written
             concerning
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             Sciences
             and
             Subjects
             which
             amount
             in
             all
             to
             above
             Five
             Hundred
             Tomes
             Printed
             besides
             Manuscripts
             .
             There
             is
             Printed
             in
             China
             a
             Catalogue
             of
             all
             the
             Fathers
             that
             ever
             Travell'd
             into
             the
             Country
             to
             Preach
             the
             Gospel
             ;
             wherein
             are
             also
             the
             Names
             set
             of
             all
             the
             Books
             which
             they
             have
             written
             .
             From
             whence
             I
             conclude
             ,
             that
             so
             many
             Books
             could
             never
             have
             been
             translated
             and
             written
             in
             a
             Foreign
             Language
             ,
             and
             in
             so
             short
             a
             time
             ,
             had
             not
             the
             Language
             been
             very
             easie
             :
             So
             that
             it
             follows
             that
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             is
             more
             easie
             to
             learn
             then
             any
             other
             ;
             and
             that
             it
             is
             withal
             very
             Elegant
             ,
             very
             Copious
             ,
             and
             very
             Expressive
             ;
             since
             it
             wants
             for
             no
             terms
             to
             explain
             
             and
             unfold
             the
             Subtilties
             and
             Mysteries
             of
             Theology
             ,
             Philosophy
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Sciences
             .
          
           
             I
             will
             conclude
             this
             Chapter
             with
             the
             first
             Paragraph
             of
             the
             first
             Article
             of
             the
             Commentary
             which
             I
             made
             upon
             the
             Works
             of
             
               Cum
               fu
               cius
            
             ,
             with
             which
             our
             Fathers
             always
             begin
             ,
             when
             they
             first
             set
             themselves
             to
             study
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             and
             Language
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             by
             this
             short
             Sample
             the
             Beauty
             of
             the
             Language
             ,
             and
             the
             Wit
             of
             the
             People
             ,
             may
             be
             the
             better
             display'd
             .
             They
             read
             the
             Letters
             beginning
             from
             the
             top
             down
             to
             the
             bottom
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             right
             to
             the
             left
             :
             but
             that
             I
             might
             the
             better
             conform
             to
             the
             Customs
             of
             Europe
             ,
             I
             have
             plac'd
             the
             first
             Column
             upon
             the
             left-hand
             .
             To
             explain
             them
             you
             must
             put
             them
             together
             according
             to
             the
             Order
             of
             the
             Cyphers
             .
             The
             Marks
             ,
             or
             Zero
             ,
             which
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             at
             the
             bottom
             of
             some
             Letters
             are
             the
             Points
             and
             Accents
             of
             the
             Chineses
             .
             The
             Order
             of
             the
             Letters
             ,
             and
             the
             Explanation
             of
             the
             Text
             ,
             are
             taken
             from
             two
             Chinese
             Commentators
             ;
             of
             which
             the
             one
             ,
             who
             liv'd
             about
             Three
             Hundred
             Years
             ago
             ,
             was
             call'd
             
               Chū
               hi
            
             ;
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             who
             was
             a
             Colao
             ,
             was
             nam'd
             
               Chām
               Kiù
               Chim
            
             ,
             who
             Dy'd
             in
             the
             Year
             1610
             ,
             at
             what
             time
             
               Matthew
               Riccio
            
             arriv'd
             at
             this
             Court
             ,
             of
             whom
             I
             have
             already
             spoken
             in
             this
             Chapter
             .
          
           
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   4
                   Great
                   men
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   1
                   consists
                   in
                   the
                   second
                   place
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   3
                   teach
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   2
                   to
                   renew
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   2
                   to
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   3
                   the
                   People
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   1
                   the
                   Rule
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   4
                   consists
                   in
                   the
                   3d
                   place
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   5
                   consists
                   in
                   the
                   first
                   place
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   5
                   to
                   stop
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   6
                   to
                   enlighten
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   6
                   at
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   7
                   reasonable
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   7
                   the
                   Soveraign
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   Nature
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
                 
                   8
                   Good
                   ▪
                
              
            
          
           
             
             
               The
               Commentary
               and
               Explanation
               of
               the
               Text.
               
            
             
               THE
               Method
               for
               Great
               Men
               to
               Learn
               ,
               consist●…
               in
               three
               things
               .
               The
               first
               is
               to
               unfold
               the
               Rational
               Nature
               :
               The
               Second
               is
               ,
               to
               reform
               Mankind
               ;
               And
               the
               Third
               to
               stop
               at
               the
               Soveraign
               Good.
               
            
             
               As
               to
               the
               First
               ,
               the
               Rational
               Nature
               is
               the
               Heart
               of
               Man
               ,
               for
               the
               Chineses
               make
               no
               distinct
               on
               between
               the
               Understanding
               and
               the
               Will
               ;
               but
               attribute
               to
               the
               Heart
               what
               ever
               we
               attribute
               to
               those
               Faculties
               .
               The
               Heart
               is
               a
               substance
               pure
               and
               intelligent
               without
               any
               Darkness
               or
               Obscurity
               :
               and
               where
               Man
               has
               always
               ready
               ,
               all
               requisite
               Reasonings
               to
               answer
               to
               all
               difficulties
               that
               present
               themselves
               .
               But
               because
               that
               at
               the
               very
               moment
               of
               our
               Birth
               ,
               this
               Intelligent
               and
               Rational
               Nature
               is
               cag'd
               up
               and
               enclos'd
               within
               the
               Prison
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               and
               for
               that
               our
               inordinate
               Passions
               keep
               it
               bound
               and
               chain'd
               ,
               it
               comes
               to
               be
               obscur'd
               and
               troubled
               .
               For
               this
               reason
               it
               is
               necessary
               that
               Men
               should
               apply
               themselves
               to
               Learning
               and
               Information
               by
               putting
               of
               Questions
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               the
               Rational
               Heart
               may
               be
               delivered
               from
               it's
               Bondage
               and
               Slavery
               ,
               that
               so
               it
               may
               be
               able
               to
               break
               the
               Chains
               and
               Fetters
               of
               the
               Passions
               ,
               and
               return
               to
               it's
               primitive
               Beauty
               ,
               light
               and
               understanding
               ;
               in
               the
               same
               manner
               as
               a
               Tarnish'd
               Mirrour
               being
               polish'd
               recovers
               it's
               former
               Luster
               .
            
             
             
               The
               Second
               consists
               in
               Reforming
               the
               People
               .
               For
               example
               ,
               I
               who
               am
               a
               King
               ,
               a
               Magistrate
               ,
               a
               Father
               of
               a
               Family
               &c.
               
               If
               I
               have
               already
               purify'd
               my
               Rational
               Nature
               ,
               it
               is
               my
               duty
               to
               extend
               it
               to
               that
               degree
               ,
               that
               she
               may
               be
               able
               to
               communicate
               her self
               to
               other
               Men
               ,
               by
               causing
               them
               to
               abandon
               the
               Corruptions
               and
               defilements
               of
               Vice
               and
               evil
               Customs
               ,
               and
               I
               ought
               to
               deal
               so
               by
               my
               People
               ,
               as
               I
               do
               with
               Garments
               ,
               when
               they
               are
               spotted
               or
               besmear'd
               .
               For
               if
               they
               are
               well
               wash'd
               and
               scour'd
               ,
               they
               become
               clean
               and
               handsome
               as
               they
               were
               before
               .
            
             
               The
               third
               consists
               in
               attaining
               and
               stopping
               at
               the
               Soveraign
               Good.
               This
               Soveraign
               Good
               is
               the
               Soveraign
               Accord
               of
               things
               and
               of
               Reason
               .
               When
               Great
               Men
               enlighten
               their
               Intelligent
               Nature
               ,
               and
               renew
               the
               Vertue
               of
               the
               People
               ,
               they
               do
               it
               not
               by
               hap-hazard
               or
               without
               design
               :
               but
               all
               their
               end
               is
               to
               bring
               their
               Vertue
               to
               perfection
               ;
               to
               the
               end
               there
               might
               not
               be
               one
               single
               person
               among
               the
               People
               whose
               Vertue
               was
               not
               renewed
               ,
               or
               who
               was
               not
               renewed
               by
               Vertue
               .
               When
               they
               are
               arriv'd
               at
               a
               degree
               so
               sublime
               ,
               and
               to
               such
               an
               extraordinary
               Excellency
               ,
               they
               may
               be
               assur'd
               they
               have
               attained
               the
               Soveraign
               Good
               ;
               like
               those
               who
               after
               a
               long
               and
               tiresom
               journey
               at
               length
               coming
               to
               their
               own
               homes
               ,
               may
               say
               they
               have
               attain'd
               the
               final
               end
               of
               their
               travelling
               .
               These
               are
               the
               three
               most
               necessary
               and
               principal
               things
               in
               that
               Book
               ,
               and
               as
               it
               were
               the
               Mantle
               or
               outward
               Garment
               that
               Covers
               the
               Cloths
               ,
               or
               as
               the
               string
               that
               holds
               a
               row
               of
               Beads
               together
               .
               These
               are
               the
               expressions
               of
               the
               Chinese
               Commentator
               .
            
             
               Here
               by
               the
               way
               we
               may
               observe
               ,
               that
               possibly
               there
               can
               be
               nothing
               more
               proper
               then
               these
               words
               of
               
                 Cum
                 fu
                 cius
              
               to
               explain
               the
               functions
               of
               a
               Minister
               of
               the
               Gospel
               ,
               who
               is
               oblig'd
               in
               the
               
               first
               place
               to
               perfect
               himself
               and
               next
               his
               Neighbour
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               we
               may
               arrive
               at
               the
               Soveraign
               Good
               ,
               which
               is
               God
               ,
               the
               Supream
               and
               utmost
               end
               of
               all
               things
               .
               Nevertheless
               ,
               the
               Chineses
               being
               Pagans
               and
               carnally
               minded
               People
               ,
               have
               accommodated
               these
               three
               points
               to
               the
               Government
               of
               the
               Kingdom
               ,
               wherein
               like
               Politicians
               they
               place
               all
               their
               happiness
               and
               Ultimate
               End.
               
            
             
               In
               the
               second
               place
               we
               are
               to
               observe
               that
               the
               Ancient
               Chineses
               did
               understand
               there
               was
               a
               God.
               And
               therefore
               when
               I
               oppose
               their
               Learned
               Men
               in
               dispute
               ,
               I
               frequently
               make
               use
               of
               this
               Dilemma
               .
               Either
               
                 Cum
                 fu
                 cius
              
               did
               understand
               what
               he
               desin'd
               ,
               or
               he
               did
               not
               :
               If
               he
               did
               understand
               what
               he
               defin'd
               ,
               he
               knew
               there
               was
               a
               God
               ,
               who
               is
               no
               Other
               than
               that
               Soveraign
               Good
               of
               which
               he
               speaks
               ,
               and
               which
               you
               also
               ought
               to
               know
               and
               adore
               as
               well
               as
               he
               .
               If
               he
               did
               not
               understand
               that
               what
               he
               defin'd
               was
               God
               himself
               ,
               he
               was
               very
               Ignorant
               ;
               since
               as
               you
               your selves
               confess
               ,
               the
               Syllables
               Chi
               and
               Xen
               signifie
               that
               Soveraign
               Good
               which
               contains
               and
               comprehends
               all
               others
               :
               which
               is
               an
               Attribute
               that
               cannot
               be
               given
               to
               any
               Creature
               ,
               what
               Advantages
               soever
               he
               may
               have
               ,
               but
               only
               to
               God
               alone
               .
               Some
               there
               are
               who
               being
               touch'd
               with
               Heavenly
               Grace
               ,
               submit
               to
               the
               truth
               :
               Others
               not
               knowing
               what
               to
               answer
               ,
               and
               unwilling
               to
               acknowledge
               that
               
                 Cum
                 fu
                 cius
              
               was
               ignorant
               ,
               rather
               choose
               to
               abide
               in
               their
               Error
               ,
               and
               to
               follow
               their
               Pride
               and
               Passions
               ,
               and
               cry
               ,
               They
               'll
               come
               again
               another
               time
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               Fourth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               I
               shall
               add
               nothing
               farther
               to
               what
               our
               Author
               has
               said
               concerning
               the
               Chinese
               Language
               ,
               the
               Nature
               and
               Genius
               of
               which
               he
               has
               sufficiently
               set
               forth
               :
               And
               as
               for
               those
               who
               desire
               to
               see
               more
               ,
               they
               may
               consult
               the
               sixth
               Chapter
               of
               the
               Relation
               of
               
                 F.
                 Semedo
              
               ,
               who
               fully
               confirms
               what
               here
               
                 F.
                 Magaillans
              
               avouches
               .
               I
               must
               only
               observe
               this
               by
               the
               way
               ,
               that
               he
               gives
               us
               in
               this
               place
               an
               Idea
               of
               the
               Chinese
               Language
               ,
               far
               different
               from
               what
               he
               gave
               us
               formerly
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               V.
            
             Of
             the
             Wit
             of
             the
             Chineses
             and
             their
             Principal
             Books
             .
          
           
             ONE
             of
             the
             Ancients
             has
             told
             us
             ,
             that
             A●…ia
             was
             very
             fertile
             in
             great
             Wi●…s
             .
             But
             he
             would
             have
             been
             more
             strongly
             confirmed
             in
             his
             Opinion
             ,
             had
             he
             had
             any
             knowledge
             of
             China
             .
             For
             if
             they
             who
             best
             invent
             ,
             most
             suddenly
             and
             easily
             ,
             may
             be
             said
             to
             have
             more
             subtil
             and
             better
             Wits
             then
             others
             ,
             the
             Chineses
             ought
             to
             be
             preferr'd
             before
             other
             Nations
             ,
             since
             they
             were
             the
             first
             that
             invented
             Letters
             ,
             Paper
             ,
             Printing
             ,
             Ponder
             ,
             fine
             Porcelaine
             ,
             
             a●…d
             their
             own
             Characters
             .
             Tho'
             they
             are
             ignorant
             of
             many
             Sciences
             ,
             for
             want
             of
             Communication
             with
             other
             People
             ,
             nevertheless
             they
             are
             accomplished
             in
             Moral
             Philosophy
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             solely
             bend
             their
             Studies
             for
             the
             most
             part
             .
             Their
             Wits
             are
             so
             quick
             and
             apprehensive
             ,
             that
             they
             understand
             with
             ease
             when
             they
             read
             the
             Books
             which
             the
             Fathers
             of
             our
             Society
             have
             written
             ,
             the
             most
             subtil
             and
             difficult
             Questions
             as
             well
             in
             Mathematicks
             ,
             and
             Philosophy
             ,
             as
             in
             Theology
             .
             Perhaps
             there
             may
             be
             some
             who
             will
             not
             so
             readily
             believe
             what
             I
             assert
             ;
             but
             I
             can
             assure
             them
             ,
             there
             is
             nothing
             more
             certain
             ,
             in
             regard
             that
             I
             have
             known
             some
             Learned
             Christians
             ,
             and
             Infidels
             also
             ,
             who
             understood
             without
             any
             instruction
             ,
             as
             we
             could
             find
             by
             their
             discourses
             ,
             the
             Questions
             concerning
             God
             and
             the
             Trinity
             ,
             which
             they
             had
             read
             in
             the
             first
             Part
             of
             
               Saint
               Thomas
            
             Translated
             by
             Father
             Buglio
             .
          
           
             What
             Kingdom
             is
             there
             ,
             whatever
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Universities
             be
             which
             it
             contains
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             above
             ten
             Thousand
             Licentiates
             as
             in
             China
             ;
             of
             which
             Six
             or
             Seven
             Thousand
             meet
             every
             three
             Years
             at
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             ,
             where
             after
             several
             Examinations
             ,
             there
             are
             admitted
             three
             Hundred
             sixty
             five
             to
             the
             Degree
             of
             Doctors
             ?
             I
             do
             not
             believe
             there
             is
             any
             Kingdom
             where
             there
             are
             so
             many
             Scholars
             as
             there
             are
             Batchellors
             of
             Art
             in
             China
             which
             are
             said
             to
             be
             above
             Fourscore
             and
             ten
             Thousand
             ,
             nor
             that
             there
             is
             any
             other
             Country
             where
             the
             knowledge
             of
             Letters
             is
             so
             universal
             and
             so
             common
             .
             In
             regard
             that
             in
             all
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             more
             especially
             the
             Southern
             ,
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Man
             Poor
             or
             Rich
             ,
             Citizen
             or
             Husbandman
             ,
             that
             cannot
             both
             Write
             and
             Read.
             And
             in
             short
             ,
             I
             do
             not
             beleive
             there
             is
             any
             Region
             unless
             it
             be
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             has
             publish'd
             so
             many
             Books
             as
             the
             Chineses
             have
             done
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Chronicles
             of
             the
             Chineses
             are
             almost
             as
             Ancient
             as
             the
             Deluge
             ;
             as
             beginning
             not
             above
             two
             Hundred
             Years
             after
             it
             ,
             and
             being
             continu'd
             to
             this
             present
             time
             by
             several
             Authors
             :
             by
             which
             a
             Man
             may
             guess
             at
             the
             number
             of
             Volumes
             which
             their
             History
             contains
             .
             They
             have
             several
             Books
             of
             Natural
             Philosophy
             where
             they
             Treat
             of
             Nature
             ,
             her
             Properties
             and
             Accidents
             .
             'T
             is
             true
             they
             intermix
             mistakes
             and
             impertinences
             with
             truth
             ;
             but
             t
             is
             for
             want
             of
             Art
             and
             Knowledge
             ,
             not
             for
             defect
             of
             Wit
             ;
             they
             have
             also
             several
             Books
             that
             Treat
             of
             the
             Mathematicks
             and
             Military
             Discipline
             ,
             and
             several
             Excellent
             Treatises
             of
             Physick
             ,
             wherein
             they
             shew
             the
             smartness
             of
             their
             Wits
             ,
             by
             making
             several
             solid
             and
             learned
             Discourses
             upon
             the
             Pulses
             ,
             or
             beating
             of
             Arteries
             ,
             of
             which
             they
             have
             a
             particular
             knowledge
             ;
             upon
             the
             Manner
             of
             knowing
             and
             distinguishing
             between
             Deseases
             and
             Deseases
             ,
             they
             have
             several
             Pleasant
             Romances
             and
             Books
             of
             Chivalrie
             ,
             like
             those
             of
             
               Amadis
               de
               Gaul
               ,
               O●…lando
               Furioso
               ,
               D.
               Quixote
               ,
               &c.
            
             and
             Volumes
             of
             Histories
             and
             Presidents
             of
             Obedience
             of
             Children
             toward
             their
             Parents
             :
             of
             the
             Loyalty
             of
             Subjects
             towards
             their
             Princes
             :
             of
             Agriculture
             :
             Eloquent
             Discourses
             ,
             Pleasant
             Poems
             full
             of
             Witty
             Invention
             ,
             Tragedies
             and
             Comedies
             ;
             and
             lastly
             a
             very
             great
             Number
             of
             Treatises
             upon
             an
             Insinity
             of
             other
             Subjects
             :
             besides
             that
             such
             is
             their
             readiness
             and
             quickness
             of
             Invention
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             very
             few
             Licentiates
             or
             Doctors
             that
             do
             not
             publish
             at
             least
             one
             or
             two
             large
             Volumes
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             five
             Volumes
             which
             they
             call
             
               U
               Kim
            
             or
             the
             five
             Writings
             ,
             which
             among
             them
             are
             the
             same
             as
             the
             Holy
             Scriptures
             among
             us
             .
             The
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Xu
               Kim
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             a
             Chronicle
             of
             five
             Ancient
             Kings
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             esteem
             and
             worship
             for
             Saints
             .
             The
             three
             last
             were
             the
             Heads
             
             of
             three
             different
             Families
             ,
             that
             raign'd
             for
             almost
             two
             Thousand
             Years
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             almost
             as
             long
             as
             the
             Nineteen
             Families
             that
             succeeded
             them
             ,
             including
             also
             that
             of
             the
             Tartars
             that
             Reigns
             at
             present
             .
             The
             first
             of
             these
             Emperors
             was
             call'd
             Yao
             ,
             who
             according
             to
             the
             Chinese
             Chronicles
             began
             his
             Raign
             four
             Thousand
             and
             Twenty
             five
             Years
             ago
             ,
             counting
             to
             this
             present
             year
             ,
             1668.
             or
             about
             Five
             Hundred
             Years
             after
             the
             Deluge
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Calculation
             of
             the
             Seventy
             Interpreters
             .
             This
             Prince
             ,
             the
             Legislator
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             was
             eminent
             for
             several
             Vertues
             ;
             more
             ●…specially
             for
             his
             extraordinary
             Clemency
             ,
             Justice
             and
             Prudence
             .
             Now
             in
             regard
             he
             saw
             that
             his
             Son
             had
             not
             those
             Qualities
             which
             are
             requisite
             for
             a
             Good
             Governour
             (
             for
             by
             the
             Report
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             they
             put
             a
             higher
             value
             upon
             Vertue
             ,
             then
             upon
             all
             other
             Endowments
             )
             he
             chose
             for
             his
             Co-partner
             in
             the
             Empire
             one
             of
             his
             Subjects
             ,
             call'd
             by
             the
             name
             of
             Xùn
             ,
             whom
             he
             declared
             Emperor
             upon
             his
             death
             Bed
             ,
             and
             gave
             him
             his
             two
             Daughters
             for
             his
             Wives
             .
             This
             President
             the
             Chineses
             make
             use
             of
             to
             maintain
             Polygamy
             ;
             but
             the
             Fathers
             of
             our
             Society
             return
             for
             answer
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Sentiments
             of
             the
             Fathers
             and
             Doctors
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             that
             God
             at
             that
             time
             permitted
             plurality
             of
             Wives
             ,
             because
             it
             was
             requisite
             for
             the
             Multiplication
             of
             Human
             Kind
             ,
             and
             for
             peopling
             the
             Earth
             .
             The
             Chineses
             are
             satisfy'd
             with
             this
             Answer
             ,
             because
             the
             first
             of
             their
             sacred
             Books
             informs
             them
             ,
             that
             at
             that
             time
             China
             was
             but
             very
             thinly
             inhabited
             .
             Moreover
             they
             approve
             the
             Exposition
             which
             Father
             
               Iulio
               Aleni
            
             makes
             upon
             that
             passage
             in
             the
             Books
             call'd
             
               Keù
               to
               ge
               chao
            
             ,
             compos'd
             by
             the
             Learned
             Christians
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Fo-kien
             ,
             from
             what
             they
             had
             heard
             the
             Learned
             Father
             discourse
             both
             in
             publick
             and
             private
             ▪
             
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             tho'
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Text
             of
             that
             first
             Book
             are
             
               Cil
               Niù
            
             ,
             those
             two
             Monosyllables
             do
             not
             signifie
             
               two
               Daughters
            
             ,
             but
             the
             second
             Daughter
             of
             the
             Emperor
             Yao
             ,
             which
             he
             Marry'd
             to
             his
             Successor
             .
             For
             that
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             the
             Custom
             at
             present
             ,
             never
             gave
             no
             other
             Names
             for
             distinction's
             sake
             ,
             but
             only
             that
             of
             the
             Order
             of
             their
             Birth
             :
             As
             for
             example
             ,
             the
             First
             ,
             the
             Second
             ,
             the
             Third
             ,
             Son.
             So
             that
             when
             they
             read
             ,
             that
             Yao
             gave
             to
             
               Xùn
               ,
               Cil
               Niù
            
             ;
             the
             meaning
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Emperor
             gave
             him
             his
             Second
             Daughter
             ,
             the
             Letter
             Cil
             ,
             being
             no
             more
             then
             the
             Figure
             2
             among
             us
             .
          
           
             That
             Emperor
             Xùn
             is
             applauded
             in
             this
             Book
             for
             many
             Vertues
             ;
             but
             more
             especially
             for
             his
             Obedience
             to
             his
             Father
             ,
             and
             his
             Affection
             to
             his
             Brother
             ,
             who
             both
             endeavour'd
             to
             have
             kill'd
             him
             several
             times
             :
             but
             he
             suffer'd
             all
             their
             Cruelties
             with
             an
             extraordinary
             Patience
             .
             Among
             other
             Examples
             of
             his
             Vertue
             ,
             there
             are
             two
             Philosophers
             who
             report
             ,
             how
             that
             one
             Day
             his
             Father
             and
             his
             Brother
             ,
             who
             were
             both
             as
             Wicked
             ,
             as
             he
             was
             Vertuous
             ,
             commanded
             him
             to
             go
             down
             into
             a
             Well
             to
             cleanse
             it
             .
             Immediately
             he
             Obey'd
             ;
             but
             he
             was
             no
             sooner
             at
             the
             bottom
             ,
             but
             those
             Barbarians
             transported
             with
             Fury
             and
             Malice
             ,
             drew
             the
             Ladder
             ,
             and
             threw
             down
             great
             Stones
             ,
             peices
             of
             Wood
             ,
             and
             what
             ever
             they
             could
             find
             next
             at
             hand
             to
             destroy
             him
             in
             the
             Well
             However
             he
             got
             out
             through
             a
             passage
             which
             he
             discover'd
             under
             ground
             .
             Nevertheless
             he
             was
             so
             far
             from
             seeking
             to
             revenge
             that
             excess
             of
             Fury
             and
             Inhumani●…y
             ,
             that
             he
             repay'd
             them
             with
             greater
             Marks
             then
             ever
             of
             Respect
             and
             Love.
             
          
           
             The
             Third
             Emperor
             was
             call'd
             Yù
             ,
             who
             having
             serv'd
             the
             Emperor
             Xùn
             ,
             during
             his
             Life
             time
             ,
             with
             great
             Loyalty
             and
             Advantage
             ,
             the
             Dying
             
             Prince
             made
             choice
             of
             him
             for
             his
             Successor
             ,
             in
             regard
             that
             his
             Son
             ,
             besides
             that
             he
             was
             notoriously
             Wicked
             ,
             was
             no
             way
             endow'd
             with
             parts
             to
             Govern
             the
             Empire
             .
             This
             Emperor
             Yù
             ,
             during
             the
             Reign
             of
             his
             Predecessor
             ,
             took
             care
             to
             drain
             away
             the
             Water
             of
             the
             Deluge
             ,
             which
             at
             that
             time
             overslow'd
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             Plains
             of
             China
             ;
             and
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             by
             the
             Name
             of
             
               Hûm
               Xùi
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Great
             Deluge
             of
             Water
             .
             This
             Emperor
             was
             desirous
             ,
             as
             his
             Successors
             had
             done
             before
             him
             ,
             to
             choose
             ,
             for
             his
             Successor
             ,
             one
             of
             his
             Subjects
             call'd
             Ye
             ,
             who
             had
             been
             assistant
             to
             him
             in
             the
             Government
             of
             his
             Kingdom
             :
             but
             the
             People
             would
             not
             permit
             him
             ,
             declaring
             that
             the
             Emperor's
             Son
             was
             a
             Person
             Endu'd
             with
             all
             Vertues
             necessary
             to
             Govern
             them
             well
             ;
             and
             so
             they
             put
             him
             in
             possession
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             The
             Princes
             that
             succeeded
             this
             last
             Emperor
             ,
             Reign'd
             by
             right
             of
             Succession
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             Election
             ,
             till
             the
             Emperor
             Kie
             ,
             a
             Vicious
             and
             Cruel
             Prince
             ,
             who
             was
             the
             last
             of
             this
             same
             first
             Family
             .
          
           
             The
             Fourth
             Emperor
             ,
             call'd
             
               Chim
               Tam
            
             ,
             was
             the
             Founder
             of
             the
             Second
             Royal
             Family
             .
             His
             Eminent
             Vertues
             had
             oblig'd
             the
             preceding
             Emperors
             to
             make
             him
             King
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Po
             ,
             which
             is
             at
             present
             comprehended
             within
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Hô
               nan
            
             .
             He
             took
             up
             Arms
             against
             the
             Emperor
             Kie
             ,
             and
             after
             he
             had
             deliver'd
             the
             People
             from
             so
             Cruel
             a
             Tyrant
             ,
             made
             himself
             Master
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             During
             the
             Reign
             of
             this
             Emperor
             ,
             there
             was
             such
             a
             Drought
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             neither
             Rain
             nor
             Snow
             for
             Seven
             Years
             together
             ,
             as
             if
             the
             Heavens
             had
             been
             made
             of
             Brass
             .
             The
             Fountains
             and
             Rivers
             were
             almost
             all
             dry'd
             up
             ;
             the
             Land
             became
             Barren
             ;
             and
             these
             Calamities
             were
             attended
             with
             Famine
             and
             Pestilence
             .
             In
             the
             midst
             of
             these
             Fatal
             Extremities
             the
             Emperor
             forsook
             his
             Palace
             ,
             
             quitted
             his
             Royal
             Habit
             ,
             and
             covering
             himself
             with
             certain
             Skins
             ,
             went
             up
             to
             the
             top
             of
             a
             Hill
             call'd
             
               Sam
               Lin
            
             ,
             where
             as
             he
             lay
             prostrate
             upon
             the
             Earth
             ,
             he
             made
             the
             following
             Prayer
             .
             
               Lord
               ,
               if
               thy
               People
               have
               offended
               thee
               ,
               punish
               them
               not
               ,
               because
               they
               have
               ignorantly
               transgress'd
               against
               thee
               ;
               Punish
               me
               rather
               ,
               who
               here
               present
               my self
               before
               Thee
               as
               a
               Victime
               ready
               to
               suffer
               whatever
               thy
               Divine
               Justice
               shall
               be
               pleas'd
               to
               ordain
               .
            
          
           
             He
             had
             scarce
             concluded
             this
             Prayer
             ,
             before
             the
             Sky
             was
             all
             overcast
             with
             Clouds
             ,
             and
             pour'd
             down
             Rain
             in
             such
             abundance
             ,
             that
             it
             suffic'd
             to
             Water
             ●…ll
             the
             Territories
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             restore
             them
             to
             their
             pristine
             Fertility
             .
             From
             hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             Chineses
             make
             any
             scruple
             about
             the
             Mystery
             of
             the
             Incarnation
             ,
             we
             endeavour
             to
             convince
             them
             by
             this
             Example
             ;
             telling
             them
             ,
             that
             this
             King
             cover'd
             himself
             with
             the
             Skin
             of
             a
             Lamb
             ,
             and
             offer'd
             himself
             a
             Sacrifice
             to
             obtain
             Pardon
             for
             the
             Sins
             of
             the
             People
             ,
             yet
             thereby
             did
             nothing
             lessen
             the
             Lustre
             of
             his
             Dignity
             :
             So
             likewise
             ,
             tho'
             God
             was
             pleased
             to
             Cloath
             himself
             with
             the
             homely
             Covering
             of
             our
             Humanity
             ,
             and
             was
             offer'd
             up
             as
             a
             Lamb
             in
             Sacrifice
             for
             the
             Sins
             of
             the
             People
             ,
             he
             has
             no
             way
             lessen'd
             ▪
             but
             rather
             exalted
             his
             Almighty
             Power
             ,
             his
             Infinite
             Mercy
             and
             Goodness
             :
             and
             has
             thereby
             made
             it
             so
             much
             the
             more
             clearly
             appear
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             infinitely
             above
             this
             King
             ,
             who
             was
             no
             more
             then
             a
             Man
             ,
             and
             a
             mere
             Creature
             .
             The
             Chineses
             presently
             submit
             to
             this
             Argument
             ,
             as
             well
             because
             it
             seems
             to
             them
             to
             be
             Rational
             and
             Convincing
             ,
             as
             also
             for
             that
             they
             are
             very
             much
             pleas'd
             to
             hear
             that
             we
             make
             use
             of
             their
             Histories
             and
             Examples
             to
             prove
             the
             Verity
             of
             our
             Religion
             .
          
           
           
             This
             Emperor
             had
             for
             one
             of
             his
             Counsellers
             a
             Holy
             and
             Famous
             Learned
             Person
             ,
             who
             liv'd
             several
             Years
             hid
             up
             in
             the
             Mountains
             among
             the
             Wild
             Beasts
             ,
             because
             he
             would
             not
             submit
             to
             the
             Tyrant
             Kie
             .
             The
             Off-spring
             also
             of
             this
             Emperor
             
               Chim
               Tam
            
             Reign'd
             above
             Six
             Hundred
             Years
             till
             the
             Rule
             of
             King
             Cheu
             ,
             who
             was
             no
             less
             Wicked
             and
             Cruel
             then
             Kie
             .
             So
             that
             when
             the
             Chineses
             call
             a
             Prince
             a
             Kie
             ,
             or
             a
             Cheu
             ,
             't
             is
             the
             same
             thing
             as
             when
             we
             call
             such
             a
             one
             a
             Nero
             ,
             or
             a
             Dioc●…esian
             .
          
           
             The
             Fifth
             Emperor
             call'd
             
               Vù
               Uâm
            
             ,
             was
             the
             Son
             of
             
               Ven
               Uâm
            
             ,
             King
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Ch●…ū
             ,
             which
             is
             now
             a
             part
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Xensi
             .
             Who
             not
             able
             to
             endure
             the
             Wickedness
             and
             Tyranny
             of
             King
             Cheu
             ,
             set
             upon
             him
             ,
             Vanquish'd
             him
             in
             Battel
             ,
             and
             made
             himself
             Master
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             This
             Emperor
             
               Vù
               Uâm
            
             had
             a
             Brother
             highly
             esteem'd
             for
             his
             Prudence
             and
             other
             Vertues
             ,
             whom
             he
             made
             King
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Lù
             ,
             now
             a
             part
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xān
               Tūm
            
             ,
             and
             of
             whom
             he
             made
             choice
             upon
             his
             Death-Bed
             to
             Govern
             the
             Empire
             during
             the
             Minority
             of
             his
             Eldest
             Son.
             He
             it
             was
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             report
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             who
             above
             Two
             Thousand
             Seven
             Hundred
             Years
             ago
             ,
             first
             ●…ound
             out
             the
             Use
             of
             the
             Needle
             and
             Compass
             .
             For
             the
             Emperor
             his
             Nephew
             ,
             having
             receiv'd
             the
             Honour
             of
             an
             Embassie
             ,
             and
             the
             acknowledgment
             of
             a
             Tribute
             from
             a
             Country
             call'd
             
               Tum
               Xim
            
             ,
             and
             
               Cochin
               China
            
             ,
             or
             
               Kiao
               chi
               que
            
             ,
             and
             all
             by
             means
             of
             the
             Industry
             and
             Prudent
             Conduct
             of
             his
             Protector
             ,
             the
             same
             Governor
             presented
             the
             Embassadors
             with
             a
             kind
             of
             Compass
             ,
             by
             the
             Direction
             of
             which
             they
             might
             return
             the
             nearest
             way
             home
             ,
             without
             exposing
             themselves
             to
             the
             Toil
             and
             Hardships
             of
             of
             those
             ●…ound
             about
             Windings
             and
             Wandrings
             
             through
             which
             they
             had
             labour'd
             in
             coming
             to
             Court.
             So
             that
             this
             Prince
             is
             one
             of
             the
             Heroes
             and
             Saints
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             who
             have
             an
             extraordinary
             veneration
             for
             his
             Memory
             :
             Now
             when
             the
             Emperor
             
               Vù
               Uâm
            
             return'd
             in
             Triumph
             from
             the
             Battel
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Tyrant
             Cheu
             had
             been
             defeated
             ,
             his
             two
             Brothers
             
               Pe
               y
            
             ,
             and
             
               Xeo
               cî
            
             ,
             famous
             for
             their
             Vertue
             and
             Nobility
             ,
             met
             him
             upon
             his
             March
             ,
             and
             after
             they
             h●…d
             stopp'd
             him
             by
             taking
             his
             Horse
             by
             the
             Bridle
             ,
             they
             boldly
             ,
             and
             in
             very
             sharp
             and
             severe
             Language
             reprov'd
             him
             ,
             for
             having
             seiz'd
             upon
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             forc'd
             the
             Emperor
             to
             burn
             himself
             in
             his
             Palace
             ,
             together
             with
             all
             his
             Treasures
             ;
             that
             notwithstanding
             he
             were
             so
             vicious
             and
             so
             cruel
             ,
             yet
             he
             was
             both
             his
             Lord
             and
             Prince
             ordain'd
             by
             Heaven
             :
             that
             it
             was
             his
             Duty
             to
             advise
             him
             to
             amendment
             like
             a
             good
             Subject
             ,
             not
             like
             a
             Traytor
             to
             put
             him
             to
             death
             :
             and
             lastly
             that
             he
             ought
             to
             surrender
             the
             Kingdom
             to
             the
             Children
             of
             the
             deceased
             Prince
             ,
             to
             let
             the
             World
             see
             ,
             that
             he
             had
             not
             been
             push'd
             forward
             by
             any
             motives
             of
             Ambition
             ,
             but
             only
             out
             of
             a
             Desire
             to
             deliver
             the
             Title
             from
             Tyranny
             and
             Oppression
             .
             But
             when
             the
             two
             Brothers
             sound
             that
             he
             would
             not
             follow
             their
             Counsel
             ,
             they
             retir'd
             to
             a
             desert
             Mountain
             ,
             protesting
             ,
             they
             would
             rather
             chuse
             to
             die
             in
             that
             manner
             ,
             then
             eat
             of
             the
             Products
             of
             those
             Territories
             which
             
               Vù
               Uâm
            
             had
             ●…usurp'd
             ,
             for
             fear
             they
             should
             be
             thought
             in
             some
             measure
             to
             approve
             his
             Treason
             and
             Revolt
             .
          
           
             The
             History
             of
             these
             five
             Kings
             which
             the
             Chineses
             look
             upon
             as
             so
             many
             Saints
             ;
             especially
             the
             four
             first
             ,
             and
             their
             Off-spring
             ,
             is
             the
             subject
             of
             the
             first
             Book
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             as
             great
             Reputation
             among
             these
             Infidels
             ,
             as
             the
             Books
             of
             the
             Kings
             among
             us
             Christians
             .
             The
             Stile
             of
             it
             is
             very
             ancient
             ,
             but
             very
             exact
             and
             elegant
             .
             Vice
             is
             there
             
             blam'd
             ,
             and
             Vertue
             applauded
             ,
             and
             the
             Actions
             of
             King
             and
             Subjects
             related
             with
             an
             entire
             sincerity
             .
             And
             to
             the
             End
             ,
             the
             more
             curious
             Reader
             may
             see
             the
             Energy
             and
             Briefness
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             and
             Letters
             ,
             which
             were
             at
             that
             time
             in
             use
             ;
             I
             will
             here
             set
             down
             five
             words
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Book
             already
             mention'd
             in
             reference
             to
             the
             King
             
               Yáo
               ;
               Kin
               ,
               Mîm
               ,
               Vén
               ,
               Su
               ,
               Gān
               .
            
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             King
             Yao
             was
             great
             and
             venerable
             ;
             he
             was
             most
             Perspicacious
             and
             Prudent
             .
             He
             was
             very
             Compos'd
             ,
             Modest
             ,
             and
             Courteous
             .
             He
             appear'd
             always
             Pensive
             and
             Studious
             ,
             searching
             continually
             after
             the
             best
             means
             how
             to
             govern
             his
             People
             and
             Empire
             :
             and
             therefore
             he
             liv'd
             all
             the
             time
             of
             his
             Reign
             in
             Comfort
             ,
             Quiet
             ,
             and
             Repose
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             Book
             is
             call'd
             
               Li
               ki
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Book
             of
             Rites
             and
             Ceremonies
             .
             This
             contains
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Laws
             ,
             Customs
             and
             Ceremonies
             of
             the
             whole
             Empire
             .
             The
             principal
             Author
             of
             this
             Book
             ,
             is
             the
             Brother
             of
             the
             Emperor
             
               Vù
               Uàm
            
             ,
             of
             whom
             we
             have
             spoken
             already
             .
             He
             was
             call'd
             
               Chéu
               cūm
            
             ,
             and
             was
             equally
             venerable
             as
             well
             for
             his
             Vertue
             ,
             as
             for
             his
             Prudence
             ,
             Learning
             ,
             and
             good
             Conduct
             .
             This
             Volume
             contains
             the
             Works
             of
             several
             other
             Authors
             also
             ,
             the
             Disciples
             of
             
               Cum
               fu
               cius
            
             ,
             and
             other
             interpreters
             ,
             more
             modern
             ,
             and
             more
             suspected
             ,
             which
             therefore
             ought
             to
             be
             read
             with
             so
             much
             the
             more
             Circumspection
             ,
             there
             being
             many
             things
             therein
             contain'd
             which
             are
             accompted
             Fabulous
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             Volume
             is
             call'd
             
               Xi
               Kīm
            
             ,
             containing
             Verses
             ,
             Romances
             ,
             and
             Poems
             ;
             all
             which
             are
             divided
             into
             five
             sorts
             .
             The
             first
             of
             which
             is
             call'd
             
               Ya
               sum
            
             ,
             or
             Panegyricks
             and
             Encomiums
             ,
             sung
             in
             Honour
             of
             Men
             famous
             for
             their
             Vertue
             ,
             or
             their
             Endowments
             .
             There
             are
             also
             several
             Gnomonics
             ,
             or
             Verses
             containing
             Precepts
             ,
             which
             
             are
             sung
             at
             their
             Funerals
             ,
             their
             Sacrifices
             ,
             the
             Ceremonies
             which
             the
             Chineses
             perform
             in
             honour
             of
             their
             Ancestors
             ,
             and
             at
             their
             most
             solemn
             Festivals
             .
             The
             second
             is
             call'd
             
               Que
               fūm
            
             ,
             or
             the
             customs
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             .
             These
             are
             Romances
             or
             Poems
             chosen
             out
             among
             those
             which
             were
             made
             by
             private
             Persons
             .
             They
             are
             never
             sung
             ,
             but
             only
             rehears'd
             before
             the
             Emperor
             and
             his
             Ministers
             of
             State.
             Therein
             are
             describ'd
             ,
             without
             any
             dissimulation
             ,
             the
             manners
             of
             the
             People
             ;
             how
             the
             Empire
             is
             govern'd
             ,
             and
             the
             present
             state
             of
             Affairs
             .
             Which
             seems
             to
             be
             the
             same
             thing
             with
             the
             Ancient
             Comedies
             of
             the
             Greeks
             ,
             that
             spar'd
             neither
             the
             Vices
             of
             Private
             Men
             ,
             nor
             the
             miscarriages
             of
             the
             publick
             Magistrates
             .
             The
             third
             sort
             is
             call'd
             
               Pi
               que
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             Comparison
             .
             For
             that
             all
             which
             is
             therein
             contain'd
             is
             explain'd
             by
             Com●…arisons
             or
             Similitudes
             .
             The
             fourth
             sort
             is
             call'd
             
               Him
               que
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             to
             raise
             or
             exalt
             .
             Because
             this
             sort
             of
             Poetry
             begins
             with
             something
             that
             is
             curious
             and
             lofty
             ,
             to
             prepare
             and
             raise
             Attention
             to
             that
             which
             follows
             .
             The
             fifth
             sort
             is
             call'd
             
               Ye
               Xi
            
             .
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             Poesies
             rejected
             or
             separated
             :
             ●…ecause
             that
             ,
             
               Cum
               fu
               cius
            
             having
             review'd
             this
             Volume
             of
             Poems
             rejected
             those
             which
             he
             either
             mislik'd
             or
             thought
             to
             be
             fabulous
             .
             However
             they
             are
             still
             quoted
             ,
             and
             left
             as
             they
             are
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             Volume
             was
             compos'd
             by
             
               Cum
               fu
               cius
            
             ,
             and
             contains
             the
             History
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Lù
             ,
             his
             native
             Country
             ;
             at
             present
             comprehended
             within
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xan
               ●…um
            
             .
             The
             Chineses
             put
             a
             high
             value
             upon
             this
             Book
             ,
             and
             are
             all
             in
             Ecstasie
             when
             they
             read
             it
             .
             He
             wrote
             this
             History
             of
             two
             Hundred
             years
             Transactions
             ,
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             Annals
             ;
             where
             he
             exposes
             as
             in
             a
             Mirrour
             ,
             the
             Examples
             of
             Princes
             both
             Vertuous
             and
             Wicked
             ,
             referring
             the
             ●…ents
             to
             the
             
             Times
             and
             Seasons
             wherein
             they
             happen'd
             .
             And
             therefore
             he
             gives
             to
             his
             Book
             the
             Title
             of
             
               Chun
               cie●…
            
             ,
             or
             Spring
             and
             Autumn
             .
          
           
             The
             fifth
             Volume
             is
             call'd
             
               Ye
               kim
            
             ,
             and
             is
             esteem'd
             the
             most
             ancient
             of
             all
             the
             Rest
             ,
             because
             the
             Chineses
             affirm
             that
             
               Fo
               hi
            
             their
             first
             King
             was
             the
             Author
             of
             it
             .
             And
             indeed
             this
             Book
             is
             worthy
             to
             be
             read
             and
             esteem'd
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             noble
             Sentences
             and
             Precepts
             of
             Morality
             which
             it
             contains
             .
             I
             believe
             truly
             that
             the
             good
             Maxims
             which
             are
             scatter'd
             up
             and
             down
             in
             this
             Volume
             might
             be
             writt'n
             by
             King
             
               Fo
               hi
            
             ;
             but
             that
             the
             rest
             was
             added
             by
             others
             who
             were
             desirous
             to
             give
             Reputation
             to
             their
             Visions
             ,
             under
             the
             name
             of
             this
             famous
             Prince
             .
             Nevertheless
             ,
             most
             certain
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Chineses
             have
             an
             extraordinary
             veneration
             for
             this
             Book
             ,
             and
             look
             upon
             it
             to
             be
             the
             most
             profound
             ,
             the
             most
             learned
             and
             mysterious
             of
             any
             in
             the
             World
             ;
             and
             that
             for
             the
             same
             reason
             they
             believe
             it
             to
             be
             almost
             Impossible
             for
             them
             to
             understand
             it
             ,
             and
             that
             strangers
             ought
             neither
             to
             see
             or
             touch
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             Chineses
             have
             also
             another
             Volume
             of
             equal
             Authority
             with
             those
             before-mention'd
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               Sù
               xu
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             four
             Books
             ,
             by
             way
             of
             Excellency
             .
             This
             is
             a
             Volume
             of
             Extracts
             or
             Abridgments
             ,
             being
             as
             it
             were
             the
             very
             Marrow
             and
             Quintessence
             of
             the
             former
             Five
             .
             The
             
             Mandarins
             ●…ull
             out
             from
             thence
             the
             Sentences
             and
             Texts
             ,
             which
             they
             propose
             for
             ▪
             Themes
             to
             the
             Learned
             that
             are
             to
             be
             Examin'd
             before
             they
             are
             admitted
             to
             the
             degrees
             of
             Batchellors
             ,
             Licentiates
             ,
             and
             Doctors
             ;
             and
             upon
             which
             those
             Persons
             Write
             and
             Comment
             for
             their
             Reputation
             .
             It
             is
             divided
             into
             four
             Parts
             .
             The
             first
             treats
             of
             the
             Laws
             ,
             and
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             Men
             famous
             for
             their
             Knowledge
             and
             their
             Vertue
             .
             The
             second
             discourses
             
             of
             the
             Golden
             Mean.
             The
             third
             contains
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Moral
             Sentences
             well
             express'd
             ,
             solid
             and
             profitable
             to
             all
             the
             Members
             of
             the
             State.
             These
             three
             Parts
             were
             writt'n
             by
             
               Cum
               fu
               cius
            
             ,
             the
             first
             Doctor
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             and
             were
             publish'd
             by
             his
             Disciples
             .
             The
             fourth
             Part
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             big
             as
             all
             the
             other
             three
             ,
             was
             writ
             by
             the
             Philosopher
             
               Men
               su
            
             ,
             who
             was
             born
             about
             a
             Hundred
             Years
             after
             
               Cum
               fu
               cius
            
             ;
             and
             is
             honour'd
             by
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             as
             a
             Doctor
             of
             the
             second
             Order
             .
             This
             is
             a
             Work
             wherein
             there
             appears
             a
             wonderful
             deal
             of
             Wit
             ,
             subtilty
             and
             Eloquence
             .
             The
             discourses
             are
             pertinent
             ,
             the
             Sentences
             grave
             and
             moral
             ,
             and
             the
             Stile
             lively
             ,
             bold
             ,
             and
             perswasive
             .
             All
             the
             Missionaries
             of
             our
             Society
             in
             these
             Parts
             ,
             very
             industriously
             study
             the
             Letters
             and
             the
             Language
             of
             the
             four
             Parts
             of
             this
             Book
             .
             And
             from
             thence
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             the
             former
             five
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             so
             many
             Treatises
             and
             Commentaries
             of
             various
             Authors
             ,
             as
             well
             ancient
             as
             modern
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             number
             is
             almost
             Infinite
             ,
             and
             give
             us
             occasion
             to
             commend
             and
             admire
             the
             Wit
             ,
             the
             Industry
             and
             Eloquence
             of
             that
             Nation
             ,
             are
             deriv'd
             as
             from
             so
             many
             Springs
             and
             Fountains
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               Fifth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 A.
                 P.
                 96.
                 
              
               
                 THE
                 Subject
                 or
                 Ground
                 of
                 this
                 Book
                 is
                 no
                 more
                 than
                 a
                 Table
                 of
                 sixty
                 four
                 Figures
                 ,
                 every
                 one
                 consisting
                 of
                 six
                 Lines
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 all
                 of
                 a
                 Piece
                 ,
                 as
                 thus
                 ,
                 —
                 others
                 of
                 two
                 Parts
                 ,
                 
                 as
                 thus
                 ;
                 —
                 —
                 ▪
                 The
                 Chineses
                 attribute
                 the
                 Writing
                 of
                 this
                 Table
                 to
                 their
                 first
                 King
                 
                   Fo
                   hi
                
                 ;
                 but
                 no
                 body
                 can
                 divine
                 what
                 was
                 the
                 design
                 or
                 meaning
                 of
                 the
                 Author
                 .
                 However
                 it
                 is
                 certain
                 that
                 about
                 twelve
                 Hundred
                 Years
                 before
                 Christ
                 ,
                 Prince
                 
                   Ven
                   Uam
                
                 ,
                 Father
                 of
                 the
                 Emperor
                 
                   Vu
                   ▪
                   Uam
                
                 ,
                 Founder
                 of
                 the
                 third
                 Royal
                 Family
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 second
                 Son
                 
                   Cheu
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 undertook
                 to
                 interpret
                 this
                 Enigmatical
                 Table
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 five
                 Hundred
                 Years
                 afterwards
                 ,
                 the
                 Philosopher
                 ,
                 
                   Cum
                   fu
                   cius
                
                 ,
                 made
                 Commentaries
                 upon
                 the
                 Interpretations
                 of
                 those
                 two
                 Princes
                 .
                 But
                 whatever
                 those
                 three
                 Authors
                 have
                 written
                 upon
                 this
                 Subject
                 amounts
                 to
                 no
                 more
                 then
                 only
                 from
                 the
                 agreeement
                 and
                 vicissitude
                 of
                 the
                 Elements
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 natural
                 things
                 ,
                 to
                 draw
                 Politick
                 and
                 Moral
                 Maxims
                 and
                 Conclusions
                 ,
                 and
                 Precepts
                 also
                 as
                 well
                 for
                 the
                 Princes
                 as
                 their
                 Subjects
                 .
                 But
                 that
                 which
                 renders
                 this
                 Table
                 pernicious
                 ,
                 is
                 this
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Idolaters
                 call'd
                 
                   Tao
                   su
                
                 ,
                 the
                 Bonzes
                 and
                 Fortune-Tellers
                 make
                 a
                 bad
                 use
                 of
                 it
                 to
                 confirm
                 their
                 Superstitious
                 Predictions
                 ,
                 forging
                 out
                 of
                 that
                 variety
                 ,
                 and
                 many
                 other
                 things
                 which
                 they
                 intermix
                 therewith
                 ,
                 an
                 infinite
                 Number
                 of
                 Confederacies
                 ,
                 and
                 vain
                 ,
                 and
                 Impertinent
                 allusions
                 ;
                 by
                 vertue
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 boast
                 themselves
                 able
                 to
                 foretel
                 whatever
                 shall
                 befal
                 a
                 Man
                 whether
                 Fortunate
                 or
                 Unfortunate
                 .
                 Epitomes
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 Commentators
                 of
                 this
                 Table
                 of
                 
                   Fo
                   hi
                
                 may
                 be
                 seen
                 more
                 at
                 large
                 in
                 the
                 Prefaces
                 of
                 
                   Cum
                   fu
                   cius
                
                 which
                 are
                 newly
                 Printed
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 several
                 others
                 particulars
                 concerning
                 the
                 Principal
                 Books
                 of
                 the
                 Chineses
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 our
                 Author
                 speaks
                 in
                 this
                 Chapter
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               VI.
            
             Of
             the
             Civility
             and
             Politeness
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             and
             of
             some
             of
             their
             Feasts
             .
          
           
             SEveral
             Books
             might
             be
             writt'n
             of
             the
             Civility
             ,
             Complements
             and
             Ceremonies
             of
             the
             Chineses
             .
             They
             have
             a
             Book
             which
             gives
             an
             Accompt
             of
             above
             three
             Thousand
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             a
             wonderful
             thing
             to
             see
             how
             ready
             and
             punctual
             they
             are
             in
             those
             Particulars
             .
             At
             their
             Marriages
             and
             Funerals
             ,
             in
             their
             Visits
             and
             Feasts
             ,
             the
             Master
             of
             the
             House
             ,
             tho'
             a
             Person
             of
             greater
             Honour
             and
             Dignity
             then
             any
             of
             his
             Guests
             ,
             always
             gives
             the
             chief
             place
             of
             Preheminence
             to
             the
             Eldest
             .
             The
             eldest
             give
             place
             to
             those
             that
             come
             farthest
             off
             ,
             but
             all
             to
             Foreigners
             .
             When
             any
             Embassador
             arrives
             ,
             from
             the
             very
             day
             that
             his
             Embassie
             is
             accepted
             of
             ,
             to
             the
             time
             of
             his
             departure
             ,
             the
             Emperor
             furnishes
             him
             with
             all
             manner
             of
             Provisions
             ,
             Horses
             ,
             Litters
             ,
             and
             Barks
             .
             At
             Court
             he
             is
             lodg'd
             in
             the
             Royal
             Court
             ,
             whether
             the
             Emperor
             sends
             him
             ,
             at
             every
             two
             days
             end
             ,
             a
             Feast
             ready
             dress'd
             out
             of
             his
             own
             Kitchin
             ,
             as
             a
             Mark
             of
             his
             Favour
             and
             Good-will
             .
             For
             the
             Kings
             of
             China
             above
             all
             things
             ,
             study
             to
             receive
             and
             entertain
             all
             Strangers
             with
             Splendor
             and
             Magnisicence
             ,
             as
             
               F.
               Buglio
            
             and
             my self
             have
             frequently
             found
             by
             Experience
             for
             the
             space
             of
             two
             years
             that
             we
             were
             lodg'd
             in
             the
             Royal
             Inn
             ,
             when
             we
             came
             from
             the
             
             Province
             of
             
               Su
               chuen
            
             to
             the
             Court.
             'T
             is
             true
             indeed
             ,
             that
             this
             Civility
             is
             not
             always
             perform'd
             with
             the
             same
             Decency
             and
             regularity
             ;
             nevertheless
             the
             fault
             is
             no
             way
             to
             be
             attributed
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             Baseness
             and
             self-Interest
             of
             his
             Officers
             ,
             who
             privately
             purloyn
             and
             turn
             to
             their
             own
             Use
             what
             the
             King
             with
             an
             extraordinary
             Bounty
             allows
             for
             the
             entertainment
             of
             Strangers
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             not
             any
             Nation
             that
             equals
             the
             Chineses
             in
             the
             Multitude
             and
             Variety
             of
             Titles
             and
             Honourable
             Names
             by
             them
             made
             use
             of
             in
             their
             Complements
             ,
             which
             I
             am
             not
             able
             to
             explain
             ,
             because
             that
             neither
             our
             Languages
             ,
             nor
             the
             Greek
             and
             Latin
             have
             any
             words
             by
             which
             they
             may
             be
             express'd
             .
             They
             have
             also
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Names
             whereby
             they
             distinguish
             the
             various
             Degrees
             of
             Parentage
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             we
             have
             onely
             the
             Names
             of
             Grandfather
             and
             Grandmother
             ,
             whither
             by
             the
             Father
             or
             Mother's
             side
             :
             but
             the
             Chineses
             have
             all
             different
             to
             distinguish
             the
             four
             Relations
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             we
             have
             only
             the
             word
             Uncle
             to
             signifie
             the
             Brothers
             of
             the
             Father
             and
             Mother
             .
             But
             the
             Chineses
             have
             words
             which
             not
             only
             distinguish
             the
             Brothers
             of
             the
             Father
             from
             those
             of
             the
             Mother
             ,
             but
             also
             tell
             ye
             which
             are
             Younger
             or
             Elder
             then
             the
             Father
             or
             the
             Mother
             ;
             and
             so
             of
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Kindred
             .
             This
             Nation
             also
             surpasses
             all
             others
             in
             the
             care
             which
             they
             take
             of
             their
             Garments
             ;
             in
             regard
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Person
             tho'
             never
             so
             poor
             which
             is
             not
             modestly
             ,
             fashionably
             and
             decently
             habited
             .
             'T
             is
             a
             surprizing
             thing
             to
             see
             them
             all
             ,
             upon
             the
             first
             day
             of
             the
             year
             ,
             in
             their
             new
             Cloths
             fashionable
             spruce
             and
             clean
             .
             Insomuch
             that
             you
             shall
             not
             meet
             any
             one
             person
             how
             wretched
             soever
             ,
             but
             what
             affords
             a
             pleasing
             object
             to
             the
             Eye
             .
             Nor
             is
             the
             modesty
             of
             this
             Nation
             less
             to
             be
             admir'd
             ▪
             
             The
             Learned
             Men
             are
             always
             so
             compos'd
             ,
             that
             they
             believe
             it
             crime
             or
             a
             sin
             ,
             to
             make
             appear
             the
             least
             Gesture
             or
             Motion
             which
             is
             not
             exactly
             conformable
             to
             the
             Rules
             of
             Decent
             Behaviour
             and
             Urbanity
             .
             The
             Women
             affect
             Modesty
             ,
             Chastity
             and
             Honesty
             to
             that
             degree
             that
             a
             man
             would
             think
             those
             Vertues
             were
             born
             with
             them
             .
             They
             live
             in
             perpetual
             Retirement
             ,
             never
             so
             much
             as
             shewing
             their
             hands
             bare
             ;
             so
             that
             if
             they
             are
             oblig'd
             to
             present
             any
             thing
             to
             their
             Brothers
             or
             Brothers-in-Law
             ,
             they
             lay
             the
             Present
             upon
             the
             Table
             with
             their
             hands
             exactly
             cover'd
             with
             their
             Sleeves
             ,
             which
             for
             that
             Reason
             are
             very
             long
             and
             large
             ;
             and
             then
             the
             Brothers
             come
             and
             receive
             it
             .
             Which
             is
             the
             Reason
             that
             the
             Chineses
             are
             highly
             offended
             when
             they
             see
             the
             Images
             of
             our
             Saints
             with
             naked
             Feet
             :
             and
             truly
             for
             my
             part
             I
             think
             they
             have
             very
             good
             Reason
             for
             it
             .
             For
             that
             those
             Representations
             do
             no
             way
             agree
             with
             that
             Angelick
             Modesty
             and
             Purity
             which
             those
             Saints
             profess'd
             :
             and
             therefore
             those
             Pictures
             are
             defective
             and
             counterfeit
             ,
             in
             regard
             they
             neither
             resemble
             the
             Originals
             ,
             nor
             in
             their
             Imitation
             sufficiently
             follow
             either
             the
             History
             ,
             or
             Nature
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             perfection
             of
             Painting
             .
             Besides
             that
             there
             is
             no
             likelihood
             that
             young
             Virgins
             should
             go
             bare-foot
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             a
             ridiculous
             hing
             to
             Paint
             them
             in
             glorious
             and
             Rich
             Habits
             ,
             and
             not
             allow
             them
             Shoes
             and
             Stockins
             .
          
           
             The
             Chineses
             reduce
             their
             Civility
             ,
             or
             Conversation
             one
             among
             another
             to
             five
             Heads
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             Of
             a
             King
             towards
             his
             Subjects
             ;
             of
             a
             Father
             towards
             his
             Sin
             ;
             Of
             a
             Husband
             towards
             his
             Wife
             ;
             Of
             an
             Elder
             Brother
             toward
             the
             Younger
             ;
             and
             of
             one
             Friend
             toward
             another
             .
             These
             rules
             include
             a
             great
             part
             of
             their
             Morals
             :
             but
             I
             shall
             dilate
             no
             farther
             upon
             this
             Subject
             ;
             for
             that
             I
             should
             
             never
             be
             able
             to
             make
             an
             end
             ,
             should
             I
             go
             about
             to
             give
             an
             account
             of
             all
             that
             they
             write
             of
             the
             Loyalty
             of
             Subjects
             towards
             their
             Prince
             ;
             Of
             Obedience
             of
             Children
             towards
             their
             Parents
             ;
             Of
             the
             Submission
             of
             Wives
             toward
             theirs
             Husbands
             ;
             Of
             Brotherly
             Affection
             ,
             and
             that
             Amity
             and
             respect
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             among
             Friends
             .
             I
             could
             speak
             of
             the
             Noble
             Order
             observ'd
             in
             their
             Political
             Goverment
             ;
             but
             for
             that
             I
             shall
             reserve
             a
             whole
             Chapt●…r
             ,
             before
             I
             finish
             this
             Relation
             .
          
           
             Among
             the
             Festivals
             of
             the
             Chineses
             one
             of
             those
             which
             they
             celebrate
             with
             most
             joy
             and
             solemnity
             is
             the
             fifteenth
             Day
             of
             the
             first
             Moon
             of
             their
             Year
             .
             That
             day
             they
             kindle
             so
             many
             Bonfires
             ,
             and
             light
             up
             so
             many
             Lanthorns
             ,
             that
             if
             the
             whole
             Empire
             were
             to
             be
             seen
             at
             one
             time
             from
             the
             top
             of
             some
             high
             Mountain
             ,
             You
             would
             believe
             it
             all
             in
             a
             Blaze
             like
             some
             Vast
             Fire-work
             .
             There
             is
             hardly
             any
             person
             either
             in
             City
             or
             Country
             ,
             upon
             the
             Sea
             shores
             or
             upon
             the
             Rivers
             ,
             that
             does
             not
             set
             up
             Lanthorns
             painted
             and
             fashion'd
             after
             several
             manners
             ,
             or
             that
             does
             not
             fling
             about
             Squibs
             and
             Bombs
             burning
             in
             the
             Air
             like
             Boats
             ,
             Towers
             ,
             Fish
             ,
             Dragons
             ,
             Tigers
             ,
             Elephants
             ,
             with
             a
             Thousand
             other
             surprizing
             sorts
             of
             Fire-works
             .
             Which
             gives
             me
             an
             Occasion
             to
             relate
             what
             I
             saw
             with
             my
             own
             eyes
             in
             the
             year
             1644.
             
             In
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Su
               chuen
            
             ,
             at
             what
             time
             
               F.
               Lewis
               Buglio
            
             and
             my self
             were
             detain'd
             Prisoners
             by
             that
             Cruel
             Tyrant
             
               Cham
               hien
               Chum
            
             ,
             He
             invited
             us
             to
             see
             the
             Fire-works
             which
             he
             had
             order'd
             to
             be
             prepared
             against
             the
             Night
             of
             this
             same
             fifteenth
             day
             :
             and
             indeed
             there
             was
             an
             infinite
             number
             admirable
             for
             their
             Curiosity
             and
             their
             Invention
             :
             But
             that
             which
             most
             surpriz'd
             me
             was
             the
             following
             Machime
             .
             This
             was
             an
             Arbor
             cover'd
             with
             a
             Vine
             of
             Red
             Grapes
             of
             which
             all
             the
             Joyners
             work
             burnt
             
             without
             consuming
             ,
             while
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             the
             Stock
             of
             the
             Vine
             ,
             the
             Branches
             ,
             the
             Leaves
             ,
             the
             Clusters
             and
             Grapes
             themselves
             consum'd
             by
             degrees
             ;
             yet
             not
             so
             ,
             but
             that
             you
             might
             all
             the
             while
             discern
             the
             Redness
             of
             the
             Clusters
             ,
             the
             Green
             of
             the
             Leaves
             ,
             the
             Chestnut
             colour
             of
             the
             Vine
             so
             lively
             represented
             ,
             that
             you
             would
             have
             sworn
             that
             every
             thing
             had
             been
             natural
             and
             not
             counterfeited
             .
             But
             that
             which
             more
             astonish'd
             us
             ,
             was
             to
             see
             that
             the
             Fire
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             Element
             ,
             so
             active
             and
             so
             devouring
             should
             move
             so
             leisurely
             ,
             that
             it
             seem'd
             to
             have
             quitted
             its
             own
             Nature
             to
             obey
             the
             precepts
             and
             commands
             of
             Art
             ,
             which
             were
             only
             to
             represent
             the
             Arbor
             to
             the
             life
             and
             not
             to
             burn
             it
             .
          
           
             Nor
             are
             the
             Lanthorns
             less
             to
             be
             admir'd
             .
             For
             as
             I
             have
             said
             already
             ,
             there
             is
             not
             any
             House
             ,
             whether
             Poor
             or
             Rich
             ,
             where
             you
             do
             not
             see
             them
             hanging
             up
             in
             their
             Halls
             ,
             in
             their
             Courts
             ,
             and
             before
             their
             Windows
             ;
             and
             they
             are
             of
             so
             many
             different
             Fashions
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Figure
             which
             they
             do
             not
             represent
             .
             Those
             that
             are
             made
             for
             the
             Poor
             are
             of
             a
             small
             value
             .
             But
             there
             are
             others
             which
             are
             made
             for
             the
             Rich
             ,
             so
             curious
             for
             their
             Painting
             and
             Artificial
             Contrivance
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             worth
             Five
             ,
             Ten
             and
             Twenty
             Pistoles
             :
             and
             others
             which
             are
             made
             for
             the
             Mandarines
             ,
             the
             Visitors
             ,
             and
             Viceroys
             of
             Provinces
             ,
             for
             the
             Princes
             and
             the
             Emperor
             ,
             which
             cost
             a
             Hundred
             ,
             two
             Hundred
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             three
             Hundred
             and
             four
             Hundred
             Pistoles
             :
             which
             tho'
             it
             may
             seem
             a
             ●…hing
             difficult
             to
             be
             believ'd
             ,
             is
             nevertheless
             most
             certainly
             true
             .
             The
             largest
             are
             hung
             up
             in
             the
             Royal
             Halls
             ,
             or
             else
             in
             the
             Courts
             upon
             Scaffolds
             erected
             on
             purpose
             .
             They
             are
             twenty
             Cubits
             and
             sometimes
             more
             in
             Diameter
             :
             and
             the
             Lamps
             and
             Candles
             of
             which
             there
             are
             an
             infinite
             number
             in
             every
             Lanthorn
             ,
             are
             intermix'd
             
             and
             plao'd
             within-side
             ,
             so
             artificially
             and
             agreably
             ,
             that
             the
             Light
             adds
             beauty
             to
             the
             Painting
             ;
             and
             the
             smoak
             gives
             life
             and
             spirit
             to
             the
             Figures
             in
             the
             Lanthorn
             ,
             which
             Art
             has
             so
             contriv'd
             ,
             that
             they
             seem
             to
             walk
             ,
             turn
             about
             ,
             ascend
             and
             decend
             .
             You
             shall
             see
             Horses
             run
             ,
             draw
             Chariots
             and
             till
             the
             Earth
             ;
             Vessels
             Sailing
             ;
             Kings
             and
             Princes
             go
             in
             and
             out
             with
             large
             Trains
             :
             and
             great
             numbers
             of
             People
             both
             a
             Foot
             and
             a
             Horseback
             ,
             Armies
             Marching
             ,
             Comedies
             ,
             Dances
             ,
             and
             a
             thousand
             other
             Divertisements
             and
             Motions
             represented
             :
             and
             all
             the
             whole
             Nation
             spend
             the
             whole
             night
             by
             the
             light
             of
             these
             pleasing
             Objects
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Musick
             of
             several
             Instruments
             that
             attend
             the
             Feasts
             ,
             more
             or
             less
             magnificent
             ,
             which
             every
             one
             makes
             with
             his
             Family
             ,
             his
             Kindred
             and
             Friends
             .
             Sometimes
             at
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             they
             will
             have
             counterfeit
             Comedies
             ,
             represented
             by
             little
             Poppets
             ,
             which
             are
             mov'd
             by
             hidden
             Wires
             ;
             Or
             else
             by
             the
             shadowings
             of
             white
             peices
             of
             Silk
             very
             sine
             and
             transparent
             ,
             and
             made
             on
             purpose
             .
             It
             is
             a
             wonderful
             thing
             to
             see
             those
             little
             Woodden
             Poppets
             ,
             and
             Artificial
             Shadowings
             represent
             Kings
             ,
             Queens
             ,
             Captains
             ,
             Souldiers
             ,
             Swashbucklers
             ,
             Merry
             Andrews
             ,
             Learned
             Men
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             thing
             personated
             upon
             a
             Theater
             :
             How
             they
             will
             weep
             ,
             express
             Joy
             ,
             Sorrow
             ,
             Anger
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Passions
             :
             With
             what
             Industry
             ,
             and
             facility
             those
             Artists
             cause
             the
             Figures
             and
             Shadowings
             to
             move
             .
             Nay
             sometimes
             you
             would
             almost
             think
             they
             spoke
             too
             ;
             for
             the
             Machinists
             ,
             while
             the
             Figures
             move
             ,
             will
             be
             counterfeiting
             the
             Voices
             of
             little
             Children
             with
             so
             much
             address
             ,
             that
             a
             man
             would
             think
             that
             all
             he
             saw
             was
             absolutely
             natural
             ;
             so
             ingenious
             and
             inventive
             is
             that
             Nation
             .
          
           
             The
             Chineses
             relate
             the
             Original
             of
             this
             Lanthorn
             
             Festival
             after
             this
             Manner
             .
             They
             tell
             ye
             that
             sometime
             after
             the
             Establishment
             of
             their
             Empire
             ,
             a
             certain
             Mandarin
             belov'd
             of
             all
             the
             People
             for
             his
             Vertues
             and
             his
             rare
             Qualities
             ,
             lost
             his
             only
             Daughter
             whom
             he
             passionately
             lov'd
             near
             the
             Bank
             of
             a
             River
             .
             Whereupon
             away
             he
             went
             and
             sought
             for
             her
             all
             along
             the
             River
             side
             ;
             and
             because
             the
             People
             had
             an
             extraordinary
             affection
             for
             him
             ,
             they
             follow'd
             the
             Mandarin
             with
             Flambeaux
             and
             Lanthorns
             ,
             weeping
             and
             wailing
             as
             he
             did
             .
             But
             tho'
             they
             sought
             a
             long
             time
             up
             the
             stream
             and
             down
             the
             stream
             ,
             as
             Ceres
             sought
             for
             her
             Daughter
             in
             vain
             ,
             all
             their
             labour
             prov'd
             to
             no
             purpose
             ,
             for
             they
             could
             find
             nothing
             .
             This
             is
             the
             Vulgar
             Opinion
             of
             the
             People
             .
             But
             in
             regard
             this
             Story
             is
             very
             like
             to
             that
             which
             occasion'd
             the
             Festival
             solemniz'd
             the
             fifth
             day
             of
             the
             fifth
             Moon
             ,
             which
             the
             Inhabitants
             of
             Macao
             ,
             if
             I
             am
             not
             deceiv'd
             ,
             call
             
               Lumba
               Lumba
            
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Chineses
               Lūm
               Chuen
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             Barks
             made
             in
             the
             form
             of
             a
             Dragon
             ,
             wherein
             they
             sport
             themselves
             that
             day
             upon
             the
             Rivers
             ,
             the
             Learned
             in
             their
             writing
             relate
             another
             occasion
             of
             the
             Original
             of
             the
             Lanthorn
             Festival
             in
             this
             manner
             .
          
           
             About
             Three
             Tousand
             Five
             Hundred
             Years
             ago
             Raign'd
             the
             last
             King
             of
             the
             first
             Family
             Hià
             ,
             who
             was
             call'd
             Kie
             ,
             of
             whom
             we
             have
             already
             spoken
             .
             This
             King
             ,
             being
             a
             Person
             very
             cruel
             ,
             and
             addicted
             to
             his
             pleasures
             ,
             discoursing
             one
             day
             with
             one
             of
             his
             Queens
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             Lady
             that
             he
             most
             entirely
             lov'd
             ,
             or
             rather
             upon
             whom
             he
             doted
             even
             to
             folly
             ,
             complain'd
             to
             her
             of
             the
             short
             continuance
             of
             the
             pleasures
             of
             this
             Life
             :
             that
             there
             were
             but
             very
             few
             Men
             who
             liv'd
             aHundred
             Years
             ;
             and
             there
             was
             never
             any
             one
             that
             spent
             all
             his
             days
             in
             perfect
             joy
             and
             divertisment
             .
             That
             in
             winter
             the
             days
             were
             very
             short
             ,
             and
             the
             nights
             tediously
             long
             ;
             and
             
             in
             Summer
             quite
             the
             Contrary
             ,
             the
             Nights
             very
             short
             and
             the
             Days
             very
             long
             .
             Which
             inequality
             was
             the
             reason
             ,
             that
             Man
             could
             not
             take
             any
             pleasure
             that
             was
             capable
             to
             give
             him
             satisfaction
             :
             that
             the
             Sun
             was
             no
             sooner
             risen
             but
             set
             agen
             ;
             that
             it
             was
             the
             same
             thing
             with
             the
             Night
             :
             that
             time
             flew
             away
             two
             swiftly
             :
             that
             life
             was
             not
             long
             enough
             to
             content
             our
             desires
             ;
             and
             that
             he
             wondred
             Nature
             should
             be
             so
             cruel
             and
             rigorous
             to
             Mankind
             .
             To
             whom
             the
             Queen
             ,
             All
             this
             ,
             said
             she
             ,
             Sir
             ,
             signifies
             nothing
             ;
             I
             know
             a
             way
             to
             prolong
             time
             in
             such
             a
             Manner
             that
             it
             shall
             be
             sufficient
             to
             give
             you
             satisfaction
             .
             Make
             but
             one
             day
             of
             a
             whole
             Month
             ,
             and
             one
             Month
             of
             a
             whole
             Year
             :
             by
             which
             means
             the
             Years
             ,
             the
             Months
             and
             Days
             will
             be
             so
             long
             ,
             that
             living
             Ten
             Years
             ,
             you
             will
             have
             a
             Hundred
             Years
             of
             Pleasure
             and
             Content
             .
             This
             would
             be
             an
             excellent
             Invention
             reply'd
             the
             King
             ,
             hadst
             thou
             but
             the
             power
             to
             stop
             and
             retard
             the
             Motion
             of
             the
             Heavens
             ,
             the
             Sun
             ,
             the
             Moon
             and
             Stars
             .
             I
             confess
             ,
             said
             the
             Queen
             ,
             that
             neither
             You
             who
             are
             the
             Son
             of
             Heaven
             ,
             and
             Master
             of
             so
             vast
             an
             Empire
             ,
             nor
             my self
             ,
             nor
             any
             human
             Power
             ,
             are
             able
             to
             change
             the
             Laws
             of
             Nature
             .
             But
             you
             may
             blot
             out
             of
             your
             remembrance
             both
             Time
             ,
             the
             Heavens
             ,
             and
             the
             Stars
             by
             devising
             new
             Heavens
             ,
             and
             new
             Time
             of
             your
             own
             after
             this
             manner
             .
             Do
             but
             order
             a
             Palace
             to
             be
             built
             with
             Rooms
             and
             Chambers
             so
             contriv'd
             ,
             as
             that
             they
             may
             neither
             have
             Doors
             nor
             Windows
             ,
             nor
             so
             much
             as
             the
             least
             chink
             and
             cranny
             to
             admit
             the
             light
             either
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             Moon
             or
             Stars
             .
             When
             your
             Palace
             is
             finish'd
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Rooms
             are
             thus
             perfectly
             darkn'd
             ,
             carry
             thither
             all
             your
             Treasures
             of
             Gold
             ,
             Silver
             ,
             Precious
             Stones
             ,
             and
             costly
             Furniture
             ;
             Store
             it
             with
             what
             delights
             you
             fancy
             most
             ,
             I
             mean
             Young
             Men
             and
             Virgins
             
             all
             selected
             and
             cull'd
             without
             any
             defect
             .
             Then
             You
             and
             I
             will
             go
             and
             live
             there
             our selves
             without
             any
             other
             Cloths
             but
             what
             Nature
             has
             afforded
             us
             .
             After
             all
             these
             Preparations
             ,
             You
             may
             of
             a
             sudden
             and
             all
             at
             once
             cause
             a
             Thousand
             Flambeaux
             ,
             and
             a
             Thousand
             Lanthorns
             to
             give
             you
             a
             new
             Light
             ,
             which
             presenting
             to
             your
             Eyes
             the
             Objects
             which
             you
             love
             with
             so
             much
             passion
             will
             cancel
             the
             remembrance
             of
             Time
             ,
             the
             Heavens
             ,
             the
             Sun
             ,
             the
             Moon
             and
             even
             of
             your self
             at
             length
             :
             For
             you
             will
             be
             so
             charm'd
             with
             your
             Pleasures
             ,
             that
             a
             Month
             will
             seem
             no
             more
             to
             you
             then
             a
             day
             ,
             nor
             a
             Year
             any
             more
             then
             a
             Month.
             The
             Flambeaux
             and
             the
             Lanthorns
             will
             perform
             the
             Office
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             Moon
             and
             Planets
             ,
             and
             every
             Room
             will
             appear
             a
             Heav'n
             adorn'd
             with
             Stars
             ;
             and
             by
             this
             means
             you
             shall
             create
             new
             Heavens
             and
             new
             Time.
             The
             Emperor
             transported
             with
             his
             Lusts
             ,
             and
             sway'd
             by
             his
             vain
             Pleasures
             ,
             was
             so
             tak'n
             with
             the
             Queens
             contrivance
             ,
             that
             he
             appointed
             all
             things
             to
             be
             done
             according
             to
             the
             Advice
             of
             his
             Lascivious
             Queen
             .
             And
             when
             all
             things
             were
             done
             according
             to
             his
             wish
             ,
             He
             spent
             a
             whole
             Year
             in
             this
             Palace
             ,
             abandoning
             himself
             to
             all
             manner
             of
             dishonest
             and
             voluptuous
             Pleasures
             ,
             minding
             neither
             his
             Court
             nor
             his
             Kingdom
             .
             And
             these
             follies
             together
             with
             several
             other
             unjust
             and
             crue
             Actions
             ,
             enforc'd
             his
             Subjects
             to
             revolt
             and
             choose
             in
             his
             Place
             the
             Emperor
             
               Cham
               tum
            
             ,
             the
             Chief
             of
             another
             New
             Family
             of
             which
             we
             have
             already
             spok'n
             ▪
             After
             the
             Death
             of
             the
             Emperor
             Kie
             ,
             the
             Chineses
             destroy'd
             his
             new
             Palace
             where
             he
             had
             perpetrated
             so
             many
             wicked
             Actions
             ,
             and
             abolish'd
             all
             the
             Laws
             and
             Statutes
             enacted
             by
             that
             same
             cruel
             Tyrant
             ,
             unless
             it
             were
             his
             Invention
             of
             Flambeaux
             and
             Lanthorns
             which
             they
             preserv'd
             to
             Celebrate
             the
             Festival
             before
             mention'd
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Chineses
             also
             relate
             ,
             how
             that
             about
             Two
             Thousand
             Years
             afterwards
             ,
             another
             Emperor
             of
             the
             Tenth
             Royal
             Family
             ,
             who
             was
             call'd
             Tam
             ,
             suffer'd
             himself
             to
             be
             Deluded
             and
             Govern'd
             by
             a
             Mountebank
             of
             the
             Sect
             of
             those
             that
             are
             call'd
             .
             
               Tao
               Su
            
             ,
             whose
             Profession
             it
             is
             to
             Cheat
             the
             People
             ,
             the
             Nobility
             ,
             the
             Learned
             Men
             ,
             and
             even
             the
             Princes
             themselves
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             their
             Chymical
             Operations
             ,
             and
             their
             Gorgeous
             and
             Glorious
             Promises
             of
             continual
             streams
             of
             Gold
             and
             Silver
             ,
             Life
             almost
             Eternal
             ,
             and
             to
             Empower
             them
             to
             flie
             from
             one
             Mountain
             ,
             City
             ,
             or
             Province
             to
             another
             in
             a
             few
             Minutes
             .
             Now
             then
             this
             Emperor
             having
             surrender'd
             his
             Understanding
             to
             one
             of
             these
             Impostors
             or
             Magicians
             ,
             told
             him
             that
             he
             had
             a
             great
             desire
             
             to
             see
             the
             Lanthorns
             in
             the
             City
             of
             
               Yâm
               Cheu
            
             ,
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Kiam
               Nan
            
             ,
             the
             most
             Curious
             and
             most
             Celebrated
             over
             all
             the
             Empire
             ,
             for
             their
             Beauty
             ,
             their
             Riches
             ,
             and
             their
             Workmanship
             ;
             but
             ,
             said
             he
             ,
             I
             am
             afraid
             that
             if
             I
             go
             Incognito
             ,
             and
             in
             Disguise
             ,
             least
             some
             Disorder
             or
             Tumult
             should
             happen
             in
             the
             mean
             time
             in
             the
             Court
             or
             Kingdom
             ;
             or
             if
             I
             should
             take
             this
             Progress
             with
             an
             Attendance
             and
             Train
             suitable
             to
             my
             Dignity
             ,
             besides
             the
             Burthen
             and
             Charge
             that
             I
             shall
             be
             to
             the
             People
             ,
             I
             fear
             that
             all
             Men
             will
             condemn
             me
             of
             Folly
             ,
             and
             think
             it
             strange
             that
             so
             great
             an
             Emperor
             should
             take
             a
             Journy
             so
             long
             and
             tedious
             for
             the
             Divertisement
             of
             a
             few
             Hours
             .
          
           
             Let
             not
             your
             Majesty
             be
             disturb'd
             at
             that
             ,
             repli'd
             the
             Magician
             ,
             for
             I
             promise
             your
             Majesty
             ,
             that
             without
             exposing
             your self
             to
             any
             of
             these
             Inconveniences
             which
             you
             have
             propounded
             to
             me
             ,
             I
             will
             so
             order
             the
             matter
             ,
             that
             the
             next
             Lanthorn
             Night
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             far
             off
             ,
             you
             shall
             set
             forward
             ,
             return
             to
             your
             Palace
             ,
             and
             see
             the
             Lanthorns
             with
             all
             the
             satisfaction
             you
             can
             wish
             or
             desire
             .
          
           
           
             In
             a
             few
             Hours
             after
             that
             ,
             there
             appear'd
             in
             the
             Air
             Chariots
             and
             Thrones
             all
             of
             White
             Clouds
             ,
             and
             drawn
             by
             Swans
             .
             Immediately
             the
             King
             and
             Queen
             betook
             themselves
             to
             their
             Chariots
             ,
             with
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Damsels
             and
             Ladies
             of
             Honnour
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Musicians
             of
             the
             Palace
             :
             and
             then
             away
             flew
             the
             Swans
             with
             an
             extraordinary
             swiftness
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             few
             Moments
             arriv'd
             at
             
               Yâm
               Cheu
            
             ,
             which
             the
             Clouds
             ,
             enlarging
             themselves
             ,
             cover'd
             all
             over
             .
             And
             then
             it
             was
             that
             the
             King
             at
             leisure
             view'd
             the
             Lanthorns
             which
             the
             People
             had
             Lighted
             ,
             and
             to
             recompense
             them
             for
             the
             Divertisement
             which
             they
             had
             given
             him
             ,
             he
             caus'd
             his
             Musicians
             to
             Charm
             their
             Ears
             with
             a
             Consort
             of
             Voices
             and
             Instruments
             ;
             at
             the
             end
             of
             which
             ,
             he
             set
             forward
             again
             for
             his
             Capital
             City
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Twinkling
             of
             an
             Eye
             found
             himself
             at
             home
             in
             his
             own
             Palace
             .
             Within
             a
             Month
             after
             ,
             there
             came
             a
             Courier
             ,
             according
             to
             custom
             ,
             with
             a
             Dispatch
             ,
             by
             which
             Intelligence
             was
             giv'n
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             that
             upon
             a
             Lanthorn
             Night
             several
             Holy
             Men
             were
             seen
             hovering
             over
             the
             City
             of
             
               Yâm
               Cheu
            
             upon
             Thrones
             of
             Clouds
             drawn
             by
             Swans
             ,
             and
             who
             at
             the
             same
             time
             had
             Ravish'd
             their
             Ears
             with
             a
             most
             Harmonious
             Musical
             Consort
             of
             Voices
             and
             Instruments
             .
          
           
             Lastly
             they
             tell
             you
             that
             about
             Five
             Hundred
             Years
             ago
             there
             was
             a
             King
             of
             the
             Family
             of
             Sûm
             ,
             renown'd
             for
             his
             Noble
             Qualities
             and
             Vertues
             ,
             more
             especially
             for
             his
             Mildness
             and
             Affability
             .
             That
             this
             Prince
             ,
             to
             show
             the
             Affection
             which
             he
             had
             for
             the
             Nobility
             and
             People
             ,
             was
             wont
             every
             Year
             to
             appear
             publickly
             in
             his
             Palace
             for
             Eight
             Nights
             together
             ,
             without
             his
             Guards
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Gates
             set
             open
             ,
             and
             to
             suffer
             the
             Multitude
             to
             take
             a
             view
             of
             all
             the
             Fire-Works
             and
             Lanthorns
             ,
             which
             were
             very
             large
             and
             magnificent
             ,
             and
             of
             
             several
             forms
             ,
             that
             were
             in
             the
             Halls
             and
             Courts
             ;
             all
             the
             while
             entertaining
             his
             Subjects
             with
             Musick
             befitting
             the
             Grandeur
             of
             an
             Emperor
             that
             made
             himself
             so
             familiar
             to
             the
             whole
             Assembly
             .
          
           
             These
             are
             the
             Stories
             which
             the
             Chineses
             recount
             touching
             the
             Original
             and
             Augmentation
             of
             Honour
             given
             to
             the
             Lanthorn
             Festival
             ,
             so
             famous
             over
             all
             China
             .
             Upon
             which
             ,
             I
             have
             the
             longer
             insisted
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             by
             this
             same
             pattern
             ,
             the
             Reader
             may
             judge
             what
             might
             be
             enlarg'd
             upon
             other
             Subjects
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               Sixth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   P.
                
                 110.
                 
                 
                   Yam
                   Cheu
                
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 
                   Kiam
                   Nan.
                
                 
              
               
                 THE
                 City
                 of
                 
                   Yam
                   Cheu
                
                 is
                 seated
                 near
                 the
                 Mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Grand
                 Canal
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 River
                 Kiam
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 very
                 Wealthy
                 ,
                 Eminent
                 for
                 Trade
                 ,
                 and
                 Adorn'd
                 with
                 Magnificent
                 Houses
                 ,
                 built
                 for
                 the
                 most
                 part
                 by
                 the
                 Merchants
                 themselves
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 Enrich'd
                 by
                 their
                 Traffick
                 in
                 Salt
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 there
                 are
                 vast
                 Quantities
                 drawn
                 out
                 of
                 several
                 Salt-pits
                 upon
                 the
                 East
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 .
                 The
                 Wealth
                 of
                 this
                 City
                 is
                 the
                 Cause
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 are
                 exorbitantly
                 addicted
                 to
                 their
                 Pleasure
                 ,
                 insomuch
                 that
                 several
                 Little
                 Girls
                 are
                 there
                 bred
                 up
                 ,
                 the
                 most
                 Beautiful
                 that
                 can
                 be
                 found
                 ,
                 and
                 taught
                 to
                 Dance
                 and
                 Sing
                 ,
                 and
                 instructed
                 in
                 all
                 other
                 Female
                 Allurements
                 that
                 may
                 render
                 them
                 Agreeable
                 who
                 being
                 thus
                 accomplish'd
                 ●…re
                 sold
                 at
                 dear
                 Rates
                 for
                 Concubines
                 to
                 the
                 more
                 Wealthy
                 sort
                 .
                 No
                 wonder
                 then
                 that
                 they
                 spare
                 for
                 no
                 Cost
                 to
                 Divertise
                 themselves
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 to
                 render
                 their
                 Lanthorn
                 Festival
                 the
                 most
                 Pompous
                 and
                 Magnificent
                 above
                 all
                 others
                 in
                 China
                 .
                 Almost
                 all
                 the
                 Relations
                 mention
                 this
                 Feast
                 after
                 the
                 same
                 manner
                 as
                 our
                 Author
                 does
                 ,
                 but
                 not
                 with
                 so
                 many
                 Circumstances
                 .
                 
                   Kiam
                   nan
                
                 signifies
                 a
                 Province
                 to
                 the
                 South
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 Kiam
                 .
                 Under
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Kings
                 ,
                 this
                 Province
                 was
                 call'd
                 
                   Nan
                   Kim
                
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 the
                 Capital
                 City
                 belonging
                 to
                 it
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 the
                 Court
                 of
                 the
                 South
                 ;
                 as
                 Pe-kim
                 is
                 call'd
                 the
                 Court
                 of
                 the
                 North.
                 For
                 then
                 there
                 were
                 two
                 Courts
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 
                   Nan
                   Kim
                
                 enjoy'd
                 the
                 same
                 Priviledges
                 and
                 Immunities
                 which
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Pe-kim
                 did
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 Tartars
                 have
                 depriv'd
                 them
                 of
                 their
                 Franchises
                 ,
                 and
                 chang'd
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 
                   Nan
                   Kim
                
                 ,
                 into
                 that
                 of
                 
                   Kiam
                   Nim
                
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 the
                 Repose
                 of
                 the
                 River
                 Kiam
                 .
                 Which
                 Custom
                 of
                 altering
                 Names
                 is
                 very
                 Ancient
                 in
                 China
                 ,
                 and
                 has
                 also
                 been
                 practis'd
                 from
                 time
                 to
                 time
                 in
                 reference
                 to
                 other
                 Cities
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               VII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Publick
             Works
             and
             Edifices
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             and
             particularly
             of
             the
             Grand
             Canal
             .
          
           
             THE
             Publick
             Works
             and
             Structures
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             in
             my
             Opinion
             ,
             surpass
             in
             number
             and
             largeness
             ,
             all
             those
             of
             other
             Kingdoms
             which
             are
             known
             to
             us
             .
             The
             Palaces
             of
             the
             Princes
             and
             Principal
             Mandarins
             appear
             to
             be
             Cities
             ,
             and
             the
             Houses
             of
             Wealthy
             Private
             Persons
             resemble
             so
             many
             Palaces
             .
             They
             consist
             of
             Five
             or
             Six
             Apartments
             ,
             not
             one
             above
             another
             ,
             as
             in
             Europe
             ▪
             
             but
             one
             beyond
             another
             ,
             and
             upon
             the
             same
             Platform
             .
             Every
             Apartment
             is
             separated
             from
             the
             other
             by
             a
             large
             Court
             ,
             from
             which
             you
             ascend
             into
             the
             Halls
             and
             Chambers
             by
             an
             ascent
             of
             Six
             or
             Seven
             Steps
             .
             I
             have
             spoken
             in
             general
             of
             their
             Works
             and
             Buildings
             in
             the
             Second
             Chapter
             .
             I
             have
             also
             describ'd
             in
             the
             First
             Chapter
             the
             Celebrated
             Bridge
             which
             is
             to
             be
             seen
             not
             far
             from
             Pe-kim
             ,
             and
             I
             intend
             to
             speak
             more
             at
             large
             ,
             in
             the
             last
             ,
             of
             the
             Emperor's
             Palace
             .
             Nevertheless
             ,
             that
             I
             may
             give
             a
             more
             just
             Idea
             of
             the
             Grandeur
             and
             Magnificence
             of
             the
             Publick
             Works
             of
             China
             ,
             I
             shall
             here
             make
             a
             Rehearsal
             of
             what
             I
             have
             already
             said
             in
             the
             Annual
             Letters
             of
             the
             Year
             1659.
             touching
             the
             Grand
             Canal
             ;
             which
             if
             I
             am
             not
             deciev'd
             ,
             surpasses
             all
             other
             Works
             of
             this
             Nature
             which
             are
             upon
             the
             Earth
             .
          
           
             
             It
             is
             now
             above
             Four
             Hundred
             Years
             ago
             ,
             since
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             Conquer'd
             all
             China
             .
             Their
             Emperor
             settl'd
             his
             Residence
             in
             the
             City
             of
             Pe-kim
             ,
             which
             he
             founded
             anew
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             he
             might
             Govern
             his
             Territories
             with
             more
             ease
             ;
             for
             that
             he
             was
             also
             Lord
             of
             all
             the
             Western
             Tartary
             ,
             which
             extends
             it self
             from
             the
             Province
             of
             Pekim
             to
             the
             Territories
             of
             the
             Mogul
             ,
             to
             Persia
             ,
             and
             the
             Caspian
             Sea.
             But
             in
             regard
             the
             Northern
             Provinces
             could
             not
             furnish
             so
             large
             a
             City
             with
             Provisions
             necessary
             for
             their
             subsistance
             ,
             he
             order'd
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Vessels
             to
             be
             built
             ,
             to
             bring
             Victuals
             ,
             Spices
             and
             Merchandize
             of
             all
             sorts
             to
             Pe-kim
             ,
             from
             the
             Southern
             Provinces
             .
             However
             perceiving
             the
             Incertainty
             of
             those
             Voyages
             ,
             and
             how
             that
             Calms
             and
             Tempests
             caus'd
             the
             loss
             of
             an
             infinite
             Quantity
             of
             Provisions
             and
             Merchandize
             ,
             he
             employ'd
             Workmen
             without
             number
             ,
             who
             at
             vast
             Expences
             ,
             and
             with
             an
             unparallel'd
             Industry
             ,
             open'd
             a
             Canal
             ,
             Three
             
             Thousand
             Five
             Hundred
             Chinese
             Furlongs
             ,
             or
             Two
             Hundred
             Forty
             Five
             Portugal
             Leagues
             in
             length
             ,
             through
             several
             Provinces
             .
             This
             Canal
             ,
             as
             well
             to
             weaken
             the
             Current
             of
             the
             Stream
             ,
             as
             to
             make
             it
             more
             deep
             by
             retaining
             the
             Water
             within
             it
             ,
             is
             furnish'd
             with
             Seventy
             Two
             Sluces
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             Chā
             .
             They
             have
             every
             one
             great
             Gates
             ,
             which
             are
             made
             of
             large
             Pieces
             of
             Timber
             ;
             and
             which
             are
             shut
             up
             in
             the
             Night
             ,
             but
             set
             open
             in
             the
             Day
             time
             ,
             for
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             Barks
             :
             And
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             these
             Sluces
             are
             pass'd
             through
             with
             a
             great
             deal
             of
             ease
             .
             But
             there
             are
             some
             which
             are
             not
             to
             be
             shot
             ,
             but
             with
             a
             great
             deal
             of
             Pains
             and
             Danger
             .
             More
             especially
             one
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             
               Tien
               Fi-cha
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Queen
             and
             Mistress
             of
             Heaven
             ;
             thereby
             to
             express
             in
             Hyperbolical
             Terms
             the
             extraordinary
             Height
             of
             it
             .
             When
             the
             Barks
             are
             row'd
             against
             the
             Stream
             ,
             and
             come
             to
             the
             bottom
             of
             this
             Sluce
             ,
             the
             Watermen
             fasten
             to
             the
             Prow
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Cables
             and
             Cordage
             ,
             which
             are
             drawn
             on
             both
             sides
             the
             Canal
             ,
             by
             Four
             or
             Five
             Hundred
             Men
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             more
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Burthen
             of
             the
             Vessel
             ,
             and
             the
             Weight
             of
             the
             Lading
             .
             Others
             at
             the
             same
             time
             labour
             at
             Capstanes
             plac'd
             upon
             the
             Walls
             of
             the
             Sluce
             ,
             which
             are
             very
             broad
             and
             built
             of
             Free-Stone
             .
             Besides
             the
             Ropes
             already
             mention'd
             ,
             there
             are
             others
             which
             are
             very
             strong
             ,
             wound
             about
             great
             Pillars
             of
             Stone
             or
             Wood
             to
             hold
             the
             Vessel
             if
             any
             of
             the
             other
             Cordage
             should
             chance
             to
             break
             .
             When
             these
             Cords
             are
             all
             fasten'd
             ,
             they
             begin
             to
             Haule
             by
             degrees
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             keeping
             time
             to
             the
             sound
             of
             a
             Bason
             ,
             upon
             which
             they
             knock
             at
             first
             but
             softly
             ,
             and
             with
             some
             intervals
             between
             the
             stroaks
             :
             but
             when
             half
             the
             Bark
             at
             least
             is
             rais'd
             to
             the
             height
             of
             the
             upper
             Channel
             ,
             in
             regard
             the
             Current
             is
             then
             much
             
             stronger
             ,
             they
             knock
             upon
             the
             Bason
             with
             thicker
             stroaks
             ;
             at
             what
             time
             the
             Four
             or
             Five
             Hundred
             Haule
             all
             together
             with
             loud
             
               Hey
               Boys
            
             ,
             and
             give
             such
             a
             stretch
             ,
             that
             the
             Vessel
             mounts
             up
             in
             a
             Moment
             ,
             and
             is
             secur'd
             in
             the
             dead
             Water
             between
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Canal
             and
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Current
             .
             The
             Vessels
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             fall
             down
             with
             more
             speed
             and
             ease
             ,
             but
             with
             more
             danger
             .
             For
             the
             prevention
             of
             which
             ,
             they
             fasten
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Cords
             to
             the
             Poop
             ,
             which
             are
             let
             go
             ,
             or
             held
             tite
             ,
             with
             equal
             Care
             and
             Observation
             ,
             by
             those
             that
             hold
             the
             Ropes
             on
             both
             sides
             the
             Canal
             .
             At
             the
             same
             time
             there
             are
             other
             Men
             on
             both
             sides
             the
             Vessel
             ,
             who
             with
             long
             Poles
             with
             Iron
             Heads
             ,
             guide
             the
             Bark
             through
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Canal
             ,
             to
             prevent
             her
             striking
             against
             the
             Jaumes
             ,
             or
             great
             Stones
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             Gates
             are
             fasten'd
             .
             Which
             when
             the
             Bark
             has
             pass'd
             ,
             the
             Cords
             are
             le
             ts
             go
             which
             kept
             her
             from
             plunging
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             same
             time
             the
             Currant
             carries
             her
             as
             swift
             as
             an
             Arrow
             out
             of
             a
             Bow
             ,
             till
             she
             stop
             by
             degrees
             as
             the
             Stream
             grows
             weaker
             and
             weaker
             ,
             and
             carries
             her
             according
             to
             her
             usual
             course
             .
             This
             Canal
             begins
             at
             the
             City
             of
             
               Tum
               Cheu
            
             ,
             distant
             about
             two
             Leagues
             and
             a
             half
             from
             Pe-kim
             .
             There
             is
             in
             the
             same
             place
             a
             River
             ,
             with
             the
             Current
             of
             which
             Vessels
             drive
             ,
             till
             near
             the
             Sea
             it
             falls
             into
             another
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             Vessels
             Sail
             for
             some
             few
             Days
             .
             But
             then
             you
             come
             into
             a
             Canal
             made
             with
             hands
             ;
             and
             after
             you
             have
             Sail'd
             Twenty
             ,
             or
             Five
             and
             Twenty
             Leagues
             ,
             you
             come
             to
             a
             Temple
             call'd
             
               Fuen
               Hui
               Miaò
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Temple
             of
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             which
             divides
             the
             Waters
             .
             As
             far
             as
             this
             place
             you
             Row
             upon
             the
             Canal
             against
             the
             Stream
             ,
             but
             when
             you
             come
             just
             against
             this
             Temple
             ,
             you
             begin
             to
             Swim
             with
             the
             Stream
             ,
             and
             make
             use
             only
             of
             your
             Oars
             .
             Now
             I
             would
             fain
             know
             of
             our
             
             Engineers
             and
             famous
             Wits
             of
             Europe
             ,
             how
             this
             can
             be
             ,
             and
             whether
             it
             be
             a
             Work
             of
             Art
             or
             Nature
             ?
             A
             Bark
             lies
             cross
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Canal
             with
             the
             Prow
             to
             the
             West
             on
             the
             Temple
             side
             ,
             and
             the
             Poop
             to
             the
             East
             .
             Now
             on
             the
             one
             side
             the
             Water
             runs
             toward
             the
             North
             ,
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             it
             runs
             toward
             the
             South
             .
             To
             unfold
             this
             Riddle
             ,
             you
             are
             to
             understand
             ,
             that
             on
             the
             East
             side
             at
             the
             distance
             of
             about
             half
             a
             Days
             Journy
             ,
             there
             lies
             a
             great
             Lake
             between
             high
             Mountains
             ,
             the
             Waters
             of
             which
             swell'd
             a
             good
             large
             River
             that
             bent
             its
             course
             toward
             the
             Sea
             upon
             the
             East
             side
             .
             Now
             the
             Chineses
             stop'd
             up
             that
             Outlet
             ,
             and
             having
             cut
             through
             the
             Mountain
             ,
             open'd
             a
             Canal
             by
             which
             they
             brought
             the
             Water
             to
             the
             Temple
             .
             In
             that
             part
             they
             hallow'd
             two
             other
             Canals
             ,
             one
             toward
             the
             North
             ,
             the
             other
             toward
             the
             South
             ;
             and
             this
             with
             so
             true
             a
             proportion
             and
             regular
             Line
             ,
             that
             the
             Waters
             coming
             to
             the
             middle
             before
             the
             Temple
             ,
             take
             their
             leaves
             ,
             and
             one
             part
             of
             the
             Streams
             runs
             equally
             to
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             toward
             the
             South
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             by
             the
             following
             Figure
             ,
          
           
           
             This
             Canal
             in
             some
             places
             runs
             through
             the
             middle
             of
             Cities
             ,
             in
             other
             places
             along
             by
             the
             Walls
             .
             
             It
             crosses
             one
             part
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Pe-Kim
             ;
             afterwards
             all
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xan
               tum
            
             ,
             and
             after
             it
             has
             enter'd
             into
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Nan
               kim
            
             ,
             discharges
             it self
             into
             that
             great
             and
             rapid
             River
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             the
             Yellow
             River
             .
             Upon
             this
             River
             you
             Sail
             for
             about
             two
             days
             ,
             and
             then
             you
             come
             into
             another
             ,
             where
             you
             Sail
             about
             the
             length
             of
             two
             Musquet
             Shot
             ,
             at
             what
             time
             you
             meet
             with
             a
             Canal
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             open'd
             upon
             the
             South-side
             of
             this
             last
             River
             ,
             and
             which
             runs
             toward
             the
             City
             of
             
               Hoai
               ngan
            
             :
             afterwards
             this
             Canal
             runs
             through
             many
             Cities
             and
             Towns
             till
             it
             come
             to
             the
             City
             of
             
               Yam
               cheu
            
             ,
             the
             most
             famous
             Sea-port
             Town
             of
             all
             in
             the
             Empire
             .
             Soon
             after
             it
             discharges
             it self
             into
             the
             River
             Kiam
             ,
             a
             good
             days
             Journey
             from
             the
             City
             of
             
               Nan
               Kim
            
             .
             Certainly
             this
             was
             an
             Undertaking
             and
             Performance
             very
             great
             and
             Magnificent
             :
             nor
             is
             the
             Building
             of
             Eleven
             hundred
             forty
             five
             Royal
             Inns
             much
             inferiour
             to
             it
             .
             Only
             the
             raising
             of
             several
             Thousands
             Fortresses
             ,
             and
             the
             Walls
             Five
             hundred
             Leagues
             in
             length
             which
             environ
             China
             ,
             is
             more
             to
             be
             wondred
             at
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               Seventh
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   P.
                
                 114.
                 
                 It
                 is
                 now
                 above
                 Four
                 hundred
                 years
                 ago
                 since
                 the
                 Western
                 Tartars
                 conquer'd
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 
                   CHingis
                   Can
                
                 ,
                 the
                 Founder
                 of
                 the
                 Monarchy
                 of
                 the
                 Tartars
                 ,
                 the
                 largest
                 that
                 ever
                 was
                 in
                 the
                 World
                 ;
                 or
                 at
                 least
                 his
                 Son
                 
                   Octay
                   Can
                
                 ,
                 about
                 the
                 year
                 1220.
                 began
                 the
                 Conquest
                 of
                 
                   North
                   China
                
                 ,
                 setting
                 upon
                 the
                 
                 Eastern
                 Tartars
                 ,
                 in
                 whose
                 Possession
                 it
                 had
                 been
                 about
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 seventeen
                 years
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Chronology
                 of
                 F.
                 Couplet
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 entire
                 Conquest
                 of
                 China
                 was
                 not
                 Compleated
                 till
                 the
                 year
                 1220.
                 by
                 the
                 Fifth
                 Emperor
                 after
                 
                   Ching
                   is
                   Can
                
                 ,
                 call'd
                 by
                 our
                 Historians
                 in
                 imitation
                 of
                 the
                 Eastern
                 Tartars
                 Cublay
                 Can
                 ,
                 or
                 Cobila
                 .
                 The
                 Chineses
                 who
                 give
                 him
                 great
                 Encomiums
                 ,
                 call
                 him
                 
                   Xi
                   Su
                
                 ;
                 and
                 affirm
                 ,
                 that
                 formerly
                 he
                 was
                 call'd
                 
                   Ho
                   pie
                   lie
                
                 :
                 which
                 I
                 believe
                 to
                 be
                 no
                 other
                 than
                 the
                 Name
                 of
                 Cublay
                 or
                 Cobila
                 corrupted
                 ,
                 in
                 regard
                 the
                 Chineses
                 Pronounce
                 very
                 ill
                 ,
                 and
                 corrupt
                 almost
                 all
                 the
                 Names
                 and
                 Words
                 of
                 other
                 Nations
                 ,
                 as
                 our
                 Author
                 has
                 observ'd
                 in
                 his
                 first
                 Chapter
                 ,
                 that
                 M.
                 Polo
                 had
                 Corrupted
                 the
                 ●…artar
                 Name
                 of
                 the
                 Ancient
                 
                   Pe
                   Kim
                
                 ,
                 calling
                 it
                 
                   Can
                   b●…lu
                
                 instead
                 of
                 
                   Han
                   palu
                
                 .
                 The
                 Chineses
                 commit
                 the
                 same
                 Mistakes
                 in
                 the
                 Pronunciation
                 of
                 Foreign
                 Languages
                 ,
                 changing
                 Letters
                 and
                 adding
                 Vowels
                 to
                 facilitate
                 Pronunciation
                 ;
                 in
                 regard
                 that
                 all
                 the
                 Words
                 of
                 their
                 Language
                 are
                 Monosyllables
                 .
                 Thus
                 I
                 have
                 seen
                 in
                 a
                 Manuscript
                 Discourse
                 of
                 the
                 Necessity
                 of
                 performing
                 Divine
                 Service
                 in
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Language
                 ,
                 which
                 highly
                 deserves
                 to
                 be
                 Printed
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Chineses
                 instead
                 of
                 Crux
                 ,
                 Pronounce
                 
                   Cu
                   lu
                   c●…
                
                 .
                 Instead
                 of
                 Pronouncing
                 Beatus
                 ,
                 they
                 say
                 
                   Pe
                   j●…
                   su
                   s●…
                
                 .
                 For
                 Baptizo
                 they
                 cry
                 
                   Pa
                   pe
                   ti
                   so
                
                 ;
                 and
                 in
                 stead
                 of
                 Bartholmeus
                 ,
                 
                   Pa
                   ulh
                   to
                   lo
                   meusu
                
                 .
                 And
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 manner
                 't
                 is
                 very
                 probable
                 that
                 they
                 might
                 have
                 said
                 
                   Ho
                   pie
                   lie
                
                 ,
                 instead
                 of
                 Cublay
                 or
                 Cobila
                 ,
                 changing
                 the
                 C
                 into
                 H
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 b
                 into
                 p
                 :
                 so
                 reading
                 Hopili
                 instead
                 of
                 Cobili
                 ,
                 and
                 adding
                 e
                 to
                 facilitate
                 the
                 Pronunciation
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 Prince
                 
                   Xi
                   Su
                
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Cubluy
                   Can
                
                 it
                 was
                 ,
                 that
                 caus'd
                 the
                 Grand
                 Canal
                 to
                 be
                 made
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Author
                 describes
                 with
                 his
                 usual
                 Exactness
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 is
                 without
                 question
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 Magnificent
                 and
                 Admirable
                 undertakings
                 in
                 the
                 Universe
                 .
                 Only
                 there
                 is
                 one
                 thing
                 we
                 would
                 fain
                 know
                 ,
                 whether
                 these
                 Sluces
                 are
                 
                 made
                 like
                 those
                 in
                 France
                 and
                 the
                 Low-Countries
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 whether
                 they
                 are
                 made
                 of
                 two
                 Gates
                 at
                 a
                 distance
                 one
                 from
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 between
                 which
                 the
                 water
                 rises
                 .
                 For
                 by
                 the
                 Relation
                 of
                 Father
                 Magaillans
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 of
                 F.
                 Trigant
                 ,
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Sluces
                 seem
                 to
                 be
                 no
                 more
                 than
                 only
                 a
                 b●…re
                 Gate
                 made
                 fast
                 with
                 pieces
                 of
                 Wood
                 let
                 fall
                 perpendicularly
                 till
                 the
                 Overture
                 be
                 wholly
                 stopt
                 up
                 .
                 The
                 water
                 being
                 swell'd
                 in
                 this
                 manner
                 ,
                 they
                 draw
                 up
                 these
                 pieces
                 of
                 Wood
                 one
                 after
                 another
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 cause
                 the
                 Vessels
                 to
                 ascend
                 or
                 fall
                 ,
                 which
                 sometimes
                 would
                 not
                 be
                 able
                 to
                 Sail
                 for
                 want
                 of
                 Water
                 in
                 the
                 Canal
                 ,
                 if
                 i●…
                 were
                 not
                 retain'd
                 and
                 stopp'd
                 by
                 this
                 Invention
                 .
                 But
                 this
                 is
                 not
                 so
                 convenient
                 as
                 a
                 Sluce
                 with
                 two
                 Gates
                 and
                 a
                 Hutch
                 between
                 both
                 .
                 Thus
                 the
                 Author
                 of
                 the
                 Relation
                 of
                 the
                 Dutch
                 Embassy
                 reports
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Sluces
                 in
                 China
                 are
                 not
                 open'd
                 but
                 with
                 great
                 difficulty
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 are
                 a
                 great
                 hindrance
                 to
                 the
                 Voyage
                 .
                 However
                 this
                 is
                 a
                 Thing
                 very
                 Remarkable
                 ,
                 that
                 a
                 man
                 may
                 at
                 any
                 time
                 go
                 from
                 one
                 end
                 of
                 China
                 to
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 above
                 Six
                 hundred
                 Leagues
                 ,
                 unless
                 it
                 be
                 one
                 Iourney
                 only
                 by
                 Land
                 between
                 the
                 Provinces
                 of
                 
                   Quam
                   Tum
                
                 and
                 Kiamsi
                 ,
                 or
                 between
                 the
                 Cities
                 of
                 
                   Nan
                   hium
                
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   Nan
                   gan
                
                 ,
                 where
                 you
                 Embark
                 again
                 upon
                 the
                 River
                 of
                 Can.
                 Upon
                 which
                 it
                 will
                 not
                 be
                 amiss
                 to
                 observe
                 that
                 the
                 Author
                 of
                 the
                 Dutch
                 Embassy
                 made
                 a
                 considerable
                 Mistake
                 in
                 confounding
                 the
                 River
                 Can
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 great
                 River
                 Kiam
                 ,
                 which
                 comes
                 from
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Iunnan
                 ,
                 and
                 touches
                 only
                 the
                 Northern
                 Extremity
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Kiamsi
                 ,
                 whereas
                 the
                 River
                 Can
                 divides
                 it
                 in
                 two
                 ,
                 running
                 through
                 it
                 from
                 South
                 to
                 North.
                 
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               VIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             great
             Industry
             of
             this
             Nation
             .
          
           
             THe
             Magnificence
             ,
             and
             great
             Number
             of
             Publick
             Works
             in
             China
             ,
             is
             not
             only
             the
             Effect
             of
             vast
             Charges
             and
             Expences
             ;
             but
             of
             the
             extraordinary
             Industry
             of
             the
             Nation
             .
             They
             do
             all
             manner
             of
             Mechanick
             Works
             with
             a
             far
             less
             number
             of
             Tools
             ,
             and
             with
             more
             Ease
             than
             we
             do
             .
             For
             as
             in
             this
             Country
             here
             is
             not
             a
             foot
             of
             Land
             that
             lyes
             wast
             ;
             so
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Man
             or
             Woman
             ,
             young
             or
             old
             ,
             lame
             ,
             deaf
             or
             blind
             ,
             that
             has
             not
             a
             way
             to
             get
             a
             Livelyhood
             ,
             or
             that
             has
             not
             some
             Trade
             or
             Employment
             .
             The
             Chineses
             have
             a
             common
             Proverb
             ,
             
               Chūm
               qūe
               vù
               y
               vo
               ,
               In
            
             China
             
               there
               is
               nothing
               thrown
               away
            
             .
             How
             vile
             and
             useless
             a
             thing
             may
             appear
             to
             be
             ,
             it
             has
             its
             Use
             and
             may
             turn
             to
             Profit
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             in
             the
             City
             of
             Pekim
             only
             ,
             there
             are
             above
             a
             Thousand
             Families
             ,
             who
             have
             no
             other
             Trade
             to
             subsist
             on
             ,
             but
             only
             by
             Selling
             of
             matches
             for
             Tinderboxes
             ,
             and
             weeks
             for
             Candles
             .
             There
             are
             also
             as
             many
             that
             have
             nothing
             else
             to
             live
             upon
             ,
             but
             by
             picking
             up
             in
             the
             Streets
             and
             among
             the
             Sweepings
             of
             Houses
             ,
             Rags
             of
             Silk
             ,
             Cotton
             and
             Linnen-Cloth
             ;
             pieces
             of
             Paper
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             ,
             which
             they
             wash
             &
             make
             clean
             ,
             and
             then
             Sell
             to
             others
             that
             make
             use
             of
             them
             in
             several
             Trades
             .
             Their
             Invention
             also
             for
             the
             carrying
             of
             Burthens
             is
             very
             curious
             ;
             for
             they
             do
             not
             carry
             their
             Burthens
             by
             main
             Strength
             as
             we
             do
             ,
             but
             by
             Policy
             ,
             
             in
             this
             manner
             :
             They
             fasten
             the
             things
             
             which
             they
             are
             to
             carry
             ,
             either
             with
             Cords
             or
             Hooks
             ,
             or
             put
             them
             in
             Baskets
             or
             Hampers
             ,
             and
             hang
             them
             afterwards
             at
             both
             ends
             of
             a
             flat
             piece
             of
             Wood
             made
             on
             purpose
             ,
             which
             they
             take
             up
             upon
             their
             Shoulders
             equally
             pois'd
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Burthen
             weighs
             as
             much
             on
             the
             one
             side
             as
             on
             the
             other
             .
             Which
             Invention
             is
             a
             very
             great
             Convenience
             ;
             it
             being
             most
             certain
             that
             Burthens
             equally
             pois'd
             ,
             are
             much
             more
             easie
             to
             carry
             .
          
           
             In
             all
             the
             Cities
             and
             Towns
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             there
             are
             two
             Towers
             ,
             the
             one
             call'd
             the
             Drum-Tower
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             the
             Bell-Tower
             ;
             which
             serve
             to
             tell
             the
             Hour
             of
             the
             Night
             .
             For
             the
             Chineses
             divide
             the
             Night
             into
             five
             parts
             longer
             or
             shorter
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             Nights
             are
             longer
             or
             shorter
             ,
             and
             as
             they
             are
             longer
             in
             Winter
             than
             in
             Summer
             .
             At
             the
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Night
             or
             first
             Watch
             ,
             the
             Watchman
             strikes
             several
             stroaks
             upon
             the
             Drum
             ,
             and
             the
             Bell
             answers
             him
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             .
             After
             that
             ,
             during
             all
             the
             first
             Quarter
             ,
             the
             Watchman
             gives
             one
             stroak
             upon
             the
             Drum
             ,
             and
             another
             Watchman
             one
             rap
             upon
             the
             Bell
             with
             a
             wooden
             Hammer
             .
             And
             this
             they
             do
             all
             the
             first
             Quarter
             ,
             observing
             the
             space
             of
             time
             that
             a
             Man
             may
             say
             his
             Creed
             between
             the
             stroak
             and
             rap
             together
             .
             When
             the
             second
             Quarter
             of
             the
             Night
             begins
             ,
             then
             they
             give
             two
             stroaks
             ,
             and
             two
             raps
             apiece
             at
             the
             same
             distance
             of
             time
             ,
             till
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             third
             Quarter
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             give
             three
             stroaks
             and
             raps
             apiece
             .
             When
             the
             fourth
             Quarter
             begins
             ,
             they
             give
             four
             ;
             and
             when
             the
             fifth
             Quarter
             begins
             ,
             five
             ;
             and
             as
             soon
             as
             Day
             breaks
             they
             redouble
             their
             stroaks
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             at
             the
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Night
             .
             So
             that
             let
             a
             man
             wake
             at
             any
             time
             of
             the
             Night
             ,
             he
             shall
             know
             by
             the
             City
             Signal
             what
             Hour
             of
             the
             Night
             it
             is
             ,
             unless
             the
             wind
             sit
             so
             as
             to
             hinder
             the
             sound
             .
          
           
           
             At
             Pekim
             in
             the
             King's
             Palace
             ,
             you
             may
             see
             Drums
             and
             Bells
             upon
             the
             high
             Towers
             ,
             and
             
             in
             the
             City
             two
             other
             Towers
             with
             Drums
             and
             Bells
             .
             The
             City
             Drum
             is
             fifteen
             publick
             Cubits
             Diameter
             ,
             as
             is
             that
             which
             I
             have
             mention'd
             in
             the
             first
             remark
             .
             The
             Palace
             Bell
             is
             as
             big
             as
             ever
             any
             that
             I
             saw
             in
             Portugal
             .
             But
             the
             sound
             of
             it
             is
             so
             loud
             ,
             so
             clear
             and
             harmonious
             ,
             that
             it
             rather
             seems
             to
             be
             a
             Musical
             Instrument
             than
             a
             Bell.
             
          
           
             F.
             
               Athanasius
               Kirker
            
             in
             the
             second
             Chapter
             of
             his
             Sixteenth
             Book
             of
             Musurgie
             ,
             or
             Art
             of
             Concords
             and
             Discords
             ,
             assures
             us
             ,
             that
             the
             Bell
             in
             the
             City
             of
             Erfort
             under
             the
             Elector
             of
             Mayence
             ,
             is
             the
             biggest
             not
             only
             in
             Europe
             ,
             but
             in
             all
             the
             World.
             Nevertheless
             we
             have
             seen
             with
             our
             own
             Eyes
             ,
             and
             observ'd
             by
             the
             tryal
             which
             we
             made
             in
             the
             year
             1667.
             that
             it
             is
             much
             less
             than
             that
             which
             the
             Fathers
             
               Iohn
               Adam
            
             ,
             and
             
               Ferdinand
               Verbiest
            
             got
             
             up
             with
             Engines
             ,
             to
             the
             Astonishment
             of
             the
             whole
             Court
             ,
             and
             plac'd
             in
             one
             of
             the
             Towers
             of
             which
             we
             have
             formerly
             spoken
             .
             Of
             the
             Truth
             of
             which
             a
             man
             may
             be
             easily
             convinc'd
             ,
             that
             compares
             the
             Measures
             of
             the
             Bell
             of
             Erfort
             taken
             out
             of
             Father
             
             Kirker's
             Book
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             the
             Bell
             at
             Pekim
             ,
             compar'd
             by
             F.
             
               Ferdinand
               Verbiest
            
             ,
             after
             this
             manner
             :
          
           
             
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   The
                   Bottom
                   of
                   the
                   Bell
                   of
                   Erfort
                   ,
                   is
                   seven
                   Chinese
                   Cubits
                   and
                   ●…
                   .
                
                 
                   1.
                   
                   The
                   Diameter
                   of
                   the
                   Bottom
                   of
                   the
                   Bell
                   of
                   Pekim
                   ,
                   is
                   Twelve
                   Cubits
                   and
                   ●…
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   2.
                   
                   The
                   Thickness
                   of
                   the
                   Bell
                   of
                   Erfort
                   toward
                   the
                   Closure
                   ,
                   is
                   6
                   /
                   10
                   of
                   a
                   Cubit
                   and
                   7
                   /
                   10
                   of
                   1
                   /
                   10.
                   
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   The
                   Thickness
                   of
                   the
                   Bell
                   of
                   Pekim
                   toward
                   the
                   Closure
                   ,
                   is
                   9
                   /
                   10
                   of
                   a
                   Cubit
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   
                   3.
                   
                   The
                   Inner
                   Depth
                   which
                   F.
                   Kirker
                   calls
                   Altitudinem
                   inclusae
                   Curvaturae
                   ,
                   is
                   Eight
                   Cubits
                   and
                   five
                   Tenths
                   ½
                   .
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   The
                   Inner
                   Depth
                   of
                   the
                   Bell
                   at
                   Pekim
                   ,
                   is
                   Twelve
                   Cubits
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   4.
                   
                   The
                   weight
                   of
                   the
                   Bell
                   of
                   Erfort
                   ,
                   is
                   Twenty
                   five
                   thousand
                   four
                   hundred
                   Pound
                   .
                
                 
                   4.
                   
                   The
                   weight
                   of
                   the
                   Bell
                   of
                   Pekim
                   ,
                   is
                   a
                   Hundred
                   and
                   Twenty
                   thousand
                   Pound
                   of
                   Brass
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             This
             Bell
             is
             that
             which
             is
             appointed
             to
             give
             notice
             of
             the
             Watch
             or
             Hour
             of
             the
             Night
             in
             the
             City
             of
             Pekim
             ,
             and
             I
             dare
             confidently
             averr
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             not
             the
             like
             Bell
             in
             Europe
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             probability
             it
             is
             the
             biggest
             in
             the
             World.
             When
             they
             strike
             upon
             it
             in
             the
             Night
             ,
             the
             sound
             or
             terrible
             roaring
             rather
             which
             it
             makes
             ,
             is
             so
             loud
             ,
             so
             full
             ,
             and
             so
             r●…sounding
             ,
             that
             after
             it
             has
             spread
             it self
             over
             all
             the
             City
             ,
             it
             extends
             it self
             over
             the
             Walls
             into
             the
             Suburbs
             ,
             and
             is
             heard
             a
             great
             way
             round
             about
             the
             neighbouring
             Country
             .
          
           
             The
             Kings
             of
             China
             ,
             together
             with
             this
             extraordinary
             Bell
             caus'd
             Seven
             others
             to
             be
             Cast
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             are
             Five
             that
             still
             lye
             upon
             the
             Ground
             .
             But
             of
             those
             Five
             there
             is
             one
             that
             justly
             deserves
             to
             be
             admir'd
             ,
             as
             being
             all
             over-cover'd
             with
             Chinese
             Characters
             ,
             so
             fair
             ,
             so
             neat
             ,
             and
             so
             exact
             ,
             that
             they
             do
             not
             look
             as
             if
             they
             had
             been
             cast
             ,
             but
             written
             upon
             Paper
             by
             some
             judicious
             and
             excellent
             Writing-Master
             .
          
           
             The
             Chineses
             have
             also
             found
             out
             ,
             for
             the
             regulating
             and
             dividing
             the
             Quarters
             of
             the
             Night
             ,
             an
             Invention
             becoming
             the
             wonderful
             Industry
             of
             that
             Nation
             .
             They
             beat
             to
             Powder
             a
             certain
             Wood
             ,
             after
             they
             have
             peel'd
             and
             rasp'd
             it
             ,
             of
             which
             they
             make
             a
             kind
             of
             Past
             ,
             which
             they
             rowl
             into
             Ropes
             and
             Pastils
             of
             several
             Shapes
             .
             Some
             they
             make
             of
             
             more
             costly
             Materials
             ,
             as
             Saunders
             ,
             Eagle
             ,
             and
             other
             odoriferous
             Woods
             ,
             about
             a
             fingers
             length
             ,
             which
             the
             wealthy
             sort
             ,
             and
             the
             Men
             of
             Learning
             burn
             in
             their
             Chambers
             .
             There
             are
             others
             of
             less
             value
             ,
             one
             ,
             two
             and
             three
             Cubits
             long
             ,
             and
             about
             the
             bigness
             of
             a
             Goose
             Quill
             ,
             which
             they
             burn
             before
             their
             Pagods
             or
             Idols
             .
             These
             they
             make
             the
             same
             use
             of
             as
             of
             Candles
             to
             light
             them
             from
             one
             place
             to
             another
             .
             They
             make
             these
             Ropes
             of
             powder'd
             Wood
             of
             an
             equal
             Circumference
             ,
             by
             the
             means
             of
             Moulds
             made
             on
             purpose
             .
             Then
             they
             wind
             them
             round
             at
             the
             bottom
             ,
             lessening
             the
             circle
             at
             the
             bottom
             till
             they
             come
             to
             be
             of
             a
             Conick
             figure
             ,
             which
             enlarges
             it self
             at
             every
             Turn
             ,
             to
             one
             ,
             two
             and
             three
             hands
             breadth
             in
             Diameter
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             more
             ;
             and
             this
             lasts
             one
             ,
             two
             and
             three
             days
             together
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             bigness
             which
             they
             allow
             it
             .
             For
             we
             find
             some
             in
             their
             Temples
             that
             last
             ten
             ,
             twenty
             or
             thirty
             days
             .
             These
             Weeks
             resemble
             a
             Fisher's
             Net
             ,
             or
             a
             String
             wound
             about
             a
             Cone
             ;
             which
             they
             hang
             up
             by
             the
             Middle
             ,
             and
             light
             at
             the
             lower
             end
             ,
             from
             whence
             the
             Fire
             winds
             slowly
             and
             insensibly
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             windings
             of
             the
             string
             of
             powder'd
             Wood
             ,
             upon
             which
             there
             are
             generally
             five
             marks
             to
             distinguish
             the
             five
             parts
             of
             the
             Watch
             ,
             or
             Night
             .
             Which
             manner
             of
             measuring
             Time
             is
             so
             just
             and
             certain
             ,
             that
             you
             shall
             never
             observe
             any
             considerable
             Mistake
             .
             The
             Learned
             Men
             ,
             Travellers
             ,
             and
             all
             Persons
             that
             would
             rise
             at
             a
             precise
             hour
             about
             Business
             ,
             hang
             a
             little
             weight
             at
             the
             Mark
             ,
             which
             shews
             the
             Hour
             when
             they
             design
             to
             rise
             ,
             which
             when
             the
             Fire
             is
             come
             to
             that
             point
             ,
             certainly
             falls
             into
             a
             Copper
             Bason
             ,
             that
             is
             plac'd
             underneath
             ,
             and
             wakes
             them
             with
             the
             noise
             of
             the
             fall
             .
             This
             Invention
             supplies
             the
             want
             of
             our
             
               Larum
               Watches
            
             ,
             only
             with
             this
             difference
             ,
             that
             this
             is
             so
             plain
             a
             
             thing
             and
             so
             cheap
             ,
             that
             one
             of
             these
             Inventions
             ,
             which
             will
             last
             Four
             and
             twenty
             Hours
             ,
             does
             not
             cost
             above
             Three
             pence
             ;
             whereas
             Watches
             that
             consist
             of
             so
             many
             wheels
             and
             other
             devices
             ,
             are
             so
             dear
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             not
             to
             be
             purchas'd
             but
             by
             those
             that
             have
             store
             of
             Money
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               Eighth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   P.
                
                 121.
                 
                 They
                 fasten
                 the
                 things
                 which
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 carried
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 THis
                 Invention
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 describ'd
                 ,
                 is
                 altogether
                 like
                 to
                 that
                 which
                 the
                 Women
                 in
                 Holland
                 (
                 he
                 might
                 have
                 said
                 the
                 Men
                 in
                 England
                 )
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 to
                 carry
                 their
                 Milk-Pails
                 about
                 the
                 Streets
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 no
                 question
                 but
                 that
                 F.
                 Magaillans
                 was
                 ignorant
                 .
                 But
                 it
                 is
                 of
                 no
                 use
                 in
                 the
                 world
                 to
                 carry
                 a
                 Burthen
                 of
                 one
                 entire
                 piece
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   B.
                   P.
                
                 123.
                 
                 The
                 City
                 Drum
                 is
                 fifteen
                 City
                 Cubics
                 Diameter
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 I
                 have
                 observ'd
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 Note
                 upon
                 the
                 second
                 Chapter
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Cubit
                 was
                 a
                 Parisian
                 Foot
                 ,
                 as
                 seven
                 to
                 eight
                 .
                 So
                 that
                 these
                 fifteen
                 Cubits
                 amount
                 to
                 thirteen
                 foot
                 and
                 ⅛
                 of
                 Paris
                 .
                 Which
                 shews
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 this
                 Drum
                 is
                 of
                 a
                 Prodigious
                 bigness
                 ;
                 seeing
                 that
                 by
                 the
                 Proportion
                 of
                 the
                 Diameter
                 to
                 the
                 Circumference
                 ,
                 this
                 Drum
                 must
                 be
                 Forty
                 one
                 foot
                 and
                 a
                 quarter
                 ,
                 or
                 near
                 seven
                 fathom
                 in
                 Compass
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 
                   C.
                   P.
                
                 123.
                 
                 F.
                 
                   Athanasius
                   ,
                   Kircher
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 affirms
                 that
                 the
                 Bell
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Erfort
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 Father
                 Kirker
                 certainly
                 had
                 never
                 heard
                 of
                 several
                 Bells
                 in
                 Europe
                 bigger
                 than
                 that
                 of
                 Erfort
                 .
                 For
                 to
                 go
                 no
                 farther
                 than
                 France
                 ,
                 the
                 Bell
                 of
                 Roan
                 call'd
                 
                   George
                   d'
                   Amboise
                
                 ,
                 weighs
                 about
                 Forty
                 thousand
                 weight
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Inscription
                 upon
                 it
                 declares
                 .
                 Those
                 of
                 Rhodez
                 ,
                 of
                 St.
                 
                   John
                   of
                   Lyon
                
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 two
                 which
                 were
                 cast
                 for
                 
                   Nostre
                   Dame
                
                 in
                 Paris
                 ,
                 are
                 almost
                 as
                 big
                 as
                 that
                 of
                 Roan
                 .
                 As
                 certain
                 it
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 F.
                 Kirker
                 had
                 never
                 heard
                 of
                 the
                 Bells
                 at
                 Pe-kim
                 ,
                 since
                 he
                 has
                 acknowledg'd
                 his
                 Error
                 in
                 his
                 
                   China
                   illustrata
                
                 ,
                 after
                 F.
                 Gruber
                 had
                 sent
                 him
                 the
                 Extract
                 of
                 a
                 Letter
                 from
                 F.
                 
                   Ferdinand
                   Verbiest
                
                 ,
                 containing
                 the
                 Description
                 of
                 that
                 Bell
                 at
                 Pe-kim
                 ,
                 which
                 F.
                 Kirker
                 has
                 quoted
                 and
                 Printed
                 in
                 his
                 
                   China
                   Illustrated
                
                 .
                 Neither
                 had
                 F.
                 Magaillans
                 ever
                 seen
                 this
                 last
                 Piece
                 of
                 F.
                 Kirker
                 .
              
               
                 As
                 for
                 the
                 Bells
                 of
                 Pekim
                 ,
                 F.
                 
                   Ferdinand
                   Verbiest
                
                 in
                 his
                 Letter
                 ,
                 and
                 F.
                 Couplet
                 in
                 his
                 Chronology
                 tells
                 us
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 cast
                 about
                 the
                 year
                 1404.
                 by
                 the
                 Order
                 of
                 the
                 Emperor
                 
                   Chim
                   su
                
                 ,
                 otherwise
                 
                   Yum
                   lo
                
                 ,
                 the
                 Uncle
                 of
                 
                   Kien
                   ven
                   ti
                
                 ,
                 &
                 second
                 Son
                 of
                 
                   Hum
                   vu
                
                 ,
                 who
                 expell'd
                 the
                 
                   Western
                   Tartars
                
                 out
                 of
                 China
                 ,
                 and
                 founded
                 the
                 Royal
                 Family
                 
                   Tai
                   min
                   ga
                
                 extirpated
                 this
                 last
                 Age
                 by
                 the
                 
                   Eastern
                   Tartars
                
                 .
                 This
                 Emperor
                 
                   Chim
                   su
                
                 caus'd
                 five
                 of
                 these
                 Bells
                 to
                 be
                 cast
                 ,
                 every
                 one
                 of
                 which
                 weighs
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 twenty
                 thousand
                 weight
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 question
                 to
                 be
                 made
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 then
                 they
                 were
                 the
                 biggest
                 in
                 the
                 World.
                 But
                 
                   James
                   Rutenfels
                
                 in
                 his
                 Relation
                 of
                 Muscovie
                 ,
                 which
                 he
                 wrote
                 in
                 Latin
                 ,
                 affirms
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 one
                 much
                 bigger
                 in
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 the
                 Grand
                 Duke
                 at
                 Moscow
                 ,
                 which
                 weighs
                 Three
                 hundred
                 and
                 twenty
                 thousand
                 Pound
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 of
                 that
                 Prodigious
                 weight
                 ,
                 that
                 no
                 Art
                 of
                 Man
                 can
                 raise
                 it
                 ,
                 nor
                 hang
                 it
                 in
                 the
                 Tower
                 call●…d
                 
                   Yvan
                   velichi
                
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 bottom
                 of
                 which
                 it
                 lyes
                 upon
                 pieces
                 of
                 Timber
                 .
              
               
               
                 Father
                 Rougemont
                 tells
                 us
                 in
                 his
                 History
                 ,
                 that
                 F.
                 Adam
                 caus'd
                 two
                 of
                 the
                 Bells
                 at
                 Pekim
                 to
                 be
                 cran'd
                 up
                 into
                 a
                 Tower
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 fifty
                 Chinese
                 Cubits
                 ,
                 or
                 One
                 hundred
                 thirty
                 one
                 Foot
                 and
                 ¼
                 high
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 help
                 of
                 Two
                 hundred
                 Workmen
                 only
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 great
                 Astonishment
                 of
                 the
                 Chineses
                 ,
                 who
                 thought
                 he
                 must
                 have
                 employ'd
                 as
                 many
                 Thousands
                 :
                 and
                 that
                 two
                 years
                 after
                 he
                 caus'd
                 a
                 third
                 Bell
                 to
                 be
                 cran'd
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 manner
                 ,
                 but
                 with
                 more
                 Ease
                 ,
                 though
                 he
                 employ'd
                 no
                 more
                 than
                 a
                 Hundred
                 and
                 twenty
                 young
                 Men.
                 F.
                 Intorcetta
                 observes
                 in
                 his
                 Relation
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Bells
                 of
                 China
                 have
                 no
                 Clappers
                 ,
                 only
                 they
                 make
                 them
                 sound
                 by
                 striking
                 with
                 a
                 Hammer
                 upon
                 the
                 outside
                 of
                 the
                 Skirt
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               IX
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Navigation
             of
             the
             Chineses
             .
          
           
             NAvigation
             is
             so
             common
             and
             so
             Universal
             in
             this
             Kingdom
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             hardly
             any
             City
             or
             Town
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             Southern
             Provinces
             ,
             that
             does
             not
             enjoy
             the
             benefit
             of
             some
             River
             ,
             some
             Lake
             ,
             some
             Canal
             ,
             or
             some
             Navigable
             Arm
             of
             the
             Sea
             ;
             insomuch
             that
             there
             are
             almost
             as
             many
             Inhabitants
             upon
             the
             Water
             as
             upon
             the
             dry
             Land.
             Which
             is
             a
             Sight
             no
             less
             pleasing
             then
             surprizing
             ,
             when
             a
             Stranger
             comes
             to
             any
             Port
             in
             the
             Evening
             ,
             to
             see
             one
             City
             of
             Vessels
             upon
             the
             Water
             ,
             and
             another
             of
             Houses
             upon
             the
             Land.
             They
             that
             put
             off
             very
             early
             ,
             or
             come
             too
             late
             ,
             are
             forc'd
             to
             Sail
             or
             Row
             for
             several
             Hours
             together
             ,
             between
             Vessels
             that
             lye
             not
             far
             from
             the
             Shoar
             on
             both
             sides
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             there
             is
             such
             a
             Trade
             at
             some
             
             of
             these
             Ports
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             half
             a
             days
             time
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             more
             ,
             before
             a
             Man
             can
             get
             clear
             of
             the
             Vessels
             that
             lye
             before
             the
             Town
             Insomuch
             that
             a
             Man
             may
             say
             ,
             there
             are
             two
             Empires
             in
             China
             ,
             the
             one
             upon
             the
             Water
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             upon
             the
             Land
             ;
             and
             as
             many
             Venice's
             as
             there
             are
             Cities
             .
             For
             these
             Vessels
             serve
             instead
             of
             Houses
             to
             them
             that
             are
             the
             Masters
             of
             them
             .
             There
             they
             dress
             their
             Meat
             ,
             there
             they
             are
             born
             ,
             there
             they
             are
             bred
             ,
             and
             there
             they
             dye
             ;
             there
             they
             have
             their
             Dogs
             and
             their
             Catts
             ;
             there
             they
             breed
             their
             Pigs
             ,
             their
             Ducks
             ,
             and
             their
             Geese
             .
             Their
             Vessels
             are
             some
             of
             good
             Burthen
             ,
             others
             less
             .
             Some
             belong
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             some
             to
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             some
             to
             the
             Merchants
             ,
             and
             some
             to
             the
             People
             .
             Among
             the
             King's
             Barks
             ,
             those
             which
             are
             call'd
             
               So
               chuen
            
             ,
             are
             employ'd
             to
             carry
             the
             Mandarins
             to
             their
             several
             Governments
             ,
             and
             to
             bring
             them
             back
             upon
             their
             Returns
             .
             These
             are
             made
             like
             our
             Caravels
             ,
             but
             high
             ,
             and
             so
             well
             Painted
             ,
             especially
             the
             Cabin
             where
             the
             Mandarin
             lodges
             ,
             that
             they
             resemble
             Buildings
             erected
             for
             some
             publick
             Solemnity
             ,
             rather
             than
             ordinary
             Hoy's
             .
             Those
             that
             are
             call'd
             
               Leam
               chuen
            
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             appointed
             to
             carry
             Provisions
             from
             the
             Provinces
             to
             the
             Court
             ,
             are
             about
             nine
             Thousand
             ,
             nine
             Hundred
             ,
             fourscore
             and
             nineteen
             .
             I
             have
             often
             been
             Inquisitive
             to
             know
             why
             they
             did
             not
             add
             one
             more
             to
             make
             up
             the
             number
             of
             ten
             Thousand
             ;
             but
             all
             the
             Inquisition
             I
             could
             make
             was
             still
             to
             no
             purpose
             ,
             till
             at
             length
             ,
             after
             several
             years
             ,
             and
             when
             I
             better
             understood
             the
             humour
             and
             customs
             of
             the
             Nation
             ,
             I
             made
             a
             shrewd
             Conjecture
             at
             the
             Reason
             .
             The
             number
             of
             Ten
             Thousand
             is
             express'd
             by
             two
             Chinese
             Letters
             only
             ,
             Y
             ,
             and
             Van
             ;
             which
             have
             nothing
             in
             them
             either
             of
             Great
             or
             Magnificent
             ,
             either
             in
             Writing
             or
             Pronunciation
             ,
             and
             by
             
             Consequence
             deserve
             not
             to
             be
             made
             use
             of
             to
             express
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Emperor's
             Barks
             .
             So
             that
             they
             have
             tak'n
             one
             out
             of
             ten
             Thousand
             ,
             to
             render
             the
             number
             more
             Pompous
             and
             Majestick
             ,
             and
             which
             was
             more
             proper
             to
             flatter
             their
             Vanity
             and
             Pride
             ,
             by
             saying
             ,
             nine
             Hundred
             fourscore
             and
             nineteen
             ,
             as
             running
             most
             upon
             their
             ador'd
             number
             Nine
             .
             These
             Vessels
             are
             somewhat
             less
             then
             the
             former
             ;
             Nevertheless
             they
             have
             their
             Fore-Castles
             and
             Quarter-Decks
             ,
             and
             a
             Cabin
             or
             Hall
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             like
             those
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             .
             The
             third
             sort
             of
             the
             Emperor's
             Barks
             are
             call'd
             
               Lum
               y
               chuen
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             Vessels
             that
             bring
             the
             Emperor's
             Habits
             ,
             his
             Peices
             of
             Silk
             and
             Tissue
             to
             the
             Court.
             Of
             these
             there
             are
             as
             many
             as
             there
             are
             days
             in
             the
             Year
             ,
             or
             three
             hundred
             sixty
             five
             :
             For
             in
             regard
             the
             Emperor
             is
             stil'd
             the
             Sun
             of
             Heaven
             ,
             there
             is
             nothing
             that
             appertains
             to
             him
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             Chineses
             do
             not
             ascribe
             some
             relation
             to
             the
             Celestial
             Beings
             ,
             as
             the
             Heavens
             ,
             the
             Sun
             ,
             the
             Moon
             ,
             the
             Planets
             ,
             and
             the
             Stars
             .
             Thus
             
               Lum
               y
            
             ,
             signifies
             the
             Habits
             of
             the
             Dragon
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             Imprese
             and
             Arms
             of
             the
             King
             of
             China
             are
             compos'd
             of
             Dragons
             ,
             with
             five
             Clawes
             :
             and
             for
             that
             reason
             ,
             his
             Habits
             and
             his
             Moveables
             ,
             of
             necessity
             must
             be
             adorn'd
             with
             Dragons
             ,
             either
             in
             Painting
             or
             Embroidery
             .
             So
             that
             when
             you
             say
             
               Lum
               yen
            
             ,
             the
             Eyes
             of
             the
             Dragon
             ,
             or
             
               Lum
               y
            
             ,
             the
             habits
             of
             the
             Dragon
             ,
             all
             the
             Chineses
             understand
             that
             you
             mean
             the
             Emperor's
             Eyes
             ,
             or
             the
             Emperor's
             Garments
             ;
             and
             so
             of
             the
             rest
             .
             Lastly
             there
             are
             other
             Vessels
             call'd
             
               Lám
               chuen
            
             ,
             very
             light
             and
             small
             in
             Comparison
             of
             the
             others
             ,
             and
             which
             are
             almost
             as
             broad
             as
             they
             are
             long
             .
             These
             are
             for
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Men
             of
             Learning
             ,
             and
             other
             wealthy
             Persons
             and
             People
             of
             Quality
             ,
             that
             go
             and
             come
             to
             and
             from
             the
             Court.
             They
             have
             belonging
             to
             
             them
             a
             fair
             Cabin
             ,
             a
             Bed
             ,
             a
             Table
             and
             Chairs
             ,
             where
             you
             may
             sleep
             ,
             eat
             ,
             study
             ,
             write
             ,
             and
             receive
             Visits
             ,
             with
             the
             same
             Convenience
             as
             if
             you
             were
             at
             home
             in
             your
             House
             .
             The
             Prow
             belongs
             to
             the
             Marriners
             and
             Watermen
             ,
             and
             the
             Master
             of
             the
             Boat
             lives
             in
             the
             Poop
             with
             his
             Wife
             and
             Children
             ,
             where
             also
             the
             Victuals
             are
             drest
             for
             him
             that
             hires
             the
             Bark
             .
             These
             last
             Vessels
             ,
             with
             several
             others
             of
             several
             Forms
             ,
             belong
             to
             particular
             Persons
             ,
             and
             are
             almost
             Innumerable
             .
             And
             I
             my self
             in
             the
             Year
             1656
             ,
             by
             the
             Emperor's
             command
             ,
             went
             by
             water
             from
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             to
             Macao
             upon
             the
             grand
             Canal
             and
             several
             other
             Rivers
             ,
             for
             above
             six
             hundred
             Leagues
             ,
             without
             going
             by
             Land
             but
             only
             one
             days
             Journey
             ,
             to
             cross
             a
             Mountain
             which
             divides
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Kiam
               si
            
             ,
             from
             〈◊〉
             of
             
               Quam
               tum
            
             .
          
           
             Certainly
             there
             is
             no
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             World
             so
             vast
             as
             this
             is
             ,
             that
             enjoys
             the
             like
             advantage
             .
             Nevertheless
             what
             I
             am
             now
             going
             to
             relate
             ,
             will
             seem
             to
             be
             yet
             more
             incredible
             ;
             and
             indeed
             ,
             I
             should
             hardly
             have
             believ'd
             it
             my self
             ,
             had
             I
             not
             seen
             it
             my self
             .
             The
             fourth
             of
             May
             ,
             in
             the
             year
             1642.
             
             I
             departed
             from
             the
             City
             of
             
               Ham
               cheu
            
             Capital
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Che
               Kiam
            
             ,
             and
             the
             twenty
             eighth
             of
             August
             of
             the
             same
             year
             ,
             I
             arriv'd
             at
             
               Chim
               tu
            
             ,
             the
             Capital
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Su
               chuen
            
             .
             During
             these
             four
             Months
             ,
             I
             made
             four
             Hundred
             Leagues
             ,
             all
             the
             way
             by
             Water
             ,
             counting
             the
             windings
             and
             turnings
             of
             the
             Rivers
             ;
             yet
             so
             that
             for
             a
             whole
             Month
             I
             sail'd
             upon
             two
             different
             Streams
             ,
             tho
             during
             all
             the
             other
             three
             Months
             ,
             I
             kept
             upon
             the
             grand
             River
             of
             Kiam
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             the
             Son
             of
             the
             Sea.
             During
             this
             tedious
             Journey
             by
             Water
             ,
             I
             met
             with
             every
             Day
             such
             vast
             quantities
             of
             Timber
             Trees
             tied
             one
             to
             another
             of
             all
             sorts
             of
             Wood
             ,
             which
             if
             they
             were
             
             fasten'd
             together
             ,
             would
             make
             a
             Bridge
             of
             several
             days
             Journey
             .
             I
             sail'd
             by
             some
             of
             these
             that
             were
             fasten'd
             to
             the
             Shoar
             ,
             above
             an
             hour
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             for
             half
             a
             days
             swimming
             with
             the
             Stream
             .
             Now
             the
             most
             wealthy
             Merchants
             of
             China
             are
             they
             that
             trade
             in
             Salt
             and
             Wood
             ,
             there
             being
             no
             other
             Commodities
             for
             which
             they
             have
             a
             more
             considerable
             Vent
             .
             This
             Wood
             therefore
             is
             cut
             down
             in
             the
             Mountains
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Suchuen
             ,
             upon
             the
             Frontiers
             of
             China
             ,
             to
             the
             West
             :
             and
             after
             they
             have
             caus'd
             it
             to
             be
             carry'd
             to
             the
             Banks
             of
             the
             River
             Kiam
             ,
             which
             about
             those
             Parts
             falls
             into
             this
             Empire
             ,
             they
             Saw
             it
             into
             Boards
             ,
             and
             with
             little
             Expence
             carry
             it
             into
             most
             parts
             of
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             where
             they
             make
             a
             very
             great
             Profit
             by
             the
             Sale
             of
             it
             .
             The
             Breadth
             of
             these
             Trains
             of
             Timber
             is
             about
             ten
             Foot
             ,
             and
             the
             Length
             either
             longer
             or
             shorter
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Merchant's
             Stock
             ,
             but
             the
             longest
             are
             sometimes
             about
             half
             a
             League
             .
             They
             rise
             above
             the
             Water
             four
             or
             five
             Foot
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             made
             after
             this
             manner
             .
             They
             take
             as
             much
             Wood
             as
             is
             requisite
             for
             the
             height
             or
             thickness
             of
             four
             or
             five
             Foot
             ,
             and
             breadth
             of
             ten
             .
             Then
             they
             make
             holes
             at
             the
             Ends
             of
             the
             pieces
             of
             wood
             ,
             through
             which
             they
             put
             wreaths
             of
             Reeds
             or
             twisted
             Osiers
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             fasten
             other
             pieces
             of
             Wood
             ,
             suffering
             the
             Float
             to
             fall
             down
             with
             the
             stream
             ,
             till
             the
             whole
             Train
             be
             as
             long
             as
             they
             desire
             .
             All
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Float
             being
             thus
             contriv'd
             ,
             move
             and
             yield
             to
             the
             Water
             ,
             as
             necessity
             requires
             ,
             as
             pliably
             as
             the
             Links
             of
             a
             Chain
             .
             Only
             upon
             the
             fore-part
             of
             the
             Float
             they
             set
             four
             or
             five
             Men
             with
             Oars
             or
             Poles
             to
             guide
             the
             Float
             ,
             and
             make
             it
             swim
             where
             they
             please
             .
             Upon
             these
             Floats
             at
             such
             and
             such
             distances
             ,
             they
             build
             little
             wooden
             Cottages
             ,
             which
             they
             sell
             whole
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             ,
             at
             the
             several
             places
             where
             they
             
             stop
             during
             their
             Journey
             .
             Here
             the
             Merchants
             Sleep
             and
             shelter
             themselves
             ,
             as
             in
             their
             Houses
             ,
             dress
             their
             Meat
             and
             Eat
             it
             ,
             and
             put
             their
             furniture
             and
             utensils
             therein
             .
             The
             same
             Merchants
             also
             bring
             from
             the
             Mountains
             and
             Forrests
             ,
             where
             they
             cut
             their
             Wood
             ,
             several
             sorts
             of
             Medicinal
             Herbs
             ,
             Parrots
             ,
             Monkeys
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             ,
             which
             they
             sell
             in
             the
             Cities
             and
             other
             places
             thro'
             which
             they
             pass
             ,
             to
             other
             Merchants
             that
             vend
             them
             over
             all
             the
             Provinces
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             Great
             Quantities
             of
             this
             Wood
             are
             brought
             to
             Pekim
             ,
             though
             it
             be
             distant
             above
             seven
             hundred
             Portugueze
             Leagues
             from
             the
             Mountains
             where
             the
             Wood
             is
             cut
             down
             .
             And
             thus
             a
             Man
             may
             easily
             judge
             by
             what
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             World
             that
             can
             compare
             with
             China
             ,
             for
             the
             Benefit
             of
             going
             and
             trading
             by
             Water
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               X.
            
             Of
             the
             great
             Plenty
             of
             all
             things
             in
             China
             .
          
           
             MOST
             certain
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             two
             Fountains
             of
             Trade
             ,
             are
             Navigation
             and
             Plenty
             ,
             in
             a
             Kingdom
             stor'd
             with
             all
             sorts
             of
             Commodities
             .
             China
             enjoys
             both
             these
             Advantages
             to
             that
             degree
             that
             no
             Kingdom
             exceeds
             it
             .
             The
             great
             quantity
             of
             Gold
             which
             is
             found
             in
             all
             the
             Mountains
             is
             such
             ,
             that
             instead
             of
             Coining
             it
             into
             Money
             ,
             to
             buy
             Necessaries
             ;
             it
             is
             it self
             a
             Commodity
             .
             Whence
             comes
             that
             Proverb
             among
             the
             Chineses
             so
             often
             repeated
             
             at
             
               Macao
               ,
               Money
               is
               the
               Blood
               ,
               but
               Gold
               is
               Merchandize
               .
            
             As
             for
             Money
             ,
             it
             is
             now
             above
             four
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             Years
             that
             this
             Empire
             has
             lasted
             ;
             nor
             has
             their
             Coveteousness
             of
             Money
             ,
             nor
             their
             Industry
             to
             get
             it
             been
             less
             ancient
             .
             So
             that
             the
             quantity
             which
             the
             Chineses
             have
             rammas'd
             together
             ,
             must
             needs
             be
             immense
             and
             incredible
             ;
             so
             much
             the
             rather
             for
             that
             whatever
             enters
             once
             ,
             is
             never
             carri'd
             out
             again
             ,
             in
             regard
             the
             Laws
             so
             strictly
             forbid
             it
             .
             You
             shall
             rarely
             hear
             in
             Europe
             of
             Presents
             made
             of
             five
             Hundred
             or
             a
             Thousand
             Crowns
             ,
             but
             in
             China
             it
             is
             a
             usual
             thing
             to
             make
             Presents
             ,
             not
             only
             of
             a
             Thousand
             ,
             but
             ten
             ,
             twenty
             ,
             thirty
             ,
             forty
             thousand
             Crowns
             .
             And
             certain
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             through
             the
             whole
             Empire
             ,
             but
             more
             especially
             at
             Court
             ,
             several
             Millions
             are
             expended
             in
             Presents
             and
             Entertainments
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             same
             thing
             is
             there
             every
             day
             to
             be
             seen
             which
             was
             anciently
             said
             of
             Rome
             :
             all
             things
             are
             there
             put
             to
             sale
             .
             There
             is
             not
             any
             Employment
             of
             Governour
             of
             a
             City
             or
             Town
             ,
             which
             does
             not
             cost
             the
             Person
             who
             is
             preferr'd
             to
             it
             ,
             several
             Thousands
             of
             Crowns
             ;
             sometimes
             twenty
             ,
             sometimes
             thirty
             ,
             and
             so
             proportionably
             for
             all
             other
             Offices
             great
             and
             small
             .
             To
             be
             a
             Viceroy
             or
             Governour
             of
             a
             Province
             ,
             before
             a
             Man
             can
             have
             his
             Commission
             seal'd
             ,
             will
             cost
             him
             twenty
             ,
             thirty
             ,
             forty
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             threescore
             ,
             sometimes
             seventy
             Thousand
             Crowns
             .
             And
             yet
             so
             far
             is
             the
             King
             from
             receiving
             a
             Farthing
             of
             this
             Money
             ,
             that
             he
             knows
             nothing
             of
             the
             Abuse
             .
             Only
             the
             Grand
             Ministers
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             the
             Colao's
             ,
             or
             Counsellers
             of
             State
             ,
             and
             the
             six
             Supream
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             are
             they
             that
             privately
             sell
             all
             Offices
             and
             Employments
             ,
             to
             the
             Vice-roys
             and
             great
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Provinces
             .
             On
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             they
             to
             satisfy
             their
             Avarice
             ,
             and
             to
             reimburse
             themselves
             of
             
             the
             Money
             laid
             out
             for
             their
             Preferments
             ,
             extort
             Presents
             from
             the
             Presidents
             of
             Territories
             and
             Cities
             ,
             who
             repay
             themselves
             upon
             the
             Governors
             of
             Towns
             and
             Burroughs
             ,
             and
             they
             ,
             or
             rather
             all
             together
             ,
             make
             themselves
             whole
             again
             ,
             and
             replenish
             their
             Purses
             at
             the
             Expence
             of
             the
             Miserable
             People
             .
             So
             that
             it
             is
             a
             common
             Proverb
             in
             China
             ,
             that
             the
             King
             unwittingly
             lets
             loose
             so
             many
             Hang-Men
             ,
             Murderers
             ,
             hungry
             Dogs
             and
             Wolves
             to
             ruin
             and
             devour
             the
             Poor
             People
             ,
             when
             he
             Creates
             new
             Mandarins
             to
             Govern
             them
             .
             In
             short
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Vice-roy
             ,
             Visitor
             of
             a
             Province
             ,
             or
             any
             such
             like
             Officer
             ,
             who
             at
             the
             end
             of
             Three
             years
             of
             his
             being
             employ'd
             ,
             that
             does
             not
             return
             with
             Six
             or
             Seven
             hundred
             Thousand
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             a
             Million
             of
             Crowns
             .
             From
             whence
             I
             draw
             one
             Conclusion
             ,
             which
             to
             me
             seems
             undeniable
             ,
             that
             if
             we
             consider
             the
             natural
             Inclination
             ,
             and
             insatiable
             avarice
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             there
             is
             very
             little
             Money
             in
             China
             ;
             but
             if
             we
             consider
             the
             Riches
             which
             She
             possesses
             within
             Her self
             ,
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Kingdom
             that
             may
             compare
             with
             it
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             in
             China
             a
             vast
             Quantity
             of
             Copper
             ,
             Iron
             ,
             Tin
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             sorts
             of
             Metals
             ;
             especially
             Copper
             and
             Lattin
             ,
             of
             which
             they
             make
             their
             Great
             Guns
             ,
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             Idols
             and
             Statues
             ,
             and
             several
             sorts
             of
             Dishes
             and
             Cups
             of
             various
             forms
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             Price
             and
             value
             extraordinary
             .
             There
             are
             some
             of
             these
             Vessels
             ,
             which
             either
             for
             their
             Antiquity
             ,
             or
             because
             they
             were
             made
             in
             such
             a
             King's
             Reign
             ,
             or
             by
             such
             a
             Workman
             ,
             tho'
             otherwise
             very
             ordinary
             and
             clownish
             ,
             are
             valu'd
             at
             several
             Hundreds
             of
             Crowns
             ,
             nay
             sometimes
             a
             Thousand
             and
             more
             .
             And
             indeed
             the
             City
             of
             Macao
             affords
             us
             an
             evident
             proof
             of
             the
             great
             plenty
             of
             these
             Mettals
             .
             For
             that
             in
             that
             one
             City
             there
             are
             cast
             such
             numbers
             of
             great
             Guns
             to
             be
             admir'd
             
             for
             their
             goodness
             ,
             their
             bigness
             ,
             and
             their
             Workmanship
             ,
             which
             not
             only
             serve
             for
             the
             use
             of
             that
             City
             ,
             but
             to
             supply
             several
             places
             in
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             even
             Portugal
             it self
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             a
             Man
             may
             judge
             of
             the
             Great
             Plenty
             of
             Copper
             and
             Tin
             in
             China
             ,
             by
             the
             great
             quantity
             of
             Copper
             and
             Tin
             Money
             that
             is
             made
             over
             all
             the
             Empire
             .
             These
             pieces
             of
             Money
             have
             square
             holes
             in
             the
             Middle
             ,
             and
             so
             are
             threaded
             upon
             Strings
             ,
             which
             contain
             every
             one
             a
             Thousand
             Deniers
             .
             And
             generally
             you
             exchange
             a
             String
             of
             a
             Thousand
             Deniers
             for
             one
             Crown
             ,
             or
             Chinese
             Tael
             ;
             and
             this
             exchange
             is
             made
             in
             Banks
             and
             publick
             places
             appointed
             for
             the
             same
             purpose
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             way
             we
             are
             here
             to
             take
             notice
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Memorial
             extant
             in
             China
             ,
             neither
             do
             we
             meet
             with
             any
             Record
             in
             their
             Histories
             or
             any
             other
             o●…
             their
             Books
             ,
             that
             ever
             they
             made
             use
             o●…
             Paper-Money
             in
             that
             Kingdom
             ,
             as
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             tells
             us
             in
             his
             second
             Book
             ,
             Chapter
             eighteenth
             .
             But
             in
             regard
             that
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             is
             an
             Author
             of
             good
             Reputation
             ,
             I
             will
             here
             unfold
             the
             Reason
             that
             made
             him
             commit
             that
             mistake
             .
             The
             Copper
             Money
             of
             China
             is
             round
             ,
             and
             generally
             about
             the
             bigness
             of
             a
             Portuguese
             Real
             and
             a
             half
             .
             It
             has
             Letters
             stamp'd
             upon
             it
             ,
             which
             on
             the
             one
             side
             declare
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Reigning
             Prince
             ;
             on
             the
             other
             ,
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Tribunal
             that
             caus'd
             it
             to
             be
             Covn'd
             .
             The
             Pieces
             of
             Gold
             and
             Silver
             are
             not
             Coyn'd
             ,
             but
             cast
             into
             Lingots
             in
             the
             form
             of
             a
             small
             Boat
             ,
             which
             at
             Macao
             are
             call'd
             Paes
             ,
             or
             Loaves
             of
             Gold
             or
             Silver
             .
             Both
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             are
             of
             a
             different
             value
             .
             The
             Loaves
             of
             Gold
             are
             of
             the
             value
             of
             one
             ,
             two
             ,
             ten
             ,
             and
             twenty
             Crowns
             .
             Those
             of
             Silver
             ,
             of
             the
             value
             of
             half
             a
             Crown
             ,
             one
             Crown
             ,
             Ten
             ,
             Twenty
             ,
             Fifty
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             a
             Hundred
             ,
             and
             three
             Hundred
             Crowns
             .
             
             These
             they
             cut
             with
             Steel
             Scizars
             ,
             which
             the
             people
             carry
             about
             them
             for
             that
             purpose
             ,
             and
             divide
             them
             into
             pieces
             ,
             bigger
             or
             lesser
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             value
             of
             the
             purchas'd
             Commodity
             .
             This
             being
             granted
             ,
             you
             are
             to
             take
             notice
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             and
             fifteenth
             day
             of
             every
             Month
             ,
             and
             at
             all
             times
             that
             the
             Chineses
             carry
             their
             Dead
             to
             Enterrment
             ,
             they
             burn
             a
             great
             quantity
             of
             Money
             and
             Loaves
             made
             of
             Pastboard
             ,
             cover'd
             over
             with
             Leaf-Tin
             ,
             and
             guilded
             over
             with
             Leaf-Gold
             ,
             Varnish'd
             with
             Yellow
             .
             Now
             these
             Pastboard
             Figures
             are
             so
             like
             the
             real
             Tin
             Money
             ,
             and
             Loaves
             of
             Gold
             and
             Silver
             ,
             that
             Foreigners
             who
             are
             not
             well
             instructed
             in
             the
             Customes
             and
             Superstitions
             of
             this
             Nation
             ,
             may
             easily
             be
             deceiv'd
             .
             So
             much
             the
             rather
             ,
             because
             they
             see
             in
             the
             Streets
             and
             
             Piazza's
             at
             every
             turn
             ,
             Men
             laden
             ,
             &
             Shops
             full
             of
             this
             Counterfeit
             Money
             .
             Now
             the
             Chineses
             burn
             them
             ,
             because
             they
             believe
             the
             Ashes
             turn
             to
             Copper
             Money
             ,
             and
             Loaves
             of
             Gold
             and
             Silver
             ,
             which
             their
             deceas'd
             Parents
             make
             use
             of
             in
             the
             other
             World
             to
             hire
             Houses
             ,
             and
             to
             buy
             Cloaths
             and
             Victuals
             ,
             and
             to
             purchase
             the
             Favour
             of
             the
             King
             of
             Hell
             ,
             his
             Ministers
             and
             his
             Executioners
             ;
             to
             the
             end
             they
             may
             use
             them
             with
             less
             severity
             ,
             and
             be
             more
             remiss
             in
             their
             torments
             ;
             as
             also
             to
             oblige
             them
             not
             to
             delay
             ,
             but
             rather
             to
             hasten
             the
             time
             of
             their
             Transmigration
             or
             Metempsycosis
             ,
             by
             translating
             their
             Souls
             not
             into
             the
             Bodies
             of
             Beasts
             ,
             but
             into
             the
             Bodies
             of
             Men
             considerable
             for
             their
             Learning
             ,
             their
             Honors
             ,
             and
             their
             Wealth
             ;
             such
             is
             the
             extraordinary
             ignorance
             and
             blindness
             of
             these
             Infidels
             .
             We
             are
             also
             farther
             to
             observe
             ,
             that
             Anciently
             ,
             when
             the
             Kings
             of
             China
             wanted
             Money
             ,
             they
             gave
             to
             the
             Mandarins
             and
             Souldiers
             in
             part
             of
             their
             Pay
             ,
             certain
             Tickets
             sign'd
             and
             seal'd
             with
             the
             King's
             Seal
             .
             Which
             Tickets
             were
             made
             
             of
             Past-board
             ,
             about
             the
             bigness
             of
             half
             a
             sheet
             of
             Paper
             ,
             with
             their
             Price
             or
             Value
             written
             upon
             them
             .
             Thus
             when
             any
             Person
             was
             to
             receive
             a
             Hundred
             Crowns
             ,
             they
             paid
             him
             Fifty
             in
             ready
             Money
             and
             the
             other
             Fifty
             in
             these
             sort
             of
             Tickets
             :
             which
             are
             call'd
             Chao
             ,
             whence
             the
             word
             
               Chao
               fu
            
             is
             deriv'd
             .
             But
             because
             the
             People
             scrupl'd
             to
             recieve
             these
             Billets
             instead
             of
             Money
             ,
             the
             King
             order'd
             that
             an
             Employment
             should
             be
             given
             to
             him
             that
             should
             take
             up
             these
             Billets
             and
             bring
             a
             Hundred
             back
             into
             the
             Royal
             Treasury
             ;
             and
             a
             more
             considerable
             Employment
             to
             him
             that
             should
             bring
             in
             a
             Thousand
             ,
             and
             so
             proportionably
             for
             a
             greater
             Number
             .
             Which
             as
             it
             was
             a
             great
             advantage
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             so
             was
             it
             no
             less
             gainful
             to
             the
             wealthier
             sort
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             got
             Employments
             ,
             which
             they
             could
             never
             have
             obtain'd
             but
             by
             that
             means
             ;
             &
             wherein
             that
             Nation
             places
             their
             chiefest
             glory
             and
             felicity
             .
             However
             this
             expedient
             could
             not
             satisfie
             the
             Generality
             ,
             who
             were
             unwilling
             and
             grumbl'd
             to
             part
             with
             their
             Commodities
             and
             Provisions
             for
             a
             piece
             of
             Past-board
             ;
             which
             was
             the
             occasion
             of
             many
             Quarrels
             and
             Disputes
             ;
             so
             that
             at
             last
             the
             Court
             was
             oblig'd
             to
             suppress
             these
             Billets
             ,
             to
             avoid
             those
             Inconveniences
             ,
             and
             many
             others
             ,
             which
             they
             every
             day
             foresaw
             .
             So
             that
             after
             some
             few
             Ages
             ,
             those
             Pastboards
             were
             no
             longer
             in
             use
             .
             However
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             question
             to
             be
             made
             ,
             but
             that
             these
             were
             the
             Reasons
             that
             induc'd
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             to
             assert
             in
             several
             Parts
             of
             his
             History
             ,
             that
             the
             Chineses
             made
             use
             of
             Pastboard
             or
             Paper
             Money
             .
          
           
             The
             white
             Silk
             and
             Wax
             of
             China
             ,
             are
             things
             that
             are
             worthy
             to
             be
             taken
             notice
             of
             .
             The
             first
             is
             the
             best
             in
             the
             World
             ;
             and
             the
             second
             is
             not
             only
             the
             best
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             is
             singular
             ,
             and
             no
             where
             else
             to
             be
             found
             but
             in
             this
             Kingdom
             .
             All
             
             Men
             know
             the
             great
             plenty
             and
             goodness
             of
             the
             Silk
             which
             is
             made
             over
             all
             China
             .
             The
             Ancients
             had
             the
             Knowledge
             of
             it
             ,
             in
             regard
             they
             call
             China
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Silk
             ;
             and
             the
             Moderns
             know
             it
             by
             Experience
             ,
             in
             regard
             that
             many
             Nations
             both
             of
             Asia
             and
             Europe
             load
             out
             several
             Caravans
             ,
             and
             great
             Numbers
             of
             Ships
             ,
             with
             Chinese
             Silk
             ,
             both
             wrought
             and
             raw
             .
             And
             this
             same
             vast
             Plenty
             of
             Silk
             appears
             yet
             more
             ,
             by
             the
             incredible
             Number
             of
             Silk
             Stuffs
             both
             plain
             and
             intermix'd
             with
             Gold
             and
             Silver
             ,
             which
             are
             worn
             over
             all
             the
             Kingdom
             .
             The
             petty
             Kings
             ,
             the
             Princes
             ,
             the
             Grandees
             and
             their
             Servants
             ,
             the
             Eunuchs
             ,
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             the
             Men
             of
             Learning
             ,
             the
             wealthy
             Burgesses
             ,
             also
             all
             the
             Women
             ,
             and
             a
             fourth
             part
             of
             the
             Men
             ,
             wear
             Silk
             Garments
             ,
             as
             well
             upper
             as
             undermost
             .
             Nay
             ,
             it
             is
             so
             common
             at
             Court
             ,
             that
             the
             very
             Footmen
             that
             run
             by
             their
             Masters
             Horses
             ,
             are
             clad
             in
             Sattin
             and
             Damask
             .
             But
             lastly
             ,
             a
             man
             may
             be
             convinc'd
             of
             this
             inexhaustible
             Plenty
             of
             Silk
             ,
             by
             the
             Three
             hundred
             sixty
             five
             Barks
             of
             which
             we
             have
             already
             spoken
             ,
             which
             the
             Provinces
             of
             
               Nam
               kin
            
             and
             
               Che
               kiam
            
             alone
             ,
             send
             every
             year
             to
             the
             Court
             ,
             laden
             not
             only
             with
             Pieces
             of
             Tissue
             ,
             Damask
             ,
             Sattins
             and
             Velvets
             of
             different
             Shapes
             and
             Colours
             ,
             but
             rich
             and
             costly
             Garments
             for
             the
             King
             ,
             the
             Queen
             ,
             the
             Princes
             their
             Children
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Ladies
             of
             the
             Court.
             To
             which
             we
             may
             add
             the
             Hundreds
             of
             thousand
             Pounds
             of
             raw
             and
             wrought
             Silk
             ,
             which
             the
             other
             Provinces
             Pay
             by
             way
             of
             Tribute
             to
             the
             King
             ;
             of
             which
             I
             shall
             presently
             give
             an
             Accompt
             .
             So
             that
             of
             necessity
             China
             must
             have
             an
             undrainable
             plenty
             of
             Silk
             ,
             since
             the
             Tribute
             which
             it
             pays
             is
             so
             great
             .
          
           
             The
             Wax
             is
             the
             most
             beautiful
             ,
             the
             clearest
             
             &
             the
             whitest
             ,
             that
             ever
             was
             seen
             ;
             and
             tho
             it
             be
             not
             so
             common
             as
             B●…es-wax
             in
             Europe
             ;
             however
             
             there
             is
             enough
             to
             serve
             the
             King
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             belong
             to
             the
             Palace
             ;
             for
             the
             Grandees
             ,
             the
             Lords
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Mandarins
             that
             are
             in
             actual
             Employment
             ,
             for
             all
             the
             Learned
             and
             rich
             People
             .
             It
             is
             found
             in
             several
             of
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             but
             in
             greatest
             Abundance
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Hû
               quàm
            
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             excellent
             for
             whiteness
             and
             Beauty
             .
             It
             comes
             from
             certain
             Trees
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xan
               tūm
            
             are
             but
             small
             ,
             but
             in
             that
             of
             
               Hu
               quàm
            
             are
             as
             large
             as
             the
             Pagod
             Trees
             in
             the
             
               East
               Indies
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Chesnut
             Trees
             in
             Europe
             :
             however
             it
             does
             not
             sweat
             out
             of
             the
             Tree
             ,
             like
             Rosin
             out
             of
             the
             Pine
             Tree
             ,
             but
             is
             produc'd
             by
             a
             particular
             Industry
             of
             Nature
             .
             There
             is
             in
             these
             Provinces
             a
             small
             Animal
             no
             bigger
             than
             a
             Flea
             ,
             but
             so
             restless
             ,
             so
             active
             and
             vigorous
             ,
             so
             quick
             at
             biting
             and
             penetrating
             ,
             that
             it
             pierces
             with
             an
             extraordinary
             swiftness
             ,
             not
             only
             the
             Skins
             of
             Men
             and
             Beasts
             ,
             but
             the
             Branches
             and
             Bodies
             of
             Trees
             .
             The
             most
             esteem'd
             are
             those
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xan
               tūm
            
             ,
             where
             the
             Inhabitants
             pick
             the
             Eggs
             of
             these
             Animals
             out
             of
             the
             Trees
             ,
             and
             hoard
             them
             up
             .
             These
             Eggs
             in
             the
             Spring
             turn
             to
             little
             Worms
             ,
             with
             which
             they
             fill
             the
             hollownesses
             of
             large
             Canes
             ,
             and
             carry
             them
             into
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Hû
               quàm
            
             to
             sell.
             At
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Spring
             they
             lay
             these
             Worms
             at
             the
             roots
             of
             the
             Trees
             ;
             where
             they
             are
             no
             sooner
             lay'd
             ,
             but
             with
             an
             incredible
             swiftness
             they
             run
             up
             the
             Bodies
             of
             the
             Trees
             ,
             and
             take
             possession
             of
             the
             Branches
             and
             Boughs
             as
             it
             were
             by
             a
             kind
             of
             natural
             Instinct
             ;
             where
             being
             always
             in
             motion
             with
             a
             wonderful
             Activity
             ,
             they
             bite
             ,
             pierce
             ,
             and
             penetrate
             to
             the
             very
             pith
             ,
             which
             by
             a
             peculiar
             property
             that
             God
             has
             given
             them
             ,
             they
             prepare
             ,
             purifie
             and
             turn
             to
             Wax
             as
             white
             as
             Snow
             .
             Afterwards
             they
             thrust
             it
             up
             through
             the
             holes
             which
             they
             have
             made
             to
             the
             Superficies
             ,
             where
             by
             means
             of
             the
             Wind
             and
             
             the
             Cold
             ,
             it
             congeals
             and
             hangs
             like
             so
             many
             drops
             or
             Isicles
             .
             And
             then
             the
             Owners
             of
             the
             Trees
             come
             and
             gather
             it
             ,
             and
             make
             it
             into
             Cakes
             like
             our
             Cakes
             of
             Wax
             ,
             and
             then
             Sell
             it
             all
             over
             the
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             true
             that
             there
             is
             not
             in
             any
             part
             of
             this
             Empire
             any
             Woollen
             Cloth
             comparable
             to
             the
             Cloth
             which
             we
             make
             use
             of
             in
             Europe
             ;
             nevertheless
             there
             are
             several
             sorts
             of
             Serges
             ,
             and
             those
             very
             fine
             ,
             and
             very
             costly
             ,
             of
             an
             Ashie
             or
             Cinnamon
             Colour
             ,
             which
             are
             worn
             by
             Old
             People
             and
             Persons
             of
             Quality
             in
             the
             Winter
             .
             The
             Country
             People
             ,
             and
             Meaner
             sort
             ,
             make
             their
             Garments
             of
             Cotton
             Cloth
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             is
             such
             an
             extraordinary
             plenty
             ,
             and
             of
             so
             many
             several
             Colours
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             scarce
             possible
             to
             express
             it
             .
             But
             much
             more
             impossible
             to
             express
             the
             Value
             ,
             Richness
             ,
             Beauty
             ,
             Plenty
             ,
             and
             Variety
             of
             the
             Furrs
             in
             this
             Nation
             ,
             which
             are
             worn
             in
             all
             the
             Northern
             Provinces
             ,
             especially
             at
             the
             Court
             at
             Pe-kim
             .
             I
             shall
             only
             make
             this
             Observation
             ,
             for
             the
             better
             confirmation
             of
             the
             Truth
             of
             what
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             King
             appears
             publickly
             in
             his
             Royal
             Room
             of
             State
             ,
             which
             he
             does
             Four
             Times
             in
             a
             Month
             ,
             the
             Four
             Thousand
             Mandarins
             that
             come
             to
             pay
             him
             their
             Homages
             ,
             are
             all
             cover'd
             from
             Head
             to
             Foot
             with
             Sables
             of
             an
             extraordinary
             Value
             .
             The
             Women
             also
             are
             Clad
             with
             the
             same
             sort
             ;
             and
             the
             Chineses
             not
             only
             Line
             their
             Buskins
             and
             their
             Bonnets
             ,
             but
             Face
             the
             Saddles
             of
             their
             Horses
             with
             several
             sorts
             of
             Furrs
             ;
             nay
             ,
             they
             Line
             their
             Seats
             their
             Chairs
             ,
             and
             the
             inside
             of
             their
             Tents
             with
             Furrs
             .
             Among
             the
             Common
             People
             ,
             the
             more
             Wealthy
             sort
             ,
             wear
             Lambskins
             ;
             the
             Poorer
             sort
             wrap
             themselves
             in
             Sheepskins
             .
             So
             that
             in
             〈◊〉
             Winter
             time
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Person
             that
             is
             no
             〈◊〉
             up
             in
             the
             Skins
             and
             Furrs
             of
             several
             〈◊〉
             ▪
             as
             Sables
             ,
             Martins
             ,
             Foxes
             ,
             Wolves
             ,
             〈◊〉
             several
             others
             ,
             of
             
             which
             I
             do
             not
             know
             the
             Names
             in
             Portuguese
             :
             and
             some
             of
             these
             Skins
             are
             so
             high-priz'd
             ,
             that
             a
             Garment
             will
             cost
             a
             Hundred
             ,
             Three
             Hundred
             ,
             and
             Four
             Hundred
             Crowns
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             Flesh
             ,
             Fish
             ,
             Fruit
             ,
             and
             other
             Provisions
             ,
             it
             is
             enough
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             all
             which
             we
             have
             in
             Europe
             ,
             and
             many
             more
             Varieties
             that
             we
             have
             not
             ;
             the
             Cheapness
             of
             which
             sufficiently
             demonstrates
             their
             Plenty
             .
             Now
             as
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             is
             very
             Laconick
             and
             short
             ,
             so
             is
             their
             Writing
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             reason
             that
             they
             express
             all
             these
             things
             with
             Six
             Letters
             or
             Syllables
             .
             The
             Two
             first
             are
             ,
             
               ù
               co
            
             ,
             which
             signifie
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             Five
             Principal
             sorts
             of
             Grain
             ;
             Rice
             ,
             Wheat
             ,
             Oats
             ,
             Millet
             ,
             Pease
             ,
             and
             Beans
             .
             The
             other
             Two
             are
             
               Lo
               trio
            
             ,
             signifying
             that
             there
             are
             Six
             sorts
             of
             the
             Flesh
             of
             Tame
             Animals
             ;
             Horses
             ,
             Cows
             ,
             Pork
             ,
             Dogs
             ,
             Mules
             ,
             and
             Goats
             .
             The
             Two
             last
             ,
             
               Pe
               quò
            
             ,
             signifie
             that
             there
             are
             a
             Hundred
             sorts
             of
             Fruits
             ;
             as
             Pears
             ,
             Apples
             ,
             Peaches
             ,
             Grapes
             ,
             Oranges
             ,
             Walnuts
             ,
             Chestnuts
             ,
             Pomegranates
             ,
             Citrons
             ,
             and
             several
             other
             sorts
             ,
             which
             we
             have
             also
             in
             Europe
             ,
             except
             Three
             ,
             which
             we
             have
             not
             .
             The
             first
             of
             the
             Three
             is
             call'd
             
               Sū
               sù
            
             ,
             and
             at
             Macao
             Figs
             of
             China
             ,
             not
             that
             they
             resemble
             Figs
             in
             shape
             ,
             but
             because
             the
             Tast
             of
             Figs
             is
             somewhat
             like
             to
             the
             Tast
             of
             this
             Fruit
             ,
             which
             is
             so
             Delicious
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             well
             be
             call'd
             a
             Lump
             of
             Sugar
             .
             The
             largest
             and
             the
             best
             are
             about
             the
             bigness
             of
             a
             Quince
             ,
             but
             somewhat
             flatter
             ,
             or
             a
             little
             more
             seemingly
             crush'd
             .
             The
             Colour
             of
             it
             is
             a
             lively
             deep
             Yellow
             ,
             truly
             resembling
             the
             true
             Golden
             Apple
             .
             The
             second
             sort
             is
             call'd
             
               Li
               chi
            
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             
               Lum
               yen
            
             ,
             and
             at
             
               Macao
               ,
               Lichia
            
             ,
             and
             Longans
             .
             These
             two
             Fruits
             ,
             whether
             Eaten
             newly
             gather'd
             ,
             or
             dry'd
             ,
             are
             of
             a
             most
             Exquisite
             Tast.
             It
             may
             be
             objected
             perhaps
             ,
             that
             in
             lieu
             of
             these
             we
             have
             Quinces
             ,
             
             Medlers
             ,
             and
             Services
             :
             but
             beside
             that
             those
             Fruits
             are
             also
             to
             be
             met
             with
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xan
               si
            
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             comparison
             between
             the
             Tast
             of
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             especially
             the
             Two
             latter
             ;
             which
             are
             not
             to
             be
             Eaten
             neither
             ,
             but
             when
             they
             are
             Rotten
             .
          
           
             All
             manner
             of
             Game
             is
             also
             there
             so
             plentiful
             ,
             that
             during
             the
             Three
             Months
             of
             Winter
             ,
             you
             shall
             see
             in
             several
             places
             appointed
             for
             the
             sport
             of
             Hunting
             ,
             several
             Nets
             of
             one
             or
             two
             Musket
             Shot
             in
             length
             ,
             spread
             forth
             upon
             Tacks
             ,
             and
             heaps
             of
             several
             sorts
             of
             Land
             and
             Water
             Fowl
             ,
             harden'd
             and
             set
             upon
             their
             Legs
             ,
             
             and
             as
             it
             were
             Embalm'd
             from
             Corruption
             by
             the
             Vehemency
             of
             the
             Cold.
             Among
             the
             rest
             of
             their
             Game
             ,
             there
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             wild
             Bears
             of
             three
             sorts
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             
               Gin
               hium
            
             ,
             or
             Men-Bears
             ;
             
               Keu
               Hium
            
             ,
             or
             Dog-Bears
             ,
             and
             
               Chiu
               Hium
            
             ,
             or
             Pig-Bears
             ;
             because
             of
             their
             several
             Resemblances
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             Head
             and
             Paws
             .
             The
             Paws
             of
             Bears
             well
             boyl'd
             ,
             are
             highly
             esteem'd
             in
             the
             Banquets
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             and
             their
             Fat
             is
             a
             great
             Entertainment
             for
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             who
             eat
             it
             raw
             ,
             temper'd
             with
             Honey
             .
             Nevertheless
             these
             Bears
             are
             very
             rare
             ,
             and
             consequently
             very
             dear
             .
             But
             there
             are
             such
             vast
             Numbers
             of
             all
             other
             sorts
             of
             Creatures
             ,
             as
             Deer
             of
             several
             Kinds
             ,
             wild
             Boars
             ,
             Ellands
             ,
             Hares
             ,
             Conies
             ,
             wild
             Cats
             and
             Rats
             ,
             Geese
             ,
             Ducks
             ,
             all
             manner
             of
             Wood
             Fowl
             ,
             Partridges
             ,
             Quails
             of
             different
             sorts
             and
             shapes
             ,
             which
             we
             have
             not
             in
             Europe
             ,
             and
             all
             so
             cheap
             ,
             that
             I
             could
             never
             have
             believ'd
             it
             ,
             had
             I
             not
             been
             convinc'd
             by
             my
             own
             Experience
             for
             Two
             and
             twenty
             years
             together
             that
             I
             liv'd
             at
             Court.
             
          
           
             
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               Tenth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   P.
                
                 139.
                 
                 The
                 Wax
                 is
                 the
                 fairest
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 OTher
                 Relations
                 speak
                 of
                 this
                 Wax
                 produc'd
                 out
                 of
                 Trees
                 ,
                 but
                 not
                 with
                 so
                 many
                 curious
                 Circumstances
                 .
                 Father
                 Trigaut
                 says
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 flame
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 very
                 clear
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 whiter
                 and
                 not
                 so
                 unctuous
                 as
                 ordinary
                 Wax
                 .
                 Another
                 Author
                 writes
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 Transparent
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 you
                 may
                 see
                 the
                 Week
                 through
                 it
                 .
                 Father
                 Trigaut
                 says
                 moreover
                 ,
                 That
                 the
                 Chineses
                 make
                 another
                 sort
                 of
                 very
                 white
                 Wax
                 drawn
                 from
                 a
                 Tree
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 it
                 does
                 not
                 give
                 so
                 clear
                 a
                 Light
                 as
                 the
                 first
                 .
                 Another
                 Relation
                 gives
                 this
                 Description
                 of
                 the
                 Tree
                 and
                 the
                 Fruit
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 There
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 
                   To
                   Kien
                
                 ,
                 a
                 fair
                 Tree
                 ,
                 large
                 and
                 well
                 tufted
                 with
                 Boughs
                 call'd
                 
                   Ku
                   ei
                   Xu
                
                 ,
                 which
                 grows
                 by
                 the
                 River
                 side
                 .
                 In
                 December
                 it
                 produces
                 a
                 Fruit
                 of
                 a
                 dark
                 Green
                 colour
                 ,
                 as
                 big
                 as
                 a
                 Hazel
                 Nut
                 ;
                 the
                 green
                 Peel
                 of
                 which
                 dryes
                 up
                 of
                 it self
                 ,
                 and
                 sheds
                 off
                 by
                 degrees
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 appears
                 a
                 certain
                 Substance
                 as
                 white
                 as
                 Snow
                 ,
                 like
                 to
                 Suet
                 exactly
                 try'd
                 .
                 This
                 the
                 People
                 gather
                 at
                 the
                 End
                 of
                 December
                 ,
                 or
                 Beginning
                 of
                 January
                 ;
                 afterwards
                 they
                 melt
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 make
                 Candles
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 like
                 to
                 white
                 Wax
                 ,
                 and
                 yield
                 no
                 ill
                 smell
                 .
                 They
                 make
                 use
                 of
                 these
                 Candles
                 all
                 the
                 Year
                 ,
                 tho
                 they
                 last
                 much
                 longer
                 in
                 the
                 Summer
                 than
                 in
                 the
                 Winter
                 ,
                 and
                 cost
                 not
                 above
                 Fourteen
                 pence
                 the
                 Pound
                 .
                 Out
                 of
                 the
                 Dregs
                 and
                 Lees
                 of
                 this
                 Fruit
                 ,
                 they
                 press
                 out
                 an
                 Oyl
                 which
                 serves
                 for
                 Lamps
                 .
                 This
                 Fru●…
                 is
                 very
                 Extraordinary
                 ,
                 and
                 shews
                 us
                 how
                 Heaven
                 h●…
                 favour'd
                 China
                 above
                 other
                 Countrys
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 
                   B.
                   P.
                
                 143.
                 
                 Fix'd
                 upon
                 their
                 Legs
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 Embalm'd
                 from
                 Corruption
                 by
                 the
                 vehemency
                 of
                 the
                 Cold
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 This
                 by
                 no
                 means
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 look'd
                 upon
                 as
                 a
                 thing
                 incredible
                 ;
                 since
                 it
                 is
                 the
                 ordinary
                 Effect
                 of
                 Cold.
                 All
                 the
                 Spanish
                 Histories
                 report
                 ,
                 That
                 in
                 the
                 Voyage
                 that
                 
                   Diego
                   d'
                   Almagro
                
                 made
                 to
                 the
                 Country
                 of
                 Chili
                 ,
                 several
                 of
                 his
                 Men
                 crossing
                 the
                 high
                 Mountains
                 of
                 Andes
                 ,
                 growing
                 numm
                 and
                 stiff
                 with
                 cold
                 ,
                 were
                 frozen
                 to
                 Death
                 either
                 upon
                 their
                 Horses
                 backs
                 ,
                 or
                 standing
                 upon
                 their
                 legs
                 and
                 leaning
                 against
                 the
                 Rocks
                 .
                 In
                 which
                 Postures
                 they
                 were
                 found
                 a
                 long
                 time
                 after
                 without
                 any
                 Corruption
                 .
                 The
                 Relation
                 also
                 of
                 Muscovy
                 ,
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 already
                 quoted
                 once
                 before
                 ,
                 tells
                 us
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 ,
                 every
                 Winter
                 ,
                 a
                 great
                 quantity
                 of
                 Sturgeon
                 of
                 Astracan
                 sold
                 in
                 the
                 Market
                 at
                 Mosco
                 ,
                 stiffen'd
                 and
                 preserv'd
                 sweet
                 and
                 wholesom
                 by
                 the
                 vehemency
                 of
                 the
                 Cold
                 ;
                 as
                 also
                 whole
                 heaps
                 of
                 other
                 Fish
                 cover'd
                 over
                 with
                 Snow
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Nobility
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
          
           
             IF
             this
             word
             Nobility
             be
             tak'n
             in
             general
             for
             the
             Nobility
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             it self
             ,
             which
             is
             no
             more
             then
             an
             Illustrious
             Grandeur
             ,
             that
             has
             continu'd
             all
             along
             for
             several
             Ages
             ;
             since
             it
             began
             not
             above
             Two
             hundred
             years
             after
             the
             Flood
             ;
             and
             has
             flourish'd
             ever
             since
             to
             this
             present
             time
             ,
             for
             about
             Four
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             thirty
             two
             years
             ;
             certain
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             never
             any
             Empire
             was
             ever
             more
             
             Illustrious
             than
             that
             of
             China
             .
             But
             if
             we
             restrain
             the
             Signification
             of
             the
             word
             to
             the
             Nobility
             only
             of
             particular
             Families
             ,
             we
             must
             confess
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             very
             few
             noble
             Descents
             in
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             for
             the
             following
             Reason
             .
             For
             all
             the
             Great
             Lords
             ,
             which
             are
             as
             it
             were
             so
             many
             Petty
             Kings
             ,
             Dukes
             ,
             Marquisses
             ,
             Counts
             ,
             &c.
             never
             last
             any
             longer
             than
             the
             Reigning
             Family
             ;
             with
             which
             they
             perish
             all
             together
             .
             Because
             the
             Family
             which
             is
             advanc'd
             in
             the
             room
             of
             the
             t'other
             puts
             them
             all
             to
             Death
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             seen
             by
             Experience
             in
             our
             Time.
             For
             this
             reason
             it
             is
             that
             the
             most
             Noble
             House
             that
             ever
             was
             in
             this
             Empire
             ,
             is
             the
             Family
             of
             Cheu
             ,
             which
             has
             lasted
             Eight
             hundred
             seventy
             five
             ▪
             years
             ;
             and
             expir'd
             about
             Two
             thousand
             two
             hundred
             years
             ago
             .
             No
             Family
             since
             that
             ,
             having
             been
             able
             to
             attain
             to
             a
             Continuance
             of
             Three
             hundred
             years
             .
          
           
             However
             what
             we
             have
             hitherto
             said
             ,
             extends
             it self
             only
             to
             that
             Nobility
             ,
             which
             is
             acquir'd
             by
             Arms.
             For
             as
             to
             that
             which
             has
             been
             acquir'd
             by
             Employments
             of
             the
             long
             Robe
             ,
             the
             continuance
             of
             it
             is
             very
             inconsiderable
             .
             And
             therefore
             tho
             a
             Man
             should
             be
             
               Xam
               xu
            
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             first
             Dignity
             ,
             in
             the
             Supream
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             or
             
               Co
               laò
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             Prime
             Minister
             of
             State
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Highest
             degree
             of
             Honour
             and
             Riches
             ,
             to
             which
             Fortune
             can
             raise
             a
             Subject
             in
             this
             Empire
             ,
             generally
             his
             Grandchild
             shall
             be
             reduc'd
             to
             great
             Poverty
             ,
             and
             shall
             be
             constrain'd
             to
             follow
             Merchandize
             ,
             or
             to
             trade
             by
             Retail
             ,
             or
             to
             be
             an
             ordinary
             Man
             of
             Letters
             ,
             as
             his
             Great
             Grandfather
             was
             before
             him
             .
             In
             short
             there
             was
             never
             any
             Descent
             of
             the
             Gown-men
             ,
             that
             ever
             lasted
             so
             long
             as
             the
             Reigning
             Family
             .
             I
             was
             acquainted
             ,
             under
             the
             Family
             that
             reign'd
             before
             the
             Conquest
             of
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             with
             several
             P●…tty
             Kings
             ,
             Dukes
             ,
             and
             other
             great
             Lords
             ,
             who
             because
             they
             were
             of
             the
             Blood
             Royal
             ,
             or
             descended
             
             from
             Valiant
             Captains
             ,
             who
             had
             been
             assisting
             in
             the
             Conquest
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             claim'd
             a
             Nobility
             as
             ancient
             as
             the
             Royal
             Family
             ,
             and
             which
             expir'd
             as
             unfortunately
             with
             it
             :
             but
             I
             never
             saw
             or
             heard
             of
             any
             Family
             of
             the
             Gown-men
             that
             ever
             lasted
             so
             long
             .
             However
             that
             which
             is
             but
             a
             usual
             Misfortune
             which
             attends
             the
             latter
             ,
             is
             an
             Effect
             of
             the
             Cruelty
             of
             their
             Enemies
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             first
             ;
             of
             which
             there
             are
             several
             ,
             which
             had
             they
             not
             been
             destroy'd
             by
             Massacres
             ,
             might
             have
             continu'd
             their
             Lustre
             and
             Grandeur
             as
             long
             as
             the
             Empire
             it self
             .
             And
             yet
             there
             is
             still
             one
             Family
             remaining
             ,
             which
             not
             only
             has
             preserv'd
             its
             Luster
             ,
             but
             is
             honour'd
             at
             present
             by
             the
             Kings
             ,
             the
             Grandees
             and
             People
             with
             equal
             Veneration
             ,
             and
             has
             flourish'd
             for
             above
             these
             Twenty
             Ages
             :
             so
             that
             it
             may
             be
             truly
             said
             to
             be
             the
             most
             Ancient
             Family
             in
             the
             Universe
             .
             This
             is
             the
             House
             of
             that
             famous
             
               Confu
               ci
               us
            
             ,
             who
             was
             born
             under
             the
             Third
             Imperial
             Family
             call'd
             Cheu
             ,
             Five
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             one
             years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             Christ
             ;
             and
             so
             his
             Family
             may
             be
             said
             to
             have
             lasted
             Two
             thousand
             two
             hundred
             and
             nineteen
             years
             ,
             reck'ning
             to
             this
             present
             year
             1668.
             
             The
             Ancient
             Kings
             gave
             to
             his
             Descendants
             the
             Title
             of
             
               Que
               cum
            
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             same
             with
             that
             of
             Duke
             or
             Count.
             And
             this
             Family
             claims
             to
             it's
             self
             a
             kind
             of
             Sovereignty
             ,
             &
             an
             Exemption
             from
             Paying
             Tribute
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xan
               tum
            
             ,
             and
             the
             City
             of
             
               Kio
               feu
            
             ,
             where
             
               Cum
               fuci
               us
            
             was
             Born
             ,
             without
             ever
             having
             been
             molested
             ,
             or
             having
             suffer'd
             any
             Alteration
             ,
             tho
             the
             Empire
             and
             the
             Reigning
             Houses
             have
             been
             several
             times
             ranvers'd
             .
             The
             Chineses
             also
             bestow
             upon
             this
             Philosopher
             Names
             and
             Titles
             very
             Honourable
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             Chiefest
             are
             ,
             
               Cum
               su
               ,
               Cum
               fu
               su
               ,
            
             and
             
               Xim
               gin
            
             .
             The
             two
             first
             signifie
             Doctor
             or
             Master
             ,
             as
             we
             say
             Doctor
             or
             Master
             Scotus
             .
             The
             third
             signifies
             a
             
               Holy
               Man.
            
             For
             that
             when
             they
             
             say
             ,
             
               The
               Saint
            
             ,
             by
             way
             of
             Excellency
             ,
             they
             mean
             
               Cum
               fu
               ci
               us
            
             ,
             which
             among
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             signifies
             a
             Person
             of
             extraordinary
             and
             heroick
             Wisdom
             .
             For
             this
             Nation
             has
             so
             high
             a
             Veneration
             for
             that
             Philosopher
             ,
             that
             altho
             they
             do
             not
             Worship
             him
             as
             one
             of
             their
             Deities
             ,
             yet
             they
             honour
             him
             with
             more
             Ceremonies
             than
             their
             Idols
             or
             Pagods
             ;
             tho
             they
             cannot
             endure
             to
             hear
             him
             call'd
             their
             Idol
             or
             Pagod
             ;
             but
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             would
             take
             it
             for
             a
             very
             great
             affront
             .
             I
             could
             add
             several
             other
             things
             ,
             which
             that
             Nation
             affirms
             of
             this
             Philosopher
             ,
             who
             in
             reality
             was
             a
             Learned
             Person
             ,
             and
             endow'd
             with
             several
             Natural
             Vertues
             .
             It
             shall
             therefore
             suffice
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             liberally
             bestow
             upon
             him
             now
             he
             is
             dead
             ,
             that
             Affection
             ,
             that
             Veneration
             ,
             and
             those
             Titles
             of
             Honour
             ,
             which
             he
             could
             never
             obtain
             while
             he
             liv'd
             :
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             they
             call
             him
             
               Su
               vam
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             King
             without
             Command
             ,
             without
             a
             Scepter
             ,
             without
             a
             Crown
             and
             Jewels
             ;
             only
             Naked
             ,
             and
             without
             Luster
             .
             By
             which
             they
             would
             have
             us
             to
             understand
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             furnish'd
             with
             all
             the
             qualities
             and
             vertues
             requisite
             to
             have
             made
             him
             a
             King
             or
             an
             Emperor
             ;
             but
             that
             Destiny
             and
             Heaven
             were
             not
             so
             favourable
             to
             him
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               XII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             wonderfull
             Government
             of
             this
             Empire
             ;
             of
             the
             Distinctions
             between
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Council
             of
             State.
             
          
           
             IF
             China
             be
             to
             be
             valu'd
             and
             admir'd
             for
             those
             things
             which
             we
             have
             already
             related
             ,
             it
             merits
             certainly
             a
             far
             greater
             reputation
             for
             the
             excellency
             of
             its
             Government
             .
             But
             before
             we
             proceed
             any
             farther
             upon
             that
             Subject
             ,
             it
             will
             be
             necessary
             to
             unfold
             what
             the
             learned
             say
             of
             their
             Kings
             ,
             and
             the
             form
             of
             their
             Government
             .
             Among
             all
             the
             Three
             Laws
             which
             are
             observ'd
             in
             this
             Empire
             ,
             that
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Law
             of
             the
             Learned
             ,
             is
             the
             principal
             and
             most
             ancient
             .
             The
             chief
             end
             of
             it
             is
             the
             good
             Government
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             upon
             which
             they
             have
             compos'd
             so
             many
             Treatises
             and
             Commentaries
             that
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             to
             be
             admir'd
             .
             Anciently
             
               Cum
               fu
               sius
            
             wrote
             a
             Tractate
             upon
             this
             Subject
             ,
             which
             he
             entitled
             
               Chum
               Yum
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             
               The
               Golden
               Mediocrity
            
             ,
             wherein
             he
             teaches
             ,
             that
             a
             vertuous
             Prince
             ought
             to
             have
             nine
             Qualities
             ,
             or
             to
             doe
             nine
             things
             .
             First
             of
             all
             to
             accomplish
             and
             govern
             himself
             well
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             he
             may
             shew
             himself
             a
             Guide
             and
             example
             to
             all
             his
             Subjects
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             to
             honour
             and
             cherish
             men
             of
             Learning
             and
             Vertue
             ,
             and
             frequently
             to
             converse
             with
             and
             consult
             them
             upon
             the
             affairs
             of
             his
             Empire
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             to
             love
             his
             Uncles
             ,
             his
             Cousins
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Princes
             of
             the
             Blood
             ;
             to
             grant
             them
             those
             favours
             and
             rewards
             which
             they
             deserve
             ,
             and
             to
             let
             them
             see
             that
             he
             respects
             and
             values
             them
             ,
             and
             
             prefers
             them
             before
             all
             other
             persons
             within
             his
             Dominions
             .
             Fourthly
             ,
             to
             be
             respectfull
             and
             courteous
             to
             all
             his
             Nobility
             which
             are
             not
             of
             the
             Blood
             Royal
             ,
             advancing
             them
             to
             wealth
             and
             honour
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             world
             may
             see
             how
             much
             he
             values
             and
             considers
             them
             above
             the
             common
             sort
             .
             Fifthly
             ,
             to
             incorporate
             himself
             ,
             as
             I
             may
             so
             say
             ,
             with
             the
             rest
             of
             his
             Subjects
             ,
             to
             equalize
             and
             unite
             his
             heart
             to
             theirs
             ,
             and
             to
             regard
             and
             esteem
             them
             as
             his
             own
             proper
             substance
             and
             Person
             .
             Sixthly
             ,
             to
             love
             his
             people
             with
             a
             true
             affection
             ,
             to
             rejoyce
             in
             their
             welfare
             and
             their
             joy
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             afflicted
             at
             their
             calamity
             and
             sadness
             ;
             so
             that
             the
             meanest
             person
             in
             his
             Kingdom
             may
             be
             ●…ully
             perswaded
             that
             the
             King
             loves
             him
             as
             one
             of
             his
             Children
             .
             Seventhly
             ,
             to
             invite
             to
             his
             Court
             all
             sorts
             of
             Workmen
             and
             Artists
             ,
             for
             the
             quick
             dispatch
             of
             all
             publick
             and
             private
             business
             .
             Eighthly
             ,
             to
             caress
             and
             treat
             with
             all
             imaginable
             civility
             and
             liberality
             all
             Foreign
             Embassadours
             ,
             letting
             them
             see
             in
             deeds
             as
             well
             as
             words
             the
             effects
             of
             a
             Royal
             and
             Generous
             Soul
             ,
             and
             taking
             such
             order
             ,
             that
             upon
             their
             departure
             they
             may
             return
             into
             their
             Countrey
             with
             all
             security
             and
             satisfaction
             .
             Ninthly
             ,
             to
             cherish
             and
             embrace
             all
             the
             Lords
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             to
             treat
             them
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             so
             far
             from
             admitting
             the
             least
             thought
             of
             Revolt
             to
             slide
             into
             their
             hearts
             ,
             as
             rather
             to
             be
             the
             Bulwarks
             and
             Fortresses
             of
             his
             Kingdom
             .
             These
             were
             the
             Nine
             Rules
             or
             Maxims
             of
             
               Cum
               fu
               sius
            
             .
             What
             follows
             is
             the
             Exposition
             of
             a
             Commentatour
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             King
             ,
             says
             he
             ,
             puts
             in
             practice
             these
             nine
             Rules
             he
             may
             immortallize
             his
             Reign
             ,
             and
             not
             onely
             acquire
             great
             Renown
             ,
             but
             attain
             the
             end
             for
             which
             Heaven
             has
             advanc'd
             him
             to
             so
             high
             a
             
             degree
             of
             Dignity
             .
             For
             if
             a
             Prince
             govern
             himself
             well
             ,
             at
             the
             same
             time
             he
             shall
             also
             obtain
             that
             sovereign
             perfection
             and
             universal
             vertue
             of
             
               Golden
               Mediocrity
            
             .
             He
             shall
             be
             a
             chrystal
             mirrour
             wherein
             his
             Subjects
             may
             behold
             themselves
             ,
             and
             a
             living
             Rule
             and
             enliven
             ▪
             d
             Model
             for
             them
             to
             imirate
             .
             If
             he
             esteem
             and
             honour
             men
             of
             Learning
             and
             Vertue
             ,
             with
             equal
             complacency
             they
             will
             discover
             to
             him
             the
             method
             and
             maxims
             of
             good
             Government
             .
             He
             will
             every
             day
             become
             more
             and
             more
             enlighten'd
             ,
             and
             acquire
             Prudence
             ,
             Judgment
             ,
             Experience
             and
             Knowledge
             how
             to
             govern
             himself
             and
             his
             people
             ;
             and
             he
             will
             find
             himself
             from
             moment
             to
             moment
             less
             uncertain
             and
             less
             entangled
             in
             the
             conduct
             of
             affairs
             both
             of
             his
             House
             and
             Kingdom
             .
             If
             he
             love
             his
             Uncles
             ,
             Brothers
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             his
             Kindred
             ,
             they
             will
             live
             together
             with
             him
             and
             serve
             him
             with
             concord
             and
             satisfaction
             .
             If
             he
             favour
             and
             cherish
             his
             Grandees
             ,
             they
             will
             be
             faithfull
             and
             diligent
             ,
             they
             will
             serve
             him
             as
             Instruments
             to
             increase
             his
             power
             ;
             they
             will
             act
             sincerely
             and
             justly
             in
             all
             affairs
             of
             importance
             .
             In
             a
             word
             ,
             they
             will
             be
             a
             help
             and
             assistance
             to
             him
             in
             all
             things
             ;
             nor
             shall
             he
             ever
             be
             expos'd
             ,
             while
             he
             makes
             use
             of
             their
             counsel
             ,
             to
             be
             without
             a
             Guide
             ,
             and
             hazard
             his
             Dominion
             by
             the
             rash
             errours
             of
             his
             Government
             .
             If
             he
             consider
             his
             Subjects
             as
             his
             own
             members
             they
             will
             do
             their
             utmost
             to
             serve
             him
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             marks
             of
             entire
             sidelity
             ,
             in
             return
             of
             their
             Prince
             ▪
             s
             esteem
             and
             favour
             .
             If
             he
             love
             his
             people
             as
             his
             Children
             ,
             he
             will
             fill
             their
             hearts
             with
             joy
             and
             affection
             ,
             while
             they
             on
             the
             other
             side
             prostrate
             themselves
             at
             his
             feet
             ens●…am'd
             with
             love
             and
             veneration
             for
             their
             King
             ,
             their
             Parent
             and
             their
             Master
             .
             If
             he
             invite
             to
             his
             Court
             Artificers
             and
             Artists
             of
             all
             sorts
             ,
             they
             will
             make
             it
             their
             business
             
             
             
             
             
             to
             settle
             or
             improve
             Commerce
             ,
             Agriculture
             ,
             and
             all
             such
             Trades
             and
             Arts
             to
             which
             they
             have
             been
             bred
             .
             Thus
             the
             Kingdom
             will
             be
             enrich'd
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             means
             the
             people
             ,
             the
             whole
             Empire
             and
             the
             King
             himself
             will
             live
             in
             plenty
             ,
             and
             enjoy
             an
             abounding
             and
             durable
             peace
             .
             If
             he
             be
             courteous
             and
             liberal
             to
             Embassadours
             and
             other
             Foreigners
             ▪
             the
             fame
             of
             his
             Vertues
             will
             spread
             it self
             to
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             Earth
             and
             distant
             Nations
             will
             glory
             to
             be
             under
             his
             subjection
             .
             If
             he
             cherish
             in
             his
             bosome
             the
             great
             Lords
             of
             his
             Kingdom
             ,
             he
             will
             excite
             them
             to
             all
             the
             heroick
             and
             illustrious
             actions
             of
             which
             their
             Quality
             and
             Nobility
             renders
             them
             capable
             ;
             and
             all
             with
             a
             respectfull
             awe
             and
             ardent
             affection
             for
             their
             Prince
             will
             embrace
             vertue
             ,
             and
             be
             Guards
             to
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             and
             Bulwarks
             to
             the
             Empire
             .
             These
             are
             the
             Reflexions
             of
             the
             Commentator
             upon
             the
             Nine
             Rules
             of
             good
             Government
             .
             I
             translated
             them
             out
             of
             Chinese
             into
             Portugueze
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             by
             this
             Essay
             ,
             men
             might
             be
             able
             to
             judge
             of
             their
             Sentiments
             upon
             this
             Subject
             ,
             and
             the
             Reader
             more
             clearly
             understand
             the
             rest
             that
             follows
             .
          
           
             The
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             whole
             Kingdome
             are
             distinguished
             into
             nine
             Orders
             ,
             and
             every
             Order
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             Degrees
             .
             For
             example
             :
             It
             is
             said
             ,
             such
             a
             one
             is
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             second
             degree
             of
             the
             first
             ,
             second
             or
             third
             Order
             ;
             or
             else
             ,
             he
             is
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             first
             degree
             ,
             of
             the
             first
             ,
             second
             or
             third
             Order
             .
             This
             Division
             signifies
             no
             more
             ,
             than
             onely
             the
             particular
             Titles
             which
             the
             King
             gives
             them
             without
             any
             respect
             to
             their
             Employments
             .
             For
             though
             usually
             the
             Mandarins
             are
             of
             an
             Order
             Superiour
             or
             Inferiour
             according
             to
             the
             Dignity
             of
             their
             Employments
             ,
             nevertheless
             that
             is
             no
             general
             Rule
             ;
             because
             sometimes
             is
             happens
             
             that
             to
             recompence
             the
             merits
             of
             a
             person
             whose
             Office
             has
             been
             usually
             enjoy'd
             by
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             inferiour
             Order
             ,
             the
             King
             may
             give
             him
             the
             Title
             of
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             first
             or
             second
             Order
             .
             And
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             to
             punish
             a
             person
             whose
             Office
             belongs
             to
             the
             superiour
             Mandarins
             ,
             he
             debases
             him
             to
             the
             title
             of
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             inferiour
             Orders
             .
             And
             the
             knowledge
             ,
             distinction
             and
             subordination
             of
             these
             Orders
             is
             so
             perfect
             and
             exact
             ,
             the
             veneration
             and
             submission
             of
             the
             latter
             toward
             the
             former
             is
             so
             great
             ,
             and
             lastly
             the
             sovereign
             power
             of
             the
             Prince
             over
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             so
             absolute
             ,
             that
             I
             never
             met
             with
             any
             thing
             that
             could
             compare
             with
             it
             among
             all
             the
             searches
             I
             have
             made
             into
             any
             of
             our
             Governments
             whether
             Temporal
             or
             Ecclesiastical
             .
          
           
             The
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             first
             Order
             ,
             are
             Counsellors
             of
             the
             King's
             Council
             of
             State
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             greatest
             Honour
             and
             the
             highest
             Dignity
             to
             which
             a
             Learned
             man
             can
             arrive
             in
             this
             Empire
             .
             They
             have
             several
             Names
             and
             several
             Titles
             both
             ancient
             and
             modern
             annext
             to
             their
             Offices
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             most
             common
             are
             
               Nui
               Co
               ,
               Co
               Lao
               ,
               Cai
               Siam
               ,
               Siam
               Cum
               ,
               Siam
               Que
            
             ;
             yet
             all
             these
             with
             little
             difference
             signifie
             no
             more
             than
             Assistants
             ,
             Judges
             Lateral
             ,
             and
             supream
             Counsellors
             to
             the
             King.
             There
             are
             also
             several
             Halls
             in
             the
             King's
             Palace
             ,
             magnificent
             as
             well
             for
             their
             Architecture
             ,
             as
             for
             their
             Spaciousness
             and
             Furniture
             ;
             which
             are
             distinguisht
             into
             inferiour
             or
             superiour
             according
             to
             the
             business
             therein
             transacted
             .
             For
             when
             the
             King
             would
             bestow
             any
             great
             favour
             upon
             some
             one
             of
             his
             Counsellors
             ,
             he
             gives
             him
             the
             name
             of
             one
             of
             those
             Halls
             ,
             as
             
               Chum
               chie
               tien
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             
               Supream
               Royal
               Hall
               of
               the
               Middle
               ,
            
             and
             then
             he
             adds
             this
             new
             Title
             to
             his
             usual
             Name
             .
             The
             King
             also
             
             gives
             them
             other
             Titles
             by
             which
             they
             acquire
             an
             extraordinary
             same
             and
             honour
             ,
             when
             they
             merit
             those
             Titles
             by
             any
             glorious
             Action
             ;
             as
             
               Que
               chu
            
             ,
             which
             signifies
             the
             Pillar
             that
             supports
             the
             Empire
             .
          
           
             Of
             these
             Counsellors
             there
             is
             no
             determin'd
             number
             ,
             being
             sometimes
             more
             sometimes
             fewer
             ,
             as
             it
             pleases
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             who
             chooses
             them
             at
             his
             own
             pleasure
             out
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             other
             Tribunals
             .
             Nevertheless
             there
             is
             always
             one
             ,
             call'd
             
               Neu
               Siam
            
             who
             is
             their
             President
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Emperour
             's
             prime
             Minister
             and
             Favourite
             .
             The
             Tribunal
             of
             these
             Counsellors
             as
             it
             is
             the
             highest
             of
             all
             that
             belongs
             to
             the
             Empire
             ,
             so
             it
             is
             also
             plac'd
             in
             the
             King's
             Palace
             on
             the
             left
             hand
             of
             the
             supream
             Royal
             Hall
             ,
             where
             the
             King
             gives
             Audience
             and
             receives
             the
             Homages
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             when
             he
             goes
             abroad
             .
             And
             here
             we
             must
             observe
             by
             the
             way
             that
             among
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             the
             left
             hand
             is
             the
             place
             of
             Honour
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             is
             call'd
             
               Nui
               Yuen
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Tribunal
             within
             the
             King's
             Palace
             .
             It
             is
             composed
             of
             three
             Orders
             of
             Mandarins
             :
             The
             first
             ,
             are
             the
             King's
             Counsellors
             ,
             of
             whom
             we
             have
             already
             spoken
             .
             These
             are
             to
             view
             ,
             examin
             and
             judge
             of
             all
             the
             Memorials
             which
             the
             six
             chief
             Tribunals
             ,
             of
             which
             more
             in
             due
             place
             ,
             present
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             upon
             all
             important
             affairs
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             whether
             they
             relate
             to
             Peace
             or
             War
             ,
             or
             whether
             to
             Causes
             Civil
             or
             Criminal
             .
             When
             they
             have
             determin'd
             them
             ,
             they
             communicate
             their
             judgments
             to
             the
             King
             in
             a
             very
             short
             Extract
             ,
             who
             either
             ratisies
             or
             cancel●…
             them
             as
             he
             pleases
             ;
             and
             then
             overlooking
             the
             Memorials
             at
             large
             himself
             ,
             gives
             his
             own
             decision
             ,
             as
             he
             thinks
             the
             Cause
             deserves
             .
          
           
             They
             that
             compose
             the
             second
             Classis
             ,
             are
             as
             it
             were
             Assistants
             and
             Assessors
             to
             the
             King's
             Counsellors
             ,
             
             and
             are
             very
             powerfull
             and
             much
             dreaded
             and
             respected
             .
             They
             are
             usually
             of
             the
             second
             or
             third
             Order
             of
             Mandarins
             ,
             and
             are
             many
             times
             preferr'd
             to
             be
             Counsellors
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             Viceroys
             of
             Provinces
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             principal
             Offices
             of
             the
             six
             supream
             Tribunals
             Their
             usual
             Title
             is
             
               Ta
               hion
               su
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Learned
             in
             great
             knowledge
             .
             This
             Title
             is
             also
             given
             to
             the
             King's
             Counsellors
             ;
             besides
             which
             ,
             the
             King
             also
             consers
             other
             very
             honourable
             Titles
             upon
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             these
             two
             Classe's
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             deserts
             ;
             as
             
               Tai
               cu
               Tai
            
             ,
             or
             chief
             Governour
             of
             the
             Prince
             Heir
             of
             the
             Crown
             .
             
               Tai
               cu
               Tai
               su
            
             ,
             Grand
             Master
             to
             the
             same
             Prince
             ;
             
               Ho
               tien
               ta
               trion
               su
            
             ,
             Chief
             Letter'd
             of
             the
             Hall
             of
             Concord
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             .
          
           
             The
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             third
             Classis
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             are
             call'd
             
               Chum
               xu
               co
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             Classis
             or
             School
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             .
             Their
             business
             it
             is
             to
             write
             or
             cause
             to
             be
             written
             out
             the
             Affairs
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             ;
             and
             the
             King
             gives
             them
             Titles
             answerable
             to
             the
             Place
             and
             Halls
             where
             they
             exercise
             their
             Functions
             They
             are
             usually
             of
             the
             fourth
             ,
             fifth
             or
             sixth
             Order
             of
             tho
             Mandarins
             .
             But
             they
             are
             much
             more
             dreaded
             than
             those
             of
             the
             two
             preceding
             Classe's
             ,
             for
             that
             upon
             them
             solely
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             good
             or
             ill
             success
             of
             Affairs
             in
             a
             great
             measure
             depends
             ;
             for
             that
             by
             altering
             ,
             adding
             or
             leaving
             out
             a
             Letter
             they
             may
             cause
             either
             the
             gaining
             or
             losing
             of
             a
             Suit.
             Insomuch
             that
             many
             times
             through
             their
             wilfull
             mistakes
             the
             most
             innocent
             lose
             their
             Estates
             ,
             their
             Reputation
             and
             their
             Lives
             .
             So
             great
             a
             power
             has
             Corruption
             and
             Avarice
             over
             that
             Nation
             ▪
             and
             such
             an
             Energy
             of
             Expression
             and
             Nicety
             of
             Equivocal
             Interpretation
             lies
             in
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             besides
             these
             three
             Classe's
             there
             belongs
             to
             this
             Tribunal
             
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             Scriveners
             ,
             Procters
             ,
             Rev●…sers
             and
             other
             Officers
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             eleven
             Supream
             Tribunals
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             six
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             for
             Letters
             ,
             and
             the
             five
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             for
             Military
             Affairs
             .
          
           
             BEsides
             the
             Supream
             Tribunal
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             in
             the
             foregoing
             Chapter
             ,
             there
             are
             yet
             eleven
             Chief
             Tribunals
             more
             ,
             between
             which
             the
             King
             of
             China
             two
             thousand
             years
             before
             the
             coming
             of
             CHRIST
             ,
             shar'd
             all
             the
             affairs
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             which
             remain
             to
             this
             present
             day
             .
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             six
             of
             Learned
             Mandarins
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               Lo
               pu
            
             ;
             and
             five
             of
             Military
             Mandarins
             ,
             that
             are
             call'd
             
               ù
               fu
            
             ,
             and
             of
             which
             we
             shall
             speak
             hereafter
             .
             The
             first
             of
             the
             six
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Learned
             is
             call'd
             
               Li
               pu
            
             ,
             whose
             business
             it
             is
             to
             take
             care
             of
             all
             the
             Manderins
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             has
             power
             to
             confer
             or
             deprive
             them
             of
             their
             Employments
             .
             The
             second
             ,
             
               Hu
               pu
            
             ,
             has
             the
             Superintendence
             over
             all
             the
             Impositions
             and
             Revenues
             of
             the
             King
             ▪
             The
             third
             
               Li
               pu
            
             ,
             has
             the
             management
             and
             ordering
             of
             all
             the
             Rites
             and
             Ceremonies
             .
             The
             fourth
             
               Pim
               pu
            
             ,
             takes
             care
             of
             all
             the
             Arms
             ,
             Captains
             and
             Souldiers
             throughout
             the
             whole
             Empire
             .
             The
             fifth
             
               Him
               pu
            
             ,
             takes
             cognizance
             of
             all
             Crimes
             ,
             and
             the
             punishments
             of
             all
             Offenders
             in
             the
             Kingdom
             .
             The
             sixth
             
               Cum
               pu
            
             ,
             has
             the
             overseeing
             of
             all
             the
             King's
             Works
             and
             Buildings
             .
             These
             six
             Tribunals
             
             have
             a
             Jurisdiction
             over
             almost
             all
             those
             that
             belong
             to
             the
             Court
             ,
             but
             are
             absolute
             over
             all
             in
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             by
             whom
             they
             are
             dreaded
             and
             obey'd
             ,
             though
             at
             never
             so
             great
             a
             distance
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             under
             their
             Eye
             .
             But
             in
             regard
             their
             power
             is
             so
             large
             and
             of
             so
             great
             an
             Extent
             ,
             for
             fear
             lest
             any
             one
             among
             them
             should
             make
             use
             of
             his
             authority
             to
             raise
             Sedition
             ,
             and
             lay
             hold
             of
             any
             opportunity
             to
             revolt
             ;
             their
             Employments
             are
             regulated
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             not
             one
             of
             these
             Tribunals
             that
             can
             determin
             the
             business
             with
             which
             they
             are
             intrusted
             ,
             without
             the
             interposition
             and
             approbation
             of
             the
             rest
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             every
             day
             ,
             and
             have
             found
             true
             by
             wofull
             experience
             in
             the
             time
             of
             our
             Persecution
             ,
             during
             which
             ,
             we
             were
             sent
             to
             all
             these
             Tribunals
             for
             the
             determination
             of
             several
             circumstances
             .
             In
             the
             Palaces
             belonging
             to
             every
             one
             of
             these
             six
             Tribunals
             ,
             there
             is
             always
             a
             Hall
             and
             an
             Apartment
             for
             one
             Mandarin
             call'd
             
               Co
               li
            
             ,
             or
             Overseer
             ,
             who
             examins
             either
             publickly
             or
             privately
             all
             that
             is
             done
             in
             his
             Tribunal
             ;
             and
             if
             he
             finds
             any
             disorder
             ,
             or
             any
             injustice
             ,
             he
             presently
             gives
             notice
             thereof
             to
             the
             King.
             Which
             Mandarin
             is
             neither
             subject
             nor
             superiour
             to
             his
             Tribunal
             ,
             but
             only
             an
             Overseer
             or
             Controller
             as
             we
             have
             said
             before
             .
          
           
             The
             Chief
             Presidents
             of
             these
             six
             Tribunals
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             Office
             are
             of
             the
             first
             degree
             of
             the
             second
             Order
             of
             Mandarins
             .
             They
             are
             called
             
               Xam
               xu
            
             :
             for
             example
             :
             
               Li
               pu
               Xam
               xu
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             Chief
             President
             of
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             .
             
               H●…
               pu
               Xam
               xu
            
             ,
             Chief
             President
             of
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             King's
             Revenue
             .
             Every
             one
             of
             these
             Presidents
             has
             two
             Assessors
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             first
             is
             called
             
               Tso
               xi
               lam
            
             ,
             or
             President
             of
             the
             Left
             Hand
             .
             The
             other
             
               Yeu
               xi
               lam
            
             ,
             or
             President
             of
             the
             Right
             Hand
             .
             Which
             
             Assessors
             are
             of
             the
             first
             degree
             of
             the
             second
             Order
             .
             All
             these
             three
             Presidents
             have
             several
             other
             Titles
             beside
             ;
             for
             example
             ;
             the
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Ta
               tam
            
             ,
             the
             great
             or
             first
             Hall
             ;
             the
             second
             ,
             the
             Hall
             on
             the
             Left
             Hand
             ;
             the
             third
             ,
             the
             Hall
             on
             the
             Right
             Hand
             .
          
           
             These
             Six
             Tribunals
             are
             planted
             according
             to
             their
             rank
             close
             by
             the
             King's
             Palace
             ,
             on
             the
             east
             side
             ,
             in
             large
             magnificent
             square
             Structures
             ,
             the
             sides
             of
             which
             are
             every
             way
             a
             musquet
             shot
             and
             a
             half
             in
             length
             .
             These
             Structures
             have
             every
             one
             three
             divisions
             of
             Doors
             ,
             Courts
             and
             Appartments
             .
             The
             first
             President
             possesses
             that
             in
             the
             middle
             ;
             which
             begins
             at
             the
             Street
             ,
             with
             a
             Portal
             that
             has
             three
             doors
             ,
             and
             runs
             along
             through
             other
             doors
             ,
             portals
             and
             courts
             ,
             beautified
             with
             portico's
             ,
             and
             galleries
             supported
             by
             fair
             pillars
             ,
             till
             you
             come
             to
             a
             spacious
             hall
             ,
             where
             the
             first
             President
             sits
             with
             his
             Assessors
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             Mandarins
             ,
             who
             have
             their
             particular
             titles
             ,
             but
             are
             generally
             called
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             great
             Hall.
             Beyond
             this
             Hall
             there
             is
             another
             Court
             ,
             and
             beyond
             that
             another
             lesser
             Hall
             ,
             where
             the
             first
             President
             withdraws
             with
             his
             Assessors
             ,
             when
             he
             is
             to
             examine
             any
             private
             business
             ,
             or
             any
             affairs
             of
             extraordinary
             moment
             .
             On
             both
             sides
             ,
             and
             beyond
             this
             Hall
             ,
             there
             are
             several
             Chambers
             and
             other
             Halls
             .
             The
             Chambers
             are
             for
             the
             use
             of
             the
             President
             ,
             his
             Assessors
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             to
             take
             their
             repose
             ,
             and
             to
             eat
             their
             Meat
             ,
             which
             the
             King
             gives
             them
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             having
             no
             occasion
             to
             go
             to
             their
             own
             Houses
             ,
             they
             may
             spend
             the
             more
             time
             in
             the
             dispatch
             of
             Business
             .
             The
             Halls
             are
             for
             the
             Pronotaries
             and
             Clerks
             ,
             and
             other
             inferiour
             Officers
             .
             The
             two
             other
             Divisions
             of
             Rooms
             and
             Courts
             one
             within
             another
             ,
             
             belong
             to
             the
             inferiour
             Tribunals
             ,
             which
             are
             subordinate
             to
             the
             Supream
             Tribunal
             ,
             for
             which
             the
             Palace
             was
             design'd
             .
             These
             petty
             Tribunals
             are
             more
             or
             less
             numerous
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             business
             that
             comes
             under
             their
             cognisance
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             shew
             in
             due
             time
             .
          
           
             The
             manner
             of
             proceeding
             in
             these
             six
             Tribunals
             is
             this
             .
             When
             a
             man
             has
             any
             business
             ,
             he
             sets
             it
             down
             in
             a
             paper
             of
             such
             a
             form
             and
             largeness
             as
             the
             custome
             allows
             .
             Then
             he
             goes
             to
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             Tribunal
             ,
             and
             beats
             upon
             a
             Drum
             which
             he
             finds
             at
             the
             second
             Gate
             ,
             and
             then
             falling
             upon
             his
             knees
             ,
             he
             raises
             his
             Petition
             with
             both
             his
             hands
             as
             high
             as
             his
             head
             ,
             at
             what
             time
             the
             Officer
             appointed
             for
             that
             employment
             ,
             takes
             his
             Paper
             from
             him
             .
             He
             ,
             carries
             it
             to
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             great
             Hall
             ,
             who
             gives
             it
             to
             the
             first
             President
             ,
             or
             in
             his
             absence
             ,
             to
             his
             Assessors
             ,
             who
             having
             read
             it
             ,
             either
             admit
             or
             reject
             it
             .
             If
             they
             do
             not
             ad
             mit
             it
             ,
             they
             send
             the
             Petitioner
             his
             Paper
             again
             ▪
             and
             many
             times
             order
             him
             to
             be
             soundly
             whipt
             ▪
             for
             troubling
             the
             Court
             with
             a
             causeless
             Suit
             ,
             or
             for
             any
             other
             sufficient
             reasons
             of
             their
             dislike
             ▪
             If
             the
             Paper
             be
             admitted
             ,
             the
             first
             President
             sends
             it
             to
             the
             inferiour
             Tribunal
             ,
             to
             whom
             this
             sort
             of
             Business
             belongs
             ,
             to
             examine
             the
             cause
             ,
             and
             give
             their
             opinions
             .
             After
             this
             Tribunal
             has
             examined
             the
             matter
             ,
             and
             given
             their
             judgment
             ,
             they
             send
             it
             back
             to
             the
             Chief
             President
             ,
             who
             then
             gives
             Sentence
             ,
             either
             adding
             ,
             moderating
             ,
             or
             confirming
             without
             any
             alteration
             the
             sentence
             of
             the
             lower
             Court.
             If
             the
             business
             be
             of
             great
             concernment
             ,
             he
             orders
             the
             same
             Tribunal
             to
             draw
             up
             the
             case
             in
             writing
             ,
             which
             having
             read
             together
             with
             his
             Assessors
             ,
             he
             sends
             it
             to
             the
             Mandarin
             Controler
             ,
             and
             he
             to
             the
             Supream
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Counsellors
             
             of
             State
             ,
             that
             are
             lodg'd
             in
             the
             King's
             Palace
             ▪
             This
             Tribunal
             examines
             the
             cause
             ,
             and
             informs
             his
             Majesty
             ,
             who
             most
             commonly
             orders
             the
             Tribunal
             to
             re-examine
             it
             .
             Then
             the
             Counsellors
             of
             State
             send
             back
             the
             Case
             to
             the
             Controller
             ,
             who
             after
             he
             has
             seen
             the
             King's
             Order
             ,
             sends
             it
             to
             the
             chief
             President
             ,
             who
             causes
             it
             once
             more
             to
             be
             examined
             ,
             and
             then
             sends
             it
             back
             to
             the
             Controller
             ,
             the
             Controller
             to
             the
             Counsellors
             of
             State
             ,
             and
             they
             to
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             who
             then
             gives
             his
             definitive
             Sentence
             .
             That
             Sentence
             returns
             the
             same
             way
             to
             the
             first
             President
             ,
             who
             gives
             notice
             of
             it
             to
             both
             parties
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             Suit
             is
             ended
             .
             If
             it
             be
             a
             business
             which
             the
             Provincial
             Tribunals
             send
             to
             the
             Court
             ,
             the
             Case
             is
             seal'd
             up
             and
             directed
             to
             the
             King's
             Controller
             ;
             the
             Controller
             opens
             and
             reads
             it
             ,
             and
             then
             sends
             it
             to
             the
             Chief
             President
             ,
             who
             proceeds
             as
             before
             is
             recited
             .
          
           
             Would
             but
             the
             Mandarins
             in
             their
             judicial
             proceedings
             act
             conformable
             to
             the
             Laws
             ,
             and
             the
             intention
             of
             their
             Prince
             ,
             China
             would
             be
             the
             most
             happy
             and
             best
             govern'd
             Countrey
             in
             the
             world
             .
             But
             as
             exact
             as
             they
             are
             in
             the
             outward
             observance
             of
             their
             Formalities
             ,
             as
             hypocritical
             ,
             as
             wicked
             ,
             and
             cruel
             are
             they
             in
             their
             hearts
             .
             Their
             tricks
             and
             cheats
             are
             so
             numerous
             ,
             that
             a
             large
             volume
             would
             not
             suffice
             to
             contain
             them
             .
             I
             shall
             therefore
             say
             no
             more
             than
             onely
             this
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             a
             rare
             thing
             to
             meet
             with
             a
             Mandarin
             that
             is
             free
             from
             avarice
             and
             corruption
             .
             They
             never
             consider
             the
             justice
             or
             injustice
             of
             a
             cause
             ,
             but
             those
             that
             give
             most
             money
             ,
             or
             send
             most
             presents
             .
             So
             that
             whether
             Life
             ,
             Estate
             ,
             or
             Honourly
             at
             stake
             ,
             those
             insatiable
             and
             sanguinary
             Judges
             have
             no
             regard
             to
             either
             ,
             but
             onely
             like
             so
             many
             ravenous
             Wolves
             to
             gorge
             their
             Sacrilegious
             Avarice
             .
             
             And
             what
             we
             have
             hitherto
             said
             ,
             is
             common
             to
             all
             the
             six
             Tribunals
             .
             But
             now
             to
             speak
             of
             every
             one
             in
             particular
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             of
             these
             six
             Tribunals
             is
             call'd
             
               Li
               Pu
            
             ,
             whose
             business
             it
             is
             ,
             to
             furnish
             the
             Empire
             with
             superiour
             and
             inferiour
             Mandarins
             ,
             to
             examine
             their
             merits
             and
             miscarriages
             ,
             and
             to
             inform
             the
             King
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             he
             may
             either
             prefer
             or
             disgrace
             them
             ;
             reward
             or
             punish
             them
             .
             In
             the
             Palace
             belonging
             to
             this
             Tribunal
             are
             four
             other
             inferiour
             Tribunals
             .
             The
             first
             of
             which
             is
             call'd
             
               Ven
               Sinen
               Su
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Tribunal
             which
             makes
             choice
             of
             such
             persons
             as
             are
             quallified
             with
             knowledge
             and
             other
             endowments
             requisite
             to
             fit
             them
             for
             the
             Honour
             of
             being
             Mandarins
             .
             The
             second
             
               Cao
               cum
               su
            
             ,
             which
             examines
             the
             good
             or
             bad
             behaviour
             and
             conduct
             of
             the
             said
             Mandarins
             .
             The
             third
             
               Nien
               fum
               su
            
             ,
             whose
             business
             it
             is
             to
             seal
             Judicial
             Acts
             ,
             to
             give
             the
             Seals
             to
             every
             Mandarin
             ;
             and
             to
             examine
             whether
             the
             Seals
             which
             are
             brought
             to
             Court
             or
             sent
             away
             are
             true
             or
             counterfeit
             .
             The
             fourth
             
               Ki
               hium
               su
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Tribunal
             ,
             whose
             business
             it
             is
             to
             examine
             the
             merits
             of
             the
             great
             Lords
             ,
             as
             the
             Petty
             Kings
             of
             the
             Bloud
             Royal
             ,
             the
             Dukes
             ,
             Marquesses
             and
             the
             like
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             
               Hiun
               chin
            
             ,
             or
             ancient
             Vassals
             ,
             who
             have
             performed
             great
             services
             in
             the
             Wars
             ,
             when
             the
             Reigning
             Family
             conquer'd
             the
             Empire
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             superior
             Tribunal
             is
             call'd
             
               Hu
               pu
               ,
               ▪
            
             which
             signifies
             the
             King's
             Lord
             High
             Treasurer
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             oversees
             the
             Treasures
             ,
             the
             Receipts
             and
             Expences
             ,
             the
             Revenues
             and
             Tributes
             of
             the
             King
             :
             distributes
             the
             Pensions
             ,
             and
             the
             quantity
             of
             Rice
             ,
             the
             pieces
             of
             Silk
             and
             the
             Money
             which
             the
             King
             gives
             to
             all
             the
             Petty
             Princes
             ,
             and
             other
             Grandees
             ,
             and
             to
             all
             the
             Mandarins
             
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             keeps
             the
             Roll
             or
             Catalogue
             ,
             which
             is
             made
             every
             Year
             with
             great
             exactness
             ,
             of
             all
             the
             Families
             ,
             of
             all
             the
             Men
             ,
             the
             Measures
             of
             Land
             ,
             and
             Duties
             which
             they
             are
             obliged
             to
             pay
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             publick
             Magazines
             .
             Here
             for
             the
             better
             understanding
             of
             that
             which
             follows
             ;
             we
             are
             to
             understand
             ,
             that
             although
             there
             are
             fifteen
             Provinces
             in
             China
             ;
             yet
             in
             the
             publick
             Registers
             ,
             and
             according
             to
             the
             usual
             manner
             of
             speaking
             ,
             they
             say
             fourteen
             Provinces
             and
             a
             Court.
             For
             ,
             say
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             the
             Province
             where
             the
             Court
             resides
             ,
             is
             not
             in
             subjection
             ,
             but
             commands
             ;
             and
             therefore
             they
             never
             reckon
             it
             in
             the
             number
             of
             the
             other
             Provinces
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             six
             Superior
             Tribunals
             ,
             there
             is
             not
             any
             Inferiour
             Tribunal
             appointed
             for
             the
             Affairs
             of
             Pekim
             .
             But
             the
             chief
             President
             sends
             them
             to
             one
             or
             two
             of
             the
             inferior
             Tribunals
             appointed
             for
             other
             Provinces
             as
             he
             thinks
             ●…it
             .
             This
             being
             thus
             promis'd
             ,
             the
             Superiour
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Exchequer
             has
             on
             both
             sides
             of
             the
             Palace
             belonging
             to
             it
             ,
             fourteen
             inferiour
             Tribunals
             which
             bear
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Province
             to
             which
             it
             belongs
             .
             As
             for
             example
             :
             The
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Ho
               nan
            
             ,
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Can
               ton
            
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             the
             rest
             .
             During
             the
             Reign
             of
             the
             preceding
             Family
             they
             reckon'd
             but
             thirteen
             Provinces
             and
             two
             Courts
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             City
             of
             
               Nan
               k●…
            
             was
             a
             Royal
             Court
             as
             well
             as
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             ;
             and
             had
             also
             six
             superiour
             Tribunals
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             subordinate
             to
             them
             as
             now
             at
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             .
             But
             the
             Tartars
             depriv'd
             it
             of
             the
             Title
             of
             Court
             ,
             put
             down
             all
             the
             Tribunals
             ,
             and
             alter'd
             the
             name
             of
             the
             City
             ,
             calling
             it
             
               Kiam
               nim
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Province
             
               Kiam
               n●…n
            
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             Names
             that
             they
             had
             in
             former
             times
             .
          
           
           
             The
             third
             superiour
             Tribunal
             is
             call'd
             
               Li
               pu
            
             ,
             which
             has
             the
             oversight
             and
             ordering
             of
             Rites
             and
             Ceremonies
             ,
             Arts
             and
             Sciences
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             takes
             care
             of
             the
             Royall
             Musick
             ,
             to
             examine
             the
             Students
             ,
             and
             to
             give
             them
             power
             to
             be
             admitted
             to
             the
             Examination
             of
             the
             Learned
             :
             give
             their
             advice
             in
             reference
             to
             the
             Titles
             and
             Honours
             which
             the
             King
             vouchsases
             to
             bestow
             upon
             the
             deserving
             ;
             what
             Temples
             and
             Sacrifices
             the
             King
             ought
             to
             erect
             and
             make
             to
             the
             Heaven
             and
             the
             Earth
             ,
             to
             the
             Sun
             ,
             the
             Moon
             and
             his
             own
             Ancestours
             .
             They
             order
             the
             Banquets
             when
             the
             King
             feasts
             his
             Subjects
             or
             Foreigners
             :
             They
             receive
             ,
             entertain
             and
             discharge
             the
             King's
             Guests
             ,
             and
             all
             Ambassadours
             :
             They
             take
             care
             of
             the
             Liberal
             and
             Mechanick
             Arts
             :
             And
             lastly
             ,
             of
             the
             three
             Laws
             or
             Religions
             which
             are
             observed
             throughout
             the
             Empire
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             first
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Learned
             ;
             the
             second
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             
               Tao
               su
            
             ,
             or
             the
             
               Married
               Bonzes
            
             ;
             and
             the
             third
             ,
             of
             the
             
               Batchelour
               Bonzes
            
             .
             'T
             is
             in
             the
             power
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             to
             apprehend
             ,
             whip
             and
             punish
             them
             all
             ;
             and
             in
             this
             very
             Tribunal
             it
             was
             that
             we
             were
             all
             of
             us
             imprison'd
             for
             two
             months
             during
             the
             Persecution
             ,
             and
             bound
             every
             one
             with
             nine
             chains
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             Fathers
             
               Iohn
               Adam
               ,
               Lewis
               Buglio
               ,
               Ferdinand
               Verbiest
               ,
            
             and
             
               Gabriel
               Magaillans
            
             ,
             and
             afterward
             deliver'd
             over
             to
             the
             Secular
             power
             .
             On
             each
             side
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             stand
             four
             other
             inferiour
             Tribunals
             ,
             among
             which
             the
             care
             of
             those
             things
             already
             mention'd
             is
             divided
             .
             The
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Ychi
               su
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Important
             Affairs
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             Titles
             of
             Petty
             Princes
             ,
             Dukes
             ,
             Great
             Mandarins
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             second
             
               Su
               ci
               su
            
             ,
             which
             takes
             care
             of
             the
             King's
             Sacrifices
             ,
             the
             Temples
             ,
             the
             Mathematicks
             ,
             the
             three
             Laws
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             
             third
             
               Chu
               ke
               su
            
             ,
             which
             takes
             care
             to
             entertain
             and
             dispatch
             the
             King's
             Guests
             ,
             whether
             Natives
             or
             Foreigners
             .
             The
             fourth
             
               Cim
               xen
               xu
            
             ,
             which
             has
             the
             ordering
             of
             the
             Banquets
             which
             are
             prepared
             for
             the
             King
             ,
             or
             for
             those
             upon
             whom
             the
             King
             is
             pleas'd
             to
             bestow
             that
             favour
             .
             When
             the
             Chineses
             were
             Masters
             of
             their
             own
             Countrey
             ,
             none
             but
             Doctours
             ,
             and
             those
             two
             onely
             ,
             such
             as
             were
             of
             most
             repute
             for
             their
             knowledge
             and
             merit
             were
             admitted
             into
             this
             Tribunal
             .
             So
             that
             they
             were
             the
             most
             esteem'd
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             stood
             the
             fairest
             for
             preferment
             :
             for
             out
             of
             their
             number
             it
             was
             that
             the
             King
             made
             choice
             of
             the
             Colao
             and
             his
             Counsellors
             of
             State.
             But
             now
             Tartars
             are
             put
             in
             ,
             who
             dispose
             of
             all
             things
             at
             their
             own
             pleasure
             ,
             while
             the
             Mandarins
             signifie
             no
             more
             among
             them
             than
             onely
             dumb
             Statues
             :
             and
             so
             it
             is
             in
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Tribunals
             .
             So
             truly
             may
             we
             believe
             it
             to
             have
             been
             the
             will
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             chastise
             and
             bring
             down
             the
             incredible
             pride
             of
             this
             Nation
             ,
             by
             subduing
             and
             subjecting
             them
             to
             a
             small
             handfull
             of
             poor
             ,
             ignorant
             ,
             rustick
             Barbarians
             ;
             as
             if
             God
             for
             the
             punishment
             of
             Europe
             ,
             should
             deliver
             it
             over
             into
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Cafers
             of
             Angola
             or
             Mozambique
             .
          
           
             But
             though
             the
             name
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             be
             altogether
             like
             that
             of
             the
             former
             ,
             nevertheless
             there
             is
             a
             great
             difference
             in
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             :
             for
             the
             Characters
             of
             the
             first
             Sillable
             Li
             ,
             are
             nothing
             alike
             ,
             and
             the
             pronunciation
             also
             is
             very
             different
             ;
             the
             first
             is
             pronounced
             by
             shrilling
             and
             raising
             the
             voice
             which
             we
             therefore
             mark
             with
             an
             accute
             accent
             ,
             Li.
             On
             the
             contrary
             ,
             the
             second
             is
             pronounced
             by
             falling
             the
             voice
             ,
             and
             therefore
             marked
             with
             a
             grave
             accent
             Lì
             .
             Thus
             according
             to
             the
             first
             signification
             Li
             signifies
             Mandarins
             ,
             and
             Pu
             ,
             Tribunal
             ;
             and
             both
             together
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             second
             pronunciation
             .
             Lì
             signifies
             Rites
             or
             Ceremonies
             ,
             and
             joyn'd
             with
             Pu
             ,
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             .
             This
             Equivocal
             Signification
             is
             no
             where
             to
             be
             met
             with
             among
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             who
             call
             the
             first
             Tribunal
             
               Hafan
               xurgan
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             .
             For
             that
             Hafan
             signifies
             a
             Tribunal
             ,
             and
             
               Xurgan
               Mandarins
            
             :
             and
             the
             second
             
               Toro
               Xurgan
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             superior
             Tribunal
             is
             call'd
             
               Pim
               pu
            
             ,
             which
             has
             the
             ordering
             of
             War
             and
             Military
             affairs
             over
             the
             whole
             Empire
             .
             This
             chuses
             and
             advances
             all
             the
             Officers
             ;
             disposes
             of
             their
             Commands
             in
             the
             Armies
             ;
             in
             the
             Garrisons
             upon
             the
             Frontiers
             ;
             in
             the
             Inland
             Fortresses
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             parts
             of
             China
             .
             This
             orders
             the
             Levy's
             and
             Exercises
             of
             the
             Souldiers
             ;
             Replenishes
             the
             Grand
             Arsenals
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Magazins
             with
             Arms
             offensive
             and
             defensive
             ,
             with
             Ammunition
             and
             Provisions
             ,
             and
             all
             things
             necessary
             for
             the
             defence
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             And
             to
             the
             Palace
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             belong
             four
             more
             that
             are
             inferiour
             .
             The
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Vu
               siven
               su
            
             ,
             and
             takes
             care
             to
             make
             choice
             ,
             and
             to
             confer
             upon
             the
             Military
             Mandarins
             their
             Commands
             ,
             and
             to
             cause
             them
             to
             exercise
             their
             Souldiers
             .
             The
             second
             is
             call'd
             
               Che
               fam
               su
            
             ,
             and
             takes
             care
             to
             distribute
             the
             Souldiers
             and
             Military
             Officers
             into
             all
             the
             Places
             and
             Posts
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             for
             the
             pursuit
             of
             Robbers
             ,
             and
             to
             prevent
             the
             disturbance
             of
             the
             publick
             Peace
             .
             The
             third
             is
             call'd
             
               Che
               Kia
               su
            
             ,
             and
             takes
             care
             of
             the
             King's
             Horses
             ,
             as
             well
             those
             that
             are
             upon
             the
             Frontiers
             ,
             and
             in
             Places
             of
             importance
             ,
             as
             those
             that
             are
             appointed
             for
             Postage
             ,
             and
             the
             service
             of
             the
             Royal
             Inns.
             
          
           
             They
             have
             also
             the
             ordering
             of
             the
             Waggons
             and
             Boats
             ,
             which
             serve
             for
             the
             Transportations
             of
             
             Provisions
             and
             Souldiers
             .
             The
             fourth
             is
             call'd
             
               Vu
               cu
               su
            
             ,
             and
             takes
             care
             for
             the
             making
             of
             all
             sorts
             of
             Arms
             ,
             offensive
             and
             defensive
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             be
             kept
             in
             good
             order
             ,
             and
             fit
             for
             service
             in
             all
             the
             Magazins
             and
             Arsenals
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
          
           
             The
             fifth
             superiour
             Tribunal
             is
             called
             
               Him
               pu
            
             ,
             like
             the
             Tournelle
             ,
             or
             Parliamental
             Criminal
             Court
             in
             France
             ,
             and
             extends
             its
             power
             over
             the
             whole
             Empire
             They
             examine
             ,
             try
             ,
             and
             punish
             all
             Criminals
             according
             to
             the
             Laws
             of
             the
             Empire
             :
             which
             are
             almost
             all
             of
             them
             very
             just
             and
             conformable
             to
             reason
             So
             that
             if
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             ,
             and
             consequently
             of
             all
             the
             rest
             did
             but
             rightly
             observe
             them
             ,
             there
             would
             not
             be
             those
             acts
             of
             injustice
             and
             tyranny
             which
             are
             committed
             every
             day
             .
             For
             now
             there
             is
             hardly
             a
             Cause
             that
             is
             try'd
             according
             to
             reason
             and
             justice
             .
             He
             that
             gives
             mony
             is
             always
             in
             the
             right
             ,
             till
             another
             gives
             more
             ,
             and
             then
             he
             has
             more
             Right
             on
             his
             side
             .
             Gold
             ,
             Silver
             ,
             pieces
             of
             Silk
             and
             other
             Presents
             govern
             there
             instead
             of
             Laws
             :
             Reason
             and
             Justice
             are
             there
             put
             to
             sale
             as
             in
             an
             open
             Market
             ,
             by
             Portsale
             or
             outcry
             who
             gives
             most
             .
             This
             Nation
             suffering
             themselves
             to
             be
             so
             blinded
             by
             their
             Avarice
             ,
             that
             they
             cannot
             be
             diverted
             from
             it
             by
             all
             the
             rigorous
             punishments
             ,
             which
             the
             King
             sometimes
             orders
             to
             be
             inflicted
             upon
             those
             that
             are
             convicted
             of
             their
             Corruption
             and
             Extortion
             .
             All
             the
             Tribunals
             of
             this
             Court
             take
             cognizance
             of
             all
             the
             Crimes
             and
             Offences
             of
             such
             as
             are
             under
             their
             Jurisdiction
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             Employments
             .
             However
             ,
             when
             the
             Crimes
             deserve
             more
             than
             ordinary
             severity
             of
             Punishment
             ,
             as
             Confiscation
             of
             Goods
             ,
             Banishment
             ,
             or
             Death
             ,
             then
             after
             they
             have
             inform'd
             the
             King
             ,
             they
             send
             back
             the
             Indictment
             and
             the
             Person
             indicted
             to
             this
             Tribunal
             ,
             where
             after
             another
             re
             examination
             
             of
             the
             cause
             ,
             the
             definitive
             sentence
             is
             pronounc'd
             .
             To
             the
             Palace
             appointed
             for
             this
             Tribunal
             ,
             belong
             fourteen
             more
             inferiour
             Courts
             or
             Tribunals
             ,
             for
             the
             fourteen
             Provinces
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             already
             observ'd
             in
             the
             description
             of
             the
             second
             Tribunal
             .
             The
             Torments
             also
             and
             Executions
             which
             this
             Court
             inflicts
             upon
             Criminals
             are
             of
             various
             sorts
             ;
             which
             I
             omit
             for
             fear
             of
             being
             too
             tedious
             .
             I
             shall
             onely
             observe
             one
             custome
             among
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             quite
             contrary
             to
             what
             is
             usual
             in
             Europe
             ,
             where
             Noble
             men
             are
             beheaded
             ,
             and
             ordinary
             offenders
             are
             hang'd
             :
             whereas
             in
             China
             the
             greatest
             ignominy
             that
             can
             befall
             a
             man
             is
             to
             have
             his
             head
             cut
             off
             .
             And
             therefore
             when
             the
             King
             would
             shew
             an
             extraordinary
             favour
             to
             a
             great
             Lord
             or
             Mandarin
             condem'nd
             to
             dye
             ,
             he
             sends
             him
             a
             very
             soft
             peice
             of
             Silk
             to
             be
             hang'd
             in
             ,
             instead
             of
             a
             Halter
             .
             And
             the
             reason
             which
             the
             Chineses
             give
             to
             justifie
             this
             conceit
             of
             theirs
             is
             this
             ;
             because
             they
             say
             that
             of
             necessity
             such
             as
             are
             beheaded
             ,
             must
             have
             been
             disobedient
             to
             their
             Parents
             ,
             who
             gave
             them
             sound
             and
             perfect
             Bodies
             ,
             till
             they
             by
             their
             disobedience
             and
             their
             crimes
             made
             a
             separation
             and
             disfigurement
             of
             the
             members
             .
             And
             they
             are
             so
             possest
             with
             this
             Opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             Chineses
             will
             buy
             of
             the
             Hangman
             the
             Bodies
             of
             the
             Malefactors
             executed
             ,
             if
             they
             were
             their
             Parents
             ,
             for
             five
             ,
             ten
             or
             twenty
             Crowns
             ,
             nay
             sometimes
             they
             will
             not
             spare
             for
             hundreds
             and
             thousands
             of
             Crowns
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             wealth
             or
             poverty
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             sow
             the
             head
             to
             the
             body
             again
             with
             a
             world
             of
             lamentation
             and
             showers
             of
             tears
             ,
             to
             satisfie
             in
             some
             measure
             for
             their
             disobedience
             .
             They
             report
             that
             the
             original
             of
             this
             Ceremony
             proceeded
             from
             a
             Disciple
             of
             
               Cum
               fu
               cius
            
             ,
             call'd
             
               Tsem
               ●…su
            
             :
             
             This
             Philosopher
             lying
             at
             the
             point
             of
             death
             sent
             for
             his
             Children
             and
             Disciples
             ,
             and
             after
             he
             had
             shewn
             them
             his
             head
             ,
             his
             arms
             and
             his
             feet
             ,
             he
             took
             his
             last
             farewell
             of
             them
             in
             these
             words
             :
             
               Children
               ,
               said
               he
               ,
               learn
               of
               your
               Father
               and
               your
               Master
               ,
               to
               be
               as
               obedient
               as
               I
               have
               been
               to
               them
               who
               gave
               me
               my
               being
               in
               this
               world
               ,
               and
               brought
               me
               up
               with
               so
               much
               care
               ,
               since
               by
               that
               means
               I
               have
               preserv'd
               entire
               and
               perfect
               the
               body
               which
               they
               bestowed
               upon
               me
               .
            
          
           
             I
             said
             but
             now
             that
             the
             Chineses
             purchased
             the
             bodies
             of
             Parents
             at
             great
             rates
             ,
             which
             is
             true
             ;
             for
             they
             that
             are
             condemn'd
             to
             be
             beheaded
             ,
             are
             also
             sentenc'd
             to
             be
             depriv'd
             of
             common
             burial
             ;
             which
             is
             a
             most
             terrible
             infamy
             among
             them
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             the
             hangman
             is
             oblig'd
             after
             he
             has
             stript
             the
             body
             ,
             to
             throw
             it
             into
             the
             next
             Ditch
             :
             and
             in
             selling
             the
             body
             he
             exposes
             himself
             to
             the
             hazard
             of
             being
             severely
             punish'd
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             to
             give
             the
             Mandarin
             or
             the
             informer
             that
             discovers
             the
             sale
             a
             good
             part
             of
             the
             money
             which
             he
             receiv'd
             ;
             and
             therefore
             he
             must
             sell
             dear
             that
             he
             may
             give
             the
             more
             .
             Among
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Laws
             there
             is
             one
             observ'd
             by
             this
             Tribunal
             which
             was
             enacted
             by
             one
             of
             the
             Ancient
             Kings
             ,
             of
             which
             I
             cannot
             omit
             the
             rehearsal
             ;
             that
             when
             any
             criminal
             either
             for
             his
             good
             qualities
             ,
             or
             for
             any
             other
             reason
             deserves
             to
             be
             pitied
             ,
             whether
             he
             be
             condemn'd
             in
             the
             Spring
             ,
             the
             Winter
             or
             the
             Summer
             ,
             he
             shall
             be
             repriev'd
             till
             the
             end
             of
             the
             next
             Autumn
             following
             .
             For
             that
             it
             is
             an
             ancient
             custome
             among
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             upon
             the
             Birth
             or
             Marriage
             of
             a
             Prince
             ,
             or
             upon
             any
             other
             cause
             of
             publick
             rejoycing
             ,
             or
             after
             an
             Earthquake
             ,
             or
             upon
             any
             extraordinary
             alteration
             of
             the
             Seasons
             or
             Elements
             to
             release
             all
             sorts
             of
             Prisoners
             ,
             except
             some
             few
             that
             are
             excepted
             ,
             
             and
             by
             that
             means
             those
             that
             are
             reprieved
             are
             set
             at
             liberty
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             live
             in
             fair
             hopes
             for
             some
             months
             .
          
           
             The
             sixth
             and
             last
             superiour
             Tribunal
             is
             call'd
             
               Cum
               Pu
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             publick
             Works
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             takes
             care
             to
             build
             and
             repair
             the
             King's
             Palaces
             ,
             their
             Sepulchres
             and
             Temples
             ,
             wherein
             they
             honour
             their
             Predecessors
             ,
             or
             where
             they
             adore
             their
             Deities
             ,
             the
             Sun
             ,
             Moon
             ,
             Heaven
             and
             Earth
             ,
             &c.
             as
             also
             the
             Palaces
             of
             all
             the
             Tribunals
             throughout
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             the
             great
             Lords
             .
             They
             are
             also
             the
             Surveyors
             and
             Overseers
             of
             all
             the
             Towers
             ,
             Bridges
             ,
             Damms
             ,
             Rivers
             ,
             Lakes
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             things
             requisite
             to
             render
             Rivers
             navigable
             ,
             as
             High-ways
             ,
             Wagons
             ,
             Barks
             ,
             Boats
             and
             the
             like
             .
             To
             this
             Palace
             belong
             four
             more
             inferiour
             Courts
             .
             The
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Vin
               Xen
               Su
            
             ,
             which
             examines
             and
             draws
             the
             Designs
             of
             all
             the
             works
             that
             are
             to
             be
             done
             .
             The
             Second
             
               Yu
               hem
               su
            
             ,
             which
             has
             the
             ordering
             of
             all
             the
             Work-houses
             and
             Shops
             in
             all
             the
             Cities
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             for
             the
             making
             of
             warlike
             Arms
             and
             Weapons
             .
             The
             third
             
               Tum
               Xui
               su
            
             ,
             takes
             care
             to
             make
             the
             Rivers
             and
             Lakes
             Navigable
             ,
             to
             level
             the
             High
             Ways
             ,
             to
             build
             and
             repair
             Bridges
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             making
             of
             Wagons
             and
             Boats
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             necessary
             for
             the
             convenience
             of
             commerce
             .
             The
             fourth
             
               Ce
               Tien
               su
            
             ,
             are
             the
             Overseers
             of
             the
             King's
             Houses
             and
             Lands
             which
             he
             lets
             out
             to
             hire
             ,
             and
             of
             which
             he
             has
             both
             the
             Rent
             and
             the
             Fruits
             of
             the
             Harvest
             .
          
           
             By
             what
             has
             been
             said
             ,
             it
             appears
             that
             the
             six
             superiour
             Tribunals
             have
             under
             them
             four
             and
             forty
             inferiour
             Courts
             ,
             which
             have
             their
             peculiar
             Palaces
             within
             the
             circuit
             of
             the
             Palace
             of
             that
             Tribunal
             to
             which
             they
             belong
             ;
             with
             Halls
             ,
             Chambers
             and
             other
             conveniences
             .
             Every
             one
             of
             these
             
             forty
             four
             Courts
             has
             also
             a
             President
             ,
             and
             twelve
             Counsellors
             ;
             four
             of
             which
             are
             of
             the
             first
             degree
             of
             the
             fifth
             Order
             of
             Mandarins
             ;
             four
             of
             the
             second
             degree
             of
             the
             fifth
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             four
             of
             the
             sixth
             Order
             .
             In
             the
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Exchequer
             ,
             and
             the
             Criminal
             Tribunal
             ,
             the
             number
             of
             Judges
             is
             double
             ,
             where
             all
             the
             inferiour
             Tribunals
             have
             a
             President
             and
             twenty
             four
             Counsellers
             .
          
           
             But
             besides
             these
             graduated
             Mandarins
             there
             are
             some
             employ'd
             who
             are
             under
             no
             degree
             ,
             and
             yet
             are
             Mandarins
             for
             all
             that
             :
             however
             after
             some
             years
             service
             ,
             the
             King
             advances
             them
             to
             the
             Ninth
             and
             eighth
             Order
             of
             Mandarins
             .
             Moreover
             all
             these
             Tribunals
             have
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Prothonotarys
             ,
             Registers
             ,
             Clerks
             ,
             Controllers
             ,
             Merchants
             ,
             Ushers
             ,
             Porters
             ,
             Messengers
             ,
             Attendants
             and
             Servants
             ,
             Jailors
             ,
             Provosts
             ,
             Serjeants
             ,
             Bayliffs
             ,
             Beadles
             to
             whip
             and
             punish
             Offenders
             :
             Sweepers
             ,
             Cooks
             to
             dress
             their
             Viands
             ,
             people
             to
             lay
             the
             Cloath
             ,
             and
             wait
             at
             Table
             ,
             and
             all
             at
             the
             King's
             charges
             .
             Observe
             by
             the
             way
             however
             ,
             that
             what
             we
             have
             said
             as
             to
             the
             number
             of
             Mandarins
             ,
             relates
             onely
             to
             the
             reign
             of
             the
             preceding
             Family
             ,
             for
             at
             present
             their
             number
             is
             double
             in
             all
             the
             Courts
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             the
             lower
             Court
             which
             consisted
             of
             no
             more
             than
             twelve
             Mandarins
             ,
             has
             now
             twenty
             four
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             twelve
             Tartars
             ,
             and
             twelve
             Chineses
             .
          
           
             These
             are
             the
             six
             Tribunals
             that
             govern
             all
             China
             ,
             and
             which
             are
             so
             famous
             over
             all
             the
             Kingdom
             However
             ,
             that
             neither
             the
             one
             nor
             the
             other
             should
             grow
             too
             powerfull
             ,
             the
             Ancient
             Kings
             that
             establish'd
             and
             confirm'd
             them
             ,
             shar'd
             their
             Employments
             ,
             and
             regulated
             their
             Functions
             with
             so
             much
             prudence
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             not
             one
             which
             is
             so
             absolute
             in
             the
             Affairs
             which
             are
             under
             
             their
             jurisdiction
             ,
             but
             they
             depend
             one
             upon
             another
             .
             For
             Example
             ,
             the
             first
             President
             of
             the
             fourth
             Tribunal
             ,
             which
             is
             that
             of
             War
             ,
             had
             it
             an
             independent
             Authority
             ,
             had
             an
             easy
             opportunity
             to
             rebell
             ,
             because
             all
             the
             Forces
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             are
             at
             their
             disposal
             But
             they
             want
             money
             ,
             and
             therefore
             of
             necessity
             they
             must
             have
             the
             King's
             leave
             and
             order
             to
             require
             it
             from
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Exchequer
             .
             The
             Pioneers
             ,
             Barques
             ,
             Boats
             ,
             Waggons
             ,
             Tents
             and
             other
             instruments
             of
             War
             ,
             belong
             to
             the
             sixth
             Tribunal
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             fourth
             must
             address
             themselves
             :
             besides
             that
             the
             Horses
             are
             under
             the
             jurisdiction
             of
             a
             petty
             separate
             Tribunal
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             shall
             speak
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             The
             Military
             Mandarins
             make
             five
             Tribunals
             ,
             which
             are
             call'd
             
               U
               Fu
            
             ,
             or
             five
             Casses
             .
             Their
             Palaces
             are
             plac'd
             Westward
             ,
             on
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             the
             Palace
             Royal
             and
             are
             thus
             distinguish'd
             by
             their
             Names
             .
             The
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Heu
               Fu
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Rereguard
             .
             The
             second
             
               Tso
               Su
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Left
             Wing
             :
             The
             third
             
               Yeu
               Fu
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Right
             Wing
             .
             The
             fourth
             
               Chum
               Fu
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Main
             Battel
             :
             and
             the
             fifth
             
               Lien
               Fu
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Vanguard
             .
             The
             five
             Tribunals
             are
             govern'd
             by
             fifteen
             great
             Lords
             ,
             as
             Marquisses
             ,
             Counts
             ,
             &c.
             three
             in
             each
             Tribunal
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             one
             is
             President
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             two
             his
             Assessors
             .
             They
             are
             all
             fifteen
             of
             the
             first
             Order
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             ;
             but
             the
             Presidents
             are
             of
             the
             first
             degree
             of
             that
             Order
             ,
             and
             the
             Assessors
             of
             the
             second
             ;
             all
             the
             Officers
             and
             Souldiers
             of
             the
             Court
             being
             under
             their
             care
             .
          
           
             These
             five
             Tribunals
             have
             one
             superiour
             Tribunal
             above
             them
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             
               Ium
               chim
               fu
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             Supream
             Tribunal
             of
             War
             ;
             the
             President
             of
             which
             is
             always
             one
             of
             the
             greatest
             Lords
             in
             
             the
             Kingdom
             .
             The
             Authority
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             extends
             it self
             over
             all
             these
             five
             Tribunals
             ,
             and
             over
             all
             the
             Officers
             and
             Souldiers
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             But
             to
             prevent
             their
             abusing
             so
             large
             a
             power
             ,
             they
             are
             curb'd
             by
             an
             Assessor
             set
             over
             them
             ,
             who
             is
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             learning
             ,
             with
             the
             Title
             of
             Supreme
             Regent
             of
             Armes
             ,
             and
             two
             Royal
             Controllers
             ,
             who
             are
             equally
             concern'd
             in
             the
             management
             of
             Affairs
             .
             Under
             the
             Reign
             of
             the
             preceding
             Family
             these
             Tribunals
             had
             a
             very
             great
             Authority
             ,
             and
             were
             much
             more
             highly
             honour'd
             and
             esteem'd
             :
             nevertheless
             they
             had
             much
             more
             reputation
             than
             real
             power
             ;
             in
             regard
             the
             Execution
             of
             Business
             belong'd
             to
             the
             superiour
             Tribunal
             of
             Arms
             call'd
             
               Pim
               pu
            
             .
             It
             may
             be
             objected
             perhaps
             that
             these
             five
             Tribunals
             were
             superfluous
             ,
             because
             they
             depended
             upon
             the
             fourth
             of
             the
             six
             superiour
             Courts
             :
             But
             in
             answer
             to
             this
             it
             is
             to
             be
             observ'd
             ,
             that
             there
             were
             at
             Court
             at
             that
             time
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Lords
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             
               Hium
               Chin
            
             ,
             or
             Vassals
             of
             great
             merit
             ,
             whose
             Ancestours
             had
             assisted
             the
             first
             King
             of
             the
             preceding
             Race
             to
             make
             himself
             Master
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             Besides
             it
             is
             most
             certain
             that
             there
             is
             no
             Passion
             so
             prevailing
             over
             the
             Chineses
             as
             the
             violent
             ambition
             of
             Rule
             and
             Command
             ;
             as
             being
             that
             wherein
             they
             place
             all
             their
             chiefest
             glory
             and
             happiness
             ;
             as
             may
             appear
             by
             the
             Answer
             which
             a
             Mandarin
             made
             to
             Father
             
               Matthew
               Ricci
            
             .
             For
             that
             same
             Father
             discoursing
             of
             our
             Holy
             Law
             ,
             and
             of
             that
             Eternal
             Felicity
             which
             they
             who
             embrac'd
             it
             enjoy'd
             hereafter
             ;
             Come
             ,
             come
             ,
             said
             the
             Mandarin
             ,
             hold
             your
             tongue
             ,
             and
             lay
             aside
             these
             idle
             conceits
             ,
             your
             greatest
             glory
             and
             happiness
             as
             a
             Stranger
             ,
             it
             is
             to
             abide
             in
             this
             Kingdom
             and
             this
             Court.
             And
             for
             my
             own
             part
             ,
             all
             my
             glory
             and
             happiness
             
             consists
             in
             this
             same
             Girdle
             and
             Habit
             of
             a
             Mandarin
             ,
             all
             the
             rest
             is
             nothing
             but
             fables
             and
             words
             which
             the
             wind
             blows
             away
             ;
             meer
             stories
             of
             things
             invisible
             or
             rather
             never
             to
             be
             seen
             .
             That
             which
             is
             visible
             ,
             is
             to
             command
             others
             ;
             Gold
             and
             Silver
             ,
             Wives
             and
             Concubines
             ,
             and
             multitudes
             of
             Servants
             of
             both
             sexes
             ,
             these
             are
             visible
             ;
             Noble
             Houses
             ,
             great
             Wealth
             ,
             Banquets
             ,
             Divertisements
             ,
             these
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             .
             In
             a
             word
             ,
             Estate
             ,
             Honour
             and
             Glory
             are
             the
             consequences
             of
             being
             a
             Mandarin
             .
             This
             is
             all
             the
             felicity
             which
             we
             desire
             and
             enjoy
             in
             this
             large
             Empire
             ,
             and
             not
             your
             vain
             felicity
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             unprofitable
             as
             it
             is
             invisible
             and
             impossible
             to
             obtain
             .
             These
             are
             the
             carnal
             sentiments
             of
             men
             no
             less
             blind
             ,
             than
             proud
             and
             haughty
             :
             which
             being
             so
             ,
             the
             Kings
             ,
             who
             understand
             the
             humour
             of
             that
             Nation
             ,
             especially
             of
             the
             Grandees
             ,
             for
             their
             satisfaction
             ,
             be
             thought
             themselves
             of
             these
             Tribunals
             ,
             which
             they
             erected
             and
             regulated
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             that
             they
             gave
             them
             an
             opportunity
             to
             satisfie
             their
             Ambition
             ,
             with
             the
             Honours
             and
             Profits
             belonging
             to
             their
             Offices
             ,
             and
             prevented
             them
             from
             doing
             mischief
             by
             the
             small
             authority
             which
             they
             had
             allow'd
             them
             .
             Now
             as
             there
             are
             some
             Mandarins
             who
             are
             not
             of
             any
             of
             the
             Nine
             Orders
             ,
             which
             are
             call'd
             
               Vi
               jo
               Lieu
            
             ,
             or
             Men
             not
             settl'd
             ,
             there
             are
             others
             which
             are
             call'd
             
               Vu
               Pin
            
             ,
             or
             such
             for
             whom
             there
             is
             no
             degree
             high
             enough
             ,
             or
             such
             whose
             Merits
             are
             so
             great
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             above
             all
             Orders
             and
             Degrees
             .
             These
             are
             the
             Petty
             Kings
             ,
             Dukes
             ,
             Marquisses
             ,
             &c.
             which
             govern
             the
             two
             Tribunals
             of
             Arms.
             But
             though
             they
             are
             honour'd
             with
             Titles
             ,
             and
             some
             small
             authority
             which
             they
             enjoy
             by
             virtue
             of
             their
             Quality
             of
             Mandarins
             ,
             nevertheless
             ,
             the
             dignity
             of
             Dukes
             and
             Marquisses
             
             which
             their
             great
             Services
             have
             purchased
             is
             far
             more
             valu'd
             and
             esteem'd
             .
             And
             thus
             much
             for
             the
             Eleven
             Superiour
             Courts
             or
             Tribunals
             :
             we
             shall
             now
             briefly
             give
             you
             a
             Prospect
             of
             the
             other
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Court
             and
             whole
             Empire
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XIV
            
             .
             Of
             several
             other
             Tribunals
             at
             Pekim
             .
          
           
             THE
             Licentiates
             of
             all
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             whom
             the
             Chineses
             call
             
               Kiu
               Gin
            
             ,
             or
             men
             famous
             ,
             for
             Learning
             ,
             meet
             together
             every
             three
             years
             at
             the
             Court
             at
             Pekim
             ,
             and
             are
             there
             examind
             for
             thirteen
             days
             together
             .
             A
             month
             after
             ,
             the
             degree
             of
             Doctor
             is
             given
             to
             three
             hundred
             and
             sixty
             six
             ,
             who
             have
             display'd
             the
             most
             pregnant
             of
             Parts
             and
             Ingenuity
             in
             their
             Compositions
             .
             Out
             of
             these
             young
             Doctors
             the
             King
             makes
             choice
             of
             the
             youngest
             and
             most
             ingenious
             ,
             and
             prefers
             them
             to
             a
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Han
               Len
               Iven
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             Garden
             or
             Wood
             flourishing
             in
             Learning
             and
             Knowledge
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             contains
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Mandarins
             ,
             all
             very
             learned
             and
             the
             most
             sprightly
             Wits
             of
             the
             Empire
             ;
             which
             are
             divided
             into
             five
             Classes
             ,
             and
             compose
             five
             Tribunals
             ,
             with
             the
             Names
             and
             Employments
             of
             which
             I
             shall
             not
             trouble
             the
             Reader
             for
             fear
             of
             being
             tedious
             ,
             but
             onely
             give
             a
             general
             accompt
             of
             their
             Functions
             .
             They
             are
             Tutors
             to
             the
             Prince
             who
             is
             Heir
             to
             the
             Empire
             ,
             whom
             they
             instruct
             in
             Vertue
             ,
             Civility
             ,
             and
             the
             Liberal
             Sciences
             .
             By
             degrees
             also
             ,
             as
             he
             grows
             in
             years
             ,
             they
             teach
             him
             the
             true
             arts
             of
             Governing
             ,
             and
             the
             methods
             of
             good
             Conduct
             .
             
             They
             set
             down
             all
             the
             remarkable
             accidents
             that
             happen
             either
             at
             Court
             or
             throughout
             the
             whole
             Empire
             ,
             and
             which
             most
             deserve
             to
             be
             deliver'd
             to
             Posterity
             .
             They
             compile
             the
             general
             History
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             :
             they
             are
             always
             at
             their
             Studies
             ,
             and
             write
             Books
             upon
             several
             Subjects
             .
             They
             are
             properly
             the
             King
             's
             Learned
             People
             ,
             who
             frequently
             discourses
             with
             them
             upon
             several
             Sciences
             ,
             and
             makes
             choice
             of
             several
             of
             them
             to
             be
             his
             Colao
             ,
             or
             Counsellors
             ,
             or
             for
             his
             other
             Tribunals
             :
             and
             generally
             he
             commits
             to
             their
             care
             the
             Execution
             of
             all
             affairs
             that
             require
             Secrecy
             and
             Fidelity
             .
             In
             short
             ,
             this
             Tribunal
             is
             a
             Royal
             Academy
             ,
             or
             as
             I
             may
             so
             say
             ,
             a
             Royal
             Magazine
             furnish'd
             with
             Men
             of
             Wit
             and
             Learning
             always
             ready
             to
             serve
             the
             State
             ,
             and
             the
             Emperour
             .
             They
             that
             belong
             to
             the
             first
             Tribunal
             are
             of
             the
             third
             order
             of
             Mandarins
             :
             they
             of
             the
             second
             ,
             of
             the
             fourth
             Order
             ;
             and
             they
             that
             belong
             to
             the
             other
             three
             ,
             are
             of
             the
             fifth
             Order
             .
             Yet
             though
             they
             are
             of
             those
             inferiour
             Orders
             ,
             nevertheless
             they
             are
             very
             much
             esteem'd
             ,
             respected
             and
             dreaded
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Gue
               Thu
               Kien
            
             ,
             is
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Royal
             School
             or
             University
             of
             the
             whole
             Empire
             ,
             and
             it
             has
             two
             sorts
             of
             Employments
             :
             The
             first
             is
             that
             when
             the
             King
             makes
             any
             Sacrifice
             to
             the
             Heaven
             ,
             the
             Earth
             ,
             the
             Sun
             or
             Moon
             ,
             or
             to
             any
             one
             of
             his
             Subjects
             deceas'd
             ,
             to
             recompence
             his
             great
             Services
             ,
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             present
             the
             Wine
             ,
             which
             is
             done
             with
             a
             great
             deal
             of
             ceremony
             .
             Their
             next
             business
             is
             to
             take
             care
             of
             all
             the
             Licentiates
             and
             Undergraduates
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             the
             Students
             ,
             to
             whom
             for
             some
             particular
             reason
             the
             King
             is
             pleas'd
             to
             confer
             Titles
             and
             Dignities
             which
             equal
             them
             in
             some
             measure
             with
             the
             Batchelour
             Graduates
             .
             These
             
             Students
             are
             of
             eight
             sorts
             .
             The
             first
             are
             call'd
             
               Cum
               Sem
            
             ,
             who
             being
             Batchellors
             of
             Art
             and
             learned
             ,
             are
             of
             an
             age
             not
             to
             be
             examin'd
             ,
             or
             who
             having
             been
             examin'd
             had
             not
             the
             good
             fortune
             to
             come
             off
             with
             applause
             ,
             and
             therefore
             to
             make
             them
             amends
             the
             King
             gives
             them
             a
             Pension
             as
             long
             as
             they
             live
             .
             The
             second
             ,
             call'd
             
               Quen
               Sem
            
             ,
             are
             the
             Sons
             of
             great
             Mandarins
             ,
             upon
             whom
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             eminent
             Services
             of
             their
             Parents
             the
             King
             confers
             employments
             ,
             without
             suffering
             them
             to
             undergo
             the
             rigour
             of
             Examinations
             .
             The
             third
             sort
             call'd
             
               Ngen
               Sem
            
             ,
             are
             certain
             Students
             whom
             the
             King
             makes
             Mandarins
             at
             his
             coming
             to
             the
             Crown
             ,
             or
             upon
             the
             Birth
             or
             Marriage
             of
             the
             Prince
             his
             eldest
             Son.
             The
             fourth
             is
             call'd
             
               Cum
               Sem
            
             ,
             are
             Students
             upon
             whom
             the
             King
             bestows
             his
             Favours
             ,
             and
             advances
             them
             to
             Dignities
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             great
             personal
             merits
             ,
             or
             the
             great
             Services
             of
             their
             Ancestours
             .
             The
             fifth
             sort
             ,
             call'd
             
               Kien
               Sem
            
             ,
             comprehends
             all
             those
             who
             having
             been
             Batchellors
             for
             some
             time
             ,
             and
             after
             their
             Examinations
             not
             being
             able
             to
             merit
             the
             degree
             of
             Licentiates
             ,
             or
             else
             fearing
             to
             lose
             their
             degree
             of
             Batchelour
             ,
             give
             the
             King
             a
             Sum
             of
             Money
             ,
             for
             which
             he
             grants
             them
             the
             Title
             of
             
               Kien
               Sem
            
             ,
             which
             confirms
             them
             for
             ever
             into
             their
             Batchelour's
             degree
             ,
             and
             makes
             them
             capable
             of
             being
             elected
             Mandarins
             .
             The
             sixth
             is
             compos'd
             of
             Students
             that
             learn
             foreign
             Languages
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             able
             to
             interpret
             when
             Strangers
             come
             to
             Court.
             To
             whom
             the
             King
             for
             their
             incouragement
             gives
             this
             Title
             with
             Revenues
             proportionable
             ,
             and
             after
             they
             have
             served
             for
             some
             years
             ,
             they
             may
             be
             made
             Mandarins
             without
             any
             Examination
             .
             The
             seventh
             consists
             of
             the
             Sons
             of
             great
             Lords
             ,
             who
             in
             this
             Tribunal
             learn
             Vertue
             ,
             
             Civility
             ,
             and
             the
             Liberal
             Sciences
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             are
             of
             age
             to
             be
             Mandarins
             ,
             the
             King
             prefers
             them
             to
             some
             Employment
             or
             other
             .
             The
             eighth
             is
             accidental
             and
             of
             a
             peculiar
             sort
             ;
             for
             when
             the
             Emperour
             has
             any
             Daughters
             that
             are
             call'd
             Ladies
             of
             the
             Palace
             or
             
               Cum
               Chu
            
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             has
             an
             intention
             to
             marry
             them
             ,
             he
             makes
             choice
             at
             Pekim
             of
             several
             young
             Lads
             ,
             hopefull
             for
             their
             parts
             ,
             handsome
             ,
             and
             between
             fourteen
             and
             seventeen
             years
             of
             age
             ,
             whether
             they
             be
             the
             Sons
             of
             Mandarins
             ,
             Tradesmen
             or
             poor
             people
             .
             Out
             of
             these
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             chooses
             the
             most
             accomplish'd
             for
             Beauty
             and
             Wit
             ,
             and
             presents
             them
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             who
             culls
             out
             one
             that
             pleases
             him
             most
             and
             sends
             the
             rest
             back
             to
             their
             Parents
             ,
             after
             he
             has
             given
             to
             every
             one
             a
             summ
             of
             Money
             and
             a
             piece
             of
             Silk
             .
             But
             as
             for
             those
             who
             are
             thus
             made
             choice
             of
             to
             be
             his
             Sons
             in
             Law
             ,
             he
             sets
             over
             them
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             ,
             and
             places
             him
             in
             that
             College
             to
             be
             instructed
             .
             The
             President
             of
             this
             College
             is
             of
             the
             fourth
             Order
             of
             Mandarins
             ;
             and
             his
             Assessors
             ,
             who
             are
             Regents
             in
             the
             College
             ,
             are
             of
             the
             fifth
             Order
             .
          
           
             The
             Mandarins
             that
             compose
             the
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Tu
               Cha
               Yuen
            
             are
             Controllers
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             the
             Empire
             .
             The
             President
             is
             equal
             in
             dignity
             to
             the
             President
             of
             the
             six
             superiour
             Tribunals
             ,
             so
             that
             he
             is
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             second
             degree
             .
             His
             first
             Assessor
             is
             of
             the
             third
             :
             and
             his
             second
             Assistant
             of
             the
             fourth
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             which
             are
             very
             numerous
             ,
             and
             of
             great
             authority
             ,
             are
             of
             the
             seventh
             Order
             .
             Their
             employment
             is
             to
             take
             care
             both
             at
             Court
             and
             over
             all
             the
             Empire
             ,
             that
             the
             Laws
             and
             good
             Customs
             be
             strictly
             observed
             ,
             and
             put
             in
             execution
             ,
             that
             the
             
             Mandarins
             perform
             their
             Functions
             justly
             and
             truly
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             people
             do
             their
             duties
             .
             They
             punish
             slight
             faults
             in
             their
             own
             Tribunals
             ,
             and
             inform
             the
             King
             of
             great
             offences
             .
             Every
             three
             years
             they
             make
             a
             general
             Visitation
             ,
             sending
             fourteen
             Visitors
             abroad
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             one
             for
             every
             Province
             ▪
             So
             soon
             as
             the
             Visitors
             enter
             the
             Province
             ,
             they
             are
             superior
             to
             the
             Viceroys
             and
             other
             Mandarins
             ,
             as
             well
             the
             great
             as
             the
             petty
             ones
             ,
             and
             they
             controul
             them
             with
             so
             much
             majesty
             ,
             authority
             and
             rigor
             ,
             that
             the
             dread
             wherein
             the
             Mandarins
             stand
             of
             them
             has
             given
             occasion
             to
             this
             usual
             proverb
             among
             the
             
               Chineses
               ,
               Lao
               xu
               Kien
               mao
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             
               The
               Rat
               has
               seen
               the
               Cat.
            
             Nor
             is
             it
             without
             reason
             that
             they
             stand
             in
             so
             much
             awe
             of
             them
             ,
             in
             regard
             it
             is
             in
             their
             power
             to
             take
             away
             their
             Employments
             ,
             and
             ruin
             their
             persons
             The
             Visitation
             being
             finish'd
             ,
             they
             return
             to
             Court
             ,
             generally
             loaden
             with
             four
             or
             five
             hundred
             thousand
             Crowns
             ,
             more
             or
             less
             ,
             which
             the
             Mandarins
             give
             them
             .
             For
             they
             that
             are
             guilty
             will
             bleed
             very
             freely
             for
             fear
             they
             should
             be
             accus'd
             to
             the
             King.
             Others
             are
             more
             sparing
             ,
             but
             give
             however
             ,
             to
             prevent
             the
             inventing
             of
             accusations
             against
             them
             .
             At
             their
             return
             they
             divide
             their
             spoils
             ,
             with
             the
             first
             President
             and
             his
             Assistants
             ,
             and
             after
             that
             give
             both
             them
             and
             the
             King
             an
             accompt
             of
             their
             visitation
             ▪
             Generally
             they
             never
             impeach
             any
             one
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             but
             such
             whose
             injustice
             and
             tyrannies
             are
             so
             publick
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             impossible
             to
             conceal
             them
             ;
             or
             such
             who
             through
             their
             virtue
             or
             their
             poverty
             are
             not
             able
             to
             gratifie
             their
             avarice
             .
             This
             Visitation
             is
             call'd
             
               Ta
               Chai
            
             ,
             or
             the
             great
             and
             General
             Visitation
             .
             The
             second
             Tribunal
             makes
             a
             second
             Tribunal
             every
             year
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             
               Chum
               Chai
            
             ,
             or
             the
             middle
             Super-Visor
             .
             
             This
             Tribunal
             also
             sends
             visitors
             to
             nine
             Quarters
             of
             the
             Frontiers
             ,
             on
             that
             side
             which
             is
             next
             the
             vast
             Walls
             that
             separate
             China
             from
             Tartary
             .
             They
             send
             other
             Visitors
             to
             the
             Salt
             Pits
             ,
             which
             yield
             the
             King
             a
             great
             Revenue
             :
             and
             if
             the
             general
             Visitors
             greatly
             enrich
             themselves
             by
             their
             spoils
             and
             robberies
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             and
             people
             ;
             these
             latter
             commit
             much
             greater
             robberies
             upon
             the
             Farmers
             ,
             who
             distribute
             the
             Salt
             into
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             and
             who
             are
             the
             Richest
             men
             in
             China
             ,
             as
             being
             commonly
             worth
             four
             or
             five
             hundred
             thousand
             Crowns
             a
             man.
             The
             third
             Visitation
             is
             call'd
             
               Siao
               Chai
            
             or
             the
             Petty
             Visit
             :
             this
             Visitation
             is
             made
             every
             three
             months
             ,
             by
             sending
             Visitors
             frequently
             unknown
             and
             in
             disguise
             ,
             sometimes
             to
             one
             Province
             or
             City
             ,
             sometimes
             to
             another
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             be
             able
             to
             give
             true
             information
             against
             some
             Mandarin
             famous
             for
             his
             Tyranny
             and
             Extortion
             .
             Besides
             these
             Visitations
             ,
             this
             Tribunal
             sends
             into
             every
             Province
             every
             three
             years
             ,
             a
             certain
             Visitor
             call'd
             
               Hio
               Yuen
            
             ,
             and
             to
             every
             City
             another
             call'd
             
               Ti
               Trio
            
             ,
             to
             examine
             the
             
               Batchelours
               of
               Art
            
             ,
             and
             suppress
             the
             violences
             ,
             which
             confiding
             in
             their
             privileges
             ,
             they
             act
             upon
             the
             people
             .
             These
             have
             power
             to
             apprehend
             ,
             to
             condemn
             all
             such
             Offenders
             to
             the
             Whip
             ;
             and
             when
             they
             prove
             incorrigible
             ,
             they
             degrade
             and
             punish
             them
             with
             an
             extraordinary
             severity
             .
             Lastly
             ,
             this
             Tribunal
             sends
             forth
             whensoever
             it
             is
             thought
             requisite
             a
             Visitor
             call'd
             
               Siun
               Ho
            
             to
             survey
             the
             famous
             Canal
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             have
             already
             spoken
             ,
             and
             to
             take
             care
             of
             the
             Barks
             which
             are
             employ'd
             therein
             .
             By
             means
             of
             which
             Visitation
             he
             reaps
             more
             honour
             and
             profit
             than
             all
             the
             other
             Visitors
             ,
             which
             this
             Visitation
             sends
             forth
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Judges
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             are
             lodg'd
             in
             a
             vast
             Palace
             ,
             where
             they
             have
             under
             them
             five
             and
             twenty
             inferiour
             Tribunals
             ,
             divided
             into
             five
             classes
             ,
             of
             which
             every
             one
             has
             five
             Tribunals
             ,
             with
             five
             Presidents
             ,
             and
             many
             Assessors
             and
             inferiour
             Officers
             .
             The
             five
             of
             the
             first
             Classis
             are
             call'd
             
               Uchin
               Chayuen
            
             ,
             or
             Visitors
             of
             the
             five
             Qurters
             of
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             .
             The
             first
             is
             the
             Visitor
             of
             the
             South
             Walls
             and
             that
             Quarter
             of
             the
             City
             next
             adjoyning
             .
             The
             second
             visits
             the
             Walls
             on
             the
             North
             side
             ;
             the
             third
             ,
             the
             Walls
             on
             the
             East
             ,
             the
             fourth
             the
             Walls
             on
             the
             West
             side
             ;
             and
             the
             fifth
             the
             Walls
             in
             the
             middle
             .
             The
             Authority
             of
             these
             Mandarins
             is
             very
             great
             ,
             for
             they
             have
             power
             to
             try
             and
             punish
             the
             misdemanours
             of
             the
             people
             and
             the
             Domestick
             Servants
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             and
             great
             Lords
             .
             But
             if
             the
             Offender
             deserve
             Death
             ,
             Confiscation
             of
             Estate
             or
             Banishment
             ,
             then
             they
             send
             him
             to
             the
             Criminal
             Tribunal
             .
          
           
             Those
             of
             the
             Second
             Classis
             are
             call'd
             
               U
               Chin
               Pim
               Ma
               Su
            
             ,
             or
             Grand
             Provosts
             of
             the
             Five
             Quarters
             .
             Those
             of
             the
             third
             Classis
             are
             call'd
             
               Tam
               quen
            
             ;
             or
             inferior
             Provosts
             of
             the
             five
             Quarters
             .
             The
             two
             latter
             Classes
             make
             it
             their
             business
             to
             apprehend
             Theives
             and
             Robbers
             ,
             Malefactors
             ▪
             Gamesters
             ,
             Vagabonds
             and
             the
             like
             ;
             and
             to
             detain
             them
             in
             Prison
             till
             they
             resign
             them
             to
             the
             Superiour
             Robbers
             .
             It
             is
             likewise
             their
             business
             to
             keep
             watch
             and
             ward
             in
             the
             day
             time
             ,
             to
             go
             the
             Rounds
             in
             the
             Night
             ,
             and
             to
             set
             Sentinels
             to
             give
             notice
             when
             any
             fire
             happens
             in
             any
             house
             .
             The
             Captains
             of
             the
             Watch
             are
             also
             subordinate
             to
             these
             two
             Classes
             .
             For
             to
             every
             ten
             houses
             there
             belongs
             a
             Captain
             call'd
             Pai
             ;
             and
             every
             
               Pai
               teu
            
             have
             another
             Captain
             call'd
             
               Stum
               Kia
            
             ,
             who
             is
             oblig'd
             to
             inform
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             what
             is
             done
             ,
             in
             his
             District
             ,
             contrary
             
             to
             the
             Laws
             and
             good
             Customs
             of
             the
             City
             ;
             when
             any
             Strangers
             come
             to
             Town
             ,
             or
             of
             any
             other
             Novelty
             .
             He
             is
             also
             oblig'd
             to
             exhort
             the
             several
             private
             Families
             by
             singing
             with
             a
             loud
             voice
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             every
             night
             a
             Song
             consisting
             of
             five
             verses
             ,
             containing
             the
             most
             necessary
             Precepts
             of
             Morality
             in
             these
             words
             .
          
           
             
               Hiao
               xum
               ,
               fu
               mu
               ,
               Tsum
               Kim
               cham
               xam
               ,
               Ho
               mo
               Hian
               Li
               ,
               Kiao
               tzu
               Sun.
               Mon
               tzo
               vi
               .
            
          
           
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             
               Obey
               your
               Parents
               ,
               reverence
               old
               Men
               ,
               and
               your
               Superiours
               ,
               live
               together
               in
               Unity
               ,
               instruct
               your
               Children
               ,
               and
               do
               no
               acts
               of
               Injustice
               .
            
          
           
             In
             petty
             Towns
             where
             there
             are
             no
             Mandarins
             ,
             the
             care
             of
             this
             duty
             is
             committed
             to
             four
             or
             five
             of
             the
             honestest
             old
             Men
             ,
             call'd
             
               Lao
               gen
            
             ,
             who
             have
             a
             Captain
             call'd
             
               Hiam
               yo
            
             ,
             or
             
               Ti
               fam
            
             .
             This
             person
             also
             sings
             the
             same
             Song
             every
             Night
             ;
             and
             the
             first
             and
             fifth
             of
             every
             month
             assembles
             the
             Inhabitants
             ,
             and
             explains
             the
             meaning
             of
             those
             Instructions
             by
             Similes
             and
             Examples
             .
             Of
             which
             I
             thought
             it
             not
             amiss
             to
             relate
             some
             few
             to
             let
             the
             Reader
             see
             the
             vertuous
             disposition
             ,
             wit
             ,
             and
             good
             government
             of
             this
             Nation
             .
             Obey
             your
             Parents
             as
             Lambs
             obey
             their
             Ews
             ,
             as
             they
             teach
             us
             by
             their
             extraordinary
             humility
             in
             kneeling
             when
             they
             suck
             ,
             and
             submitting
             to
             them
             exactly
             in
             acknowledgment
             of
             the
             nourishment
             which
             they
             receive
             from
             them
             .
             Reverence
             the
             Aged
             and
             your
             Superiours
             ,
             in
             imitation
             of
             wild
             Geese
             ,
             who
             by
             the
             Order
             which
             they
             observe
             in
             their
             flight
             ,
             shew
             plainly
             the
             respect
             which
             is
             to
             be
             given
             to
             Seniority
             .
             Live
             together
             in
             peace
             ,
             in
             imitation
             of
             that
             Love
             and
             Unity
             which
             is
             observ'd
             among
             Deer
             ;
             for
             when
             any
             one
             of
             them
             has
             met
             with
             a
             good
             piece
             of
             Pasturage
             ,
             he
             will
             not
             feed
             by
             himself
             ,
             till
             he
             has
             call'd
             together
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Herd
             
             to
             take
             their
             share
             .
             Instruct
             your
             Children
             like
             that
             ancient
             Matron
             call'd
             
               Tuen
               Ki
            
             ,
             who
             being
             a
             Widow
             ,
             every
             day
             whipp'd
             the
             onely
             Son
             that
             she
             had
             till
             she
             dispossest
             him
             of
             all
             his
             evil
             inclinations
             ,
             so
             that
             at
             length
             being
             renown'd
             for
             his
             knowledge
             and
             his
             vertues
             he
             came
             to
             be
             
               Chuam
               Yuen
            
             ,
             or
             chief
             of
             the
             Doctours
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             for
             his
             Vertue
             and
             Heroick
             Actions
             was
             advanc'd
             to
             be
             
               Co
               Lao
            
             ,
             or
             Chief
             Minister
             of
             State
             to
             the
             Emperour
             .
             Commit
             no
             acts
             of
             Injustice
             ,
             like
             that
             same
             wicked
             and
             disobedient
             
               Heu
               ci
            
             ,
             who
             out
             of
             his
             extraordinary
             Ingratitude
             ,
             designing
             to
             kill
             his
             Father
             in
             Law
             that
             reprov'd
             him
             for
             his
             Misdemeanours
             ,
             kill'd
             his
             own
             Mother
             unexpectedly
             ,
             whose
             Indulgence
             had
             been
             the
             Perdition
             of
             her
             Son
             ,
             by
             supplying
             him
             with
             Money
             ,
             which
             he
             spent
             in
             all
             manner
             of
             debauchery
             ;
             and
             by
             concealing
             the
             early
             lewdness
             of
             his
             Life
             .
             But
             Heaven
             to
             make
             him
             an
             Example
             to
             all
             as
             wicked
             as
             himself
             ,
             and
             to
             deter
             others
             ,
             crush'd
             him
             to
             the
             Earth
             ,
             and
             cleft
             him
             in
             sunder
             with
             a
             Thunderbolt
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Iu
               Hio
            
             ,
             is
             a
             mixt
             Tribunal
             ,
             which
             takes
             care
             of
             Batchelours
             of
             Arts
             ,
             and
             Military
             Probationers
             .
             Two
             Presidents
             belong
             to
             it
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             one
             has
             the
             oversight
             of
             the
             first
             ,
             the
             other
             of
             the
             latter
             .
             These
             exercise
             themselves
             in
             making
             Discourses
             upon
             the
             means
             of
             preserving
             the
             Estate
             and
             governing
             the
             People
             .
             The
             other
             discourse
             of
             Warlike
             Discipline
             ,
             when
             to
             give
             Battel
             ,
             how
             to
             attack
             and
             defend
             Fortified
             places
             ,
             and
             other
             matters
             of
             the
             same
             nature
             .
             The
             Mandarins
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             who
             are
             dispers'd
             over
             all
             the
             Provinces
             and
             Cities
             ,
             give
             them
             frequent
             occasions
             to
             exercise
             their
             wits
             upon
             these
             Subjects
             ;
             and
             those
             Mandarins
             are
             respected
             
             by
             those
             Batchelours
             and
             Probationers
             ,
             rather
             as
             Professors
             than
             Magistrates
             .
             The
             two
             Presidents
             which
             reside
             at
             Court
             are
             Doctours
             both
             ,
             the
             one
             of
             Civil
             Learning
             ,
             the
             other
             in
             Military
             Discipline
             .
             The
             other
             Officers
             are
             such
             out
             of
             whose
             number
             the
             King
             makes
             Mandarins
             out
             of
             his
             meer
             Grace
             and
             Favour
             ,
             or
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Merits
             of
             their
             Ancestours
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Co
               Tao
            
             ,
             or
             
               Co
               Li
            
             ,
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Inspecters
             or
             Overseers
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             have
             already
             spoken
             ,
             which
             are
             divided
             into
             six
             Classes
             ,
             like
             the
             six
             superiour
             Tribunals
             ,
             from
             whence
             they
             take
             their
             name
             and
             distinction
             .
             For
             example
             ;
             the
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Li
               Co
            
             ,
             or
             Inspecters
             of
             the
             superiour
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             .
             The
             second
             ,
             
               Hu
               Co
            
             ,
             or
             Inspecters
             of
             the
             superiour
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Exchequer
             ;
             and
             so
             of
             the
             rest
             .
             Every
             Classis
             is
             compos'd
             of
             several
             Mandarins
             all
             of
             the
             seventh
             Order
             ,
             and
             all
             equal
             ,
             so
             that
             there
             is
             not
             one
             ,
             no
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             as
             he
             that
             keeps
             the
             Seal
             of
             the
             Tribunal
             ,
             who
             has
             any
             superiority
             over
             the
             rest
             of
             his
             Brethren
             .
             Their
             business
             is
             to
             reprehend
             the
             King
             himself
             for
             any
             miscarriages
             of
             his
             Government
             :
             and
             there
             are
             some
             so
             resolute
             and
             undaunted
             that
             they
             will
             rather
             expose
             themselves
             to
             Death
             and
             Banishment
             than
             forbear
             when
             they
             have
             Truth
             on
             their
             side
             ,
             which
             they
             will
             tell
             him
             sometimes
             to
             his
             face
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             in
             writing
             without
             any
             mincing
             of
             the
             matter
             .
             And
             of
             this
             freedom
             as
             we
             meet
             at
             present
             with
             several
             examples
             ,
             so
             is
             there
             a
             far
             greater
             number
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Chinese
             Histories
             .
             Many
             times
             also
             it
             happens
             that
             the
             Kings
             will
             amend
             their
             defects
             ,
             and
             magnificently
             reward
             those
             that
             have
             been
             so
             liberal
             of
             their
             Reproofs
             .
             They
             are
             also
             entrusted
             to
             inspect
             the
             Disorders
             of
             the
             six
             superiour
             Tribunals
             ,
             and
             
             to
             inform
             the
             King
             by
             private
             Memorials
             .
             The
             King
             likewise
             makes
             choice
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             for
             the
             execution
             of
             several
             Orders
             of
             Importance
             that
             require
             Secrecy
             .
             And
             every
             year
             he
             culls
             out
             three
             to
             be
             Visitors
             .
             The
             first
             of
             which
             is
             call'd
             
               Siun
               Cim
            
             ,
             who
             visits
             all
             the
             Merchants
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             City
             of
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             ,
             and
             takes
             notice
             of
             all
             Merchandize
             that
             is
             either
             sophisticated
             or
             prohibited
             .
             The
             second
             is
             call'd
             
               Sium
               Cam
            
             ,
             who
             visits
             the
             Burners
             of
             the
             King's
             Lime
             .
             The
             third
             ,
             who
             is
             call'd
             
               Sium
               xi
               nim
               ym
            
             ,
             is
             present
             at
             all
             the
             General
             Musters
             .
             The
             Mandarins
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             are
             only
             of
             the
             seventh
             Order
             ,
             however
             their
             Authority
             and
             Power
             is
             very
             large
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             ,
             call'd
             
               Him
               gin
               su
            
             ,
             consists
             of
             several
             Mandarins
             ,
             all
             Doctours
             ,
             all
             equal
             ,
             and
             all
             of
             the
             seventh
             Order
             ,
             like
             those
             of
             the
             preceding
             Tribunal
             .
             Their
             Employment
             is
             to
             be
             sent
             abroad
             ,
             either
             as
             Envoys
             or
             Embassadours
             ,
             either
             to
             distant
             parts
             of
             the
             Empire
             or
             to
             Foreign
             States
             .
             As
             when
             the
             King
             sends
             them
             to
             carry
             Titles
             of
             Honour
             to
             the
             Mother
             or
             Wise
             of
             a
             Mandarin
             slain
             in
             the
             Wars
             ;
             or
             after
             he
             has
             done
             the
             King
             and
             Kingdom
             eminent
             Service
             in
             the
             discharge
             of
             his
             Employment
             .
             Or
             when
             the
             Emperour
             is
             pleas'd
             to
             confer
             or
             confirm
             the
             Title
             of
             King
             to
             the
             Prince
             of
             Corea
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             neighbouring
             Sovereign
             .
             These
             Embassies
             are
             very
             honourable
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             no
             less
             gainfull
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             of
             
               Tai
               li
               su
               ,
               i.
               e.
            
             of
             Supream
             Reason
             and
             Justice
             ,
             is
             so
             call'd
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             entrusted
             to
             examine
             all
             doubtfull
             and
             intricate
             Causes
             ,
             and
             to
             confirm
             or
             annihilate
             the
             Sentences
             of
             other
             Tribunals
             ,
             especially
             in
             reference
             to
             Crimes
             that
             concern
             the
             Estates
             ,
             the
             Honour
             and
             Life
             of
             
             the
             King's
             Subjects
             .
             The
             President
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             is
             of
             the
             third
             Order
             :
             his
             two
             Lateral
             Judges
             or
             Assessors
             ,
             of
             the
             fourth
             ;
             and
             the
             other
             inferiour
             Mandarins
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             are
             a
             great
             number
             ,
             of
             the
             fifth
             and
             sixth
             .
             When
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Crimes
             condemns
             to
             death
             any
             person
             of
             Quality
             or
             other
             person
             of
             mean
             condition
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             King
             finds
             the
             reason
             of
             the
             Sentence
             dubious
             ,
             he
             refers
             it
             always
             to
             
               San
               fa
               su
            
             ,
             which
             is
             ▪
             as
             it
             were
             his
             Council
             of
             Conscience
             .
             Then
             three
             Tribunals
             assemble
             together
             ,
             the
             
               Tai
               li
               su
            
             ,
             the
             
               Tu
               li
               yuen
            
             ,
             or
             the
             superiour
             Tribunal
             of
             Visitors
             ,
             and
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Crimes
             .
             All
             these
             together
             re
             examine
             the
             Process
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             the
             Accusers
             and
             the
             Party
             accused
             ,
             and
             many
             times
             revoke
             the
             Sentence
             .
             For
             that
             the
             Prosecutor
             not
             having
             gain'd
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Crimes
             ,
             nor
             having
             Money
             nor
             cunning
             enough
             to
             corrupt
             the
             other
             two
             ,
             they
             judge
             according
             to
             Reason
             and
             Justice
             ,
             and
             generally
             the
             King
             confirms
             the
             Decision
             of
             those
             three
             Tribunals
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             
               Tum
               chim
               su
            
             ,
             takes
             care
             to
             have
             the
             King's
             Orders
             and
             Commands
             proclaim'd
             at
             Court
             ,
             and
             diligently
             to
             inform
             themselves
             of
             the
             calamities
             ,
             oppressions
             and
             necessities
             of
             the
             People
             ,
             and
             exactly
             and
             privately
             to
             inform
             the
             Emperour
             .
             They
             are
             likewise
             entrusted
             to
             send
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             or
             else
             to
             bury
             in
             silence
             ,
             as
             they
             shall
             deem
             most
             proper
             ,
             all
             the
             Memorials
             of
             the
             Mi●…itary
             Mandarins
             ,
             and
             the
             Letters
             of
             the
             fourteen
             Provinces
             of
             the
             Veteran
             Mandarins
             ,
             who
             are
             dispens'd
             with
             from
             all
             manner
             of
             Employments
             ;
             of
             the
             People
             ,
             Souldiers
             ,
             and
             Strangers
             that
             come
             from
             Foreign
             Countries
             .
             The
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Pekim
             present
             their
             Memorials
             immediately
             to
             the
             King
             himself
             ,
             never
             taking
             notice
             of
             
             this
             Tribunal
             ;
             the
             President
             of
             which
             is
             of
             the
             third
             Order
             of
             Mandarins
             ;
             his
             first
             Assessor
             of
             the
             fourth
             ,
             his
             second
             Assessor
             of
             the
             fifth
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             inferiour
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             sixth
             and
             seventh
             Order
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             
               Tai
               cham
               su
            
             ,
             is
             as
             it
             were
             an
             Associate
             and
             Assistant
             to
             the
             supream
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             .
             The
             President
             is
             of
             the
             third
             Order
             ,
             his
             Assessors
             of
             the
             fourth
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             are
             a
             great
             number
             ,
             of
             the
             fifth
             and
             sixth
             Orders
             .
             They
             take
             particular
             care
             of
             the
             King's
             Musick
             and
             Sacrifices
             :
             and
             in
             regard
             these
             Sacrifices
             are
             perform'd
             in
             the
             Temples
             dedicated
             to
             the
             Heavens
             ,
             the
             Earth
             ,
             the
             Sun
             and
             Moon
             ,
             to
             Rivers
             and
             Mountains
             :
             this
             Tribunal
             takes
             care
             of
             all
             those
             Piles
             ,
             which
             are
             very
             vast
             and
             magnificent
             :
             They
             also
             take
             care
             of
             the
             married
             Bonzes
             ,
             who
             are
             generally
             Alchymists
             and
             Fortune-tellers
             .
             Two
             of
             these
             Mandarins
             are
             appointed
             to
             give
             orders
             for
             the
             Reception
             and
             Lodging
             of
             Strangers
             that
             come
             to
             Court.
             Lastly
             ,
             they
             have
             the
             oversight
             of
             the
             publick
             Courtesans
             ,
             of
             the
             places
             of
             their
             Habitation
             ,
             and
             of
             those
             that
             govern
             and
             direct
             them
             in
             their
             infamous
             Trade
             .
             The
             Chineses
             ,
             to
             shew
             their
             aversion
             to
             those
             miserable
             Creatures
             call
             them
             
               ●…am
               ●…a
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             Men
             that
             have
             utterly
             bury'd
             in
             oblivion
             eight
             Vertues
             ,
             viz.
             Obedience
             to
             the●…
             Fathers
             and
             Mothers
             ,
             Affection
             for
             their
             Brethren
             and
             other
             Kindred
             ,
             Fidelity
             toward
             their
             Prince
             ,
             Sincerity
             ,
             Honesty
             ,
             Justice
             ,
             Modesty
             ,
             Chastity
             ,
             and
             all
             manner
             of
             laudable
             Sciences
             and
             Custom●…
             ▪
             This
             is
             the
             signification
             of
             those
             two
             words
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             mark
             with
             only
             two
             letters
             ,
             by
             which
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             see
             the
             Force
             of
             their
             Language
             ,
             and
             the
             esteem
             which
             they
             have
             for
             Vertue
             ,
             though
             
             for
             the
             most
             part
             they
             follow
             their
             own
             deprav'd
             Inclinations
             that
             carry
             them
             headlong
             into
             vice
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             
               Quan
               lo
               su
            
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Royal
             Inns
             ,
             takes
             care
             for
             the
             provision
             of
             Wine
             ,
             Cattel
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             things
             necessary
             for
             the
             King's
             Sacrifices
             ,
             Banquets
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             entertainment
             of
             such
             as
             are
             treated
             at
             the
             King's
             charges
             whether
             Chineses
             or
             Foreigners
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             is
             an
             Associate
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Ceremonies
             .
             The
             President
             is
             of
             the
             third
             Order
             ;
             his
             Assistants
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             fourth
             ,
             the
             other
             of
             the
             fifth
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             which
             are
             very
             numerous
             ,
             of
             the
             seventh
             Order
             .
          
           
             The
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Tribunal
             
               Tai
               po
               su
            
             ,
             are
             of
             the
             same
             Orders
             with
             those
             before
             mention'd
             .
             Their
             business
             it
             is
             to
             take
             care
             of
             the
             Horses
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             the
             King's
             service
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             Wars
             .
             To
             which
             purpose
             they
             send
             their
             Agents
             and
             their
             Messengers
             to
             buy
             up
             such
             numbers
             as
             are
             necessary
             ,
             which
             they
             send
             afterwards
             to
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             War
             ,
             to
             which
             this
             Tribunal
             is
             an
             Assistant
             ,
             who
             distributes
             them
             to
             the
             Commanders
             ,
             and
             into
             the
             Fortresses
             of
             the
             Frontiers
             .
             During
             the
             Government
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             those
             Horses
             were
             all
             bought
             up
             in
             the
             several
             Provinces
             ;
             but
             now
             ,
             the
             Western
             Tarters
             bring
             them
             to
             the
             Court
             :
             and
             the
             Emperour
             buys
             every
             year
             seventy
             thousand
             ,
             besides
             what
             the
             great
             Lords
             ,
             the
             Commanders
             ,
             the
             Souldiers
             ,
             the
             learned
             Mandarins
             and
             the
             people
             buy
             ,
             which
             amount
             to
             double
             or
             treble
             the
             number
             .
             By
             which
             a
             man
             may
             judge
             of
             the
             vast
             number
             of
             Horses
             at
             the
             Court
             ,
             which
             I
             dare
             not
             presume
             to
             mention
             ,
             for
             fear
             it
             should
             be
             thought
             incredible
             .
          
           
             
               Kin
               Tien
               Kien
            
             is
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Mathematicks
             .
             The
             President
             of
             which
             is
             of
             the
             fifth
             Order
             ;
             
             his
             two
             Assessors
             of
             the
             sixth
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             seventh
             and
             eighth
             .
             They
             apply
             themselves
             to
             Astronomy
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             their
             business
             to
             give
             the
             King
             notice
             of
             the
             time
             and
             Day
             of
             the
             Eclipses
             of
             the
             Sun
             and
             Moon
             ,
             and
             whether
             total
             or
             in
             part
             ;
             of
             which
             the
             Emperour
             sends
             word
             to
             all
             the
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Province
             ,
             by
             the
             grand
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             may
             prepare
             themselves
             for
             the
             performance
             of
             the
             usual
             Ceremonies
             which
             consist
             in
             their
             beating
             of
             Drums
             during
             the
             Eclipse
             ,
             the
             Mandarins
             kneeling
             all
             the
             while
             ,
             and
             fixing
             their
             eyes
             upon
             the
             Skie
             with
             a
             most
             awfull
             reverence
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             also
             composes
             the
             Kalendar
             ,
             which
             is
             printed
             every
             year
             and
             distributed
             over
             all
             the
             Empire
             ;
             neither
             is
             it
             lawfull
             to
             make
             any
             other
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             thing
             forbidden
             under
             the
             for
             feiture
             of
             life
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Tai
               Y
               Yuen
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Physick
             ,
             is
             compos'd
             of
             the
             Kings
             ,
             Queens
             and
             Prince's
             Physicians
             .
             They
             also
             take
             care
             of
             all
             others
             whom
             the
             King
             out
             of
             his
             especial
             grace
             and
             favour
             orders
             them
             to
             visit
             ,
             and
             prepare
             the
             Medicins
             themselves
             .
             The
             Mandarins
             of
             this
             are
             of
             the
             same
             order
             as
             are
             those
             of
             the
             preceding
             Tribunal
             ,
             and
             both
             belong
             to
             the
             Grand
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             
               Hum
               Lu
               Su
            
             ,
             supplies
             the
             Office
             of
             Groom
             Porter
             ,
             and
             Master
             of
             the
             Ceremonies
             ,
             which
             are
             observ'd
             when
             the
             King
             gives
             audience
             ,
             or
             when
             he
             comes
             into
             the
             Royal
             Hall
             to
             receive
             the
             Homages
             of
             the
             Grandees
             and
             Mandarins
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             is
             an
             assistant
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Ceremonies
             ;
             the
             President
             being
             of
             the
             fourth
             Order
             ;
             the
             Assessors
             of
             the
             fifth
             and
             sixth
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             seventh
             and
             eighth
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Xam
               len
               Yuen
            
             take●…
             care
             of
             the
             Gardens
             ,
             Orchards
             ,
             and
             Parks
             ;
             as
             also
             of
             the
             breeding
             of
             the
             Cattel
             ,
             Sheep
             ,
             Pigs
             ,
             Wild
             Ducks
             ,
             Fowl
             ,
             and
             all
             sorts
             of
             Creatures
             which
             are
             made
             use
             of
             in
             the
             Royal
             Sacrifices
             ,
             Feasts
             ,
             and
             Royal
             Inns.
             It
             is
             under
             the
             Jurisdiction
             of
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             ,
             and
             the
             Mandarins
             are
             of
             the
             same
             Order
             with
             those
             of
             the
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Mathematicks
             and
             Physick
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             
               Xam
               pao
               su
            
             ,
             lodges
             in
             the
             Palace
             Royal.
             It
             takes
             care
             of
             the
             Emperour's
             Seal
             ,
             which
             is
             made
             of
             a
             most
             excellent
             and
             precious
             Stone
             ,
             as
             the
             signification
             of
             the
             two
             Syllables
             
               Xam
               pao
            
             denotes
             .
             It
             is
             square
             ,
             and
             almost
             a
             hands
             breadth
             in
             Diameter
             .
             When
             any
             Tribunal
             has
             an
             occasion
             to
             make
             use
             of
             it
             ,
             this
             Tribunal
             is
             oblig'd
             to
             give
             notice
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             and
             after
             it
             has
             been
             made
             use
             of
             and
             is
             lock'd
             up
             again
             ,
             they
             are
             bound
             to
             give
             the
             King
             notice
             of
             that
             too
             .
             They
             are
             entrusted
             to
             have
             ready
             at
             all
             times
             the
             Seals
             of
             all
             the
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Court
             and
             Empire
             ,
             and
             to
             order
             what
             Letters
             and
             Marks
             are
             to
             be
             grav'd
             upon
             them
             ,
             when
             the
             King
             con●…ers
             any
             new
             Title
             or
             any
             Employment
             upon
             any
             person
             ,
             or
             when
             upon
             some
             reason
             of
             State
             he
             is
             pleas'd
             to
             change
             the
             Seals
             .
             When
             the
             Grand
             Tribunal
             of
             Mandarins
             has
             any
             occasion
             to
             confer
             Commands
             and
             give
             Dispatches
             to
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Court
             or
             Provinces
             ,
             they
             send
             for
             them
             to
             this
             Tribunal
             after
             they
             have
             obtain'd
             leave
             of
             the
             Emperour
             .
             The
             President
             of
             this
             Court
             has
             but
             one
             Assessor
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             both
             Doctours
             and
             of
             the
             fifth
             Order
             .
             The
             rest
             are
             of
             the
             number
             of
             those
             that
             have
             been
             made
             Mandarins
             out
             of
             Favour
             ,
             and
             are
             onely
             of
             the
             seventh
             or
             eighth
             Order
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Kin
               y
               guei
            
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Royal
             
             Guard
             ,
             is
             compos'd
             of
             several
             hundreds
             of
             Military
             Mandarins
             divided
             into
             four
             Classe's
             .
             They
             of
             the
             first
             Classis
             are
             of
             the
             second
             Order
             of
             Mandarins
             ;
             those
             of
             the
             second
             ,
             of
             the
             third
             ;
             they
             of
             the
             third
             are
             of
             the
             fourth
             ;
             and
             those
             of
             the
             fourth
             Classis
             ,
             are
             of
             the
             fifth
             Order
             .
             Their
             Employment
             is
             to
             guard
             the
             Person
             of
             the
             King
             when
             he
             goes
             out
             of
             his
             Palace
             ,
             or
             gives
             Audience
             to
             the
             Grandees
             and
             Mandarins
             :
             and
             upon
             this
             Tribunal
             it
             is
             that
             he
             relies
             for
             the
             apprehending
             and
             arresting
             of
             Persons
             considerable
             for
             their
             Birth
             or
             Dignity
             .
             They
             are
             generally
             the
             Sons
             of
             great
             Mandarins
             ,
             Brothers
             ,
             or
             otherwise
             of
             kin
             to
             the
             Queen
             ,
             or
             Sons
             or
             Nephews
             of
             the
             King's
             Sons
             ;
             or
             Sons
             or
             Nephews
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             who
             have
             perform'd
             great
             Services
             ;
             in
             consideration
             of
             which
             the
             King
             bestows
             that
             Favour
             vpon
             them
             .
             They
             are
             never
             advanc'd
             to
             other
             Tribunals
             like
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             who
             change
             continually
             from
             one
             Tribunal
             to
             another
             .
             However
             ,
             they
             are
             preferr'd
             in
             their
             own
             Tribunal
             ,
             and
             frequently
             to
             the
             dignity
             of
             
               Xam
               xu
            
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Title
             of
             the
             Presidents
             of
             the
             six
             superiour
             Tribunals
             ;
             and
             many
             times
             to
             the
             dignity
             of
             Colao
             ,
             or
             Counsellors
             of
             State.
             They
             are
             greatly
             feared
             and
             respected
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             Employments
             ,
             and
             their
             Nobility
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             they
             are
             always
             near
             the
             Person
             of
             the
             King.
             And
             though
             they
             are
             Military
             Mandarins
             they
             are
             exempt
             from
             the
             Jurisdiction
             of
             the
             
               Pim
               pu
            
             ,
             or
             supream
             Tribunal
             of
             Arms
             ,
             as
             being
             onely
             subject
             to
             the
             King
          
           
             To
             this
             Tribunal
             belong
             two
             inferiour
             Tribunals
             that
             abide
             in
             particular
             places
             .
             The
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Nan
               Chin
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Watch
             Tower
             of
             the
             South
             .
             The
             second
             
               Pe
               chin
            
             ,
             or
             Watch
             Tower
             of
             the
             North.
             The
             Presidents
             of
             these
             two
             Tribunals
             are
             of
             the
             
             fifth
             Order
             ;
             and
             the
             inferiour
             Mandarins
             ,
             which
             are
             very
             numerous
             ,
             are
             all
             of
             the
             seventh
             Order
             .
             The
             Employment
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             first
             Tribunal
             is
             to
             attend
             those
             who
             are
             sent
             to
             apprehend
             any
             great
             Lords
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             second
             to
             receive
             and
             guard
             the
             Prisoners
             while
             in
             custody
             ,
             till
             they
             are
             releas'd
             by
             the
             King's
             Order
             ,
             or
             deliver'd
             over
             to
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Crimes
             .
          
           
             The
             two
             Tribunals
             call'd
             
               Xui
               que
               su
            
             ,
             are
             properly
             Directors
             of
             the
             Audits
             of
             the
             Tolls
             ,
             which
             all
             things
             pay
             that
             are
             brought
             to
             Pekim
             ,
             and
             sold
             in
             the
             City
             .
             The
             first
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             more
             considerable
             ,
             takes
             care
             to
             set
             Guards
             at
             all
             the
             Gates
             of
             the
             City
             ,
             to
             prevent
             the
             bringing
             in
             of
             any
             Goods
             ,
             unless
             they
             be
             first
             register'd
             and
             pay
             the
             duties
             demanded
             .
             The
             second
             receives
             the
             duties
             of
             all
             things
             that
             are
             bought
             and
             sold
             in
             the
             City
             ,
             as
             Slaves
             ,
             Horses
             ,
             Camels
             ,
             Cattel
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             Presidents
             of
             these
             Tribunals
             are
             of
             the
             seventh
             Order
             ,
             and
             the
             inferiour
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             eighth
             and
             ninth
             .
             These
             two
             Tribunals
             belong
             to
             the
             grand
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Exchequer
             .
          
           
             
               Tu
               pu
            
             ,
             is
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             ordinary
             Judge
             of
             the
             King's
             Houshold
             :
             their
             Employment
             is
             twosold
             :
             the
             first
             is
             to
             arrest
             Robbers
             and
             Malefactors
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             out
             their
             Processes
             ;
             and
             then
             if
             they
             happen
             to
             be
             quitted
             they
             release
             them
             ;
             if
             they
             are
             thought
             worthy
             of
             death
             ,
             they
             deliver
             them
             over
             to
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Crimes
             .
             As
             for
             Cut
             ▪
             purses
             ,
             for
             the
             first
             Offence
             they
             brand
             them
             upon
             the
             left
             Arm
             with
             a
             red
             hot
             Iron
             :
             for
             the
             second
             Offence
             ,
             upon
             the
             right
             Arm
             ;
             and
             for
             the
             third
             they
             deliver
             the
             Offenders
             over
             to
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Crimes
             .
             Their
             next
             Employment
             is
             to
             arrest
             Fugitive
             Slaves
             ,
             which
             they
             first
             cause
             to
             be
             punish'd
             with
             a
             hundred
             lashes
             of
             
             a
             Whip
             ,
             and
             then
             to
             be
             restor'd
             to
             their
             Masters
             .
             But
             of
             late
             years
             they
             are
             mark'd
             upon
             the
             left
             Cheek
             ,
             with
             two
             Tartar
             and
             two
             Chinese
             Characters
             .
             But
             a
             
               Chinese
               Mandarin
            
             ,
             by
             a
             Memorial
             ,
             besought
             the
             King
             to
             consider
             that
             the
             punishment
             was
             too
             rigorous
             for
             a
             crime
             that
             was
             rather
             the
             effect
             of
             desire
             of
             Liberty
             ,
             so
             natural
             to
             all
             Mankind
             ,
             than
             any
             act
             of
             a
             wicked
             inclination
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             was
             a
             thing
             no
             way
             becoming
             the
             City
             of
             his
             Majestie
             's
             Residence
             ,
             to
             behold
             the
             Streets
             so
             full
             of
             those
             deformed
             objects
             of
             cruelty
             .
             Which
             counsel
             being
             approv'd
             by
             the
             King
             he
             order'd
             for
             the
             future
             that
             the
             Letters
             should
             be
             branded
             upon
             the
             left
             Arm.
             The
             President
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             is
             of
             the
             second
             Order
             ;
             his
             Assistants
             are
             of
             the
             third
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             are
             of
             the
             seventh
             and
             eighth
             .
             To
             this
             Tribunal
             there
             belongs
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Catch-poles
             and
             Thief
             takers
             ,
             who
             with
             an
             industry
             and
             cunning
             more
             than
             ordinary
             ,
             discover
             and
             apprehend
             all
             manner
             of
             Thieves
             ,
             Robbers
             and
             Runaway
             Slaves
             .
          
           
             The
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Fu
               yn
            
             ,
             is
             that
             of
             the
             two
             Governours
             of
             the
             City
             of
             
               Xun
               tien
               Fu
            
             ,
             or
             Pekim
             ;
             but
             the
             first
             name
             is
             not
             in
             use
             ,
             because
             Pekim
             signifies
             properly
             the
             Court
             of
             the
             North.
             These
             Governours
             are
             above
             all
             the
             other
             Governours
             of
             all
             the
             Cities
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             third
             Order
             of
             Mandarins
             ,
             and
             their
             Assessors
             of
             the
             fourth
             .
             The
             first
             has
             the
             oversight
             of
             all
             the
             Students
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Men
             of
             Learning
             who
             are
             not
             yet
             Mandarins
             .
             The
             second
             takes
             care
             to
             instruct
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             to
             exhort
             them
             to
             live
             in
             peace
             and
             union
             ,
             and
             to
             inform
             themselves
             of
             their
             manner
             of
             living
             ,
             to
             punish
             those
             that
             introduce
             Novelties
             and
             Disorders
             ,
             to
             cherish
             labour
             and
             industry
             ,
             to
             administer
             Justice
             equally
             to
             all
             men
             ,
             to
             
             spare
             the
             people
             in
             the
             publick
             Works
             ,
             to
             know
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Families
             and
             persons
             in
             the
             City
             ,
             to
             watch
             day
             and
             night
             in
             redressing
             the
             miseries
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             to
             defend
             them
             against
             the
             wealthy
             and
             potent
             ,
             to
             comfort
             and
             ease
             the
             poor
             and
             afflicted
             ,
             to
             recompence
             the
             vertuous
             ,
             relieve
             the
             innocent
             and
             punish
             the
             guilty
             :
             and
             lastly
             to
             prepare
             the
             place
             and
             all
             things
             necessary
             for
             the
             publick
             Sacrifices
             .
             Such
             Functions
             as
             these
             are
             easie
             demonstrations
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             without
             reason
             that
             the
             Chineses
             call
             the
             Governours
             of
             Cities
             
               Fu
               mu
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             Father
             and
             Mother
             of
             the
             People
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             yet
             two
             Tribunals
             more
             call'd
             
               Tai
               Him
               Hien
            
             ,
             and
             
               Von
               Pin
               Hien
            
             ,
             whose
             employment
             is
             the
             same
             with
             that
             of
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Governours
             of
             the
             City
             upon
             which
             they
             depend
             ,
             and
             are
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Officers
             belonging
             to
             it
             .
             They
             are
             two
             ,
             because
             that
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             Cities
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Custome
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             where
             the
             Cities
             are
             said
             to
             be
             double
             or
             single
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             largeness
             and
             extent
             of
             their
             Territory
             .
             The
             Presidents
             of
             these
             Tribunals
             in
             Cities
             where
             the
             Court
             is
             kept
             are
             of
             the
             sixth
             order
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             Cities
             of
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             of
             the
             seventh
             order
             ;
             and
             the
             four
             inferiour
             Mandarins
             are
             of
             the
             seventh
             ,
             eighth
             and
             ninth
             order
             .
          
           
             
               T●…um
               Gin
               Fu
            
             ,
             is
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Grandees
             ,
             that
             descend
             from
             Father
             to
             Son
             ,
             of
             the
             Royal
             Family
             .
             The
             President
             is
             one
             of
             those
             that
             enjoy
             the
             Title
             of
             King
             ,
             and
             is
             always
             a
             person
             venerable
             for
             his
             Age
             and
             his
             Vertues
             .
             He
             is
             of
             none
             of
             the
             nine
             orders
             ,
             because
             his
             dignity
             advances
             him
             above
             all
             the
             orders
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             .
             His
             Assessors
             also
             are
             always
             2
             dignifi'd
             Lords
             of
             the
             Royal
             Bloud
             ,
             who
             are
             of
             no
             Order
             for
             the
             same
             reason
             .
             
             All
             these
             officers
             take
             care
             to
             distribute
             the
             Pensions
             which
             are
             paid
             to
             the
             Kings
             kindred
             of
             the
             Male
             Line
             ;
             who
             whether
             they
             be
             great
             Lords
             or
             poor
             ,
             and
             at
             least
             fifteen
             or
             sixteen
             Generations
             distant
             in
             Bloud
             ,
             have
             nevertheless
             some
             Pension
             ,
             all
             of
             them
             more
             or
             less
             according
             to
             their
             dignities
             and
             proximity
             of
             Alliance
             .
             They
             have
             all
             the
             privilege
             to
             paint
             their
             houses
             and
             their
             furniture
             with
             red
             .
             But
             in
             regard
             the
             preceding
             family
             had
             reign'd
             for
             two
             hundred
             seventy
             seven
             years
             ,
             the
             descendents
             from
             it
             were
             multiply'd
             to
             that
             degree
             and
             spread
             to
             such
             a
             distance
             from
             the
             source
             of
             the
             Pedigree
             ,
             and
             their
             divided
             revenues
             consequently
             so
             small
             that
             several
             of
             them
             were
             reduc'd
             to
             follow
             trades
             for
             their
             subsistance
             .
             So
             that
             when
             I
             enter'd
             first
             into
             the
             Empire
             ,
             I
             met
             with
             one
             in
             the
             Capital
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Kiam
               Sì
            
             ,
             that
             was
             a
             common
             Porter
             ,
             and
             to
             distinguish
             himself
             from
             the
             rest
             of
             his
             Companions
             ,
             carried
             the
             instruments
             of
             his
             profession
             ,
             at
             his
             back
             ,
             very
             bright
             ,
             and
             varnish'd
             over
             with
             red
             .
             There
             were
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             them
             ,
             in
             the
             reign
             of
             the
             preceding
             Family
             ,
             dispers'd
             all
             over
             the
             Empire
             ,
             who
             abusing
             the
             privileges
             of
             their
             Birth
             committed
             a
             thousand
             insolences
             ,
             and
             extortions
             upon
             the
             poor
             people
             :
             but
             they
             have
             been
             all
             since
             utterly
             extirpated
             together
             with
             the
             Family
             from
             whence
             they
             descended
             .
             At
             present
             ,
             the
             Kindred
             of
             the
             King
             of
             Tartary
             that
             now
             reigns
             are
             all
             great
             Lords
             ,
             and
             live
             at
             Court
             :
             but
             if
             their
             Dominion
             long
             endures
             ,
             they
             will
             multiply
             ,
             and
             their
             numbers
             become
             no
             less
             burthensome
             than
             the
             former
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             is
             also
             entrusted
             to
             determine
             all
             Differences
             ,
             and
             processes
             as
             well
             civil
             as
             criminal
             between
             the
             Princes
             of
             the
             Bloud
             ,
             to
             give
             sentence
             according
             
             to
             the
             penalties
             which
             they
             deserve
             ,
             and
             to
             order
             execution
             ,
             after
             they
             have
             first
             inform'd
             the
             King
             of
             their
             proceedings
             .
          
           
             
               Hoam
               cin
            
             is
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             King
             's
             Female
             Kindred
             which
             are
             of
             two
             sorts
             .
             The
             first
             are
             they
             who
             descend
             from
             the
             King's
             Daughters
             ,
             married
             to
             young
             Gentlemen
             call'd
             and
             chosen
             for
             those
             matches
             ,
             and
             are
             call'd
             
               Tu
               ma.
            
             These
             according
             to
             the
             custom
             of
             China
             ,
             are
             not
             lookt
             upon
             as
             Princes
             of
             the
             Bloud
             ,
             nor
             as
             the
             King's
             Kindred
             ,
             nor
             have
             they
             any
             Right
             of
             succession
             to
             the
             Crown
             ,
             though
             they
             should
             have
             several
             heirs
             males
             ;
             which
             custom
             is
             also
             observ'd
             among
             the
             people
             .
             For
             in
             China
             to
             marry
             a
             Daughter
             is
             to
             exclude
             her
             for
             ever
             from
             her
             Fathers
             Family
             ,
             and
             graft
             her
             into
             the
             Family
             of
             her
             Husband
             ,
             whose
             Sir
             Name
             she
             assumes
             at
             the
             same
             time
             instead
             of
             her
             own
             .
             Thence
             it
             comes
             to
             pass
             ,
             that
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             when
             they
             would
             say
             that
             a
             Maid
             is
             ally'd
             to
             the
             Family
             of
             her
             Husband
             ,
             never
             make
             use
             of
             the
             word
             Kin
             ,
             to
             goe
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             word
             Quei
             ,
             to
             return
             :
             asmuch
             as
             to
             say
             ,
             she
             is
             not
             gon
             ,
             but
             is
             return'd
             to
             her
             Family
             .
             Thus
             they
             explain
             themselves
             also
             when
             they
             speak
             of
             the
             dead
             :
             for
             they
             do
             not
             say
             ,
             such
             a
             one
             is
             dead
             ;
             but
             such
             a
             one
             is
             returned
             to
             the
             earth
             .
             By
             the
             same
             reason
             ,
             when
             a
             Grandfather
             speaks
             of
             the
             Children
             of
             his
             Son
             ,
             he
             calls
             them
             barely
             
               Sun
               Su
            
             ,
             my
             Grand
             Children
             :
             but
             when
             he
             speaks
             of
             his
             Daughters
             Children
             ,
             he
             calls
             them
             
               Vai
               Sun
               Su
            
             ,
             my
             Grand
             Children
             without
             :
             for
             they
             look
             upon
             them
             to
             be
             of
             the
             Son
             in
             Laws
             Family
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             sort
             of
             the
             King's
             Kindred
             by
             the
             Female
             side
             ,
             are
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             Brothers
             ,
             Uncles
             and
             other
             Kindred
             of
             the
             Queen
             ,
             the
             King's
             Sons
             in
             Law
             ,
             their
             Fathers
             ,
             Brothers
             ,
             Uncles
             ,
             and
             other
             
             Kindred
             .
             Out
             of
             these
             two
             sorts
             the
             King
             makes
             choice
             of
             some
             of
             the
             most
             considerable
             to
             compose
             this
             Tribunal
             and
             to
             act
             the
             same
             things
             as
             the
             Officers
             of
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Royal
             Bloud
             .
             They
             differ
             onely
             in
             this
             ,
             that
             the
             latter
             are
             of
             none
             of
             the
             nine
             Orders
             ,
             the
             former
             are
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             first
             and
             second
             Order
             .
             Though
             they
             esteem
             much
             more
             honourable
             the
             Titles
             of
             
               Hoam
               Cin
            
             ,
             and
             
               Fu
               Ma
            
             ,
             or
             the
             King's
             Kindred
             ,
             than
             that
             of
             Mandarin
             ,
             though
             of
             the
             first
             order
             :
             But
             this
             second
             sort
             of
             Kindred
             was
             also
             extirpated
             by
             the
             Tartars
             with
             the
             preceding
             Family
             .
             Thus
             far
             concerning
             the
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             and
             of
             the
             Government
             of
             the
             Court.
             We
             are
             now
             to
             give
             a
             short
             accompt
             of
             the
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Provinces
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               fourteenth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 He
                 causeth
                 a
                 choice
                 to
                 be
                 made
                 at
                 
                   Pe
                   Kim
                
                 of
                 several
                 young
                 Gentlemen
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 Here
                 we
                 are
                 to
                 observe
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 this
                 place
                 the
                 Author
                 onely
                 
                 speaks
                 of
                 what
                 was
                 practis'd
                 in
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 Chinese
                 Emperours
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 Tartar
                 Emperours
                 have
                 alter'd
                 this
                 Custome
                 ,
                 and
                 never
                 marry
                 their
                 Daughters
                 but
                 to
                 Kings
                 ,
                 Princes
                 or
                 Great
                 Lords
                 ,
                 as
                 our
                 Author
                 himself
                 acknowledges
                 a
                 little
                 lower
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XV.
             
          
           
             TO
             every
             one
             of
             the
             fifteen
             Provinces
             there
             belongs
             a
             supream
             Tribunal
             ,
             which
             has
             the
             oversight
             of
             all
             the
             rest
             .
             The
             President
             bears
             the
             Titles
             of
             
               Tu
               Tam
               ,
               Kiun
               Muen
               ,
               Tu
               Yuen
               ,
               Siun
               Fu
               ,
            
             with
             several
             other
             names
             ,
             which
             all
             signifie
             no
             more
             than
             Governour
             of
             a
             Province
             or
             Viceroy
             ,
             with
             us
             .
             These
             Presidents
             are
             of
             the
             first
             ,
             second
             or
             third
             order
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             King
             is
             pleas'd
             to
             regulate
             them
             ,
             when
             he
             sends
             them
             into
             the
             Provinces
             .
             They
             are
             intrusted
             with
             the
             whole
             Government
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             times
             of
             Peace
             as
             in
             War
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             command
             of
             the
             People
             and
             Souldiers
             as
             well
             in
             civil
             as
             criminal
             matters
             .
             They
             give
             notice
             to
             the
             King
             and
             the
             six
             superiour
             Tribunals
             of
             all
             matters
             of
             importance
             .
             On
             the
             other
             side
             all
             the
             Kings
             orders
             ,
             and
             dispatches
             with
             those
             of
             the
             Superiour
             Tribunals
             are
             directed
             to
             this
             Tribunal
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Province
             are
             bound
             to
             repair
             to
             this
             Tribunal
             in
             all
             affairs
             of
             moment
             .
             There
             are
             other
             Viceroys
             ,
             that
             govern
             two
             ,
             three
             or
             four
             Provinces
             ,
             and
             are
             call'd
             
               Tsum
               To
            
             ,
             as
             
               Leam
               Quam
               Tsum
               To
            
             ,
             or
             Viceroy
             of
             the
             Provinces
             of
             
               Quam
               Tum
            
             and
             
               Quam
               Si.
               Quam
               Tum
            
             signifies
             the
             Province
             extended
             toward
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             
               Quam
               si
            
             ,
             the
             Province
             extended
             toward
             the
             West
             .
             There
             are
             other
             such
             like
             Viceroys
             in
             China
             as
             in
             the
             Provinces
             bordering
             upon
             Tartary
             ,
             and
             other
             places
             of
             importance
             .
             And
             besides
             the
             Viceroy
             there
             is
             in
             every
             Province
             a
             Visiter
             call'd
             
               Ngan
               Tai
            
             ,
             or
             
               Ngan
               Yuen
            
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             formerly
             .
             Lastly
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             third
             considerable
             Officer
             call'd
             
               Tsum
               pim
            
             ,
             who
             commands
             all
             
             the
             Forces
             of
             the
             Province
             ,
             and
             is
             of
             the
             first
             Order
             of
             Mandarins
             .
             These
             three
             supream
             Presidents
             of
             the
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Provinces
             have
             under
             them
             several
             inferiour
             Mandarins
             ,
             who
             assist
             them
             in
             the
             dispatch
             of
             business
             ;
             and
             though
             these
             three
             Tribunals
             general
             have
             their
             Palaces
             in
             the
             Capital
             City
             ,
             nevertheless
             they
             are
             not
             always
             resident
             there
             ,
             but
             keep
             their
             Circuits
             from
             place
             to
             place
             as
             business
             requires
             .
             But
             for
             the
             particular
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Capital
             Cities
             they
             are
             these
             that
             follow
             .
          
           
             Every
             Capital
             City
             has
             two
             Tribunals
             ,
             in
             which
             properly
             consists
             the
             whole
             Government
             of
             the
             Province
             ;
             the
             one
             for
             Civil
             the
             other
             for
             criminal
             affairs
             .
             The
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Pu
               chim
               su
            
             ,
             the
             President
             of
             which
             is
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             first
             degree
             of
             the
             second
             Order
             .
             The
             Palace
             belonging
             to
             this
             Tribunal
             ,
             like
             those
             at
             the
             Court
             ,
             contains
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             two
             other
             Tribunals
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             inferiour
             but
             Assistants
             to
             the
             first
             Tribunal
             .
             That
             on
             the
             left
             hand
             is
             the
             most
             considerable
             and
             is
             call'd
             
               Tsan
               chim
            
             :
             having
             two
             Presidents
             ,
             both
             of
             the
             second
             degree
             of
             the
             third
             Order
             .
             The
             other
             on
             the
             right
             hand
             is
             call'd
             
               Tsan
               y
            
             ;
             the
             Presidents
             of
             which
             are
             both
             equal
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             second
             degree
             of
             the
             fourth
             Order
             .
             To
             all
             these
             three
             Tribunals
             belong
             a
             great
             number
             of
             inferiour
             Mandarins
             ,
             call'd
             
               Xeu
               lien
               quen
            
             ,
             whose
             business
             it
             is
             to
             decide
             all
             Civil
             matters
             ,
             and
             to
             pay
             and
             receive
             all
             the
             Revenues
             of
             the
             Province
             .
          
           
             The
             Criminal
             Tribunal
             is
             call'd
             
               Nghan
               cha
               su
            
             ,
             and
             the
             President
             who
             is
             of
             the
             third
             Order
             has
             no
             Assessors
             ,
             but
             two
             Classes
             of
             Mandarins
             under
             him
             .
             Those
             of
             the
             first
             Classis
             ,
             who
             are
             call'd
             
               To
               su
            
             ,
             are
             of
             the
             fourth
             Order
             .
             They
             of
             the
             second
             Classis
             ,
             who
             are
             call'd
             
               Cien
               su
            
             ,
             are
             of
             the
             
             fifth
             Order
             ;
             and
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             these
             two
             Classes
             are
             call'd
             
               Tao
               li
            
             ,
             or
             
               Tao
               tus●…
               ▪
            
             These
             
               Tao
               li
            
             are
             the
             Visiters
             of
             all
             the
             Quarters
             of
             the
             Province
             in
             which
             they
             have
             their
             Tribunals
             .
             Some
             of
             them
             take
             care
             of
             the
             Post
             Horses
             ,
             the
             Royal
             Inns
             ,
             and
             the
             King's
             Barks
             ,
             so
             far
             as
             their
             Jurisdiction
             reaches
             ,
             and
             are
             call'd
             
               Ye
               chuen
               tao
               ▪
            
             Others
             that
             are
             call'd
             
               Pim
               pi
               tao
            
             ,
             are
             intrusted
             to
             inspect
             the
             several
             Troops
             and
             Companies
             of
             the
             Province
             ;
             others
             to
             drain
             the
             Lands
             and
             level
             the
             Highways
             ,
             who
             are
             call'd
             
               Tun
               tien
               tao
            
             .
             This
             Tribunal
             has
             power
             to
             punish
             Criminals
             by
             banishment
             ,
             as
             also
             by
             confiscation
             of
             Goods
             and
             lo●…s
             of
             Life
             .
             And
             if
             there
             be
             no
             Visiter
             in
             the
             Province
             ,
             it
             has
             an
             eye
             over
             all
             the
             other
             Mandarins
             ,
             and
             gives
             notice
             to
             the
             King
             of
             what
             passes
             in
             the
             Province
             ,
             when
             business
             requires
             their
             information
             ▪
             In
             a
             word
             ,
             these
             two
             Tribunals
             do
             the
             Office
             of
             the
             six
             supream
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             and
             are
             as
             it
             were
             their
             Substitutes
             .
          
           
             Every
             Province
             is
             divided
             into
             Districts
             ,
             and
             to
             every
             District
             belongs
             a
             Mandarin
             call'd
             
               Tao
               ●…i
            
             ,
             who
             is
             as
             it
             were
             a
             Visiter
             ,
             or
             Inspe●…er
             into
             the
             manners
             and
             behaviour
             of
             the
             Officers
             within
             his
             Jurisdiction
             .
             He
             takes
             care
             to
             solicit
             the
             Governours
             of
             the
             Towns
             and
             Cities
             to
             make
             quick
             payments
             of
             their
             duties
             to
             the
             King
             ▪
             There
             are
             some
             also
             that
             take
             no
             less
             care
             of
             the
             Rivers
             and
             Sea
             Coasts
             in
             their
             Quarters
             .
             They
             that
             look
             after
             the
             Rivers
             are
             call'd
             
               Ho
               tao
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Surveyors
             of
             the
             Sea
             Coasts
             
               H●…
               tao
            
             .
             All
             these
             Mandarins
             belong
             to
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Inspecters
             or
             Overseers
             call'd
             
               Co
               tao
            
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             have
             already
             spoken
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             Cities
             of
             the
             first
             rank
             whether
             Capital
             or
             no
             ,
             have
             a
             Tribunal
             where
             the
             Governour
             of
             the
             City
             or
             Territory
             presides
             ,
             who
             is
             a
             Mandarin
             
             of
             the
             fourth
             Order
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             
               Chi
               fu
            
             .
             He
             has
             three
             Assessors
             ,
             the
             first
             call'd
             
               Tum
               chi
            
             ,
             the
             second
             
               Tum
               pu●…n
            
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             
               Chui
               Quen
            
             ,
             who
             are
             of
             the
             sixth
             and
             seventh
             Order
             .
             They
             are
             also
             call'd
             second
             ,
             third
             and
             fourth
             Lord
             ,
             of
             the
             second
             ,
             third
             or
             fourth
             Chair
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             second
             ,
             third
             or
             fourth
             City
             ;
             in
             regard
             the
             President
             is
             call'd
             the
             first
             Lord
             ,
             the
             first
             Chair
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             City
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             four
             other
             inferiour
             Mandarins
             call'd
             
               Kim
               lie
               chu
               su
               ,
               Chao
               mo
               ,
            
             and
             
               Kim
               k●…ao
            
             ,
             which
             are
             onely
             of
             the
             seventh
             ,
             eighth
             or
             ninth
             Order
             .
             The
             Imployment
             of
             this
             Tribunal
             is
             the
             same
             with
             that
             of
             the
             Governour
             of
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             .
             All
             the
             Cities
             of
             the
             Empire
             are
             provided
             with
             such
             Mandarins
             as
             these
             .
             But
             if
             it
             be
             a
             place
             of
             great
             trade
             ,
             or
             that
             the
             Territory
             be
             of
             a
             large
             extent
             ,
             then
             the
             number
             of
             these
             Mandarins
             is
             doubl'd
             .
          
           
             The
             Cities
             of
             the
             second
             rank
             call'd
             Cheu
             are
             of
             two
             sorts
             ▪
             Those
             of
             the
             first
             sort
             are
             subject
             to
             the
             Capitals
             onely
             ,
             as
             the
             Cities
             of
             the
             first
             Rank
             ,
             and
             have
             Cities
             which
             depend
             upon
             them
             .
             Those
             of
             the
             second
             sort
             are
             subject
             to
             the
             Cities
             of
             the
             first
             Order
             ,
             whether
             they
             have
             Cities
             depending
             upon
             them
             or
             no.
             The
             President
             of
             these
             Cities
             is
             call'd
             
               Chi
               cheu
            
             .
             He
             is
             of
             the
             second
             degree
             of
             the
             fifth
             Order
             ,
             and
             has
             two
             Assessors
             ;
             of
             which
             the
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Cheu
               ●…um
            
             ,
             and
             the
             second
             
               Cheu
               poon
            
             ,
             who
             are
             of
             the
             second
             degree
             of
             the
             sixth
             and
             second
             Order
             ▪
             He
             has
             under
             him
             also
             a
             third
             Mandarin
             call'd
             
               L●…
               mo
            
             ,
             of
             the
             second
             degree
             of
             the
             ninth
             Order
             .
             The
             people
             call
             this
             Governour
             
               Tai
               Ye
            
             ,
             or
             the
             great
             or
             first
             Lord
             ;
             the
             other
             three
             the
             second
             ,
             third
             or
             fourth
             Lord.
             Their
             Employment
             is
             the
             same
             with
             the
             Governours
             of
             the
             Cities
             of
             the
             first
             Rank
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             other
             Cities
             of
             the
             Empire
             have
             a
             Tribunal
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             President
             is
             call'd
             
               Chi
               hien
            
             ,
             
             and
             is
             of
             the
             first
             degree
             of
             the
             seventh
             Order
             .
             He
             has
             also
             two
             Assessors
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Hien
               chim
            
             ,
             of
             the
             eighth
             Order
             ;
             and
             the
             second
             who
             is
             of
             the
             Ninth
             is
             call'd
             
               Chu
               pu
            
             .
             He
             has
             also
             a
             third
             under
             him
             who
             is
             call'd
             
               Tien
               su
            
             ,
             who
             is
             of
             no
             Order
             ,
             but
             if
             he
             acquit
             himself
             well
             of
             his
             employment
             for
             three
             years
             ,
             the
             Governor
             of
             the
             City
             gives
             him
             a
             Certificate
             to
             the
             Governour
             of
             the
             Superiour
             City
             ,
             and
             the
             Governour
             of
             that
             City
             to
             the
             Governour
             of
             the
             Capital
             .
             The
             last
             Governour
             certifies
             to
             the
             two
             grand
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Capital
             City
             ,
             and
             they
             to
             the
             Viceroy
             .
             The
             Viceroy
             writes
             to
             the
             grand
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             and
             they
             to
             the
             Counsellors
             of
             State
             ,
             who
             inform
             the
             King
             :
             and
             by
             him
             generally
             he
             is
             made
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             the
             eighth
             or
             ninth
             Order
             .
             This
             is
             the
             Road
             which
             the
             Mandarins
             observe
             for
             their
             promotion
             to
             new
             dignities
             .
             But
             this
             good
             Fortune
             never
             befalls
             them
             ,
             if
             they
             do
             not
             purchase
             it
             by
             Presents
             proportionable
             to
             what
             they
             may
             squeeze
             out
             of
             their
             Employments
             ;
             and
             this
             kind
             of
             trade
             is
             driven
             as
             openly
             as
             if
             it
             were
             an
             establish'd
             Law
             among
             them
             .
             This
             is
             the
             reason
             that
             Justice
             and
             Employments
             are
             sold
             as
             at
             an
             outry
             ,
             all
             over
             the
             Empire
             ,
             but
             more
             especially
             at
             Court
             ;
             so
             that
             there
             is
             no
             body
             but
             the
             King
             who
             can
             be
             properly
             said
             to
             mind
             the
             publick
             good
             ,
             all
             the
             rest
             regarding
             nothing
             but
             their
             private
             interests
             .
             And
             of
             this
             manner
             of
             proceeding
             I
             will
             bring
             ye
             one
             example
             ,
             of
             which
             I
             my self
             was
             an
             eye
             witness
             .
          
           
             There
             was
             a
             young
             Gentleman
             whose
             name
             was
             Simon
             ,
             a
             very
             good
             Christian
             ,
             who
             was
             a
             Mandarin
             of
             a
             City
             of
             the
             second
             Rank
             ,
             by
             a
             particular
             favour
             which
             the
             Emperour
             shew'd
             him
             ,
             in
             regard
             his
             Father
             ,
             Viceroy
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               ●…n
               si
               ▪
            
             
             was
             slain
             fighting
             against
             an
             Army
             of
             Robbers
             that
             had
             rais'd
             a
             Rebellion
             in
             the
             Province
             .
             The
             three
             years
             of
             his
             Employment
             being
             expired
             ,
             he
             was
             advanced
             to
             be
             Mandarin
             of
             a
             City
             of
             the
             first
             Rank
             ,
             and
             after
             the
             expiration
             of
             that
             Employment
             he
             repaired
             to
             Court
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             custome
             ,
             in
             hopes
             to
             be
             preferred
             to
             another
             City
             yet
             more
             considerable
             for
             the
             recompence
             of
             his
             Services
             duely
             perform'd
             .
             The
             King
             referr'd
             his
             Petition
             to
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             .
             Presently
             Letters
             were
             sent
             him
             from
             that
             Tribunal
             to
             le●…
             him
             know
             ,
             that
             if
             he
             would
             deposite
             in
             a
             third
             hand
             fourteen
             V●…n
             of
             Silver
             ,
             which
             amounts
             to
             about
             a
             hundred
             thousand
             Crowns
             ,
             they
             would
             give
             him
             the
             Government
             of
             the
             City
             of
             
               ●…un
               ●…m
            
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xan
               si
            
             ;
             which
             is
             one
             of
             the
             best
             peopl'd
             ,
             the
             most
             remarkable
             for
             Trade
             ,
             and
             the
             richest
             Cities
             of
             the
             whole
             Empire
             .
             To
             which
             this
             vertuous
             Christian
             return'd
             for
             answer
             ,
             that
             if
             he
             had
             such
             a
             summ
             by
             him
             ,
             nay
             though
             it
             were
             far
             less
             ,
             he
             would
             never
             go
             about
             to
             move
             for
             any
             more
             employment
             ,
             in
             regard
             a
             smaller
             summ
             than
             that
             would
             suffice
             him
             to
             live
             at
             his
             ease
             .
             Nor
             did
             he
             think
             it
             convenient
             to
             take
             up
             so
             large
             a
             sum
             at
             great
             interest
             ,
             as
             others
             did
             ;
             by
             which
             they
             were
             forc'd
             for
             satisfaction
             of
             their
             Creditors
             ,
             and
             to
             glut
             their
             insatiate
             avarice
             ,
             to
             turn
             real
             Tyrants
             and
             greedy
             Wolves
             ,
             that
             devour'd
             the
             Cities
             ,
             and
             opprest
             the
             miserable
             people
             wherever
             they
             came
             ,
             which
             they
             were
             otherwise
             bound
             to
             protect
             and
             defend
             .
             So
             that
             they
             might
             dispose
             of
             that
             Employment
             to
             him
             that
             was
             able
             to
             purchase
             it
             ;
             but
             that
             for
             his
             part
             he
             would
             be
             contented
             with
             what
             sell
             to
             his
             ●…t
             Now
             it
             is
             the
             custom
             to
             write
             as
             many
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             as
             there
             are
             Mandarins
             that
             stand
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             upon
             little
             thin
             boards
             ,
             which
             
             are
             thrown
             into
             a
             Vessel
             ,
             and
             every
             one
             is
             Governour
             of
             that
             City
             of
             which
             he
             draws
             the
             Name
             .
             Nevertheless
             when
             a
             man
             has
             agreed
             with
             the
             Tribunal
             ,
             the
             Tablets
             are
             so
             order'd
             that
             the
             Person
             draws
             the
             City
             which
             he
             desires
             .
             However
             this
             Artifice
             fail'd
             a
             Mandarin
             in
             the
             year
             1669
             ,
             who
             had
             given
             a
             good
             Summ
             to
             a
             Prothonotary
             ,
             who
             had
             promis'd
             him
             the
             ready
             draught
             of
             a
             City
             of
             great
             Trade
             ,
             and
             not
             far
             distant
             .
             For
             he
             drew
             a
             miserable
             City
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Quei
               cheu
            
             ,
             the
             most
             remote
             and
             the
             poorest
             in
             the
             whole
             Empire
             .
             Thereupon
             the
             wretched
             and
             unfortunate
             Mandarin
             quite
             out
             of
             his
             wits
             at
             his
             ill
             Success
             ,
             without
             any
             respect
             to
             the
             Tribunal
             ,
             or
             the
             presence
             of
             above
             three
             hundred
             Mandarins
             ,
             rose
             up
             all
             in
             a
             rage
             (
             for
             they
             draw
             upon
             their
             knees
             )
             crying
             out
             with
             a
             loud
             voice
             he
             was
             undone
             ,
             and
             throwing
             off
             his
             Robe
             and
             his
             Cap
             ,
             fell
             upon
             the
             Prothonotary
             ,
             threw
             him
             upon
             the
             ground
             ,
             and
             with
             his
             Foot
             and
             Fist
             belabouring
             the
             poor
             Officer
             ,
             cry'd
             out
             ,
             K●…ave
             and
             Impostor
             as
             thou
             art
             ,
             where
             is
             the
             mony
             that
             I
             gave
             thee
             ?
             where
             is
             the
             City
             of
             which
             thou
             gav'st
             me
             a
             promise
             ,
             with
             many
             other
             reproaches
             of
             the
             same
             Nature
             ?
             Thereupon
             the
             Tribunal
             broke
             up
             ,
             and
             the
             Mandarin
             and
             the
             Prothonotary
             were
             both
             committed
             to
             the
             Prison
             of
             the
             Criminal
             Tribunal
             ,
             where
             they
             were
             both
             in
             great
             hazard
             of
             being
             condemn'd
             to
             death
             .
             For
             such
             sort
             of
             merchandizing
             is
             death
             by
             the
             Laws
             ,
             besides
             that
             the
             scandalous
             Circumstances
             of
             the
             Action
             render'd
             the
             Crime
             much
             more
             enormous
             .
          
           
             In
             all
             the
             Towns
             and
             Cities
             of
             the
             Empire
             there
             is
             a
             Tribunal
             compos'd
             of
             a
             President
             ,
             and
             at
             least
             two
             or
             three
             Assessours
             ;
             which
             is
             call'd
             
               Kiao
               quon
            
             ,
             or
             Judges
             of
             the
             men
             of
             Letters
             .
             For
             ,
             that
             their
             
             business
             is
             to
             take
             care
             of
             Learning
             and
             Learned
             Men
             ;
             and
             more
             especially
             to
             overlook
             the
             Batchelours
             of
             Art
             ,
             which
             are
             very
             numerous
             ,
             and
             frequently
             very
             poor
             ,
             yet
             trusting
             to
             their
             Privileges
             ,
             become
             bold
             and
             insolent
             ,
             and
             practice
             many
             Acts
             of
             Violence
             and
             Knavery
             to
             get
             Money
             from
             Poor
             and
             Rich
             ,
             and
             many
             times
             throw
             off
             that
             respect
             which
             is
             due
             to
             the
             Presidents
             and
             Governours
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Ancient
             Kings
             with
             much
             prudence
             erected
             this
             Court
             to
             apprehend
             and
             punish
             them
             ,
             either
             by
             whipping
             or
             other
             penalties
             according
             to
             their
             demerits
             ,
             and
             to
             degrade
             them
             if
             incorrigible
             .
             Which
             is
             the
             reason
             that
             the
             Batchelours
             both
             fear
             and
             respect
             those
             Mandarins
             after
             an
             extraordinary
             manner
             .
             This
             Court
             also
             has
             power
             to
             assemble
             from
             time
             to
             time
             ,
             all
             the
             Learned
             Men
             of
             the
             City
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             Batchelours
             ,
             Licentiates
             ,
             Doctours
             and
             old
             Mandarins
             excus'd
             from
             Service
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             Age
             ,
             to
             treat
             of
             Sciences
             and
             Vertue
             .
             To
             which
             purpose
             they
             give
             them
             Themes
             taken
             out
             of
             their
             Books
             ,
             upon
             which
             they
             make
             several
             Comments
             ,
             which
             this
             Tribunal
             examines
             ,
             &
             publickly
             either
             applaud
             or
             discommends
             ;
             so
             that
             these
             Officers
             are
             rather
             Professours
             than
             Mandarins
             .
             Besides
             these
             Mandarins
             which
             are
             common
             to
             all
             the
             Empire
             ,
             there
             are
             other
             Tribunals
             appropriated
             to
             particular
             Places
             and
             Provinces
             :
             as
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Salt
             ;
             who
             take
             care
             to
             distribute
             it
             over
             all
             China
             by
             publick
             undertakers
             ,
             and
             to
             prevent
             private
             Merchants
             from
             uttering
             any
             ,
             to
             the
             prejudice
             of
             the
             King's
             Revenue
             .
             Other
             Mandarins
             there
             are
             who
             are
             as
             it
             were
             Stewards
             of
             the
             Rents
             belonging
             to
             the
             King
             and
             the
             great
             Lords
             ,
             more
             especially
             in
             the
             Provinces
             that
             lye
             upon
             the
             Sea.
             There
             is
             also
             another
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Ti
               Kin
               Su
            
             ,
             and
             by
             
             the
             
               Portugueses
               Tai
               qui
               si
            
             For
             indeed
             the
             Portugueses
             corrupt
             all
             the
             Chinese
             words
             :
             For
             the
             City
             of
             
               Hiam
               Xan
            
             or
             the
             Mount
             of
             Odours
             ,
             they
             call
             
               Ham
               Sam.
               Ma
               Cao
            
             is
             call'd
             
               Ama
               gao
            
             .
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             Bay
             or
             Gulph
             of
             the
             Idol
             Ama.
             For
             Gao
             signifies
             a
             Bay
             ;
             and
             Ama
             is
             the
             Name
             of
             an
             Idol
             ,
             which
             is
             worship'd
             in
             that
             Part.
             
          
           
             These
             are
             the
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Letter'd
             Mandarins
             :
             Those
             of
             the
             Military
             Mandarins
             are
             yet
             more
             numerous
             .
             For
             besides
             that
             they
             are
             in
             all
             Places
             where
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             the
             Learned
             Mandarins
             are
             erected
             ,
             they
             are
             also
             in
             several
             important
             Places
             that
             separate
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             in
             all
             Ports
             and
             Bays
             ,
             and
             many
             more
             upon
             the
             Frontiers
             next
             to
             Tartary
             .
             There
             is
             likewise
             sent
             from
             the
             Court
             a
             Catalogue
             of
             all
             the
             Learned
             Mandarins
             which
             is
             printed
             and
             reprinted
             every
             Season
             of
             the
             Year
             ,
             wherein
             are
             set
             down
             the
             Names
             ,
             the
             Titles
             ,
             the
             Countrey
             and
             the
             Time
             when
             every
             one
             receiv'd
             their
             Degrees
             .
             And
             such
             another
             Catalogue
             is
             printed
             of
             the
             Military
             Mandarins
             .
             The
             Number
             of
             the
             Learned
             Mandarins
             over
             all
             the
             Empire
             is
             thirteen
             Thousand
             six
             Hundred
             forty
             Seven
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             the
             Military
             Mandarins
             amounts
             to
             eighteen
             Thousand
             five
             hundred
             and
             twenty
             :
             in
             all
             thirty
             two
             Thousand
             one
             hundred
             sixty
             seven
             Mandarins
             ,
             which
             though
             it
             be
             most
             certain
             may
             seem
             a
             thing
             incredible
             Though
             their
             Distribution
             ,
             their
             Distinction
             ,
             and
             their
             Subordination
             as
             much
             surpasses
             belief
             :
             It
             seems
             as
             if
             the
             Legislators
             had
             omitted
             nothing
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             had
             foreseen
             all
             Inconveniences
             that
             were
             to
             be
             fear'd
             .
             So
             that
             I
             am
             perswaded
             no
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             World
             could
             be
             better
             govern'd
             or
             more
             happy
             ,
             if
             the
             Conduct
             and
             Probity
             of
             the
             Officers
             were
             but
             answerable
             to
             the
             Institution
             of
             the
             Government
             .
             But
             in
             regard
             they
             
             have
             no
             knowledge
             of
             the
             True
             God
             ,
             nor
             of
             the
             Eternal
             Rewards
             and
             Punishments
             of
             the
             other
             World
             ,
             they
             are
             subject
             to
             no
             remorses
             of
             Conscience
             ;
             they
             place
             all
             their
             happiness
             in
             Pleasure
             ,
             in
             Dignity
             and
             Riches
             ;
             and
             therefore
             to
             obtain
             these
             fading
             Advantages
             they
             violate
             all
             the
             Laws
             of
             God
             and
             Man
             ;
             trampling
             under
             foot
             Religion
             ,
             Reason
             ,
             Justice
             ,
             Honesty
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Rights
             of
             Consanguinity
             and
             Friendship
             .
             The
             Inferiour
             Officers
             mind
             nothing
             but
             how
             to
             defraud
             the
             Superiour
             Mandarins
             ;
             they
             the
             Supream
             Tribunals
             ,
             and
             all
             together
             how
             to
             cheat
             the
             King
             :
             Which
             they
             know
             how
             to
             do
             with
             so
             much
             cunning
             and
             address
             ,
             making
             use
             in
             their
             memorials
             of
             words
             and
             expressions
             so
             soft
             ,
             so
             honest
             ,
             so
             resp●…
             〈◊〉
             ,
             so
             humble
             and
             full
             of
             Adulation
             ;
             and
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             so
             plausible
             and
             seemingly
             disinteren
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ●…ded
             Prince
             frequently
             takes
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             for
             solemn
             Truths
             .
             So
             that
             the
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             themselves
             continually
             oppress'd
             and
             〈◊〉
             ●…tud
             ,
             without
             any
             reason
             ,
             murmur
             and
             〈◊〉
             ●…ditions
             and
             Revolts
             ;
             which
             have
             caus'd
             ●…o
             much
             ●…ne
             and
             so
             many
             Changes
             in
             the
             Empire
             .
             Nevertheless
             there
             is
             no
             reason
             that
             the
             Excellency
             and
             Perfection
             of
             the
             Laws
             of
             China
             should
             suffer
             for
             the
             depravity
             and
             wickedness
             of
             the
             Magistrates
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XVI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Grandeur
             of
             the
             Emperour
             of
             China
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             Revenues
             .
          
           
             I
             Have
             observ'd
             in
             the
             third
             Chapter
             the
             three
             Opinions
             which
             the
             Chineses
             have
             concerning
             
             the
             beginning
             of
             their
             Empire
             .
             Nor
             do
             they
             esteem
             their
             Kings
             to
             be
             of
             less
             Antiquity
             ,
             in
             regard
             their
             Government
             has
             been
             always
             Monarchical
             and
             absolute
             without
             any
             mixture
             of
             Aristocracy
             .
             I
             have
             also
             observ'd
             that
             
               Cum
               fu
               cius
            
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Learned
             Men
             reject
             the
             first
             Opinion
             as
             merely
             fabulous
             .
             I
             shall
             therefore
             only
             add
             ,
             that
             according
             to
             the
             second
             Opinion
             that
             the
             Chineses
             were
             under
             the
             Government
             of
             Kings
             two
             thousand
             nine
             hundred
             fifty
             two
             years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             Christ.
             King
             Fohi
             was
             the
             first
             of
             their
             Kings
             ,
             and
             the
             Founder
             of
             their
             Empite
             ,
             which
             began
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xen
               si
            
             ,
             the
             most
             western
             part
             of
             China
             toward
             the
             North.
             The
             Chineses
             paint
             this
             King
             cloath'd
             with
             the
             leaves
             of
             Trees
             ,
             and
             all
             agree
             that
             his
             Kingdom
             was
             of
             no
             great
             extent
             at
             first
             ,
             nor
             his
             People
             very
             numerous
             .
             Their
             Histories
             relate
             ,
             how
             that
             when
             this
             King
             began
             to
             reign
             ,
             the
             Chineses
             liv'd
             upon
             Herbs
             and
             wild
             Fruits
             ▪
             drank
             the
             Blood
             of
             Beasts
             ,
             and
             clad
             themselves
             in
             Skins
             .
             But
             that
             he
             taught
             them
             to
             make
             Nets
             as
             well
             for
             Hunting
             as
             Fishing
             ,
             and
             was
             the
             first
             inventer
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Letters
             .
             All
             the
             Learned
             believ'd
             this
             Opinion
             probable
             ,
             and
             some
             there
             are
             that
             hold
             it
             for
             certain
             and
             unquestionable
             .
             In
             a
             word
             it
             seems
             very
             probable
             ,
             that
             Fohi
             might
             be
             the
             first
             King
             of
             China
             ;
             in
             the
             regard
             that
             if
             we
             set
             aside
             the
             Fables
             which
             the
             Chineses
             have
             added
             ,
             and
             of
             which
             the
             Greeks
             and
             Romans
             are
             no
             less
             guilty
             when
             they
             speak
             of
             their
             first
             Founders
             ,
             the
             Sequel
             of
             their
             Story
             and
             the
             successive
             Train
             of
             their
             Kings
             seems
             to
             have
             much
             of
             Truth
             .
             For
             according
             to
             the
             Computation
             of
             their
             Histories
             and
             Chronologies
             ,
             we
             clearly
             find
             that
             the
             first
             King
             of
             China
             began
             to
             reign
             about
             two
             hundred
             years
             after
             the
             Universal
             deluge
             according
             to
             the
             
             Version
             of
             the
             seventy
             Interpreters
             .
             In
             which
             time
             the
             Descendants
             of
             Noah
             might
             well
             spread
             themselves
             to
             the
             farther
             end
             of
             Asia
             ;
             seeing
             that
             within
             the
             same
             space
             they
             expanded
             themselves
             over
             all
             the
             Western
             Parts
             of
             Asia
             ,
             into
             Africa
             and
             a
             good
             part
             of
             Europe
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             Opinion
             asserts
             that
             the
             first
             King
             of
             China
             was
             Yao
             ,
             who
             according
             to
             their
             Chronology
             began
             to
             reign
             four
             thousand
             and
             twenty
             five
             years
             ago
             .
             Their
             Histories
             relate
             that
             in
             his
             time
             there
             were
             both
             Mathematicians
             and
             Astrologers
             ;
             that
             he
             caus'd
             great
             Ditches
             and
             Chanels
             to
             be
             made
             for
             the
             draining
             away
             of
             the
             Waters
             of
             the
             Grand
             Deluge
             ,
             that
             till
             then
             cover'd
             the
             Valleys
             and
             the
             Champaign
             Grounds
             .
             This
             King
             was
             a
             Prince
             illustrious
             for
             his
             Vertues
             and
             his
             Transcendent
             parts
             ,
             and
             is
             still
             honour'd
             as
             one
             of
             the
             wi
             sest
             and
             most
             vertuous
             Princes
             of
             China
             :
             this
             Opi
             nion
             passes
             for
             currant
             and
             unquestionable
             among
             the
             Chineses
             .
             And
             all
             the
             Fathers
             that
             have
             had
             the
             greatest
             Knowledge
             and
             Insight
             into
             their
             Books
             and
             Histories
             ,
             hold
             this
             latter
             Opinion
             for
             certain
             ,
             and
             the
             second
             for
             probable
             .
             And
             because
             that
             according
             to
             the
             Version
             of
             the
             Holy
             Scripture
             call'd
             the
             Vulgar
             ,
             it
             would
             of
             necessity
             follow
             that
             Fohi
             and
             Yao
             must
             have
             been
             born
             and
             reign'd
             before
             the
             Deluge
             ,
             therefore
             we
             are
             forc'd
             in
             this
             Countrey
             to
             follow
             the
             Version
             of
             the
             Seventy
             .
             Which
             being
             granted
             ,
             the
             History
             of
             this
             Empire
             seems
             very
             probable
             ,
             well
             trac'd
             ,
             and
             conformable
             not
             only
             to
             the
             
               Egyptian
               ,
               Assyrian
               ,
               Greek
            
             and
             Roman
             Histories
             ,
             but
             which
             is
             yet
             far
             more
             surprising
             ,
             to
             the
             Chronology
             of
             Sacred
             Scripture
             .
          
           
             According
             to
             the
             second
             Opinion
             then
             which
             is
             most
             probable
             ,
             from
             King
             Tohi
             ,
             who
             began
             to
             
             reign
             about
             two
             hundred
             years
             after
             the
             Deluge
             to
             the
             Emperour
             
               Cam
               Hi
            
             ,
             who
             reign'd
             in
             the
             year
             1668.
             
             There
             have
             been
             two
             hundred
             thirty
             six
             Kings
             ,
             divided
             into
             twenty
             two
             sidifferent
             Families
             ,
             who
             have
             govern'd
             this
             Empire
             for
             the
             space
             of
             four
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             thirty
             four
             years
             .
             Which
             Families
             endur'd
             for
             a
             longer
             or
             lesser
             time
             ,
             according
             as
             they
             govern'd
             well
             or
             ill
             ;
             and
             till
             another
             revolting
             ,
             put
             the
             King
             to
             death
             ,
             routed
             out
             all
             the
             Princes
             of
             his
             Family
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Nobility
             which
             he
             had
             rais'd
             ,
             and
             made
             himself
             Master
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             At
             the
             beginning
             these
             Rebels
             were
             either
             Petty
             Kings
             or
             Great
             Lords
             :
             But
             afterwards
             they
             happen'd
             to
             be
             Men
             of
             low
             Birth
             and
             mean
             Condition
             .
             The
             first
             King
             of
             the
             preceding
             Family
             ,
             was
             a
             Person
             of
             very
             obscure
             Parentage
             ,
             whose
             Name
             was
             Chum
             .
             He
             was
             a
             long
             time
             a
             Servant
             among
             the
             Priests
             of
             the
             Idols
             ;
             after
             which
             ,
             he
             betook
             himself
             to
             be
             a
             Robber
             upon
             the
             High-way
             .
             Afterwards
             being
             banish'd
             he
             put
             himself
             at
             the
             head
             of
             certain
             Free
             booters
             ,
             and
             after
             a
             great
             deal
             of
             prosperous
             Success
             made
             himself
             Master
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             At
             his
             Coronation
             he
             call'd
             himself
             
               Hum
               Vu
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Valiant
             and
             Warlike
             :
             but
             then
             the
             Learned
             Flatterers
             advanc'd
             his
             Titles
             ,
             and
             call'd
             him
             
               Tai
               Mim
            
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             Reign
             of
             great
             Luster
             .
             His
             Posterity
             reign'd
             in
             China
             two
             hundred
             seventy
             six
             Years
             ,
             and
             till
             the
             Year
             1643
             ,
             that
             the
             Tartars
             made
             themselves
             Masters
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             and
             destroy'd
             the
             Royal
             Family
             .
             All
             those
             that
             revolt
             pretend
             that
             it
             is
             by
             the
             decree
             of
             Heaven
             ,
             that
             sent
             them
             to
             ease
             the
             People
             opprest
             by
             the
             Tyranny
             of
             their
             Governours
             :
             And
             this
             Opinion
             ,
             or
             rather
             Vision
             finds
             so
             much
             credit
             in
             the
             Priests
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             and
             is
             so
             deeply
             rooted
             in
             
             their
             minds
             as
             if
             it
             were
             one
             of
             the
             greatest
             Truths
             in
             the
             World
             ,
             insomuch
             that
             there
             is
             hardly
             one
             among
             them
             that
             does
             not
             hope
             to
             be
             an
             Emperour
             at
             one
             time
             or
             other
             :
             And
             this
             is
             the
             reason
             of
             those
             frequent
             Revolts
             which
             we
             find
             in
             this
             Empire
             ,
             to
             day
             in
             one
             Province
             ,
             to
             morrow
             in
             another
             ;
             nay
             many
             times
             onely
             in
             one
             City
             or
             in
             one
             Town
             .
             Many
             times
             you
             shall
             see
             a
             miserable
             Wretch
             advanc'd
             to
             be
             a
             King
             ,
             sometimes
             by
             a
             Troop
             of
             fifty
             Bandity
             ,
             sometimes
             by
             a
             hundred
             or
             two
             hundred
             Peasants
             ,
             but
             more
             frequently
             by
             a
             certain
             Sect
             of
             Idolaters
             ,
             who
             make
             a
             Profession
             of
             creating
             new
             Kings
             ,
             and
             establishing
             a
             new
             Government
             in
             the
             Empire
             .
             'T
             is
             a
             wonderfull
             thing
             to
             see
             the
             Comedies
             ,
             or
             rather
             Tragedies
             ,
             which
             are
             acted
             every
             day
             upon
             the
             Theatre
             of
             this
             Empire
             .
             For
             he
             that
             but
             to
             day
             was
             but
             an
             ignominious
             Robber
             ,
             and
             under
             that
             Notion
             both
             dreaded
             and
             hated
             ,
             let
             him
             but
             shift
             his
             Habit
             ,
             and
             take
             upon
             him
             the
             Crown
             ,
             the
             Robes
             and
             Ornaments
             of
             a
             King
             ,
             and
             the
             same
             Man
             to
             morrow
             shall
             be
             belov'd
             and
             respected
             by
             all
             the
             World
             ,
             and
             though
             he
             is
             known
             to
             be
             of
             vile
             and
             abject
             Birth
             ,
             they
             shall
             presently
             call
             him
             the
             Son
             of
             Heaven
             ,
             and
             Lord
             of
             the
             Universe
             .
             For
             that
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             said
             ,
             call
             their
             Kingdom
             
               Tien
               Hia
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             all
             that
             which
             is
             under
             the
             Heaven
             ,
             or
             
               Su
               hai
               Chinun
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             all
             that
             is
             between
             the
             four
             Seas
             .
             Titles
             conformable
             to
             their
             Pride
             and
             their
             Ignorance
             ,
             and
             to
             their
             scorn
             of
             Strangers
             :
             So
             that
             it
             is
             the
             same
             thing
             among
             them
             ,
             to
             call
             a
             Man
             Master
             of
             all
             that
             is
             under
             the
             Heaven
             ,
             or
             between
             the
             four
             Seas
             ,
             as
             to
             call
             him
             King
             of
             China
             .
          
           
             The
             Chineses
             give
             their
             Emperour
             several
             losty
             and
             magnificent
             Titles
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             they
             call
             
             him
             
               Tien
               Hu
            
             ,
             Son
             of
             Heaven
             ;
             
               Xim
               Tien
               Hu
            
             ,
             Holy
             Son
             of
             Heaven
             ;
             
               Hoam
               Ti
            
             ,
             August
             and
             Great
             Emperour
             ;
             
               Xim
               Xoam
            
             ,
             Holy
             Emperour
             ;
             
               Hoam
               Xam
            
             ,
             August
             Sovereign
             ;
             
               Xim
               Kium
            
             ,
             Holy
             Prince
             ;
             
               Xim
               Xam
            
             ,
             Holy
             Sovereignty
             ;
             
               Que
               Chu
            
             ,
             Lord
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             ;
             
               Chao
               Tim
            
             ,
             Palace
             Royal
             ;
             
               Van
               Sui
            
             ,
             ten
             thousand
             years
             ;
             with
             several
             other
             Titles
             full
             of
             Grandeur
             and
             Majesty
             ,
             which
             I
             omit
             for
             fear
             of
             being
             tedious
             .
             So
             that
             't
             is
             the
             same
             thing
             to
             say
             Son
             of
             Heaven
             ,
             or
             ten
             thousand
             Years
             ,
             or
             Palace
             Royal
             ,
             as
             to
             say
             King
             or
             Emperour
             :
             Yet
             notwithstanding
             all
             these
             idle
             flatteries
             ,
             this
             Prince
             is
             far
             from
             being
             so
             vain
             as
             the
             King
             of
             Monomotopa
             ,
             who
             believes
             it
             to
             be
             in
             his
             Power
             to
             command
             the
             Sun
             ,
             the
             Moon
             and
             Stars
             ;
             or
             so
             ambitiously
             Politick
             as
             the
             King
             of
             Siam
             ,
             who
             knowing
             by
             experience
             that
             the
             great
             River
             that
             crosses
             his
             Countrey
             overflows
             its
             banks
             every
             year
             at
             a
             certain
             Season
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             returns
             again
             by
             degrees
             within
             a
             certain
             time
             ,
             marches
             forth
             in
             great
             pomp
             out
             of
             his
             Palace
             ,
             to
             command
             the
             Waters
             to
             retire
             ,
             and
             fall
             down
             into
             the
             Sea.
             For
             though
             the
             Chineses
             give
             these
             great
             Titles
             to
             their
             King
             ,
             and
             though
             he
             suffers
             them
             ,
             yet
             neither
             he
             ,
             nor
             they
             ,
             at
             least
             the
             learned
             and
             more
             prudent
             sort
             ,
             are
             so
             unprovided
             of
             reason
             ,
             as
             to
             believe
             him
             to
             be
             the
             real
             Son
             of
             Heaven
             :
             but
             onely
             that
             he
             is
             an
             Adopted
             Son
             ,
             whom
             Heaven
             has
             made
             choice
             of
             to
             be
             Lord
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             for
             the
             Government
             and
             Defence
             of
             the
             People
             .
             Nevertheless
             we
             cannot
             deny
             but
             that
             these
             Titles
             demonstrate
             not
             a
             little
             presumption
             in
             those
             that
             ascribe
             ,
             and
             in
             him
             that
             assumes
             them
             .
             But
             it
             is
             in
             some
             measure
             excusable
             in
             a
             Pagan
             People
             ,
             and
             which
             inhabit
             an
             Empire
             so
             spacious
             ,
             so
             puissant
             and
             so
             flourishing
             .
             So
             much
             the
             rather
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             King
             never
             makes
             use
             of
             
             them
             ,
             when
             he
             speaks
             of
             himself
             .
             For
             in
             private
             he
             onely
             uses
             the
             word
             Ngo
             ,
             or
             I
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             common
             to
             all
             his
             Subjects
             :
             and
             when
             he
             speaks
             in
             publick
             seated
             upon
             his
             Throne
             he
             uses
             the
             word
             Chin
             ,
             which
             signifies
             the
             same
             ,
             onely
             with
             this
             difference
             ,
             that
             no
             other
             Person
             but
             himself
             can
             make
             use
             of
             it
             ;
             wherein
             he
             is
             more
             modest
             than
             many
             of
             our
             Princes
             ,
             who
             are
             continually
             swelling
             out
             the
             Catalogues
             of
             their
             affected
             Titles
             with
             new
             Additions
             .
          
           
             The
             most
             part
             of
             sovereign
             Princes
             create
             Dukes
             ,
             Marquisses
             ,
             and
             other
             great
             Lords
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Emperour
             of
             China
             ;
             but
             he
             outvies
             them
             in
             this
             ,
             that
             of
             late
             days
             he
             takes
             upon
             him
             a
             power
             of
             making
             Gods
             and
             Idols
             .
             It
             was
             formerly
             a
             custome
             in
             this
             Empire
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             King
             was
             desirous
             to
             recompence
             the
             merits
             of
             any
             Illustrious
             person
             for
             the
             great
             Services
             which
             he
             had
             done
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             he
             built
             him
             up
             after
             his
             death
             a
             magnificent
             Palace
             ,
             where
             his
             name
             was
             usually
             set
             up
             engraven
             in
             Gold
             ,
             with
             Titles
             and
             Encomiums
             proportionable
             to
             his
             Merits
             .
             For
             example
             ;
             Somewhat
             above
             a
             thousand
             years
             agoe
             ,
             there
             was
             in
             China
             a
             most
             renowned
             Captain
             ,
             who
             for
             several
             years
             defended
             the
             Empire
             and
             the
             People
             ,
             and
             restor'd
             the
             King
             and
             Kingdom
             to
             its
             ancient
             lustre
             ,
             after
             he
             had
             wone
             several
             famous
             Victories
             ,
             with
             vast
             labour
             and
             toils
             ,
             with
             great
             expence
             of
             Blood
             ,
             and
             at
             length
             the
             loss
             of
             his
             own
             Blood
             ,
             while
             bravely
             fighting
             against
             the
             Rebels
             of
             his
             King
             and
             Countrey
             .
             Therefore
             in
             acknowledgment
             of
             so
             much
             fidelity
             and
             so
             many
             heroick
             actions
             ,
             the
             Emperour
             resolv'd
             after
             his
             death
             to
             keep
             up
             that
             honour
             which
             he
             had
             so
             well
             preserv'd
             in
             his
             life-time
             .
             To
             which
             purpose
             he
             built
             him
             a
             magnificent
             Temple
             ,
             wherein
             he
             put
             his
             Statue
             ,
             
             and
             declar'd
             him
             Emperour
             of
             all
             China
             .
             This
             valiant
             Captain
             and
             several
             others
             of
             equal
             vertue
             are
             now
             ador'd
             ,
             as
             Pagods
             or
             Deities
             ,
             by
             the
             King
             and
             all
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             who
             forgetting
             that
             the
             Intention
             of
             their
             Ancestours
             was
             onely
             to
             honour
             vertuous
             persons
             ,
             and
             to
             excite
             and
             encourage
             others
             by
             their
             example
             to
             be
             valiant
             and
             faithfull
             ,
             lost
             by
             degrees
             the
             knowledge
             of
             what
             they
             formerly
             had
             obtain'd
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             but
             one
             onely
             God
             ,
             and
             plung'd
             themselves
             headlong
             into
             Idolatry
             .
             At
             present
             the
             Kings
             assume
             to
             themselves
             a
             privilege
             to
             deisie
             whom
             they
             please
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             anciently
             the
             custome
             of
             the
             Senate
             of
             Rome
             ;
             of
             which
             I
             shall
             here
             produce
             two
             instances
             that
             merit
             observation
             .
             When
             Father
             
               Matthew
               Ricci
            
             first
             enter'd
             into
             China
             ,
             it
             was
             govern'd
             by
             the
             Emperour
             
               Van
               Lie
            
             ,
             whose
             Reign
             which
             lasted
             eight
             and
             forty
             years
             was
             no
             less
             happy
             for
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             which
             he
             all
             along
             maintain'd
             in
             peace
             and
             plenty
             ,
             than
             he
             himself
             was
             unfortunate
             in
             the
             Government
             of
             his
             Family
             .
             For
             he
             made
             choice
             for
             Tutor
             to
             the
             Prince
             who
             was
             heir
             to
             the
             Crown
             ,
             of
             a
             Colao
             or
             Counsellor
             of
             State
             ▪
             a
             person
             of
             great
             Policy
             and
             great
             Learning
             ,
             whose
             name
             was
             
               Ch●…
               K●…
               Che●…
            
             .
             This
             person
             abusing
             the
             easie
             freedom
             which
             he
             had
             of
             entring
             into
             the
             Palace
             ,
             which
             his
             great
             Reputation
             and
             Dignity
             allow'd
             him
             ,
             insinuated
             himself
             into
             that
             Familiarity
             with
             the
             Emperour's
             Mother
             ,
             that
             she
             abandon'd
             her self
             entirely
             to
             the
             lust
             of
             that
             great
             Officer
             ;
             which
             when
             the
             Emperour
             came
             to
             understand
             ,
             he
             forthwith
             put
             him
             to
             death
             .
             As
             for
             the
             Lady
             ,
             she
             laying
             deeply
             to
             heart
             the
             asfront
             ,
             and
             death
             of
             the
             Colao
             ,
             and
             fearing
             the
             same
             destiny
             her self
             ,
             within
             a
             few
             days
             fell
             sick
             and
             dy'd
             .
             But
             then
             the
             Emperour
             in
             some
             measure
             to
             repair
             the
             Reputation
             of
             his
             Mother
             
             by
             giving
             her
             Honours
             more
             than
             ordinary
             ,
             solemnly
             declar'd
             that
             she
             was
             
               Kieu
               Lien
               pu
               sa
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             Goddess
             of
             nine
             Flowers
             ;
             and
             erected
             her
             Temples
             over
             the
             whole
             Empire
             ,
             where
             she
             is
             ador'd
             under
             this
             Title
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Curtisan
               Flora
            
             was
             honour'd
             among
             the
             Romans
             for
             the
             Goddess
             of
             Flowers
             .
             After
             the
             death
             of
             this
             Colao
             ,
             the
             Mandarins
             advis'd
             the
             Emperour
             to
             burn
             the
             Commentaries
             which
             he
             had
             made
             upon
             the
             Books
             compos'd
             by
             
               Cum
               su
               sius
            
             :
             but
             he
             answer'd
             them
             with
             his
             wonted
             prudence
             ,
             that
             he
             onely
             punish'd
             his
             evil
             deeds
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             good
             Works
             which
             he
             had
             made
             for
             the
             Instruction
             of
             the
             Prince
             and
             the
             whole
             Empire
             .
             In
             short
             ,
             that
             Commentary
             is
             the
             most
             excellent
             Piece
             which
             the
             Chineses
             have
             upon
             that
             Subject
             .
             It
             is
             full
             of
             Moral
             Discourses
             well
             handl'd
             ;
             full
             of
             solid
             Maxims
             and
             Arguments
             ;
             and
             of
             clear
             and
             true
             Decisions
             of
             many
             difficult
             Controversies
             :
             and
             for
             those
             reasons
             it
             is
             a
             Book
             which
             our
             Fathers
             who
             have
             acquir'd
             the
             Knowledge
             of
             the
             Language
             study
             very
             much
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             about
             four
             hundred
             years
             ago
             ,
             that
             a
             Bonze
             of
             the
             Sect
             of
             those
             that
             never
             shave
             their
             heads
             ,
             yet
             marry
             ,
             by
             the
             Chineses
             call'd
             
               Tao
               Su
            
             ,
             so
             insinuated
             himself
             into
             the
             Affection
             of
             the
             Prince
             then
             reigning
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             his
             Skill
             in
             Chymistry
             ,
             and
             after
             that
             by
             his
             Magick
             Arts
             ,
             and
             other
             Diabolical
             Inventions
             ,
             that
             he
             not
             onely
             esteem'd
             him
             as
             one
             that
             was
             more
             than
             a
             Man
             during
             his
             life
             ,
             but
             also
             after
             his
             Death
             declar'd
             him
             God
             and
             Lord
             of
             Heaven
             ,
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             the
             Moon
             and
             Stars
             .
             By
             these
             two
             examples
             it
             is
             evident
             ,
             how
             great
             the
             Ignorance
             of
             the
             People
             is
             ,
             to
             believe
             that
             the
             Emperour
             has
             a
             power
             to
             make
             an
             Almighty
             God
             of
             a
             feeble
             miserable
             Man
             ;
             and
             
             to
             what
             an
             excess
             the
             Flattery
             of
             the
             Learned
             extends
             it self
             ,
             who
             not
             only
             approve
             ,
             but
             perswade
             the
             King
             to
             Actions
             so
             contrary
             to
             all
             manner
             of
             Reason
             .
             Which
             gives
             us
             an
             opportunity
             to
             convince
             them
             with
             the
             greatest
             ease
             in
             the
             World
             by
             this
             Dilemma
             .
             Either
             the
             King
             is
             more
             powerfull
             than
             this
             Pagod
             ,
             or
             this
             Deity
             ;
             or
             this
             Pagod
             is
             more
             powerfull
             than
             the
             King.
             If
             they
             say
             that
             the
             King
             is
             more
             powerfull
             ,
             How
             comes
             it
             then
             to
             pass
             ,
             say
             we
             ,
             that
             the
             King
             throws
             himself
             upon
             his
             Knees
             before
             the
             Pagod
             ,
             and
             adores
             him
             by
             bowing
             his
             head
             to
             the
             Earth
             ?
             Why
             does
             he
             offer
             him
             Incense
             ?
             Why
             does
             he
             implore
             of
             him
             long
             life
             for
             himself
             ,
             and
             peace
             for
             his
             Kingdom
             ,
             with
             several
             other
             blessings
             ?
             I●…
             they
             say
             ,
             as
             usualthey
             do
             ,
             that
             the
             Pagod
             is
             more
             powerfull
             ,
             then
             we
             answer
             them
             thus
             .
             This
             Power
             cannot
             proceed
             from
             any
             other
             reason
             ,
             but
             onely
             that
             he
             is
             a
             Pagod
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             the
             King
             that
             makes
             the
             Pagod
             ;
             and
             therefore
             the
             King
             is
             more
             powerfull
             than
             He.
             And
             to
             let
             them
             see
             that
             the
             Pagod
             has
             no
             Power
             ,
             we
             ask
             them
             whether
             the
             King
             can
             grant
             them
             ▪
             long
             Life
             ,
             Health
             ,
             Children
             ,
             &c.
             
             They
             answer
             that
             he
             is
             so
             far
             from
             being
             able
             to
             grant
             these
             blessings
             to
             them
             ,
             that
             he
             cannot
             bestow
             them
             upon
             himself
             .
             Which
             being
             really
             so
             ,
             we
             reply
             ,
             that
             seeing
             the
             Pagod
             derives
             all
             the
             Power
             he
             has
             from
             the
             King
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             King
             cannot
             give
             him
             that
             Power
             which
             he
             has
             not
             himself
             ,
             as
             you
             your selves
             confess
             ;
             it
             follows
             evidently
             that
             the
             Pagod
             has
             no
             Power
             at
             all
             .
             They
             understand
             the
             force
             of
             reason
             well
             enough
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             them
             abandon
             their
             Errours
             to
             embrace
             the
             Truth
             ▪
             but
             for
             the
             most
             part
             they
             answer
             with
             a
             great
             deal
             of
             Civility
             ;
             
               Tsai
               lai
               lim
               Kiao
            
             ,
             we
             will
             return
             another
             time
             to
             hear
             your
             Doctrine
             :
             Which
             is
             the
             very
             
             same
             answer
             which
             the
             Ar●…opagites
             made
             St.
             Paul.
             
          
           
             We
             now
             come
             to
             the
             Revenues
             of
             this
             puissant
             Monarch
             ,
             which
             are
             pay'd
             into
             his
             Treasures
             and
             Magazines
             every
             ▪
             year
             .
             There
             are
             pav'd
             into
             the
             Treasury
             every
             year
             ,
             eighteen
             Millions
             and
             six
             hundr'd
             thousand
             Crowns
             in
             Silver
             ,
             not
             including
             his
             Tolls
             and
             Customs
             upon
             what
             are
             bought
             and
             sold
             over
             the
             whole
             Empire
             ,
             nor
             the
             profit
             of
             some
             Millions
             which
             the
             King
             lends
             at
             excessive
             Interest
             ,
             nor
             the
             Revenues
             of
             his
             Crown
             Lands
             ,
             his
             Woods
             and
             Gardens
             which
             are
             very
             great
             .
             Nor
             the
             Money
             which
             comes
             by
             Con●…scations
             which
             happen
             every
             day
             in
             that
             Court
             ,
             and
             the
             Sales
             of
             Goods
             immoveable
             consiscated
             for
             High
             Treason
             ,
             and
             leavy'd
             upon
             the
             Estates
             of
             Rebels
             ,
             Robbers
             of
             the
             King's
             Money
             ,
             or
             that
             robb
             the
             People
             of
             a
             thousand
             Crowns
             and
             upward
             ,
             or
             that
             are
             convicted
             of
             hainous
             Crimes
             ,
             or
             commit
             great
             Miscarriages
             in
             the
             Exercise
             of
             their
             Trusts
             ;
             or
             in
             several
             other
             Cases
             where
             the
             Avarice
             of
             the
             Chief
             Ministers
             resolve
             to
             have
             a
             pretence
             to
             despoyle
             their
             Inferiours
             .
             There
             are
             pay'd
             into
             the
             Treasury
             under
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Queens
             Revenues
             ,
             eighteen
             hunder'd
             twenty
             three
             thousand
             nine
             hunder'd
             sixty
             two
             Crowns
             .
          
           
             
               Into
               the
               Magazines
               of
               the
               Court
               are
               carry'd
               every
               year
               ,
               forty
               three
               Millions
               three
               hunder'd
               twenty
               eight
               thousand
               eight
               hunder'd
               thirty
               four
               Sacks
               of
               Rice
               and
               Wheat
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Thirteen
               hunder'd
               and
               fifteen
               thousand
               nine
               hunder'd
               thirty
               seven
               Loaves
               of
               Salt
               ;
               each
               Loaf
               weighing
               fifty
               Pound
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Two
               hunder'd
               fifty
               eight
               Pound
               of
               very
               ●…ine
               Vermillion
               .
            
             
               
               4.
               
               Fourscore
               and
               fourteen
               thousand
               seven
               hunder'd
               thirty
               seven
               Pound
               of
               Varnish
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Thirty
               eight
               thousand
               five
               hunder'd
               and
               fifty
               Pound
               of
               dry'd
               Fruits
               ,
               as
               Raisons
               ,
               Figgs
               ,
               Wallnuts
               ,
               Chestnuts
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             
               Into
               the
               King's
               Wardrobes
               are
               brought
               sixteen
               hunder'd
               fifty
               five
               thousand
               four
               hunder'd
               thirty
               two
               Pounds
               of
               Pieces
               of
               Silk
               of
               several
               Colours
               ,
               as
               Velvets
               ,
               Sattins
               ,
               Damasks
               and
               other
               sorts
               ,
               not
               including
               the
               Royal
               habits
               which
               are
               brought
               in
               the
               Barks
               of
               which
               we
               have
               already
               spoken
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Four
               hunder'd
               seventy
               six
               thousand
               two
               hunder'd
               and
               seventy
               Pieces
               of
               slight
               Silks
               ,
               such
               as
               the
               Chineses
               wear
               in
               Summer
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Two
               hunder'd
               seventy
               two
               thousand
               nine
               hunder'd
               and
               three
               Pounds
               of
               Raw
               Silk
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Three
               hunder'd
               fourscore
               and
               sixteen
               thousand
               four
               hunder'd
               and
               fourscore
               Pieces
               of
               Cotton
               Cloath
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Four
               hunder'd
               sixty
               four
               thousand
               two
               hunder'd
               and
               seventeen
               Pounds
               of
               Cotton
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               Fifty
               sixty
               thousand
               two
               hunder'd
               and
               fourscore
               Pieces
               of
               ●…axen
               Cloath
               .
            
             
               Lastly
               ,
               Twenty
               one
               thousand
               four
               hunder'd
               and
               seventy
               Sacks
               of
               Beans
               for
               the
               King's
               Horses
               instead
               of
               Oats
               .
               And
               two
               Millions
               five
               hunder'd
               fourscore
               and
               eighteen
               thousand
               ,
               five
               hunder'd
               fourscore
               and
               three
               Bottles
               of
               Straw
               ,
               every
               Bottle
               weighing
               fifteen
               Pound
               .
               These
               two
               last
               Proportions
               were
               so
               order'd
               under
               the
               Chinese
               Kings
               ,
               but
               at
               present
               they
               are
               advanc'd
               to
               treble
               ,
               nay
               quadruple
               the
               Quantity
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               great
               Number
               of
               Horses
               which
               the
               Tartars
               keep
               ▪
            
          
           
           
             Besides
             these
             things
             which
             I
             took
             out
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Authour
             already
             quoted
             ,
             there
             are
             several
             other
             sorts
             of
             Provision
             brought
             to
             Court
             ,
             as
             the
             Particular
             duty
             's
             of
             Tenants
             and
             Proprietours
             of
             Lands
             ;
             as
             Oxen
             ,
             Sheep
             ,
             Pigs
             ,
             Geese
             ,
             Ducks
             ,
             Hens
             and
             other
             Domestick
             Fowl
             :
             Also
             Venison
             o●…
             wild
             Flesh
             ,
             as
             Bears
             ,
             Deer
             ,
             Hares
             ,
             Rabbets
             ,
             Pheasants
             ,
             Partridges
             ,
             with
             other
             land
             and
             water
             Fowl
             :
             Fish
             ,
             as
             Barbels
             ,
             Trouts
             very
             large
             ,
             and
             several
             other
             sorts
             ,
             all
             excellent
             in
             their
             Kinds
             ,
             of
             which
             I
             cannot
             give
             the
             Names
             in
             Portuguese
             .
             All
             sorts
             of
             Garden
             herbs
             ,
             as
             green
             and
             fresh
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             Winter
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             sharp
             in
             that
             Court
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             Spring
             .
             Wherein
             we
             must
             acknowledge
             the
             wonderfull
             Industry
             of
             that
             Nation
             :
             For
             they
             preserve
             all
             those
             sorts
             of
             Plants
             in
             places
             prepar'd
             on
             purpose
             ,
             or
             else
             by
             the
             means
             of
             subterraneal
             Ovens
             ,
             which
             they
             warm
             to
             what
             degree
             of
             heat
             they
             please
             :
             So
             that
             you
             cannot
             believe
             it
             to
             be
             an
             Artificial
             heat
             unless
             you
             see
             it
             .
             They
             also
             bring
             Oyl
             ,
             Butter
             ,
             Vinegar
             ,
             and
             all
             sorts
             of
             Spice
             ;
             precious
             Wines
             from
             all
             parts
             and
             various
             Compositions
             of
             Waters
             :
             Meal
             ,
             Bread
             ,
             March-panes
             ,
             and
             Biskets
             of
             several
             sorts
             :
             Together
             with
             all
             manner
             of
             Fruit
             which
             we
             have
             in
             Europe
             ,
             Melons
             ,
             Cucumbers
             ,
             Grapes
             ,
             Cherries
             ,
             Peaches
             ,
             Pears
             ,
             Apples
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             sorts
             which
             we
             have
             not
             .
             I
             cannot
             tell
             the
             precise
             quantity
             of
             these
             things
             ,
             which
             are
             daily
             brought
             to
             the
             Court
             ;
             however
             I
             can
             safely
             say
             ,
             there
             is
             such
             an
             abundance
             of
             every
             thing
             that
             it
             is
             almost
             incredible
             ,
             and
             would
             be
             more
             surprizing
             ,
             were
             I
             able
             to
             give
             you
             a
             just
             Account
             .
             And
             therefore
             to
             give
             the
             Reader
             an
             Idea
             of
             the
             Plenty
             I
             have
             seen
             ,
             I
             shall
             onely
             add
             this
             short
             Relation
             .
          
           
           
             Upon
             the
             eighth
             of
             December
             1669.
             the
             King
             order'd
             three
             Mandarins
             to
             come
             and
             burn
             Incense
             before
             the
             Tomb
             of
             Father
             
               Iohn
               Adam
            
             ,
             on
             purpose
             to
             do
             him
             a
             particular
             Honour
             ;
             and
             farther
             order'd
             three
             hunder'd
             twenty
             five
             Crowns
             to
             be
             given
             to
             the
             three
             Fathers
             then
             at
             Court
             of
             which
             I
             was
             one
             ,
             to
             defray
             the
             Charges
             of
             his
             Funeral
             .
             Several
             Mandarins
             that
             were
             our
             friends
             ,
             and
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Christians
             of
             Pekim
             invited
             themselves
             to
             the
             Ceremony
             which
             was
             very
             neat
             and
             exactly
             perform'd
             ;
             but
             that
             is
             not
             to
             my
             purpose
             .
             The
             next
             day
             we
             went
             according
             to
             Custom
             ,
             to
             return
             our
             humble
             Thanks
             to
             the
             Emperour
             for
             so
             extraordinary
             a
             favour
             .
             Which
             when
             we
             had
             done
             ;
             his
             Majesty
             sent
             a
             Messenger
             to
             us
             to
             bid
             us
             stay
             ,
             for
             that
             he
             had
             something
             more
             to
             say
             to
             us
             .
             We
             waited
             above
             an
             hour
             ,
             and
             about
             three
             a
             Clock
             in
             the
             Afternoon
             we
             were
             carry'd
             into
             the
             Royal
             Hall
             ,
             where
             the
             Emperour
             was
             seated
             in
             his
             Throne
             ,
             and
             commanded
             us
             to
             seat
             our selves
             at
             the
             first
             Table
             of
             the
             third
             Rank
             on
             the
             Right
             side
             .
             We
             obey'd
             ;
             and
             then
             most
             of
             the
             Principal
             Officers
             that
             reside
             in
             the
             Court
             ,
             among
             which
             many
             were
             of
             the
             Blood
             Royal
             ,
             took
             their
             places
             according
             to
             their
             degrees
             .
             There
             were
             two
             hunder'd
             and
             fifty
             Tables
             ,
             and
             upon
             every
             one
             four
             and
             twenty
             Silver
             Plates
             about
             a
             hands
             breadth
             and
             a
             half
             in
             Diameter
             ,
             set
             one
             above
             another
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             Tartars
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             one
             upon
             the
             Table
             ,
             the
             rest
             at
             a
             distance
             one
             from
             another
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             their
             Edges
             being
             supported
             by
             the
             Edges
             of
             the
             first
             ;
             all
             full
             of
             Viands
             ,
             and
             several
             sorts
             of
             Fruits
             and
             Comfitures
             ,
             but
             without
             any
             Potages
             .
             At
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Feast
             the
             Emperour
             sent
             us
             from
             his
             own
             Table
             ,
             two
             Plates
             of
             Gold
             as
             big
             
             as
             the
             Silver
             ones
             ,
             full
             of
             Preserves
             and
             excellently
             tasted
             Fruits
             .
             About
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Repast
             ,
             he
             sent
             us
             another
             Plate
             of
             Gold
             ,
             wherein
             were
             twenty
             Apples
             of
             the
             largest
             and
             best
             in
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             call'd
             by
             the
             Name
             of
             
               Pin
               quo
            
             .
             At
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Feast
             he
             sent
             us
             another
             Plate
             full
             of
             Pears
             ,
             and
             those
             Apples
             of
             Gold
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             in
             another
             Place
             .
             The
             favour
             which
             the
             Emperour
             did
             us
             at
             that
             time
             ,
             seem'd
             to
             us
             surprizingly
             extraordinary
             ;
             as
             it
             did
             to
             all
             those
             that
             heard
             the
             Relation
             of
             it
             :
             but
             it
             was
             no
             more
             than
             what
             was
             usual
             ,
             to
             all
             the
             rest
             that
             were
             invited
             ;
             in
             regard
             they
             are
             feasted
             by
             the
             King
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             every
             day
             .
             Not
             but
             that
             at
             other
             times
             upon
             certain
             occasions
             of
             publick
             rejoycing
             he
             treats
             much
             more
             magnificently
             all
             the
             Great
             Lords
             and
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             which
             are
             about
             five
             thousand
             .
             By
             which
             the
             Reader
             may
             readily
             conjecture
             at
             the
             Grandeur
             and
             Puissance
             of
             this
             Emperour
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             abundance
             of
             Provisions
             which
             is
             brought
             continually
             to
             the
             Court
             ,
             is
             far
             beyond
             the
             Relation
             which
             I
             have
             made
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               sixteenth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               Father
               Magaillans
               had
               already
               spoken
               of
               the
               three
               Opinions
               of
               the
               Chineses
               
               concerning
               the
               Antiquity
               of
               China
               .
               And
               I
               make
               no
               question
               but
               that
               if
               he
               had
               liv'd
               to
               finish
               this
               Work
               ,
               he
               would
               have
               put
               all
               that
               he
               says
               of
               it
               in
               the
               same
               Chapter
               .
               However
               I
               did
               not
               think
               it
               proper
               for
               me
               to
               pare
               off
               any
               thing
               from
               this
               Chapter
               ;
               as
               well
               for
               that
               I
               would
               not
               make
               an
               Alteration
               so
               considerable
               ,
               as
               for
               that
               the
               Authour
               has
               inserted
               several
               new
               and
               〈◊〉
               Circumstances
               ,
               and
               for
               that
               the
               matter
               is
               
               also
               of
               great
               moment
               .
               Besides
               that
               this
               Chapter
               being
               compos'd
               in
               the
               year
               1669.
               serves
               for
               a
               Confirmation
               of
               the
               third
               ,
               which
               
                 F.
                 Magaillans
              
               had
               written
               in
               the
               year
               before
               ;
               as
               may
               be
               seen
               by
               the
               difference
               of
               the
               dates
               which
               he
               sets
               down
               in
               this
               Work.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XVII
            
             .
             A
             Desoription
             of
             the
             City
             of
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             :
             Of
             the
             Walls
             that
             enclose
             the
             Emperour's
             Palace
             :
             And
             the
             form
             of
             the
             principal
             Houses
             of
             China
             .
          
           
             THE
             City
             or
             Court
             of
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             is
             seated
             in
             a
             Plain
             .
             It
             forms
             a
             vast
             Square
             ;
             each
             of
             the
             Sides
             of
             which
             is
             twelve
             Chinese
             Furlongs
             in
             length
             ,
             which
             make
             about
             three
             Italian
             Miles
             ,
             or
             near
             a
             Portugal
             League
             .
             It
             has
             nine
             Gates
             ;
             three
             upon
             the
             South
             Side
             ,
             and
             two
             upon
             each
             of
             the
             other
             Sides
             :
             Not
             twelve
             Gates
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Relation
             of
             
               F.
               Martini
            
             in
             his
             Atlas
             p.
             29.
             wherein
             he
             seems
             to
             have
             follow'd
             
               M.
               Polo
               .
               l.
            
             2.
             c.
             7.
             
             This
             City
             is
             now
             inhabited
             by
             the
             Tartars
             and
             their
             Troops
             divided
             into
             eight
             Quarters
             or
             Banners
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             '
             em
             .
             But
             in
             regard
             that
             under
             the
             preceding
             Kings
             the
             Inhabitants
             were
             so
             multiply'd
             that
             the
             Capital
             was
             not
             sufficient
             to
             contain
             them
             ,
             nor
             the
             nine
             Suburbs
             answering
             to
             the
             nine
             Gates
             ;
             which
             if
             they
             are
             not
             every
             one
             a
             great
             City
             ,
             are
             at
             least
             as
             big
             as
             many
             great
             Boroughs
             ;
             there
             was
             a
             new
             City
             built
             ,
             of
             a
             square
             form
             like
             the
             Old
             one
             ;
             of
             which
             each
             of
             the
             Sides
             is
             six
             Chinese
             Furlongs
             ,
             or
             an
             Italian
             Mile
             and
             a
             half
             in
             
             length
             ,
             having
             the
             North
             Side
             joyning
             to
             the
             South
             Side
             of
             the
             Old
             City
             .
             It
             has
             seven
             Gates
             and
             every
             one
             a
             Suburb
             well
             peopled
             ;
             more
             especially
             that
             which
             looks
             toward
             the
             West
             ;
             for
             that
             is
             the
             Side
             where
             all
             that
             come
             from
             all
             Parts
             of
             the
             Empire
             enter
             into
             the
             Capital
             City
             .
             Both
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             City
             is
             divided
             into
             five
             Quarters
             ,
             or
             Jurisdictions
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             said
             in
             the
             fourteenth
             Chapter
             .
             The
             principal
             Streets
             ,
             some
             run
             from
             the
             North
             to
             the
             South
             ,
             others
             from
             the
             East
             to
             the
             West
             .
             But
             they
             are
             all
             so
             streight
             ,
             so
             long
             ,
             so
             broad
             and
             so
             well
             proportion'd
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             see
             they
             were
             mark'd
             out
             with
             a
             line
             ,
             and
             not
             built
             by
             hap
             hazard
             ,
             as
             in
             our
             Cities
             of
             Europe
             .
             The
             little
             Streets
             run
             all
             from
             the
             East
             to
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             divide
             all
             the
             Space
             between
             the
             great
             Streets
             into
             equal
             and
             proportionable
             Islands
             .
             Both
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             are
             known
             by
             their
             particular
             Names
             ,
             as
             the
             Street
             of
             the
             
               King's
               Kindred
            
             ,
             the
             
               White
               Tower-street
            
             ,
             the
             
               Iron
               Lyons-street
            
             ,
             the
             Fish-street
             ,
             the
             Aquavity-street
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             the
             rest
             .
             There
             is
             a
             Book
             to
             be
             sold
             that
             speaks
             of
             the
             Names
             and
             Situation
             of
             the
             Streets
             ,
             which
             serves
             for
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Lacquies
             that
             attend
             upon
             the
             Mandarins
             in
             their
             Visits
             ,
             and
             to
             their
             Tribunals
             ,
             and
             carry
             their
             Presents
             ,
             their
             Letters
             ,
             and
             their
             Orders
             to
             several
             Parts
             of
             the
             City
             and
             Empire
             .
             For
             they
             are
             continually
             sending
             a
             great
             Number
             all
             over
             the
             Kingdom
             .
             Whence
             comes
             that
             Proverb
             so
             often
             in
             the
             Mouths
             of
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             that
             the
             Provinces
             send
             Mandarins
             to
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             ,
             and
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             in
             exchange
             sends
             them
             none
             but
             Lacquies
             and
             Messengers
             .
             And
             indeed
             it
             is
             a
             rare
             thing
             to
             meet
             with
             a
             Mandarin
             who
             is
             a
             Native
             of
             that
             City
             .
             The
             fairest
             of
             all
             the
             Streets
             is
             that
             which
             is
             call'd
             
               Cham
               gan
               kiai
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Street
             of
             perpetual
             
             Repose
             .
             It
             runs
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             bounded
             on
             the
             North
             side
             by
             the
             Walls
             of
             the
             King's
             Palace
             ,
             and
             upon
             the
             South
             side
             by
             several
             Tribunals
             ,
             and
             Palaces
             of
             great
             Lords
             .
             It
             is
             so
             spacious
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             about
             thirty
             Fathoms
             broad
             ;
             and
             so
             famously
             known
             ,
             that
             the
             Learned
             in
             their
             writings
             make
             use
             of
             it
             to
             signifie
             the
             whole
             City
             ,
             taking
             a
             part
             for
             the
             whole
             .
             For
             it
             is
             the
             same
             thing
             to
             say
             ,
             such
             a
             one
             lives
             in
             the
             Street
             of
             perpetual
             repose
             ,
             as
             to
             say
             he
             lives
             at
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             .
             If
             the
             Houses
             were
             but
             high
             ,
             and
             built
             to
             the
             Street
             like
             ours
             ,
             the
             City
             would
             shew
             much
             more
             stately
             .
             But
             they
             are
             all
             low
             Buildings
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             respect
             which
             they
             have
             to
             the
             King's
             Palace
             .
             Yet
             there
             are
             some
             Palaces
             that
             belong
             to
             the
             great
             Lords
             ,
             which
             are
             lofty
             and
             magnificent
             .
             But
             they
             are
             built
             backward
             ,
             so
             that
             you
             see
             nothing
             to
             the
             Street
             but
             a
             great
             Gate
             ,
             which
             has
             houses
             on
             each
             Side
             ,
             inhabited
             by
             their
             Domesticks
             or
             by
             Merchants
             and
             handycraft
             Tradesmen
             .
             However
             this
             is
             very
             convenient
             for
             publick
             convenience
             :
             For
             in
             our
             Cities
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             Streets
             is
             taken
             up
             by
             Houses
             of
             Noble
             Men
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Inhabitants
             are
             forc'd
             to
             go
             a
             great
             way
             to
             Market
             .
             Whereas
             at
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             the
             other
             Cities
             of
             China
             ,
             there
             is
             every
             thing
             to
             be
             sold
             at
             your
             Door
             for
             entertainment
             ,
             subsistance
             or
             pleasure
             .
             For
             these
             little
             Houses
             are
             as
             so
             many
             Magazines
             or
             Markets
             ,
             Shops
             and
             Taverns
             .
             But
             for
             the
             Multitude
             of
             People
             ,
             so
             numerous
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             I
             dare
             not
             presume
             to
             utter
             it
             ,
             nor
             do
             I
             know
             how
             to
             make
             it
             understood
             .
             All
             the
             Streets
             both
             of
             the
             old
             and
             new
             City
             are
             crowded
             with
             People
             ,
             as
             well
             the
             small
             Streets
             as
             the
             great
             ,
             as
             well
             those
             at
             the
             farther
             ends
             as
             those
             in
             the
             hart
             of
             the
             Place
             .
             The
             Throng
             is
             every
             where
             so
             great
             ,
             that
             
             there
             is
             nothing
             to
             compare
             with
             it
             but
             the
             Fairs
             and
             Processions
             of
             Europe
             .
          
           
             The
             Emperour's
             Palace
             is
             seated
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             this
             great
             City
             ,
             and
             fronts
             toward
             the
             South
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Custom
             of
             that
             Empire
             ,
             where
             you
             shall
             rarely
             see
             a
             City
             ,
             Palace
             or
             House
             of
             any
             great
             Person
             which
             does
             not
             face
             that
             Point
             of
             the
             Compass
             ▪
             It
             is
             surrounded
             with
             a
             double
             enclosure
             of
             walls
             ,
             one
             within
             the
             other
             ,
             in
             form
             of
             a
             long
             Square
             .
             The
             outward
             Enclosure
             is
             a
             Wall
             of
             an
             extraordinary
             height
             and
             thickness
             ,
             plaister'd
             both
             within
             and
             without
             with
             red
             Morter
             ,
             and
             cover'd
             with
             a
             small
             Roof
             of
             varnished
             Bricks
             of
             a
             yellow
             Gold
             Colour
             ,
             lay'd
             with
             great
             Art
             and
             Agreement
             .
             The
             length
             of
             it
             from
             the
             South
             to
             the
             North
             Gate
             is
             eight
             Chinese
             Furlongs
             ,
             or
             two
             Italian
             Miles
             .
             This
             Enclosure
             has
             four
             Gates
             ,
             one
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             each
             Side
             ;
             and
             every
             Gate
             compos'd
             of
             three
             Portals
             of
             which
             the
             middlemost
             is
             always
             kept
             shut
             ,
             and
             never
             open'd
             but
             onely
             for
             the
             King.
             The
             rest
             are
             always
             open
             to
             those
             that
             go
             in
             and
             out
             of
             the
             Palace
             from
             break
             of
             day
             ,
             till
             the
             Bell
             rings
             for
             clea●…ing
             the
             Palace
             ,
             except
             the
             South
             Gates
             ,
             which
             are
             never
             but
             half
             open
             ,
             unless
             the
             King
             goes
             out
             or
             in
             .
             In
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Kings
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             guard
             of
             thirty
             Souldiers
             with
             their
             Captain
             ,
             and
             ten
             Eunuchs
             at
             each
             Portal
             ;
             but
             at
             present
             ,
             not
             above
             twenty
             Tartars
             with
             their
             Officer
             .
             By
             which
             it
             is
             apparent
             that
             
               Alvaro
               Semedo
            
             and
             Martini
             ,
             who
             affirm
             the
             Guard
             of
             every
             Gate
             to
             consist
             of
             three
             thousand
             Men
             ,
             and
             five
             Elephants
             was
             a
             great
             Piece
             of
             Misinformation
             ;
             while
             they
             took
             the
             whole
             for
             a
             part
             .
             For
             there
             is
             indeed
             a
             Guard
             of
             three
             thousand
             Men
             in
             all
             ,
             which
             being
             distributed
             into
             Companys
             and
             Squadrons
             ,
             in
             
             their
             turns
             and
             so
             many
             days
             in
             a
             Month
             ,
             guard
             the
             Gates
             of
             the
             City
             and
             of
             the
             Palace
             where
             there
             are
             several
             others
             besides
             those
             we
             have
             mention'd
             ,
             and
             several
             Towers
             that
             environ
             the
             inner
             Wall.
             As
             for
             the
             Elephants
             ,
             they
             never
             stand
             at
             the
             Gates
             ,
             but
             in
             their
             Stables
             or
             rather
             in
             their
             Palace
             .
             For
             they
             are
             lodg'd
             in
             a
             spacious
             Court
             ,
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             which
             there
             is
             a
             large
             and
             fair
             Room
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             kept
             in
             the
             Summer
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             Winter
             they
             put
             them
             into
             little
             Stalls
             by
             themselves
             ,
             the
             Pavements
             of
             which
             are
             heated
             with
             Stoves
             :
             with
             which
             those
             Creatures
             could
             never
             endure
             the
             Rigour
             of
             the
             Winter
             in
             that
             Climate
             ,
             where
             many
             times
             they
             die
             through
             the
             Negligence
             of
             those
             that
             look
             after
             them
             .
             Nor
             are
             there
             above
             five
             or
             six
             which
             were
             brought
             from
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Tun
               nan
            
             .
             They
             never
             bring
             them
             out
             of
             their
             Stables
             but
             when
             the
             King
             goes
             forth
             in
             State
             in
             order
             to
             some
             publick
             Solemnity
             ,
             as
             to
             his
             Sacrifices
             or
             the
             like
             .
             All
             manner
             of
             Entrance
             within
             these
             Gates
             is
             forbid
             to
             the
             Bonzes
             of
             Pagods
             ,
             to
             the
             Blind
             ,
             the
             Lame
             ,
             the
             Maim'd
             ,
             to
             Beggars
             ,
             such
             as
             have
             Scars
             and
             Wens
             upon
             their
             Faces
             ,
             or
             have
             their
             Ears
             or
             Moses
             cut
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             word
             to
             all
             those
             that
             have
             any
             considerable
             Deformity
             .
          
           
             The
             inner
             Wall
             which
             immediately
             encompasses
             the
             Palace
             is
             extremely
             high
             and
             thick
             ,
             built
             of
             large
             Brick
             all
             equal
             ,
             and
             embollish'd
             with
             Battlements
             well
             contriv'd
             .
             It
             extends
             from
             the
             North
             to
             the
             South
             six
             Furlongs
             or
             ▪
             an
             Italian
             Mile
             and
             a
             half
             ,
             a
             Furlong
             and
             a
             half
             in
             breadth
             ,
             and
             fifteen
             Furlongs
             or
             five
             Miles
             wanting
             a
             Quarter
             in
             Circumference
             .
             It
             has
             four
             Gates
             with
             large
             Vaults
             and
             Arches
             ;
             those
             to
             the
             South
             and
             North
             being
             threefold
             ,
             like
             the
             Gates
             of
             the
             first
             Enclosure
             ,
             
             those
             upon
             the
             Sides
             single
             .
             Upon
             these
             Gates
             and
             upon
             the
             four
             Angles
             of
             the
             Wall
             eight
             Towers
             ,
             or
             rather
             eight
             Halls
             of
             an
             extraordinary
             Bigness
             ,
             and
             very
             good
             Workmanship
             ,
             advance
             themsemselves
             ,
             varnish'd
             within
             with
             a
             very
             beautifull
             red
             ,
             adorn'd
             with
             Flowers
             of
             Gold
             ,
             and
             cover'd
             with
             Tiles
             varnish'd
             with
             yellow
             ▪
             During
             the
             Reign
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Kings
             ,
             twenty
             Eunuchs
             kept
             guard
             at
             each
             of
             these
             Gates
             .
             But
             at
             present
             the
             Tartars
             have
             plac'd
             in
             their
             Rooms
             forty
             Souldiers
             with
             two
             Officers
             .
             All
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Tribunals
             within
             the
             Palace
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Officers
             of
             the
             King's
             Houshold
             are
             allow'd
             Entrance
             within
             this
             Wall.
             But
             all
             others
             are
             severely
             prohibited
             ,
             unless
             they
             shew
             a
             little
             Table
             of
             Wood
             or
             Ivory
             ,
             wherein
             their
             Names
             and
             the
             Place
             where
             they
             serve
             be
             set
             down
             ,
             with
             the
             Seal
             of
             the
             Mandarin
             to
             whom
             they
             belong
             .
             This
             second
             Wall
             is
             environ'd
             with
             a
             deep
             and
             large
             Mote
             lin'd
             with
             free
             Stone
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             large
             and
             excellent
             Fish.
             Every
             Gate
             has
             a
             Draw-Bridge
             to
             lay
             over
             the
             Mote
             ,
             the
             South
             Gate
             excepted
             ,
             where
             the
             Draw
             bridge
             lies
             onely
             over
             one
             Arch.
             
          
           
             In
             the
             wide
             Space
             that
             separates
             the
             two
             Walls
             there
             are
             several
             separate
             Palaces
             ,
             some
             round
             ,
             others
             square
             ,
             which
             are
             all
             call'd
             by
             their
             proper
             Names
             conformable
             to
             the
             uses
             and
             divertisements
             for
             which
             they
             were
             design'd
             ;
             withall
             so
             spacious
             ,
             so
             rich
             ,
             and
             so
             magnificently
             adorn'd
             as
             might
             well
             beseem
             not
             onely
             many
             Princes
             but
             some
             Kings
             of
             Europe
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             same
             Space
             ,
             upon
             the
             Eastern
             side
             ,
             and
             closely
             by
             the
             Wall
             ,
             runs
             a
             River
             ,
             over
             which
             are
             built
             several
             Bridges
             ,
             very
             fair
             Structures
             ,
             and
             all
             of
             Marble
             except
             the
             Arch
             in
             the
             middle
             ▪
             
             where
             there
             lies
             a
             Draw-bridge
             :
             and
             all
             the
             other
             Bridges
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             are
             a
             great
             Number
             in
             the
             Palace
             ,
             are
             no
             less
             beautifull
             and
             built
             of
             the
             same
             Materials
             .
             On
             the
             West
             side
             where
             the
             Space
             is
             much
             more
             large
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             Lake
             very
             full
             of
             Fish
             ,
             five
             Furlongs
             or
             an
             Italian
             Mile
             and
             a
             quarter
             ,
             and
             made
             in
             the
             form
             of
             a
             Base-viol
             .
             Where
             it
             is
             narrowest
             it
             is
             to
             be
             cross'd
             over
             a
             very
             beautifull
             Bridge
             which
             answers
             to
             the
             Gates
             of
             the
             Walls
             ,
             at
             the
             Ends
             of
             which
             stand
             two
             Triumphal
             Arches
             of
             three
             Arches
             a
             Piece
             :
             high
             rais'd
             ,
             majestick
             and
             most
             excellent
             Workmanship
             ▪
             This
             Lake
             of
             which
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             makes
             mention
             ,
             l.
             2.
             c.
             6.
             is
             environ'd
             with
             little
             Palaces
             or
             Houses
             of
             Pleasure
             ,
             built
             partly
             in
             the
             Water
             ,
             and
             part
             up
             the
             Land.
             The
             middle
             of
             the
             Lake
             being
             full
             of
             very
             beautifull
             Barges
             for
             the
             King's
             Use
             when
             he
             has
             a
             mind
             to
             fish
             ,
             or
             to
             be
             row'd
             about
             the
             Lake
             .
             The
             remainder
             of
             the
             two
             East
             and
             West
             Spaces
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             taken
             up
             by
             the
             Lake
             or
             the
             separate
             Palaces
             ,
             is
             divided
             into
             large
             and
             well
             proportion'd
             Streets
             inhabited
             by
             the
             Officers
             ,
             and
             Artificers
             that
             belong
             to
             the
             King's
             Palace
             .
             In
             the
             times
             of
             the
             preceding
             Kings
             those
             Streets
             cantain'd
             ,
             besides
             ,
             ten
             thousand
             Eunuchs
             ;
             but
             they
             who
             reign
             at
             present
             have
             put
             in
             their
             Rooms
             Tartars
             and
             Chineses
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Leao
             ,
             who
             are
             look●…
             upon
             as
             Tartars
             by
             a
             peculiar
             favour
             .
             Thus
             much
             as
             to
             the
             outside
             of
             the
             Palace
             ;
             we
             are
             now
             to
             speak
             of
             the
             inside
             .
          
           
             Therefore
             for
             the
             better
             understanding
             of
             that
             which
             follows
             ,
             there
             are
             two
             things
             to
             be
             observ'd
             .
             The
             first
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             Cities
             and
             all
             the
             Palaces
             of
             the
             King
             ,
             the
             Great
             Lords
             ,
             the
             Mandarins
             and
             wealthy
             Persons
             are
             so
             built
             ,
             that
             the
             Gates
             and
             Principal
             Apartments
             look
             toward
             the
             
             South
             .
             The
             second
             ,
             that
             whereas
             we
             build
             our
             Lodgings
             one
             Story
             above
             another
             ,
             the
             Chineses
             build
             upon
             the
             same
             Level
             one
             within
             another
             ;
             so
             that
             we
             possess
             the
             Air
             and
             they
             the
             Earth
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             the
             great
             Gate
             that
             fronts
             the
             South
             ,
             stands
             toward
             the
             Street
             with
             little
             Houses
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             the
             first
             Apartment
             .
             Then
             you
             enter
             into
             a
             fine
             Court
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             End
             of
             that
             stands
             another
             Gate
             ,
             and
             there
             's
             the
             second
             Apartment
             .
             Behind
             that
             lies
             a
             more
             spacious
             Court
             ,
             joyning
             to
             a
             great
             Hall
             appointed
             for
             the
             reception
             of
             Strangers
             .
             Behind
             that
             lies
             a
             third
             Court
             ,
             at
             the
             End
             of
             which
             is
             a
             fourth
             Apartment
             ,
             where
             the
             Master
             of
             the
             House
             resides
             :
             behind
             which
             lies
             a
             fifth
             Court
             and
             a
             fifth
             Apartment
             ,
             where
             the
             Master
             lays
             his
             Jewels
             ,
             his
             most
             costly
             Furniture
             and
             his
             Lumber
             .
             Beyond
             there
             is
             a
             Garden
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             End
             of
             that
             a
             sixth
             Apartment
             ,
             with
             a
             little
             Door
             in
             the
             Middle
             ,
             which
             is
             never
             open'd
             but
             upon
             occasion
             or
             necessity
             .
             Upon
             the
             East
             and
             West
             sides
             of
             these
             Courts
             are
             buildings
             of
             meaner
             Value
             ,
             which
             serve
             for
             Cellars
             ,
             Larders
             ,
             Store-houses
             ,
             and
             other
             Offices
             belonging
             to
             the
             Family
             :
             Onely
             in
             the
             Court
             adjoyning
             to
             the
             great
             Gate
             ,
             live
             the
             Domestick
             Servants
             with
             their
             Wives
             and
             Children
             .
             Thus
             the
             Houses
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             and
             wealthy
             Persons
             are
             usually
             contriv'd
             :
             But
             the
             Palaces
             of
             the
             great
             Lords
             take
             up
             more
             Ground
             ,
             and
             have
             more
             Rooms
             ,
             larger
             and
             higher
             according
             to
             their
             Dignity
             :
             all
             things
             being
             so
             well
             regulated
             in
             China
             ,
             that
             neither
             the
             Mandarins
             nor
             great
             Lords
             can
             build
             their
             Houses
             but
             conformable
             to
             what
             is
             ordain'd
             by
             the
             Law.
             
          
           
             
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               seventeenth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               This
               Chapter
               is
               so
               much
               the
               more
               curious
               ,
               because
               it
               contains
               a
               very
               large
               Description
               of
               the
               Capital
               City
               of
               China
               ,
               and
               the
               spacious
               Palace
               of
               the
               Emperour
               .
               All
               the
               other
               Relations
               without
               exception
               ,
               speak
               very
               little
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               generally
               that
               very
               confusedly
               too
               ▪
               but
               that
               's
               not
               a
               thing
               to
               be
               wonder'd
               at
               .
               For
               the
               Embassadours
               live
               always
               retir'd
               in
               the
               Palaces
               appointed
               for
               their
               Reception
               :
               and
               as
               for
               the
               Missionaries
               they
               never
               saw
               
                 Pe
                 kim
              
               ,
               unless
               it
               were
               onely
               passing
               through
               it
               ,
               or
               when
               they
               were
               carry'd
               Prisoners
               thither
               in
               the
               last
               Persecution
               .
               So
               that
               unless
               it
               were
               Father
               Adam
               ,
               Father
               
                 Ferdinand
                 ,
                 Verbrest
              
               ,
               and
               
                 F.
                 Magaillans
              
               ,
               there
               were
               none
               that
               could
               instruct
               us
               perfectly
               of
               the
               Particulars
               of
               this
               great
               City
               :
               and
               indeed
               the
               latter
               is
               the
               onely
               Person
               who
               has
               given
               us
               a
               Description
               of
               it
               ,
               after
               a
               Residence
               in
               those
               parts
               of
               near
               five
               and
               twenty
               years
               .
               Nevertheless
               ,
               for
               the
               Readers
               better
               satisfaction
               ,
               and
               to
               furnish
               him
               with
               a
               more
               distinct
               Idea
               of
               the
               Place
               I
               thought
               fit
               to
               add
               to
               the
               Description
               a
               Ground-plot
               or
               Draught
               of
               the
               City
               of
               
                 Pe
                 kim
              
               and
               the
               Emperour's
               Palace
               ;
               which
               I
               have
               drawn
               out
               with
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               care
               and
               pains
               ,
               not
               putting
               in
               any
               thing
               for
               which
               I
               had
               not
               a
               sufficient
               warrant
               from
               the
               Relation
               of
               our
               Authour
               ,
               as
               may
               be
               seen
               by
               this
               Translation
               and
               the
               following
               Notes
               .
               You
               will
               find
               also
               tha●…
               though
               this
               Description
               be
               very
               curious
               ,
               yet
               it
               would
               have
               been
               more
               perfect
               had
               it
               had
               a
               more
               exact
               Draught
               of
               the
               City
               and
               Emperour's
               Palace
               in
               general
               ,
               and
               more
               Draughts
               and
               particular
               Designs
               of
               several
               Palaces
               ,
               as
               w●…ll
               belonging
               to
               the
               Emperour
               as
               to
               the
               great
               Lords
               ,
               as
               also
               of
               the
               Temples
               ,
               Triumphal
               Arches
               and
               Bridges
               ,
               &c.
               
               But
               we
               may
               be
               well
               cement
               with
               this
               Relation
               till
               the
               〈◊〉
               who
               are
               gone
               to
               China
               by
               
               the
               King's
               Command
               ,
               shall
               be
               able
               to
               send
               us
               something
               more
               compleat
               .
               In
               the
               mean
               time
               we
               have
               not
               mark'd
               down
               above
               seventy
               Streets
               ,
               for
               that
               they
               being
               all
               of
               one
               Form
               and
               Situation
               ,
               are
               sufficient
               to
               give
               us
               an
               Idea
               of
               this
               spacious
               City
               ;
               besides
               that
               the
               Relation
               does
               not
               ascertain
               the
               Number
               ;
               and
               for
               that
               the
               smallness
               of
               the
               Draught
               would
               not
               allow
               us
               to
               set
               down
               any
               more
               .
            
             
               
                 Every
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 is
                 twelve
              
               Chinese
               
                 Furlongs
                 in
                 Length
              
               ,
               &c.
               
               
            
             
               Father
               Martini
               allows
               to
               the
               Walls
               of
               the
               City
               no
               more
               than
               the
               Compass
               of
               forty
               Chinese
               Furlongs
               .
               But
               we
               are
               rather
               to
               believe
               Father
               Magaillans
               ,
               who
               could
               not
               choose
               but
               be
               better
               inform'd
               ,
               and
               makes
               'em
               forty
               eight
               Furlongs
               in
               Circuit
               .
               Father
               Martini
               tells
               us
               also
               that
               the
               Walls
               were
               built
               by
               the
               Directions
               of
               the
               Emperour
               
                 Tai
                 Sungus
              
               ,
               the
               third
               of
               the
               Family
               of
               
                 Tai
                 mim
              
               ,
               who
               began
               his
               Reign
               in
               the
               year
               1404.
               
               Father
               Couplet
               in
               his
               Chronology
               calls
               this
               Emperour
               
                 Chim
                 Su
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Yum
                 Io
              
               ;
               and
               says
               moreover
               that
               he
               did
               not
               translate
               the
               Seat
               of
               the
               Empire
               from
               
                 Nam
                 Kim
              
               to
               
                 Pe
                 kim
              
               till
               the
               seventh
               year
               of
               his
               Reign
               ,
               or
               the
               year
               ,
               1411.
               
            
             
               
                 It
                 has
                 nine
                 Gates
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 twelve
                 as
                 Father
              
               Martini
               
                 tells
                 us
              
               .
               
            
             
               What
               our
               Authour
               says
               here
               concerning
               the
               Number
               of
               the
               Gates
               is
               confirm'd
               by
               
                 Peter
                 Semedo
              
               ,
               Father
               
                 Adam
                 Schall
              
               ,
               and
               Father
               Couplet
               in
               his
               Chronolo●…
               ,
               who
               all
               agree
               that
               there
               are
               but
               nine
               Gates
               belonging
               to
               the
               City
               of
               
                 Pe
                 kim
              
            
             
             
               
                 They
                 built
                 a
                 new
                 square
                 City
                 of
                 which
                 every
                 Side
                 is
                 six
              
               Chinese
               Furlongs
               ,
               
               &c.
               
            
             
               
                 It
                 has
                 seven
                 Gates
                 ,
                 and
                 every
                 Gate
                 opens
                 into
                 a
                 Suburb
                 ,
              
               &c.
               
            
             
               Here
               I
               meet
               with
               three
               Difficulties
               that
               very
               much
               puzzle
               me
               ;
               the
               first
               ,
               as
               to
               the
               Largeness
               of
               the
               new
               City
               ;
               the
               second
               in
               reference
               to
               the
               Situation
               of
               the
               Gates
               :
               and
               the
               third
               ,
               as
               to
               the
               Number
               of
               the
               Suburbs
               of
               the
               two
               Cities
               .
            
             
               Father
               Magaillans
               tells
               us
               that
               the
               new
               City
               is
               square
               ,
               and
               that
               each
               side
               is
               six
               Furlongs
               in
               length
               .
               Which
               if
               it
               were
               so
               ,
               the
               new
               City
               would
               be
               twenty
               four
               Chinese
               Furlongs
               in
               Circumference
               ;
               and
               the
               Ground-plot
               would
               be
               but
               a
               fourth
               part
               in
               proportion
               to
               that
               of
               the
               other
               City
               ;
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               that
               it
               would
               not
               take
               up
               above
               a
               fourth
               part
               of
               the
               Ground
               which
               the
               Old
               City
               does
               ,
               which
               to
               me
               seems
               too
               small
               for
               two
               Reasons
               .
               The
               first
               ,
               because
               that
               Father
               Adam
               tells
               us
               ,
               that
               after
               the
               Conquest
               of
               China
               ,
               the
               Tartars
               reserv'd
               the
               old
               City
               for
               themselves
               ,
               and
               constrain'd
               all
               the
               Chineses
               to
               retire
               into
               the
               ne●…
               ▪
               which
               being
               so
               small
               could
               never
               be
               capable
               to
               contain
               them
               ▪
               〈◊〉
               ●…h
               the
               rather
               ,
               because
               he
               adds
               that
               it
               was
               in
               good
               pa●…
               inhabited
               in
               the
               Time
               of
               the
               Chinese
               Emperours
               .
               Secondly
               ,
               because
               the
               same
               Father
               positively
               tells
               us
               ,
               that
               the
               new
               City
               from
               the
               East
               to
               the
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ●…er
               by
               ●…ur
               Furlongs
               than
               the
               old
               one
               :
               but
               that
               〈◊〉
               ●…he
               North
               to
               the
               South
               it
               is
               not
               above
               half
               〈◊〉
               ●…ad
               as
               the
               〈◊〉
               City
               〈◊〉
               ▪
               so
               it
               follows
               that
               the
               new
               City
               could
               not
               be
               above
               〈◊〉
               Furlongs
               broad
               ,
               as
               F.
               Magaillans
               relates
               ;
               but
               it
               would
               be
               sixteen
               Furlongs
               in
               length
               ,
               and
               forty
               four
               in
               circumference
               .
               Now
               Father
               Adam
               is
               a
               Testimony
               of
               great
               Authority
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               〈◊〉
               ▪
               
                 Magaillans
                 ▪
              
               And
               
               therefore
               to
               reconcile
               them
               both
               together
               we
               must
               of
               necessity
               conclude
               ,
               that
               F.
               Magaillans
               speaks
               onely
               of
               the
               breadth
               of
               the
               new
               City
               or
               the
               sides
               that
               look
               toward
               the
               East
               and
               West
               ,
               which
               are
               not
               full
               out
               six
               Furlongs
               in
               length
               .
               Nevertheless
               ,
               untill
               we
               have
               better
               Information
               ,
               I
               do
               not
               think
               it
               behoves
               us
               to
               reject
               the
               Description
               ,
               of
               F.
               Magaillans
               ,
               and
               therefore
               in
               the
               Draught
               I
               have
               made
               the
               new
               City
               perfectly
               square
               ,
               leaving
               to
               every
               Man
               his
               liberty
               to
               adhere
               to
               which
               Opinion
               he
               pleases
               ,
               According
               to
               these
               Measures
               the
               Circuit
               of
               the
               Ancient
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               
                 Pe
                 kim
              
               ,
               of
               twelve
               Furlongs
               to
               the
               League
               of
               twenty
               Leagues
               to
               the
               Degree
               ●…
               and
               not
               twelve
               and
               a
               〈◊〉
               ,
               as
               we
               have
               already
               agreed
               it
               )
               would
               amount
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               Leagues
               or
               forty
               eight
               Furlongs
               ;
               and
               the
               Ground
               〈◊〉
               would
               〈◊〉
               up
               a
               hunder'd
               forty
               four
               Furlongs
               ▪
               And
               the
               new
               City
               according
               to
               F.
               Magaillans
               would
               ●…ke
               up
               a
               fourth
               Part
               of
               the
               old
               one
               ,
               or
               thirty
               six
               square
               Furlongs
               ,
               and
               both
               together
               a
               hunder'd
               and
               fourscore
               square
               Furlongs
               .
            
             
               According
               to
               Father
               Adam
               the
               new
               City
               would
               be
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               Furlongs
               in
               Circuit
               ,
               the
               Ground-pl●…t
               fourscore
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               Furlongs
               ,
               and
               both
               together
               a
               hunder'd
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               Furlongs
               square
               .
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               of
               the
               Holland
               Embassie
               ,
               makes
               the
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               of
               both
               the
               Cities
               of
               
                 Pe
                 kim
              
               to
               be
               five
               Leagues
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               to
               a
               Degree
               ;
               which
               agrees
               with
               the
               Computa●…
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               Magaillans
               ,
               who
               allows
               the
               Circuit
               of
               both
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ,
               but
               according
               to
               the
               Measures
               of
               〈◊〉
               Adam
               ,
               〈◊〉
               are
               sixty
               eight
               Furlongs
               in
               Circumfe●…
               ,
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               Leagues
               and
               two
               thirds
               .
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               we
               ●…pare
               
                 Pe
                 kim
              
               with
               some
               other
               Cities
               ,
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               both
               Cities
               taken
               together
               ,
               are
               much
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               or
               
                 Ki●…m
                 nan
              
               ;
               though
               according
               to
               
                 〈◊〉
                 ,
                 〈◊〉
              
               and
               Trigaut
               they
               are
               much
               better
               〈◊〉
               Semedo
               and
               Trigaut
               make
               
                 Nan
                 kim
              
               to
               be
               〈◊〉
               ▪
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ,
               which
               amount
               to
               se●…ty
               
               two
               Furlongs
               ,
               and
               make
               an
               Area
               of
               three
               hunder'd
               and
               fourscore
               Furlongs
               square
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               two
               Cities
               of
               
                 Pe
                 kim
              
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Opinion
               of
               Father
               Adam
               ,
               not
               containing
               above
               two
               hunder'd
               and
               forty
               Furlongs
               ,
               by
               consequence
               take
               up
               not
               above
               three
               fourths
               of
               the
               Ground
               enclos'd
               within
               the
               first
               Circuit
               of
               
                 Nan
                 kim
              
               .
               For
               I
               do
               not
               speak
               of
               the
               second
               ,
               which
               by
               the
               report
               of
               Authours
               ,
               does
               not
               form
               an
               entire
               Enclosure
               ,
               but
               consists
               onely
               of
               some
               Entrenchments
               to
               secure
               the
               City
               where
               the
               avenues
               are
               most
               easie
               of
               access
               .
            
             
               The
               Second
               difficulty
               is
               about
               the
               Situation
               of
               the
               seven
               Gates
               which
               our
               Authour
               gives
               the
               new
               City
               .
               The
               Authour
               of
               the
               Holland
               Embassie
               says
               ,
               that
               when
               you
               enter
               in
               at
               the
               South
               Gate
               ,
               you
               are
               half
               an
               hour
               before
               you
               come
               to
               the
               second
               Enclosure
               of
               the
               City
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               to
               the
               South
               Walls
               of
               the
               Ancient
               City
               .
               Which
               space
               of
               half
               an
               hour
               in
               crossing
               the
               new
               City
               ,
               agrees
               with
               the
               breadth
               which
               F
               Adam
               ,
               and
               F.
               Magaillans
               allow
               it
               .
               He
               goes
               on
               ,
               and
               says
               that
               the
               second
               Enclosure
               is
               fortify'd
               with
               a
               broad
               M●…e
               full
               of
               River
               Water
               .
               Which
               circumstance
               sh●…ws
               us
               ,
               that
               the
               new
               City
               has
               no
               other
               Wall
               on
               the
               North
               side
               ,
               th●…
               that
               of
               the
               old
               City
               ,
               from
               which
               it
               is
               onely
               separated
               by
               a
               Mote
               .
               So
               that
               all
               the
               Relations
               make
               〈◊〉
               but
               of
               〈◊〉
               Enclosures
               which
               you
               are
               to
               cross
               before
               you
               c●…me
               to
               the
               Palace
               .
               Whence
               that
               it
               seems
               the
               〈◊〉
               Gates
               of
               the
               old
               City
               ought
               to
               joy●…
               to
               the
               new
               City
               ;
               which
               〈◊〉
               is
               difficult
               to
               apprehend
               ,
               considering
               the
               length
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               .
               Magaillans
               seems
               to
               g●…ve
               it
               ▪
               but
               very
               easie
               to
               understand
               according
               to
               F.
               
               Adam's
               Mea●…ure
               .
               And
               therefore
               to
               avoid
               confusion
               ,
               I
               have
               not
               joyn'd
               the
               new
               City
               immediately
               to
               the
               old
               one
               ,
               as
               I
               am
               〈◊〉
               to
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ought
               to
               have
               d●…ne
               .
               Which
               being
               gran●…d
               ,
               my
               Opinion
               is
               ,
               that
               it
               ought
               to
               have
               three
               Gates
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               side
               to
               answer
               the
               three
               Gates
               of
               the
               old
               City
               ;
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               the
               East
               side
               ,
               and
               an●…ther
               upon
               the
               〈◊〉
               ,
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               
               Authour
               in
               that
               Paragraph
               says
               ,
               that
               every
               Gate
               leads
               to
               a
               particular
               Suburb
               well
               peopl'd
               ;
               more
               especially
               that
               which
               looks
               toward
               the
               West
               .
               Now
               he
               had
               not
               explain'd
               himself
               right
               if
               there
               be
               more
               than
               one
               Gate
               and
               one
               Suburb
               on
               the
               West
               side
               .
               And
               thus
               there
               remain
               but
               two
               Gates
               ,
               which
               I
               have
               plac'd
               on
               the
               South
               side
               ;
               and
               I
               do
               not
               expect
               to
               meet
               with
               any
               thing
               more
               exact
               ,
               till
               we
               have
               further
               News
               from
               China
               .
            
             
               The
               third
               thing
               that
               puzzles
               me
               is
               the
               great
               Number
               of
               Suburbs
               belonging
               to
               the
               two
               Cities
               :
               Our
               Authour
               says
               ,
               that
               every
               Gate
               leads
               to
               its
               Suburb
               .
               So
               then
               as
               there
               are
               sixteen
               Gates
               ,
               nine
               in
               the
               old
               ,
               and
               seven
               belonging
               to
               the
               new
               City
               ,
               there
               must
               also
               be
               sixteen
               Suburbs
               .
               But
               this
               seems
               to
               be
               impossible
               ,
               by
               reason
               that
               according
               to
               our
               Authour
               and
               other
               Relations
               ,
               the
               North
               side
               of
               the
               new
               City
               joyns
               to
               the
               South
               side
               of
               the
               old
               ,
               and
               you
               enter
               out
               of
               the
               first
               into
               the
               second
               at
               three
               Gates
               ,
               as
               Father
               Adam
               says
               expresly
               in
               these
               words
               ,
               
                 Tribus
                 portis
                 ab
                 anteriorem
                 Urbem
                 est
                 pervia
                 .
              
               Consequently
               the
               southern
               Gates
               of
               the
               old
               City
               can
               have
               no
               Suburbs
               ,
               no
               more
               than
               the
               northern
               Gates
               of
               the
               new
               ,
               especially
               if
               they
               are
               onely
               separated
               by
               a
               Mote
               .
               So
               then
               according
               to
               this
               supposition
               the
               old
               City
               can
               have
               but
               four
               Suburbs
               ,
               the
               new
               City
               but
               two
               ,
               and
               both
               together
               but
               six
               .
               Or
               if
               you
               will
               have
               the
               seven
               Gates
               of
               the
               new
               City
               to
               be
               separated
               ,
               and
               distant
               from
               the
               Gates
               of
               the
               old
               City
               ,
               then
               there
               will
               be
               thirteen
               Suburbs
               in
               all
               ,
               and
               not
               sixteen
               .
               Which
               makes
               me
               think
               our
               Authour
               meant
               that
               every
               separate
               Gate
               that
               lead
               into
               the
               Countrey
               ,
               had
               a
               Suburb
               .
            
             
               Now
               in
               regard
               that
               neither
               our
               Authour
               nor
               any
               Relation
               speaks
               exactly
               of
               the
               Fortifications
               of
               this
               great
               City
               ;
               it
               will
               not
               be
               amiss
               to
               set
               down
               here
               what
               I
               have
               collected
               from
               
                 Trigault
                 ,
                 Semedo
                 ,
                 Martini
                 ,
                 Adam
                 ,
              
               and
               out
               of
               the
               Holland
               Embassie
               .
               The
               old
               Town
               is
               environ'd
               with
               strong
               Walls
               ,
               defended
               by
               
               several
               Towers
               plac'd
               a
               Stones
               throw
               one
               from
               another
               .
               F.
               Adam
               numbers
               the
               Towers
               to
               be
               three
               hunder'd
               and
               sixty
               ,
               which
               make
               a
               hunder'd
               fourscore
               and
               two
               Foot
               of
               Paris
               .
               He
               says
               moreover
               ,
               that
               among
               these
               Towers
               ,
               at
               the
               distance
               of
               every
               two
               Furlongs
               ,
               there
               is
               one
               of
               a
               larger
               Bulk
               ,
               which
               might
               be
               easily
               made
               ,
               a
               Bastion
               ,
               by
               adding
               the
               Point
               or
               two
               Faces
               of
               the
               Bastion
               ,
               which
               are
               wanting
               .
               The
               whole
               Circuit
               of
               the
               City
               is
               forty
               eight
               Furlongs
               ;
               whence
               it
               follows
               ,
               that
               there
               are
               twenty
               four
               great
               Towers
               ,
               which
               would
               make
               twenty
               four
               Bastions
               ,
               which
               would
               be
               distant
               one
               from
               the
               other
               about
               four
               hunder'd
               and
               fifty
               Fathoms
               ,
               or
               five
               hunder'd
               and
               forty
               Geometrical
               paces
               .
               The
               Wall
               is
               properly
               a
               Rampart
               consisting
               of
               two
               Brick
               walls
               ,
               the
               Bottom
               of
               which
               is
               of
               large
               free
               Stone
               ,
               according
               to
               Trigaut
               and
               Martini
               ;
               and
               the
               Spaces
               between
               are
               fill'd
               up
               with
               Earth
               ,
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               our
               strong
               Forts
               in
               Europe
               .
               F.
               Adam
               says
               that
               the
               Rampart
               is
               fifty
               Cubits
               or
               Chinese
               foot
               high
               ;
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               seven
               Fathom
               ,
               and
               seven
               and
               7
               /
               24
               ,
               or
               forty
               three
               Foot
               and
               three
               Quarters
               :
               and
               that
               the
               thickness
               of
               it
               is
               twenty
               four
               Cubits
               or
               Chinese
               Feet
               ,
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               three
               Fathoms
               and
               a
               half
               ,
               or
               twenty
               one
               Foot.
               All
               the
               old
               Wall
               is
               surrounded
               with
               a
               deep
               and
               large
               Mote
               full
               of
               Water
               ;
               and
               the
               Rampart
               and
               Towers
               are
               furnish'd
               with
               all
               sorts
               of
               Armes
               necessary
               for
               their
               defence
               according
               to
               the
               Custom
               of
               the
               Countrey
               .
               Moreover
               the
               Relation
               of
               the
               Dutch
               Embassie
               ,
               observes
               that
               there
               was
               a
               large
               Portcullis
               belonging
               to
               the
               Gate
               ,
               through
               which
               the
               Embassadours
               enter'd
               .
            
             
               
                 It
                 is
                 so
                 spacious
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 above
                 thirty
                 Fathom
                 broad
                 .
              
               
            
             
               It
               is
               in
               the
               Original
               ,
               above
               twenty
               Lances
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Portugueze
               way
               of
               speaking
               ,
               but
               I
               have
               
               translated
               it
               twenty
               fathom
               ,
               allowing
               nine
               foot
               to
               the
               Spanish
               Lances
               which
               are
               somewhat
               longer
               than
               ours
               .
            
          
           
             
               Notes
               for
               the
               better
               understanding
               the
               Plane
               or
               Draught
               of
               the
               City
               of
               
                 Pe
                 kim
              
               .
            
             
               
                 There
                 are
                 the
                 same
                 Marks
                 upon
                 the
                 Draugh●…
                 ▪
              
            
             
               
                 A.
                 The
                 Walls
                 of
                 
                   Pe
                   kim
                
                 which
                 make
                 a
                 perfect
                 Square
                 of
                 twelve
                 Furlongs
                 ,
                 or
                 about
                 a
                 League
                 every
                 way
                 ,
                 and
                 forty
                 eight
                 Furlongs
                 ,
                 or
                 near
                 four
                 Leagues
                 in
                 Circumference
                 .
                 These
                 Walls
                 are
                 double
                 with
                 a
                 Platform
                 of
                 Earth
                 between
                 ,
                 and
                 form
                 a
                 Rampart
                 of
                 seven
                 Fathom
                 and
                 near
                 ⅓
                 high
                 ▪
                 and
                 three
                 Fathom
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 thi●…
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 guarded
                 by
                 three
                 hunder'd
                 and
                 〈◊〉
                 square
                 Towers
                 ,
                 and
                 surrounded
                 with
                 a
                 Mote
                 full
                 of
                 Water
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 not
                 mark'd
                 in
                 the
                 Draught
                 because
                 the
                 〈◊〉
                 says
                 nothing
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 B
                 The
                 Gates
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 ,
                 nine
                 in
                 Number
                 ,
                 three
                 on
                 the
                 South
                 ,
                 and
                 two
                 on
                 each
                 of
                 the
                 other
                 Sides
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 plac'd
                 very
                 near
                 where
                 they
                 ought
                 to
                 stand
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 Authour
                 d●…s
                 not
                 say
                 where
                 they
                 stand
                 ,
                 but
                 onely
                 in
                 the
                 middle
                 of
                 the
                 South
                 side
                 .
              
               
                 C.
                 The
                 Streets
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 are
                 all
                 streight
                 and
                 drawn
                 ●…t
                 by
                 a
                 li●…e
                 ,
                 with
                 this
                 difference
                 ,
                 that
                 those
                 which
                 run
                 from
                 North
                 to
                 South
                 are
                 all
                 very
                 large
                 ;
                 but
                 those
                 that
                 run
                 from
                 East
                 to
                 West
                 are
                 all
                 narrow
                 .
              
               
                 
                   D
                   a.
                
                 The
                 first
                 enclosure
                 of
                 the
                 Palace
                 ,
                 which
                 forms
                 〈◊〉
                 long
                 Squ●…●…wo
                 Miles
                 in
                 length
                 ,
                 a
                 Mile
                 broad
                 ,
                 and
                 six
                 Miles
                 〈◊〉
                 two
                 Leagues
                 of
                 twenty
                 to
                 a
                 Degree
                 in
                 〈◊〉
                 ▪
                 This
                 〈◊〉
                 ●…ll
                 is
                 very
                 h●…gh
                 and
                 very
                 thi●…k
                 .
                 O●…
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 of
                 the
                 Wall
                 runs
                 a
                 Ri●…er
                 ,
                 which
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 〈◊〉
                 ▪
                 makes
                 sev●…l
                 Turnings
                 and
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 the
                 Palace
                 .
                 But
                 in
                 regard
                 they
                 do
                 not
                 mark
                 the
                 C●…urse
                 of
                 the
                 stream
                 ,
                 n●…
                 more
                 tha●…●…ur
                 〈◊〉
                 ,
                 we
                 have
                 been
                 forc'd
                 to
                 mark
                 it
                 〈◊〉
                 in
                 a
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 .
                 On
                 the
                 West
                 side
                 there
                 〈◊〉
                 ●…
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 five
                 
                 Furlongs
                 or
                 a
                 thousand
                 one
                 hunder'd
                 thirty
                 seven
                 Fathoms
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 in
                 length
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 Bridge
                 over
                 the
                 narrowest
                 part
                 .
                 This
                 Lake
                 represents
                 the
                 form
                 of
                 a
                 Base-viol
                 ,
                 which
                 we
                 have
                 imitated
                 as
                 near
                 as
                 we
                 could
                 .
              
               
                 
                   D
                   b.
                
                 The
                 second
                 Enclosure
                 of
                 the
                 Palace
                 ,
                 which
                 contains
                 several
                 particular
                 Palaces
                 belonging
                 to
                 the
                 Emperour
                 .
              
               
                 
                   D
                   c.
                
                 The
                 third
                 Enclosure
                 of
                 the
                 Palace
                 ,
                 which
                 on
                 two
                 Sides
                 bounds
                 the
                 Row
                 of
                 several
                 Apartments
                 of
                 the
                 Emperour
                 's
                 grand
                 Palace
                 .
                 The
                 Emperour's
                 Apartments
                 which
                 the
                 Authour
                 mentions
                 to
                 the
                 Number
                 of
                 Twenty
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 he
                 describes
                 beginning
                 from
                 the
                 Meridional
                 and
                 Principal
                 Gate
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 .
              
               
                 E.
                 The
                 Meridional
                 and
                 Principal
                 Gate
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 ,
                 very
                 large
                 and
                 magnificent
                 .
              
               
                 F.
                 The
                 first
                 Street
                 you
                 meet
                 with
                 as
                 you
                 enter
                 the
                 City
                 at
                 the
                 South
                 Gate
                 .
              
               
                 G.
                 A
                 Square
                 Piazza
                 environ'd
                 with
                 a
                 Balustrade
                 Marble
                 .
              
               
                 H.
                 The
                 second
                 Street
                 adorn'd
                 with
                 two
                 Triumphal
                 Arches
                 ,
                 between
                 which
                 no
                 Person
                 is
                 permitted
                 to
                 pas●…
                 either
                 in
                 a
                 Sedan
                 or
                 Horse-back
                 ,
                 ●…ut
                 of
                 respect
                 to
                 the
                 Emperour's
                 Palace
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XVIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             twenty
             Apartments
             belonging
             to
             the
             Emperour's
             Palace
             .
          
           
             TO
             the
             Emperour's
             Palace
             there
             belong
             twenty
             Apartments
             ,
             which
             run
             on
             in
             a
             stereight
             Line
             from
             North
             to
             South
             But
             fo●…
             the
             better
             apprehending
             their
             Situation
             ,
             you
             are
             to
             understand
             ,
             that
             between
             the
             outward
             Enclosure
             of
             the
             Palace
             and
             the
             South
             Wall
             ,
             where
             
             stands
             the
             Principal
             Gate
             of
             the
             City
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             large
             Space
             belonging
             to
             the
             Palace
             ,
             and
             contriv'd
             after
             the
             following
             manner
             .
             When
             you
             enter
             at
             the
             Gate
             of
             the
             City
             ,
             you
             meet
             with
             a
             large
             and
             fair
             Street
             ,
             which
             extends
             it self
             the
             full
             length
             of
             the
             City
             Wall
             ,
             which
             after
             you
             have
             gone
             thorough
             ,
             you
             enter
             into
             a
             square
             Piazza
             environ'd
             with
             a
             Balustrade
             of
             Marble
             ;
             beyond
             this
             there
             is
             a
             second
             Street
             adorn'd
             on
             each
             Side
             with
             two
             Triumphal
             Arches
             ,
             into
             which
             you
             are
             not
             permitted
             to
             go
             neither
             in
             a
             Sedan
             ,
             nor
             a
             Horse-back
             ;
             but
             you
             must
             alight
             at
             the
             first
             Triumphal
             Arch
             ,
             and
             walk
             a
             foot
             beyond
             the
             second
             .
             For
             to
             do
             otherwise
             would
             be
             a
             breach
             of
             that
             respect
             which
             is
             due
             to
             the
             King
             's
             first
             Apartment
             ,
             which
             stands
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             Street
             at
             an
             equal
             distance
             between
             the
             two
             Arches
             .
             This
             first
             Apartment
             is
             call'd
             
               Tai
               cim
               muen
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Portal
             of
             great
             Purity
             .
             It
             consists
             of
             three
             great
             Gates
             with
             three
             Vaults
             very
             long
             and
             large
             ,
             above
             which
             is
             a
             very
             fair
             Hall.
             These
             Gates
             are
             never
             open'd
             but
             when
             the
             King
             himself
             goes
             out
             of
             Town
             .
             Beyond
             this
             first
             Apartment
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             large
             and
             vast
             Court
             adorn'd
             on
             both
             sides
             with
             Portico's
             and
             Columns
             supported
             by
             two
             hunder'd
             Pillars
             ,
             which
             being
             seen
             from
             the
             Gate
             afford
             a
             very
             large
             and
             pleasing
             Perspective
             .
             This
             Court
             is
             ●…wo
             Bow-shoots
             broad
             ,
             and
             long
             above
             twice
             Musquet-shot
             ;
             and
             is
             bounded
             on
             the
             North
             side
             by
             the
             famous
             Street
             of
             
               Perpetual
               Repose
            
             ,
             which
             runs
             along
             athwart
             the
             two
             Gates
             which
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             on
             both
             sides
             .
             These
             Gates
             derive
             their
             Name
             from
             the
             Streets
             wherein
             they
             are
             built
             .
             For
             the
             first
             is
             call'd
             the
             Oriental
             Gate
             of
             the
             Street
             of
             
               Perpetual
               Repose
            
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             the
             Western
             Gate
             of
             the
             same
             Street
             .
             All
             that
             I
             have
             
             hitherto
             describ'd
             is
             without
             the
             two
             Enclosures
             of
             the
             Palace
             ,
             and
             onely
             serves
             for
             a
             Portico
             or
             Avenue
             ,
             but
             so
             majestical
             that
             it
             challenges
             an
             awfull
             respect
             .
             Thence
             going
             on
             from
             North
             to
             South
             ,
             you
             see
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Exteriour
             wall
             ,
             which
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             bounds
             the
             Street
             of
             Perpetual
             Repose
             on
             the
             North
             side
             ,
             the
             second
             Apartment
             and
             the
             second
             Portal
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             rather
             call'd
             the
             first
             ,
             because
             all
             that
             go
             to
             the
             Palace
             are
             oblig'd
             to
             go
             through
             it
             .
             It
             is
             compos'd
             of
             five
             Gates
             ,
             three
             great
             ones
             which
             never
             open
             but
             for
             the
             King
             ,
             and
             two
             small
             ones
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             advanc'd
             at
             the
             bottom
             about
             the
             height
             of
             a
             step
             above
             the
             level
             Ground
             ,
             through
             which
             all
             that
             go
             in
             and
             out
             must
             pass
             ,
             even
             the
             great
             Lords
             themselves
             .
             Above
             these
             Gates
             ,
             as
             above
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             stands
             a
             great
             Hall
             ,
             adorn'd
             with
             a
             great
             Number
             of
             Columns
             with
             Bases
             and
             Chapters
             guilded
             ;
             and
             painted
             on
             the
             outside
             with
             Vermillion
             Varnish
             ,
             withinside
             with
             a
             Varnish
             of
             Gold
             and
             Azure
             .
             Behind
             this
             Apartment
             lies
             a
             Court
             incomparably
             more
             spacious
             than
             the
             former
             ,
             on
             the
             East
             and
             West
             sides
             fill'd
             up
             with
             Halls
             and
             Chambers
             that
             have
             their
             Portico's
             and
             Galleries
             ,
             as
             have
             all
             the
             rest
             already
             mention'd
             .
             From
             hence
             you
             proceed
             to
             the
             third
             Apartment
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             the
             
               Portal
               of
               the
               Beginning
            
             .
             Behind
             which
             there
             lies
             another
             Court
             ,
             as
             behind
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             that
             joyns
             to
             the
             fourth
             Apartment
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Tower
             or
             Portal
             of
             the
             South
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             the
             first
             within
             the
             inner
             Wall.
             This
             Apartment
             consists
             of
             three
             vast
             Arches
             ,
             and
             a
             Hall
             above
             them
             ,
             the
             Architecture
             of
             which
             is
             like
             to
             that
             of
             the
             third
             ;
             but
             the
             Structure
             is
             larger
             ,
             more
             lofty
             ,
             and
             more
             majestick
             .
             On
             the
             two
             sides
             it
             has
             two
             Walls
             built
             in
             the
             form
             of
             Galleries
             ,
             that
             extend
             
             themselves
             toward
             the
             South
             a
             full
             Musquet-shot
             in
             length
             ,
             and
             at
             both
             ends
             North
             and
             South
             are
             bounded
             by
             four
             Pa●…illions
             or
             Halls
             like
             those
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             but
             much
             le●…s
             .
             The
             Roofs
             are
             Hexagonal
             or
             sloping
             six
             ways
             ,
             and
             are
             beautifi'd
             at
             the
             Top
             with
             D●…ggs
             of
             Brass
             guilded
             .
             All
             which
             ●…ive
             Buildings
             together
             beget
             a
             strange
             Surprize
             ,
             causing
             both
             Astonishment
             and
             Reverence
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             their
             Grandeur
             and
             their
             Riches
             .
             In
             the
             middle
             of
             this
             great
             middlemost
             Hall
             it
             is
             where
             the
             Drum
             and
             the
             Bell
             hang
             up
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             in
             the
             eighth
             Chapter
             .
             Behind
             this
             ,
             ●…ies
             onother
             〈◊〉
             like
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             Apartment
             call●…d
             the
             supream
             Porta●…
             .
             To
             this
             Apartment
             belong
             five
             large
             ●…nd
             majestick
             Gates
             ,
             to
             which
             you
             ascend
             by
             five
             Pair
             of
             Stairs
             of
             thirty
             steps
             a
             piece
             .
             But
             before
             you
             come
             at
             it
             ,
             you
             must
             cross
             a
             deep
             Mo●…e
             full
             of
             water
             over
             five
             Bridges
             that
             answer
             to
             the
             five
             Pair
             of
             Stairs
             .
             Both
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             beautifi'd
             with
             Parapets
             Balusters
             ,
             Columns
             ,
             Pilasters
             and
             square
             Bases
             ,
             with
             Lyons
             and
             other
             Ornaments
             ,
             all
             of
             very
             fine
             and
             very
             white
             Marble
             .
             So
             that
             it
             is
             not
             without
             good
             reason
             ,
             that
             this
             Apartment
             cariers
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Supream
             Portal
             ,
             as
             being
             more
             magnificent
             and
             majestick
             than
             all
             the
             rest
             .
             Behind
             it
             lies
             another
             very
             spacious
             Court
             ,
             garnish'd
             on
             both
             sides
             with
             ●…ortico's
             and
             Galleries
             ,
             Halls
             and
             other
             Rooms
             very
             Noble
             ,
             Stately
             and
             Rich.
             This
             Court
             j●…ns
             to
             a
             sixth
             Apartment
             ,
             call'd
             the
             supreme
             Imperial
             Hall.
             To
             which
             you
             ascend
             by
             five
             Pair
             of
             Stairs
             ;
             each
             pair
             of
             forty
             steps
             ,
             all
             of
             very
             fine
             Marble
             and
             costly
             Workmanship
             .
             The
             pair
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             which
             the
             King
             onely
             ascends
             is
             of
             an
             extraordinary
             breadth
             ;
             the
             two
             pair
             on
             each
             side
             appointed
             for
             the
             great
             Lords
             and
             Man.
             
             darins
             are
             not
             so
             broad
             ;
             and
             the
             other
             two
             which
             are
             the
             narrowest
             ,
             serve
             for
             the
             Eunuchs
             and
             Officers
             of
             the
             King's
             Houshold
             .
             They
             tell
             us
             ,
             that
             under
             the
             Reign
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Kings
             ,
             this
             Hall
             was
             one
             of
             the
             wonders
             of
             the
             World
             for
             its
             beauty
             ,
             riches
             and
             spaciousness
             ;
             but
             that
             the
             Robbers
             that
             rebell'd
             during
             the
             last
             Revolutions
             ,
             burnt
             it
             together
             with
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             Palace
             ,
             when
             they
             abandon'd
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             ,
             for
             fear
             of
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             who
             like
             Barbarians
             as
             they
             are
             ,
             were
             contented
             that
             it
             should
             onely
             in
             some
             measure
             resemble
             what
             it
             was
             before
             ;
             yet
             there
             is
             that
             in
             it
             still
             which
             serves
             to
             fill
             the
             Imagination
             ,
             and
             to
             display
             the
             Grandeur
             of
             the
             Emperour
             .
             In
             this
             Hall
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Prince
             being
             seated
             in
             his
             Throne
             ,
             receives
             the
             Homages
             of
             all
             his
             great
             Lords
             and
             all
             his
             Mandarins
             both
             Learned
             and
             Military
             .
             Which
             as
             it
             is
             a
             very
             remarkable
             Ceremony
             ,
             so
             it
             will
             not
             be
             from
             the
             purpose
             to
             give
             a
             Relation
             of
             it
             with
             all
             its
             Circumstances
             .
          
           
             So
             soon
             as
             any
             new
             Family
             obtains
             the
             Empire
             ,
             the
             days
             are
             presently
             appointed
             for
             all
             the
             Lords
             and
             Mandarins
             to
             attend
             and
             pay
             their
             Homages
             to
             the
             Emperour
             .
             This
             new
             Family
             of
             the
             Tartars
             have
             made
             choice
             of
             the
             first
             ,
             the
             fifth
             ,
             the
             fifteenth
             ,
             and
             twenty
             fifth
             of
             every
             Moon
             .
             And
             so
             upon
             every
             one
             of
             those
             days
             ,
             all
             the
             great
             Lords
             and
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             to
             the
             Number
             of
             near
             five
             thousand
             ,
             assemble
             together
             in
             the
             Halls
             ,
             the
             Chambers
             and
             Portico's
             on
             both
             sides
             the
             Court
             that
             lies
             before
             the
             South
             Gate
             .
             They
             have
             all
             Bonnets
             upon
             their
             Heads
             ,
             and
             are
             clad
             in
             Robes
             richly
             embroider'd
             with
             Gold
             ;
             yet
             so
             distinguish'd
             however
             ,
             that
             you
             may
             know
             one
             from
             another
             by
             the
             Variety
             of
             Beas●…
             and
             Bi●…ds
             embroider'd
             ,
             three
             ●…orys
             one
             above
             another
             upon
             their
             Bonnets
             ,
             upon
             
             both
             sides
             of
             their
             Garments
             ,
             and
             upon
             their
             Breasts
             ,
             and
             the
             diversity
             of
             the
             Figures
             and
             Colours
             of
             their
             precious
             Stones
             .
             By
             break
             of
             day
             the
             King
             removes
             out
             of
             his
             '
             leventh
             Apartment
             where
             he
             makes
             his
             Residence
             ,
             carry'd
             in
             a
             magnificent
             Sedan
             upon
             the
             Shoulders
             of
             sixteen
             Eunuchs
             ,
             and
             surrounded
             with
             several
             other
             Persons
             .
             Being
             come
             into
             the
             Hall
             ,
             he
             seats
             himself
             in
             a
             costly
             Throne
             rais'd
             in
             the
             middle
             between
             six
             high
             and
             massie
             Pillars
             ,
             which
             appear
             to
             be
             such
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             them
             ,
             Pillars
             of
             fine
             Gold
             ,
             though
             they
             are
             onely
             richly
             guilt
             .
             Then
             an
             Eunuch
             falling
             upon
             his
             Knees
             before
             the
             Door
             ,
             and
             raising
             his
             voice
             as
             loud
             as
             he
             is
             able
             ,
             with
             a
             slow
             yet
             vehement
             Tone
             cries
             out
             ,
             
               Ta
               lui
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             let
             the
             Heaven
             let
             loose
             its
             Thunder
             .
             Upon
             which
             presently
             they
             strike
             upon
             the
             Bell
             ,
             and
             beat
             the
             great
             Palace
             Drum
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             same
             time
             the
             Kettle-drums
             ,
             Trumpets
             ,
             Hoe-boys
             and
             Flutes
             making
             a
             confused
             Noise
             ,
             of
             a
             sudden
             all
             the
             Gates
             of
             the
             Palace
             are
             thrown
             open
             ,
             except
             those
             of
             the
             first
             Apartment
             or
             Portal
             .
             Then
             at
             the
             same
             time
             that
             this
             Confusion
             of
             Harmony
             begins
             ,
             the
             Lords
             and
             Mandarins
             prepare
             to
             march
             .
             First
             the
             petty
             Kings
             ,
             or
             great
             Lords
             of
             the
             Blood-Royal
             ,
             and
             the
             learned
             Mandarins
             from
             that
             side
             next
             the
             East
             ;
             and
             the
             Lords
             which
             are
             not
             of
             the
             Blood-Royal
             ,
             and
             the
             military
             Mandarins
             from
             that
             side
             next
             the
             West
             .
             Thus
             they
             proceed
             on
             both
             sides
             in
             good
             Order
             ,
             with
             a
             slow
             and
             equal
             Pace
             through
             passages
             that
             lie
             in
             a
             direct
             line
             pav'd
             with
             large
             Marble
             Stones
             ,
             and
             through
             the
             lesser
             Gates
             that
             are
             next
             the
             great
             ones
             .
             Then
             the
             great
             Lords
             ascend
             the
             Stairs
             ,
             and
             place
             themselves
             according
             to
             their
             Degrees
             ,
             upon
             the
             Platform
             or
             open
             Walk
             before
             the
             great
             Hall
             :
             and
             the
             Mandarins
             as
             they
             
             come
             forward
             take
             their
             stands
             in
             the
             Court
             according
             to
             their
             several
             Ranks
             and
             Qualities
             ,
             in
             the
             Places
             appointed
             for
             every
             one
             of
             the
             nine
             Orders
             ,
             which
             are
             mark'd
             and
             writ
             down
             at
             the
             Bottom
             of
             certain
             little
             Pillars
             .
             When
             they
             are
             thus
             dispos'd
             on
             both
             sides
             the
             Court
             ,
             leaving
             a
             void
             space
             in
             the
             middle
             where
             the
             King
             uses
             to
             pass
             along
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             somewhat
             broader
             and
             higher
             rais'd
             than
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             they
             turn
             their
             Faces
             one
             towards
             another
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             those
             on
             the
             East
             towards
             those
             on
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             they
             on
             the
             West
             side
             toward
             those
             on
             the
             East
             ;
             and
             then
             the
             Din
             of
             all
             the
             Instruments
             of
             Musick
             ceases
             ,
             and
             a
             profound
             silence
             ensuing
             ,
             they
             keep
             themselves
             in
             a
             posture
             of
             all
             the
             Respect
             and
             Modesty
             imaginable
             .
             Then
             the
             Master
             of
             the
             Ceremonies
             being
             upon
             his
             Knees
             upon
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             last
             Pair
             of
             Stairs
             ,
             with
             a
             loud
             and
             harmonious
             Voice
             addresses
             himself
             to
             the
             King
             in
             these
             words
             ;
             
               Most
               Illustrious
               and
               most
               Puissant
               Prince
               ,
               our
               Sovereign
               Lord
               ,
               all
               the
               Princes
               of
               the
               Blood
               and
               great
               Lords
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               Learned
               and
               Military
               Mandarins
               are
               come
               ,
               and
               are
               ready
               to
               pay
               the
               Homages
               which
               they
               owe
               to
               your
               Majesty
               .
            
             After
             that
             he
             rises
             ,
             and
             standing
             upright
             upon
             the
             West
             side
             of
             the
             Stairs
             ,
             he
             raises
             his
             Voice
             again
             ,
             and
             cries
             
               Pai
               pan
            
             ,
             or
             set
             your selves
             in
             Order
             ;
             at
             what
             time
             they
             compose
             their
             Garments
             ,
             their
             Feet
             ,
             their
             Hands
             and
             Eyes
             after
             their
             manner
             :
             then
             he
             goes
             on
             
               Cheuen
               Xin
            
             ,
             turn
             your selves
             ;
             upon
             which
             they
             turn
             in
             a
             moment
             toward
             the
             Imperial
             Hall.
             Quei
             ,
             fall
             upon
             your
             Knees
             ;
             which
             they
             presently
             do
             .
             
               Keu
               teu
            
             ,
             touch
             the
             Earth
             with
             your
             Heads
             :
             't
             is
             done
             assoon
             as
             said
             .
             
               Ki
               lai
            
             ,
             rise
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             all
             rise
             .
             After
             that
             he
             cries
             Ye
             :
             By
             which
             he
             commands
             them
             to
             extend
             both
             their
             
             Armes
             like
             two
             Bows
             ,
             and
             joyning
             both
             Hands
             together
             to
             lift
             them
             up
             above
             their
             Heads
             ,
             and
             then
             to
             bow
             down
             as
             low
             as
             their
             Knees
             :
             and
             that
             being
             done
             ,
             to
             resume
             their
             first
             Posture
             with
             a
             gracefull
             behaviour
             ;
             for
             the
             single
             syllable
             Ye
             ,
             commands
             all
             this
             sort
             of
             Reverence
             .
             This
             Ceremony
             they
             perform
             three
             times
             together
             ,
             and
             then
             fall
             upon
             their
             Knees
             ,
             at
             what
             time
             the
             Master
             of
             the
             Ceremonies
             cries
             
               Keu
               teu
            
             ,
             touch
             the
             Ground
             with
             your
             Heads
             ,
             which
             they
             do
             .
             
               T●…ai
               Keu
               teu
            
             ,
             touch
             the
             Ground
             a
             second
             Time
             :
             't
             is
             done
             a
             second
             Time.
             
               Yeu
               Keu
               teu
            
             ,
             touch
             the
             Ground
             a
             third
             Time
             :
             which
             is
             likewise
             done
             .
             Now
             when
             they
             knock
             the
             Ground
             the
             two
             first
             times
             with
             their
             Foreheads
             ,
             they
             utter
             with
             a
             low
             Voice
             
               van
               sui
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             
               Ten
               Thousand
               Years
            
             ;
             but
             the
             third
             time
             they
             cry
             
               Van
               sui
               van
               van
               sui
               ,
               Ten
               thousand
               Years
               ,
               ten
               Millions
               of
               Millions
               of
               Years
               .
            
             This
             last
             Prosternation
             being
             over
             ,
             the
             Master
             of
             the
             Ceremonies
             repeats
             
               Ki
               lai
            
             ,
             rise
             ;
             
               Cheuen
               Xin
            
             ,
             turn
             your selves
             ;
             and
             then
             they
             turn
             one
             toward
             another
             ,
             and
             lastly
             
               Quei
               pan
            
             ,
             set
             your selves
             in
             Order
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             return
             to
             their
             places
             ,
             putting
             themselves
             into
             rank
             and
             file
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             before
             .
             In
             the
             mean
             time
             the
             Master
             of
             the
             Ceremonies
             falling
             again
             upon
             his
             Knees
             ,
             with
             the
             same
             respectfull
             and
             sonorous
             Voice
             cries
             aloud
             
               〈◊〉
               pi
            
             ,
             most
             Potent
             Lord
             ,
             the
             Ceremonies
             of
             this
             Homage
             which
             are
             due
             to
             thee
             are
             accomplish'd
             :
             and
             with
             that
             the
             Din
             of
             the
             loud
             Instruments
             begins
             again
             ,
             while
             the
             King
             descending
             from
             his
             Throne
             ,
             descends
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             he
             came
             .
             The
             great
             Lords
             and
             Mandarins
             also
             retire
             into
             the
             Halls
             and
             Chambers
             of
             the
             Court
             before
             the
             South
             Portal
             ,
             where
             they
             repose
             and
             change
             their
             Ceremony
             Hab●…s
             ,
             which
             are
             different
             from
             their
             usual
             
             Garments
             ,
             and
             much
             more
             sumptuous
             .
             Nevertheless
             there
             is
             not
             one
             of
             them
             that
             dares
             presume
             to
             wear
             yellow
             ,
             for
             fear
             of
             being
             severely
             punish'd
             .
             For
             the
             Chineses
             say
             that
             yellow
             is
             the
             Queen
             of
             Colours
             ,
             since
             Gold
             which
             all
             men
             grant
             to
             be
             the
             Queen
             of
             Metals
             ,
             is
             of
             the
             same
             Colour
             ,
             has
             prefer'd
             it
             before
             all
             others
             ,
             and
             therefore
             by
             consequence
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             reserv'd
             for
             the
             Emperour
             .
             In
             short
             ,
             he
             always
             appears
             in
             publick
             in
             a
             long
             Robe
             down
             to
             the
             ground
             of
             that
             Colour
             ,
             the
             ground
             of
             which
             is
             Velvet
             ,
             embroider'd
             with
             a
             great
             Number
             of
             little
             Dragons
             with
             five
             Claws
             a
             piece
             all
             emboss'd
             Work
             ,
             which
             covers
             the
             Robe
             all
             over
             .
             Two
             large
             Dragons
             opposite
             one
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             with
             their
             Bodies
             and
             their
             Tails
             twin'd
             and
             twirling
             one
             within
             another
             ,
             take
             up
             both
             the
             sides
             and
             the
             forepart
             of
             the
             Breast
             ,
             and
             seem
             as
             if
             they
             would
             seize
             with
             their
             Teeth
             and
             Claws
             a
             very
             fair
             Pearl
             that
             seems
             to
             drop
             from
             the
             Skies
             ,
             in
             allusion
             to
             what
             the
             Chineses
             say
             ,
             that
             Dragons
             play
             with
             the
             Clouds
             and
             with
             Pearls
             .
             His
             Bonnet
             ,
             his
             Buskins
             ,
             his
             Girdle
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             word
             all
             his
             Robes
             are
             very
             sumptuous
             and
             magnificent
             ,
             and
             are
             extraordinary
             Marks
             of
             Grandeur
             and
             Majesty
             .
          
           
             Next
             to
             the
             Imperial
             Hall
             and
             the
             Court
             that
             lies
             behind
             it
             ,
             stands
             the
             seventh
             Apartment
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             the
             High
             rais'd
             Hall
             ,
             and
             next
             to
             the
             Court
             behind
             this
             stands
             the
             eighth
             Apartment
             call'd
             the
             Supream
             Hall
             in
             the
             middle
             :
             The
             next
             Hall
             ,
             having
             a
             Court
             before
             it
             likewise
             ,
             is
             call'd
             the
             Hall
             of
             Sovereign
             concord
             .
             To
             this
             Hall
             it
             is
             ,
             and
             two
             more
             built
             of
             each
             side
             ,
             that
             the
             King
             comes
             twice
             a
             year
             ,
             Morning
             and
             Afternoon
             to
             treat
             of
             the
             Affairs
             of
             the
             whole
             Empire
             with
             his
             Colao
             or
             Counsellers
             of
             State
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             
             the
             six
             supream
             Tribunals
             .
             And
             for
             this
             reason
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             at
             the
             East
             end
             of
             this
             Hall
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             very
             fair
             Palace
             for
             the
             Tribunal
             call'd
             
               Nui
               yuen
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Tribunal
             within
             ,
             compos'd
             of
             Counsellers
             of
             State
             ,
             and
             above
             three
             hunder'd
             Mandarins
             of
             all
             Degrees
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             above
             all
             the
             other
             Tribunals
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             Behind
             another
             Court
             stands
             the
             tenth
             Apartment
             with
             a
             fair
             and
             very
             high
             rais'd
             Portal
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             the
             Portal
             of
             Heaven
             clear
             and
             without
             blemish
             .
             There
             are
             three
             great
             Gates
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             to
             which
             you
             ascend
             by
             three
             Pair
             of
             Stairs
             ,
             each
             pair
             containing
             above
             forty
             steps
             ,
             having
             two
             little
             Doors
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             as
             have
             all
             that
             we
             have
             mention'd
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             we
             shall
             mention
             .
             After
             this
             ,
             you
             enter
             into
             a
             spacious
             Court
             ,
             bounded
             by
             the
             '
             leventh
             Apartment
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Mansion
             of
             Heaven
             clear
             and
             without
             blemish
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             the
             richest
             ,
             the
             highest
             rais'd
             and
             the
             most
             sumptuous
             of
             all
             .
             There
             are
             five
             Ascents
             to
             this
             of
             very
             fine
             Marble
             ,
             each
             Ascent
             containing
             five
             and
             forty
             steps
             ,
             adorn'd
             with
             Pillars
             ,
             Parapets
             ,
             Balusters
             ,
             and
             several
             little
             Lyons
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             Top
             on
             both
             sides
             with
             ten
             beautifull
             and
             large
             Lyons
             of
             guilded
             Brass
             ,
             excellent
             Pieces
             of
             Workmanship
             .
             In
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             at
             a
             proportionable
             distance
             from
             the
             Stairs
             stands
             a
             Tower
             of
             guilded
             Brass
             ,
             round
             and
             ending
             in
             a
             Point
             at
             Top
             ,
             and
             about
             fifteen
             Foot
             high
             with
             Doors
             and
             Windows
             ,
             and
             abundance
             of
             small
             Figures
             curiously
             engraven
             ,
             and
             on
             each
             side
             two
             large
             Chafers
             of
             guilded
             Brass
             and
             curiously
             wrought
             ;
             where
             they
             burn
             Incense
             Day
             and
             Night
             .
             In
             this
             sumptuous
             Apartment
             it
             is
             that
             the
             King
             resides
             with
             his
             three
             Queens
             ,
             the
             first
             of
             which
             who
             is
             call'd
             
               Hoam
               heu
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Queen
             or
             Empress
             ,
             lives
             with
             him
             in
             the
             middle
             Quarter
             .
             
             The
             second
             call'd
             
               Tum
               cum
            
             ,
             has
             her
             Lodgings
             in
             the
             Oriental
             Quarter
             ;
             and
             the
             third
             call'd
             
               Si
               cum
            
             ,
             in
             the
             Western
             Quarter
             ,
             which
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Eastern
             joyns
             to
             that
             of
             the
             middle
             .
             The
             Sons
             of
             these
             three
             Queens
             are
             all
             Legitimate
             ,
             with
             this
             difference
             onely
             ,
             that
             the
             Sons
             of
             the
             First
             are
             prefer'd
             in
             the
             first
             place
             ●…o
             succeed
             in
             the
             Empire
             .
             In
             this
             Apartment
             also
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             rest
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             shall
             speak
             anon
             ,
             there
             are
             generally
             residing
             a
             thousand
             ,
             sometimes
             two
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             three
             thousand
             Concubines
             according
             to
             the
             Emperour's
             pleasure
             .
             They
             are
             call'd
             
               Cum
               niu
            
             ,
             or
             Ladies
             of
             the
             Palace
             :
             but
             they
             for
             whom
             the
             King
             has
             the
             greatest
             Affection
             are
             call'd
             Ti
             ;
             or
             almost
             Queens
             .
             When
             he
             pleases
             ,
             he
             bestows
             upon
             them
             Jewels
             which
             they
             wear
             in
             their
             Heads
             ,
             or
             upon
             their
             Breasts
             ,
             and
             a
             piece
             of
             yellow
             Sat●…in
             or
             Damask
             which
             they
             hang
             before
             their
             Doors
             ,
             and
             which
             causes
             them
             to
             be
             respected
             above
             all
             the
             rest
             .
             These
             Ladies
             have
             also
             their
             particular
             Titles
             and
             Dignities
             ,
             and
             are
             divided
             into
             several
             Classes
             or
             Orders
             ,
             distinguish'd
             by
             their
             Habits
             and
             Dresses
             ,
             and
             other
             Marks
             of
             their
             Degrees
             ,
             like
             the
             Mandarins
             .
             Their
             Sons
             ,
             as
             also
             those
             of
             the
             half
             Queens
             ,
             are
             looked
             upon
             as
             natural
             Children
             .
             Now
             whatever
             concern'd
             the
             Service
             of
             the
             King
             ,
             the
             Queen
             ,
             the
             Concubines
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             government
             of
             the
             Royal
             Houshold
             and
             the
             Palace
             ,
             was
             formerly
             all
             in
             the
             hands
             of
             Ten
             thousand
             Eunuchs
             ,
             of
             whose
             Conduct
             ,
             Avarice
             ,
             Pride
             ,
             Wealth
             and
             Impurity
             ,
             I
             could
             give
             an
             ample
             Accompt
             ,
             were
             it
             no●…
             〈◊〉
             from
             the
             business
             of
             this
             Relation
             .
             But
             so
             soon
             as
             the
             Tartars
             came
             to
             be
             Masters
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             they
             threw
             out
             Nine
             Thousand
             ,
             and
             onely
             reserv'd
             one
             Thousand
             for
             the
             Service
             of
             the
             innermost
             Retirements
             of
             the
             Palace
             .
             Nevertheless
             ,
             taking
             their
             advantage
             of
             
             the
             youth
             of
             the
             deceased
             King
             ,
             by
             their
             Tricks
             and
             their
             Flatteries
             ,
             they
             so
             insinuated
             themselves
             into
             his
             Affection
             ,
             that
             they
             recover'd
             almost
             all
             their
             former
             Authority
             .
             However
             ,
             after
             the
             King's
             decease
             ,
             the
             four
             Tartar
             Tutours
             or
             Regents
             again
             depriv'd
             them
             of
             all
             their
             Credit
             ,
             and
             reduc'd
             them
             to
             three
             hunder'd
             to
             serve
             the
             Infant
             King
             ,
             and
             the
             Queens
             his
             Mother
             and
             Grandmother
             ,
             in
             the
             most
             vile
             and
             meanest
             Drudgeries
             of
             the
             Family
             .
             But
             now
             this
             Prince
             begins
             to
             recall
             them
             to
             his
             Favour
             ,
             and
             indeed
             they
             know
             so
             well
             how
             to
             please
             and
             fit
             his
             humours
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             small
             Probability
             ,
             but
             they
             will
             come
             to
             be
             as
             great
             as
             ever
             they
             were
             .
          
           
             We
             are
             also
             to
             observe
             one
             thing
             more
             in
             reference
             to
             this
             Apartment
             ,
             that
             as
             the
             Houses
             ,
             so
             are
             the
             Porcelams
             ,
             the
             Moveables
             ,
             the
             Habits
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             things
             made
             use
             of
             for
             the
             Service
             of
             the
             King
             ,
             painted
             ,
             adorn'd
             and
             embroider'd
             with
             Dragons
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             all
             the
             Structures
             where
             he
             resides
             have
             some
             resemblance
             to
             the
             Heaven
             ,
             either
             in
             Name
             ,
             in
             Number
             ,
             or
             some
             other
             way
             .
             Thus
             this
             last
             Apartment
             is
             call'd
             the
             ninth
             Heaven
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             '
             leventh
             ;
             in
             regard
             the
             Chineses
             never
             reck'n
             that
             which
             is
             without
             the
             outermost
             Enclosure
             of
             the
             Palace
             ;
             and
             for
             that
             they
             make
             but
             one
             of
             the
             Portal
             of
             Heaven
             serene
             and
             without
             blemish
             ,
             and
             this
             last
             Apartment
             ;
             which
             for
             this
             reason
             is
             said
             to
             be
             the
             '
             leventh
             ,
             and
             answers
             to
             the
             ninth
             Heaven
             In
             like
             manner
             ,
             to
             answer
             to
             the
             twelve
             Signs
             ,
             the
             particular
             Palaces
             where
             the
             King
             resides
             are
             to
             the
             number
             of
             twelve
             ;
             three
             of
             which
             stand
             in
             a
             streight
             Line
             from
             North
             to
             South
             ;
             the
             rest
             stand
             upon
             the
             East
             and
             West
             side
             ,
             and
             are
             so
             spacious
             and
             so
             stately
             ,
             that
             one
             single
             Apartment
             might
             suffice
             a
             King.
             Upon
             this
             Principle
             ,
             
             when
             the
             Chineses
             and
             particularly
             the
             Eunuchs
             speak
             of
             their
             King
             ,
             they
             express
             themselves
             in
             pompous
             and
             hyperbolical
             words
             ,
             referring
             to
             Heaven
             ,
             the
             Sun
             ,
             the
             Moon
             ,
             the
             Stars
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             .
             Thus
             they
             never
             say
             ,
             sound
             the
             Trumpets
             ,
             beat
             the
             Drums
             ,
             &c.
             but
             
               Ta
               lui
            
             ,
             let
             the
             Heaven
             let
             loose
             its
             Thunder
             .
             To
             let
             you
             understand
             the
             King
             is
             dead
             ,
             they
             make
             use
             of
             the
             words
             
               Pim
               tien
            
             ,
             he
             is
             gone
             ,
             a
             new
             Guest
             ,
             into
             Heaven
             :
             Or
             of
             the
             word
             Pum
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             a
             great
             Mountain
             is
             fallen
             .
             Instead
             of
             saying
             the
             Gates
             of
             the
             Palace
             ,
             they
             say
             ,
             
               Kin
               muen
            
             ,
             the
             Gates
             of
             Gold
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             other
             things
             .
          
           
             Here
             it
             will
             not
             be
             amiss
             to
             give
             an
             account
             of
             one
             of
             the
             Circumstances
             of
             the
             Persecution
             rais'd
             against
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             in
             the
             year
             1664
             ,
             by
             some
             Persons
             ,
             but
             more
             especially
             by
             a
             Mandarin
             call'd
             
               Yam
               quam
               sien
            
             .
             One
             of
             the
             great
             Crimes
             which
             this
             Miscreant
             lay'd
             to
             the
             Charge
             of
             F.
             
               Iohn
               Adam
            
             ,
             was
             that
             in
             the
             Construction
             of
             a
             Celestial
             Globe
             ,
             he
             omitted
             to
             mark
             out
             the
             North
             Star
             ,
             which
             the
             Chineses
             call
             
               Ti
               sim
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Star
             which
             is
             the
             King
             of
             all
             the
             other
             Stars
             .
             For
             that
             because
             it
             is
             immoveable
             ,
             they
             say
             that
             all
             the
             other
             Stars
             turn
             about
             it
             ,
             as
             the
             Subjects
             turn
             about
             the
             King
             to
             doe
             him
             service
             :
             and
             for
             that
             reason
             they
             pretend
             ,
             that
             the
             King
             is
             the
             same
             upon
             Earth
             which
             that
             Star
             is
             in
             Heaven
             .
             From
             all
             which
             this
             Impostour
             concluded
             ,
             that
             Father
             Adam
             had
             omitted
             to
             mark
             it
             down
             ,
             because
             he
             would
             not
             acknowledge
             a
             King
             in
             China
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             consequence
             he
             was
             a
             Rebel
             and
             deserv'd
             death
             .
             The
             Judges
             were
             ravish'd
             with
             this
             ridiculous
             Accusation
             ,
             because
             that
             all
             the
             rest
             which
             they
             had
             form'd
             against
             our
             sacred
             Religion
             ,
             had
             onely
             serv'd
             to
             make
             it
             break
             forth
             with
             greater
             luster
             .
             Nevertheless
             
             their
             wicked
             Designs
             vanish'd
             all
             into
             Smoak
             ,
             and
             the
             Malice
             of
             this
             Impostour
             serv'd
             onely
             to
             make
             the
             Company
             sport
             .
             The
             Fathers
             that
             accompany'd
             F.
             Adam
             ,
             who
             was
             fallen
             into
             a
             fit
             of
             an
             Apoplexy
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             reason
             could
             not
             speak
             for
             himself
             ,
             desir'd
             in
             his
             behalf
             that
             the
             Globe
             might
             be
             produc'd
             before
             the
             Assembly
             ;
             where
             it
             appear'd
             that
             it
             was
             not
             finish'd
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             had
             not
             mark'd
             down
             the
             Constellations
             but
             onely
             from
             the
             Equinoctial
             line
             to
             the
             Antartick
             Pole
             ,
             which
             clearly
             overturn'd
             that
             Calumny
             ,
             and
             confounded
             the
             Accuser
             .
          
           
             Behind
             this
             '
             leventh
             Apartment
             lies
             another
             Court
             ,
             and
             next
             to
             that
             stands
             the
             twelfth
             Apartment
             or
             second
             Lodging
             of
             the
             King
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             the
             noble
             and
             beautiful
             middle
             Mansion
             .
             Behind
             which
             lies
             another
             Court
             and
             the
             thirteenth
             Apartment
             or
             third
             Lodging
             of
             the
             Kings
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             the
             Mansion
             that
             entertains
             Heaven
             .
             Behind
             that
             you
             behold
             a
             most
             beautifull
             and
             spacious
             Garden
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             fourteenth
             Apartment
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             the
             Imperial
             Garden
             .
             From
             thence
             after
             you
             have
             cross'd
             several
             Courts
             and
             other
             large
             spaces
             ,
             you
             come
             to
             the
             last
             Portal
             of
             the
             innermost
             Enclosure
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             fifteenth
             Apartment
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             the
             
               Portal
               of
               Mysterious
               Valour
            
             .
             It
             consists
             of
             three
             Gates
             and
             three
             great
             Arches
             which
             support
             a
             very
             high
             rais'd
             Hall
             ,
             painted
             and
             guilded
             ,
             and
             crown'd
             with
             several
             little
             Towers
             ,
             and
             several
             Ornaments
             at
             the
             Top
             of
             the
             Roof
             ,
             with
             so
             much
             Symmetry
             and
             Proportion
             ,
             that
             the
             Prospect
             is
             no
             less
             majestick
             than
             beautifull
             .
             Going
             out
             of
             this
             Apartment
             you
             cross
             the
             Mote
             over
             a
             fair
             and
             large
             Bridge
             ,
             built
             all
             of
             large
             Marble
             Stones
             ;
             beyond
             which
             you
             come
             into
             a
             Street
             that
             runs
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ;
             and
             
             which
             is
             bounded
             to
             the
             North
             by
             the
             Mote
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             South
             by
             several
             Palaces
             and
             Tribunals
             .
             But
             in
             the
             middle
             and
             just
             against
             the
             Bridge
             there
             is
             a
             Portal
             with
             three
             Gates
             ,
             somewhat
             less
             than
             the
             preceding
             Portals
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             the
             sixteenth
             Apartment
             ,
             call'd
             the
             high
             rais'd
             Portal
             of
             the
             South
             .
             Behind
             it
             lies
             a
             Court
             or
             Platform
             thirty
             Fathoms
             broad
             from
             South
             to
             North
             ,
             and
             a
             Chinese
             Furlong
             in
             length
             from
             East
             to
             West
             .
             Here
             it
             is
             that
             the
             King
             exercises
             his
             Horses
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             not
             pav'd
             as
             the
             other
             Courts
             ,
             Streets
             and
             Spaces
             are
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             ;
             but
             onely
             cover'd
             with
             Earth
             and
             Gravel
             ,
             which
             is
             water'd
             when
             the
             King
             has
             a
             mind
             to
             ride
             .
             In
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             North
             wall
             of
             this
             Platform
             ,
             stands
             a
             large
             Portal
             with
             five
             Gates
             ,
             altogether
             like
             the
             former
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             seventeenth
             Apartment
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             the
             Portal
             of
             
               Ten
               Thousand
               Years
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             Emperour
             's
             Portal
             .
             A
             little
             farther
             you
             meet
             with
             a
             spacious
             Park
             where
             the
             King
             keeps
             his
             wild
             Beasts
             ,
             Bears
             ,
             wild
             Boars
             ,
             Tigers
             and
             the
             like
             ;
             every
             one
             in
             their
             particular
             stands
             large
             and
             beautifull
             .
             In
             the
             midst
             of
             this
             Park
             are
             five
             Hillocks
             also
             of
             a
             moderate
             heighth
             :
             of
             which
             the
             middlemost
             is
             the
             highest
             ;
             the
             other
             four
             ,
             which
             are
             less
             ,
             and
             plac'd
             two
             to
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             two
             to
             the
             West
             ,
             slope
             downward
             every
             way
             with
             an
             equal
             Proportion
             .
             They
             were
             made
             by
             hand
             ,
             of
             the
             Earth
             which
             was
             digg'd
             out
             of
             the
             Mo●…e
             ,
             and
             the
             Lake
             of
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             ,
             and
             are
             cover'd
             with
             Trees
             to
             the
             very
             Top
             planted
             with
             an
             exactness
             of
             Symmetry
             ;
             with
             every
             one
             a
             round
             or
             square
             Pedestal
             ,
             wherein
             several
             holes
             are
             cut
             for
             the
             Rabbets
             to
             borough
             and
             Hares
             to
             sit
             in
             ,
             of
             which
             those
             little
             Hills
             are
             very
             full
             .
             Nor
             is
             the
             same
             Enclosure
             without
             a
             
             great
             Number
             of
             Deer
             and
             Goats
             ,
             nor
             the
             Trees
             less
             frequented
             with
             several
             sorts
             of
             Birds
             both
             wild
             and
             tame
             .
             Which
             is
             the
             reason
             that
             the
             King
             often
             visits
             this
             Place
             to
             hear
             the
             Musick
             of
             the
             Birds
             ,
             and
             to
             see
             the
             Beasts
             run
             and
             skip
             up
             and
             down
             .
             Of
             these
             Hills
             
               M.
               Polo
            
             makes
             mention
             in
             his
             second
             Book
             c.
             16.
             
          
           
             To
             the
             North
             and
             within
             two
             Musquet
             shot
             of
             these
             Hills
             ,
             stands
             a
             very
             thick
             Wood
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             End
             of
             the
             Wood
             ,
             adjoyning
             to
             the
             Wall
             of
             the
             Park
             ,
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             three
             Houses
             of
             Pleasure
             extraordinary
             for
             their
             Symmetry
             with
             lovely
             Stairs
             and
             Terrasses
             to
             go
             from
             one
             to
             the
             other
             .
             This
             is
             a
             Structure
             truly
             Royal
             ,
             the
             Architecture
             being
             exquisite
             ,
             and
             makes
             the
             eighteenth
             Apartment
             ,
             being
             call'd
             the
             Royal
             Palace
             of
             long
             Life
             .
             A
             little
             farther
             stands
             a
             Portal
             like
             the
             former
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             nineteenth
             Apartment
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             the
             high
             rais'd
             Portal
             of
             the
             North.
             Out
             of
             this
             you
             come
             into
             a
             long
             and
             broad
             Street
             ,
             adorn'd
             on
             both
             sides
             with
             Palaces
             and
             Tribunals
             ,
             beyond
             which
             stands
             a
             Portal
             with
             three
             Gates
             ,
             built
             within
             the
             outermost
             Enclosure
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             the
             Portal
             of
             the
             Repose
             of
             the
             North.
             This
             is
             the
             last
             and
             twentieth
             of
             these
             Apartments
             that
             make
             up
             the
             King's
             Palace
             in
             a
             streight
             Line
             from
             North
             to
             South
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               eighteenth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 I.
                 The
                 first
                 Apartment
                 call'd
                 
                   Tai
                   cim
                   muen
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Portal
                 of
                 great
                 Purity
                 .
                 It
                 consists
                 of
                 three
                 great
                 Gates
                 and
                 three
                 Vaults
                 ,
                 that
                 support
                 a
                 lovely
                 Hall.
                 Behind
                 lies
                 a
                 spacious
                 Court
                 of
                 a
                 greater
                 length
                 than
                 breadth
                 ,
                 garnish'd
                 on
                 both
                 sides
                 with
                 Portico's
                 and
                 Galleric●…
                 ,
                 supported
                 by
                 two
                 hunder'd
                 Columns
                 .
                 
                 This
                 Court
                 is
                 bounded
                 by
                 the
                 Street
                 of
                 Perpetual
                 Repose
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 divided
                 by
                 two
                 Gates
                 ,
                 one
                 upon
                 the
                 West
                 ,
                 the
                 other
                 upon
                 the
                 East
                 side
                 .
                 We
                 have
                 plac'd
                 them
                 at
                 a
                 venture
                 ,
                 because
                 their
                 Situation
                 is
                 not
                 mark'd
                 down
                 in
                 the
                 Relation
                 .
              
               
                 II.
                 The
                 second
                 Apartment
                 ,
                 which
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 call'd
                 the
                 first
                 because
                 it
                 l●…ads
                 into
                 the
                 outer
                 Enclosure
                 of
                 the
                 Palace
                 .
                 This
                 Apartment
                 or
                 Portal
                 is
                 compos'd
                 of
                 five
                 Gates
                 ,
                 three
                 great
                 ones
                 in
                 the
                 middle
                 ,
                 which
                 never
                 open
                 but
                 for
                 the
                 King
                 himself
                 ,
                 and
                 two
                 lesser
                 on
                 each
                 side
                 ,
                 through
                 which
                 all
                 People
                 are
                 permitted
                 to
                 pass
                 to
                 and
                 fro
                 .
                 There
                 are
                 also
                 five
                 great
                 Vaults
                 or
                 Arches
                 which
                 support
                 a
                 spacious
                 Hall
                 ,
                 adorn'd
                 as
                 our
                 Authour
                 describes
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 beyond
                 it
                 a
                 Court
                 much
                 larger
                 than
                 the
                 former
                 ;
                 but
                 in
                 regard
                 we
                 had
                 not
                 any
                 measure
                 of
                 the
                 parts
                 of
                 the
                 Palace
                 ,
                 I
                 could
                 not
                 tell
                 how
                 to
                 give
                 it
                 its
                 due
                 Proportion
                 .
                 This
                 Court
                 like
                 the
                 rest
                 is
                 garnish'd
                 on
                 the
                 right
                 and
                 left
                 hand
                 with
                 Portico's
                 ,
                 Galleries
                 ,
                 Halls
                 and
                 Chambers
                 .
              
               
                 III.
                 The
                 third
                 Apartment
                 call'd
                 the
                 Portal
                 of
                 the
                 Beginning
                 ,
                 with
                 its
                 Court
                 belonging
                 to
                 it
                 like
                 the
                 former
                 .
              
               
                 IV.
                 The
                 fourth
                 Apartment
                 ,
                 and
                 first
                 of
                 the
                 second
                 Enclosure
                 call'd
                 the
                 Tower
                 or
                 Portal
                 of
                 the
                 South
                 .
                 It
                 has
                 three
                 Gates
                 ,
                 three
                 Vaults
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 Hall
                 above
                 ,
                 larger
                 ,
                 higher
                 rais'd
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 majestick
                 than
                 the
                 former
                 .
                 This
                 Hall
                 has
                 on
                 each
                 side
                 two
                 Galleries
                 ,
                 that
                 extend
                 toward
                 the
                 South
                 ,
                 bounded
                 at
                 both
                 ends
                 by
                 two
                 Pavillions
                 or
                 lesser
                 Halls
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 In
                 this
                 Hall
                 hangs
                 the
                 Bell
                 and
                 the
                 Drum
                 mention'd
                 in
                 the
                 eighth
                 Chapter
                 .
              
               
                 V.
                 The
                 fifth
                 Apartment
                 call'd
                 the
                 Supream
                 Portal
                 ,
                 with
                 its
                 Court
                 before
                 it
                 ,
                 form'd
                 of
                 five
                 great
                 Gates
                 with
                 an
                 ascent
                 to
                 it
                 of
                 five
                 magnificent
                 Marble
                 pair
                 of
                 Stairs
                 .
                 Before
                 your
                 come
                 at
                 it
                 ,
                 you
                 cross
                 a
                 great
                 Mote
                 mark'd
                 in
                 the
                 Draught
                 over
                 five
                 Marble
                 Bridges
                 that
                 answer
                 to
                 the
                 five
                 pair
                 of
                 Stairs
                 .
              
               
                 
                 
                   VI.
                   The
                   sixth
                   Apartment
                   call'd
                   the
                   Supream
                   Imperial
                   Hall.
                   To
                   which
                   you
                   ascend
                   by
                   five
                   pair
                   of
                   magnificent
                   Marble
                   Stairs
                   ,
                   each
                   pair
                   of
                   forty
                   two
                   steps
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                   In
                   this
                   Hall
                   the
                   Emperour
                   receives
                   the
                   Homages
                   and
                   Submissions
                   of
                   the
                   Princes
                   ,
                   great
                   Lords
                   ,
                   Mandarins
                   ▪
                   &c.
                   which
                   our
                   Authour
                   describes
                   so
                   exactly
                   that
                   there
                   is
                   nothing
                   more
                   to
                   be
                   added
                   ,
                   onely
                   what
                   Semedo
                   ,
                   and
                   some
                   other
                   Authours
                   relate
                   ;
                   that
                   the
                   same
                   Days
                   the
                   same
                   Ceremonies
                   are
                   perform'd
                   in
                   all
                   the
                   Cities
                   of
                   the
                   Kingdom
                   ,
                   where
                   all
                   the
                   Mandarins
                   meet
                   at
                   the
                   Governours
                   Palace
                   before
                   a
                   Throne
                   ,
                   upon
                   which
                   are
                   erected
                   the
                   Royal
                   Ensigns
                   ,
                   where
                   they
                   use
                   the
                   same
                   Ceremonies
                   and
                   Reverences
                   as
                   before
                   the
                   Emperour
                   ,
                   already
                   related
                   by
                   our
                   Authour
                   .
                
                 
                   Father
                   Magaillans
                   tells
                   us
                   ,
                   that
                   as
                   fast
                   as
                   the
                   Mandarins
                   come
                   to
                   the
                   place
                   ,
                   they
                   take
                   their
                   stands
                   according
                   to
                   their
                   Rank
                   and
                   Qualitiy
                   ,
                   in
                   places
                   appointed
                   for
                   every
                   one
                   of
                   the
                   nine
                   Orders
                   ,
                   which
                   are
                   mark'd
                   and
                   writ
                   down
                   at
                   the
                   Bottom
                   of
                   little
                   Pillars
                   .
                   Father
                   Adam
                   ,
                   says
                   these
                   Pillars
                   are
                   of
                   Brass
                   and
                   square
                   .
                   He
                   also
                   gives
                   us
                   an
                   accompt
                   of
                   the
                   Distinctions
                   of
                   the
                   nine
                   Orders
                   of
                   Mandarins
                   ,
                   which
                   I
                   never
                   read
                   in
                   any
                   other
                   Authour
                   ,
                   and
                   therefore
                   it
                   may
                   not
                   be
                   amiss
                   to
                   insert
                   them
                   here
                   .
                
                 
                   The
                   Mandarins
                   of
                   the
                   first
                   Order
                   wear
                   at
                   the
                   Top
                   of
                   their
                   Cap
                   or
                   Bonnet
                   which
                   ends
                   in
                   a
                   very
                   flat
                   Cone
                   ,
                   a
                   Carbuncle
                   enchac'd
                   in
                   Gold
                   ,
                   and
                   a
                   Pearl
                   at
                   the
                   Bottom
                   before
                   .
                   Upon
                   their
                   Girdles
                   also
                   glitter
                   four
                   Stones
                   highly
                   esteemed
                   in
                   China
                   ,
                   enchac'd
                   in
                   Gold
                   and
                   cut
                   into
                   long
                   Squares
                   ,
                   three
                   Fingers
                   broad
                   and
                   four
                   in
                   length
                   .
                   This
                   stone
                   call'd
                   by
                   the
                   
                     Chineses
                     ,
                     Yusce
                  
                   ,
                   is
                   brought
                   from
                   the
                   Kingdom
                   of
                   Cascar
                   by
                   the
                   Mahometan
                   Merchants
                   ,
                   that
                   come
                   from
                   thence
                   to
                   China
                   every
                   three
                   years
                   under
                   pretence
                   of
                   an
                   Embassie
                   .
                   It
                   is
                   somewhat
                   greenish
                   ,
                   and
                   resembles
                   a
                   Iaspar
                   ,
                   onely
                   that
                   it
                   is
                   harder
                   ,
                   somewhat
                   transparent
                   ,
                   and
                   enclining
                   to
                   
                   white
                   .
                   As
                   for
                   the
                   great
                   Lords
                   who
                   are
                   above
                   all
                   the
                   nine
                   Orders
                   of
                   Mandarins
                   ,
                   they
                   are
                   distinguish'd
                   from
                   the
                   first
                   Order
                   onely
                   by
                   the
                   Stones
                   in
                   their
                   Girdles
                   ,
                   which
                   are
                   round
                   ,
                   with
                   a
                   Saphyr
                   in
                   the
                   middle
                   .
                   The
                   petty
                   Kings
                   so
                   call'd
                   ,
                   though
                   they
                   enjoy
                   nothing
                   of
                   Sovereignty
                   ,
                   instead
                   of
                   a
                   Carbuncle
                   ,
                   wear
                   at
                   the
                   Top
                   of
                   their
                   Bonnets
                   a
                   Ruby
                   adorn'd
                   with
                   several
                   Pearls
                   ,
                   with
                   a
                   Flower
                   of
                   Gold
                   fasten'd
                   at
                   the
                   lower
                   end
                   of
                   their
                   Bonnets
                   that
                   come
                   over
                   their
                   Foreheads
                   .
                   The
                   Emperour
                   himself
                   wears
                   a
                   Bonnet
                   of
                   the
                   same
                   form
                   ,
                   and
                   at
                   the
                   point
                   of
                   it
                   a
                   Pearl
                   as
                   big
                   as
                   a
                   Pigeons
                   Egg
                   ,
                   with
                   several
                   other
                   lesser
                   Pearls
                   dangling
                   underneath
                   ;
                   his
                   Girdle
                   also
                   dazles
                   the
                   Eye
                   with
                   the
                   pretious
                   Stones
                   and
                   Pearls
                   with
                   which
                   it
                   is
                   cover'd
                   all
                   over
                   .
                
                 
                   The
                   Mandarins
                   of
                   the
                   second
                   Order
                   wear
                   at
                   the
                   Top
                   of
                   their
                   Caps
                   a
                   large
                   Ruby
                   ,
                   and
                   another
                   which
                   is
                   less
                   at
                   the
                   Bottom
                   .
                   Their
                   Girdles
                   are
                   adorn'd
                   with
                   demy
                   Globes
                   of
                   Gold
                   embellish'd
                   with
                   Flowers
                   of
                   the
                   same
                   Metal
                   ,
                   with
                   a
                   Carbuncle
                   in
                   the
                   middle
                   .
                   The
                   Mandarins
                   of
                   the
                   third
                   Order
                   at
                   the
                   point
                   of
                   their
                   Caps
                   ,
                   carry
                   a
                   Carbuncle
                   enchas'd
                   in
                   Gold
                   ,
                   and
                   a
                   Saphyr
                   at
                   the
                   Bottom
                   ,
                   and
                   upon
                   their
                   Girdles
                   demy
                   Globes
                   adorn'd
                   with
                   Flowers
                   onely
                   .
                   They
                   of
                   the
                   fourth
                   Order
                   wear
                   a
                   Saphyr
                   ,
                   and
                   at
                   the
                   Bottom
                   another
                   Saphyr
                   which
                   is
                   less
                   ;
                   having
                   upon
                   their
                   Girdles
                   plain
                   demy
                   Globes
                   of
                   Gold
                   onely
                   .
                   The
                   Mandarins
                   of
                   the
                   fifth
                   Order
                   wear
                   onely
                   a
                   Saphyr
                   in
                   their
                   Caps
                   ,
                   in
                   other
                   things
                   like
                   those
                   of
                   the
                   fourth
                   Order
                   .
                   The
                   Mandarins
                   of
                   the
                   sixth
                   Order
                   at
                   the
                   Top
                   of
                   their
                   Bonnets
                   wear
                   a
                   Crystal
                   neatly
                   shap'd
                   ,
                   and
                   at
                   the
                   Bottom
                   a
                   Saphyr
                   ●…
                   Their
                   Girdles
                   being
                   cover'd
                   with
                   pieces
                   of
                   Rhino●…s
                   Horns
                   set
                   in
                   Gold
                   They
                   of
                   the
                   seventh
                   Order
                   ,
                   have
                   nothing
                   but
                   an
                   Ornament
                   of
                   Gold
                   at
                   the
                   point
                   of
                   their
                   Caps
                   ,
                   with
                   a
                   Saphyr
                   at
                   the
                   Bottom
                   ,
                   and
                   their
                   Girdles
                   cover'd
                   with
                   Silver-plates
                   .
                   They
                   of
                   the
                   eighth
                   Order
                   carry
                   also
                   an
                   Ornament
                   of
                   Gold
                   ,
                   but
                   without
                   any
                   Iew●…
                   
                   at
                   the
                   Bottom
                   ;
                   having
                   their
                   Girdles
                   cover'd
                   with
                   thin
                   pieces
                   of
                   Rhinoceros's
                   Horn.
                   The
                   Mandarins
                   of
                   the
                   ninth
                   Order
                   wear
                   a
                   Bonnet
                   of
                   Sattin
                   purfl'd
                   with
                   Silver
                   ;
                   and
                   pieces
                   ef
                   Bufola's
                   Horns
                   inchas'd
                   in
                   Silver
                   upon
                   their
                   Girdles
                   .
                   Besides
                   these
                   nine
                   Orders
                   the
                   Licentiates
                   wear
                   upon
                   the
                   Top
                   of
                   their
                   Heads
                   a
                   Dove
                   of
                   Gold
                   ,
                   or
                   guilt
                   upon
                   a
                   Bodkin
                   of
                   the
                   same
                   Metal
                   ;
                   with
                   flat
                   pieces
                   of
                   Rhinoceros's
                   Horns
                   upon
                   their
                   Girdles
                   .
                   Lastly
                   the
                   Batchelers
                   of
                   Art
                   wear
                   the
                   same
                   Doves
                   ,
                   but
                   of
                   Silver
                   onely
                   ,
                   and
                   Plates
                   of
                   Bufola's
                   Horns
                   upon
                   their
                   Girdles
                   .
                
                 
                   Their
                   Habits
                   also
                   serve
                   to
                   distinguish
                   the
                   various
                   Orders
                   of
                   Mandarins
                   .
                   The
                   learned
                   Mandarins
                   of
                   the
                   three
                   first
                   Orders
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   Military
                   Mandarins
                   of
                   the
                   four
                   first
                   Orders
                   are
                   distinguish'd
                   from
                   the
                   Inferiour
                   Orders
                   by
                   their
                   Garments
                   enricht
                   with
                   Figures
                   of
                   Dragons
                   .
                   They
                   also
                   wear
                   a
                   certain
                   sort
                   of
                   Surcoat
                   ,
                   variegated
                   with
                   the
                   Figures
                   of
                   Birds
                   and
                   Beasts
                   in
                   Embroidery
                   ,
                   which
                   serve
                   also
                   to
                   distinguish
                   the
                   various
                   Orders
                   of
                   the
                   Mandarins
                   .
                   But
                   in
                   regard
                   they
                   are
                   not
                   bound
                   to
                   wear
                   them
                   regularly
                   ,
                   especially
                   in
                   the
                   Summer
                   by
                   reason
                   of
                   excessive
                   heats
                   ,
                   they
                   are
                   no
                   such
                   certain
                   Signs
                   of
                   Distinction
                   between
                   the
                   Orders
                   and
                   Degrees
                   of
                   the
                   Mandarins
                   ,
                   as
                   those
                   other
                   which
                   we
                   have
                   already
                   mention'd
                   .
                   For
                   no
                   man
                   dares
                   to
                   quit
                   them
                   ,
                   or
                   wear
                   them
                   indifferently
                   as
                   he
                   pleases
                   himself
                   without
                   a
                   breach
                   of
                   the
                   Laws
                   :
                   and
                   the
                   same
                   Laws
                   have
                   regulated
                   the
                   places
                   which
                   every
                   one
                   ought
                   to
                   take
                   when
                   they
                   meet
                   in
                   the
                   Palace
                   .
                   The
                   letter'd
                   Mandarins
                   stand
                   upon
                   the
                   King
                   's
                   left
                   hand
                   ,
                   which
                   in
                   China
                   is
                   the
                   most
                   honourable
                   place
                   ;
                   the
                   Military
                   Mandarins
                   upon
                   the
                   Right
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   King
                   himself
                   always
                   looks
                   toward
                   the
                   South
                   ,
                   when
                   he
                   sits
                   upon
                   his
                   Throne
                   .
                
              
               
                 VII
                 .
                 The
                 seventh
                 Apartment
                 call'd
                 the
                 high
                 rais'd
                 Hall
                 with
                 a
                 Court
                 before
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 
                 VIII
                 .
                 The
                 eighth
                 Apartment
                 call'd
                 the
                 Supream
                 Middle
                 Hall.
                 
              
               
                 IX
                 .
                 The
                 ninth
                 Apartment
                 ,
                 call'd
                 the
                 Hall
                 of
                 Sovereign
                 Concord
                 .
                 To
                 this
                 Hall
                 are
                 joy'nd
                 two
                 others
                 ,
                 one
                 upon
                 the
                 West
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 other
                 upon
                 the
                 East
                 side
                 :
                 In
                 this
                 Hall
                 it
                 is
                 that
                 the
                 Emperour
                 sits
                 in
                 Counsel
                 Morning
                 and
                 Afternoon
                 with
                 his
                 Colao's
                 or
                 Counsellers
                 of
                 State
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Mandarins
                 of
                 the
                 six
                 Supream
                 Tribunals
                 .
                 Upon
                 the
                 East
                 side
                 of
                 this
                 Apartment
                 stands
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 the
                 Supream
                 Councel
                 compos'd
                 of
                 Colao's
                 and
                 above
                 three
                 hunder'd
                 Mandarins
                 .
              
               
                 X.
                 The
                 tenth
                 Apartment
                 ,
                 call'd
                 the
                 Portal
                 of
                 Heaven
                 clear
                 and
                 without
                 blemish
                 .
                 It
                 has
                 sive
                 Gates
                 like
                 the
                 rest
                 ,
                 and
                 you
                 ascend
                 to
                 the
                 middlemost
                 by
                 three
                 pair
                 of
                 stairs
                 ,
                 each
                 pair
                 of
                 above
                 forty
                 steps
                 a
                 piece
                 .
              
               
                 XI
                 .
                 The
                 '
                 leventh
                 Apartment
                 call'd
                 the
                 Mansion
                 of
                 Heaven
                 clear
                 and
                 without
                 blemish
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 most
                 beautifull
                 of
                 all
                 ,
                 as
                 you
                 may
                 see
                 by
                 the
                 Relation
                 of
                 our
                 Authour
                 .
                 I
                 have
                 observ'd
                 in
                 the
                 Draught
                 the
                 Towers
                 of
                 Brass
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 great
                 Chafers
                 which
                 he
                 speaks
                 of
                 .
                 In
                 this
                 Apartment
                 the
                 Emperour
                 resides
                 with
                 his
                 three
                 Queens
                 and
                 his
                 Concubines
                 .
                 The
                 Chineses
                 will
                 have
                 this
                 Apartment
                 to
                 be
                 no
                 more
                 than
                 the
                 ninth
                 ;
                 for
                 that
                 they
                 never
                 reckon'd
                 the
                 first
                 which
                 is
                 without
                 the
                 outward
                 Enclosure
                 to
                 be
                 one
                 ,
                 and
                 besides
                 they
                 make
                 but
                 one
                 Apartment
                 of
                 this
                 ,
                 of
                 that
                 before
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 next
                 that
                 follows
                 it
                 ,
                 which
                 serves
                 to
                 explain
                 the
                 meaning
                 of
                 the
                 Chineses
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 say
                 that
                 the
                 King
                 sleeps
                 within
                 nine
                 Walls
                 ,
                 which
                 some
                 Relations
                 misunderstanding
                 have
                 ill
                 explain'd
                 the
                 sense
                 of
                 the
                 Words
                 .
              
               
                 XII
                 .
                 The
                 twelfth
                 Apartment
                 ,
                 call'd
                 the
                 fair
                 and
                 beautifull
                 Middle-House
                 ,
                 the
                 King
                 's
                 second
                 Logding
                 .
              
               
                 XIII
                 .
                 The
                 thirteenth
                 Apartment
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 King
                 's
                 third
                 Lodging
                 call'd
                 the
                 House
                 which
                 entertains
                 Heaven
                 .
              
               
                 
                 XIV
                 .
                 The
                 fourteenth
                 Apartment
                 which
                 cousists
                 in
                 a
                 great
                 Garden
                 ,
                 several
                 Courts
                 and
                 other
                 void
                 Spaces
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Authour
                 does
                 not
                 particularly
                 describe
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 the
                 smallness
                 of
                 the
                 Plate
                 would
                 not
                 have
                 permitted
                 me
                 to
                 distinguish
                 ,
                 though
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 describ'd
                 .
              
               
                 XV.
                 The
                 fifteenth
                 Apartment
                 call'd
                 the
                 Portal
                 of
                 mysterious
                 Valour
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 last
                 of
                 the
                 innermost
                 Enclosure
                 .
                 After
                 that
                 ,
                 you
                 cross
                 the
                 Mote
                 over
                 a
                 fair
                 Marble
                 Bridge
                 ,
                 and
                 after
                 that
                 a
                 Street
                 which
                 runs
                 from
                 East
                 to
                 West
                 .
              
               
                 XVI
                 .
                 The
                 sixteenth
                 Apartment
                 call'd
                 the
                 high
                 rais'd
                 Portal
                 of
                 the
                 South
                 .
                 Which
                 has
                 three
                 Gates
                 and
                 a
                 Court
                 where
                 the
                 King
                 manages
                 his
                 great
                 Horses
                 ,
                 30
                 Fathom
                 broad
                 ,
                 and
                 230
                 in
                 length
                 .
              
               
                 XVII
                 .
                 The
                 seventeenth
                 Apartment
                 ,
                 call'd
                 the
                 Portal
                 of
                 ten
                 thousand
                 Years
                 .
                 Which
                 has
                 five
                 Gates
                 ,
                 and
                 leads
                 into
                 a
                 magnificent
                 Park
                 ,
                 full
                 of
                 wild
                 Beasts
                 ,
                 Hills
                 and
                 Woods
                 .
                 Other
                 Relations
                 say
                 that
                 the
                 Hills
                 were
                 made
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 ,
                 digg'd
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Lake
                 when
                 it
                 was
                 first
                 made
                 .
              
               
                 XVIII
                 .
                 The
                 eighteenth
                 consists
                 of
                 three
                 beautifull
                 Summer-Houses
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 call'd
                 the
                 Royal
                 Palace
                 of
                 long
                 Life
                 .
              
               
                 XIX
                 .
                 The
                 nineteenth
                 Apartment
                 is
                 call'd
                 the
                 high
                 rais'd
                 
                   Portal
                   of
                   the
                   North
                
                 ;
                 and
                 leads
                 into
                 a
                 large
                 and
                 long
                 Street
                 .
              
               
                 XX.
                 The
                 twentieth
                 Apartment
                 seated
                 beyond
                 that
                 street
                 in
                 the
                 outtermost
                 Enclosure
                 ;
                 which
                 has
                 but
                 three
                 Gates
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 call'd
                 the
                 
                   Portal
                   of
                   the
                   Repose
                   of
                   the
                   North.
                
                 Here
                 I
                 must
                 inform
                 the
                 Reader
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 five
                 last
                 Apartments
                 do
                 not
                 seem
                 to
                 be
                 sufficiently
                 distinguish'd
                 ;
                 especially
                 the
                 nineteenth
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 great
                 Street
                 which
                 is
                 next
                 to
                 it
                 .
                 But
                 I
                 could
                 do
                 no
                 better
                 ,
                 notwithstanding
                 all
                 the
                 pains
                 that
                 I
                 took
                 .
                 For
                 I
                 found
                 that
                 the
                 Ground
                 between
                 the
                 two
                 Enclosures
                 was
                 too
                 narrow
                 
                 for
                 so
                 many
                 Apartments
                 ,
                 for
                 a
                 place
                 to
                 ride
                 the
                 great
                 Horse
                 ,
                 a
                 spacious
                 Park
                 and
                 Streets
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Now
                 some
                 Relations
                 say
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Emperour's
                 Palace
                 extends
                 to
                 the
                 Wall
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 on
                 the
                 North
                 side
                 ,
                 which
                 would
                 have
                 afforded
                 me
                 space
                 enough
                 and
                 to
                 spare
                 .
                 But
                 I
                 durst
                 not
                 vary
                 from
                 my
                 Authour
                 ,
                 who
                 clearly
                 seems
                 to
                 say
                 the
                 contrary
                 ,
                 and
                 who
                 would
                 not
                 have
                 fail'd
                 to
                 have
                 mark'd
                 the
                 place
                 where
                 these
                 Apartments
                 had
                 crossed
                 the
                 exteriour
                 Enclosure
                 ,
                 which
                 he
                 never
                 sets
                 down
                 till
                 at
                 last
                 .
                 So
                 that
                 we
                 must
                 be
                 forc'd
                 to
                 stay
                 for
                 a
                 new
                 Relation
                 to
                 unfold
                 these
                 Difficulties
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XIX
            
             .
             A
             Description
             of
             twenty
             particular
             Palaces
             contain'd
             in
             the
             inner
             Enclosure
             of
             the
             Emperour's
             Palace
             .
          
           
             BEsides
             the
             Palace
             design'd
             for
             the
             Emperour's
             Person
             ,
             there
             are
             erected
             on
             the
             other
             side
             several
             particular
             Palaces
             ,
             many
             of
             which
             for
             their
             Beauty
             ,
             Splendour
             and
             Largeness
             might
             well
             serve
             for
             the
             Mansions
             of
             great
             Princes
             .
             But
             for
             the
             better
             apprehending
             of
             their
             Situation
             ,
             it
             is
             to
             be
             observ'd
             that
             the
             Space
             which
             the
             inner
             Wall
             encloses
             is
             divided
             into
             three
             distinct
             Parts
             ,
             by
             two
             great
             and
             high
             Walls
             that
             run
             from
             the
             South
             to
             the
             North.
             These
             Walls
             have
             no
             Battlements
             ,
             but
             are
             cover'd
             with
             Tiles
             varnish'd
             over
             with
             yellow
             ,
             and
             the
             Top
             is
             rais'd
             and
             trimm'd
             with
             a
             thousand
             Designs
             and
             Figures
             all
             of
             the
             same
             Materials
             and
             the
             same
             Colour
             .
             The
             Eves
             of
             this
             little
             Roof
             end
             in
             Dragons
             in
             Demy-Relief
             ,
             which
             hang
             down
             on
             
             both
             sides
             .
             The
             rest
             of
             the
             Wall
             is
             cover'd
             with
             square
             Tiles
             ,
             green
             ,
             yellow
             and
             blew
             ,
             which
             are
             so
             rang'd
             as
             to
             represent
             Beasts
             ,
             Flowers
             and
             Horns
             in
             abundance
             .
             This
             being
             suppos'd
             ,
             the
             Palace
             takes
             up
             the
             space
             or
             part
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             parts
             are
             for
             the
             collateral
             Palaces
             which
             we
             are
             going
             to
             describe
             ,
             and
             by
             consequence
             stand
             within
             the
             innermost
             Enclosure
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Ven
               hoa
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             flourishing
             Learning
             .
             It
             serves
             the
             King
             for
             two
             Uses
             ;
             first
             ,
             for
             his
             Retirement
             ,
             when
             he
             has
             a
             mind
             to
             discourse
             of
             Sciences
             ,
             or
             any
             important
             Affairs
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             Secondly
             for
             his
             more
             strict
             observance
             of
             the
             Fasts
             that
             are
             most
             usual
             among
             the
             Chineses
             ;
             which
             they
             observe
             four
             times
             a
             year
             ,
             and
             are
             generally
             answerable
             to
             our
             four
             Seasons
             .
             For
             when
             they
             design
             to
             perform
             their
             solemn
             Sacrifices
             ,
             they
             fast
             the
             three
             preceding
             days
             .
             And
             lastly
             when
             they
             would
             implore
             the
             Favour
             and
             Mercy
             of
             Heaven
             in
             any
             publick
             Calamity
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Famine
             ,
             Pestilence
             ,
             Earthquakes
             ,
             or
             extraordinary
             Inundations
             .
             During
             these
             days
             the
             Mandarins
             live
             apart
             from
             their
             Wives
             ,
             and
             remain
             Day
             and
             Night
             in
             their
             Tribunals
             ,
             never
             eat
             any
             Flesh
             ,
             nor
             drink
             Wine
             ,
             nor
             discourse
             of
             any
             Business
             ,
             especially
             in
             criminal
             Matters
             .
             The
             Emperour
             also
             keeps
             himself
             solitary
             in
             his
             Palace
             ,
             upon
             the
             East
             side
             of
             the
             Supream
             Imperial
             Hall.
             
          
           
             The
             second
             Palace
             is
             just
             over
             against
             the
             former
             ,
             on
             the
             West
             side
             of
             the
             same
             Imperial
             Hall
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             
               vu
               im
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             Council
             of
             War.
             Thither
             the
             King
             retires
             to
             Consultation
             when
             the
             Kingdom
             is
             alarm'd
             by
             any
             Revolt
             ,
             or
             by
             Pyrates
             ,
             or
             the
             Inrodes
             of
             the
             Tartars
             upon
             the
             Frontiers
             .
             These
             two
             Palaces
             have
             every
             one
             four
             Apartments
             ,
             with
             their
             Courts
             ,
             and
             a
             Royal
             
             Hall
             in
             the
             middle
             with
             Stairs
             ,
             and
             an
             open
             Walk
             or
             Gallery
             round
             about
             ;
             of
             white
             Marble
             ,
             wrought
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             are
             those
             of
             the
             principal
             Palace
             ,
             but
             much
             less
             .
             The
             Courts
             are
             garnish'd
             on
             each
             side
             with
             Halls
             and
             Chambers
             ,
             the
             Architecture
             of
             which
             is
             very
             exquisite
             ,
             and
             painted
             within
             side
             with
             Vermillion
             Varnish
             ,
             intermix'd
             with
             Gold
             and
             Azure
             .
             And
             what
             we
             say
             of
             these
             two
             Palaces
             is
             to
             be
             understood
             likewise
             of
             those
             that
             follow
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             or
             second
             on
             the
             East
             side
             is
             call'd
             
               Tum
               sien
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             where
             honour
             is
             pay'd
             to
             the
             deceased
             Kings
             of
             the
             Royal
             Family
             that
             actually
             Reigns
             .
             Those
             Kings
             are
             seated
             upon
             their
             Royal
             Thrones
             in
             a
             magnificent
             Hall
             adorn'd
             with
             Stairs
             and
             Galleries
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             conveniences
             like
             the
             rest
             before
             mention'd
             .
             Their
             Images
             are
             made
             of
             Eagle-wood
             ,
             Saunders
             ,
             or
             some
             other
             odoriferous
             and
             precious
             Wood
             ,
             and
             adorn'd
             with
             sumptuous
             Habits
             .
             Before
             the
             Images
             are
             plac'd
             sumptuous
             Tables
             ,
             with
             Candlesticks
             ,
             Chafers
             ,
             and
             other
             costly
             Ornaments
             .
             And
             upon
             the
             day
             of
             the
             Ceremony
             ,
             there
             is
             an
             Offering
             made
             them
             of
             several
             Tables
             cover'd
             with
             a
             great
             Quantity
             of
             Exquisit
             Viands
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             Palace
             or
             second
             on
             the
             West
             side
             is
             call'd
             
               Gin
               chi
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             Mercy
             and
             Prudence
             .
             So
             soon
             as
             the
             King
             is
             dead
             ,
             they
             set
             him
             in
             a
             rich
             Chair
             which
             is
             ready
             prepar'd
             ,
             and
             which
             sixteen
             Eunuchs
             carry
             into
             the
             Middle
             of
             the
             Royal
             Hall
             of
             this
             Palace
             ,
             where
             there
             is
             an
             Estrade
             ,
             and
             a
             rich
             Bed
             upon
             which
             they
             lay
             the
             Body
             .
             Soon
             after
             ,
             with
             a
             world
             of
             Ceremonies
             and
             funeral
             Musick
             they
             put
             him
             into
             a
             Coffin
             ,
             which
             costs
             no
             less
             than
             two
             or
             three
             thousand
             Crowns
             .
             It
             is
             made
             of
             a
             certain
             Wood
             that
             grows
             
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Su
               chuen
            
             ,
             call'd
             
               cum
               cio
               mo
            
             ,
             or
             Peacock-wood
             ,
             in
             regard
             the
             Lines
             and
             Veins
             of
             it
             form
             certain
             Figures
             that
             represent
             the
             Eyes
             in
             a
             Peacock's
             Tail.
             The
             Chineses
             affirm
             ,
             that
             this
             Wood
             ,
             which
             is
             certainly
             very
             curious
             and
             precious
             ,
             preserves
             dead
             Bodies
             from
             corrupting
             ,
             for
             many
             years
             afterwards
             .
             The
             funeral
             Pomp
             is
             perform'd
             in
             this
             Palace
             ,
             with
             so
             many
             Ceremonies
             and
             with
             so
             much
             cost
             ,
             that
             it
             would
             be
             the
             Subject
             of
             a
             long
             and
             curious
             Relation
             .
             The
             Chineses
             ,
             after
             they
             have
             stopt
             up
             all
             the
             seams
             and
             joyntures
             of
             the
             Coffin
             with
             Bitumen
             ,
             to
             prevent
             the
             Exhalation
             of
             any
             offensive
             Smell
             ,
             usually
             leave
             the
             Body
             for
             several
             Months
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             for
             several
             Years
             ,
             in
             the
             same
             place
             ;
             especially
             if
             it
             be
             the
             Corps
             of
             a
             Father
             or
             Mother
             ,
             for
             whom
             they
             wear
             Mourning
             for
             three
             Years
             ;
             because
             say
             they
             ,
             they
             cannot
             endure
             to
             part
             with
             them
             .
             As
             for
             the
             King
             ,
             after
             the
             funeral
             Obsequies
             are
             perform'd
             with
             a
             Magnificence
             incredible
             ,
             and
             befitting
             so
             great
             a
             Monarch
             ,
             they
             carry
             him
             to
             be
             interr'd
             in
             the
             Imperial
             Wood.
             For
             so
             they
             call
             the
             place
             where
             the
             Royal
             Sepulchers
             are
             ;
             of
             which
             I
             shall
             say
             no
             more
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Grandeur
             of
             it
             ,
             the
             Palaces
             ,
             the
             Wealth
             and
             Ornaments
             that
             belong
             to
             it
             ,
             the
             Walls
             that
             environ
             it
             ,
             the
             Mandarins
             and
             other
             Servants
             that
             are
             employ'd
             in
             continual
             Attendance
             ,
             and
             the
             Souldiers
             that
             guard
             it
             would
             well
             deserve
             a
             particular
             Relation
             .
          
           
             The
             fifth
             Palace
             or
             third
             on
             the
             East
             side
             is
             call'd
             
               Tsu
               him
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             Compassion
             and
             Joy.
             Here
             the
             Prince
             who
             is
             Heir
             to
             the
             Empire
             ,
             keeps
             his
             Court
             till
             the
             Death
             of
             his
             Father
             .
          
           
             The
             sixth
             and
             third
             on
             the
             West
             side
             is
             call'd
             
               Kim
               ho
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             
               Palace
               of
               Union
               and
               Flourishing
            
             .
             This
             is
             the
             Residence
             of
             the
             second
             and
             third
             Son
             
             of
             the
             Emperour
             before
             they
             are
             marry'd
             ;
             for
             when
             they
             are
             marry'd
             they
             are
             usually
             sent
             to
             the
             Capital
             ,
             or
             some
             other
             principal
             Cities
             of
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             where
             they
             have
             Palaces
             built
             to
             receive
             them
             of
             an
             astonishing
             Magnificence
             .
             I
             have
             seen
             three
             ,
             several
             times
             ,
             my self
             .
             The
             first
             in
             the
             City
             of
             
               Vu
               cham
            
             ,
             Capital
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Hu
               cham
            
             .
             The
             second
             in
             the
             City
             of
             
               Chim
               tu
            
             ,
             Capital
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Sucheuen
             ;
             and
             the
             third
             in
             the
             City
             of
             
               Ham
               Chum
            
             ,
             a
             famous
             City
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xen
               si
            
             .
             There
             are
             others
             in
             the
             City
             of
             
               Si
               gan
            
             ,
             Capital
             of
             the
             said
             Province
             of
             
               Xen
               si
            
             :
             In
             the
             City
             of
             
               Pien
               Leam
            
             Capital
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Honan
             :
             In
             
               Kim
               cheu
            
             ,
             a
             considerable
             City
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Hu
               quam
            
             :
             In
             
               Kien
               cham
            
             ,
             a
             remarkable
             City
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Kiam
               si
            
             :
             In
             
               Nam
               cham
            
             ,
             Capital
             of
             the
             same
             Province
             and
             in
             several
             others
             .
             All
             these
             Palaces
             though
             much
             less
             than
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             were
             very
             vast
             ,
             beautifull
             ,
             rich
             and
             magnificent
             .
             They
             contain'd
             some
             ten
             ,
             some
             twelve
             ,
             some
             more
             Apartments
             with
             separate
             Palaces
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             and
             a
             double
             Enclosure
             of
             Walls
             .
             When
             the
             Emperour
             sent
             his
             second
             or
             third
             Son
             to
             one
             of
             these
             Palaces
             ,
             he
             gave
             him
             the
             Title
             of
             King.
             For
             example
             ,
             he
             gave
             the
             Title
             of
             
               Cho
               vam
            
             ,
             or
             King
             of
             Cho
             ,
             to
             him
             whom
             he
             sent
             to
             the
             City
             of
             
               Chim
               tu
            
             ,
             Metropolis
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Su
               chuen
            
             ,
             because
             this
             Province
             was
             antiently
             call'd
             Cho.
             Every
             one
             of
             these
             Kings
             had
             a
             thousand
             Eunuchs
             to
             serve
             and
             attend
             them
             ,
             to
             take
             care
             of
             their
             Affairs
             and
             receive
             their
             Revenues
             .
             But
             these
             Kings
             had
             nothing
             to
             do
             in
             the
             publick
             Affairs
             of
             the
             Province
             .
             Nevertheless
             the
             Mandarins
             were
             oblig'd
             to
             come
             four
             times
             a
             year
             to
             the
             young
             King's
             Palace
             to
             pay
             their
             Homage
             to
             him
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             they
             do
             to
             the
             King
             at
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             ,
             onely
             with
             this
             difference
             ,
             
             that
             they
             give
             the
             Emperour
             the
             Title
             of
             
               Van
               sui
            
             ,
             or
             ten
             thousand
             years
             ,
             but
             to
             these
             Princes
             they
             give
             no
             more
             than
             the
             Title
             of
             
               Cien
               sui
            
             ,
             or
             a
             thousand
             years
             .
          
           
             The
             seventh
             or
             fourth
             Oriental
             Palace
             is
             call'd
             
               Yuen
               hoen
               iten
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             Royal
             Nuptials
             .
             When
             the
             King
             or
             the
             Heir
             of
             the
             Crown
             are
             pleas'd
             to
             marry
             ,
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             makes
             choice
             of
             the
             most
             beautifull
             and
             most
             accomplish'd
             Virgins
             that
             are
             to
             be
             found
             ,
             whether
             they
             be
             the
             Daughters
             of
             great
             Lords
             ,
             or
             but
             of
             mean
             descent
             they
             value
             not
             .
             To
             this
             purpose
             the
             Tribunal
             employs
             Women
             that
             are
             well
             in
             years
             ,
             and
             of
             good
             Reputation
             ,
             who
             make
             choice
             of
             twenty
             which
             they
             deem
             the
             most
             accomplish'd
             .
             The
             Tribunal
             being
             inform'd
             of
             this
             choice
             ,
             order
             the
             young
             Virgins
             to
             be
             carry'd
             in
             close
             Sedans
             to
             the
             Palace
             ,
             where
             for
             some
             days
             they
             are
             examin'd
             by
             the
             Queen
             Mother
             ;
             or
             if
             there
             be
             no
             such
             Person
             living
             ,
             by
             the
             principal
             Lady
             Lady
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             who
             visits
             them
             ,
             and
             orders
             them
             to
             run
             ,
             on
             purpose
             to
             find
             out
             whether
             they
             have
             any
             ill
             smell
             or
             defect
             about
             them
             .
             After
             several
             Trials
             ,
             she
             makes
             choice
             of
             one
             whom
             she
             sends
             to
             the
             King
             or
             Prince
             with
             a
             great
             deal
             of
             Ceremonie
             ,
             accompany'd
             with
             Feasts
             and
             Banquets
             ,
             distribution
             of
             Favours
             ,
             and
             a
             general
             pardon
             for
             all
             Criminals
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             unless
             Rebels
             and
             Robbers
             upon
             the
             High-way
             .
             After
             this
             she
             is
             crown'd
             with
             a
             splendid
             Pomp
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             same
             time
             she
             has
             bestow'd
             upon
             her
             many
             Titles
             and
             large
             Revenues
             .
             As
             for
             the
             nineteen
             Virgins
             to
             whom
             Fortune
             was
             not
             so
             favourable
             ,
             the
             King
             marrys
             them
             to
             the
             Sons
             of
             great
             Lords
             ;
             of
             which
             if
             there
             be
             not
             anow
             to
             serve
             them
             all
             ,
             he
             sends
             the
             remainder
             back
             to
             their
             Parents
             with
             dowries
             
             sufficient
             to
             marry
             them
             advantageously
             .
             This
             was
             the
             Custom
             of
             the
             Kings
             of
             China
             .
             But
             at
             present
             the
             Tartar
             Emperours
             make
             choice
             of
             the
             Daughters
             of
             some
             great
             Lords
             ,
             who
             are
             not
             of
             the
             Blood-Royal
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Daughters
             of
             some
             one
             of
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             for
             their
             Wives
             and
             Queens
          
           
             The
             eighth
             or
             fourth
             occidental
             Palace
             is
             call'd
             
               Tzu
               nen
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             Piety
             ;
             and
             serves
             for
             the
             Residence
             of
             the
             Queen
             Mother
             ,
             and
             her
             Damsels
             and
             Ladies
             of
             Honour
             .
          
           
             The
             ninth
             or
             fifth
             oriental
             Palace
             is
             call'd
             
               chum
               cui
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             Beauty
             ;
             and
             the
             tenth
             or
             fifteenth
             on
             the
             West
             side
             is
             call'd
             
               Ki
               fiam
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             happy
             Palace
             .
             These
             two
             Palaces
             are
             appointed
             for
             the
             Daughters
             and
             Sisters
             of
             the
             King
             before
             they
             are
             marry'd
             .
             For
             which
             purpose
             ,
             during
             the
             Reigns
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Kings
             ,
             the
             Tribunal
             of
             Ceremonies
             pickt
             out
             certain
             young
             Gentlemen
             ,
             handsome
             and
             ingenious
             ,
             and
             fourteen
             or
             fifteen
             years
             old
             .
             Out
             of
             which
             the
             King
             chose
             one
             for
             his
             Daughter
             or
             his
             Sister
             ,
             to
             whom
             he
             gave
             a
             vast
             Dowry
             in
             Lands
             and
             Jewels
             .
             These
             were
             call'd
             
               ●…u
               m●…
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Emperour's
             Kindred
             by
             his
             Wives
             .
             They
             could
             not
             be
             〈◊〉
             .
             However
             they
             became
             very
             powerfull
             ,
             and
             were
             great
             Oppressours
             of
             the
             People
             .
             Bef●…
             the●…
             had
             any
             Children
             ,
             they
             were
             oblig'd
             every
             〈◊〉
             and
             Evening
             to
             fall
             upon
             them
             Knees
             〈◊〉
             ●…heir
             Wives
             ,
             and
             knock
             their
             Heads
             thr●…
             〈◊〉
             ●…gainst
             the
             Ground
             .
             But
             so
             soon
             as
             they
             〈◊〉
             Children
             ,
             they
             were
             no
             longer
             engag'd
             to
             that
             Ceremony
             .
             At
             present
             the
             Tartar
             King
             marrys
             his
             Sisters
             and
             his
             Daughters
             to
             the
             Sons
             of
             great
             Lords
             who
             are
             not
             of
             the
             Blood
             Royal
             ,
             or
             with
             the
             Sons
             of
             the
             petty
             Kings
             of
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             .
          
           
           
             The
             '
             leventh
             or
             sixth
             Palace
             to
             the
             East
             is
             call'd
             
               Y
               hao
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             due
             Title
             ;
             and
             the
             twelfth
             or
             sixth
             Palace
             to
             the
             West
             ,
             is
             call'd
             
               Siam
               nim
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             Felicity
             .
             The
             thirteenth
             or
             seventh
             Eastern
             Palace
             is
             call'd
             
               Gin
               xeu
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             long
             Life
             :
             and
             the
             fourteenth
             or
             seventh
             Western
             Palace
             is
             call'd
             
               Kien
               nim
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             Celestial
             Repose
             .
             All
             which
             four
             Palaces
             were
             the
             Habitations
             of
             the
             second
             and
             third
             Queen
             ,
             and
             the
             Concubines
             and
             several
             other
             Ladies
             belonging
             to
             the
             deceas'd
             King
             ,
             whom
             the
             King
             never
             sees
             ,
             nor
             ever
             enters
             into
             their
             Palaces
             ;
             such
             is
             their
             respect
             and
             veneration
             for
             their
             Predecessours
             .
          
           
             The
             fifteenth
             or
             eighth
             Palace
             to
             the
             East
             is
             call'd
             
               Kiao
               ta
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             great
             Friendship
             .
          
           
             The
             sixteenth
             or
             eighth
             to
             the
             West
             is
             call'd
             
               Quen
               nim
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             place
             of
             Repose
             ;
             to
             either
             of
             which
             the
             King
             retires
             ,
             when
             he
             has
             a
             mind
             to
             be
             private
             with
             his
             Queen
             .
          
           
             The
             seventeenth
             or
             ninth
             to
             the
             East
             ,
             is
             call'd
             
               Chim
               chien
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             which
             receives
             Heaven
             :
             and
             the
             eighteenth
             ,
             which
             is
             opposite
             to
             it
             ,
             
               ●…
               quen
               cum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             elevated
             Earth
             .
             These
             two
             Palaces
             serve
             for
             the
             King's
             divertisement
             with
             his
             other
             two
             Queens
             :
             to
             the
             first
             of
             which
             he
             goes
             with
             his
             second
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             second
             with
             the
             third
             of
             his
             Wives
             .
          
           
             The
             nineteenth
             or
             tenth
             to
             the
             East
             is
             call'd
             
               Hum
               te
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             abundant
             Vertue
             .
          
           
             The
             twentieth
             or
             tenth
             to
             the
             West
             is
             call'd
             
               Kiu
               en
               sin
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             that
             envelops
             the
             heart
             .
             In
             these
             two
             Palaces
             are
             kept
             the
             King's
             Jewels
             and
             Rarities
             of
             an
             inestimable
             Value
             .
             And
             sometimes
             he
             goes
             himself
             to
             visit
             his
             Treasure
             ,
             
             which
             perhaps
             is
             the
             largest
             and
             the
             richest
             in
             the
             World
             ,
             in
             regard
             that
             for
             four
             thousand
             twenty
             five
             years
             the
             Chinese
             Kings
             have
             been
             always
             adding
             to
             it
             without
             taking
             any
             thing
             out
             of
             it
             .
             For
             though
             the
             Reigning
             Families
             have
             so
             often
             alter'd
             ,
             yet
             none
             of
             them
             ever
             touch'd
             this
             Treasure
             ,
             nor
             those
             of
             which
             we
             shall
             give
             an
             accompt
             hereafter
             ;
             because
             of
             the
             rigorous
             Punishments
             which
             the
             new
             Kings
             would
             have
             inflicted
             upon
             those
             that
             should
             have
             attempted
             such
             a
             Sacriledge
             ,
             and
             all
             their
             Family
             .
             Now
             though
             the
             Names
             of
             all
             these
             Palaces
             seem
             very
             mean
             and
             ordinary
             in
             our
             Language
             ,
             certain
             it
             is
             however
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             they
             are
             very
             significative
             and
             mysterious
             ,
             as
             being
             invented
             on
             purpose
             by
             their
             Men
             of
             Learning
             ,
             conformable
             to
             their
             Structure
             ,
             their
             Situation
             and
             their
             Use.
             
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               nineteenth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 THESE
                 Palaces
                 are
                 large
                 and
                 magnificent
                 ,
                 and
                 seated
                 in
                 the
                 spaces
                 between
                 the
                 twenty
                 Apartment
                 ▪
                 s
                 of
                 the
                 Emperour's
                 Palace
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 two
                 Walls
                 of
                 the
                 Inner
                 Inclosure
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 describ'd
                 by
                 our
                 Authour
                 in
                 this
                 nineteenth
                 Chapter
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 I.
                 The
                 first
                 Palace
                 call'd
                 
                   Ven
                   hoa
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 flourishing
                 Learning
                 .
                 Hither
                 the
                 King
                 retires
                 when
                 he
                 has
                 a
                 mind
                 to
                 discourse
                 with
                 his
                 Men
                 of
                 Learning
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 consult
                 about
                 his
                 most
                 important
                 Affairs
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 keep
                 the
                 Fasts
                 most
                 usually
                 observ'd
                 in
                 China
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 plac'd
                 on
                 the
                 East
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 sixth
                 Apartment
                 call'd
                 the
                 supream
                 Imperial
                 Hall.
                 
              
               
                 II.
                 The
                 second
                 Palace
                 over
                 against
                 the
                 foregoing
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 West
                 of
                 the
                 sixth
                 Apartment
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Vu
                   im
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 the
                 Council
                 of
                 War.
                 
              
               
                 
                 III.
                 The
                 third
                 Palace
                 ,
                 or
                 second
                 on
                 the
                 East
                 side
                 ,
                 as
                 you
                 go
                 to
                 the
                 North
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Tum
                   sien
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 where
                 Honours
                 are
                 pay'd
                 to
                 the
                 deceas'd
                 Kings
                 of
                 the
                 Royal
                 Family
                 .
              
               
                 IV.
                 The
                 fourth
                 Palace
                 on
                 the
                 West
                 side
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Gin
                   chi
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 Mercy
                 and
                 Prudence
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 funeral
                 Honours
                 are
                 pay'd
                 to
                 the
                 King
                 after
                 his
                 Decease
                 .
              
               
                 V.
                 The
                 fifth
                 Palace
                 on
                 the
                 East
                 side
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Tzu
                   kim
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 Compassion
                 and
                 Ioy
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Heir
                 to
                 the
                 Crown
                 resides
                 till
                 the
                 Death
                 of
                 his
                 Father
                 .
              
               
                 VI.
                 The
                 sixth
                 Palace
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 West
                 side
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Kim
                   ho
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 Union
                 and
                 Flourishing
                 .
                 Here
                 the
                 second
                 and
                 third
                 Sons
                 of
                 the
                 Emperour
                 ,
                 reside
                 till
                 they
                 marry
                 .
              
               
                 VII
                 .
                 The
                 seventh
                 Palace
                 or
                 fourth
                 on
                 the
                 West
                 side
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Yuen
                   hoen
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 the
                 Royal
                 Nuptials
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 Nuptials
                 of
                 the
                 King
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Heir
                 to
                 the
                 Crown
                 are
                 there
                 solemniz'd
                 .
              
               
                 VIII
                 .
                 The
                 eighth
                 Palace
                 or
                 fourth
                 on
                 the
                 West
                 side
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Tsu
                   nim
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 Piety
                 ,
                 being
                 the
                 Residence
                 of
                 the
                 Queen
                 Mother
                 ,
                 and
                 her
                 Maids
                 of
                 Honour
                 .
              
               
                 IX
                 .
                 The
                 ninth
                 Palace
                 or
                 fifth
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Chum
                   cui
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 Beauty
                 .
              
               
                 X.
                 The
                 tenth
                 Palace
                 or
                 fifth
                 to
                 the
                 West
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Kia
                   ●…iam
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 happy
                 Palace
                 ,
                 appointed
                 for
                 the
                 Sisters
                 and
                 Daughters
                 of
                 the
                 King
                 before
                 they
                 are
                 marry'd
                 .
              
               
                 XI
                 .
                 The
                 '
                 leventh
                 or
                 sixth
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Y
                   hao
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 due
                 Title
                 .
              
               
                 XII
                 .
                 The
                 twelfth
                 or
                 sixth
                 Palace
                 to
                 the
                 West
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Siam
                   nim
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 Felicity
                 .
              
               
                 XIII
                 .
                 The
                 thirteenth
                 or
                 seventh
                 Palace
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Gin
                   chu
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 long
                 Life
                 .
              
               
                 
                 XIV
                 .
                 The
                 fourteenth
                 or
                 seventh
                 Palace
                 to
                 the
                 West
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Kien
                   nim
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 Celestial
                 Repose
                 .
                 In
                 this
                 Palace
                 the
                 second
                 and
                 third
                 Queen
                 keep
                 their
                 Courts
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 the
                 Concubines
                 and
                 other
                 Ladies
                 of
                 the
                 deceas'd
                 King.
                 So
                 that
                 this
                 Palace
                 serves
                 for
                 the
                 same
                 use
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 old
                 Seraglio
                 at
                 Constantinople
                 .
              
               
                 XV.
                 The
                 fifteenth
                 ,
                 or
                 eighth
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Kiao
                   ta
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 great
                 Friendship
                 .
              
               
                 XVI
                 .
                 The
                 sixteenth
                 ,
                 or
                 eighth
                 to
                 the
                 West
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Guen
                   nim
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 the
                 place
                 of
                 Repose
                 .
                 To
                 these
                 Palaces
                 the
                 King
                 retires
                 when
                 he
                 has
                 a
                 mind
                 to
                 be
                 private
                 with
                 his
                 first
                 Queen
                 .
              
               
                 XVII
                 .
                 The
                 seventeenth
                 Palace
                 ,
                 or
                 ninth
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Chim
                   kien
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 that
                 receives
                 Heaven
              
               
                 XVIII
                 .
                 The
                 eighteenth
                 Palace
                 ,
                 or
                 ninth
                 to
                 the
                 West
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Y
                   xuen
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 the
                 elevated
                 Earth
                 .
                 To
                 the
                 first
                 of
                 these
                 two
                 Palaces
                 the
                 King
                 retires
                 with
                 his
                 second
                 Queen
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 the
                 second
                 with
                 his
                 third
                 .
              
               
                 XIX
                 .
                 The
                 nineteenth
                 ,
                 Palace
                 or
                 tenth
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Lum
                   te
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 Palace
                 of
                 abounding
                 Vertue
                 .
              
               
                 XX
                 The
                 twentieth
                 or
                 tenth
                 Palace
                 to
                 the
                 West
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Kiun
                   sin
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 that
                 envelops
                 the
                 Heart
                 .
                 In
                 these
                 two
                 Palaces
                 are
                 kept
                 the
                 King's
                 Iewels
                 and
                 Rarities
                 of
                 an
                 inestimable
                 Price
                 .
                 Our
                 Authour
                 tells
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 this
                 Treasure
                 has
                 been
                 filling
                 for
                 these
                 four
                 thousand
                 and
                 twenty
                 five
                 Years
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 in
                 all
                 that
                 time
                 nothing
                 has
                 been
                 taken
                 out
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 But
                 this
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 understood
                 ,
                 unless
                 there
                 happen
                 any
                 sudden
                 Conflagration
                 ;
                 or
                 that
                 the
                 City
                 had
                 not
                 been
                 taken
                 and
                 plunder'd
                 by
                 the
                 Enemy
                 ,
                 who
                 never
                 trouble
                 themselves
                 to
                 observe
                 the
                 Laws
                 of
                 China
                 in
                 that
                 particular
                 .
                 For
                 example
                 ,
                 all
                 the
                 Relations
                 that
                 mention
                 the
                 Wars
                 of
                 the
                 Tartars
                 ,
                 among
                 the
                 rest
                 Martini
                 
                 and
                 Couplet
                 tell
                 us
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1644.
                 the
                 Rebel
                 Li
                 or
                 
                   Li
                   cum
                
                 ,
                 not
                 daring
                 to
                 abide
                 the
                 coming
                 of
                 the
                 Tartars
                 to
                 
                   Pe
                   kim
                
                 ,
                 spent
                 eight
                 Days
                 in
                 removing
                 all
                 that
                 there
                 was
                 of
                 precious
                 and
                 valuable
                 in
                 the
                 Palace
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 To
                 every
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 Palaces
                 belong
                 twenty
                 four
                 separate
                 Apartments
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 Royal
                 Hall
                 in
                 the
                 middle
                 .
                 I
                 have
                 plac'd
                 them
                 as
                 they
                 stand
                 in
                 the
                 Draught
                 :
                 for
                 a
                 Man
                 may
                 easily
                 believe
                 that
                 the
                 last
                 where
                 the
                 Women
                 reside
                 ,
                 and
                 where
                 the
                 Treasure
                 lies
                 ,
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 most
                 remote
                 from
                 the
                 principal
                 Gate
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XX.
            
             Of
             several
             other
             Palaces
             ,
             and
             some
             Temples
             erected
             within
             the
             same
             Enclosures
             .
          
           
             ALL
             these
             Palaces
             which
             we
             have
             hitherto
             mention'd
             ,
             are
             seated
             within
             the
             innermost
             Enclosure
             of
             the
             Palace
             ,
             from
             which
             they
             are
             separated
             by
             two
             Walls
             ,
             and
             divided
             one
             from
             another
             by
             other
             Walls
             of
             the
             same
             Fabrick
             ▪
             Those
             that
             follow
             are
             seated
             between
             the
             two
             Enclosures
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Chum
               hoa
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             doubl'd
             Flower
             .
             Now
             to
             understand
             this
             Name
             ,
             you
             are
             to
             take
             notice
             ,
             that
             about
             two
             hunder'd
             years
             ago
             one
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Kings
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             Advice
             of
             his
             Grandees
             and
             People
             ,
             would
             needs
             go
             and
             fight
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             ,
             who
             took
             several
             places
             and
             lay'd
             waste
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             :
             but
             he
             was
             overthrown
             ,
             taken
             and
             carry'd
             into
             Tartary
             ,
             where
             the
             Chineses
             believ'd
             
             him
             to
             be
             dead
             ,
             and
             therefore
             set
             up
             his
             Brother
             in
             his
             place
             .
             Some
             Months
             after
             ,
             Embassadours
             came
             from
             the
             Tartars
             ,
             who
             brought
             news
             that
             he
             was
             alive
             ,
             and
             demanded
             a
             Ransom
             both
             for
             him
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Prisoners
             .
             So
             soon
             as
             the
             new
             King
             receiv'd
             this
             Intelligence
             ,
             he
             gave
             Order
             to
             Commissioners
             to
             treat
             about
             his
             Brother's
             Enlargement
             ,
             and
             appointed
             a
             magnificent
             Palace
             to
             be
             built
             ,
             whither
             he
             intended
             to
             retire
             upon
             his
             Brother's
             Return
             .
             The
             Palace
             being
             finish'd
             ,
             and
             the
             Treaty
             concluded
             ,
             the
             Prisoner
             was
             brought
             to
             the
             Frontiers
             ,
             where
             the
             Tartars
             receiv'd
             a
             great
             Summ
             of
             Money
             ,
             great
             Quantities
             of
             Silk
             and
             Cotton
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             they
             demanded
             ▪
             Thereupon
             the
             King
             returning
             to
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             ,
             the
             new
             King
             would
             have
             resign'd
             the
             Scepter
             into
             his
             hands
             ,
             but
             the
             old
             King
             would
             not
             accept
             it
             ,
             but
             retir'd
             to
             the
             Palace
             which
             his
             Brother
             had
             prepar'd
             for
             himself
             ,
             without
             ever
             offering
             to
             moddle
             any
             more
             with
             the
             Affairs
             of
             the
             Government
             .
             Three
             years
             after
             that
             ,
             the
             new
             King
             dy'd
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             old
             King
             accepting
             the
             Crown
             ,
             was
             crown'd
             a
             second
             time
             ;
             and
             then
             the
             Learned
             Men
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Custom
             gave
             him
             another
             Name
             ,
             calling
             him
             ,
             
               Tien
               xum
            
             ,
             or
             the
             King
             who
             follow'd
             the
             Will
             of
             Heaven
             .
             They
             also
             gave
             a
             new
             Name
             to
             the
             Palace
             where
             he
             had
             liv'd
             three
             years
             retir'd
             ,
             calling
             it
             
               Chum
               hoa
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             
               doubl'd
               Flower
            
             ,
             alluding
             to
             the
             double
             Coronation
             of
             the
             King.
             The
             Bridge
             over
             which
             they
             cross
             the
             Mote
             that
             surrounds
             this
             Palace
             is
             a
             wonderfull
             piece
             of
             Workmanship
             .
             It
             is
             a
             Dragon
             of
             an
             extraordinary
             Bulk
             ,
             whose
             fore
             and
             hind-feet
             standing
             in
             the
             water
             supply
             the
             place
             of
             Pillars
             ;
             and
             whose
             Body
             ,
             Dolphin
             like
             ,
             makes
             the
             middle
             Arch
             ;
             and
             two
             more
             ,
             the
             one
             with
             
             his
             Tail
             ,
             the
             other
             with
             his
             Head
             and
             Neck
             .
             The
             whole
             is
             made
             of
             black
             Jasper
             stone
             ,
             so
             well
             clos'd
             and
             so
             well
             wrought
             ,
             that
             it
             seems
             not
             onely
             to
             be
             of
             one
             piece
             ,
             but
             represents
             a
             Dragon
             to
             the
             life
             .
             It
             is
             call'd
             
               Ti
               kiam
            
             ,
             or
             the
             flying
             Bridge
             .
             For
             the
             Chineses
             report
             ,
             that
             this
             Dragon
             flew
             through
             the
             Air
             from
             a
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             East-Indies
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               Tien
               cho
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Bamboos
             ,
             whence
             they
             also
             pretend
             that
             their
             Pagod
             and
             their
             Law
             was
             brought
             in
             former
             times
             .
             They
             also
             tell
             a
             hunder'd
             idle
             Stories
             of
             this
             Dragon
             and
             this
             Bridge
             ,
             which
             I
             omit
             as
             not
             becomeing
             this
             Relation
             .
             This
             Palace
             takes
             up
             in
             length
             two
             Furlongs
             of
             China
             ,
             or
             half
             an
             Italian
             Mile
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             call'd
             
               Hien
               yam
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             Rising
             Sun.
             A
             Structure
             beautifull
             and
             magnificent
             for
             the
             Architecture
             ,
             and
             environd
             with
             nine
             very
             high
             Towers
             all
             of
             different
             Workmanship
             .
             These
             nine
             Towers
             signifie
             the
             first
             nine
             Days
             of
             the
             Moon
             which
             are
             very
             great
             Holy-days
             ,
             especially
             the
             ninth
             ,
             among
             the
             Chineses
             .
             They
             marry
             their
             Children
             during
             these
             Holy-days
             ;
             and
             among
             the
             several
             Dishes
             of
             the
             Feast
             ,
             they
             never
             fail
             of
             one
             which
             represents
             the
             Tower
             with
             nine
             Stories
             ,
             every
             one
             of
             which
             answers
             to
             one
             of
             the
             nine
             Days
             .
             For
             say
             they
             ,
             the
             Number
             of
             Nine
             includes
             within
             it self
             those
             properties
             ,
             which
             make
             it
             more
             excellent
             than
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Numbers
             ,
             and
             render
             it
             fortunate
             by
             the
             Augmentation
             of
             Life
             ,
             Honour
             and
             Riches
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             ,
             all
             the
             Chineses
             Rich
             and
             Poor
             get
             up
             that
             day
             upon
             Terrasses
             and
             Towers
             in
             the
             Cities
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Countrey
             upon
             Mountains
             and
             Hills
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             upon
             Damms
             and
             other
             high
             rais'd
             places
             ,
             where
             they
             feast
             with
             their
             Relations
             and
             Friends
             .
             But
             in
             regard
             
             the
             Kings
             of
             China
             seldom
             go
             out
             of
             their
             Palaces
             they
             caus'd
             these
             nine
             Towers
             to
             be
             built
             ,
             that
             upon
             the
             Top
             of
             them
             they
             might
             Celebrate
             this
             Festival
             ,
             so
             generally
             solemniz'd
             over
             the
             whole
             Empire
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             Palace
             is
             call'd
             
               Van
               xeu
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             ten
             thousand
             Lives
             ▪
             Now
             you
             are
             to
             understand
             ,
             that
             about
             a
             hunder'd
             and
             forty
             years
             ago
             King
             
               Kia
               cim
            
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             King
             neat
             and
             precious
             ,
             began
             his
             Reign
             .
             This
             Prince
             maintain'd
             Peace
             and
             Justice
             in
             the
             Empire
             :
             but
             in
             regard
             he
             was
             flexible
             and
             superstitious
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             marry'd
             Bonzes
             beguil'd
             his
             Credulity
             ,
             and
             made
             him
             believe
             ,
             that
             he
             would
             so
             order
             it
             that
             he
             should
             live
             eternally
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             for
             several
             Ages
             ,
             by
             vertue
             of
             his
             Chymistry
             .
             To
             bring
             this
             to
             pass
             he
             advis'd
             him
             to
             build
             this
             Palace
             near
             the
             Lake
             ,
             which
             we
             have
             already
             mention'd
             .
             'T
             is
             very
             true
             ,
             't
             is
             less
             than
             the
             rest
             ;
             but
             what
             it
             wants
             in
             bigness
             ,
             it
             has
             in
             beauty
             .
             It
             is
             environ'd
             with
             a
             high
             Wall
             with
             Battlements
             ,
             and
             perfectly
             round
             ;
             all
             the
             Halls
             and
             Chambers
             a
             so
             are
             round
             ,
             Hexagons
             or
             Octagons
             ,
             and
             the
             Architecture
             is
             most
             beautifull
             and
             magnificent
             .
             Hither
             then
             the
             King
             retir'd
             to
             distill
             the
             Water
             of
             Immortality
             .
             But
             his
             toil
             and
             pains
             were
             recompenc'd
             with
             a
             Success
             quite
             contrary
             to
             his
             Expectations
             ;
             for
             that
             instead
             of
             prolonging
             ,
             they
             shorten'd
             his
             Life
             .
             For
             the
             Fire
             in
             the
             Furnaces
             having
             dry'd
             up
             his
             Bowels
             ,
             he
             fell
             sick
             in
             a
             Month
             or
             six
             Weeks
             after
             ,
             and
             dy'd
             within
             a
             few
             Days
             ;
             after
             he
             had
             reign'd
             five
             and
             forty
             years
             .
             The
             Emperour
             
               Van
               lie
            
             his
             Grandchild
             reign'd
             eight
             and
             forty
             ;
             and
             both
             their
             Reigns
             are
             remarkable
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             the
             peace
             and
             prosperity
             which
             the
             People
             enjoy'd
             all
             that
             time
             ,
             as
             for
             that
             the
             Apostle
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             the
             Holy
             
             
               Francis
               Xavier
            
             arriv'd
             in
             China
             ,
             and
             dy'd
             upon
             the
             Frontiers
             ,
             during
             the
             Reign
             of
             
               Kia
               cim
            
             ,
             a
             little
             before
             the
             Portugueses
             built
             the
             City
             of
             Macao
             ;
             as
             also
             for
             that
             in
             the
             Eleventh
             year
             of
             the
             Emperour
             
               Van
               lie
            
             ,
             the
             famous
             Father
             
               Matthew
               Ricci
            
             ,
             so
             universally
             esteem'd
             to
             this
             day
             by
             the
             Chiueses
             for
             his
             Learning
             and
             his
             Vertue
             ,
             first
             set
             footing
             in
             the
             Empire
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             call'd
             
               Cim
               hiu
               tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             perfect
             purity
             ,
             and
             was
             built
             upon
             this
             occasion
             .
             The
             fifteenth
             Day
             of
             the
             eighth
             Moon
             ,
             is
             solemniz'd
             by
             the
             Chineses
             with
             great
             feasting
             and
             rejoycing
             .
             For
             from
             the
             setting
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             and
             rising
             of
             the
             Moon
             till
             Midnight
             ,
             they
             are
             all
             abroad
             with
             their
             Friends
             and
             Kindred
             in
             the
             Streets
             ,
             in
             the
             Piazza's
             ,
             in
             their
             Gardens
             ,
             and
             upon
             the
             Terrasses
             ,
             feasting
             and
             watching
             to
             see
             the
             Hare
             which
             that
             Night
             appears
             in
             the
             Moon
             .
             To
             this
             purpose
             ,
             the
             preceding
             Days
             they
             send
             to
             one
             another
             Presents
             of
             little
             Loaves
             and
             Sugar-Cakes
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               Yue
               Pim
            
             ,
             or
             Moon-Cakes
             .
             They
             are
             round
             ,
             but
             the
             biggest
             ,
             which
             are
             about
             two
             hands
             breadth
             in
             diameter
             ,
             and
             represent
             the
             Full
             Moon
             ,
             have
             every
             one
             a
             Hare
             in
             the
             middle
             made
             of
             a
             Past
             of
             Walnuts
             ,
             Almonds
             ,
             Pine-Apple-Kernels
             and
             other
             Indgredients
             .
             These
             they
             eat
             by
             the
             Light
             of
             the
             Moon
             ;
             the
             Richer
             sort
             having
             their
             Musick
             also
             playing
             about
             'em
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             good
             .
             But
             the
             poor
             ,
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             ruder
             Noise
             of
             Drums
             ,
             Fifes
             and
             Basons
             loudly
             knockt
             upon
             with
             Sticks
             .
             And
             for
             the
             solemnizing
             of
             this
             Feast
             it
             was
             ,
             that
             the
             Ancient
             Kings
             erected
             this
             Palace
             ,
             not
             very
             big
             ,
             but
             wonderfully
             delightfull
             ;
             more
             especially
             for
             its
             Situation
             upon
             a
             Mountain
             made
             by
             hands
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             
               Tulh
               Xan
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Mountain
             of
             the
             Hare
             .
             Our
             Europeans
             
             perhaps
             will
             laugh
             at
             the
             Chineses
             ,
             for
             imagining
             the
             Spots
             in
             the
             Body
             of
             the
             Moon
             to
             be
             a
             Hare
             .
             But
             beside
             that
             among
             us
             the
             People
             are
             no
             less
             fond
             of
             many
             idle
             Opinions
             ,
             no
             less
             ridiculous
             ,
             let
             me
             tell
             our
             Europeans
             that
             the
             Chineses
             laugh
             as
             much
             at
             us
             ,
             when
             they
             find
             in
             our
             Books
             ,
             that
             we
             paint
             the
             Sun
             and
             Moon
             with
             humane
             Faces
             .
          
           
             The
             fifth
             Palace
             is
             call'd
             
               Ym
               Tai
               Tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             Flourishing
             Tower.
             It
             is
             built
             upon
             the
             brink
             of
             the
             Lake
             among
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Trees
             which
             afford
             both
             shade
             and
             coolness
             .
             So
             that
             the
             Emperour
             makes
             it
             his
             chiefest
             residence
             during
             the
             excessive
             heat
             ,
             which
             the
             want
             of
             cooling
             Breezes
             renders
             almost
             insupportable
             :
             the
             City
             of
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             being
             equally
             subject
             to
             the
             inconveniencies
             of
             heat
             and
             cold
             .
          
           
             The
             sixth
             is
             call'd
             
               Van
               Yeu
               Tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             ten
             thousand
             sports
             and
             pleasures
             .
             It
             is
             seated
             upon
             the
             Bank
             of
             the
             Lake
             on
             the
             north
             side
             ;
             and
             serves
             for
             the
             King
             to
             repose
             in
             when
             he
             goes
             a
             fishing
             ,
             or
             to
             delight
             himself
             by
             Water
             in
             his
             Pleasure
             Boats
             ,
             which
             are
             made
             either
             to
             sail
             or
             row
             ,
             all
             very
             lovely
             and
             very
             richly
             adorn'd
             .
             There
             is
             one
             wich
             is
             made
             like
             one
             of
             our
             Brigandines
             ,
             by
             the
             directions
             of
             Father
             
               Iohn
               Adam
            
             ,
             which
             pleases
             the
             Emperour
             extreamly
             ,
             and
             wherein
             he
             always
             goes
             a
             fishing
             ,
             or
             to
             behold
             the
             Sea
             Fights
             ,
             which
             are
             many
             times
             represented
             upon
             the
             Lake
             .
          
           
             The
             Seventh
             is
             a
             great
             Platform
             encompass'd
             with
             a
             square
             of
             high
             walls
             ,
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             which
             is
             a
             beautifull
             Palace
             call'd
             
               Hu
               Chim
               Tien
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             walls
             of
             the
             Tiger
             .
             The
             Royal
             Hall
             belonging
             to
             it
             is
             round
             ,
             very
             high
             and
             Majestick
             .
             Upon
             the
             top
             of
             it
             appear
             two
             
             Cupola's
             of
             of
             Brass
             guilded
             ,
             one
             above
             another
             at
             the
             distance
             
             of
             the
             length
             of
             a
             lance
             ;
             the
             one
             very
             large
             ,
             the
             other
             less
             ,
             in
             the
             form
             of
             a
             great
             Gourd
             ,
             which
             together
             with
             the
             roof
             cover'd
             over
             with
             Tiles
             varnish'd
             with
             Azure
             ,
             and
             embellish'd
             with
             Flowers
             ,
             Grotesco
             Borderings
             ,
             and
             other
             Ornaments
             ,
             yield
             a
             very
             pleasant
             prospect
             .
             From
             this
             Hall
             and
             the
             Balconies
             belonging
             to
             it
             the
             King
             delights
             himself
             with
             the
             sight
             of
             the
             Beasts
             that
             are
             bread
             in
             the
             enclosure
             ,
             as
             Tigers
             ,
             Bears
             ,
             Leopards
             ,
             Wolves
             ,
             Monkeys
             of
             several
             sorts
             ,
             Musc-Cats
             ,
             and
             several
             other
             Kinds
             ;
             and
             with
             them
             the
             intermixture
             of
             Birds
             ,
             no
             less
             remarkable
             for
             the
             colours
             of
             their
             feathers
             than
             for
             their
             bigness
             ;
             as
             Peacocks
             ,
             Eagles
             ,
             Swans
             ,
             Cranes
             ;
             green
             ,
             red
             and
             white
             Parrats
             ,
             and
             several
             others
             ,
             the
             names
             of
             which
             I
             cannot
             tell
             .
             Among
             the
             rest
             there
             was
             one
             which
             was
             call'd
             
               La
               cui
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Bird
             with
             a
             Bill
             of
             Wax
             ,
             by
             reason
             the
             Bill
             is
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             Wax
             .
             It
             was
             as
             big
             as
             a
             Blackbird
             ,
             but
             the
             feathers
             of
             an
             Ash
             colour
             .
             This
             bird
             learns
             whatever
             is
             taught
             her
             with
             that
             docility
             that
             she
             does
             things
             incredible
             ;
             for
             all
             alone
             she
             will
             act
             a
             Comedy
             .
             She
             will
             put
             on
             a
             Vizor
             ,
             handle
             a
             Sword
             ,
             a
             Lance
             ,
             or
             Ensign
             made
             on
             purpose
             for
             her
             .
             She
             plays
             at
             Chess
             ,
             and
             performs
             several
             actions
             and
             motions
             with
             such
             a
             lively
             grace
             as
             charms
             the
             spectatours
             .
             So
             that
             it
             is
             hard
             to
             say
             which
             is
             most
             worthy
             of
             admiration
             ,
             the
             natural
             instinct
             of
             the
             Bird
             ,
             or
             the
             industry
             of
             him
             that
             taught
             her
             .
          
           
             The
             eighth
             is
             seated
             at
             the
             end
             of
             a
             vast
             Platform
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             the
             mansion
             of
             the
             Fortress
             of
             the
             middle
             .
             The
             Kings
             of
             China
             were
             wont
             to
             go
             to
             the
             Royal
             Hall
             of
             this
             Palace
             ,
             to
             see
             three
             thousand
             Eunuchs
             arm'd
             at
             all
             points
             ,
             perform
             their
             military
             exercises
             ,
             and
             make
             a
             shew
             of
             their
             pretended
             valour
             .
             But
             the
             Tartars
             have
             suppress'd
             this
             ridiculous
             divertisement
             .
          
           
           
             Besides
             these
             Palaces
             ,
             there
             are
             within
             the
             two
             enclosures
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Temples
             dedicated
             to
             Idols
             ;
             of
             which
             there
             are
             four
             more
             famous
             than
             the
             rest
             ,
             and
             which
             are
             also
             call'd
             Palaces
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             largeness
             ,
             the
             multitude
             of
             their
             Appartments
             ,
             and
             the
             beauty
             of
             the
             Architecture
             .
             The
             first
             is
             call'd
             
               Tai
               Quam
               mim
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Palace
             of
             great
             light
             .
             It
             is
             dedicated
             to
             the
             Stars
             ,
             which
             we
             call
             North
             Stars
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Chineses
               ,
               Pe
               Teu
            
             .
             They
             believe
             that
             constellation
             to
             be
             a
             God
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             has
             power
             to
             grant
             them
             long
             life
             ;
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             the
             Kings
             ,
             Queens
             and
             Princes
             offer
             their
             Oblations
             in
             this
             Temple
             where
             there
             is
             no
             Idol
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             but
             onely
             a
             Cartridge
             or
             Linnen
             Roll
             ,
             surrounded
             with
             a
             sumptuous
             square
             Border
             with
             this
             inscription
             .
             
               To
               the
               Spirit
               and
               the
               God
            
             Pe
             Teu
             .
             This
             Temple
             stands
             within
             the
             inner
             wall
             .
             The
             other
             three
             are
             seated
             between
             the
             two
             Enclosures
             .
          
           
             The
             Second
             is
             call'd
             
               Tai
               Cao
               Tien
            
             .
             Or
             the
             Palace
             of
             the
             most
             illustrious
             and
             Sovereign
             Emperour
             .
             This
             is
             the
             Temple
             dedicated
             to
             that
             famous
             and
             loyal
             Deify'd
             Captain
             ,
             of
             whom
             we
             have
             formerly
             spoken
             ,
             who
             was
             call'd
             
               Quan
               Ti.
            
             Of
             him
             they
             implore
             long
             life
             ,
             Children
             ,
             Honour
             ,
             Riches
             and
             all
             the
             Blessings
             of
             this
             life
             ,
             not
             minding
             or
             dreaming
             of
             any
             other
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             Chineses
             place
             all
             their
             happiness
             and
             
               final
               end
            
             ,
             in
             sensible
             objects
             and
             pleasures
             .
          
           
             But
             for
             the
             better
             understanding
             of
             what
             we
             have
             to
             say
             concerning
             the
             two
             next
             ,
             we
             are
             to
             premise
             ,
             that
             to
             the
             north-west
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Xen
               Si
            
             ,
             the
             most
             western
             part
             of
             China
             ,
             there
             lies
             a
             Kingdom
             ,
             call'd
             by
             the
             Indians
             Tibet
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             western
             
               Tartars
               Tumet
            
             ,
             where
             Father
             
               Anthony
               Andrada
            
             travell'd
             about
             forty
             five
             years
             agone
             .
             The
             
             King
             of
             this
             Countrey
             takes
             upon
             him
             to
             perform
             alike
             both
             Functions
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             King
             as
             of
             High
             Priest
             ,
             and
             by
             virtue
             of
             that
             Dignity
             ,
             he
             orders
             all
             things
             in
             matters
             of
             Religion
             ,
             and
             is
             perpetual
             and
             absolute
             Superiour
             over
             all
             the
             Lama
             or
             Idolatrous
             Priests
             of
             that
             Countrey
             .
             These
             Lama
             are
             usually
             clad
             in
             red
             and
             yellow
             habits
             ,
             which
             hang
             down
             to
             the
             ground
             with
             straight
             sleeves
             and
             a
             Mantle
             of
             the
             same
             colour
             ,
             one
             side
             of
             which
             they
             fling
             under
             their
             Right
             Arms
             ,
             and
             throw
             it
             back
             upon
             the
             left
             shoulder
             ,
             much
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             the
             Apostles
             are
             painted
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             had
             imitated
             in
             that
             the
             Apostle
             St.
             Thomas
             ,
             who
             according
             to
             all
             probability
             came
             into
             China
             ,
             and
             resided
             there
             for
             some
             time
             .
             For
             the
             Histories
             and
             Chronicles
             of
             China
             relate
             that
             during
             the
             reign
             of
             the
             Family
             Han
             ,
             what
             time
             our
             Saviour
             was
             both
             born
             and
             dy'd
             ,
             there
             came
             from
             the
             Indies
             into
             this
             Empire
             a
             certain
             holy
             man
             ,
             whose
             name
             was
             Tamo
             ,
             who
             preach'd
             and
             taught
             a
             holy
             Law
             ;
             that
             the
             Bonzes
             oppos'd
             it
             and
             prosecuted
             the
             holy
             Man
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             ,
             that
             finding
             he
             could
             do
             no
             good
             he
             return'd
             into
             India
             .
             That
             he
             carry'd
             a
             staff
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             and
             went
             bare-headed
             ;
             and
             that
             one
             day
             designing
             to
             cross
             the
             Great
             River
             of
             Kiam
             or
             Sun
             of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             finding
             that
             no
             body
             would
             receive
             him
             into
             a
             Boat
             ,
             by
             reason
             that
             all
             people
             had
             a
             prejudice
             against
             him
             at
             the
             instigation
             of
             the
             Bonzes
             ,
             he
             walkt
             over
             the
             River
             without
             wetting
             his
             feet
             .
             Many
             other
             Miracles
             and
             wonderfull
             actions
             of
             the
             same
             Saint
             are
             to
             be
             read
             in
             the
             same
             Story
             .
          
           
             Nor
             ought
             it
             to
             séem
             strange
             that
             the
             Chineses
             call
             him
             Tamo
             instead
             of
             Tomas
             .
             For
             as
             we
             pronounce
             the
             Chinese
             words
             ,
             so
             do
             they
             mistake
             and
             altar
             the
             words
             of
             other
             Nations
             ;
             insomuch
             ,
             that
             
             sometimes
             it
             is
             impossible
             to
             know
             them
             again
             .
             And
             I
             dare
             affirm
             that
             they
             are
             not
             able
             to
             pronounce
             any
             strange
             name
             ,
             more
             especially
             such
             words
             as
             are
             spelt
             with
             the
             Letter
             R.
             or
             any
             words
             consisting
             of
             several
             Syllables
             ;
             and
             hence
             it
             is
             that
             they
             have
             so
             misplac'd
             the
             Vowels
             ,
             placing
             a
             in
             the
             first
             Syllable
             ,
             whereas
             they
             should
             have
             put
             it
             in
             the
             last
             .
             Nay
             the
             Portugueses
             do
             worse
             than
             they
             ,
             in
             
               Saying
               Tome
            
             ,
             and
             substituting
             e
             in
             the
             place
             of
             
               a.
               F.
               Anthony
               Andrada
            
             also
             has
             made
             the
             same
             mistake
             in
             his
             relation
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Tibet
             ,
             where
             he
             writes
             Lamba
             instead
             of
             Lama
             ,
             meaning
             the
             Idolatrous
             Priests
             before
             mention'd
             .
             There
             are
             a
             great
             number
             of
             these
             Lama
             at
             
               Pe
               Kim
            
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             not
             esteem'd
             either
             by
             the
             Chineses
             or
             the
             Eastern
             Tartars
             ,
             who
             are
             Lords
             of
             China
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             acquainted
             with
             their
             wicked
             manners
             and
             the
             impertinency
             of
             the
             Law
             which
             they
             teach
             ,
             and
             the
             ridiculousness
             of
             their
             Idols
             .
             For
             though
             the
             Emperour
             permits
             them
             to
             reside
             at
             Court
             ,
             and
             some
             few
             years
             since
             order'd
             two
             Temples
             to
             be
             erected
             for
             the
             exercise
             of
             their
             Idolatrous
             worship
             ,
             he
             did
             not
             do
             it
             out
             of
             any
             Kindness
             which
             he
             had
             for
             them
             ,
             but
             out
             of
             meer
             reason
             of
             state
             ,
             to
             prevent
             by
             means
             of
             their
             credit
             ,
             the
             Eastern
             Tartars
             from
             enterprizing
             any
             thing
             against
             them
             .
             For
             though
             these
             two
             sorts
             of
             Tartars
             ,
             are
             equally
             valiant
             ,
             yet
             the
             Eastern
             Tartars
             who
             are
             not
             very
             numerous
             are
             afraid
             of
             the
             Western
             ,
             whose
             multitudes
             are
             infinite
             .
             Besides
             the
             esteem
             and
             veneration
             which
             the
             latter
             have
             for
             the
             Lama
             is
             almost
             incredible
             .
             For
             they
             no
             sooner
             behold
             these
             Priests
             at
             a
             distance
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             presently
             seiz'd
             with
             fear
             and
             compunction
             ;
             but
             so
             soon
             as
             they
             meet
             ,
             the
             Tartar
             alights
             from
             his
             horse
             ,
             throws
             away
             his
             Bonnet
             ,
             and
             falling
             upon
             
             his
             knees
             ,
             embraces
             the
             
             Lama's
             feet
             ,
             and
             kisses
             the
             lower
             hemm
             of
             his
             Garment
             ,
             with
             a
             zeal
             and
             devotion
             unexpressible
             ;
             which
             he
             shows
             by
             the
             motions
             of
             his
             countenance
             ,
             his
             hands
             ,
             and
             his
             whole
             body
             .
             In
             the
             mean
             time
             the
             Lama
             with
             a
             formal
             gravity
             reaches
             his
             hand
             to
             the
             top
             of
             the
             
             Tartra's
             head
             ,
             and
             drawing
             the
             figure
             of
             a
             Lozange
             upon
             his
             Crown
             ,
             mutters
             over
             him
             certain
             prayers
             according
             to
             the
             usual
             manner
             .
             These
             things
             being
             thus
             premis'd
             ;
          
           
             The
             Third
             Palace
             or
             Temple
             is
             call'd
             
               Macala
               Tien
            
             .
             For
             Tien
             in
             the
             Chinese
             Language
             signifies
             a
             Royal
             Palace
             ;
             and
             Macala
             in
             the
             language
             of
             the
             Lama
             signifies
             the
             head
             of
             an
             Ox
             with
             the
             horns
             on
             :
             because
             the
             Idol
             which
             is
             worship'd
             in
             that
             Temple
             is
             the
             horned
             head
             of
             an
             Ox.
             Which
             shews
             the
             blindness
             of
             man
             ,
             whom
             the
             Chineses
             call
             
               Van
               Vo
               Chi
               Vam
            
             ,
             or
             King
             and
             Lord
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             and
             
               Van
               Vo
               Chi
               Tim
            
             ,
             or
             the
             most
             understanding
             of
             all
             Creatures
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             adores
             the
             work
             of
             his
             own
             hands
             ,
             Beasts
             that
             are
             created
             for
             his
             service
             ,
             and
             which
             seems
             more
             incredible
             ,
             the
             Carcass
             of
             the
             head
             of
             an
             Ox.
             
          
           
             The
             Fourth
             Palace
             is
             call'd
             
               Lama
               Tien
            
             or
             the
             Palace
             or
             Temple
             of
             the
             Lama
             .
             It
             is
             seated
             upon
             the
             East
             side
             of
             the
             Lake
             of
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             ,
             upon
             a
             Mountain
             made
             with
             hands
             like
             a
             Sugarloaf
             environ'd
             with
             Rocks
             which
             were
             brought
             thither
             in
             former
             times
             from
             the
             Sea
             side
             ,
             though
             far
             remote
             ,
             with
             great
             labour
             and
             expence
             .
             These
             Rocks
             are
             for
             the
             most
             part
             full
             of
             holes
             and
             hollownesses
             ,
             occasion'd
             by
             the
             continual
             dashing
             of
             the
             waves
             ;
             the
             Chinsees
             taking
             great
             delight
             to
             behold
             those
             unpolish'd
             works
             of
             nature
             .
             And
             they
             are
             so
             dispos'd
             as
             to
             counterfeit
             the
             high
             out-juttings
             ,
             and
             steep
             and
             rugged
             Precipices
             of
             Rocks
             ;
             so
             that
             at
             a
             
             moderate
             distance
             the
             whole
             seems
             to
             represent
             some
             craggy
             wild
             Mountain
             ,
             the
             first
             work
             of
             Nature
             .
             At
             the
             top
             appears
             a
             round
             Tower
             of
             twelve
             stories
             ,
             well
             proportion'd
             and
             of
             an
             Extraordinary
             height
             .
             Round
             about
             the
             upper
             Story
             hang
             fifty
             Bells
             ,
             that
             jangle
             day
             and
             night
             ,
             with
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             wind
             .
             The
             Temple
             which
             is
             large
             and
             magnificent
             ,
             is
             seated
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             descent
             ,
             on
             the
             South
             side
             ;
             and
             the
             Cloisters
             and
             Cells
             of
             the
             Lama
             ,
             extend
             themselves
             to
             the
             East
             and
             West
             .
             The
             Idol
             stands
             upon
             an
             Altar
             within
             the
             Temple
             all
             naked
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             filthy
             Posture
             like
             the
             
               Roman
               Priapus
            
             .
             Neither
             is
             it
             ador'd
             but
             by
             the
             Lama
             and
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             ,
             for
             the
             Eastern
             and
             the
             Chineses
             abhor
             it
             ,
             as
             an
             infamous
             and
             obscene
             Monster
             .
             The
             deceased
             King
             ,
             Father
             of
             the
             reigning
             Emperour
             ,
             erected
             these
             two
             Temples
             for
             reasons
             of
             State
             ,
             and
             to
             please
             his
             Mother
             ,
             Daughter
             of
             a
             petty
             King
             of
             the
             Western
             Tartars
             ;
             that
             Princess
             being
             greatly
             devoted
             to
             the
             Lama
             ,
             whom
             she
             maintains
             in
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             at
             vast
             Expences
             .
             But
             there
             is
             great
             probability
             ,
             that
             so
             soon
             as
             she
             is
             dead
             ,
             those
             abominable
             Temples
             will
             be
             shut
             up
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             between
             the
             two
             Enclosures
             ,
             there
             are
             four
             and
             twenty
             beautifull
             Palaces
             besides
             ,
             which
             serve
             instead
             of
             four
             and
             twenty
             Tribunals
             :
             the
             Mandarins
             of
             which
             are
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Emperour's
             Stewards
             ,
             and
             are
             no
             way
             subject
             to
             the
             other
             Tribunals
             and
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             They
             are
             the
             Overseers
             of
             the
             Palace
             ,
             of
             the
             Servants
             ,
             of
             the
             Cellars
             ,
             Offices
             ,
             Treasuries
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ;
             they
             punish
             or
             reward
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             King's
             Order
             ,
             such
             as
             belong
             to
             the
             Houshold
             .
             And
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Chinese
             Emperours
             ,
             all
             these
             Tribunals
             were
             under
             the
             Government
             of
             
             Eunuchs
             ;
             but
             at
             present
             they
             are
             govern'd
             by
             seventy
             two
             Tartar
             Lords
             bred
             up
             in
             the
             Palace
             ▪
             Three
             of
             these
             belong
             to
             every
             Tribunal
             ,
             who
             have
             under
             them
             a
             great
             Number
             of
             inferiour
             Officers
             ,
             all
             employ'd
             in
             their
             several
             Stations
             to
             expedite
             the
             business
             with
             which
             they
             are
             entrusted
             .
             And
             thus
             we
             have
             given
             an
             Accompt
             of
             the
             principal
             Structures
             of
             the
             Emperour's
             Palace
             .
             For
             we
             should
             never
             have
             done
             ,
             should
             we
             undertake
             a
             particular
             description
             of
             all
             those
             other
             Places
             and
             Buildings
             which
             are
             therein
             enclos'd
             ,
             as
             the
             Houses
             of
             Pleasure
             ,
             the
             Libraries
             ,
             the
             Magazines
             ,
             the
             Treasuries
             ,
             the
             Stables
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             meaner
             edisices
             .
             But
             by
             what
             we
             have
             already
             describ'd
             ,
             a
             Man
             may
             readily
             conjecture
             what
             farther
             remains
             to
             be
             said
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             Structures
             which
             we
             have
             already
             describ'd
             ,
             are
             cover'd
             with
             large
             thick
             Tiles
             ,
             varnish'd
             with
             yellow
             ,
             green
             and
             blew
             ,
             and
             fasten'd
             with
             Nails
             to
             withstand
             the
             fury
             of
             the
             Winds
             ,
             which
             are
             very
             high
             at
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             .
             The
             Ridges
             which
             always
             run
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             rise
             above
             the
             Roof
             about
             the
             height
             of
             a
             Lance.
             The
             Extremities
             are
             terminated
             with
             the
             Bodies
             and
             Heads
             of
             Dragons
             ,
             Tygers
             ,
             Lyons
             and
             other
             Beasts
             ,
             that
             wind
             about
             and
             extend
             themselves
             all
             the
             length
             of
             the
             ridges
             .
             A
             vast
             variety
             of
             Flowers
             ,
             and
             Grotesco-work
             ,
             and
             other
             delightfull
             Ornaments
             ,
             issuing
             as
             it
             were
             out
             of
             their
             Mouths
             and
             Ears
             ,
             or
             else
             being
             fasten'd
             to
             their
             Horns
             .
             And
             in
             regard
             that
             all
             that
             you
             see
             of
             these
             Palaces
             is
             varnish'd
             over
             with
             the
             Colours
             before
             mention'd
             ,
             you
             would
             think
             at
             a
             distance
             ,
             when
             the
             Sun
             rises
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             many
             times
             observ'd
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             all
             made
             or
             at
             least
             cover'd
             with
             pure
             Gold
             enamel'd
             with
             Azure
             and
             Green
             ,
             which
             
             yields
             a
             most
             delightfull
             ,
             magnificent
             and
             majestick
             Prospect
             .
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               twentieth
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               Of
               some
               other
               Palaces
               ,
               and
               certain
               Temples
               seated
               between
               the
               two
               Enclosures
               .
            
             
               
                 K.
                 The
                 first
                 Palace
                 seated
                 to
                 the
                 East
                 between
                 the
                 two
                 Enclosures
                 ,
                 and
                 upon
                 the
                 South
                 side
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 Plane
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 F.
                 Couplet
                 places
                 it
                 ,
                 speaking
                 of
                 the
                 Emperour
                 who
                 caus'd
                 it
                 to
                 be
                 built
                 .
                 This
                 Prince
                 was
                 call'd
                 
                   Ym
                   sum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Kim
                   tum
                
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 Brother
                 
                   Kim
                   ti
                
                 ,
                 he
                 began
                 his
                 Reign
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1436.
                 he
                 was
                 taken
                 by
                 the
                 Tartars
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1650.
                 and
                 set
                 at
                 Liberty
                 some
                 time
                 after
                 .
                 His
                 Brother
                 
                   Kim
                   ti
                
                 dy'd
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 1457.
                 and
                 this
                 Emperour
                 reassum'd
                 the
                 Government
                 the
                 same
                 year
                 ,
                 and
                 dy'd
                 1464.
                 
                 The
                 Bridge
                 which
                 our
                 Authour
                 describes
                 ,
                 is
                 a
                 piece
                 of
                 Workmanship
                 altogether
                 extraordinary
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 enough
                 of
                 it self
                 to
                 make
                 us
                 admire
                 the
                 Wit
                 and
                 Industry
                 of
                 the
                 Chineses
                 .
              
               
                 L.
                 The
                 second
                 Palace
                 seated
                 between
                 the
                 two
                 Enclosures
                 ,
                 as
                 are
                 the
                 six
                 that
                 immediately
                 follow
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 call'd
                 
                   Hien
                   yam
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 the
                 Rising
                 Sun.
                 Therein
                 are
                 solemniz'd
                 the
                 Festivals
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 Day
                 of
                 the
                 Moon
                 .
              
               
                 M.
                 The
                 third
                 Palace
                 call'd
                 
                   Van
                   xeu
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 ten
                 thousand
                 Lives
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 mark'd
                 near
                 the
                 Lake
                 by
                 our
                 Authour
                 .
                 That
                 Emperour
                 
                   Kia
                   cim
                
                 ,
                 was
                 otherwise
                 call'd
                 
                   Xi
                   sum
                
                 He
                 began
                 his
                 Reign
                 1522.
                 
                 The
                 Holy
                 
                   Francis
                   Xavier
                
                 arriv'd
                 in
                 China
                 1522.
                 and
                 dy'd
                 in
                 the
                 Island
                 of
                 
                   Su
                   chuen
                
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 
                   Quam
                   tum
                
                 ,
                 the
                 second
                 of
                 December
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 year
                 .
                 The
                 Emperour
                 
                   Kia
                   cim
                
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Xi
                   sum
                
                 reign'd
                 till
                 1567.
                 his
                 Son
                 
                   Mo
                   sum
                
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Lum
                   kim
                
                 dy'd
                 1573
                 and
                 his
                 Grandchild
                 
                   Van
                   lie
                
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Xin
                   cum
                
                 dy'd
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 
                 1620.
                 
                 King
                 
                   Kia
                   cim
                
                 built
                 this
                 Palace
                 to
                 practice
                 Chymistry
                 ,
                 and
                 get
                 the
                 Balsom
                 of
                 Immortality
                 .
              
               
                 N.
                 The
                 fourth
                 Palace
                 call'd
                 ,
                 
                   Cim
                   hieu
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 great
                 Purity
                 ;
                 I
                 have
                 plac'd
                 it
                 upon
                 a
                 Mountain
                 conformable
                 to
                 our
                 Authour's
                 description
                 .
                 Therein
                 the
                 Feast
                 of
                 the
                 fifteenth
                 Day
                 of
                 the
                 Moon
                 is
                 solemniz'd
                 .
              
               
                 O.
                 The
                 fifth
                 Palace
                 ,
                 call'd
                 
                   Ym
                   tai
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 the
                 flourishing
                 Tower.
                 It
                 stands
                 near
                 the
                 Lake
                 among
                 the
                 Trees
                 ,
                 as
                 our
                 Authour
                 describes
                 it
                 .
                 There
                 the
                 Emperour
                 abides
                 during
                 the
                 excessive
                 Heats
                 .
              
               
                 P.
                 The
                 sixth
                 Palace
                 
                   Van
                   yeu
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 ●…en
                 thousand
                 Sports
                 and
                 Pleasures
                 .
                 It
                 stands
                 by
                 the
                 Lake
                 on
                 the
                 North
                 side
                 :
                 for
                 so
                 we
                 have
                 plac'd
                 it
                 according
                 to
                 our
                 Authour's
                 description
                 .
                 There
                 the
                 King
                 reposes
                 when
                 he
                 goes
                 a
                 Fishing
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 take
                 his
                 pleasure
                 by
                 water
                 .
              
               
                 Q.
                 The
                 seventh
                 Palace
                 call'd
                 
                   Hu
                   chim
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 the
                 Tiger
                 Walls
                 .
                 There
                 the
                 King
                 breeds
                 up
                 wild
                 Beasts
                 of
                 several
                 sorts
                 ,
                 and
                 goes
                 to
                 see
                 them
                 himself
                 .
                 The
                 situation
                 of
                 this
                 place
                 is
                 not
                 particularly
                 set
                 down
                 by
                 our
                 Authour
                 .
                 I
                 have
                 plac'd
                 it
                 in
                 that
                 part
                 which
                 I
                 thought
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 most
                 spacious
                 ,
                 and
                 most
                 proper
                 between
                 the
                 two
                 Walls
                 .
              
               
                 R.
                 The
                 eighth
                 Palace
                 ,
                 call'd
                 the
                 Mansion
                 of
                 Fortress
                 of
                 the
                 Middle
                 ,
                 appointed
                 for
                 exercising
                 the
                 Eunuchs
                 .
                 The
                 situation
                 is
                 not
                 mention'd
                 by
                 the
                 Authour
                 ,
                 onely
                 he
                 places
                 it
                 between
                 the
                 two
                 Enclosures
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 the
                 other
                 six
                 .
              
               
                 S.
                 The
                 first
                 Temple
                 of
                 the
                 four
                 most
                 considerable
                 in
                 the
                 Palace
                 ;
                 it
                 is
                 call'd
                 
                   Tai
                   quam
                   mim
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 great
                 Light
                 ,
                 and
                 dedicated
                 to
                 the
                 Bear-stars
                 :
                 It
                 stands
                 within
                 the
                 inner
                 Enclosure
                 ;
                 and
                 I
                 have
                 plac'd
                 it
                 on
                 the
                 left
                 side
                 as
                 the
                 most
                 honourable
                 place
                 :
                 as
                 being
                 upon
                 the
                 left
                 hand
                 of
                 the
                 Emperour
                 .
              
               
                 T.
                 The
                 second
                 Temple
                 call'd
                 
                   Tai
                   cao
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 
                 Temple
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 Illustrious
                 and
                 Sovereign
                 Emperour
                 .
                 This
                 Temple
                 is
                 dedicated
                 to
                 that
                 famous
                 deify'd
                 Captain
                 mention'd
                 in
                 the
                 sixteenth
                 Chapter
                 ,
                 whose
                 Name
                 I
                 could
                 never
                 find
                 ,
                 nor
                 the
                 precise
                 time
                 of
                 his
                 death
                 .
                 I
                 have
                 plac'd
                 the
                 Temple
                 at
                 a
                 venture
                 upon
                 the
                 West
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Lake
                 ;
                 because
                 our
                 Authour
                 says
                 no
                 more
                 but
                 onely
                 that
                 it
                 stands
                 between
                 the
                 two
                 Enclosures
                 .
              
               
                 V.
                 The
                 third
                 Temple
                 call'd
                 
                   Macala
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Palace
                 of
                 the
                 Oxe's
                 Head
                 :
                 But
                 our
                 Authour
                 does
                 not
                 precisely
                 mark
                 down
                 the
                 situation
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 X.
                 The
                 fourth
                 Temple
                 ,
                 
                   Lama
                   tien
                
                 ,
                 the
                 Palace
                 or
                 Temple
                 belonging
                 to
                 the
                 Lama
                 .
                 It
                 stands
                 in
                 the
                 Plane
                 ,
                 as
                 our
                 Authour
                 places
                 it
                 ;
                 in
                 the
                 Middle
                 of
                 a
                 Rocky
                 Mountain
                 ,
                 made
                 with
                 hands
                 like
                 a
                 Sugar-loaf
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 Tower
                 at
                 the
                 Top.
                 
              
               
                 Y.
                 Twenty
                 four
                 Palaces
                 for
                 the
                 Mandarins
                 ,
                 High
                 Stewards
                 of
                 the
                 Emperour's
                 Houshold
                 .
                 I
                 have
                 plac'd
                 them
                 on
                 the
                 East
                 side
                 between
                 the
                 two
                 Enclosures
                 ,
                 where
                 our
                 Authour
                 places
                 them
                 ,
                 who
                 makes
                 no
                 particular
                 description
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 no
                 more
                 than
                 he
                 does
                 of
                 the
                 other
                 Edifices
                 ;
                 as
                 Houses
                 of
                 Pleasure
                 ,
                 Libraries
                 ,
                 Magazines
                 ,
                 Offices
                 ,
                 Stables
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Which
                 makes
                 the
                 curious
                 more
                 desirous
                 of
                 compleater
                 descriptions
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 perfect
                 draughts
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Emperour's
             Temples
             seated
             in
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             manner
             how
             the
             King
             goes
             abroad
             to
             perform
             publick
             Duties
             .
          
           
             BEsides
             the
             Temples
             which
             stand
             in
             the
             Palace
             ,
             the
             Emperour
             has
             seven
             more
             ,
             in
             each
             of
             which
             he
             sacrifices
             once
             a
             year
             .
             Five
             in
             the
             new
             City
             ,
             and
             two
             in
             the
             old
             one
             .
          
           
           
             The
             first
             of
             these
             is
             call'd
             
               Tien
               tam
            
             ,
             or
             the
             
               Temple
               of
               Heaven
            
             ,
             seated
             two
             Chinese
             Furlongs
             from
             the
             principal
             Gate
             of
             the
             City
             ,
             a
             little
             to
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             encompass'd
             with
             a
             round
             Wall
             three
             furlongs
             in
             compass
             .
             One
             part
             of
             this
             Area
             is
             taken
             up
             with
             very
             beautifull
             Buildings
             .
             The
             rest
             with
             a
             green
             and
             very
             thick
             Grove
             ,
             whose
             Trees
             are
             of
             an
             extraordinary
             heighth
             ;
             and
             render
             the
             place
             no
             less
             melancholy
             and
             gloomy
             to
             us
             ,
             than
             it
             seems
             devout
             and
             venerable
             to
             the
             Insidels
             .
             It
             has
             five
             doors
             on
             the
             South
             side
             ,
             three
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             like
             the
             Palace
             which
             are
             never
             open'd
             but
             when
             the
             King
             comes
             to
             sacrifice
             ,
             and
             two
             of
             each
             side
             always
             open
             ,
             for
             admittance
             of
             all
             that
             go
             to
             the
             Temple
             .
             On
             the
             South
             and
             North
             side
             ,
             there
             are
             seven
             separate
             Apartments
             :
             Six
             of
             which
             are
             Halls
             and
             Portals
             ,
             as
             large
             and
             magnificent
             as
             those
             of
             the
             King's
             Palace
             .
             The
             seventh
             is
             a
             vast
             and
             high
             round
             Hall
             which
             represents
             Heaven
             ,
             supported
             by
             fourscore
             and
             two
             Columns
             ;
             the
             whole
             painted
             within
             side
             with
             Azure
             and
             Gold
             ,
             and
             cover'd
             with
             Tiles
             varnshi'd
             with
             blew
             .
             In
             this
             Temple
             it
             is
             that
             the
             King
             sacrifices
             to
             Heaven
             upon
             the
             day
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             very
             moment
             that
             the
             Sun
             comes
             to
             the
             Winter
             Solstice
             ,
             attended
             by
             all
             the
             great
             Lords
             and
             Mandarins
             of
             the
             Court
             :
             and
             as
             for
             the
             Victims
             he
             offers
             ,
             they
             are
             Oxen
             ,
             Hogs
             ,
             Goats
             and
             Sheep
             .
             Great
             preparations
             are
             made
             for
             the
             performance
             of
             this
             Ceremony
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             solemn
             ,
             and
             the
             Solemnity
             carry'd
             on
             with
             no
             less
             respect
             and
             humility
             .
             For
             then
             the
             Emperour
             lays
             aside
             his
             Gold
             ,
             his
             precious
             Stones
             and
             yellow
             Robes
             ;
             appearing
             onely
             decently
             habited
             in
             a
             plain
             of
             Vestment
             of
             black
             or
             sky
             Colour
             Damask
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             Temple
             is
             call'g
             
               Ti
               tam
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Temple
             of
             the
             Earth
             .
             It
             stands
             toward
             the
             West
             
             at
             a
             distance
             answerable
             to
             that
             of
             the
             first
             ;
             from
             which
             it
             differs
             nothing
             but
             onely
             that
             it
             is
             cover'd
             with
             Tiles
             varnish'd
             with
             green
             .
             When
             the
             King
             is
             Crown'd
             ,
             before
             he
             takes
             possession
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             he
             goes
             to
             this
             Temple
             where
             he
             sacrifices
             to
             the
             God
             of
             the
             Earth
             .
             Afterwards
             he
             puts
             on
             the
             Habit
             of
             a
             Ploughman
             ,
             and
             with
             two
             Oxen
             with
             guilded
             Horns
             ,
             and
             a
             Plough
             varnish'd
             with
             Vermillion
             and
             Streaks
             of
             Gold
             ,
             he
             sets
             himself
             to
             plough
             a
             little
             piece
             of
             Ground
             that
             lies
             within
             the
             Enclosure
             of
             the
             Temple
             .
             While
             he
             is
             busie
             at
             his
             Labour
             ,
             the
             Queen
             with
             her
             Ladies
             in
             another
             part
             dress
             him
             a
             poor
             and
             homely
             Dinner
             ,
             which
             she
             brings
             him
             ,
             and
             which
             they
             eat
             together
             .
             The
             ancient
             Chineses
             instituted
             this
             Ceremony
             ,
             to
             the
             End
             their
             Kings
             might
             remember
             ,
             that
             their
             Revenues
             came
             from
             the
             Labour
             and
             Heat
             of
             the
             Peoples
             Brows
             ;
             and
             therefore
             ought
             to
             be
             employ'd
             in
             necessary
             Expences
             and
             for
             the
             good
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             not
             in
             useless
             Buildings
             ,
             exorbitant
             Sports
             and
             Pleasures
             ,
             or
             superfluous
             Riot
             .
          
           
             To
             the
             North
             of
             these
             two
             Temples
             ,
             stand
             three
             more
             distant
             ,
             two
             Chinese
             Furlongs
             from
             the
             Gates
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Walls
             on
             the
             North
             ,
             East
             and
             West
             sides
             ,
             and
             which
             are
             altogether
             like
             the
             two
             former
             .
             That
             on
             the
             North
             side
             is
             call'd
             
               Pe
               tien
               tan
            
             ,
             or
             the
             North
             Temple
             of
             Heaven
             .
             Here
             the
             King
             sacrifices
             at
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Summer
             Solstice
             :
             and
             at
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Vernal
             Equinox
             he
             sacrifices
             in
             the
             Eastern
             Temple
             ,
             call'd
             
               Ge
               tam
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Temple
             of
             the
             Sun
             ;
             and
             to
             the
             Autumnal
             Equinox
             in
             the
             Western
             Temple
             ,
             which
             is
             call'd
             
               Yue
               tam
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Temple
             of
             the
             Moon
             .
             But
             before
             the
             performance
             of
             these
             Sacrifices
             ,
             the
             King
             commands
             a
             Fast
             for
             three
             Days
             to
             be
             observ'd
             in
             
               Pe
               kim
            
             ,
             during
             which
             time
             they
             are
             forbid
             to
             eat
             either
             
             Flesh
             or
             Fish
             :
             Nor
             are
             the
             Tribunals
             ,
             especially
             the
             Criminal
             to
             doe
             any
             business
             :
             Which
             somewhat
             resembles
             our
             Fast
             of
             Ember-weeks
             .
             I
             ask'd
             a
             learned
             Man
             one
             day
             what
             benefit
             they
             hop'd
             to
             obtain
             by
             these
             Fasts
             and
             Sacrifices
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             durst
             affirm
             that
             their
             King
             nor
             Queen
             ever
             sacrific'd
             publickly
             to
             Idols
             ,
             since
             the
             Heaven
             ,
             the
             Earth
             ,
             the
             Sun
             and
             Moon
             were
             all
             inanimate
             Bodies
             ,
             that
             no
             way
             merited
             Divine
             Honours
             and
             Sacrifices
             ,
             which
             belong'd
             onely
             to
             God
             by
             whom
             they
             were
             created
             .
             To
             which
             he
             reply'd
             that
             the
             word
             Heaven
             had
             two
             significations
             By
             the
             first
             was
             meant
             the
             material
             Heaven
             call'd
             
               Yeu
               him
               chi
               tien
            
             ,
             which
             is
             that
             which
             we
             see
             ,
             and
             of
             which
             we
             feel
             the
             effects
             ,
             as
             we
             do
             also
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             Moon
             and
             Stars
             :
             but
             the
             second
             signification
             intended
             the
             immaterial
             Heaven
             ,
             call'd
             
               Yeu
               vu
               him
               chi
               tien
            
             ,
             which
             has
             no
             shape
             or
             figure
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             nothing
             but
             the
             Creatour
             and
             Principle
             of
             all
             things
             .
             This
             is
             the
             Heaven
             ,
             added
             he
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             Ancient
             Chineses
             address'd
             their
             Sacrifices
             and
             their
             Fasts
             ,
             to
             appease
             his
             wrath
             ,
             and
             return
             him
             thanks
             for
             the
             Benefits
             which
             continually
             they
             receive
             from
             him
             all
             the
             four
             Seasons
             of
             the
             year
             .
             But
             afterwards
             as
             men
             are
             naturally
             blockish
             and
             carnal
             minded
             ,
             they
             forgot
             the
             true
             Lord
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             and
             minded
             onely
             the
             material
             visible
             Heaven
             :
             Nevertheless
             ,
             said
             he
             ,
             when
             the
             King
             sacrific'd
             in
             the
             Temples
             of
             Heav'n
             ,
             or
             Earth
             ,
             the
             Sun
             or
             Moon
             ,
             whose
             Names
             were
             onely
             us'd
             to
             distinguish
             the
             Sacrifices
             and
             the
             Seasons
             ,
             he
             did
             not
             sacrifice
             to
             those
             Creatures
             as
             the
             People
             imagin'd
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             spiritual
             Heaven
             .
          
           
             The
             sixth
             Temple
             ,
             standing
             in
             the
             old
             City
             ,
             is
             call'd
             
               Ti
               vam
               miao
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Temple
             of
             all
             the
             past
             Kings
             .
             This
             is
             a
             large
             and
             magnificent
             Palace
             ,
             
             with
             many
             Apartments
             ,
             Portals
             ,
             Courts
             ,
             and
             Halls
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             last
             is
             as
             fair
             ,
             as
             spacious
             ,
             and
             as
             well
             adorn'd
             as
             those
             of
             the
             King's
             Palace
             .
             There
             you
             behold
             on
             rich
             Thrones
             ,
             the
             Statues
             of
             all
             the
             Kings
             of
             China
             ,
             good
             and
             bad
             ,
             for
             four
             thousand
             five
             hunder'd
             twenty
             five
             years
             together
             ,
             from
             the
             first
             King
             nam'd
             
               To
               hi
            
             ,
             to
             the
             last
             call'd
             
               Xum
               chi
            
             the
             Father
             of
             the
             present
             Prince
             .
             This
             Temple
             stands
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             one
             of
             the
             fairest
             Streets
             of
             the
             City
             .
             Which
             Street
             is
             fill'd
             up
             in
             two
             places
             by
             two
             Triumphal
             Arches
             with
             three
             Gates
             ,
             high
             rais'd
             ,
             majestick
             and
             worthy
             to
             be
             admir'd
             .
             All
             People
             that
             pass
             thorough
             this
             Street
             ,
             of
             what
             quality
             so
             ever
             ,
             alight
             and
             walk
             a
             foot
             when
             they
             come
             to
             these
             Arches
             ,
             till
             they
             are
             past
             the
             Front
             of
             the
             Temple
             .
             Here
             the
             King
             performs
             his
             Annual
             Ceremonies
             to
             his
             Predecessours
             once
             a
             year
             .
             But
             the
             Ceremonies
             which
             are
             observ'd
             both
             in
             this
             and
             all
             other
             Solemnities
             are
             so
             numerous
             ,
             and
             of
             such
             various
             and
             different
             Sorts
             ,
             that
             we
             should
             never
             make
             an
             end
             ,
             should
             we
             go
             about
             to
             give
             a
             full
             accompt
             of
             them
             all
             .
             But
             the
             Reader
             may
             make
             an
             easie
             judgment
             of
             their
             Splendour
             ,
             by
             what
             we
             have
             related
             ▪
          
           
             The
             seventh
             is
             call'd
             
               Chim
               hoam
               miao
            
             ;
             or
             the
             Temple
             of
             the
             Spirit
             that
             guards
             the
             Walls
             .
             It
             stands
             within
             the
             City
             near
             the
             Walls
             ,
             on
             the
             West
             side
             .
             The
             King
             never
             sacrifices
             in
             this
             Temple
             ,
             but
             the
             Mandarins
             onely
             .
             Nevertheless
             this
             Ceremony
             is
             accompted
             among
             the
             Royal
             Sacrifices
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             that
             the
             King
             is
             at
             the
             Charge
             ,
             as
             because
             that
             he
             is
             the
             Man
             who
             names
             the
             Persons
             that
             are
             to
             sacrifice
             in
             this
             place
             .
             Moreover
             all
             the
             Cities
             of
             the
             Empire
             have
             such
             a
             Temple
             as
             this
             ,
             and
             seated
             as
             this
             is
             ;
             consecrated
             to
             the
             Spirit
             that
             guards
             the
             Walls
             ,
             as
             if
             we
             should
             say
             ,
             dedicated
             
             to
             the
             Tutelary
             Angel
             of
             every
             City
             .
             Thus
             much
             for
             the
             Emperour's
             Temples
             .
             We
             are
             now
             to
             give
             an
             accompt
             of
             the
             Pomp
             and
             Magnificence
             of
             his
             Retinue
             ,
             when
             he
             stirs
             out
             of
             his
             Palace
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             two
             occasions
             that
             carry
             the
             Emperour
             abroad
             out
             of
             his
             Palace
             .
             The
             first
             ,
             when
             he
             goes
             a
             hunting
             ,
             or
             to
             take
             the
             Air
             ;
             which
             is
             lookt
             upon
             onely
             as
             a
             private
             Action
             ;
             and
             then
             he
             is
             attended
             onely
             by
             his
             Guard
             ,
             the
             Princes
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             and
             other
             great
             Lords
             ,
             who
             ride
             before
             ,
             behind
             or
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             Degrees
             and
             Pre-eminency
             .
             This
             train
             does
             not
             consist
             of
             above
             two
             thousand
             Men
             ,
             all
             on
             Horse-back
             ,
             sumptuous
             in
             their
             Habits
             ,
             their
             Armes
             ,
             and
             the
             trappings
             of
             their
             Horses
             ;
             at
             what
             time
             you
             behold
             nothing
             but
             Silks
             ,
             and
             Embroideries
             of
             Gold
             and
             Silver
             glittering
             with
             precious
             Stones
             .
             Certainly
             ,
             if
             a
             Man
             do
             but
             consider
             it
             well
             ,
             I
             question
             whether
             any
             Prince
             upon
             the
             Earth
             ever
             appear'd
             in
             his
             common
             Cavalcades
             with
             a
             Pomp
             parallel
             to
             what
             we
             see
             at
             this
             Court
             ,
             when
             the
             Emperour
             comes
             forth
             out
             of
             his
             Palace
             onely
             to
             divertise
             himself
             in
             his
             Parks
             and
             Gardens
             ,
             or
             onely
             to
             hunt
             for
             his
             pleasure
             in
             the
             Countrey
             .
          
           
             The
             scond
             occasion
             is
             when
             the
             Emperour
             comes
             forth
             to
             perform
             any
             Sacrifice
             ,
             or
             any
             publick
             Duty
             :
             and
             then
             his
             Procession
             is
             after
             this
             Manner
             .
          
           
             
               First
               ,
               appear
               twenty
               four
               Men
               with
               large
               Drums
               ,
               in
               two
               rows
               or
               files
               of
               twelve
               a
               piece
               ;
               as
               do
               all
               the
               rest
               that
               follow
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               twenty
               four
               Trumpets
               ,
               twelve
               in
               a
               row
               .
               These
               Instruments
               are
               made
               of
               a
               certain
               Wood
               call'd
               
                 V
                 tum
                 xu
              
               ,
               highly
               valu'd
               by
               the
               Chineses
               ,
               who
               say
               ,
               that
               when
               the
               Bird
               of
               the
               Sun
               is
               
               desirous
               of
               repose
               ,
               she
               pearches
               upon
               the
               Boughs
               of
               this
               Tree
               .
               These
               Trumpets
               are
               about
               three
               foot
               in
               length
               ,
               and
               almost
               a
               hands
               breadth
               diameter
               at
               the
               Mouth
               .
               They
               are
               shap'd
               like
               a
               Bell
               ,
               adorn'd
               with
               Circles
               of
               Gold
               ,
               and
               pleasingly
               accord
               with
               the
               noise
               and
               beat
               of
               the
               Drums
               .
            
             
               Thirdly
               ,
               twenty
               four
               men
               with
               long
               staves
               ,
               twelve
               in
               a
               row
               :
               which
               staves
               are
               seven
               or
               eight
               foot
               in
               length
               varnish'd
               with
               red
               ,
               and
               from
               one
               end
               to
               the
               other
               adorn'd
               with
               guilt
               Foliage
               .
            
             
               Fourthly
               ,
               a
               hunder'd
               Halbardeers
               ,
               fifty
               in
               a
               row
               ,
               with
               the
               heads
               of
               their
               Halbards
               in
               the
               form
               of
               a
               Crescent
               .
            
             
               Fifthly
               ,
               a
               hunder'd
               Men
               carrying
               Maces
               of
               guilt
               Wood
               ,
               fifty
               in
               a
               row
               ,
               with
               staves
               as
               long
               as
               a
               lance
               .
            
             
               Sixthly
               ,
               two
               Royal
               Poles
               call'd
               Cassi
               ,
               varnish'd
               with
               red
               intermix'd
               with
               Flowers
               and
               gilt
               at
               both
               Ends.
               
            
             
               Seventhly
               ,
               four
               hunder'd
               large
               Lanthorns
               richly
               adorn'd
               ,
               and
               all
               curious
               pieces
               of
               Workmanship
               .
            
             
               Eighthly
               ,
               four
               hunder'd
               Flambeaux
               ,
               delicately
               trimm'd
               and
               carv'd
               ,
               and
               made
               of
               a
               certain
               sort
               of
               Wood
               ,
               that
               gives
               a
               great
               light
               that
               lasts
               long
               .
            
             
               Ninthly
               ,
               two
               hunder'd
               Lances
               ,
               adorn'd
               below
               the
               steel
               heads
               ,
               some
               with
               silk
               Fringes
               ;
               others
               with
               the
               tails
               of
               Panthers
               ,
               Wolves
               ,
               Foxes
               ,
               or
               other
               Beasts
               .
            
             
               Tenthly
               ,
               twenty
               four
               Banners
               ,
               upon
               which
               are
               painted
               the
               twenty
               four
               Signs
               of
               the
               Zodiack
               ,
               which
               the
               Chineses
               divide
               into
               twenty
               four
               parts
               ,
               whereas
               we
               divide
               it
               into
               no
               more
               than
               twelve
               .
            
             
               '
               Leventhly
               ,
               fifty
               six
               Banners
               ,
               wherein
               are
               painted
               fifty
               six
               Constellations
               ,
               under
               which
               the
               Chineses
               comprehend
               the
               whole
               Number
               of
               the
               Stars
               .
            
             
               
               Twelfthly
               ,
               two
               large
               Flabels
               ,
               supported
               by
               long
               Poles
               ,
               gilded
               and
               painted
               with
               various
               Figures
               of
               the
               Sun
               ,
               Dragons
               ,
               Birds
               ,
               and
               other
               Creatures
               .
            
             
               Thirteenthly
               ,
               twenty
               four
               Umbrello's
               richly
               adorn'd
               ,
               and
               they
               that
               carry
               them
               ,
               two
               and
               two
               together
               ,
               as
               I
               said
               before
               .
            
             
               Fourteenthly
               ,
               eight
               Sorts
               of
               Utensils
               ,
               for
               the
               King
               's
               ordinary
               Use
               and
               Occasions
               ,
               as
               a
               Table
               Cloath
               ,
               a
               Bason
               of
               Gold
               ,
               and
               an
               Eure
               of
               the
               same
               Metal
               ,
               with
               several
               other
               things
               of
               the
               same
               Nature
               .
            
             
               Fifteenthly
               ,
               ten
               Horses
               as
               white
               as
               Snow
               ,
               with
               their
               Saddles
               and
               Bridles
               adorn'd
               with
               Gold
               ,
               Pearls
               ,
               and
               precious
               Stones
               .
            
             
               Sixteenthly
               ,
               a
               hunder'd
               Lanciers
               ,
               and
               on
               both
               sides
               within
               side
               of
               them
               ,
               the
               Pages
               of
               the
               Emperour's
               Chamber
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               middle
               between
               them
               the
               Emperour
               himself
               with
               an
               Air
               majestick
               and
               grave
               ,
               mounted
               upon
               a
               lovely
               Steed
               ,
               and
               cover'd
               with
               a
               Parasol
               or
               Umbrello
               ,
               beautifull
               and
               costly
               beyond
               the
               belief
               of
               those
               that
               never
               beheld
               it
               ;
               and
               so
               large
               that
               it
               shades
               both
               the
               Emperour
               and
               his
               Horse
               .
            
             
               Seventeenthly
               ,
               the
               Princes
               of
               the
               Blood
               ,
               the
               petty
               Kings
               ,
               and
               a
               great
               Number
               of
               the
               most
               Eminent
               Lords
               ,
               magnificently
               clad
               and
               rang'd
               on
               both
               sides
               ,
               in
               ranks
               and
               files
               according
               to
               their
               Dignities
               .
            
             
               Eighteenthly
               ,
               five
               hunder'd
               young
               Gentlemen
               belonging
               to
               the
               Emperour
               ,
               richly
               habited
               .
            
             
               Nineteenthly
               ,
               a
               thousand
               Men
               ,
               five
               hunder'd
               in
               a
               Body
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Hiao
                 guei
              
               ,
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               Footmen
               ,
               clad
               in
               red
               Robes
               ,
               embroider'd
               with
               Flowers
               and
               Stars
               of
               Gold
               and
               Silver
               ,
               with
               long
               streight
               plumes
               of
               feathers
               in
               their
               Bonnets
               .
            
             
               
               Twentiethly
               ,
               an
               open
               Chair
               or
               Litter
               carry'd
               by
               thirty
               six
               Men
               ;
               attended
               by
               another
               close
               Litter
               ,
               as
               big
               as
               a
               Chamber
               ,
               and
               carry'd
               by
               a
               hunder'd
               and
               twenty
               Men.
               
            
             
               One
               and
               twentiethly
               ,
               two
               vast
               Chariots
               each
               of
               them
               drawn
               by
               two
               Elephants
               .
            
             
               Two
               and
               twentiethly
               ,
               a
               large
               Chariot
               drawn
               by
               eight
               Horses
               ,
               and
               another
               lesser
               ,
               by
               four
               .
               All
               these
               Chariots
               are
               sumptuously
               lin'd
               ,
               the
               Elephants
               and
               Horses
               richly
               caparison'd
               ,
               and
               the
               Governours
               and
               Coachmen
               in
               costly
               Liveries
               ,
               and
               every
               Litter
               and
               every
               Chariot
               is
               attended
               by
               a
               Captain
               with
               fifty
               Souldiers
               .
            
             
               Three
               and
               twentiethly
               ,
               two
               thousand
               learned
               Mandarins
               ,
               a
               thousand
               in
               a
               Body
               .
            
             
               Four
               and
               twentiethly
               ,
               two
               thousand
               Military
               Mandarins
               ,
               both
               the
               one
               and
               the
               other
               gorgeously
               apparell'd
               in
               their
               Ceremony-Robes
               :
               and
               these
               last
               bring
               up
               the
               Emperour's
               Train
               ,
               and
               conclude
               the
               Pomp.
               
            
          
           
             
               Notes
               upon
               the
               twenty
               first
               Chapter
               .
            
             
               
                 And
                 upon
                 the
                 Emperour
                 's
                 seven
                 Temples
                 standing
                 in
                 the
                 two
                 Cities
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Z.
                 Five
                 Temples
                 seated
                 in
                 the
                 new
                 City
                 .
                 The
                 first
                 call'd
                 
                   Tien
                   tam
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 Heaven
                 ;
                 standing
                 as
                 our
                 Authour
                 says
                 ,
                 two
                 Chinese
                 furlongs
                 from
                 the
                 Principal
                 Gate
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 to
                 say
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 South
                 Gate
                 ,
                 a
                 little
                 toward
                 the
                 East
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 encompass'd
                 with
                 a
                 round
                 Wall
                 ,
                 three
                 furlongs
                 in
                 Circumference
                 :
                 The
                 rest
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 seen
                 in
                 the
                 Plane
                 .
                 There
                 the
                 King
                 sacrifices
                 to
                 the
                 Winter
                 Solstice
                 .
                 The
                 four
                 other
                 Temples
                 are
                 built
                 altogether
                 like
                 the
                 first
                 .
                 The
                 second
                 call'd
                 
                   Ti
                   tam
                
                 ,
                 or
                 Temple
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 ,
                 is
                 seated
                 toward
                 the
                 West
                 at
                 a
                 distance
                 from
                 the
                 Principal
                 Gate
                 proportionable
                 to
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 .
                 Here
                 the
                 Emperour
                 sacrifices
                 to
                 
                 the
                 God
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 upon
                 the
                 day
                 of
                 his
                 Coronation
                 .
                 The
                 third
                 is
                 about
                 two
                 Furlongs
                 distant
                 from
                 the
                 North
                 Gate
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 call'd
                 
                   Pe
                   tien
                   tam
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 North
                 Temple
                 of
                 Heaven
                 .
                 Here
                 the
                 King
                 sacrifices
                 to
                 the
                 Summer
                 Solstice
                 .
                 The
                 fourth
                 is
                 about
                 two
                 Furlongs
                 distant
                 from
                 the
                 East
                 Gate
                 ;
                 and
                 is
                 call'd
                 
                   Ge
                   tam
                
                 or
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 King
                 sacrifices
                 to
                 the
                 Vernal
                 Equinox
                 .
                 The
                 fifth
                 is
                 two
                 Furlongs
                 distant
                 from
                 the
                 Western
                 Gate
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 call'd
                 
                   Yue
                   tam
                
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 the
                 Moon
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 King
                 sacrifices
                 to
                 the
                 Autumnal
                 Equinox
                 .
                 If
                 we
                 must
                 allow
                 sixteen
                 Furlongs
                 in
                 length
                 to
                 the
                 new
                 City
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Opinion
                 of
                 F.
                 Adam
                 ,
                 these
                 two
                 Temples
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 plac'd
                 farther
                 ,
                 to
                 keep
                 the
                 same
                 distance
                 of
                 two
                 Furlongs
                 from
                 the
                 East
                 and
                 West
                 Gates
                 .
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     Two
                     Temples
                     standing
                     on
                     the
                     old
                     City
                     .
                     The
                     first
                     call'd
                     
                       Ti
                       vam
                       miao
                    
                     ,
                     or
                     the
                     Temple
                     of
                     all
                     the
                     deceas'd
                     Kings
                     :
                     This
                     is
                     a
                     spacious
                     and
                     magnificent
                     Palace
                     ,
                     in
                     the
                     chief
                     great
                     Room
                     of
                     State
                     of
                     which
                     ,
                     are
                     to
                     be
                     seen
                     the
                     Statues
                     of
                     all
                     the
                     Kings
                     of
                     China
                     ,
                     good
                     and
                     bad
                     ,
                     from
                     King
                     
                       Fo
                       hi
                    
                     seated
                     all
                     upon
                     Thrones
                     .
                     Our
                     Authour
                     mentioning
                     the
                     Situation
                     of
                     it
                     ,
                     says
                     no
                     more
                     ,
                     than
                     onely
                     this
                     ,
                     that
                     it
                     stands
                     in
                     one
                     of
                     the
                     fairest
                     Streets
                     of
                     the
                     City
                     between
                     two
                     Triumphal
                     Arches
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     mark'd
                     down
                     in
                     the
                     Plane
                     .
                     So
                     that
                     this
                     Temple
                     must
                     not
                     be
                     plac'd
                     to
                     the
                     South
                     of
                     the
                     Palace
                     ;
                     in
                     regard
                     that
                     space
                     is
                     taken
                     up
                     with
                     the
                     outermost
                     Courts
                     and
                     first
                     Apartments
                     of
                     the
                     Palace
                     .
                     Nor
                     did
                     I
                     think
                     it
                     proper
                     to
                     place
                     it
                     toward
                     the
                     West
                     ,
                     in
                     regard
                     the
                     following
                     Temple
                     is
                     plac'd
                     there
                     ;
                     nor
                     toward
                     the
                     North
                     which
                     among
                     the
                     Chineses
                     is
                     the
                     meanest
                     place
                     in
                     the
                     City
                     ,
                     and
                     therefore
                     I
                     have
                     plac'd
                     it
                     toward
                     the
                     East
                     ,
                     in
                     the
                     Street
                     which
                     is
                     next
                     the
                     East
                     Gate
                     of
                     the
                     Palace
                     .
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     The
                     second
                     Temple
                     is
                     call'd
                     
                       Chim
                       hoam
                       miao
                    
                     ,
                     or
                     the
                     Temple
                     of
                     the
                     Spirit
                     that
                     guards
                     the
                     Walls
                     .
                     I
                     have
                     plac'd
                     it
                     according
                     to
                     our
                     Authour
                     within
                     side
                     ,
                     
                     and
                     near
                     to
                     the
                     Walls
                     .
                     Here
                     the
                     King
                     never
                     sacrifices
                     himself
                     ,
                     but
                     onely
                     the
                     Mandarins
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   A
                   A.
                
                 The
                 six
                 supream
                 Tribunals
                 of
                 the
                 Learned
                 Mandarins
                 ,
                 describ'd
                 by
                 our
                 Authour
                 in
                 Chap.
                 13.
                 
                 He
                 says
                 they
                 are
                 plac'd
                 according
                 to
                 their
                 Order
                 ,
                 near
                 the
                 King's
                 Palace
                 upon
                 the
                 East
                 side
                 ,
                 so
                 many
                 spacious
                 square
                 Edifices
                 which
                 have
                 every
                 one
                 three
                 Divisions
                 of
                 Apartments
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 I
                 have
                 very
                 near
                 represented
                 them
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 manner
                 ,
                 placing
                 the
                 first
                 near
                 the
                 inner
                 Apartments
                 of
                 the
                 Palace
                 where
                 the
                 Emperour
                 himself
                 resides
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 first
                 ,
                 
                   Li
                   pu
                
                 ,
                 has
                 the
                 Oversight
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Mandarins
                 of
                 the
                 Empire
                 .
                 Four
                 inferiour
                 Tribunals
                 belong
                 to
                 this
                 ,
                 which
                 assemble
                 together
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 Palace
                 ,
                 in
                 two
                 Rows
                 of
                 Apartments
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 seen
                 upon
                 the
                 right
                 and
                 left
                 hand
                 ;
                 the
                 middlemost
                 being
                 appointed
                 for
                 the
                 supream
                 Tribunal
                 .
                 And
                 it
                 is
                 the
                 same
                 thing
                 with
                 the
                 other
                 five
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 middlemost
                 is
                 still
                 the
                 supream
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 inferiour
                 on
                 each
                 side
                 .
              
               
                 
                   A
                   A
                   2.
                
                 
                 The
                 second
                 ,
                 
                   Hu
                   pu
                
                 ,
                 has
                 the
                 Oversight
                 of
                 the
                 Exchequer
                 ,
                 with
                 fourteen
                 inferiour
                 Tribunals
                 ;
                 one
                 for
                 every
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 Provinces
                 of
                 China
                 ;
                 that
                 of
                 
                   Pe
                   kim
                
                 having
                 no
                 particular
                 Tribunal
                 ,
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 Dignity
                 of
                 that
                 Province
                 where
                 the
                 Court
                 resides
                 .
              
               
                 
                   A
                   A
                   3.
                
                 
                 The
                 third
                 Tribunal
                 ,
                 
                   Li
                   pu
                
                 ,
                 that
                 has
                 the
                 ordering
                 of
                 Ceremonies
                 ,
                 Sciences
                 ,
                 Arts
                 ,
                 &c.
                 with
                 four
                 inferiour
                 Tribunals
                 .
              
               
                 
                   A
                   A
                   4.
                
                 
                 The
                 fourth
                 Tribunal
                 ,
                 
                   Pim
                   pu
                
                 ,
                 that
                 has
                 the
                 Care
                 of
                 Warlike
                 Arms
                 and
                 Provisions
                 ,
                 with
                 four
                 Tribunals
                 under
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 
                   A
                   A
                   5.
                
                 
                 The
                 fifth
                 Tribunal
                 ,
                 
                   Him
                   pu
                
                 ,
                 that
                 judges
                 without
                 appeal
                 of
                 all
                 Crimes
                 committed
                 in
                 the
                 Empire
                 ,
                 with
                 fourteen
                 Tribunals
                 inferiour
                 to
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 
                   A
                   A
                   6.
                
                 
                 The
                 sixth
                 Tribunal
                 ,
                 which
                 has
                 the
                 Oversight
                 of
                 the
                 publick
                 Works
                 ;
                 with
                 four
                 Tribunals
                 inferiour
                 to
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 
                   
                     B
                     B.
                  
                   The
                   five
                   Tribunals
                   of
                   the
                   Military
                   Mandarins
                   ,
                   
                   seated
                   to
                   the
                   West
                   of
                   the
                   Royal
                   Palace
                   .
                   Our
                   Authour
                   speaks
                   nothing
                   particularly
                   either
                   of
                   their
                   situation
                   or
                   fabrick
                   :
                   But
                   't
                   is
                   very
                   probable
                   ,
                   they
                   are
                   all
                   built
                   like
                   the
                   former
                   .
                   The
                   first
                   which
                   we
                   may
                   suppose
                   to
                   stand
                   most
                   to
                   the
                   North
                   ,
                   
                     Heu
                     fu
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   Reregard
                   .
                   The
                   second
                   
                     Tso
                     fu
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   left
                   Wing
                   ;
                   the
                   third
                   
                     Yeu
                     fu
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   right
                   Wing
                   .
                   The
                   fourth
                   
                     Chum
                     fu
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   main
                   Battle
                   .
                   The
                   fifth
                   
                     Cien
                     fu
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   Vanguard
                   .
                
                 
                   Neither
                   does
                   F.
                   Magaillans
                   speak
                   any
                   thing
                   of
                   the
                   situation
                   of
                   many
                   other
                   Tribunals
                   in
                   
                     Pe
                     kim
                  
                   ,
                   of
                   which
                   he
                   gives
                   the
                   Description
                   .
                   But
                   most
                   certainly
                   they
                   stand
                   in
                   those
                   places
                   ,
                   where
                   he
                   says
                   in
                   general
                   ,
                   that
                   there
                   are
                   Palaces
                   and
                   Tribunals
                   in
                   such
                   Streets
                   ,
                   as
                   in
                   the
                   Street
                   of
                   Perpetual
                   Repose
                   ,
                   and
                   in
                   other
                   parts
                   mark'd
                   down
                   in
                   the
                   Plane
                   .
                
                 
                   We
                   have
                   nothing
                   to
                   observe
                   upon
                   the
                   Emperour's
                   Pomp
                   ,
                   when
                   he
                   stirs
                   abroad
                   out
                   of
                   his
                   Palace
                   ,
                   but
                   onely
                   this
                   that
                   the
                   Description
                   of
                   Father
                   Adam
                   ,
                   is
                   much
                   after
                   the
                   same
                   Manner
                   .
                
              
            
          
        
         
           THE
           END
           .
        
      
       
         
           An
           Aridgment
           of
           the
           Life
           and
           Death
           of
           F.
           
             Gabriel
             Magaillans
          
           ,
           of
           the
           Society
           of
           Jesus
           ,
           Missionary
           into
           China
           ,
           written
           by
           F.
           
             Lewis
             Buglio
          
           ,
           his
           inseparable
           Companion
           for
           six
           and
           thirty
           Years
           ;
           and
           sent
           from
           
             Pe
             Kim
          
           in
           the
           Year
           1677.
           
        
         
           FATHER
           
             Gabriel
             de
             Magaillans
          
           ,
           a
           Native
           of
           Portugal
           ,
           was
           born
           in
           the
           year
           1609.
           
           He
           spent
           his
           first
           years
           in
           the
           House
           of
           one
           of
           his
           Uncles
           who
           was
           a
           Canon
           ,
           and
           who
           took
           care
           to
           educate
           him
           in
           Piety
           and
           the
           fear
           of
           God.
           Afterwards
           
           he
           studied
           in
           the
           Schools
           of
           the
           Society
           of
           Iesus
           ,
           in
           the
           famous
           University
           of
           Conimbre
           ;
           where
           mov'd
           by
           the
           good
           example
           of
           those
           Fathers
           ,
           he
           resolv'd
           to
           forsake
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           was
           receiv'd
           into
           the
           Society
           at
           seventeen
           years
           of
           age
           .
           Being
           as
           yet
           but
           a
           Noviciate
           ,
           he
           begg'd
           leave
           that
           he
           might
           be
           sent
           to
           the
           Missions
           of
           the
           
             East
             Indies
          
           ,
           which
           would
           not
           be
           granted
           him
           however
           ,
           till
           he
           had
           compleated
           his
           Studies
           of
           Rhetorick
           and
           Philosophy
           .
           He
           arriv'd
           at
           Goa
           in
           the
           year
           1634
           ,
           where
           he
           was
           immediately
           employ'd
           to
           teach
           Rhetorick
           to
           the
           young
           Religious
           of
           the
           House
           .
           Two
           years
           afterwards
           he
           earnestly
           desir'd
           that
           he
           might
           be
           sent
           to
           the
           Mission
           of
           Iapan
           ,
           which
           was
           with
           great
           reluctancy
           at
           length
           consented
           to
           ,
           by
           his
           Superiours
           ,
           in
           regard
           of
           the
           great
           progress
           which
           their
           Scholars
           made
           under
           such
           a
           Master
           .
           When
           he
           arriv'd
           at
           Macao
           ,
           the
           Father
           Visiter
           order'd
           him
           to
           teach
           Philosophy
           ,
           to
           which
           he
           thereupon
           began
           to
           settle
           himself
           :
           but
           at
           the
           same
           time
           there
           came
           a
           Christian
           Mandarin
           ,
           who
           discharg'd
           him
           from
           that
           employment
           .
           And
           indeed
           the
           Father
           Visiter
           was
           willing
           to
           lay
           hold
           of
           the
           opportunity
           of
           such
           an
           Officer
           ,
           by
           his
           means
           to
           get
           the
           liberty
           of
           sending
           a
           person
           of
           merit
           into
           China
           ,
           to
           assist
           the
           Missionaries
           there
           .
           For
           at
           that
           time
           there
           was
           no
           person
           in
           the
           whole
           Colledge
           who
           was
           proper
           for
           that
           Countrey
           .
           Which
           was
           the
           reason
           that
           F.
           Magaillans
           ,
           observing
           so
           favourable
           a
           conjuncture
           ,
           earnestly
           begg'd
           the
           Employment
           ,
           which
           was
           granted
           him
           as
           soon
           .
           Thereupon
           he
           departed
           with
           the
           Mandarin
           ,
           and
           arriv'd
           at
           the
           City
           of
           
             Han
             Cheu
          
           ,
           the
           Metropolis
           of
           the
           Province
           of
           
             Che
             Kiam
          
           ,
           where
           the
           Vice
           Provincial
           then
           resided
           .
           At
           the
           same
           time
           also
           there
           came
           Intelligence
           from
           the
           Province
           of
           
             Su
             chuen
          
           ,
           that
           Father
           
             Lewis
             Buglio
          
           ,
           who
           was
           gone
           to
           lay
           the
           Foundations
           of
           a
           
           Mission
           there
           ,
           was
           fallen
           sick
           and
           wanted
           a
           Companion
           .
           Thereupon
           Father
           Magaillans
           offer'd
           himself
           and
           obtain'd
           leave
           to
           goe
           and
           assist
           him
           ;
           and
           though
           it
           were
           a
           Journey
           of
           above
           four
           months
           from
           
             Ham
             cheu
          
           ,
           to
           the
           Capital
           City
           of
           Suchuen
           ,
           nevertheless
           he
           fortunately
           arriv'd
           there
           ,
           and
           became
           a
           great
           help
           to
           Father
           Buglio
           ;
           and
           then
           it
           was
           that
           he
           apply'd
           himself
           with
           great
           Industry
           to
           the
           study
           of
           the
           Chinese
           Language
           and
           Letters
           ,
           which
           he
           learnt
           with
           an
           extraordinary
           ease
           .
        
         
           Two
           years
           after
           ,
           there
           happen'd
           a
           violent
           Persecution
           against
           the
           Preachers
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           rais'd
           by
           the
           Bonzes
           of
           that
           Province
           ,
           who
           assembling
           together
           in
           great
           numbers
           from
           the
           neighbouring
           Cities
           ,
           accus'd
           the
           Fathers
           of
           Rebellion
           in
           all
           the
           Tribunals
           of
           that
           Metropolis
           .
           The
           chief
           Mandarin
           therefore
           of
           the
           Tribunal
           of
           Crimes
           fearing
           a
           Revolt
           ,
           at
           a
           time
           when
           the
           Kingdom
           was
           turmoil'd
           with
           several
           Insurrections
           ,
           order'd
           that
           the
           Fathers
           should
           be
           well
           drubb'd
           ,
           and
           then
           expell'd
           out
           of
           the
           limits
           of
           the
           Province
           .
           But
           they
           putting
           their
           confidence
           in
           God's
           assistance
           ,
           and
           the
           protection
           of
           the
           Mandarins
           ,
           of
           which
           the
           greatest
           part
           were
           their
           Friends
           ,
           would
           not
           forsake
           their
           Station
           .
           Thereupon
           the
           Bonzes
           hung
           up
           Libels
           every
           day
           in
           the
           principal
           Quarters
           of
           the
           City
           ,
           against
           the
           Fathers
           ;
           as
           also
           against
           the
           Mandarins
           .
           But
           one
           of
           the
           Military
           Mandarins
           ,
           who
           was
           a
           Christian
           ,
           took
           care
           to
           have
           them
           pull'd
           down
           by
           the
           Souldiers
           .
           On
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           the
           Fathers
           writ
           several
           Books
           ,
           wherein
           they
           explain'd
           and
           asserted
           the
           truth
           of
           their
           Faith
           ,
           and
           refell'd
           the
           Impostures
           of
           their
           Adversaries
           .
           This
           Persecution
           lasted
           three
           months
           ;
           but
           then
           the
           Bonzes
           ,
           whether
           it
           were
           that
           they
           were
           afraid
           of
           the
           Mandarins
           who
           protected
           the
           Fathers
           ,
           or
           whether
           they
           
           wanted
           money
           to
           maintain
           them
           any
           longer
           in
           the
           Capital
           City
           ,
           retir'd
           home
           one
           after
           another
           ;
           and
           then
           the
           Governour
           of
           the
           City
           ,
           who
           favour'd
           the
           Fathers
           ,
           discharg'd
           the
           Superiour
           of
           the
           Bonzes
           from
           his
           Employment
           ;
           which
           put
           all
           the
           rest
           to
           silence
           ,
           and
           absolutely
           stifl'd
           that
           uproar
           .
        
         
           In
           a
           short
           time
           after
           ,
           they
           were
           expos'd
           to
           a
           Persecution
           much
           more
           formidable
           than
           the
           former
           .
           For
           the
           Rebel
           
             Cham
             hien
             chum
          
           ,
           follow'd
           by
           a
           numerous
           Army
           ,
           and
           filling
           all
           places
           where
           he
           came
           with
           fire
           and
           slaughter
           ,
           advanc'd
           toward
           the
           Capital
           to
           make
           himself
           Master
           of
           the
           place
           ,
           and
           there
           take
           upon
           him
           the
           Title
           of
           Emperour
           of
           China
           ,
           as
           he
           really
           did
           .
           Upon
           this
           ,
           a
           great
           number
           of
           people
           fled
           for
           shelter
           to
           the
           Mountains
           ,
           and
           the
           Fathers
           among
           the
           rest
           ,
           with
           a
           resolution
           to
           expect
           the
           issue
           of
           these
           disorders
           .
           In
           the
           mean
           time
           the
           Rebel
           took
           the
           Capital
           City
           ,
           where
           he
           made
           a
           bloody
           havock
           ;
           and
           three
           months
           after
           understanding
           that
           great
           numbers
           of
           people
           were
           fled
           to
           the
           Mountains
           ,
           and
           among
           the
           rest
           the
           Fathers
           ,
           he
           sent
           several
           Companies
           of
           Souldiers
           who
           brought
           back
           a
           considerable
           part
           of
           the
           people
           ,
           of
           which
           number
           were
           the
           Fathers
           .
           But
           when
           they
           came
           into
           his
           presence
           he
           receiv'd
           them
           with
           extraordinary
           honours
           ,
           and
           promis'd
           them
           that
           as
           soon
           as
           he
           had
           secur'd
           himself
           in
           the
           quiet
           possession
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           he
           would
           erect
           magnificent
           Churches
           in
           honour
           of
           the
           God
           of
           Heaven
           .
           In
           the
           mean
           time
           he
           gave
           them
           a
           magnificent
           House
           ,
           where
           the
           Fathers
           hung
           up
           the
           Picture
           of
           our
           Saviour
           ,
           and
           baptiz'd
           several
           persons
           ,
           and
           among
           the
           rest
           the
           Tyrants
           Father
           in
           law
           .
           And
           indeed
           ,
           during
           the
           three
           years
           that
           he
           usurpt
           the
           Government
           ,
           for
           the
           first
           year
           he
           behav'd
           himself
           with
           much
           Justice
           and
           Liberality
           .
           But
           being
           provok'd
           by
           several
           Insurrections
           in
           several
           
           parts
           ,
           he
           resolv'd
           to
           subdue
           the
           Province
           of
           
             Xen
             si
          
           ,
           the
           Inhabitants
           of
           which
           are
           a
           warlike
           sort
           of
           people
           ,
           and
           before
           his
           departure
           so
           to
           secure
           the
           Province
           of
           Suchuen
           ,
           that
           it
           should
           not
           be
           in
           a
           condition
           to
           revolt
           .
           In
           pursuance
           of
           which
           cruel
           resolution
           ,
           he
           put
           to
           death
           an
           infinite
           number
           of
           people
           by
           all
           manner
           of
           Torments
           .
           Some
           were
           cut
           into
           quarters
           ,
           others
           flead
           alive
           ,
           others
           were
           cut
           in
           pieces
           by
           bits
           ,
           and
           others
           were
           mangl'd
           ,
           but
           not
           suffer'd
           to
           dye
           .
           A
           hundred
           and
           forty
           thousand
           Souldiers
           also
           of
           the
           Province
           of
           Suchuen
           he
           caus'd
           to
           be
           massaker'd
           ,
           so
           that
           the
           Province
           was
           almost
           depopulated
           .
           Thereupon
           the
           Fathers
           observing
           these
           horrid
           Butcheries
           ,
           and
           despairing
           to
           make
           any
           farther
           progress
           under
           the
           Government
           of
           so
           barbarous
           a
           Tyrant
           ,
           presented
           a
           Petition
           to
           him
           ,
           wherein
           they
           desir'd
           leave
           to
           retire
           till
           the
           troubles
           that
           harrass'd
           the
           Kingdom
           were
           appeas'd
           .
           But
           the
           Tyrant
           was
           so
           enrag'd
           at
           this
           Petition
           ,
           that
           about
           two
           hours
           after
           he
           sent
           for
           the
           Domestick
           Servants
           belonging
           to
           the
           Fathers
           ,
           and
           order'd
           them
           to
           be
           flead
           alive
           ;
           accusing
           them
           that
           they
           had
           instill'd
           those
           thoughts
           into
           their
           Masters
           heads
           .
           Presently
           the
           Fathers
           hasten'd
           to
           save
           their
           lives
           ,
           and
           told
           the
           Tyrant
           ,
           which
           was
           no
           more
           than
           the
           truth
           ,
           that
           those
           poor
           people
           had
           not
           the
           least
           knowledge
           of
           their
           design
           .
           However
           after
           some
           discourse
           ,
           the
           Barbarian
           order'd
           the
           Fathers
           to
           be
           lay'd
           hold
           of
           ,
           and
           carry'd
           to
           the
           place
           of
           execution
           and
           there
           to
           be
           cut
           in
           pieces
           .
           Which
           had
           been
           executed
           ,
           if
           his
           Chief
           General
           ,
           who
           was
           his
           adopted
           Son
           ,
           had
           not
           ,
           while
           they
           were
           leading
           to
           the
           place
           of
           torment
           ,
           by
           his
           Arguments
           and
           his
           Intercessions
           obtain'd
           their
           pardon
           .
           Thereupon
           the
           Tyrant
           sent
           away
           with
           all
           speed
           to
           have
           them
           brought
           back
           again
           into
           his
           presence
           ,
           where
           after
           he
           had
           loaded
           them
           with
           ill
           language
           and
           Reproaches
           ,
           
           he
           committed
           them
           to
           the
           custody
           of
           certain
           Souldiers
           ,
           with
           orders
           to
           guard
           them
           day
           and
           night
           .
           In
           which
           condition
           they
           remain'd
           for
           a
           whole
           month
           ,
           at
           the
           end
           of
           which
           he
           sent
           for
           them
           one
           morning
           into
           his
           presence
           .
           They
           found
           him
           then
           very
           bloodily
           employ'd
           in
           giving
           Orders
           for
           the
           putting
           to
           death
           a
           great
           number
           of
           persons
           ,
           and
           verily
           believ'd
           that
           their
           last
           hour
           had
           been
           at
           hand
           .
           But
           at
           the
           same
           time
           it
           was
           the
           will
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           the
           Scouts
           came
           in
           one
           after
           another
           ,
           bringing
           intelligence
           that
           some
           of
           the
           avant
           Couriers
           of
           the
           Tartars
           Vanguard
           were
           at
           hand
           .
           But
           the
           Tyrant
           ,
           not
           giving
           credit
           to
           their
           Intelligence
           ,
           would
           needs
           mount
           without
           his
           Arms
           ,
           and
           attended
           onely
           by
           some
           of
           his
           most
           faithfull
           Friends
           ,
           rode
           forth
           to
           make
           a
           farther
           discovery
           of
           the
           Enemy
           himself
           ,
           at
           what
           time
           being
           forc'd
           to
           a
           Skirmish
           ,
           he
           was
           at
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Fight
           shot
           through
           the
           Heart
           with
           an
           Arrow
           .
           Thus
           the
           Fathers
           finding
           themselves
           at
           liberty
           by
           the
           death
           of
           the
           Tyrant
           ,
           resolv'd
           to
           retire
           to
           their
           House
           .
           But
           by
           the
           way
           they
           met
           a
           Troop
           of
           Tartars
           that
           shot
           several
           Arrows
           at
           them
           ,
           insomuch
           that
           F.
           Magaillans
           was
           shot
           quite
           through
           the
           Arm
           ,
           and
           F.
           Buglio
           into
           the
           Thigh
           ,
           where
           the
           head
           of
           the
           Arrow
           stuck
           very
           deep
           in
           the
           Flesh
           :
           so
           that
           although
           F.
           Magaillans
           made
           use
           of
           his
           Teeth
           to
           pull
           it
           out
           he
           could
           not
           .
           Till
           looking
           about
           him
           in
           that
           extremity
           ,
           he
           spy'd
           at
           last
           a
           pair
           of
           Pincers
           lying
           in
           a
           blind
           place
           to
           which
           they
           had
           retir'd
           for
           shelter
           ,
           by
           the
           help
           of
           which
           he
           drew
           the
           Arrow
           out
           of
           the
           wound
           ,
           not
           without
           great
           loss
           of
           blood
           .
        
         
           The
           same
           Evening
           they
           were
           presented
           to
           the
           Prince
           who
           commanded
           the
           Army
           ,
           who
           being
           inform'd
           what
           they
           were
           ,
           entertain'd
           them
           with
           an
           extraordinary
           civility
           ,
           and
           order'd
           two
           Lords
           to
           take
           care
           to
           furnish
           them
           with
           all
           things
           necessary
           ▪
           
           However
           ,
           The
           Fathers
           underwent
           great
           hardships
           ,
           for
           above
           a
           year
           together
           that
           they
           follow'd
           the
           Army
           ,
           till
           they
           came
           to
           
             Pe
             Kim
          
           ,
           more
           especially
           for
           want
           of
           Victuals
           ,
           of
           which
           there
           was
           great
           scarcity
           in
           the
           Army
           for
           some
           time
           :
           so
           that
           F.
           Magaillans
           was
           constrain'd
           for
           three
           months
           to
           live
           upon
           a
           small
           quantity
           of
           Rice
           onely
           boil'd
           in
           fair
           water
           .
           But
           upon
           their
           arrival
           at
           Court
           ,
           the
           Tribunal
           of
           Ceremonies
           ,
           which
           takes
           care
           of
           all
           Strangers
           ,
           caus'd
           them
           to
           be
           lodg'd
           in
           the
           Royal
           Hostery
           ,
           with
           a
           large
           allowance
           of
           Provision
           for
           their
           entertainment
           .
           There
           they
           resided
           two
           years
           ,
           which
           being
           expir'd
           ,
           a
           Person
           of
           Quality
           was
           commanded
           to
           take
           care
           of
           their
           Entertainment
           .
           During
           all
           which
           time
           they
           employ'd
           themselves
           in
           preaching
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           and
           baptiz'd
           several
           persons
           .
           They
           continu'd
           seven
           years
           at
           Court
           ,
           before
           they
           were
           known
           to
           the
           King.
           But
           then
           the
           Prince
           understanding
           who
           they
           were
           ,
           was
           extreamly
           joyfull
           at
           their
           preservation
           ,
           and
           gave
           them
           a
           House
           ,
           a
           Church
           ,
           Revenues
           ,
           and
           Money
           to
           buy
           them
           Vestments
           .
           Thereupon
           F.
           Magaillans
           ,
           in
           testimony
           of
           his
           Gratitude
           to
           the
           King
           for
           so
           many
           Favours
           ,
           employ'd
           himself
           day
           and
           night
           in
           making
           several
           curious
           and
           ingenious
           pieces
           of
           Art
           to
           please
           him
           ;
           yet
           not
           so
           ,
           but
           that
           he
           was
           no
           less
           diligent
           in
           the
           Conversion
           of
           Souls
           ,
           as
           well
           by
           preaching
           as
           by
           writing
           .
           He
           also
           wrote
           several
           Relations
           ,
           and
           translated
           the
           Book
           of
           St.
           
             Thomas
             Aquinas
          
           concerning
           the
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           Body
           ,
           which
           was
           receiv'd
           with
           great
           applause
           .
        
         
           After
           a
           Reign
           of
           eight
           years
           the
           King
           dy'd
           ;
           and
           because
           his
           Son
           ,
           who
           is
           the
           present
           Emperour
           ,
           was
           very
           young
           ,
           he
           appointed
           four
           Protectors
           to
           govern
           the
           Empire
           during
           the
           Son's
           minority
           .
           Now
           at
           the
           beginning
           of
           their
           Regency
           ,
           some
           Footmen
           belonging
           to
           a
           Christian
           Mandarin
           ,
           
           to
           revenge
           themselves
           upon
           their
           Master
           ,
           against
           whom
           they
           were
           highly
           incens'd
           ,
           falsly
           accus'd
           F.
           Magaillans
           to
           have
           given
           Presents
           in
           favour
           of
           that
           Mandarin
           ,
           who
           was
           put
           out
           of
           his
           Employment
           ;
           which
           is
           a
           great
           Crime
           in
           China
           .
           Thereupon
           the
           Father
           was
           carry'd
           before
           the
           Criminal
           Tribunal
           ,
           where
           he
           was
           put
           to
           the
           Rack
           two
           times
           ,
           by
           the
           squeezing
           of
           both
           his
           Feet
           in
           a
           Press
           ,
           which
           though
           it
           were
           a
           hideous
           Pain
           ,
           yet
           the
           Father
           endur'd
           it
           with
           a
           constant
           Resolution
           ,
           nor
           would
           be
           brought
           to
           confess
           a
           thing
           of
           which
           he
           was
           not
           guilty
           .
           Nevertheless
           the
           Judges
           contrary
           to
           all
           Justice
           ,
           condemn'd
           him
           to
           be
           strangl'd
           ,
           and
           sent
           their
           sentence
           ,
           according
           to
           custom
           ,
           to
           the
           four
           Regents
           .
           But
           they
           ,
           as
           well
           for
           that
           he
           was
           a
           stranger
           ,
           as
           because
           they
           were
           satisfi'd
           of
           his
           Innocency
           ,
           acquitted
           him
           ,
           and
           restor'd
           him
           to
           his
           Liberty
           .
        
         
           Three
           years
           after
           ,
           in
           the
           Persecution
           which
           all
           the
           Fathers
           suffer'd
           for
           Religion
           ,
           he
           was
           apprehended
           with
           others
           ,
           and
           loaden
           for
           four
           whole
           months
           together
           with
           nine
           Chains
           ,
           three
           about
           his
           Neck
           ,
           three
           about
           his
           Arms
           ,
           and
           three
           about
           his
           Lggs
           :
           He
           was
           also
           condemn'd
           to
           have
           forty
           Lashes
           ,
           and
           to
           be
           banish'd
           out
           of
           Tartary
           as
           long
           as
           he
           liv'd
           .
           But
           a
           great
           Earth
           Quake
           that
           happen'd
           at
           that
           time
           at
           Pekim
           ,
           deliver'd
           both
           him
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           his
           Companions
           .
           Afterwards
           for
           several
           years
           together
           ,
           he
           made
           it
           his
           business
           as
           well
           to
           perform
           the
           actual
           Functions
           of
           the
           Mission
           ,
           as
           to
           pleasure
           the
           Reigning
           Prince
           ,
           who
           had
           taken
           possession
           of
           the
           Government
           ,
           with
           his
           ingenious
           Inventions
           :
           labouring
           like
           an
           ordinary
           Mechanick
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           that
           the
           favour
           of
           the
           Prince
           might
           be
           a
           means
           to
           maintain
           and
           augment
           the
           Faith
           ;
           which
           was
           the
           Fathers
           onely
           aim
           .
        
         
           Three
           years
           before
           his
           Death
           ,
           the
           wounds
           
           which
           he
           receiv'd
           in
           his
           Feet
           ,
           when
           he
           was
           put
           upon
           the
           Rack
           broke
           out
           again
           ,
           which
           he
           endur'd
           with
           an
           extraordinary
           Patience
           .
           Two
           Months
           before
           he
           dy'd
           ,
           these
           pains
           were
           accompany'd
           with
           defluxions
           that
           stopt
           his
           Respiration
           ;
           so
           that
           he
           was
           constrain'd
           to
           sleep
           sitting
           up
           in
           a
           Chair
           for
           fear
           of
           being
           choak'd
           ;
           which
           was
           the
           reason
           that
           many
           times
           he
           never
           shut
           his
           Eyes
           for
           several
           nights
           together
           .
           He
           wanted
           for
           nothing
           during
           his
           Sickness
           ,
           but
           no
           Remedies
           could
           surmount
           the
           force
           of
           the
           Distemper
           ,
           which
           dayly
           encreas'd
           ;
           so
           that
           upon
           the
           sixth
           of
           May
           ,
           in
           the
           year
           1677
           ,
           between
           six
           and
           seven
           a
           Clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           as
           he
           sat
           in
           his
           Chair
           ,
           and
           the
           Distemper
           urging
           still
           with
           more
           violence
           ,
           he
           sent
           for
           the
           Fathers
           who
           gave
           him
           the
           Viaticum
           and
           extream
           Unction
           ,
           after
           he
           had
           some
           days
           before
           made
           a
           general
           Confession
           .
           And
           so
           about
           eight
           a
           Clock
           he
           placidly
           surrender'd
           his
           Soul
           to
           his
           Creatour
           ,
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           all
           the
           Fathers
           ,
           the
           Servants
           ,
           the
           Neighbours
           ,
           and
           several
           Christian
           Mandarins
           ,
           who
           could
           not
           forbear
           weeping
           at
           his
           departure
           .
           The
           next
           day
           F.
           Verbiest
           ,
           now
           Vice
           Provincial
           of
           this
           Mission
           ,
           went
           betimes
           in
           the
           Morning
           to
           give
           notice
           to
           the
           King
           of
           the
           Death
           of
           the
           Father
           .
           The
           Prince
           bid
           him
           return
           home
           ,
           whither
           he
           in
           a
           very
           short
           time
           would
           send
           him
           his
           own
           Orders
           what
           to
           do
           .
           Accordingly
           within
           half
           an
           hour
           ,
           he
           sent
           three
           Persons
           the
           most
           considerable
           in
           his
           Court
           ,
           with
           an
           Elogy
           in
           honour
           of
           the
           Father
           ,
           two
           hundred
           Taels
           ,
           or
           about
           fourscore
           pounds
           ,
           and
           ten
           great
           pieces
           of
           Damask
           for
           his
           Shroud
           ,
           with
           command
           to
           perform
           all
           the
           customary
           Ceremonies
           before
           the
           Corps
           of
           the
           Deceas'd
           ,
           and
           to
           bewail
           him
           after
           the
           usual
           manner
           ,
           which
           the
           two
           Messengers
           did
           ,
           shedding
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Tears
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           the
           whole
           Assembly
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Elegy
           which
           the
           King
           gave
           the
           Father
           was
           in
           these
           words
           .
        
         
           
             I
             understand
             that
             
               Nghan
               uen
               su
            
             (
             for
             by
             that
             Name
             they
             call'd
             the
             Father
             in
             China
             )
             is
             dead
             of
             a
             Distemper
             .
             I
             make
             him
             this
             writing
             ,
             in
             consideration
             that
             while
             my
             Father
             liv'd
             who
             was
             the
             first
             Emperour
             of
             our
             Family
             ,
             this
             same
             Holy
             Person
             by
             his
             ingenious
             Pieces
             of
             Art
             delighted
             the
             genious
             and
             humour
             of
             my
             Father
             ;
             and
             for
             that
             after
             they
             were
             invented
             he
             took
             care
             to
             preserve
             them
             with
             an
             extraordinary
             Industry
             ,
             and
             beyond
             his
             Strength
             .
             But
             more
             especially
             for
             that
             he
             came
             from
             a
             Region
             so
             far
             distant
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             Sea
             to
             abide
             several
             years
             in
             China
             .
             He
             was
             a
             Man
             truly
             sincere
             and
             of
             a
             solid
             Wit
             ,
             as
             he
             made
             appear
             during
             the
             whole
             Course
             of
             his
             Life
             .
             I
             was
             in
             good
             hopes
             his
             Disease
             might
             have
             been
             overcome
             by
             Remedies
             .
             But
             contrary
             to
             my
             Expectation
             he
             is
             remov'd
             for
             ever
             from
             us
             ,
             to
             the
             great
             sorrow
             and
             sensible
             grief
             of
             my
             heart
             .
             For
             that
             reason
             ,
             I
             make
             him
             a
             Present
             of
             two
             hunder'd
             Crowns
             ,
             and
             ten
             large
             Pieces
             of
             Damask
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             my
             design
             is
             never
             to
             forget
             our
             Vassals
             that
             repair
             to
             us
             from
             Places
             so
             remote
             .
          
        
         
           Below
           was
           written
           ,
           
             the
             Emperour's
             words
          
           .
        
         
           The
           sixtteenth
           year
           of
           the
           Emperour
           
             Cam
             hi
          
           ,
           the
           sixth
           day
           of
           the
           fourth
           Moon
           ,
           which
           answers
           to
           the
           seventh
           of
           May
           ,
           in
           the
           year
           of
           Christ
           1677.
           the
           next
           day
           after
           the
           Father's
           death
           .
        
         
           This
           Elogy
           was
           printed
           ,
           as
           also
           an
           abstract
           of
           the
           Life
           of
           the
           Father
           ,
           and
           giv'n
           about
           to
           all
           the
           Princes
           ,
           great
           Lords
           ,
           Mandarins
           ,
           to
           our
           Friends
           ,
           and
           all
           that
           were
           Christians
           .
           Which
           was
           of
           great
           consequence
           and
           mainly
           contributory
           to
           the
           Credit
           and
           Reputation
           of
           our
           sacred
           Law
           ,
           when
           the
           
           World
           should
           understand
           the
           high
           Esteem
           which
           the
           King
           had
           of
           the
           Preachers
           of
           the
           Gospel
           .
        
         
           Two
           days
           after
           ,
           the
           King
           sent
           again
           the
           three
           same
           Persons
           to
           weep
           before
           the
           Corps
           of
           the
           deceas'd
           ,
           because
           he
           had
           order'd
           them
           to
           accompany
           it
           to
           the
           Grave
           :
           which
           was
           an
           extraordinary
           Honour
           .
           However
           the
           Fathers
           had
           not
           as
           yet
           given
           notice
           to
           their
           Friends
           of
           his
           death
           ,
           for
           fear
           of
           the
           disturbance
           it
           would
           be
           to
           their
           Minds
           :
           and
           yet
           there
           was
           a
           great
           Concourse
           of
           Friends
           and
           Mandarins
           ,
           who
           came
           with
           their
           Presents
           to
           perform
           the
           usual
           Ceremonies
           ;
           while
           others
           sent
           their
           Elogies
           and
           Encomiums
           upon
           the
           Father
           ,
           written
           up
           on
           white
           Satin
           .
        
         
           Some
           days
           before
           he
           was
           buried
           ,
           the
           same
           three
           Persons
           came
           to
           tell
           us
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           the
           King's
           pleasure
           ,
           his
           Funeral
           should
           be
           very
           magnificent
           .
           So
           that
           the
           Fathers
           as
           well
           to
           conform
           themselves
           to
           the
           Will
           of
           the
           Prince
           ,
           as
           to
           shew
           their
           high
           value
           of
           the
           Elogy
           which
           the
           Prince
           had
           sent
           them
           ,
           made
           more
           than
           ordinary
           preparations
           .
        
         
           Upon
           the
           day
           of
           the
           Funeral
           ,
           the
           same
           three
           Persons
           came
           in
           very
           good
           time
           to
           accompany
           the
           Corps
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           King's
           command
           .
           There
           came
           also
           a
           great
           Number
           of
           Mandarins
           ,
           Acquaintance
           and
           other
           Persons
           to
           pay
           the
           same
           respects
           .
           And
           as
           for
           the
           Ceremony
           it
           was
           perform'd
           after
           the
           following
           Manner
           .
        
         
           Ten
           Souldiers
           march'd
           before
           with
           their
           Armes
           to
           clear
           the
           Streets
           ;
           they
           were
           follow'd
           by
           ten
           Ushers
           of
           several
           Tribunals
           ,
           that
           carry'd
           Tablets
           ,
           wherein
           was
           written
           an
           Order
           of
           the
           Mandarins
           ,
           to
           give
           way
           ,
           under
           pain
           of
           punishment
           .
           Twenty
           four
           Trumpeters
           and
           Hoeboys
           ,
           with
           several
           Sorts
           of
           other
           Instruments
           follow'd
           them
           ,
           and
           preceded
           the
           King's
           Elogy
           that
           was
           written
           upon
           yellow
           Satin
           ,
           and
           carry'd
           in
           a
           Litter
           ,
           surrounded
           with
           four
           and
           
           twenty
           Pieces
           of
           Satin
           of
           various
           Colours
           .
           This
           Elogy
           was
           attended
           by
           several
           Christian
           Eunuchs
           ,
           of
           which
           there
           were
           some
           that
           waited
           upon
           the
           King's
           Person
           .
           Afterwards
           appear'd
           three
           other
           Litters
           adorn'd
           with
           several
           Pieces
           of
           Silk
           .
           In
           the
           first
           was
           carry'd
           the
           Cross
           ,
           in
           the
           second
           the
           Picture
           of
           the
           Holy
           Virgin
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           third
           the
           Picture
           of
           St.
           Michael
           .
           These
           Litters
           observ'd
           a
           convenient
           distance
           one
           from
           the
           other
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           spaces
           between
           there
           went
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Christians
           ,
           of
           which
           some
           carry'd
           Lantherns
           ,
           some
           Banners
           ,
           and
           others
           Censors
           ,
           others
           carry'd
           wax
           Tapers
           ,
           sweet
           Odours
           and
           other
           things
           .
           After
           that
           in
           another
           Banner
           was
           carry'd
           the
           Portraiture
           of
           the
           Father
           surrounded
           with
           Pieces
           of
           Silk
           ,
           which
           the
           King
           had
           order'd
           to
           be
           drawn
           to
           the
           Life
           three
           years
           before
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           Pictures
           of
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Fathers
           ,
           by
           a
           famous
           Painter
           of
           the
           Palace
           .
           This
           Picture
           was
           attended
           by
           a
           great
           Multitude
           of
           Christians
           ,
           among
           which
           there
           were
           above
           threescore
           in
           Mourning
           .
           The
           Fathers
           came
           last
           and
           just
           before
           the
           stately
           Coffin
           ;
           which
           was
           ●…t
           into
           an
           Herse
           varnish'd
           over
           with
           God
           and
           Vermillion
           ,
           under
           a
           Canopy
           of
           a
           rich
           Piece
           of
           red
           Velvet
           ,
           which
           was
           environ'd
           with
           certain
           Pieces
           of
           white
           and
           blew
           Damask
           ,
           and
           was
           the
           King's
           gift
           .
           The
           Coffin
           was
           carry'd
           by
           seventy
           Men
           ,
           who
           had
           every
           one
           a
           Mourning
           Bonnet
           upon
           their
           Heads
           ,
           and
           the
           number
           of
           those
           that
           follow'd
           the
           Coffin
           was
           so
           great
           ,
           that
           the
           Front
           was
           distant
           from
           the
           Rear
           above
           a
           Mile
           .
           When
           they
           came
           to
           the
           place
           of
           Enterrment
           ,
           the
           Responses
           were
           Sung
           ,
           with
           other
           usual
           Prayers
           and
           Ceremonies
           of
           the
           Christians
           .
           To
           which
           purpose
           eight
           Christian
           Mandarins
           in
           Surplices
           assisted
           the
           Father
           that
           perform'd
           the
           Office.
           The
           Christians
           also
           Sung
           with
           great
           
           Devotion
           ,
           the
           Letanies
           of
           the
           Holy
           Virgin
           ,
           and
           then
           the
           Body
           was
           put
           into
           a
           Sepulchre
           made
           of
           Brick
           .
           So
           soon
           as
           the
           Ceremony
           was
           over
           ,
           you
           might
           hear
           the
           Lamentations
           and
           Moans
           of
           the
           whole
           Assembly
           accompany'd
           with
           Tears
           that
           shew'd
           the
           reality
           of
           their
           grief
           ;
           the
           three
           Persons
           also
           sent
           from
           the
           Emperour
           perform'd
           their
           parts
           .
           And
           three
           days
           after
           they
           return'd
           by
           the
           King's
           Order
           ,
           and
           pay'd
           the
           same
           Funeral
           respects
           as
           upon
           the
           burial
           day
           .
        
         
           Never
           was
           seen
           in
           this
           Court
           a
           Funeral
           so
           Magnificent
           ,
           whether
           you
           consider
           the
           Multitude
           of
           those
           that
           were
           at
           it
           ,
           their
           Modesty
           ,
           their
           Tears
           ,
           and
           their
           sincere
           sorrow
           ,
           or
           the
           Honours
           done
           to
           the
           Party
           Deceas'd
           by
           the
           King
           ,
           and
           the
           Elogy
           which
           he
           gave
           him
           ,
           contrary
           to
           the
           usual
           custom
           .
           So
           highly
           had
           this
           good
           Father
           merited
           all
           a
           long
           the
           marks
           of
           esteem
           that
           were
           bestow'd
           upon
           him
           ,
           by
           the
           Modesty
           which
           he
           shew'd
           in
           all
           his
           Actions
           ,
           by
           his
           extream
           charity
           for
           all
           the
           World
           ,
           and
           particularly
           toward
           the
           Poor
           ,
           by
           his
           Affability
           to
           all
           sorts
           of
           Persons
           ,
           by
           the
           hardship
           which
           he
           suffer'd
           for
           the
           love
           of
           God
           ●…d
           his
           Zeal
           for
           the
           Advancement
           of
           the
           Christian
           Religion
           ,
           though
           at
           the
           expence
           of
           his
           Life
           and
           Reputation
           .
        
         
           The
           King
           understanding
           by
           the
           Persons
           whom
           he
           had
           deputed
           to
           be
           present
           at
           the
           Ceremony
           ,
           the
           Solemnity
           of
           the
           Funeral
           ,
           and
           with
           what
           Pomp
           and
           Decency
           it
           had
           been
           perform'd
           ,
           was
           extreamly
           satisfi'd
           ;
           so
           that
           when
           the
           Fathers
           went
           to
           return
           their
           thanks
           to
           his
           Majesty
           ,
           he
           made
           them
           approach
           very
           near
           his
           Person
           ,
           entertain'd
           them
           with
           a
           particular
           sweetness
           and
           favour
           ,
           and
           chear'd
           them
           for
           their
           loss
           ,
           with
           expressions
           full
           of
           goodness
           and
           sincerity
           .
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
         
      
    
     
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A51176-e4310
           
             
               Letter
               of
            
             Peter
             Ferdinand
             de
             Verbiest
             .
          
           
             Pag.
             221.
             
          
           
             Pag.
             250.
             
          
           
             Pag.
             265.
             
          
           
             Pag.
             265.
             
          
           
             Pag.
             265.
             
          
           
             Pag.
             267.